JP6168575B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine), and a gaming machine characterized by display means. The chance-up meter CMT starts displaying during the display of the super reach effect (swordsman reach), and notifies the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 during the display of the super reach effect. Yes. When the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in CI3 is displayed. Before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, a CUM preparing display MTY for notifying that the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be displayed. [Selection] Figure 222

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of time to reach effect display is being performed,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display represents from the start to the end of the certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position,
The period display is a display including a display for notifying the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first position display”),
The cursor display moves from the second position to the first position, thereby representing from the start of the certain period to the first timing,
Wherein the first timing, in a display of the reach demonstration display, Ru der that timing the display of the first effect display is likely to be initiated,
And wherein a call.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button production in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 2nd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production in which the operation means is involved. It is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure which shows the example which performs a meter production | presentation and makes a big hit in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 64 in steps. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing stepwise modification examples of effects by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. 64. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank improvement effect which tells whether a meter display changes stepwise. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 68 in stages. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 69 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG.70 (41) in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which a big hit is decided by the said fluctuation | variation when a meter display will be in a full tank state. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a holding frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which several items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which the meter display of a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example which is digested without being stocked even if an item appears when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one side disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 80 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a display is started in the state which accumulated the meter display of the increase type to the middle. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production | presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the numerical type meter display shown in FIG. 83 according to operation of an operation means in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the meter effect demonstrated so far in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate | occur | produces during the display of a meter display in steps. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of an example of error display ER1 shown in FIG. 86. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 3rd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special drawing related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of lottery processing per special drawing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special power release process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination operation process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation | movement data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric role remaining sphere detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 117 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 in steps. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition figure of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 123. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 125. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation using the fluctuation | variation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM, and the change effect of a fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 136, a modification, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect that a reservation frame becomes temporarily invisible. It is a figure which shows an example of the production where a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the production icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. which are shown in FIG. An effect example in which the navigation character YM is accompanied by the effect of the button hold icon is shown. It is a figure which shows an example with the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example with another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a normal decoration pattern is entwined with a navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example by which a change notice display is displayed on standby. It is a figure which shows the example of production using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure chest which has been used as an icon of a change notice notice so far appears as a hold icon. An effect example in which a meter effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An effect example in which a telop effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the other effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.115 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the further another effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.115 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided below the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the production selected by the player. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 157. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection demonstrated using FIG. 159 is performed. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 160. FIG. 116 shows an example of effects produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 162. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 164. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine set to the setting in auto button mode. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 166. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 166. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship with the display of the ball removal notification notified by generation | occurrence | production of a dish full tank error, and the other display of each brightness | luminance adjustment window. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which a multiple types of error display is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the error alerting | reporting by the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows various notice icons and various notice indications It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a hold icon and a fluctuation icon. It is the figure which showed in stepwise the example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, the notice display is displayed and the display mode of the fluctuation icon is changed by using the stock notice icon. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example shown in FIG. 180 in steps, and a figure which shows the modification of the production example. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification-6th modification of the production example of FIG. 180 (a1)-FIG. 181 (a40). It is a figure which shows the 7th modification-10th modification of the production example of FIG. 180 (a1)-FIG. 181 (a40). It is a figure which shows the other modification of the production example of FIG. 180 (a1)-FIG. 181 (a40). A step-by-step example is shown in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of stock notice icons stored, and the display mode of the change icon is changed. FIG. FIG. 186 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the effect example illustrated in FIG. 185 and an effect example of the mini-game A for the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice in steps. It is a figure which shows to the middle of the 1st modification-3rd modification of the production example of FIG. 186 (U1)-FIG. 187 (U38). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the production example of FIG. 186 (U1)-FIG. 187 (U38), and the middle of the 4th modification-a 5th modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which the continuation of the 5th modification of the example of an effect of FIG. 186 (U1)-FIG. 187 (U38) and the notice icon YI stocked is promoted in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example which the notice icon YI stocked is promoted, and the modification of the production example. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which the notice display YH of a button appears from the notice icon YI in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the execution frequency of a button effect is stocked in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the frequency | count of execution of a button production is stocked, and another production example. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which notice display YH emitted from notice icon YI understands before discharge. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which uses one notice icon currently stocked in multiple steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the same kind of notice display YH is discharge | released from the same notice icon YI currently stocked, and another production example. It is a figure which shows the example in which the some notice icon YI was stocked in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which the notice icon YI is used in multiple times in the state which the notice display YH discharge | released from the notice icon YI understands before discharge | release. FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating an effect example and the like continued from FIG. 199. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the some notice icon YI is stocked. It is a figure which shows the example of the roulette effect for notice icon stock in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example using the roulette RLT for notice icon stock, and the example of an effect accompanied by button operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which the display mode of the notice icon YI of "button" changes according to button operation, and another example. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that continues from FIG. 204 and an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of forms. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by the structure by which the display means is arrange | positioned under the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG.179 (b) in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of an effect shown in FIG. FIG. 201 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example of production shown in FIG. 208. FIG. 201 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example of production shown in FIG. 208. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of a holding icon is performed, and another example of production. It is a figure which shows the example etc. in which the display itself of an icon change notice is promoted while failing in the middle of promotion over a plurality of variations. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect, and another effect example. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown by FIG. 179 (b), and another example of effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain kind of holding | maintenance icon and icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other example of production using the icon of the bomber system as a display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of various notice regarding the display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L and another display means. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like. It is a figure which shows roughly seven examples of production in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during chance up meter preparation in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during chance up meter preparation in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of display MTY during chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that the chance up meter production is performed during super reach production. It is a figure which shows a mode that another pattern of the chance up meter production performed during a super reach production is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of the change production | presentation of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that a chance up meter ranks up during production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the chance up meter ranked up. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display MTY in preparation for the chance up meter which has been ranked up is displayed in the display mode that has been ranked up even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which announces that a display in preparation for a chance up meter is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other example of production which announces that a display in preparation for a chance up meter is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a chance up notice is performed in the check point which is not shown in a chance up meter. It is the figure shown in steps about another example of production using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about another pattern of the effect using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about the modification of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. It is a figure shown about another production | presentation pattern of the production | presentation using the chance up meter shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed in step by step an example of the prefetch notice using a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of the chance up meter performed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production | presentation by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another production pattern of production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the chance up meter performed in a probability change state. It is a figure explaining the example which performs the advance notice of a chance up meter by display apparatuses other than a decoration symbol display apparatus. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the carrying machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 257 is a diagram for describing an effect in which an operation unit is involved in the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIG. 257. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production in which the operation means is involved. It is a figure showing the movable accessory etc. which are arrange | positioned in front side rather than the 1st decorative design display apparatus 208L. It is the figure which put together the preconditions etc. in the production using the notification area HZ. It is the figure which showed roughly the typical example of the effect using the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure showing a plurality of examples where chance button 136 is operated or not in the state where a number is displayed in notification area HZ. It is a figure which shows the example in which the search reach which is a normal reach is performed. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which continue from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example developed into super reach 1 (Okkake Reach). It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button 136 was operated before the reach production was started. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button 136 was operated during reach production. It is a figure which shows the example by which the chance button 136 was operated before the reach production was started, and also the chance button 136 was operated during the reach production. It is a figure which shows the example which develops to super reach 1 and makes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example continuing from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example developed into super reach 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which develops to the super reach 2 after operating the chance button 136 at the early stage where the symbol fluctuation display is started. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which continue from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example by which the chance button 136 was operated during the search reach production before developing to super reach 2. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the strong pattern cut-in image in a normal button effect, and also wins through the final judge effect accompanying operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which "large board behavior" is displayed on the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which continue from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which a pseudo-continuous production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example continuing from FIG. FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG. 290. It is a figure which shows the example by which chance button operation was performed by button production. It is a figure which shows the example by which chance button operation was performed before the pseudo | simulation continuous production start. It is a figure which shows the example in which another effect was performed before the effect notified in the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example in which "large board behavior" is displayed on the alerting | reporting area | region HZ when a chance button operation is performed in the re-change in the state of "Pseudo3". FIG. 294 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG. 295. It is a figure which shows the example of the wipe production which may be started after the combination of the decorative pattern of a loser is shake-displayed through the final judge production with operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which both alerting | reporting area development effects and a normal button effect are performed according to one chance button operation. It is a figure which shows the example in case an alerting | reporting area expansion effect and another effect overlap. It is a figure which shows the example when there is a chance button operation during a wipe production. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of long-pressing the chance button 136. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the production | presentation with a button hit and long press is started in the state where the number is displayed on the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example which notifies in advance that the production using the chance button 136 is started again after it seems as if the production using the chance button 136 has ended. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which adjust light quantity and volume. It is a figure which shows the example in which alerting | reporting content other than the alerting content shown to Fig.271 (a) is displayed on the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation period of the chance button 136 is restrict | limited even if the number is displayed on the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows another aspect of the display method of the alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example of various cut-in notices. It is the figure shown about other various production examples. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated striking effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the description display applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. 328 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect depression of various buttons constituting the production button 136 and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown), and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, other effects random number update processing and the like are performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 sets information on image data (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. The first UI unit 280 can display the variation icon h0 on the left side in a state where it is placed on the pedestal. If the variation icon h0 is displayed, the first UI unit 280 notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. ing. Note that the change icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and symbol variation display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. The fluctuation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design smaller than the first decorative design is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. . Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. A part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of these decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and Senryo box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed as the game progresses. Aspect may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In addition, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. A part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15A1 to 15A2 show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. That is, when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15A1, the mode shown in FIG. 15A2 is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-thousand box feature 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role 224Gd, and the first big board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral feature 224Gd Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Further, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap with the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  In FIG. 15B1, the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15C1 to FIG. 15C4, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body in place of the family crest member 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box actor 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 15C1 shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  FIG. 15C2 shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the lifting arm, and the LED array overlaps the front side of the substantially central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  FIG. 15 (C3) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 15C4 shows a state in which the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, characters “HEAT” are displayed, and a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  15 (E1) to FIG. 15 (E2) show how the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the crest character 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 15 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped because the two-and-a-half box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 15G1, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  15 (I1) to FIG. 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. 15 (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest character 224E. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and is rotated at a constant speed. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  15 (K1) to FIG. 15 (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (K1) to FIG. 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest actor 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state where the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15 (L1 ′), a display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side of the approximate center. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 17 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the general symbol hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A is applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI part 281. Both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are indicated by a broken line, but this broken line is not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), so that it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started by the variation start on the special symbol display device → the fourth symbol starts blinking or goes off → the second decorative symbol variation starts → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (3), the second number-of-holds display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. The update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or after the update display of the second reserved number display is performed, the change of the second decorative symbol is displayed. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 16 (4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. In this movement (decrease) animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 16 (5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the base of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Thereafter, the change display of the first decorative symbol Is started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 16 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), a state is shown in which a navigation character advance notice is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the characters “opportunity” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed is shown. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. Note that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, no display corresponding to this is performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image CI1 is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama does not have to be reduced (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 16 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13). A state in which the person is pressing the effect button 136 is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon display has been deleted. When the production button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the character “I'm intensely heated” is displayed in place of the operation promotion informing image CI2 as shown in FIG. 16 (14). There is a case. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice character display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the effect button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the bag are erased, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 is changed. The icon h0 is left out of the display area and out of the frame, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 16 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. Further, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. Return to position. Note that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd returns to the initial position, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the first large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 17 (26), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. Note that Tonosama's cut-in image C13 may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is continued is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the duel scene animation display to the effect image display as shown in FIG. The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. Also, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed, and an effect display that is lost may be performed. After being performed, a revival effect may be displayed to produce a jackpot effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

  After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 17 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the thousand-carton box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each move toward the initial position. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a jackpot game started with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows a state where the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will be shifted to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a gaming state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is over and the state is shifted to the probability variation state with electric support and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. In FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. The icon is shown with a broken line. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is shown by a broken line for ease of explanation. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to make a right stroke. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In this case, it may be determined that a left-handed strike has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variation display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, the right-hand notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 18 (63) shows a state in which the number of symbol variation display suspensions of special figure 2 is four. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another effect example following FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17, the description has been given of the case where “decoration 7” is in the reach state and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, but here, “decoration 6” is in the reach state. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols having “decorative 6-decorative 6-decorative 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not been determined to stop the symbol determination. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has come.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another effect example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective operation period but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, then the duel scene animation display fades out, and as shown in FIG. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM are displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started by a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. Since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300 at the timing shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the change icon deletion animation is displayed. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, the animation display in which the variation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen. “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown starts when the timer preview display TM1 starts, but after the timer preview display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 20 (3)). You may make it start countdown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to (7), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. As described above, the cut-in display including the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit. Note that the pseudo-continuous symbol may be out of the frame without stopping, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol is out of the frame, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the decorative pattern of the loss is not changed. The combination may be displayed in a stopped state, or a reach effect may be started in a reach state. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice is given to notify that the pseudo-ream starts after the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 20 (3a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 20 (2). In this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 20 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. 20 (10a), FIG. 11 (a), and FIG. 14 (a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 20 (10), FIG. 11 (11), and FIG. 14 (14), respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer notice effect was started. When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), the timer notice display TM1 has a character “notice” for prompting attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. At this time, the right design changes from “decoration 6” to “decoration 7”. The right design may remain unchanged as “decoration 6”. Then, as shown in FIGS. 20 (16a) to (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 20 (3a) to (17a) notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. In addition, the fact that the second quasi-run is forewarned can be said that the start of the first quasi-run is also foreseen. In other words, in this production example, It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-ream is foretold. Note that in the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but another kind of notice or notice of the production of an effect may be given.

  FIG. 20 (7b) shows another effect example following FIG. 20 (6). 20 (7b) to FIG. 20 (11b) correspond to FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. 20 (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8 b-1), instead of the “notice” character display in the timer notice display TM 1, the facial image of the Tono-sama character with a balloon line “Ikuze” added. YMF is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. In this way, attention to the notice may be urged by a display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed, and means for prompting attention to the notice is not limited to display, but may be performed by voice or lamp, or by combining two or more of display, voice, and lamp. You may do it.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the Tono-sama character is deleted, as shown in FIG. 20 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), a cut-in display composed of the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) starts, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. However, there may be a case where an effect corresponding to this is not performed.

  Further, another notice may be performed while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer notice display TM1. In this case, the notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIG. 21 (a1) shows another effect example following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), a display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and points the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 21 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Note that the pre-reading notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, the reach state by “decoration 7” occurs as shown in FIG. 21 (a7). Thus, it can be said that the timer notice effect in this effect example is an effect for notifying that the notice is to be performed.

  FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer notice effect has started. In the timer notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started as “30:00”, that is, the notice effect that 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Is suggested to start. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “29:69”. As described above, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the countdown time. The shorter the jackpot, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be configured not to change regardless of the countdown time.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, and the reach effect of “decoration 7” has started in the first decorative symbol. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays the change icon h0. The frame is framed out at the bottom of the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 21 (b4), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), an image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character and the enemy character are displayed. Animation display of duel scene with swordsman begins. During this time, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with a notice. The word “attention” is displayed in order to prompt attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters “heat” are added to the variation icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the state where the timer notice effect is continuously performed after the transition to the reach state is shown.

  FIG. 21 (b4′-2) shows another effect example following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4′-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37”. Yes. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have elapsed after the countdown by the timer notice effect is started is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer notice effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5 ′), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′). "Attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters “heat” are added to the variation icon h0. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which a notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is performed during the execution of the button effect is shown.

  In the above-described effect example, the example in which the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed as an effect performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect has been described. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to make a notice.

  FIG. 21 (b <b> 6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b <b> 5). When the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′ ″), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed and the notice display is performed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit trust. It is shown that the display has been switched to a cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed in large size on the right side of the display screen, and the characters “Cushion” suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display in which a big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which two or more notice displays are performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown. Note that the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The production examples shown in FIG. 21 (c1) to FIG. 21 (c2) show how the lever production starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the notice of the notice is urged instead of the timer display. The “Attention” characters are displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, the production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production buttons 136 as production operation means.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the lever effect is started is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

  Note that there may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, a button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). A button image 136a in which a character notation (for example, “Intense heat” or “Expectation large”) or a character is added to the default mode, and a button image 136a having a different size from the default mode (for example, a deca button effect or a mini button) The button image 136a (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed more than the default mode) is operated as many times as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times). The number of operations may be different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.). In addition, the response display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a or a number different from the number of button images 136a. etc).

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 21 (d1) to (d4) show a state in which the production movable body operates as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the reach is “decoration 7” in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the change icon h0 is left and is framed downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed downward. Further, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1), a state is shown in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word “attention” for prompting attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d3), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production, it is shown that the first large board acting character Ga to the fourth large board acting machine Gd as the production movable body operate. The thing 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H may be operated, and two or more of the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd, the family crest character 224E, and the thousand car box role 224H are operated. May be.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect in stages.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 22 (1), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), a state in which a timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-ream effect, a chance-up notice, a pre-read notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), an effect is added in which time is added by displaying a count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Note that the count-up animation display need not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is difficult to visually recognize, After the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of adding the timer. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and then a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after completion of the timer addition effect) elapses, the first pseudo-continuous effect Is started, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In this production example, when a timer addition effect is performed and time is added to the timer display, it is easier to win a big hit than when time addition is not performed. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 22 (1b) to (6b) shows a state in which the timer addition effect by the conversation notice is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1b), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 22 (1b), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), a conversation announcement has started, and a conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in which a character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. Note that the timing at which the timer notice effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation notice is started, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 is displayed on which a character display of “I will add 10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM. Note that the timer display countdown in the timer notice effect is continued. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the habit conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased and the conversation preview ends, as shown in FIG. It is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (4b'-1) to (4b'-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing when the conversation notice ends and the timing when the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 22 (1c) to FIG. 22 (6c) shows another example of timer addition effect by conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed, while the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), a conversation announcement has started, and a conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in which a character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. It should be noted that part of the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tosama is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The frog conversation image CI2 on which the above-described operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation effective period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the execution of the conversation notice.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2 c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation effective period was started, and the length corresponding to the elapsed time of the gauge length of the remaining time display meter MT. It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is informed accordingly. The Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is changed to the character display “10 seconds added” indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. In addition, when the production button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period, the time display in the timer display may not be added. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then may be changed to the character display “I will add 10 seconds”. You may make it change into the character display of "it is an addition for 10 seconds", without performing the display which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT lose | disappears. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the character display “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed after the operation effective period elapses. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display in which 10 seconds is added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed may be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The timing when ending and the timing when counting-up animation display ends may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased and the conversation preview is finished, the count-up animation display is finished as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), and the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c) shows a state in which the timer display counts down to “09:85” after 10 seconds have been added to the timer display time.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the operation valid period. After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 '), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not performed during the operation effective period. (With the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 being “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ′), The count result is updated by reflecting the time measurement result (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ')) in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1. The may be resumed.

  Further, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer notice effect is updated in the operation effective period. No display is performed (the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, the internal time measurement result is not reflected, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″), the display of the bag conversation image CI2 indicates the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing when the character display is changed, the internal time measurement result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1. The update display of the countdown may be resumed.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIG. 23 (1d) to FIG. 23 (2d) show another example of the effects of FIG. 22 (1b) to FIG. 22 (2b). In FIG. 23 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is “Attention to timer notice”. Thereby, attention may be paid to the effect (preliminary notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”. That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 in FIG. 23 (1d).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned habit conversation image CI2 is displayed. As described above, after the timer notice effect is noticed, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

  FIG. 23 (1e) shows another example of the effect of FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1e), the timer display is “00” by performing the scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer preview display TM1 instead of the conversation image CI1 of Tono. You may make it pay attention to the production performed as a result of becoming 0:00. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters “attention to the timer notice” loop and scroll from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 23 (1f) to (6f) are other examples of the timer addition production, and the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Show. FIG. 23 (1f) is an example of an effect following FIG. 22 (3), and after the extra time is notified by the navigation character YM balloon, the extra timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1. It shows the frame in from the right end. In this extra timer display TM2, “10:00” indicating the extra time is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. Note that the extra timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap. Further, the extra timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 23 (2f) shows a state in which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 has been completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the navigation character YM balloon may be deleted after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, or after the navigation character YM balloon is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. May be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer advance notice display TM1, but the timer advance notice display TM1 and the added timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap, As shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ″), the timer preview display TM1 You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 23 (2f) to (4f), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00”. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be framed out to the right end of the display screen. . Here, after the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, a frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f ′), the “notice” character display for prompting attention to the notice may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), there is a case where a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol in response to the completion of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1, and the pseudo-ream is performed. This indicates that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo continuous symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed on the added timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. ing. The notification of the added time may be notification of the sum of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time is displayed on the add timer display TM2. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The added timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice that is newly displayed as the timer is added, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the timer is added.

  FIG. 23 (3fa) to FIG. 23 (8fa) show still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows a state. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an example of the production following FIG. 23 (2f). After the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. The state of starting is shown. In other words, in this production example, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but an additional 5 seconds is actually performed. The timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to 10 seconds that is the additional time so that an additional 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIG. 23 (3f) to FIG. 23 (6f). Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the first decorative symbol variable display is started again, and the first pseudo-ream is being performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word “attention” is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa ′), a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as an effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, it may be suggested that a notice effect or a big hit other than the pseudo-ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the addition timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the addition timer display TM2. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change in the display form of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “2” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 2 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the watch warning icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that the time will be added in the timer notice effect. Note that the timer notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed along with the decorative pattern, but various kinds of notification such as temporary stop of the notice icon pattern, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing, such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display by the effect, or a pre-read notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows a state in which the stand on which the navigation character YM stands up and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas where the notice icons are displayed are arranged in the horizontal direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), the watch notice icon MI1 is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and stocked. In the first decorative design, a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right design is shown. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops may be the same as the timing at which the watch warning icon MI1 starts moving, or the warning icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols in which the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. The state of being confirmed and displayed is shown. Note that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, or the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be fixedly displayed, or after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the clock warning icon MI1 may be stored in the warning icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol variation display is performed after one reservation of the special diagram 1 is consumed. Also, the timer notice effect has started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notice display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of the notice icon). Conversely, there may be an effect display for overlapping the timer notice only during execution of an effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), the effect is displayed around the clock notice icon MI1 stored in the notice icon display area 285, and the use of the clock notice icon MI1 is forewarned. . In the timer notice display TM1, “07:31” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the watch notice icon MI1 pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at the approximate center of the display screen. Note that the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, but the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted, and the display of the count-up animation is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation is displayed, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The watch notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the notice icon display area 285 frames out downward.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25A1 to 25A4 show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. Further, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters “added” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. It should be noted that even if the “addition” character display is performed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying the characters “attention” to urge attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2) Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this production example, the production to be displayed as “attention” is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters “still still” indicating that the timer preview effect continues, the display of the timer preview display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after the characters “still still” are displayed on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and “+10” indicating the time to be added to the balloon. “Second” may be displayed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to “10:00”, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being performed and becoming “00:00”. The situation is shown. Note that the timing at which the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25B1 to B5 show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06:99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon with a character “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for the timer notice effect is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display indicates “05:89”. Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is “−3 seconds” indicating the shortened time instead of the character display of “subtraction”. That is, the timer notice effect may be shortened by 3 seconds, and it may be recognized that the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the originally displayed time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed is performed. Note that the shortened animation display need not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the state in which the time in the timer display is reduced (subtracted) by 3 seconds is shown. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of shortening the timer. While the timer shortening effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), a “notice” character is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. A pine symbol CC as a chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol, so that a notice is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and notification that the pseudo-continuation is started may be provided. It should be noted that the timing at which the “notice” character on the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped, or the “notice” character may be displayed. After the start of display, the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the characters “attention” May start displaying. In addition, the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or the timer display in the timer notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and the pseudo-continuous notification is easily performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer notice effect, the above-described pine symbols CC, etc. You may make it easy to make a high-reliability advance notice. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-continuous notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 25 (C1) to FIG. 25 (C2) shows another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06:99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon displaying characters “timer notice level UP” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display countdown being performed, it is notified that a highly reliable notice may be given as a notice to be executed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25D1 to D5 show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon displaying “stop” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the timer display countdown is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the balloon with the word “stop” starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is interrupted, or the balloon with the letter “stop” started to display. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the timer display countdown is interrupted, a balloon with the word “stop” added may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), a state is shown in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains “06:99”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo-ream. Has been. Note that “× 2” is displayed below the second decorative symbol, which indicates that the second variation of the decorative symbol is displayed by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon displaying a “restart” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 25 (D5). As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect ends. Has been.

  As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice displays TM1 may change (increase or decrease) than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, if it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more. When three notice displays TM1 are displayed and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may decrease to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 informing 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10 The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 for notifying 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 for notifying 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may be started to count down at the same timing or at different timings.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208 </ b> S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest character 224 </ b> E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the illustration of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box machine 224H is omitted for easy explanation.

  The effect example shown to FIG. 26 (A1)-the figure (A6) has shown about another example of a timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, the number of hold in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 26A1, a balloon displaying the characters “+10 seconds” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and its upper right corner overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying a count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and the time in the timer display is increased by 10 seconds. It is shown. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), in the sub display device 208S, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Note that, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26 (B1) to (B7) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed is shown. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, the number of hold in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters “+10 seconds”, and is added to the timer display in the timer-notice display TM1. The time to be notified is informed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps the front surface at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The production will add time. Note that at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped. The timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display is started, The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B4) to FIG. 26 (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the extra time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by 1 second. . In this example, while the countdown display of the extra time is being performed, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S reaches “0 seconds”, the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. Updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the timer display time in the timer preview display TM1 is difficult to specify. Also good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), the sub display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display device 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. In the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display countdown is resumed, and the timer display is “14:23” at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7). Thereafter, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S begins to descend. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be resumed after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. In addition, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is resumed, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the timer display countdown may be resumed, or after the timer display countdown is resumed, “Restart” may be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26 (C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, the number of hold in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon with a character of “+10 seconds” is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the display of the sucking animation in which the timer notice display TM1 sucks the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S has started, and the sucking animation is sucked from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how the image is being displayed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a surprised expression.

  FIG. 26 (C3) shows a state in which the sucking animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” sucked in the timer advance notice TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer advance notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to the sub display device 208S. Are displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 starts displaying the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed in the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. The state of heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced is shown. While the sucking animation is being displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (an animation accompanying the sucking animation) by looking at the sucking animation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely sucked into the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer notice effect may be performed only by one decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 27A1 to 27A4 shows another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27A1 to 27A4, description will be made using the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A. However, for the sake of easy explanation, A part of the 1 large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd and the thousand carton box playing 224H will be described without description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27A1, the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is time-added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying a count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd out of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, so that the timer display shows 10 Although it is informing that the addition of the second is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the activated actuating items among the first enormous acting item 224Ga to the fourth enormous acting member 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Moreover, in this production example, the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated only once, thereby notifying that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. Depending on the number of times, the extra time may be different. For example, when the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth big board acting 224Gd are operated three times, an additional 30 seconds is added to the timer display. May be.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to (B4) show an example of a timer addition production using the family crest character 224E. In the example of production shown in FIGS. 27B1 to B4, description will be made using the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A. However, for ease of explanation, the first large board acting The description of 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest actor 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Operate in the direction. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the overlapped crest character 224E. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be displayed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying a count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the crest character 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. For example, when the family crest member 224E operates three times, an additional 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 27C1 to C6 show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27C1 to C6, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, “1” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), “05:00” is displayed as the timer display. In this effect example, when the timer display becomes “05:00”, the countdown is interrupted, and “05:00” The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interrupting the countdown.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters “additional 10 seconds” are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the direction of approaching each other, As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving. After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial positions, the timer display countdown in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. The Note that the timer display countdown is performed in a state where the display of “15:00” is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27 (C4)). May be resumed. If the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, it may be configured to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of winning big hits may be the same, or it may be configured so that it is difficult to win big hits.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28A1 to 28A4 show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28A1 to 28A4, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect provided on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28A1, “05:89” is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and “15:89” is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction close to each other. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but may be interrupted. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The times indicated by the respective timer displays displayed on 208N are added together, and the display of “20:00” indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed at a position corresponding to the display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, they are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 28 (A3) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of “20:00” displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In accordance with the movement of 208N, the displayed coordinates are scrolled while being maintained. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of “20:00” to the right according to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. Scrolls the display of “20:00” to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol. When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28 (A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28A3). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first one. It is likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the likelihood of a big hit may be the same or a big hit may be difficult).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28B1 to 28B3 show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28B1 to 28B3, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A is applied. In this effect example, instead of the crest character 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to (B3), for ease of explanation, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and a part of the thousand box box role 224H. The description is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotational speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I causes all of the first decorative symbols and the change icons h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1. It overlaps the rotation area and is considered difficult to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character “+10” displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display “+10” displayed on the POV display 224I so far is displayed. Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative design display device 208. At this time, the character “+10” may be in a decorated display mode. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “+10” so as to match the display of the characters “+10” on the POV display 224I. Accordingly, there may be a case where display with a sense of unity can be performed between the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, as shown in FIG. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this production example, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to (C5) show other examples of timer addition effects using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28C1 to C5 is the same as that shown in FIG. 28B1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to the position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotated. Note that all of the variation icons h0, the first decorative symbols, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which is more difficult to see than when they are not overlapped.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a certain rotational speed and is rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. The timer displayed on the POV display 224I is “05:17”, and the countdown continues. In addition, at this time, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is notified that the addition of is performed.

  Thereafter, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3), the effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), “15:00” which is the timer display after being added. Is displayed. In this production example, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the robot stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is “15:00”, and then the countdown is resumed. Note that the countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. May be the same, or may not be a big hit.

  In addition, in the timer notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change until the end of the countdown after the change ends. The total time may be counted down. Internally, the time until the change before the change may be counted down, and the change time after the change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after starting the countdown, When counting down 10 seconds and displaying “attention” 5 seconds after the change, count down 5 seconds, etc.). Further, the countdown display may coincide with the time for counting down internally.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. In this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current reach production progress is roughly determined by the position. Is informed. Here, the traveling speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the display of the state developed into the super reach shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. Display may be started at the same time, display may be started when the reach state is reached, display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative pattern changes The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that this Boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by the character display of chance up. We are informing you. It should be noted that the timing at which the Boyi character BOY starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to display the balloon. The balloon character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the Boyi character BOY is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the check point, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or only the relevant check point may be displayed in an enlarged manner. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), the state where the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), the button pattern 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Displayed and button production starts. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player performs a button operation or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this production example, Tono-sama's cut-in image CI3 is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode in which sunglasses are worn and a large motorcycle is ridden while whispering a cigar. It is informing that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be. This ton-like cut-in image CI1 shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, or the effect button 136 is effective. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It is informing that a notice has been made by displaying an image. Note that the display start timing of Tono-sama's cut-in image CI3 may be the same as the display start timing of balloons of the Sabohani character SBH, or the Sabohani character after the Tono-sama's cut-in image CI3 starts to display. An SBH balloon may be displayed, or after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started, the Tono-like cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the Tono-sama character image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after the arrival, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, when it is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation effective period has passed without the operation button 136 being operated, the effect button 136 is also operated when the operation button 136 is not operated. As in the case of operating 136, it may be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or it may not be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or a chance-up notice may be issued. Only a part of the occurrence may be reported (for example, only displaying “UP” without displaying a balloon).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH to notify that the advance notice by lever effect has started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. It should be noted that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon with the letters “chance up lever” added thereto. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, all may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be possible to overlap a part or all of the time up meter, and while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, part or all of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap. The up meter CMT may overlap part or all of the remaining time display meter MT, and during the display of the chance up meter CMT, part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may overlap. Also good.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. Note that the Sabohani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or until the operation valid period elapses.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), a state is shown in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (23), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth The large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H operate, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effects performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated (the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box action part 224H are activated, and the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated is the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box box hardware 224H return to the initial positions, respectively, and the decorative pattern The display device 208 fades out the effect image. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT fades in along with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. . 29 (23) to (24) are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17 (38) to (44), for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25), a state in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed and resumed is shown. Specifically, in the duel scene animation display, the enemy swordsman shows a faint expression and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character “V” indicating that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP and the placard is a big hit is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, thereby notifying that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the SBBO character SBH and the placard) may be displayed.

  In the above-described effect using the chance up meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or may not be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be easier to win the game than when the chance up meter CMT is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when not displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be deleted during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

  In addition, during the performance of the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past), or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

  The effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, an effect that increases the chance may be performed. In addition, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a checkpoint, and an effect may be performed that increases the chances of winning a battle against a teammate character.

  Further, an effect using a chance up meter CMT may be performed as an effect of a chance up during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, rank-up bonus, probability change promotion, promotion to a jackpot game with more games, etc.).

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption / recovery. In addition, the chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, but the check point timing and the history that the chance up effect before power interruption has occurred may be hidden.

  Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 30 (3a) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the first check point CP1, no advance notice is given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the savory character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. Passing through CP1 as it is, neither marking at the first check point CP1 nor display of the characters “UP” is performed. Thereby, at the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has not been completed. In the case where no advance notice is given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′). Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ″), in place of the characters “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, “x” indicating that no chance up notice has been given. May be performed. Further, even if the chance-up notice is not actually made, it is assumed that the chance-up notice is made after the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint. For example, after marking at a checkpoint or non-display of the “UP” character, the marking or the “UP” character may be displayed. The savohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance increase and display the marking or the characters “UP”. In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and then the check point is passed by the Sabohani character SBH, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or “UP” characters are displayed. May be displayed.

  FIG. 30 (17b) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (17) is performed. Note that at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the final point GP, some event may occur. Has been suggested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), not the lever image 136Va, but the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. Passing through CP3 as it is, the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the characters “UP” are not performed. FIG. 30 (19b) shows a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the above-mentioned operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Along with the line “Is it removed?” Is displayed as if the victory or defeat is not decided. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a letter “Development” on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach effect is developed.

  Then, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 30 (23b), as shown in FIG. 30 (24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the savohani character SBH rides on the flying carpet and moves toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (25b) to FIG. 30 (29b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while the Sabohani character SBH is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH on the way to the start point SP. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIG. 30 (28b) to FIG. 30 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the red marking is not added and the character display of “UP” is not performed). It has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Figure 30 (30b), SP Swordsman Reach is the same as the swordsman Reach before development, in that the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the main character. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), the copanda cheering team KPD composed of three copanda characters cheer at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice display indicating that the SP swordsman has reached is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. It can be said that this co-panda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The co-panda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the words “chance up copanda cheering party” is displayed in the vicinity of the savohani character SBH. It is informing that it has been broken. Note that the timing at which the copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying may be the same as the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to display the balloon, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts after the copanda supporter KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the co-panda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the co-panda cheering party KPD is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH has reached the fifth check point CP5 is shown. Then, “Collaboration Special” indicating that the chance-up effect is performed is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of “one blow”. Is done. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by lever effect has been started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed and the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Thereafter, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 30 (23c) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever effects shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to (22), the player has operated the effect lever 136V. It shows how the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing.

  FIG. 30 (5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), a state is shown in which a large number of Boyi characters BOY (a group of boys) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . In other words, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of a bouy group. When this boyfriend character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boyie character BOY appears alone. Also, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY group” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, notifying that the advance notice by the chance up character display has been performed. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed even at the same chance up point, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance up point.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 31 (7e) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until the advance notice of the chance corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is given. In addition, while the effect that the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 29 (9) to FIG. 29). The button effect or the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the text “UP” may be displayed as being performed.

  FIG. 31 (2f) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green bar shape, and the progress of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK instead of the savohani character SBH. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. In addition, the progression speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but may be constant. Further, the display modes of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance advance notice will be performed. The start point and the final point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f) shows a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with a letter “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the advance notice is displayed by displaying the chance up character. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 31 (5f) to (6f), the marker MRK waits at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31 (7f-1) to (7f-2), the marker MRK starts to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is out of frame from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

  FIG. 31 (4g ′) shows an example of the performance in the case where after the performance shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed, even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1, the Boy character BOY does not appear. Has been. Specifically, when the boyi character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g '), the chance up meter CMT is set to the first check point CP1. In place of the question mark display, an “x” is displayed indicating that the advance notice did not appear. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ″), the question mark display at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

  FIG. 31 (2h) is yet another example of production following FIG. 29 (1). The production example shown in FIG. 31 (2h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It is different in point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and the player may have a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice starts.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with a letter “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice by the chance up character display has been performed. At this time, a part of the characters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 31 (6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. Appear.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 32A1 to A11 show how the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which a pseudo-run is generated and the number of times the pseudo-run is generated during execution of the pseudo-run effect. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and a state in which the chase effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 32 (A3) shows a state in which the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is started where the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant. In addition, a chance up meter CMT having the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are respectively reached on the path of movement of the marker MRK, a pseudo sequence may occur. It is also suggested that reaching the final point captures unscrupulous merchants and makes it easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. This production example is configured so that the larger the pseudo-ream occurs, the easier it is to win a big hit. In addition, when the pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. Note that the jackpot may be determined when the number of pseudo-continuations is other than four. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is one and four, the jackpot may be determined. The number of pseudo-runs that is a big hit is less likely to occur than other pseudo-runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), the first decorative symbol is shown to be fluctuating and fluctuating depending on the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character following the unscrupulous merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-ream will be performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. Note that even when the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant, the timing at which “continuation” is displayed is the same as the timing at which the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of “continuation”. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the “continue” character after the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant, After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continue”, the character “continue” may be displayed together with the display in which the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates and fluctuates depending on the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7) shows that the distance between the protagonist and the unscrupulous merchant is decreasing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates and fluctuates depending on the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle that shows how the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the unscrupulous merchant that has been available up until now has become an impatient expression.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays not only the character “Secure” but also the state where the main character, Mr. Tono, has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the pseudo-ream is performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time because the marker MRK has reached the final point. At this time, in the first decorative symbol, the “decoration 7” is reached and the reach effect is started.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 32 (B1) to (B14) show a state in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal variation display of the decorative symbols, and the timing at which the chance up notice is generated is shown. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3), a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point is shown. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a balloon displaying the “opportunity” character is displayed, and the navigation character YM provides a navigation character notice. In this production example, the advance notice by the balloon of the “opportunity” character of the navigation character YM is an advance notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be an advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “Opportunity” to “No”. In response to this, a balloon with the words “chance up not accepted” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to inform that the navigation character YM has announced the chance up. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. This conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is in the first stage of conversation notice. Further, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Also, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, so that the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Although the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. The character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “No” to “Intense heat”. In this production example, the notice of the navigation character YM with a balloon of “Intense heat” is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice. In addition, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the second decorative symbol. Here, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation advance notice, along with the habit character, the habit conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed. Note that the cocoon conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the candy. Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the heel is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effective period starts. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Thereafter, when the player depresses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), in the conversation image CI2 of the bag, instead of the operation promotion notification image, “Intense heat” is shown. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Furthermore, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the strawberry conversation image CI2 is a display mode that is highlighted with a golden thick line, and it is easier to hit a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the spider conversation image CI2 in gold. , It is informed that a chance up notice has been made in the conversation notice. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, when there is no operation of the production button 136 within the operation effective period, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not notify that the chance up notice has been generated, may notify, or may notify only a part thereof. (For example, only the characters “UP” are displayed).

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11), a state where the position of the balloon is changed is shown. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps with the conversation image CI2 of the bag, and the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to view than when the balloon does not overlap. Note that the position of the balloon may not be changed from the position illustrated in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position illustrated in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The balloon display may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), the first decorative symbol “decoration 7” is shown in a reach state. At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point and the production by the chance up meter CMT has been completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. Note that the timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance The reach effect may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

  The production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is finished when the reach state is reached, but the production may continue even if the reach state is reached, or it will continue even if the transition is made to super reach. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display ends. At this time, for example, when super reach is started, an effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT being continuously executed may be started. Further, the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT may be always started during normal symbol variation display, or may not be started. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started or not started. However, in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always be started. In addition, when it becomes possible to produce an effect using the chance up meter CMT, when the production button 136 is operated, the production using the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to allow the player to recognize.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 33A1 to A5, the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but is shown to be erased halfway.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows a state in which an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is being developed as super reach (swordsman reach). Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way, a specific notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first one. Although the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased because the corresponding chance up notice has not occurred. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), a state where the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second check point CP2 is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a cut-in display showing a state where the character of the frog having a nutritional drink crawls “Fight” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super-reach that is being executed. When this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in display may be a premier notice, and if it is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. When the cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, a state in which the production by the chance up meter CMT has been finished is shown because the announcement that is likely to be a big hit is performed rather than the chance up notification related to the chance up meter CMT. Yes. The cut-in display is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, it can be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the check point. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily terminated in the middle, or the chance up meter CMT may be terminated in the middle or may not be terminated. At this time, for example, depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or not, the content of the effect performed thereafter may be different, or the same content effect may be performed. . Further, the chance that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle when a chance up notice is generated at all of the checkpoints. It may be. Alternatively, the chance that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of “blow”, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 33 (A4). It is notified that the combination of big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained. In the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. Is done.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, showing that the hero's lord has subjugated the enemy swordsman, and is informed that it will be a big hit. .

  FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of effects following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), a cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the effect of other contents is performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The cut-in display is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, this production example also shows that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the variation icon h0 is also erased, but may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the deleted chance up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each of them is red. And “UP” are displayed. That is, in reality, the chance up notice corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the chance up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not made, but both are expressed as having been done, and the jackpot It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-1) shows another production example following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), not the swordsman reach but the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30 (30b) is shown. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), an opportunity to show the child panda cheering team KPD cheering at the timing when the Sabohan character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. An advance notice is displayed, notifying that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. In addition, the child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. Moreover, in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is an example of an effect following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an example of an effect different from FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the princess character cut-in is displayed. As shown in FIG. 30 (30b) and described above, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the co-panda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that has passed and passed to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that a chance up notice is being made. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be positioned at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

  FIG. 33 (A3a ″) shows another example of effects following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ″), a state in which full rotation reach starts is shown. The all-rotation reach is a reach where the big hit is fixed, and it is not necessary to give the player a higher expectation, so the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 33 (A3a ″ ″) ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that the big hit is confirmed at the time when the full rotation reach is started, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth checkpoint CP5. The placard may be displayed with “V” indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach has started. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT displays again.

  FIG. 33 (A2b) to FIG. 33 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 33 (A1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. Thereafter, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior part 224Gd are operated and the effect of overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 33B1 to B4, the production by the chance up meter CMT is started. However, since the result of the loss is displayed in the middle, the production by the chance up meter CMT is finished. It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way, a specific notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first one. Since the first checkpoint CP1 has been reached, but a chance up notice corresponding thereto has not occurred, the first checkpoint CP1 is not marked with red markings and “UP”. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first check point CP1 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, and a state of notifying that there is a high possibility of being lost is shown. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), the main character, Tosama, loses to the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, thereby notifying that the player has lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a display is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3 ′), despite the fact that “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be lost, in the chance up meter CMT, the savory character SBH is the final character. A state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is changed by the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 34 (A1) to (A5) show that the chance up meter CMT is once erased during the production by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Sabohani character SBH is shown starting to move from start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 34 (A2) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of a chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make it easier to see the pattern on the light guide plate IL. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by the dark display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the letters “chance up illuminating light emission” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance up notice has been made. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

  FIG. 34 (A4) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown.

  FIG. 34 (A5) shows a state where the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene has been completed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving.

  In this production example, the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance increase in the reach production. However, the production is not limited to the above, but, for example, the Sabohani character SBH is at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and hits whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the effect of whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to an effect that tells whether it is a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) May be. Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the player's operation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and the appearance of the advance notice of the chance is shown. Further, in this effect example, guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, icons indicating the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “meter not displayed by arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, when the swordsman reach is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed. However, after the swordsman reach is started, it may be displayed by a display operation by the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with a character “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the advance notice by the character display of chance up has been performed. Is informed.

  When the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4). . Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34 (B6). At this time, the Sabohani character SBH should be positioned when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the speech balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from where it is clear. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6 ′), when the presentation between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be positioned in front of the second check point CP2 and wait at that position until the timing for the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B6) and FIG. 34 (B6 ′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” mark is displayed due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY. Characters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the character “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, which is difficult to view.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 34 (B1) to FIG. 34 (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times according to the player's operation. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next presentation by the chance up meter CMT.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. You may be comprised so that it may be in the state performed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step. FIG. 35 shows an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

  In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 35A1 to 35A2 show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35A1, an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35A1, two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this effect example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is called a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is called a second chance up meter CMTb. These chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), the first check points CP1a and CP1b, the second check points CP2a and CP2b, and the third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first check point CP1a (CP1b) to third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance up notice will be given. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeted for the same chance up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed. However, only one chance up meter may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed rather than only one chance up meter. When displayed, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of making a big hit may be the same. In addition, when the production by the chance up meter is performed, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Three or more chance up meters may be displayed. In this production example, the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb have the same traveling speed. However, they may be different. For example, the second chance up meter CMTb has a traveling speed of one. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first check points CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears. A balloon with the words “chance up BOY passed” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb to notify that a chance up notice has been made by character display.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “chance up BOY passed” are displayed in the balloon, and the reliability is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ″), when the boy character BOY appears and the boy character BOY is singing a nose as a rare notice, the first chance is given. The letters “Chance Up BOY Passed” are displayed on the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the letters “Chance Up Rhythm” are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb to indicate that a rare notice has occurred. Also good.

  In this production example, the traveling speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same in the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may travel at different speeds. Further, in this effect example, the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

  FIG. 35 (A2a-1) to FIG. 35 (A2a-2) illustrate another effect example following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is deleted from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is deleted. Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, one of them may be deleted. For example, when one of two chance up meters is deleted, it is not deleted. It may be more likely to be a big hit or may be more likely to be a big hit if not erased. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Further, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  FIG. 35 (A2b-1) to FIG. 35 (A2b-2) show yet another example of effects following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the first chance up meter CMTa balloon and the display mode of the second chance up meter CMTb balloon, the display mode of the second chance up meter CMTb balloon display mode is a higher-reliability notice display. It can be called an aspect. Note that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed only in one of the two chance up meters, or both may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a low-reliability balloon from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb in which only the erasure is erased and the balloon with high reliability is displayed is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Further, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (B1) to (B2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, and third check point CP3a). Has been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoint. The timing of the advance notice and start of the chance up corresponding to any of CP1a to third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a are in this order.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b and that the boyie character BOY has started nasal singing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the letters “chance up nose singing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb to notify that the chance up notice has been made.

  In this example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is displayed. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint in a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that is not notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even a checkpoint that is notified. Good.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 35C1 to C4 show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been. The development point CPA indicates a point where the reach production may develop. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the period from the start point to the check point in the second chance up meter CMTb, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point is shown. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to a display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this effect example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 31 (2f). The display mode is set, and the second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that described above with reference to FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and includes three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are the starting points.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2), a state in which a button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased, and a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is shown. Further, in the first chance up meter CMTa, a character “UP” indicating that a chance up notice has occurred at the first check point CP1 is displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a certain chance up notice that appears as a result of the button effect. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is moving toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , The cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. Note that when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTa may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a state where a panda cut-in image is displayed and a transition to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check It is shown that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  36 (A1) to FIG. 36 (A7) show a state in which the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of the occurrence of the pseudo-run and the number of times of the pseudo-run during the pseudo-run effect. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1) shows how the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed to show that a chase effect as an example of a pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), the first decorative symbol is shown swaying and changing with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, a chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and in this chance up meter CMT, a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. It has been reported that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may occur at each check point. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second decorative symbol variation display) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant has missed it, it is shown that it has developed into a reach due to the return of the thousand boxes. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 has changed from the question mark to the reach state. The display is switched. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is ended halfway, and the pseudo-continuous effect display fades out together with the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 36 (A6).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the change icon h0. As a result, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the pseudo-continuous effect display. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit may vary depending on the checkpoints reached.

  Moreover, as an example of the effect of not displaying the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIG. 36 (A6a-1) to FIG. 36 (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 36 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is ended halfway, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by a frame-out outside the display screen.

  36 (B1) to FIG. 36 (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT produces an effect from the start of the reach production to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), a state is shown in which a reach effect is performed in which the “decoration 7” is reached and transferred. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In this effect example, when the reach effect starts, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The production using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift is made to the super reach or the losing is displayed without moving to the super reach. Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), in the reach effect, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a chance up notice corresponding to each check point is given. "UP" is displayed to that effect. Moreover, the chance up meter CMT overlaps with a part of 1st decoration design.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed on the left and right, respectively. In the first UI unit 280, the variation icon h0 is left below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out while being out of frame. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. Note that the chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. Furthermore, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior object 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to advance while the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operating, but the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board. While the behavioral accessory 224Gd is operating, the progress of the marker MRK may be stopped. Further, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd are operating. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the words “chance up big board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first big board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior role are displayed. The fact that the advance notice of the chance increase by the object 224Gd has been made is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd is initial. Return to position. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the final point at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. However, after the marker MRK has reached the final point, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol is left. Although the design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, the first decorative design is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT before the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior 224Gd are operated. After the 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative design is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative design is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may make it do. In addition, before and after the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, the front and back relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd return to the initial positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 37A1 to A5, other productions unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during the production using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or other effects may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows a state in which an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is being developed as a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the treasure chest BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice effect that is not related to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure chest BX and continues to proceed.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding chance up notice is generated, and the second check point CP2 notifies “UP” "Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the appearance of the characters “Intense heat” appears from the inside. The character display of “Intense heat” is also a notice effect unrelated to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a chance up notice corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure chest BX that is displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is easily visible.

  FIG. 37 (B1) shows a state in which other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance up meter CMT during the performance using the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap with at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous effects are performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous performance is the same type of pachinko machine 100 attached to the same game island using, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a timekeeping means. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when it ends. The wipe screen WP may also be displayed when an effect other than a simultaneous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 37 (C1) to (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the performance using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown.

  Thereafter, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output by a radio device such as a transceiver. When detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is displayed by displaying the characters “Radio wave detected” to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a doffing error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1), etc., and can be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened. Further, depending on the type of error, error display may not be performed, and error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 37 (C2a), FIG. (C2b), and FIG. 37 (C2c) show other display examples of error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. You may make it display so that it may overlap with at least one part. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b) is configured so that a plurality of error displays can be performed at the same time. When an error occurs, the display is displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), a state in which error display is performed on the entire display screen is shown. Specifically, it is detected by a magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100, for example, that a strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display is displayed over the entire display screen by displaying the character “magnetic detected” indicating that fact. Thereby, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and other effects are also not displayed. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is turned off, for example, not making a big hit determination. . If the power is shut off while the error is displayed and then the power supply is restored, the symbol variation stop command is issued after the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen.

  37 (D1) to 37 (D2) show how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. 37 (D1) to FIG. 37 (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is replaced by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest character 224E. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is shown. In addition, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown. In the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs swordsman” indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed, and a change icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 37D2 shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. Further, in the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character is displayed with a balloon with the word “game” displayed.

  In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display unit. However, the chance up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display unit. For example, display means constituted by a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like is applicable.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. It may be. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this production example, the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described. However, the case is also applicable to the case where the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a change mode of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  38 (A1) to FIG. 38 (A9) show the example of the change in the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change rate of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement. Is shown differently.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), a state is shown in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect is being performed by the navigation character YM. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 that simulates the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 that indicates the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. As shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the samurai, and the conversation of Tono-sama is more than that in the state of being not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. Further, part of the habit conversation image CI2 is overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, and is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is faster than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in FIG. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed is changed to the character display of “Intense heat”, so that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, a state in which an effect corresponding to the button operation result is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM by one operation of the effect button is shown. ing. It should be noted that the character display of “It is intense heat” displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the bag and the character display of “Intense heat” displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

  In addition, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started first. An effect according to the result may be performed. That is, in this effect example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation notice, the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1). Only an effect corresponding to the operation (display of the character “Intense heat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect based on the conversation notice (displayed in the conversation image CI2) (Indication of “It ’s intense heat”) is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player operates the second effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. In other words, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect based on the conversation notice (character display of “It is intense heat” in the conversation image CI2 of the bag) is performed.

  In addition, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the effect is given with priority to the button effect with a high gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. An effect according to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 is performed with priority given to a button effect with a small gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. Also good.

  Also, in this effect example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when it reaches a certain time. .

  Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is 5 seconds. For example, the remaining time display meter is prepared at a speed corresponding to each of 5 seconds and 10 seconds. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change rate of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where 10 seconds is selected.

  Also, in this effect example, “Intense fever” is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that has started to be extended later than when “Intense heat” is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier. ”Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is easier to display when the jackpot is displayed, and the notice display displayed later is displayed more easily. The player may be surprised by displaying while the degree of attention is relatively lowered. In addition, “Intense fever” was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that started to be extended later than when “Intense fever” was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect was displayed earlier. In that case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 38 (B1) to FIG. 38 (B11) shows that both the timer notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, it is shown that a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect has started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer notice effect functions as a chance-up notice. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the word “chance up timer notice” is displayed in the vicinity of the savohani character SBH, indicating that the chance up notice has been made. We are reporting. On the other hand, in timer announcement display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), the Sabohani character SBH starts to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts to move from the second check point CP2 is shown. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, a chance up notice (for example, occurrence of cut-in) is made, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. In addition, the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the advance notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), a state where the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 is shown. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), the timer notice display TM1 displays a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice instead of the timer display. According to this production example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohan character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH. It is informing that the advance notice has been started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a chance-up notice displayed in response to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice made as a result of completion of the count-down of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. Alternatively, it can also be said that the advance notice of the chance-up performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the advance notice indicated by the characters “attention” shown in the timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. For example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va is a chance-up advance notice made when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the point CP3, and the advance notice made as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. (For example, changing from red to gold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing other examples of button effects in stages.

  In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), a state in which the button effect is started is shown. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion notification images composed of combinations of button images and remaining time display meters are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged on the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. A second operation promotion notification image consisting of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image consisting of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged at the upper right, and includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged at the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of a time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation prompt composed of a sixth button image 136a6 and a sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 show that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Has been. In this production example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation effective period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have the same operation effective period length. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. The state changes to KP and a notice is being shown. Note that the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among a plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion notification are displayed. The display mode is changed one by one in priority in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. Note that the order of the operation promotion notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 once.

  In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes most preferentially when the effect button 136 is operated). It is assumed that the gauge decreases faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) The remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 is a decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes in the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), a sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification whose priority for changing the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated is the lowest) The decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for quickly reducing the gauge is not limited to the above-described meter, and can be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, in this production example, all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are configured with the button images 136a1 to 136a6, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are used. Any one or more of the operation promotion notification images may be displayed in place of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image is replaced with the sixth button image 136a6 as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meter of any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same speed at which the gauge decreases, or as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) The remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is made to decrease the speed of the gauge faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images. Or you may make it slow. By configuring in this way, for example, the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, thereby promoting the operation of the effect lever 136V once after the effect button 136 is operated five times. You may be able to.

  Moreover, in this production example, the remaining time display in the other operation promotion notification images is used to indicate the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), there may be two or more ones with different speeds at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), the speeds at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease are the other operation promotion notifications. The remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, and MT6 of the image are different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and correspond to the fifth operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 40 (A1) to (A6) show a state in which a plurality of timer notice productions are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 40A1 shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer notice display. Is different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as a first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as a second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed is shown. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster in countdown than the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the actual passage of time. The countdown speed of the first timer notice display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “06: 00”, that is, the state when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown of the timer notice display is started is shown. Can do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5), the timer display is “05:87”. Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be performed. Note that the second timer notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, going out of the frame after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be performed. Thereafter, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, out of the frame.

  In this example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described. However, the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. The timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display that is started later.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 40B1 to B4, a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one of the timer notice effects is added. Show.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 40 (B1) shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display (the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2) enters the frame from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display is the same.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed is shown. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down as the actual time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are both “09:73”. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that a timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “+10 seconds” indicating the added time in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies the added time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is 10 seconds. Has occurred. For this reason, two timer notice effects are started, but time is added to one timer display on the way, and therefore the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays. However, the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the timer notice effect. The time until the countdown is completed after the countdown of any one of the timer displays may be temporarily changed.

  Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice that has been started first is used. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the performance and completing the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. The timer display countdown in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later is shortened, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed when two timer notice effects are performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time or pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display It may be changed.

  In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer notice effect are performed, and thereby the timer notice related to the timer notice effect is provided. An addition of time to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after two timer notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed. For example, for one timer notice effect of two timer notice effects The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects, etc. are performed, for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects, or only by one of the three timer addition effects, etc. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to (C4) are the effects of prompting the user to operate any of the plurality of operation means, and the remaining time display timer indicating the operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means. The state of being displayed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), a button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Also, corresponding to the right door image DRR, a right key image 137aR simulating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the right door image DRR, and below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the operation key unit 137.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR, respectively, start the effective operation period and have a reduced gauge. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation effective period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation effective period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation effective period elapses earlier. It has become. For this reason, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 40 (C3) shows a state in which the left door image DRL is selected by the player operating the left key. Specifically, the left door image DRL moves to the center of the display screen and is enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are deleted. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This notifies that the left door image DRL has been selected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and a state where the replay symbol RP appears. Thereby, for example, it is foretelling that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right door image. The DRR door may open and a pine symbol CC may appear. This pine symbol CC has the letter “Gekiatsu” added, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this production example, when one of the two remaining time display meters whose gauge decrease is faster is selected, a warning display with higher reliability is performed. Even if is selected, the same display may be displayed. In addition, when the slower remaining gauge of the two remaining time display meters is selected, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

  Also, in this effect example, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation effective period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the system waits until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0 and operates the right key. The operation of the right key may be invalidated during standby.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to (A12) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41A1, the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed after the timer notice effect is started. . Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer preview display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in size, may be displayed in other sizes, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2), “03:01” is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the display position is also decorated. The symbol display device 208 is changed to substantially the center. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap the timer notice display TM1 by which the 1st decoration symbol was expanded and displayed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is performed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may be enlarged without changing the size of the timer display portion. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged when the timer display becomes “03:00”. However, the timer notice display TM1 may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A4) to (A7), the countdown in the timer preview display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Note that the timer preview display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, and the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 41 (A12). Thereby, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating the remaining 3 seconds in the timer notice effect, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened to the timer display, or the timer table may be displayed. Countdown may be stopped, the timer display countdown speed may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewinded), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and renewed. A timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

  In this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size. However, the size may be changed to three or more sizes. When the “notice” character display is displayed in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when the timer display or “attention” character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. You may make it display by size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

  Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size. However, for example, it may be changed from the small size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “05:00”, the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the medium size, and when it becomes “03:00”, the size changes from the medium size to the large size. You may make it change to size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, it may not change to large size.

  Moreover, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, the size of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the “notice” character display is displayed, The size may be changed to a large size.

  In this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may vary depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). ). The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display or the “attention” character display in the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be likely to appear. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo continuous pattern is likely to stop. You may do it.

  Also, in this effect example, when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect is likely to be performed when the countdown is completed, and it may be easy to make a big hit.

  Further, in this effect example, when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts, the timer notice display TM1 has a small display mode. It is good also as a display mode of a large size.

  In this example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, and the timer display is changed. The size of may not be changed. Alternatively, the size of the timer display may be changed to a small size without changing the size of the timer display. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the frame portion or background color of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, but the color of the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame part (and / or the background part) of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, but the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed in form by animation. In this case, for example, when the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, the form of the timer display may be changed by animation. In addition, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, but the timer display may not be changed. In addition, although the form of the timer display changes due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) to (B4) show another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. In the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “00:31” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are in a variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In this way, not only during the timer display countdown, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged when a “notice” character is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  42 (A1) to FIG. 42 (A3) are examples in which when the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 changes, the timer preview display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means. Show. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 42A1 to 42A3, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is replaced by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest character 224E. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the second reserved number display, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), the decorative symbol variation display is still performed. In the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer preview display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the sub display device 208S after the timer notice display TM1 has completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative design display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or before the timer preview display TM1 extends over the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed.

  42 (B1) to FIG. 42 (B3) show another example in which the timer preview display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means when the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is changed. An example is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, the number of hold in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the decorative symbol variation display is still performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). At this time, the sub-display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative symbol and timer notice display TM1 and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. The sub display device 208S may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, and the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208S, or may be enlarged before the timer preview display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed. In this production example, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged, the timer preview display TM1 is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Alternatively, the timer preview display TM1 may be displayed. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with a reduced size. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 42C1 to C9 show another example of the display mode after the timer notice display TM1 is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41A1, the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change is a mode in which a timer display is arranged inside a circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 42C3 to C6, the display state of the circular meter portion changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Note that the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, but the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. The timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed. For example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter portion is enlarged. You may make it display. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be constituted by only a circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that the first decorative symbol may overlap the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the change display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is performed. Further, when changing the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the timer display part may not be changed, but only the frame part of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 42 (C4) to (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display in the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a “continue” indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Note that characters other than “continue” may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the system shifts to SP reach, “SP reach” or the like is displayed to display the SP reach. You may alert | report that it transfers. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “attention” may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of Tono is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-simulated symbols that have been moved moves at a low speed from above to below is started. Thereafter, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous is executed.

  In this example, the “continuation” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. You may display so that there may be no effect. In such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

  Also, in this effect example, when a timer display targeting the same effect is displayed in a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Also, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer display of “03:00”, and the other timer notice display is displayed in a different display mode, for example, “3 seconds remaining” is roughly displayed. A countdown display may be performed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (A8) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), a state is shown in which a timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 adds time. It will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “05:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 5 seconds, and the display position is also displayed as a decorative symbol. The device 208 is changed to approximately the center. In this example, the countdown is once interrupted when “05:00” is reached, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed when the remaining time of the timer display is the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is displayed by adding the time to the timer display. Is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. You may make it overlap with TM1. In addition, the condition for the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display. For example, when the timer display changes, such as when the timer display is shortened or the countdown is stopped. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), in the enlarged timer preview display TM1, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and a state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. . While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. The display position is also changed to the original position. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  43 (B1) to FIG. 43 (B7) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped on the left symbol and “decoration 7” is stopped on the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and “00:00” is displayed. Yes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the same time, “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol represented by the Tono-like character in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. This pseudo continuous effect by the pseudo continuous design is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. 43 (B7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), in the timer preview display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1 restarts the countdown of the timer display. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), a cut-in display including the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed, and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7), the timer display is “14:92”.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to (A8) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display form of the timer notice display is changed to raise the rank of the notice. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in large size, and a state in which it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the display of an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

  FIG. 44 (A3) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot is increased. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed in an enlarged manner because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of “LvUP” is deleted. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display as shown in FIG. 44 (A7). The word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, the character “Slash Ats” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high is displayed together with the princess character. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), in response to the timer notice display TM1 being ranked up, a character display of “expected size” is added. As a result, it is easier to hit a big hit than when a cut-in display without a character display of “expected large” is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of “Long Expectation” may be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, or may not be displayed. In addition, the text display of “expected large” may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this effect example, the character display of “Large Expectation” is easier to display when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when the timer is not ranked up. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the change icon h0 is also changed and the notice display is performed. The change in the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect, or may be made regardless of the timer notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

  As described above, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice made as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect is promoted, or the timer notice. The rank increase of the display TM1 itself may function as a chance increase notice. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the degree of expectation that the notice with high reliability of the jackpot is displayed in advance has increased.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice that is made as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative symbol It may indicate that there is a possibility that the design of reach will be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach effect is performed with “decoration 2” where the probability variation big hit is not fixed, and the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and the big hit is achieved, May be changed to reach of “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

  44 (B1) to FIG. 44 (B7) show a state in which an effect using a chance up meter is started when a timer notice effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and a state in which it has been developed into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of held in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman has started. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3) shows that the savohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, the Boyi character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size so that the Boy character BOY is conspicuous. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to obstruct the display of the boyfriend character BOY. It can be easily recognized. Note that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even if it is reduced, and “15:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). Note that the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of the chance increase by the boy character BOY is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance increase by the Boy character BOY ends, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

  In this production example, while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to notify that the advance notice of the chance increase is being performed. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer advance notice TM1, the enlarged display of the timer advance notice TM1, the change in the frame of the timer advance notice TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer advance notice TM1, the timer advance notice The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (A1) to (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes its display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3 ′), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to make the effect of super reach stand out.

  In this example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts. However, when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed. Alternatively, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed when the super reach title shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is displayed. Also good. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 has a chance to increase), It may be displayed as it is. Also, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, the timing of 3 seconds ago or 0, the chance of the timer preview display TM1 being increased, etc.). Or a larger display than the size initially displayed).

  45 (B1) to FIG. 45 (B7) show how the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “27:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  FIG. 45B2 shows a state in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown of the timer display, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partly overlapped by the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the case where it is not overlapped. TM1 is considered difficult to see.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position that does not overlap with the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center portion on the right end of the display screen is changed to the center upper end portion of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd do not operate | move, although a display position does not need to be changed, a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, but the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is not changed. Note that the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the central portion on the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). Note that the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd start returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first board action 224Ga to the fourth board action 224Gd start returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1. After starting movement to the original position, the operation of returning the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd to the initial position may be started.

  45 (C1) to FIG. 45 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “29:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, and the variation icon h0 is displayed. The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are out of the frame and are not displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative design, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right design of the first decorative design. Note that the timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 46A1 to 46A10 shows a state in which the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1), a state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), display of an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is displayed in which a character “shrink timer” is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137. It is informed that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the guide display may be displayed from the start of the timer notice production, or the reach state is reached. May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), the timer preview display TM1 is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). In addition, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the player operates the up key. Then, it is displayed that the original size is displayed, and that the display position returns to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). The display position returns to the original position. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “17:81” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). In addition, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the duel scene animation display continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. This indicates that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. Note that the display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes “03:00” and is displayed in a reduced size, the display returns to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display position may remain at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 46 (B1) to (B9) show how the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), display of an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

  FIG. 46 (B3) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), the effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer indications in the timer notice indications TM1L and TM1R indicate the same time, respectively, and “13:56” is indicated in the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5). In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame may not be changed, and the case where the color of the frame is changed to red is better. You may make it easier to hit big hits than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may change to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 46 (B7), in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R, the timer display Instead, the word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. Yes. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the timer display countdown in one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed. This is to inform you that you will be promoted to a higher reach production. In addition, the effect performed when the countdown of the timer display in both timer preview displays of the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1R is completed may be used.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 46 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display indicating that the co-panda cheering team KPD composed of three co-panda characters is cheering is performed. It is informing that the reliability for the big hit has increased dramatically. The co-panda support group KPD is a notice character displayed when the timer display countdown in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

  In this production example, a chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is produced corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that a chance-up production is being performed in the developed reach production.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  47 (A1) to FIG. 47 (A5) show a timer notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 47A1 to 47A5, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest role 224E and the Senryo box role 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. . Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, “15:47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), the duel scene animation is continuously performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “15:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “14:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are reciprocated left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, a state in which the timer notice display is divided into two is shown. Note that the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), “13: 56 ". Note that the timer display countdown continues while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. The timer display countdown may be interrupted. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, the timer display may be performed not only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M but also on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “12:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

  47 (B1) to FIG. 47 (B5) show a timer notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-view state and a difficult-to-view state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 1, and the second reservation number display indicates that the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “18:19” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, “6:19” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes “0” in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the timer display is “0” in the timer display effect in the mini display device 208P, the effect such as the chance increase notification may be performed. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), at the timing when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes “15:00” indicating that the remaining 15 seconds, the timer notice display is displayed. An effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing “3:00” indicating that the timer display remains for 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the timer display time displayed on the mini display device 208P. The characters “UP” indicating that the timer display of TM1 is added are displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer display for 3 seconds and updated to “18:00”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display countdown is resumed in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is “17:99”. On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen due to the shutter member. In this example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM in the device 208, the timer display in the mini display device 208P may not be ended, and thereafter the timer display may be counted down.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  48 (A1) to FIG. 48 (A10) show an example of notification by performing a display indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared before the timer notice effect is started. Show. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2), the timer notice preparation effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. The timer notice preparation effect is an indication that preparation is in progress until the timer notice effect starts, so that the player has a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, “STANDBY” to be described later may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3) shows that the frame preview of the timer notice display TM1 has been completed. When the timer preview display TM1 is completed, the timer preview display TM1 displays “STANDBY” indicating that the timer preview display is being prepared, thereby notifying that effect. In other words, in this effect example, the effect is performed as one aspect of the pre-reading notice that notifies that the timer notice effect is to be performed within the hold. In addition, the change notice for notifying that the timer notice effect is performed in the changing symbol display may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and has a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 need not be reduced and the display position need not be changed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48A5 shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. Thus, it can be said that the timer notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48A7 shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position. From the “STANDBY” display, the timer display is displayed. The state of switching to the display of “10:00” is shown. This notifies that the timer notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer preview display TM1 moves while being enlarged may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be enlarged after being changed, or the display position may be changed after being enlarged. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed. May be switched to a timer display. The timing at which the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may make it change from small size to large size.

  48 (B1) to 48 (B8), a plurality of clock notice icons MI1 functioning as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer notice effects are performed as many times as the number of stocked watch notice icons MI1. Shows about. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state where “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This “decoration 3” is added with a watch notice icon MI1 and indicates that one watch notice icon MI1 is stocked. Note that two or more clock notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), a state is shown in which the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. Also, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of watch notice icons MI1 stocked is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the watch notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the watch notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is also performed is shown. The navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon displaying a “get” character together with a clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this example of the function functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect will be performed within the hold. In this way, the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one and may be two or more. There may also be a plurality of types of effects that are performed when the watch warning icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of clock notice icons MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), a state is shown in which the display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 3” indicating that the notice icons MI1 of three clocks are stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), one of the three stock clock notice icons MI1 is digested, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In this example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. However, two timer notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7 '), a watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The timer notice effect may be started without digesting.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the timer notice icon TM1 may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end of the display screen from the beginning. .

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [for example, a timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a certain effect [e.g., a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to (12) or a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 21 (a5), 21 (c2), lever effect shown in FIG. 23 (9fa ′), a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol as a stop notification, etc., a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect display using the mini display device 208P] is a display for informing the timing.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5)],
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5). “Increase” and “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the character YM]
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5), a timer notice effect is performed on the timer notice display TM1. Etc., when a timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is informed by the first display, it is informed that the time informed by the second display will change. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain stage to start, there is an expectation that the time may change, and enjoy the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when the certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may necessarily notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  Further, the second display may be for notifying only that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or notifying that the timing at which a certain effect is started is not changed. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change, or may not notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change. It may be a thing.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

  The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). The countdown display countdown may be started. The end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). Display state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and display displayed on the first display after countdown is completed (For example, the character display of “attention”) may be hidden.

In addition, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time in the timer display is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where attention can be paid to a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, after the second display is displayed, only the display mode of the first display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of other displays may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not change.

  Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may be changed, and the display mode of the first display is changed only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means also displays the second display. In some cases, attention can be focused on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight only on the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be constituted only by the first display means and the second display means, or may be constituted by including display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . The display means may be configured to include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed only on the first display unit, or may be displayed other than the first display unit. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the first display unit.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on a screen other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the second display unit.

In addition, the second display unit is disposed on the near side of the first display unit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 26A1, the sub display device 208S is closer to the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to (A3). The decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it can be made easier to recognize that there is a possibility that the time until the change will occur.

  Here, only the first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displaying the second display. Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped by the display means. Further, the first display means may be necessarily overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed. One display means may not overlap.

  Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed. The first display means may be overlapped by display means other than the means.

In addition, the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26B1] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 208, the second display means is configured to be movable between positions substantially overlapping the front side of 208 and the like,
The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative design display device 208, etc. at a position overlapping the front surface of approximately the center of 208]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be configured to be movable. In addition, the second display unit may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display unit may be disposed between the first position and the second position. You may be comprised so that it may not move.

  In addition, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be provided in addition to between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may be overlapped with the first display means at a position other than the second position. It may be anything. In addition, the second display means may necessarily overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Also good.

The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) to (7)],
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to (7), the timer notice display TM1 The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may include only a countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed by counting down timings other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed, or may not be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed. Good.

In addition, the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued without fail, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. Also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in a state other than the state where the second display is displayed. Also good.

Further, during the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the second display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8), etc.]
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. When the display becomes 0, the word “attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail. When the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display is not the case where the first display is a display indicating 0. Three displays may be displayed.

In addition, in the case where the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the second display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation due to the display of the second display.

  When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [for example, pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)],
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, a production moving means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest member 224E, a Thousand box accessory 224H, a first large board behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3), etc.]
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. In addition, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. Further, the effect moving means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

In addition, when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 12) The case where the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 12 is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-ream is not started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a sense of expectation can be given to a certain performance.

  When a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a final state. Even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. Also good.

“One of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [e.g., a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) or FIGS. 20 (9) to (12). Pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 29, a chance-up notice display shown in FIG. 29 (4) and FIG.
In a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
When the fifth display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16 (9) to (14). If the conversation notice shown in is more likely to be a big hit than if no conversation notice is given]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the fifth display is displayed in the period from when the first display starts to display until the second display starts. is there.

  Here, only the fifth display may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. In the period from when the display is started until the second display is started, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

  In addition, the fifth display may be displayed only during the period from when the first display is started until the second display is started, or the first display is displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started even in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finalized without fail, or when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finalized. There may be.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is operated by the swordsman reach. Etc. may be displayed during the
One of the plural types of displays is a first effect display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing shown by the check point CP3 at which the advance notice by lever production shown in FIG. 29 (18) is started]
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,
The period display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the period display is started [for example, check as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A2) If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 33A2 is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, so there is a possibility that the display means may not be seen until the first timing is close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing. Even when the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to see the period display. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game during the period from when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. In addition, a plurality of types of displays may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the period display and the first effect display. The display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be one that may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the period display starts, or before the first timing after the period display starts. The display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

  Note that the display period of the period display may be during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, etc., regardless of the reach.

  Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed for long reach but may be displayed for SP reach. Further, it may be displayed not in the first half of SP reach but in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the second half of the SP reach.

  Also, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. In addition, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. The start of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is completed. There may be. In addition, when the operation means is configured to be able to display / hide the chance up meter, the start of the period display is the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  Also, the start of the period display refers to the period display effect until the period display effect ends (for example, the chance up meter) (for example, the chance up meter is displayed indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed). Or until the display suggesting that it can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden.

  The period display includes not only the display until the first timing is reached, but also the display that is erased before the first timing is reached.

  Further, there may be two or more certain periods during the period in which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, when the second certain period starts while the period display itself continues to be displayed, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in of cocoon shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.]] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A2) and FIG. 33 (A2b), the chance up meter In the production by the CMT, before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the display of the cut-in of the eyelid shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) may be performed. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33A1 to A2 and A2b) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the eyelid shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) are not notified]
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A2) and FIG. 33 (A2b), as shown in FIG. 33 (A2). The chance up meter CMT is deleted when the cut-in display of the kite or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes There are cases where you can also have expectations.

  Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or the second effect display is displayed in addition to before the first timing. There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. May be. The period display may not necessarily notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Further, only the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display, and displays other than the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may be necessarily deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

  Further, the period display may be deleted only during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may be deleted in addition to the display of the second effect display.

  Instead of the effect display, notifications other than errors, such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing a prepaid card from being forgotten to be removed, may be used. In addition, the display of the effect display may be a display that appears by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect moving means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

  Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 2nd production display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by a cut-in display of a moth shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. There may be a case where the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, in the case where the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed and displayed more easily than the case where the second effect display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, a production moving means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest member 224E, a Thousand box accessory 224H, a first large board behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [e.g., the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3b), etc.]
The second operation is a production operation,
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect moving means may necessarily execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be necessarily performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

“One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest member 224E shown in FIGS. 15E1 to E2 and the operation shown in FIG. 15F1. The operation of the Thousand box accessory 224H, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. 33 (A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where expectation can be given for the redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display is also displayed again. It may be configured. The period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

  The period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again other than after the period display is erased. Also good.

Further, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period has elapsed after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33A2 to 33A5]. In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the samurai character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or until a certain period elapses after the period display is erased. A display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period display is not performed until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, only after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

  If there are a plurality of periods in the period during which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period after the first certain period is started. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [e.g., a champ-up notice by displaying a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), and a lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). Of the chance-up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.]
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display is a second timing [for example, a timing indicated by a check point CP1 at which a champ-up notice is displayed by the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), The timing indicated by the check point CP2 at which the advance notice of the chance increase by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started may also be notified,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timing than the second timing. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

  In addition, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be the one in which the display of the third effect display is not started.

  The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

  In addition, it is possible to fix the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to reach, such that the effect display is always performed three times when a certain reach occurs and the effect display is always performed twice when another reach occurs. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed such that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once in some cases. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, and conversely, it may be easily shifted. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win.

  Also, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “One type of display of multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display is difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means,
The first display means is a means that may display the period display,
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
There may be a case where at least part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be constituted by only a plurality of display means, or may be constituted by other than the plurality of display means. In addition, the display means may be necessarily constituted by a plurality of display means, or may not be constituted by a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other displays than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

  In addition, the second display unit may perform only the production operation, or may perform an operation other than the production operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the production operation or may not perform the production operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or a case where the second display means overlaps at least a part of the period display. There may be. In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is necessarily overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. Also good.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [e.g., display of the conversation image CI2 of the frog in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38A4 to A9],
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. It may change with the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds]
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the hail conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] is the second speed [for example, gauge in 5 seconds. May change depending on the speed at which
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, a large number of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with a game or a player who plays a game for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming machine, the first speed and the second speed are made different to cause the player to naturally guide his / her line of sight to a display with a fast (slow) speed at which the display mode changes. May also be able to entertain the production.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be erased before the first timing after the period display starts, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before, the period display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

In addition, the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), etc.]
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of time in a certain period [e.g., operation effective period] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1) or FIG. In the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the display mode change speed can be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. The first display may necessarily include a time display or may not include a time display.

  Further, the second display may include only a time display, or may include a display other than the time display. The second display may necessarily include a time display, or may not include a time display.

  Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes depending on other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. The time display may be such that the display mode always changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

In addition, “both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. 38 (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display in which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag in the conversation preview are displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the production can be lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or there may be a display other than both the first display and the second display. Also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display of “It's hot” in the conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38 (A9), etc.]
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a first time [e.g., 10 seconds] elapses,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds or the like] has elapsed.
When the first time has elapsed since the first display started, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time has elapsed since the second display started displaying, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses. Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. You may not do it.

  Further, the second display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses. The display mode may be changeable. In addition, at least a part of the display mode may change until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. You may not do it.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start after the first display starts. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts displaying. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time elapses after the second display starts, only the fourth display may be displayed, or after the second display starts the second display. When time elapses, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started, the fourth display may be always displayed, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started displaying. The fourth display may not be displayed.

  The third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode, or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have higher or lower jackpot reliability. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same between the third display and the fourth display.

The first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 informs by a countdown display of the time until the pseudo-ream occurs],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Moreover, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first display is an operation valid period display,
The second display is the operation valid period display,
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may have a trap that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may indicate other than the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may not indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

Further, the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 35 (A1), etc.]
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing when the advance notice of the chance increase by the boyfriend character BOY shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started]
The first timing is a certain effect [for example, FIG. 35] in a first period [for example, a period in which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 35 (A1) to FIG. 35 (A2)]. (A2) is a timing at which a chance-up notice display by the boy character BOY may be performed,
Between the start of the first period and the end thereof, the first timing is notified,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, the first timing may be one in which only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, and display other than the sixth display is also started to display in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be. The first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be.

  Further, only the first timing may be notified during the period from the start of the first period to the end, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. In addition, the first timing may be always notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start of the first period to the end, and in addition to the period from the start of the first period to the end, One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed as time elapses.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may be changed at the first speed as time passes, or at least part of the second display is changed as time passes. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, according to the passage of time, only at least a part of the display form of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display There may be cases where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, “when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, rather than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed. In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to confirm and display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38A1 to A9).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display is an effect display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a bag in a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38A4 to A9].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), etc.]
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A1) to FIG. The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the timer display of TM1, etc.]
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display is changed from the first display mode [for example, the small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)] to the second display. May change to a mode [for example, a large-size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3),
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect increases by changing the display mode of the countdown display, the player may be able to be entertained until a certain effect is performed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where attention can be paid to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may include only a countdown display or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may notify only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by other than performing the countdown. You may do. In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be.

  Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, “the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is completed before the symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (7) The countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and is ended during the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, and therefore the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be completed by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended by the time the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. There may be a case where the countdown display does not end before the change display ends.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be completed only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition to the end of the variable display, the countdown display may end.

In addition, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size, etc.]
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size, etc.]
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display size of the countdown display may be increased, whereby the degree of expectation for the countdown display may be changed (attention is paid to the countdown display having an increased display size).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

  Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is also displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

  Note that the display sizes may be the same, for example, the same display size, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.

  Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. A display mode other than one display mode may be displayed. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode. When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. If it is not displayed in the display mode, there may be a gap.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display is displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame preview of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining three seconds are displayed during the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1, the timer preview display TM1 is displayed. Is changing from small size to large size etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where it can be expected that the display mode changes during the countdown display.

  Here, the first display may be changed only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the first display is the first display during the display of the countdown display. The display mode may always be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. You may change from the one display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it will be easier to finalize the jackpot symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be a case where an expectation for changing the first display to the second display mode can be provided.

  When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or the first display is the first display mode. Even if the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

The first display is a display whose display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41A2 to A3, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right of the display screen 208 to approximately the center]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display position of the first display changes, thereby giving a visual change and improving the effect.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position is changed, or may be one other than the display position. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

“When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3). As shown in (), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the substantially center, etc.] A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the first display.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. If it changes to the 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of the 1st display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  Moreover, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change even in cases other than the case where the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer preview display TM1 or the like] may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display is changed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to (A3), the timer preview display TM1 is displayed by an enlarged display animation. Etc.], and the display position changes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of production may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only moving display is performed, or may be one in which display other than the moving display is also performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the moving display is always performed, or the movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the moving display, and the display position of other than the display position of the first display is also changed by performing the moving display. Also good. In addition, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, and the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. .

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even if the display position of the first display changes due to something other than the movement display being performed. Good.

In addition, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds while the moving display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued in addition to the display of the movement display.

Further, during the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the movement display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the movement display.

In addition, “the countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may be performed only for counting down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed other than counting down the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the display of “0” in the countdown display indicates that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A7) to (A8). As described above, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the “notice” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition, it is also possible to notify other than the timing at which a certain performance is performed. Further, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

  In addition, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has been reached only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

In addition, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. 41 (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the presentation is not made redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display The display may also be deleted. Further, the countdown display may be erased after the display indicating 0 in the countdown display is displayed, or the countdown display is erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8), etc.]
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. As shown in the figure (A11), after the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 becomes 0, the timer preview display TM1 displays the word “attention” instead of the timer display, and then the timer preview display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, thereby improving the effect of rendering the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in effects other than a certain effect. The second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. The second display may be included in a certain effect.

  Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display May be configured such that displays other than the countdown display are also deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may not be deleted after the second display is displayed.

  Further, only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted even after the second display is displayed.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode May be displayed on the display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. In other cases, the first display may be displayed on the first display means.

Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A2) to FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed as a decorative symbol. Displayed on the display device 208, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the display means to be displayed is changed when the display mode of the first display is changed, there may be a case where it is possible to visually enhance the presentation effect.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display unit. There may be cases, and when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display unit. It may be displayed on other display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display unit. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is changed to the second display unit. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display form displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display form. The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display mode. May be displayed on the display means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a pre-reading notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display or may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a prefetch notice.

  Further, when the countdown display is performed as a pre-reading notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display to be performed next. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped, interrupted, or canceled during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the symbol fixed stop timing is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown It may be possible to stop the time display, or to continue the time notification by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally during the symbol stop display.

  In addition, when displaying a countdown display as a pre-reading notice, if a hold whose change time varies depending on the number of hold (for example, a hold whose change time is indefinite) is on hold, the countdown display should not be performed. Also good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown will become 0. For example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo-ream, reach of the reach) In the case of development, etc., it is preferable to perform only with the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when a suspension with an indefinite variation time is in the suspension. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, or a telop display such as “In the midst of a hot attack”) For example, it is sufficient if the countdown of the timer is completed before the subject's suspension of digestion is completed. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that forcibly adjusts the time at the same timing (for example, the start of a suspended symbol fluctuation display that has been subject to prefetching) even when an effect that needs to be synchronized occurs. Also good.

  The countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, during the jackpot game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final When the big hit end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book end is forcibly The combined time may be displayed (for example, “00:00” is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, and an effect is generated).

  Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the countdown display the time until the production by a simultaneous production, the effect by RTC, etc. starts.

  Further, the display device may be composed of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as rendering movable means and decorative members, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, and the transmissive liquid crystal It may be configured such that these can be visually recognized. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state where the back side can be visually recognized and a state where it is difficult to visually confirm with the liquid crystal shutter.

  Further, the operation mode of the effect moving means such as an accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the time notification by the countdown display.

  In addition, a display for notifying that an effect may be exerted on the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as inciting that something may be generated by a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen on the countdown display (when you do nothing or when you do something), and when another character appears, you will always do something It is also possible to perform an effect such that something is always performed when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters that appear, the easier it may be to win.

  In addition, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to finally become a big hit, or when a chance up notice is given, it may be easy to finally become a big hit.

  Moreover, even if the chance up meter is enlarged / reduced in part or in whole, or promoted (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes), etc. Good.

In the above description,
“A game table provided with image display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first effect display [e.g., a notice by the appearance of a Boyi character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is operated by the swordsman reach. Etc. may be displayed during the
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, a savory character SBH shown in FIG.
From the start position [for example, the position indicated by the start point SP shown in FIG. 29 (2)] to the first position [for example, the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. The position from the start to the end of the certain period is notified by moving to the end position [for example, the position indicated by the final point GP shown in FIG. Is composed of
When the cursor display reaches the first position, a first timing [for example, a first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4) at which a notice by the appearance of a boy character BOY is started. Timing etc.],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display in which a first chance-up display [for example, “UP” displayed above the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (6), etc.] may be displayed.
When the display of the first effect is started at the first timing, the display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (6), The first chance-up display is displayed on the upper side of the first checkpoint CP1.
When the first chance up display is displayed, the first chance up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 is continuously displayed until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP.
One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, display of cut-in of cocoon shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.]
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display,
The display of the third effect display may be started before the first timing after the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A2) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, before the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the third checkpoint CP3, the display of the cut-in of the kite shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and FIG. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed],
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A2) and FIG. 33 (A2b), FIG. The chance up meter CMT is deleted when the cut-in display of the eyelids shown or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the period display is a display including a first checkpoint display [for example, display of the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.]
The first checkpoint display is a display indicating the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The first checkpoint display is a display that is displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (25), Checkpoint CP1 is displayed until Sabohani character SBH reaches final point GP, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, in the case where the third effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than the case where the third effect display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The cursor display moves to both the first position and the second position (for example, the position indicated by the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (2)) to the end position. Has been
When the cursor display reaches the second position, the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the third checkpoint CP3 at which the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. Is informed,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display.
The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, “UP” displayed above the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (19)] may be displayed,
When the display of the second effect is started at the second timing, the display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter referred to as “second display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (19), The second chance-up display is displayed on the “up display position etc. above the third check point CP3”).
When the second chance up display is displayed, the second chance up display is continuously displayed until at least the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the first chance up display is displayed only when the display of the first effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (4) to FIG. When the notice due to the appearance of BOY is started, “UP” is displayed above the first checkpoint CP1, but as shown in FIGS. 30 (4a) to (7a), the first checkpoint is displayed. If the advance notice is not started even if Sabohani character SBH reaches CP1, “UP” is not displayed above first checkpoint CP1, etc.]
Only when the second effect display is started, the second chance-up display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to (19), the lever image 136Va is displayed. When “UP” is started, “UP” is displayed above the third check point CP3. However, as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the character Sabohani is displayed at the third check point CP3. If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even when the SBH arrives, “UP” is not displayed above the third check point CP3, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display in which a first non-chance up display [for example, a display of“ x ”indicating that a chance up notice has not been made] may be displayed.
The period display is a display in which a second non-chance up display [for example, a display of “x” indicating that a chance up notice was not made] may be displayed.
When the display of the first effect is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance up display is displayed at the first display position [for example, FIG. 30 (7a ″) As shown in the figure, when the advance notice of the chance increase is not performed at the first check point CP1, “x” is displayed in place of the “UP” display to indicate that the advance notice of the chance increase is not performed. Etc.],
When the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance up display is displayed at the second display position [for example, a chance at the third checkpoint CP3. If no advance notice is given, an “X” is displayed to indicate that the chance advance notice has not been given instead of “UP”, etc.] . ]
Also explained.

Further, “the period display is a display including a second checkpoint display [for example, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.]
The second checkpoint display is a display indicating the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a display that suggests that the result of the determination of success / failure is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 3 Checkpoint CP3 display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is not displayed, when the display of the third effect display ends in the certain period, the period display is displayed again. [For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. 33 (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character's cut-in is displayed. When the display is finished and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, after the period display is not displayed, the period display is not displayed in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2) to FIG. 33 (A5), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the frog character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game tables (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 89. 49 to 89 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 49 to 89 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. 49 to FIG. In the description using FIG. 89, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 49 to 89 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 51) as external structures. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 51) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 52) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 49 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 51) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to light. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 50 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 49 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 51 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 51 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N need only be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 51 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with two variable winning holes. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmitting portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 62, etc.) not shown here is prepared. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 52, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 52, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the 12V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 53A to 53C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. FIG. 53 (a) shows an example of a special symbol stop pattern.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 53 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 53 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 53B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol changes at a high speed (scrolled) for each symbol display area. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 51B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, the fifth symbol may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 53 (b) may be reduced, or it may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. 53 (b). Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. Note that the fifth symbol may be displayed in a region outside the symbol display regions 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG. 53 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 53 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 54A in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for timer number determination for special drawing and for universal use, both of which determine a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 52 (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 52, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 for performing random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 54B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the prior / no-go determination is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hits in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure pre-determination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 53 (a) is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 53A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in a special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 54B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading notice) of the pre-determination result is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 54 (b), the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 53 (c)) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general display B shown in FIG. 53C is obtained. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 (b), the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, special figure 2 is in operation, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start region) (entrance rate) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 is not reached.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Normal reach is generally a decorative display in which two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. 52 is driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 54A. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 57, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following drawings unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 57, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b), a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  Further, in FIG. 57, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there are a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 57 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 57, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lighting” is used here, it may be “flashing” (hereinafter the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 57 (a), both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display a stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a random pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. 57A. Four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 57 (a) are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 57 (b), the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In addition, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 57B are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 and the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 57 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 57 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. 57 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (h), the character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. The display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 57G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 57 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 57 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunate” is displayed, there is a case where a big hit is caused by a reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is not always accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with a chance button 136 that can perform an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 58A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 58B shows a state in which the transmission part 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state inclined forward as shown in FIG. 58 (b), it can vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmitting portion 191 shown in FIG. 58 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. 58 (a). The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 58 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 58 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operating means B (transmission portion 191) is more successful than the effect involving the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 59B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 59C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 60, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 60A to 60C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, a notification that prompts the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation effective state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation effective state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 60C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (c), the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 60A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 61A to 61C represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (a) is an example during the display of variation of decorative symbols. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of a first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The first effect is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to display the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (a), when the operation timing of the operating means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, so that the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), before notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, a judgment effect is started. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that it aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example illustrated in FIG. 61A and the example illustrated in FIG. 61B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (c) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  The example shown in FIG. 61C is an example in which when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

  The upper example shown in FIG. 61D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the variation display of the decorative design, or a judge showing the end in the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example, the period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as effective, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. The Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 61 (d), the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, meter production will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  62 (1) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  Further, a family crest member 224E (not shown in FIG. 51) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 62 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Note that the family crest character 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E being the forefront and the first decorative symbol display device 208L being the most. On the rear side, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  62, not shown in FIG. 62, it is executed on the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 49, etc.) and the variable display symbol (special drawing) executed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 49, etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Similarly, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in a general symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 49, etc.) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 53 (b) that is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L corresponds to the third symbol pd 3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  Further, in FIG. 62, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to FIG. 1 and the circle display corresponds to FIG. Whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of the loss is being displayed in the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special figure display device. In (212, 214), the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed in the special symbol display device (212, 214). This fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

  The state shown in FIG. 62 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being stopped.

  In addition, a hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. The hold frame UI has a variable icon display area in the center, a hold icon display area on the left side, and an effect display area on the right side. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of balls to be held shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which added the number of reservation balls of special figure 1 and the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, in the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 62 (1), a base icon UIb extending in the left and right directions with a vertical stripe pattern is provided, and the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. In addition, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  In the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 62 (1), one hold icon h1 is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the current special figure is one. In other words, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) is displayed. A first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 62 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode that is a display mode of a pre-reading notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon. For each display mode, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold mode is provided. ). However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing when the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the default display form and then changes to the pre-reading notice mode is as follows. The winning time can be given.

  In addition, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 62 (1), a variation icon c having a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 62 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stopped and the fourth symbol pd4 is also stopped. In FIG. 62 (1), the stopped symbol is being displayed. The change icon c is still left without disappearing. In FIG. 62 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears.

  In addition, a numerical display hn of the number of reservations is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 62 (1). The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 62, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord-like character cd shown in FIG. 62 (1) is an initial posture.

  In addition, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 62 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 62, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 62 (1), the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 49, or may be an operating means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 62 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 62 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 62 (2). The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started for the fifth symbol pd5. Note that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. A thick, short arrow with white outline represents a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the changing symbols. Also, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 62 (2) moves to the stage cs in the fluctuation icon display area, and the red fluctuation icon c is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it has been a hold icon until then matches the display mode (red) of the icon after it has become a variable icon. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. In other words, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display during display is not necessarily a big hit and may result in a loss. In FIG. 62 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” in both FIG. 1 and FIG. Also, the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 62 (3) changes the display of the square corresponding to the special figure 1 from gray to white, indicating that the variable figure in the special figure 1 is being displayed. In FIG. 62 (3) where the symbol variation display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 62 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). When it becomes high-speed fluctuation, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbol. In FIG. 62 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, but also when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, when a prize is awarded to the special figure starting port (when holding increases), At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate when continuing (at the start of re-variation), when reaching a reach state, when starting a super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter display. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed to display contents related to the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 62 (4) has a white meter frame mf, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of a first meter display. The meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 62 is of an increasing type, is provided with five scales, and is full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 62 (4) is displayed in an empty state (the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 62 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (6), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 62 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 62 (6), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that fluctuates (temporarily stops). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative design that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is the first stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning (when holding increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain performance, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 or during the pseudo-continuous performance Time (at the start of re-variation), start of reach state, start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter. The meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 62 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rising item UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 62 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 62 (9), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the meter increase timing is the second stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning a prize at the starting point (when holding increases), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to a pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, and at the pseudo-continuous production, When stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing of meter increase. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  In FIG. 62 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts fluctuation fluctuation (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter raising item UpI is a position overlapping the right symbol from which the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) has started from the front side. In FIG. 62 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 62 (12), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) by one scale. As a result, the meter of the white meter display MW has been raised to the second scale.

  In FIG. 62 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 62 (14), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 62 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, Tono-sama, appears, and the line “Still Still” is displayed, indicating that re-variation is likely to start. In FIG. 62 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 62 (17), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start high-speed variation. In FIG. 62 (18), the character display of “× 2”, which is the continuous count display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 62 in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 63 (19) following FIG. 62 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left starts a notice that a mini item will appear. . That is, a treasure chest icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 63 (20), a closed treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the information display section ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of a mini item. In FIG. 63 (21), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and the meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  It should be noted that the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 63 (20) is closed without disappearing, nothing appears even when opened, or an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item with a question mark) Or x-marked items or unfortunate character display items) may appear. In other words, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that a mini item will appear.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 66 (22), the moving meter up item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the part of the meter rising item UpI.

  In FIG. 63 (23), the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to reach the white meter display MW and overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 63 (24), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW further increases by one scale, and the white meter display MW increases to the third scale.

  When the meter rising item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter rising item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

  In FIG. 63 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. In FIG. 63 (27), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. 28 (28), the left symbol that has fluctuated changes to the first decorative symbol display device. The right symbol that has moved to the upper left corner of 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (29), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd on the display stage ss. Then, the information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

  In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts also disappears. Here, no hold icon remains, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variation icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is continuously displayed. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Moreover, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and further, the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

  In FIG. 63 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the wilderness background, the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device is displayed. The display of the display stage ss and the Tono-sama character cd disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (30), the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are displayed, and a duel scene of two people is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 63 (31) is a state where the meter has accumulated up to 3 scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. The meter is used from FIG. 63 (32) to FIG. 33 (33), and the white meter display MW decreases, and in FIG. 33 (33), it is in a 0 state (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 63 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the main character's character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the green aura icon, and the golden aura icon has a rich hit The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes into seven colors has the highest expectation level for the jackpot, and corresponds to a higher level of the jackpot (for example, a jackpot decision).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (35), a scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 36 (36), a scene in which the Tono-sama character was lost. Is displayed, and “decoration 3”, which is different from “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a medium symbol. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is finished, and the third symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is fixedly displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and the second ornamental symbol display device is displayed. In 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was a Hazle Supa Reach production.

  The example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed. Become.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  In the following description, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 62 to 63 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  Similarly to the state shown in FIG. 62 (1), the state shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”. Further, a first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode that is a display mode of a prefetch notice. Yes. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 64 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 64 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The base symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 64 (3), a variation icon c having a green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 64 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 64 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state where the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 64 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the Tono-sama character cd. The display of the line “Ikuzo” corresponds to a notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 64 (6), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 64 (7), the character cd of Tono throws the change ball icon cI, and the moving animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 64 (7), the changing ball icon cI has moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 64 (8), the changing ball icon cI is displayed in the white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 64 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 64 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The effect that the Tono-sama character cd continues to appear as shown in FIGS. 64 (6) to (8) corresponds to an example of a meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effects shown in FIGS. 64 (6) to (8) are a kind of rank-up effects. It corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9) is also empty (the meter is 0). Also, a sound effect for notifying the change in meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (9).

  In FIG. 64 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In addition, the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 64 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 64 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Similarly to FIG. 62 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 64 (13), similarly to FIG. 62 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves to the position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 64 (14), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales at a stretch. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 is easier to accumulate than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state. It is comprised so that it may become. This is a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter rising item UpI) in the red meter display MR rather than a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter increase item UpI) in the white meter display MW. There will be more. Note that the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (blue color here), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described in FIG. In FIG. 64 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to slow down. In FIG. 7 ") becomes recognizable, and it will eventually reach the reach state. In FIG. 64 (16), it is a reach state, and the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 64 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 64 (18), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales again, and the red meter display MR is in a full state. Note that the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (18) in which the meter rising item UpI has disappeared and the rising effect of the red meter display MR has ended.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (19) that continues from FIG. 64 (18), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in the following (20), the left symbol that has fluctuated fluctuates. The right design that has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative design display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (21), it has evolved into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and as in FIG. 62 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town The screen changes from the background screen to the swordsman Misan screen. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In this super reach production, as shown in FIG. 65 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is switched to the wilderness background, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M still has the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. 63 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 65. Conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 65 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (23), the full red meter display MR is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. Yes. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, Tono-sama greatly powers up and wins, that is, the expectation of jackpot increases. The meter is used from FIG. 65 (24) to FIG. 25 (25), the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, in FIG. It corresponds to an example of a state). In FIG. 65 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 is added behind the main character's character. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It should be noted that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a higher level of big hit (for example, big hit determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (27), a scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 28 (28), a scene in which the Tono-sama character wins. Is displayed, and “decoration 7”, which is the same as “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 65 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from an empty state (a meter is 0 state) to a full tank state, and a big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is finally more than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. It is easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the state changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the empty state does not change to the full tank state. The super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 65 corresponds to an example of a notice display that starts when the red meter display MR changes to a full tank state.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 66 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 64 (1) to (6). In FIG. 66 (7), the character cd throws a change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 66 (7), the changing ball icon cI moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the changing icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The icon cI hits the variation icon c, and the variation icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. In addition, the display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 66 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display hits as shown in FIG. 64 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 66 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green so far changes to red. The red variation icon is more likely to win a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked up here. Note that the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. In the example shown in FIG. 66, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the change icon c. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 67 is an increase type.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to (f) corresponds to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 and FIGS. 64 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Also, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67A is an empty state (a state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 67 (a) also shows a white meter raising item UpI. The meter rising item UpI is an item whose rate of increase of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter by a first amount.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty is raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. Note that the state of the white meter display MW illustrated in FIG. 67B corresponds to an example of a second state that is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 67 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a second amount.

  FIG. 67 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which is in an empty state, is raised by two scales by the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. Has been. The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 67 (e) shows a red meter rising item UpIr. This red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a third amount.

  FIG. 67 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been in the empty state has been raised by four scales by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. Has been. The red meter rising item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was in an empty state is in a state where it has been raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (in which it has been raised by 6 scales) by the golden meter rising item. . Thus, the rate of increase of the meter is not constant and may vary depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 67 (g) to (l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 64 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a greater amount of meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit here is, for example, a big hit with probability variation or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

  FIG. 67 (g) shows a default white meter rising item UpI, and FIG. 67 (h) shows a red meter display MR meter in an empty state, the white meter rising item. A state (fifth state) is shown that is raised by 3 scales at a time by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

  FIG. 67 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb. In FIG. 67 (j), a red meter display MR meter that is empty is displayed by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It shows a state where it has risen by 6 scales at once, that is, a state where the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by 6 scales (all scales) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled compared to the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

  FIG. 67 (k) shows a green meter rising item UpIm. The green meter rising item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the meter is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the remaining scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Is done. The type of meter display that is additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 67 (l), a red meter display MR of the same type as the meter display type that is full is additionally displayed below the meter display that is full. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 67 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is a gold meter may be displayed below the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (l) has risen to 3 scales corresponding to the remaining scales.

  The meter display shown in FIG. 67 (m) and FIG. 67 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN whose meter frame mf is rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. In the state in which the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full no matter how many colors of the meter rising item are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is empty and the white meter rising item UpI, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 67 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the rainbow meter is always full, and further, the jackpot is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is a remaining scale (overflowed scale) when the tank is full, a big hit is confirmed, so a new meter as shown in FIG. The display is not added and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of a color, you may make it raise only by the same scale (for example, 1 scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the big hit expectation.

  In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above. However, if supplemented here, the meter rising item may be a big hit during symbol variation, long-term variation, pre-reach, super-reach, or temporary It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a jackpot notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or starts after the fluctuation. It may be a jackpot notice (pre-read notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expected degree of jackpot in the above description, the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation may be used, or the expected degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display started after that.

  Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 67 (g) to (l), and FIGS. 67 (m) and 67 (n). In addition to the color of the meter frame mf, the rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes, and may have different display positions. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

  Further, when viewed with one meter display, the first state is that the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 67 (a), etc. FIG. 67 (b) or FIG. 67 (d) or FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) in which the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the meter frame is white and full in the third state (not shown in FIG. 67). 67 (g) and the like, and the meter frame is red and empty is the fourth state, and the meter frame is red and is not empty and not full as shown in FIG. 67 (h). Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 67 (j) is red and full is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  The state shown in FIG. 68 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3”. In this state, there is no special figure hold, and the first symbol pd1 continues to be stopped until it wins the special figure starting port 230,232. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (1). The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed from the stage before FIG. 68 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 68 (2), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. 68 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1. Then, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c in the white display mode which is the default display mode is started. Further, even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the empty white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the empty white meter display MW is displayed. Continues until FIG. 68 (18).

  In FIG. 68 (4), which is changing the pattern of special figure 1, there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display form, which is the default display form, has started. Further, in FIG. 68 (6), there is a single ball entrance at the first special figure starting port 230, and the display state of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon in the green display mode (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) is started.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 68 (8), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (including during the fixed display) in FIG. 68 (1) and FIGS. 68 (8) to (9). The meter display may be always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 68 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 68 (10) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 68 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first display icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In FIG. 68 (11), a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. A change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the characters “weird”.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 68 (13), the Tono-like character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It has been changed to "if you win."

  In FIG. 68 (14), the Tono-sama character cd releases an arrow, and the arrow icon that is released and represents the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 68 (15), the flying arrow icon is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the left half of the arrow icon appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half appears to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs and part of the arrow icon is invisible.

  In FIG. 68 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M brilliantly. In FIG. 68 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 64 (8), but may be a different effect display such as a different color. It should be noted that the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different posture from the initial posture although the pose has been changed. In FIG. 68 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white icon The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 69 (19) following FIG. 68 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It has changed. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 69 (19) is also empty (the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in raising the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the one with the bow pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the Tono-sama character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain unchanged with the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the change icon I2 with the effect display ed3 added or the change icon I2 not added has overlapped with the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself is not ranked up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR changes to the white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 69 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 69 (21), the combination display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 69 (22), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 69 (21) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 69 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 63, a treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 69 (25), a closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 69 (26), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 69 (27), the moving meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 69 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. The meter display MR is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 69 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter can be stored more easily than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 scales at once.

  In FIG. 69 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. In the following FIG. 69 (32), the left symbol that has been fluctuating moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated is the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. In FIG. 69 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 63, super-reaching production (swordsman reach production) is developed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the screen for visiting the swordsman. It has changed. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In FIG. 69 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N all switch to the wilderness background, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character. Duel scene of has started. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state (corresponding to an example of a fifth state) where three scales are accumulated. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated.

  Note that the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIG. 68 (3) and FIG. 68 (10) before the meter display changes.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 69 in stages.

  69 (36) to 70 (37), the meter is used, and the red meter display MR decreases, and in FIG. 70 (37), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 70 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 suggesting a big hit is added behind the main character's character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (39), the scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 4” that is the same as “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 70 (41), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 42 (42), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63 and the examples shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. In this example, which is a red meter display MR, it is a big hit super reach production. In this way, the degree of expectation for jackpots varies depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf) separately from the storage state of the meter. That is, if the meter storage state (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation level than the white meter display MW.

  71 is a diagram showing an example of re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 70 (41) in a stepwise manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation of jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but is in a state where three scales are accumulated. . Therefore, the degree of expectation for winning an advantageous jackpot is also high, and re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, winning big wins (for example, big hits with probability variation or big hits with many rounds) that are more advantageous when the red meter display MR is stored for 3 scales than the white meter display MW is stored for 3 scales. Expectation to be higher.

  Here, from the state where three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the button effects include a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which an operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It should be noted that the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

  In FIG. 71 (43 ') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation effective period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (45 '). In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 71 (46 ′), the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ In the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with probability change has been won. Yes. In other words, it is promoted from jackpot with short time (electric support) to jackpot with probability change.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration”. 7 "-" decoration 7 "will change to a shaking display, will be confirmed, and will be promoted to a big hit with certainty.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a mini game that tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 72 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 72 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 72 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 72 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini-game such as “If you win over drinking”. In FIG. 72 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the townscape of the castle town so far changes to a background image of a mini-game compared to drinking between Tono-sama and Sakai. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 72 (6), an explanation display that a sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when Tono-sama wins the mini game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game. In FIG. (7), a mini-game for drinking comparison is started. In FIG. 72 (8), the victory of Tono-sama in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 72 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 72 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In the present specification, the phrase “difficult to visually recognize” means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize compared to the states before and after that. In FIG. 72 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

  If Tono-sama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 72 corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing interstage examples in which a big hit is determined by the change when the meter display becomes full.

  FIGS. 73 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (9). In FIG. 73 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, Swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a golden meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 73 (10), the white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the big hit is determined with the change. That is, when a meter rising item (gold color here or red as shown in FIG. 67 (e)) that is easy to store the meter appears, a big hit is more likely than a meter rising item (for example, white) that is difficult to store the meter. Expectation increases. In FIG. 73 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 73 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 divisions, there is an excess of one division, but since the big hit has been confirmed by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game ends, the remaining one division will continue until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, a voice “congratulations” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 73 (12). The sound output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound for notifying that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

  In FIG. 73 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. 73 (14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner, and in FIG. 73 (15), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 73 described above is an example when the white meter display MW changes from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. When the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally reached, rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. Is easy to confirm. Furthermore, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the state is changed from the empty state to the full state is more than the case where the state is not changed from the empty state to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. However, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  74 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending left and right with a vertical stripe pattern. The base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 74 is a base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. In addition, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI 'shown in FIG. Since the white icon display MW has a high base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 74, the white meter display MW is completely within the holding frame UI ′ and integrated with the holding frame UI ′. It suffices if a part of UI ′ is covered. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap with the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of a holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. In the example shown in FIG. 74, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period in which the hold frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

  In FIG. 74 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 74 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 74 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 74 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 74 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 74 (6), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared, and Tono-sama character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 74 (7), the Tono-like character cd throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Note that the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 74 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps the base icon UIb ′. You may display so that all may overlap.

  In FIG. 74 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state where one scale is accumulated. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continue when meter is full” is displayed.

  In FIG. 74 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 74 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. In FIG. 74 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops, and fluctuation fluctuation starts (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 74 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 74 (14), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) to a full tank at once.

  In FIG. 74 (15), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 changes at a low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 74 (16), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 74 (17), as in FIG. 62 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 74 (18), the cut-in display disappears, re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed variation, and the left symbol A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps. The white meter display MW that has been in a full state continues to be displayed until re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to an empty state in response to the start of re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  The pseudo-continuous production described with reference to FIG. 74 shows that the meter display (here, the white meter display MW is another meter display (for example, the red meter display MR)) is full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the display changes.

  The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW is displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous effect) in FIG. 74 (16), and may return to an empty state.

  The timing at which the meter display returns to the empty state is the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display subject to notice when the meter display is a normal notice), or the meter display. Is a symbol change display immediately before the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, or in the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, the empty symbol is displayed when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state. For example, in each of the symbol variation displays described above, the state may be returned to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display may be returned to the empty state and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but the display may continue in an empty state. In addition, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of acquiring and stocking mini items step by step when the meter display meter is full.

  75 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (6). In FIG. 75 (7), the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 75 (8), the moving animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 75 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 scales.

  In FIG. 75 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the reach state is formed or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 75 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW stored for four scales. In FIG. 75 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW stored for 4 scales, the scale of 3 scales (overflow) However, in FIG. 75 (12), there is no indication of the remaining scale. In FIG. (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a type, appears, and a character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side on the right symbol or the like temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3. The pseudo-continuous notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And it is displayed on the information display part ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (15), the remaining three scales are added to the empty white meter display MW. In other words, the display of the overflowed state due to the full tank state is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 75 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that has become full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion. Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 75 (16), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. In addition, a text display of “Activate” is displayed below the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activation” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-announcement item NI is activated, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 75 (17), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display becomes full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to jackpot (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), the meter display full state is equivalent to high expectation of jackpot, Eventually, the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in a single full meter display.

  FIGS. 76 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (6). In FIG. 76 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, two meter rising items, a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 76 (8), the movement animation of two meter rising items is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move from the front side to the position where the white meter display MW in the empty state overlaps. To do. As described above with reference to FIG. 67, the meter with the white meter display MW is an item for raising the red meter up item UpIr by 4 scales, and the blue meter rise item UpIb is an item for raising the scale by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 76 (9), both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter that has been empty until now is the red meter rising item. Ascending up to 4 scales as UpIr, and ascending by 2 scales as blue meter rising item UpIb, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 76 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 76 (10), two pseudo-announcement items NI that are a kind of mini-item appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and “decoration 7” of the right design that is temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 75, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rising item UpIr. In this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising item UpIb. White meter display MW is full with meter rising items. Whether the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb This is an easy-to-store item. From this, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 76 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display “GET” disappears. One pseudo continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo continuous notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (12), the empty white meter display MW is still displayed, and the opportunity to raise the white meter display MW remains after this. When there is no chance or when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Also, one of the two pseudo-continuous notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. “Activate” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (12), one pseudo-continuous notice item NI is first digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped and re-variation is started. Then, a second temporary stop and a start of re-variation are performed by the stocked second pseudo-continuous notice item NI.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, pre-reading notice items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol change display.

  Also, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 76, a plurality of items may be stocked when one meter is full, but on the contrary, items may not be stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW becomes full due to the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example in which the meter display in the full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 77 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 76 (1) to (8). In FIG. 76 (9), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes slowly. Thus, the right design (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In addition, the meter rising item of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappears, and the white meter display MW meter that has been empty until now becomes full even in the example of FIG. 77. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 77 (10), in this example, an item such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI does not appear, and the white meter display MW is kept full. Further, in the third symbol pd3, “decoration 1” different from the left symbol of “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. That is, it does not enter the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 77 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW becoming full, and the display content is related to the pre-reading notice such as “next chance”. .

  In FIG. 77 (11), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In FIG. 77 (12), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” are displayed in a shaking manner. This combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” is a chance eye, and in FIG. 77 (13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in response to the shaking indication (temporary stop) of the chance eye. The flash pattern fd emits light with a transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the light. Note that the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 77 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 77 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Also, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance item such as “the order of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a stopped state or a final display, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 77 (16), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special diagram 1 shown in FIG. 15 (15), that is, the next symbol variation display is started, and the low velocity variation starts in the third symbol pd3. Has been. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white state meter display MW continues to be displayed in a full state and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. 77 (9) to (15) in FIG. 77 corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 16 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is full and the item is digested without being stocked even if the item appears.

  FIGS. 78 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (6). In FIG. 78 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 78 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to a position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 78 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 78 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as the reach state is formed, or at the timing before and after the reach state, an operation means notice display icon 136I which is a kind of mini item appears on the right end of the full white meter display MW, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that an effect of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 78 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect) according to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated as accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the operation of the operation unit is invalid. This color indicates that the operation is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 78 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (13), the button effect is started for the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 71, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display “press” as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation means to operate, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button.

  In FIG. 78 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation valid period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing (15) in FIG. In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 78 (16), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display corresponds to a normal notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the item acquired by the meter full is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device that is different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. It is also used during symbol variation display that is being performed when display is started. However, there may be cases where the operation means notice display icon 136I remains white and is stocked until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, stock until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display may be stocked. Also good.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed and the normal notice is executed.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear.

  In FIG. 79 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 79 (2), the combination display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 79 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special diagram 1 shown in FIG. 79 (2) is started, and the low speed change is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 79 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, on the upper left of the third symbol pd3) , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the display of the two white meter displays MW is started separately, but the display may be started together.

  In FIG. 79 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped. In FIG. 79 (8), a red meter rising item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 79 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW is increased by four scales.

  In FIG. 79 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 79 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the right white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 79 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW rises by 5 scales.

  In FIG. 79 (13), the change of the middle symbol that has continued the high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 79 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 79 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-simultaneous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 79 (16), two of these three white meter rising items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 79 (17), the meter is raised by the meter raising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, a chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW and a character display of “GET” is displayed. On the right white meter display MW, the swordsman reach item RI is displayed. A character display of “GET” is displayed as it appears. The chance-up item CUI that appears on the left white meter display MW is an icon indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the current symbol change display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the right white meter display MW RI is an icon for notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach that is a kind of super reach production in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 79 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW that have been full disappears, the character display of each “GET” disappears, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Note that each of the two white meter displays MW that are full may be changed to an empty state without erasing them. As shown in FIG. 79 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 80 (1), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area.

  In FIG. 80 (3), the variable display of the 3rd symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 80 (3) is a default display mode similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 80 (2), the hold icon, which is the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, shifts and shifts the display mode as it is, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4), after the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol pd3 is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3). Equivalent to an example of meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 80 (6), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 80 (7), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 80 (8), Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 80 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW It is displayed so as to overlap the right end from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 80 (9) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the right white meter display MW is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yes. In FIG. 80 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while being in an empty state (the meter is 0). Yes. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display is changed from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the zero state) together with the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 80 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 80 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (first). Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of “decoration 7” from the front side.

  In FIG. 80 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, the left empty white meter display MW and the right side A blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed on each empty red meter display MR. As described above, the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item that is raised by 2 scales for the white meter display MW and is raised by 6 scales for the red meter display MR. In FIG. 80 (14), the left and right blue meter rising items UpIb disappear, and the left white meter display MW meter rises only by two scales, whereas the right red meter display MR meter shows It is rising to a full tank at once. In the red meter display MR on the right side that is full, a swordsman reach item RI appears and a character display of “GET” is displayed. It should be noted that no item has appeared in the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 80 (17), only the red meter display MR on the right side, which is full of two meter displays, disappears, and the character display of “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 80 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 80 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variation icon c disappears. After all, the stock swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol change display at the time of appearance. Accordingly, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a pre-reading type icon for notifying the development of the swordsman reach which is a kind of super reach production in the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 80 in stages.

  In FIG. 81 (19) following FIG. 80 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the pre-reading notice mode of FIG. In the 3 symbol pd3, the low speed fluctuation is started. Note that the fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and functions as a normal notice. Further, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two scales shown in FIG. 80 (18) is still displayed even after a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, a continuous symbol variation display is straddled with the meter accumulated.

  In FIG. 81 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 81 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 81 (22), the left symbol variation becomes even slower, the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation. Has changed.

  In FIG. 81 (23), the left symbol temporarily stops and fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after.

  In FIG. 81 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 81 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (25), the vehicle enters the reach state, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 81 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display “Activate” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 81 (27), the left symbol that has been fluctuating moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated is the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (28), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI has disappeared from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 81 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 65 (22) and after, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has been stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 81 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the Tono-sama character. In the example shown in FIG. 63, in the power-up from the white meter display MW that has accumulated only up to three scales, the green aura icon OI1 is shown in FIG. 63 (34), but this is shown in FIG. In the example, if multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it is easier to hit big than the case where only one meter display is shown, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of big hit It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR or the like) is displayed rather than only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed more easily, and the color of the aura icon is likely to be a color with a higher expectation level for the jackpot.

All the meter displays so far are of the increasing type, and the display was started in an empty state (the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 82 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 82 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 in the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 82 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as “when the meter appears with a little accumulated” scrolls in the tutorial display ts. Displayed.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started on the third symbol pd3 while the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) is a state where one scale is stored, and corresponds to an example of a second state. In addition, a “chance” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in a state where the meter is accumulated halfway.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 82 (5), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is made. In FIG. 82 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the lord carries the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 82 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 82 (8), the golden meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 82 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state where one scale is accumulated to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter at least for 5 scales, when the display is started with the meter display accumulated halfway, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

  In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when the state of being stored halfway is changed to the full tank state than when the state of being stored halfway is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Furthermore, in the case where the white meter display MW is displayed in the state where it is accumulated halfway, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled.

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a meter effect by meter display showing numerical values in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 83 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as “When the meter is red”. On the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 83 (2), a white numerical meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 83 (2), a sound effect (appears). Sound) is output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%. This state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 83 (2), the tutorial display ts is changed to display contents such as “Meter MAX reached”.

  In FIG. 83 (3), the eight-seen actor 224 Fa that is one of the movable means falls from the top of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L. According to the operation of the movable means, a white meter rising item UpI appears as shown in FIG. 83 (4). However, the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 83 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 83 (6), the eight generations 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter raising item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 83 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 83 (7). The UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 83 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display increases from 00% to 10%. Yes. The state of the white numerical meter display DW performing 10% numerical display shown in FIG. 83 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 83 (9), the shogunate 224Fb falls from the top of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 83 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb in accordance with the movement of the general character 224Fb which is a movable means. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 83 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward to eliminate the overlap with the falling general character 224Fb, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 83 (12), the general character 224Fb rises and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 83 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW until then changes to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display). In other words, the meter display is replaced with a different type. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but by a change effect (in this case, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Also, the rate of increase in the numerical value varies depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numerical meter display and the type of the item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

  In FIG. 83 (14), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 83 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 83 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. Note that the hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by winning a prize at the usual figure starting port accompanied by a prize ball, or accompanied by a prize ball Regardless of whether or not it is possible to trigger a game ball passing through the usual figure starting gate, it may be triggered by winning a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu), or there is only a prize ball It may be triggered by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226, or may be triggered by entering a ball outlet for production.

  Further, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be obtained by winning or entering the special drawing start opening 230, 232, etc., compared to the case where the meter display is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

  In FIG. 83 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR increases from 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display representing 100%, for example. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (17) corresponds to an example of a sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 83, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 83 (18), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. . The character display of “Gekiatsu” may be a display indicating that the big hit in the change is rich or that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 83 changes according to the operation of the operation means.

  FIG. 84 (1) shows that the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed. In FIG. 84 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. A first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 84 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed on a white round icon in red for prompting an operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red and prompts the operation. In FIG. 84 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 84 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW changes to a red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a is eliminated, and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode is set. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit with the change, and in the case of a pre-reading notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Note that the numerical meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry over to the next change after the MAX display).

  Thus, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special figure starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of effects different from the meter effects described so far in stages.

  In FIG. 85, the display showing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described so far, but here, the number of characters appearing is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 85 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 85 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 85 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “When a character appears”. In FIG. 85 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 85 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the streets of the castle town disappears so far. The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 85 (5) corresponds to an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, no character display, ie, the first state or the fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (6), the princess Chibi character display cd1 appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 85 (7), a heel character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more”. In FIG. 85 (8), a princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the Chibi princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to “one more person”. The state shown in FIG. 85 (6), the state shown in FIG. 85 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 85 (8) correspond to the second state or the fifth state, respectively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 85, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 85 (9), a character display of “failure” is displayed, and all the members cannot be assembled, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 85 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 85 (12), the combination display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  Note that the color of the character's silhouette is usually gray, but when the other person is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four persons is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four people are gathered, the expectation level of jackpot is very high, and the level of jackpot may be high, or a level higher than the jackpot density (for example, jackpot confirmation). Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not become “failure”, and a degree of expectation of jackpot may be given to some extent, or even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the change Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is caused by a symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an error occurs during meter display.

  FIGS. 86 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (4). In FIG. 86 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, which is shown in FIG. In the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (just above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as “please remove the sphere” is displayed. This error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed overlapping with at least a part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may overlap the meter display from the front side or the overlapping part may be seen through.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 86 (7), the left symbol temporarily stops. However, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping the part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped, from the front side, while the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all) of the decorative symbol from the front side. Thus, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 86 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 86 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 86 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by 4 scales, but the right half or more of the white meter display MW is hidden by the error display ER1. As a result, it is impossible to confirm how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (9), four notes are output here as one note rises by one scale. Note that the meter storage (rising state) is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can also be notified by the light emission mode of light emitting means such as lamps and frame lamps around the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 86 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 86 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the first meter rising item, appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. As shown in FIG. 86 (12), the white meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 86 (13), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed whether or not the sound has been played, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (13).

  In FIG. 86 (14), a white meter rising item UpI appears without a mini-item appearance notice shown in FIG. 74 (5) and the like, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 86 (15), Tono-sama character cd throws white meter rising item UpI, and white meter rising item UpI hits white meter display MW and should be displayed on white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 86 (16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale by the white meter increase item UpI. However, since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 86 (16) is in a full state, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. It is output.

  In FIG. 86 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW, and at the position of the middle symbol in the third symbol pd3 that continues high-speed fluctuation. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps both the pseudo-continuous notice item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired. .

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of an example of error display ER1 shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (19) following FIG. 86 (18), the character display of “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (20), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW is continuously displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 87 (21), the pseudo-continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested. An error display ER1 overlaps from the front side on the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 87 (22), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 87 (23), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo continuous symbol.

  In FIG. 87 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed to the end. That is, when the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as “please remove the ball” is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 automatically disappears.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the amount of accumulation, etc.). May display the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display so that the ball removal operation can be performed quickly. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, the player's line of sight is likely to gather all the time, and the error display ER1 is displayed on the meter display so that the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. There is also an effect.

  Also, in this example, a prize winning error that is more serious than the dish full tank error occurs, and the display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (24). Thus, an error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of a winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. It may be possible to tell that a serious error has occurred by overlapping another error display ER2 on the error display ER1. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a store clerk, or an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is resolved Errors that are not hidden (cannot be deleted) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as serious errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Alternatively, the more serious the error is described in the list shown in FIG. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the other hand, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. Errors that automatically disappear (disappear) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

  Also, the error display in FIGS. 86 and 87 is the same in various error displays described in FIGS. 172 to 174 described later. In particular, the notification content described as “liquid crystal display” in the “mode” in FIG. 174 describing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 86 and 87.

  In the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front” is replaced with the description “at least a part of the display overlaps at least a part of the other display from the front”. All of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, all of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side, The part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side” can be read in reverse, that is, “the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side”.

  In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which a display indicating a certain amount or number only increases. However, even if the display indicating a certain amount or number increases or decreases, Of course, it may be of a decreasing type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only decreases.

  Further, the meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW and a red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 85 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands or display using the number of figures and symbols. Also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently, instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless changed from the white meter display MW.

  Further, the red meter display MR may change when the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and the display of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started with the halfway stored. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself that has been stored halfway may be started alone. In these cases, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display is started halfway than when the display is started in an empty state.

  Furthermore, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the red meter display MR is stored halfway than when the white meter display MW is stored halfway.

  In addition, in the above description, it is easy to “definitely display the big hit symbol finally”. The statement to that effect is “easy to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than an unfavorable jackpot”. It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 88 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 49 are not provided.

  FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 89), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 89) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of medals can be made electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 89 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. A numerical meter display DR, a display using the number of appearances of characters shown in FIG. 85, and the like].
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 and the like, and a left meter display shown in FIGS. 79 (4) to (17). 80 (4) to (18) in the left meter display, or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 83 and 84].
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 79 (5) to (17)]. 80 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), right-side meter display, red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, or display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 85]. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a third state (for example, a full state),
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a sixth state (for example, a full state),
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 73 or the example shown in FIG. 79]
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 or the example shown in FIG. 80]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, there may be a period in which the first meter display and the fourth meter display are displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be a display that is always displayed simultaneously, or may be a display that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. The first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
'The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is more than the sixth meter display than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. The probability of changing to the state of is configured to be higher,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the amount of one state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one state change in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display is changed from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display is changed from the first state to the third state. Finally, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 64 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9)] in which the first meter display in the first state is changed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth state in the fourth state. The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  In addition, the first meter display in the third state is not changed to the fourth meter display, but the first meter display in the second state is changed to the fourth meter display. You may be there.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the first meter display in the first state may always change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Also,
“The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 64 (6) to (8). Change production],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation means being operated.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display in which the display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started by the fourth effect. Also good. That is, the first meter display disappears, and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. You may be comprised so that the display of the four meter display may be started.

Also,
The fourth production is a production using a fourth character.
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays by the display means [for example, FIG. 64 (1) and FIG. ] Is a character [for example, Tono-sama character cd],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation | variation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design, or may be a character that disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be displayed continuously during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that disappears in the middle of the display, or it may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be a character.

  Note that the fourth character may be a character that is displayed without fail over a continuous variation display of the decorative design.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 68 (1), FIG. 68 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be a display that is continued until the stop display is being displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display.

  Here, the first meter display is a display that may change state during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display that always changes state during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol. The display may change in state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbols by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped, rather than during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the loss symbol is stopped. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display that is always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decoration symbol of one of the plurality of decoration symbol variation displays is a variation display of the first decoration symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 68 (1)],
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 68 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 68 (10) to 69 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a display of a fifth decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 69 (22) to 70 (42)],
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is in an empty state at the timing of FIG. 68 (1), for example, when the state differs between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decoration symbol variation display. In contrast, when the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 68 (7)],
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 69 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 69 (29) in contrast to the state of]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finished, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is finished, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fourth decorative symbol is displayed, the fifth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fifth decorative symbol is displayed, the sixth decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative display of the decorative pattern may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped. Alternatively, when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big bonus symbol is stopped. It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is necessarily different between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth meter display is The display may always be different between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display that starts displaying in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

  By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time the meter appears or changes.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start display in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. .

Also,
[The fourth meter display is the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 64 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 64 (14)] The display may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 64 (18)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9), etc.] that may be displayed in the fourth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth state,
When the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the fourth meter is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that does not start in the fifth state, or a display that may start in the fifth state. Also good.

  Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fourth state, or a display that always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fifth state, or a display that always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 73 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 73 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 73 (12)],
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 73 (4), etc.] that may be displayed in the first state.
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4)] that may be displayed in the second state.
The first meter display, when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it is easier for the first meter display to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The first meter display may be a display that does not start in the third state or a display that may start in the third state. Also good.

  Further, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, and the second amount or number is the difference between the first amount or number and the third amount or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state, or a display that always changes from the first state to the second state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display that always starts in the second state, or a display that always changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 73 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 73 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 73 (12)],
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [e.g., the empty state shown in FIG. 64 (9)] to the fifth state [e.g., the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 64 (14)]. Is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 64 (18)],
The case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol in the end than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started in the first state, and the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be The display may start in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter is started in the fifth state, it is finally a big hit than when the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state and may change to the second state, the display is started in the first state, and the second state. The display may change to the third state via the display, the display starts in the first state, the display may change to the third state, and the display is in the second state. Is started and the display may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is followed by the fifth state, and the sixth state. The display is started in the fourth state, the display may be changed to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state is displayed. The display may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display is started through the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  Note that the display is started in the fourth state and does not have to change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
In the first meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 67 (c)] is displayed for the first number of times [for example, three times]. A display that changes from the first state to the third state;
In the fourth meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 67 (i)] is displayed for the fourth number of times [for example, once]. A display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, if the state changes in a small number of times, the amount of change in one time is large.

Also,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 72]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] corresponding to the number of held balls in the hold display area [eg, the hold frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 74]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in the hold display area. The display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One of the plural types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 67 (m) and (n)],
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit may be rich. In addition, if the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state (for example, full state), even if the big hit symbol is surely displayed finally. Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  Further, when the first meter display is changed to the third state, the decorative symbol change display displayed on the display means when the first meter display is changed to the third state. When the big hit symbol is surely displayed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variation display of the decorative symbol being displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

  When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 74] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The notice display is a display [for example, a super reach production shown in FIG. 65] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, as the notice display, the pseudo-continuous effect display, the operation means related display, the notice display about the big hit (normal notice display or pre-read notice display), the notice display about the effect (for example, the super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can do. That is, as the notice display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo-continuous effect display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may start when the first meter display changes to the third state. The pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display that always starts when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter display. The display may always be started when the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display is the fourth meter display is the sixth display. The display may always be started when the state changes to.

  Here, operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation means related display, and the operation means related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means related display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The display related to the operation means may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting to operate the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the effective period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)), a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of the above or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of a decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. Is a notice display for the jackpot in the display, the normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, the normal notice display is The display may be started when the four meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be a super reach effect display, for example. In addition, the normal notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the fourth meter display that is The display may always be started when the state changes to the sixth state.

Also,
The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa)
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [eg, a full state or vice versa)
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [eg, an empty state or vice versa]
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full state or vice versa)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts or numbers, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be.

  Further, the third amount or number is an amount or number smaller than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount smaller than the fourth amount or number or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  The third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount greater than the fourth amount or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

  Further, the first state is a full state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full state, and the sixth state is an empty state. On the contrary, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state is The state may be a full tank state.

  Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. Yes, the fourth meter display may change from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be partially different (for example, only the meter frame mf) or different in color (for example, white and red, etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different colors. Note that the colors may continue to be different. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period. That is, the color may change, and the color may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Further, it is only necessary that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different only in the color of the frame display, or may be different only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in only part of the colors.

Also,
'The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different sizes (display sizes). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may vary, and it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or only different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the magnitude | size when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
'The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Or a display position may differ only for a fixed period. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the display position when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  “Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 90 to 176. 90 to 176 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 90 to 176 in principle, and even if the same reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 176, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 90 to 176 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs low sound) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the outer frame 102 is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102. A pair of floating connectors is provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other). Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-frequency speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. It has been. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, and the like. It corresponds to.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124, the chance button 136 that changes the presentation mode of the various presentation devices 206 (see FIG. 92) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136. The chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the balance of the player with respect to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In the operation key unit 137, as the cross key, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged, and a determination key is arranged at the center of the cross key. Yes. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

  The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open with respect to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) Button lamp 138. Production by production movable body is included in front frame door 106 (including production movable body), ball rental display section display, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142, and The operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower pan full detection sensor can be detected.

  In the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The game board 200 may include a door 108), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. The ball launching handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that disables the launching (injection) of the game ball due to the operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player's operation, and the player touches the ball launching handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing strength by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is operated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from a state in which the ball launching handle 134 has not been operated while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, an effect display by the display means, an effect sound by the sound output means, a light emission effect by various decoration LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on the game board or frame) can be mentioned. The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more types of effect means. Further, even with the same type of effect means, there may be effect means for performing an exclusive effect and effect means for not performing it. (For example, the effect moving body of the frame performs a dedicated effect, but the effect moving body of the game board does not perform the dedicated effect, or the effect moving body A of the game board performs the dedicated effect, but the effect moving body B of the game board. (For example, this is also applicable to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 90, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 91 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 90 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball that passes through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball and drops to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104. When the payout device 152 is mounted at a predetermined position, the payout device 152 is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 93) that performs control processing for the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control section 400 (see FIG. 93) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400 The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 93) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 93) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game store clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 93) that performs control processing relating to the above, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 93) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are constructed. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. , A payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply having a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 91 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 91 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three start openings, two first special figure start openings may be provided, one second special figure start opening may be provided, and conversely, one first special figure start opening may be provided. There may be provided two second special figure starting ports. Moreover, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more start ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any one that allows a game ball to be won by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning ports are provided, the other variable winning port is always closed while one of the first variable winning port and the second variable winning port is opened. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable prize winning openings may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special figure starting opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. In addition, the sensor comprised so that detection of only one part among a winning opening, a starting port, and an out port may be sufficient.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 90, the decorative design display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 92 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative design display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 that detect current positions of the shielding device 246 and the rendering movable body 224, and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, using FIGS. 94A to 94D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 94 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of FIG. In FIG. 94 (a), nine types of special maps from "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 94 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 94A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 94 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 94 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown, of which five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 94 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 94 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  Next, the main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 95 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 95 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes), Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, processing for setting WDT 314 activation, permitting access to RAM 308, setting a numerical value for determining the execution cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to each register of timer circuit 312, and main control unit 300 After initial processing of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and processing such as setting the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process goes to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (No at Step S106), the process goes to Step S108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 95 (b), the return activation process will be described. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Processing for clearing, processing for clearing the previous device error status, processing for clearing the device error status for security signals, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 is set as an address for starting RAM clearing, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, the initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 are set as addresses for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, as with the power recovery command. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 95A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, Attacker) In-operation signal, Condition device in-operation signal, Continuing action device in-operation signal, Big prize opening solenoid signal, Ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, Symbol LED data, External terminal board signal, etc. are set Set the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above main control power-on process, the main control unit main loop process starts to execute the main control unit main loop process. After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop process, and if it is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S502 and step S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and when the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the interrupt function is limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of input of signals relating to switches such as the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 and the prize winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 are won matches the winning determination pattern information. The determination result is used. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed. The special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later.

  In step S509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S514.

  In step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and if a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. is set.

  In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. are set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S516, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There are a command indicating that is generated, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a), the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 100, and the special figure shown in FIG. The display confirmation weight process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 102 (a), the special electric charge operation process shown in FIG. 103, the special electric charge remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 106, the special electric charge operation end process shown in FIG. One of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

  In step S603, the easy winning status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined. In the next step S605, the presence / absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated, and there is a change in the special figure processing state. If this is the case (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “waiting for change” state. If applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “hit start display wait state”. If applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608. Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

  In step S608, a sub-command transmission request is set (in this embodiment, after setting a transmission request for a gaming state command including a special drawing and a normal gaming state, a firing position including information on whether or not the player is in a right-handed state. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update process is terminated. The order of sub-command transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

  Next, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “waiting for change” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process.

  In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0. In the case of (when there is no special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when other than 0 (when there is special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball number is 0. When there is no variable game hold (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 1 variable game hold) (step S704: No). In order to execute the processing relating to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. When the process related to special figure 1 is executed, the process is executed in the RAM 308. The stored special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 2 to 4 in special figure 2 is stored in 3 is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to 3, and when the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. 1 is cleared. Thus, the game machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. In addition, each of FIG. 2 and FIG. 1 can store up to 4 holds.

  In step S707, a lottery process per special figure is performed. Although details will be described later, in this special drawing lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is successful is determined. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In the display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery processing per special symbol in step S707 and the random number value. The lottery of the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  110A shows an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 110B shows an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in step S708, the special symbol 1 lottery process in step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the result of the determination in FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  When determining the display symbol data of the special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process in the step S708, the special symbol lottery process in the step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (b). On the basis of the result of the determination of special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number, the display symbol data of special figure 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined. If the symbol data is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process for setting data to be set at the end of the hit (data setting process after the hit is completed) is performed. The after-hit data setting process is a process for setting a gaming state set after the win according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 99 (a), in step S709, a special figure variation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707 and the numerical value range of the random number value. Then, after selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99 (b), the special drawing lottery process (step S707) will be described. FIG. 99B is a flowchart of the lottery process per special figure (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the special figure lottery process, the lottery per special figure is performed with reference to the determination table. In the present embodiment, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used for the lottery per special figure using the same success / failure determination table, but separate special determination tables for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. You may make it prepare.

  FIG. 109A is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination high probability table, and FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination low probability table. In the lottery processing per special figure in step S801, if the special figure 1 is determined to be successful, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special determination high probability table shown in FIG. If the figure is in the low probability state, refer to the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 109 (b). Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the lottery process per special figure in step S801, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for determining whether or not the special figure is shown in FIG. 109 (a). In the case of the special figure low probability state, the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. 109B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Referring back to FIG. 99 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 is other than “big hit”. If it is not “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 109 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process in step S803, the special figure small hitting determination table shown in FIG. 109 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hitting determination table and the acquired random number value, the special figure is determined. Select the result of whether or not to win a small lottery. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 99 (b), in step S804, based on the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) in step S801 and the result of lottery determination (lottery result) of special drawing small lottery in step S803, the RAM 308 Is set to any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lack”. In the next step S805, information indicating “special figure changing” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special symbol state update processing, the symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 100 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In the next step S807, a subcommand (special figure change start command) transmission request is set. In the next step S808, the special figure is displayed. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the change is in progress (2) (or special figure 1), the lottery process per special figure is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the process during symbol change executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol changing process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S901 of the process during symbol variation, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the update target RAM is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the special figure fluctuation time timer set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and whether the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 or not. Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (set special figure fluctuation time) If (No has passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special symbol display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol variation processing is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of Special Figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Change display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation wait process shown in FIG. 101 is called and executed.

  In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special symbol variation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a), or After obtaining the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the special figure stop display based on the graphic type information, the special figure display confirmation timer is set. The process during change is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weighting process is terminated. If not (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status at the time of symbol stop (special symbol variation game) (In this embodiment, a status indicating any one of the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the short-time gaming state) is saved in the RAM 308 as a saved special figure variation time reduction status described later.

  In step S1004, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “big hit”. As a result of this determination, if the success / failure determination type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the correct / failure determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Then, the number of time reductions in the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time reduction number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “small hit”. As a result of this determination, if the determination type is “small hit” (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the determination type is other than “small hit” (step S1008: No), step In step S1009, information indicating “waiting for change” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for test) indicating the special symbol winning / not-accepting type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / notifying type, the number of operations of the special winning combination, the number of winnings of the big winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operating pattern of the special electric winning combination, the operating state of the special electric winning combination, the total number of winnings per win, the flag relating to the abnormal winning of the large winning opening, In addition to clearing information such as the winning end display timer type, at the time of big hit, further clear the easy-to-win status and the special figure status.

  In step S1012, information indicating a “hit start display wait state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 102 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set. In step S1016, a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. In step S1017, according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 102A is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The winning start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “winning start display weight state” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process. .

  In step S1101 of the winning start weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0. If not (step S1101: Yes), the winning start weight process is terminated. If not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, after executing a special power combination release process described later, the hit start wait process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102B is a flowchart of the special power release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

  In step S1201 of the special power combination release process, information indicating “special power combination operation state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation process shown in FIG. 103 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operation state of the special electric character are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the request to release the role release command. Thereby, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process is acquired. In the next step S1205, a special electric actor action pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-1) to FIG. 105 (a-3), the special electric combination operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. Note that FIG. 105 illustrates only a part of them. The special electric combination operation pattern data table stores special electric combination operation data indicating the opening / closing pattern of the variable prize opening 234 for each round. As shown in FIG. 105 (b-1) to FIG. 105 (b-3), the special power combination operation data includes information (open timer pattern, close timer pattern) indicating the open / closed state of the variable prize opening 234, the open state or One or a plurality of timer pattern data composed of time information (special power combination opening / closing timer) for maintaining the closed state is stored. Thereby, various variations can be given to the opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-1), the special electric power operation data 1 shown in FIG. Then, after the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the closing timer pattern 3 is controlled so that the variable winning opening 234 is closed and the operation is ended.

  Also, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-2), the above-mentioned special electric character operation is performed in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, 10R to 15R. While the operation described above is performed by referring to the data 1, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is performed by referring to the special electric charge operation data 4 shown in FIG. 105 (b-3) at the 5R and 9R. Be controlled. That is, at the 5R and 9R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the operation that the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 is executed four times. After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and thereafter, the variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished.

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-3), in the first to fourth rounds, the above-mentioned special electric power operation data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5R to 15R, the special electric combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 105 (b-2) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled. That is, at the 5R to 15R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern 3, the variable prize winning opening 234 is controlled to be maintained in the closed state as it is. Note that another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is acquired. In the next step S1207, the acquired number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations of the special power combination (number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1209, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1210, after the special power combination winning detection timer is cleared, the special power combination release process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the special power combination operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power combination operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates “special power combination operation state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S1301 of the special electric actor operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If the number is smaller (when the number of winnings <the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304. If not (when the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special timer opening / closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern being executed, which is set in step S1208 of the special electric actor release process, is greater than zero. If the opening / closing timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric power actuating process is terminated, and if not (when the special electric power opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 is performed. Proceed to In step S1305, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1306, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired. , It is determined whether or not the special power combination is being operated (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special power combination operating process is terminated. When the special power combination is not operating (when the closing timer pattern is set to information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 106 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special electric utility operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a transmission request for a subcommand (big prize closing command) is issued. Set.

  In step S1312, the special electric prize winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric prize winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting game balls remaining in the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is closed. It is. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (large winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) to OFF, the special electric character operation processing is ended.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes to the difficult entry state when the maximum number of winning balls has passed to the passing area after entering the easy entry state. It functions as an example of variable winning means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the special power combination control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special power combination opening process and the special power combination activation process will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the special power combination control process executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process.

  In step S1401, special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired from the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, which is read and set in step S1208 of the special power combination release process. To do. For example, when the operation pattern of the special electric character shown in the special electric character operation data 1 is set and the round is started, “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 105 (b-1). ”Is acquired. In addition, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 105 (b-1) is completed, the “closing timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. 105 (b-1). The control data of “Pattern 3” is acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether the variable prize opening 234 is opened or closed is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric character. For example, if it is “open timer pattern”, data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is acquired, and if it is “closed timer pattern”, data for closing the variable winning opening 234 (closed) Information).

  In step S1403, a special electric combination opening / closing timer is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the open / close information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S <b> 1404, information indicating acceptance is set in the special power prize winning / impossible state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special power combination winning / impossible state is acceptable is set, it can be accepted that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening. If there is information indicating that acceptance is not possible, even if the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening, it becomes invalid. In step S1405, special electric signal information (test signal) is set. In step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, the special power combination opening / closing timer of the special power combination opening / closing timer is set, and then the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special electric power remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric character remaining sphere detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “remaining sphere detection state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special power combination remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special power combination operation process is in operation. If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric combination remaining sphere detection process is terminated. If not (when the special electric combination operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), the process proceeds to step S1502. move on.

  In step S1502, a special power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special power combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 107 is called and executed. That is, it becomes a state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, the special power combination remaining ball detection process is terminated. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special power signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric utility operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special electric utility operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special power combination operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special power remaining ball detection process is in operation. If it is in operation (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric utility operation end processing is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol win / rejection type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is handled in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure win / loss type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum winning opening number stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is compared with the number of opening of the special winning combination, and it is determined whether or not the number of opening of the special winning combination is less than the maximum opening number of the large winning opening, that is, whether or not the winning is not finished. . If the winning has not ended (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric character release process, and the special electric character operation end process is ended. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is over (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired. In step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 108 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting a transmission request for the subcommand (hit end command), the special electric utility operation end processing is ended.

  Next, the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “hit end display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the winning end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric utility operation end process is in operation (step S1701: Yes). The winning end display weight process is terminated. If not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a) is called and executed.

  In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winning prizes are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit is completed. If the small hit is completed (step S1709: Yes), the winning end display weight process is performed. When the process is finished and the process is finished with other than the small hit (when finished with the big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (probability change, short time, hidden probability change) after hitting is acquired, and in step S1711, data corresponding to the setting data after hitting (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)) , Time reduction (Special figure fluctuation time reduction fluctuation frequency, Fluctuation time correction fluctuation frequency, Easy winning status fluctuation frequency), Time reduction status (Special figure fluctuation time reduction status, Normal figure fluctuation time reduction status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table and the like) is set, and the setting data after clearing the hit is cleared, and then the hit end display wait process is ended.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process in the winning opening winning process of step S508 shown in FIG. 97 will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of special figure prefetch processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 112A to 112C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S508a). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508b. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value) is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 109, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 110, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown at 99, a preliminary determination is made. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508e. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S508e, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 start information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value) is stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 109, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 110, the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown at 99, a preliminary determination is made. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S508h, “predetermined” information indicating that start information is not prefetched without prefetching the increased special figure 1 start information is stored in place of the stop symbol information in FIG. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 111, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 112 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 112A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the pre-read result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 112B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), “Special Figure f” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 112 (b), a state in which stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 112 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “pending 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the determination result and the special figure variation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information. Can be sent.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 113A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 in FIG. 113A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. . In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4007, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S4011, following step S4009, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to.

  In step S4013 subsequent to step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S4015 subsequent to step S4013, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game table frame lamp 452 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this command is used as the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. This is output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In step S4017 following step S4015, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4009, a setting for outputting this control command is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S4003.

  FIG. 113B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 113C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S4041 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4043 following step S4041, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub control unit main process, and the random number value update process for other effects is performed. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 114A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S5001 in FIG. 114 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. . In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5009 following step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to the command from ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S5009, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S5003.

  FIG. 114 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 114C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043 subsequent to step S5041, a random number value for other effects is updated.

  FIG. 114D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5055, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 sets information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061, and if not (step S5059: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5061, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 115B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the effect device 206. FIG.

  115 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variation icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variation icon h0 is displayed, the fact that the symbol variation is being displayed is informed. Note that the change icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol confirmation display is in progress. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and symbol variation display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 115 (a), four variable displays in FIG. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. Good. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design (fifth design) smaller than the first decorative design is a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. A part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (in this case, “4” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 115A, the family crest member 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of these decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and Senryo box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115 (a), the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the base hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 115 (b), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 115 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). Depending on the situation, the display mode may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. A part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 115 (b), the crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the crest character 224E shown in FIG. 115 (b) is the upper end of the crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 115 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a) or FIG. 115 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable in the present embodiment.

  116 (A1) to FIG. 116 (A2) show an operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). That is, when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 116 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 116 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-thousand box feature 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role 224Gd, and the first big board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral feature 224Gd Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Further, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap with the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  116 (B1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  116 (C1) to FIG. 116 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (C1) to FIG. 116 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body in place of the family crest member 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box actor 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 116C1 shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  116C2 shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the lifting arm, and the LED array overlaps the front side of the substantially central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  In FIG. 116 (C3), the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 116 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the letters “heat” are displayed, and a state in which a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed is shown. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 116 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  116 (E1) to FIG. 116 (E2) show how the family crest actor 224E is operating in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it rises, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (E2), the family crest member 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 116 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand-box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (F1), the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped due to the overlap of the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H. In this production example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 116 (G1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 116 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  116 (I1) to FIG. 116 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (I1) to FIG. 116 (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest character 224E. 116 (I1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 116 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates at a constant rotation. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 116 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  116 (K1) to FIG. 116 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 116 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap with the decorative member, and the image displayed in the region is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 116 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  116 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 116 (K2), the family crest actor 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is moved to the retracted position. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  116 (K3) to FIG. 116 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. In FIG. 116 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  FIG. 116 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state where the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 (L1 ′), a display image (background image, Sabohan character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 116 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side of the approximate center. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. Here, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and FIG. 118 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 117. 119 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. 119. .

  117 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing holding. A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a) is applied. However, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b) can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 115A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 117 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 117 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 117 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 117 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are represented by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 117 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 117 (1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started by the variation start on the special symbol display device → the fourth symbol starts blinking or goes off → the second decorative symbol variation starts → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 117 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 117 (3), the second number-of-holds display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. The update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or after the update display of the second reserved number display is performed, the change of the second decorative symbol is displayed. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 117 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. Here, the movement (decrease) animation indicates that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the base hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in the special drawing 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 115). . At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 117 (5), the moving animation continues. In FIG. 117 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 117 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (8) shows a state in which a navigation character advance notice is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the characters “opportunity” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (9), a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed is shown. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. Note that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (10), the operation effective period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Tono-sama's conversation is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 does not have to be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as FIG. 117 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (11). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 117 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 117 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (13). A state in which the person presses the chance button 136 is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (12), the navigation character notice is finished, and the balloon display is deleted. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 117 (14), in the habit of conversation image CI2, the characters “It is intense heat” are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. There is a case. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice character display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be displayed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (15), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the bag are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 117 (17), “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol. 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the start of reach. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 117 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 is changed. The icon h0 is left behind and the frame is framed out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 117 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (22), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. Further, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 118 (25), each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd is initial. Return to position. Note that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd returns to the initial position, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the first large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 117 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting machine 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 118 (26), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. 118 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display 208 shown in FIG. 118 (27) shows a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (29), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (30), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (31), the player A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 118 (32), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (33), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene continues is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (35), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (36), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (37), the player A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 118 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the duel scene animation display to the effect image display, and the first large board The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. 118 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, an effect display that is lost may be performed without the effect shown in FIG. 118 (38), and further, an effect display that is lost is displayed. After being performed, a revival effect may be displayed to produce a jackpot effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 118 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 118 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavioral 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 118 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 118 (41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (42), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Then, in FIG. 118 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd move toward the initial positions, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 118 (46). In FIG. 118 (46), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 118 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 119 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 119 (51), each of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a jackpot game started with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (53), after the right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed, the first round is started as shown in FIG. 119 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 119 (56) shows a state where the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will be shifted to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 93) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a gaming state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 119 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is finished and the state is shifted to the probability variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. In FIG. 119 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. The icon is shown with a broken line. In addition, in FIG. 119 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is indicated by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below the display. ing. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (60) instructs the player to make a right stroke. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In this case, it may be determined that a left-handed strike has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variation display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, as shown in FIG. 119 (62), the right-hand notification is not displayed. Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 119 (63) shows a state in which the number of symbol variation display suspensions of special figure 2 is four. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 120 (49a) shows another effect example following FIG. 118 (48). 117 to 118, the case where “decoration 7” is reached and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (49a) shows how the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (50a). In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 120 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has come.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 120 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 118 (37). FIG. 120 (38b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, then the duel animation display fades out, and as shown in FIG. 119 (40b), the change icon h0, the second reserved number display, and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 120 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started with a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 120 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (45b), a variable icon deletion animation is displayed. In the fluctuation icon deletion animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 120 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is not started even after a lapse of a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) after the symbol variation display is stopped, the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is The demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that during the period from when the special symbol change display is stopped until the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is provided. In some cases, a special animation is displayed when you operate. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of a stop pattern of a decorative design (if the decorative design is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), an image such as a character is displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed, the character image may be hidden, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed) or a movie including the model title (expectation level) May also include a presentation movie that introduces a high-priority notice or a highly anticipated reach, etc.), and there is also a period during which menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. . It should be noted that the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 is operated in a state where the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 49, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as a game board lamp 442 and / or a game platform frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light quantity of LED can be increased / decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 115 and the like, but it may not be included. If the up / down key of the operation key unit 137 is operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed. Conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. When the left and right keys are operated, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, an icon for “returning to the demo screen” is prepared in the option menu. When the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor positioned on this icon, the screen returns to the demo screen. be able to. When the special symbol variation display is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the display returns from the volume adjustment window to the demonstration screen, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined and the display returns to the demonstration screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the left / right or up / down key operation. When the special symbol variation display is started, the volume adjustment window and the luminance adjustment window are automatically disappeared here, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, “production customization”, “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection” can be roughly divided.

  “Auto button mode” of “production customization” may be the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON / OFF written in “options” in FIG. 121 (b) means setting / non-setting or valid / invalid. “Long press automatic continuous hit” means that a long press is repeated for the operation means such as the chance button 136, and the press is repeated at a high speed during the long press. ) It is a function that performs the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation displayed in the group notice may be a big hit! ? If you want to increase the frequency at which the group notice appears as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%. Compared to when the frequency at which the group notice appears as the notice of the change is set to 50%. However, if you want to be displayed in the change as a big hit (big hit confirmed) notice, the reliability is 100%! ? Set to. “Winning sound notice” is a kind of pre-reading notice when the special figure starting point is won and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or that the operation valid period of the operation means is not notified. When “Navigation” is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period of the operation means, or a character display such as “It may be good to operate the operation means” is displayed. Will come to be. “No prefetching notice” is not performed for all prefetching notices other than the prefetching notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the prefetching notice other than the hold icon by the moving means (the movable movable body) or the display means). Equivalent to “ON”). “Premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of the big hit rich or big hit finalizing effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No hold change” is a setting that does not make a pre-read notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). A “one-shot announcement” is a specific notice about the jackpot richness or jackpot confirmation (for example, the stage action by the stage moving body, the jackpot richness (bonus settlement confirmed) sound by the sound output means, the frame or the game board The notice by the light emission effect by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.)

  In this specification, “big hit confirmation” refers to the symbol fluctuation in which the big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-reading target suspension when the notice of jackpot confirmation and / or the prefetch notice notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice confirming the big hit is displayed, it indicates that the change or the pre-read target hold is necessarily a big hit (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the term “big hit rich” in this specification means a state of high expectation for the big hit, and even if the notice of the big hit rich and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the big hit rich notice is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich pre-reading notice is displayed for the symbol variation or the symbol variation of the pre-reading target hold, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). Further, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the description of “hot” in this specification is a state of high expectation for the jackpot, but even if the hot notice and / or the pre-read notice notice is displayed, the hot notice is displayed. It shows that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for fluctuation or a pre-reading-targeted symbol change, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). “Hot” may indicate that the degree of expectation of jackpot is lower than the jackpot richness, and “hot” may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation) The same applies to

  In addition, “Daitomo” described in FIG. 121 (b) is a member service for registering a member and accessing a Web server through an Internet line. Level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. The service is such that various benefits can be acquired according to the level. When this “Daitomo” member service is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 do not support “Daitomo” membership service. In the model of the specification corresponding to the member service of “Daitomo”, if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Also, in FIG. 121 (b), the item “Daitomo setting” is released simply by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the reserved frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the reserved frame is selected. Here, the reserved frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. Note that “initial setting” means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience the membership before the official member registration, and the member who has experienced the membership can use the samurai character in the character selection as a trial play.

  In addition, as one of the benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection”, items whose Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in “open condition” are displayed levels. This is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 122 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Hold frame selection", "Hold display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items connected by arrows Between each other, the cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. Also, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, each of the “production customization screen”, “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen” has a “return” icon. Is displayed, and the user can return to the option menu screen by moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136. Further, the user may be allowed to return to the option menu screen without placing the cursor on the “return” icon or by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the “production customization screen” Even in the “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to the decorative symbol variation display screen.

  Next, the items described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122 will be specifically described with reference to display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having a specification that does not support the “Daitomo” member service. The opening condition in FIG. 121 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. Is possible. In the following embodiments, an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an operation unit that cannot be operated, and icons displayed in other modes (colored and / or patterned) indicate an operation unit that can be operated.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. When a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in this state, display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 123 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the special symbol stop symbol display period has ended, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol determination in a state where there is no hold) If the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit) is operated, the icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed. These icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed on the condition that a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed symbol stop display period of the special figure has ended. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds). The window and the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  In addition, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, a character display or icon display for effect customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, a gauge display indicating the volume level, and in the case of the brightness adjustment icon BI, a gauge display indicating the light amount level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, “character selection”) shown in FIG. 121 (b), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 123 (1). Also good.

  In FIG. 123 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the up key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key changes to red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

  When the down key 137d is operated, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (3), the menu icon MI disappears, and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. A brightness adjustment window BW that is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

  In FIG. 123 (4), the down key 137d is operated once again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 123 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the lower key 137d is operated in the state of 1 level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the display returns to the demonstration screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. The count start can be updated. That is, it is possible to extend the period until returning to the demo screen. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

  In FIG. 123 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies when the left key 137l is operated.

  When the right key is operated, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (9). The volume adjustment window VW is larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of an intermediate volume.

  In FIG. 123 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated once again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. In addition, even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest five levels, the volume does not increase any more. Even if the left key is operated in the 1st level, the volume does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 is kept muted (muted).

  When a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

  In FIG. 123 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (15). The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear and appear under the “Menu” character display. Seven types of icons, such as a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are arranged in the vertical row from the top. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 123 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit red. In the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 123 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but may be displayed. . The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of the option menu screen display may be the top effect customization icon, the return icon, or other icons. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 123 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the decoration symbol display device 208 has an effect customization screen. Is displayed. On the effect customization screen, a list of five lines is displayed. The list includes five items from the top of the small item display (“01 auto button mode” to “05 back” in the effect customization shown in FIG. 121 (b). Button navigation ") and respective options (for example," OFF ON ", etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. Below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial value all at once are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. ing. In the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon on which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted and further lit red. Of the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the cross key image used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed in the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, all of the keys 137u, d, l, and r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 123 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. Note that when the currently set option is OFF and the left key 137l is operated, the key operation becomes invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

  In FIG. 123 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one lower in the auto button mode (long press auto-strike). That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (23), the frame of the item of long press auto-strike is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and an explanation regarding this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmed icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may be moved to the confirmed icon with or without the setting change, or may be moved to the return icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the bottom button navigation item. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and an explanation regarding this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (26), the down key 137d is operated once more, and the list of 5 lines is updated as shown in FIG. 123 (27). In FIG. The item of the button mode disappears, and the cursor display is moved to the item with no pre-reading notice which was newly added instead of 06 in FIG. 121 (b).

  In FIG. 123 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  124 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 123.

  The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. On the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 124 (29) following FIG. 123 (28), 09 is the last small item of effect customization in FIG. 121 (b). The cursor is moved to the item of one notification.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (30), when the down key 137d is operated once again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon as shown in FIG. 124 (31), and the frame is highlighted in the confirmation icon. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 124 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (33a), a notification screen for notifying the completion of setting of the effect customization is superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. Displayed. In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for rendering customization is updated may be displayed. In the notification screen shown in FIG. 124 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 124 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG.

  The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 124 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen. By operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again with the option menu screen being displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (36) (see FIG. 37 (37)), FIG. ), The cursor icon cs previously displayed in the effect customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  In FIG. 124 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 124 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and five lists (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) are displayed in the list from the top of the choice display in the character selection shown in FIG. 121 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 124 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the character design of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the symbol of Yoshimune) is displayed as a preview. Has been. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the determination operation A picture of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set in the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 124 (42), the cursor display moves to the heel of the item that is one item below Yoshimune. The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 124 (43), the lower key 137d is further operated five times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (44), the list shown in FIG. The cursor display has moved to the item of 07 copanda which is the last choice of character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (45), when the down key 137d is operated once again, the cursor display moves to the return icon as shown in FIG. 124 (46), and the frame is highlighted in the return icon. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  When the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 124 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. In FIG. 124 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display has been performed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the character settings are to be updated may be displayed. In this example, however, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. Upon completion, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 124 (51).

  It should be noted that even if the animation display indicating the determination of the character is finished, the character selection screen remains, and the return to the option menu screen can be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 124 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the reservation frame selection icon, and the reservation frame selection icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 124 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 124 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold frame. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list includes five options ("01 hold frame A" to "05" from the top of the display of options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 121 (b). Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 124 (55), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the hold frame A, and the hold frame of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is the hold icon and the fluctuation icon in the left window of the hold frame selection screen. With a preview. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selecting the reserved frame is the reserved frame A. However, the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated reserved item that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The hold frame set by the selection of the hold frame here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 124 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

  125 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 124.

  In response to a single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 124 (56) following FIG. 124 (55), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (57). The screen moves to the hold frame B of the next item, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 125 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (59), an effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed occurs, and when the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 125 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains unchanged, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 125 (61)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon is lit red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 125 (63). A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen. The list includes five options ("01 icon A" to "05 icon" on the display of options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 121 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 125 (63), the cursor display is displayed on the item of icon A, and the icon of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed together with the hold frame in the left window of the hold display selection screen. Yes. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selection of the hold display is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here. You may prepare. Also, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red icon used for the determination operation. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set by the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the change icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 125 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that icon settings are to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains unchanged, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 125 (67)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon is lit in red.

  In FIG. 125 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the background display selection icon. As shown in FIG. 125 (70), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background display. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 121B are displayed in the list. Has been. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 125 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed on the left window of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for background display selection is background A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here is used. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as a normal background display in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a big hit notice of the change, or the background display in the electric support state. However, only the background display in the electric support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (72), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 125 (73). In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen may remain, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 125 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 125 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demonstration screen, and the return icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 125 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 125 (77), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a demo screen. Is done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. In other words, the background has been changed to an empty background, and the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 123 (1). The mode name (in this case, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are displayed alternately in ascending order of customization numbers. For example, if the auto button mode 01 and the back button navigation 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the upper right frame RW. In addition, when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is performed, “OFF” may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group advance notice for setting the reliability and the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting for setting the speed of repeated hitting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed finely, but may be displayed, for example, “during production customization”.

  125 (79) shows a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. In addition, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (79) are stopped, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 125 (79) is displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Furthermore, all of the normal symbol hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 shown in FIG. 125 (79) are extinguished, and are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 and the hold number in FIG. 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the fixed symbol is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (80), there is a single ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 125 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. The fourth symbol display device 284, which has not started the variable display and is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 125 (80), the black square indicates that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being stopped and the gray circle indicates the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the white circle represents that the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second number of holds displayed in the upper right corner. In the display, “1” is displayed for a moment as the number of holds in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (82), the number of holds in the special figure 1, which is displayed as “1” for a moment, in the second number-of-holds display is “0”. In addition, since the first special figure starting port 230 is won and it is digested immediately, the second hold number display may not be displayed as “1” even for a moment and may remain “0”.

  In FIG. 125 (83), an increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  126 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 125.

  In FIG. 126 (84) continuing from FIG. 125 (83), the increase animation is finished and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 126 (84) is an icon newly set by the hold display selection for effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped and white display mode). Yes.

  In FIG. 126 (85), the first decorative symbol variation display has not yet started, but after the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and Erasure of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. The erasing here may be an animation tailoring, but is not necessarily an erasing animation. In FIG. 126 (86), erasing of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 126 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started to move toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area. In FIG. 126 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. On the base hs0 in the variation icon display area, the variation icon h0 in the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 126 (89), the display of the variation of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is changing slowly. In detail, the left symbol starts the variable display first, the middle symbol starts the variable display, and then the right symbol starts the variable display finally. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and the three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display simultaneously. In addition, before the display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by a decorative symbol (for example, an animation that returns to the original size after the decorative symbol is displayed once large, or an image and a character such as a character that is a decorative symbol) If the image is composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative pattern starts to change).

  In FIG. 126 (91), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. If the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started (see FIG. 126 (92)), FIG. 126 (93) As shown in FIG. 5, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decoration symbol (the third symbol), at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, if the left key 137l is operated, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and if the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. The volume can be adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment is always possible. Even if the volume adjustment is always possible, the volume adjustment bar display VB may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is possible at all times. However, it may be restricted only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of a big hit game, during an interval between rounds, during the end effect of a big hit game, during the execution of a super reach effect, during the fixed display of symbols on the special figure display devices 212 and 214, A result screen (for example, the number of balls to be played or / and / or at the end of the electric support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for production may be regulated during the display of the screen displaying the number of consecutive resorts. If the super reach production is a game production, it will be restricted until the result of the win / loss is notified, and after that, it may be adjustable, and after the three decorative symbols are aligned and start to shake, the adjustment is made. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach production until the stop display is performed may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low-probability general low-accuracy state. Even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjusted without performing the bar display. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, it may be possible to set production customization, character selection, and the like.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is turned off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the volume adjustment bar display VB is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If an operation of the left key 137l or the right key 137r is performed during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by starting the change of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled halfway and immediately Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the erasure animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erasure animation is performed to the end.

  Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, whether or not the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed is determined. Regardless, the amount of light can be adjusted, or production customization, character selection, and the like can be set.

  Further, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 124 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 127 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in red and lit red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 127 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 127 (33b3)). ). In this confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for stopping the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 127 (33b2), the cursor display is a cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 127 (33b5-1), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon. As shown in FIG. 127 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 127 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 124 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 127 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 127 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 127 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 127 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to customize the effect customization is displayed on the effect customization screen in an overlapping manner from the front side (FIG. 127 (33c5). )). In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 127 (33c5), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to “Yes icon” (FIG. 127 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 127 (33c8-1) When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in Fig. 2, the effect customization is initialized, and the initialization is returned to the initial values for all the settings set by the player in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 127 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 127 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is performed. There appears. In this example, did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing another modification.

  If the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 128 (74b1) instead of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 125 (74a), as shown in FIG. 128 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 128 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 128 (74b4), all the settings are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is overlaid on the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 128 (74 b 4), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (74b5-1), the cursor display is moved to “Yes icon” by operating the right key 137r (FIG. 128 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed as “No icon”). In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 128 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 128 (74b6-2)).

  As shown in FIG. 128 (74b6-1), when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon” (FIG. 128 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. The In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization can be performed even when nothing is set, it may be disabled. When the initialization is completed, an initialization completion screen is superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 128 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 128 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 128 (74b10-1).

  If the player does not return to the option menu screen after performing various customizations, there is no operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the operation of the ball launching handle 134 for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 128 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 127 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “Yes icon”, if no operation is performed, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”). .

  In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, if you want to initialize the volume and the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of the various settings, do not display the confirmation screen for the initialization of the volume or the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing settings of various settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether or not to customize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once every 100 changes, after a fixed number of changes since the last display, or when a fixed number of changes have been made since the first start of change. Or may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning in the display lottery).

  128 (I) to (V ') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can select a music piece in the first round or the second round, and can reach a certain round after the second round and customize from the next round. Here, a certain round is a round that allows a V attacker to win a prize, and specifically, is 5 rounds. In FIG. 128 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 of the fifth round is shown, and a letter V is displayed to win the V attacker. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 128 (II) shows a period corresponding to the interval between rounds when the V attacker is closed. Even in the interval between rounds 5 and 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Moreover, although the attacker is closed, the right-hand notification is continued.

  In FIG. 128 (III), the attacker starts opening and the sixth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. In other words, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be awarded to the V attacker. It may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 128 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (V), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 and the like is reduced and a list of five lines is displayed. Yes.

  Also, in FIG. 128 (V ′) shown as a modified example of FIG. 128 (V), a display relating to only one line (only one item) in the list of five lines (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. Yes. In this modification, all the customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 128 (V) or the example of FIG.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V prize is won with a so-called V chance machine). Note that the customization may be performed from a certain round without being limited to the V accuracy machine.

  In addition, during the period when the music selection can be performed during the big hit game, the customization may not be performed, and the configuration in which the customization can be performed from the round in which the selected music is output may be employed. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the selected music may be output in the middle of the round. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected Customization can be performed within the round.

  In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round ends. Specifically, customization may be possible at the same time as the end of a specific round, or customization may be performed from the start of the next round of a specific round, between a specific round and the next round. It may be possible to customize from the interval between rounds.

  Further, customization may be performed at any time during the jackpot round. Also, customization may be possible at any time during the jackpot game. The term “big hit game” as used herein refers to a period between the eaves from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot and including the round.

  Note that the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started is that, from the main control unit 300, the special electric accessory ( This is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is on, but includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) displayed in the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first release. This is the period until the eye starts. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol is based on the confirmation display of the symbols in the special figure display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decoration symbols. Also, if the game table is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in FIG. 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. Is included in the period from when the message is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started.

  During the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

  Further, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation in the shortest time. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end effect.

  Further, during the prepaid card removal forgotten warning display, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, a V prize production, music selection, probability change suggestion, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operating means used for customization, or customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the customization restriction functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 128 (I) to (V ′), it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but it may not be possible when 15R is reached. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, “Press button to display two-dimensional code”) (When a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation), customization may not be performed. Or, conversely, it may be configured to allow customization even during the display of the two-dimensional code. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and vice versa. A part or all of the code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  128 (I) to FIG. 128 (V ′) describe the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a probability variation area, but the big hit of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening without a probability variation area. It can also be applied to the so-called 1 type and 2 types of jackpots where the jackpot starts by winning the V prize.

  128 (VI) to (VIII) are diagrams showing examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. In addition, in the upper right frame RW of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, the effect customization is executed. A character display notifying that it is possible and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 128 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, the one line shown in FIG. 128 (V ′). Only (only one item) is displayed (here, the display regarding the auto button mode). Also in this example, all effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  128 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples in which customization is possible during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in FIG. 128 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 128 (IX) is in an initial position and can be moved up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position. When the second display device 208P is lowered from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

  The second display device 208P displays a model title, and a display RW ′ indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 128 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. Note that a part of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 or the like (for example, a customized display during execution) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Also, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 or the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to a display related to customization during the big hit game.

  The customization may be executed at any time as long as the symbol variation display is in progress. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even when a super reach effect is being displayed. Or, conversely, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during display of the super reach effect. The super-reach production here includes the production of the snarl and the harbinger production until the judgment production such as duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design assumed after entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach are included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a decorative symbol display screen, it is included in the super reach effect until the decorative symbol display screen is switched.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even in the production of the roaring part or the sign production, or the opposite may not be performed. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or from the display of the judge effect to the display screen of the decorative design, the customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, customization may be performed even during simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game machines, and conversely, it may not be possible during simultaneous production. Further, customization may be performed during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stoppage of the decorative design, customization may be performed only when it is finally a big hit, or it may not be performed in the opposite direction, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be performed, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, the customization may be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts, or vice versa. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

  Also, during the user mode (Daitomo) setting, player operations (for example, display with chance button, switch with arrow key, etc.), list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls played, number of missions cleared) , The jackpot number of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive play times of the current play, etc.) can be displayed, or the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed May be. In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game history achieved by player operations (for example, display with a chance button, switch with an arrow key, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) (Number of rotations, number of balls to be played, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of consecutive games of current play, etc.) Further, it may be configured to change the hold display or the like.

  In addition, when the mission is achieved while setting the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been achieved may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications corresponding to “Daitomo” member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 121 (b) is adopted. The pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demonstration screen. Or, without operating the chance button 136, the display may be automatically switched from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  The top menu includes a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon.

  FIG. 129 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialization", and "Return to demo screen", the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 can be operated by operating the operation key unit 137. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “Daitomo” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, a “return” icon is displayed on each of the “daitomo screen”, “model customization screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen”. The cursor is placed on the “return” icon and the chance button 136 is pressed. Then, you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it is possible to return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the “Daitomo screen”, “ Even on the “model customization screen” and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to a screen for displaying decorative symbols.

  FIG. 129 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 129 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 122 except for “return to top menu” at the bottom and “top menu screen” to the right of the bottom. Therefore, a duplicate description is omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative design display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 130 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "password entry", "data save", "data clear", "quick start", and "return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected between the arrows. The cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the top menu screen is displayed to move to a new registration screen or start trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. You can return to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or to return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. .

  When the cursor is placed on the “password input” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is input. If the input password is correct, the screen is switched to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period.

  When the cursor is placed on the “data storage” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. In the data saving confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen moves to the two-dimensional code issue screen, where However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether it is a data storage confirmation screen or a two-dimensional code issuance screen, “No” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In the case, each display is repeated.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “DATA CLEAR” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. On the quick start start screen, the screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  On the other hand, a “Return” icon is displayed on each of the “trial play screen”, “password entry screen”, “data save confirmation screen”, “data clear confirmation screen”, and “quick start start screen”. By moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Further, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is a Daitomo screen, the “trial pre-screen” Even if it is etc., it will transfer to the screen of the change display of a decoration symbol.

  130 is associated with the parenthesis drawing number in FIG. 131.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (a). On this top menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the “Menu” character display, In the vertical row, four types of icons are displayed in order from the top, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. In FIG. 130 (a), the cursor icon cs is displayed to the left of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the return icon is lit red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a return icon. Also, on the top menu screen, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a), where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon and the chance button 136 is displayed. It is a Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. This Daitomo screen returns to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical row from the top under the character display of “Daitomo”. Six types of icons, such as the back icon, are displayed. In FIG. 130 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon is highlighted in red and further lit in red. Further, Yoshimune's character appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation of the trial play is displayed. Also, below the display of the explanation, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a trial play screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the trial play screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of Daitomo's membership experience. Below that display, there is a confirmation icon to save the setting change, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a “start icon” to start a trial play, and a new registration to newly register as a member Icons are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. The cursor is displayed on the “start icon”, and this position is the initial position. When the right key 137r is operated once in this state, the cursor display is moved to the “new registration icon”, and when the determination operation is performed by pressing the fore chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays The new registration screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-2) is displayed.

  In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code QR1 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function. A text recommending that the user access a website (Daitomo site) with an embedded URL and obtain a password therefrom is displayed. Under the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without going through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1) in addition to the trial play icon, and this new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 131 (b1- The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b2), a cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and an explanation about password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1).

  In the password input screen shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw is displayed, and below it an alphabet, symbols, and a numeric dial kw. The person who enters the password uses the cross keys 137u, d, l, r to move the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 131 (b2-1-1)), and the character specified by the cursor. Is input to the password input area pw by the determination operation by the chance button 136, one character at a time according to the password acquired from the Daitomosite (see FIG. 131 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password entry are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been.

  When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is wrong, an input error window shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1-2) is displayed. When this window disappears, the password input operation becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the input of the password is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode. .

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and an explanation about data storage is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3-1). If trial play or quick start is being performed, or if no password is entered, the data save icon cannot be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  In the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting data storage and a “No” icon for not storing data are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 131 (b3-2)). The two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, number of balls played, number of jackpots, number of consecutive games, level of Daitomo mode, experience Value, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded, and this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the URL website embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Ditomosite) ), The data is stored on the server at Daitomosite. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the end confirmation screen is displayed. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (b 3-2-1), an end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be erased from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, such as the current game history information, as shown in FIG. 131 (b3-2-1). When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, it may be erased from the pachinko machine 100, or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4), a cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and an explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4-1). If trial play or quick start is being performed, or if no password is entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or the data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  In the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting the deletion of data such as the current game history information and a “No” icon for not deleting the data are displayed. Yes. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is deleted from the pachinko machine, and the deletion completion screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (b 4-1-1), the deletion completion screen is displayed. This deletion completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and returns to the Daitomo screen.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b5), a cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and an explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 131 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 131 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon is selected from the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the chance button 136 is operated, a model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the "model customization" character display, in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 132 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, while the effect customization icon is lit red. In the model customization screen, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 132 (c1), an effect customization screen is displayed, but the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (17) is that the choice of the input sound notice and the option of the back button navigation are unreleased. Is different. If Daitomo's password has not been entered or the level satisfying the release condition has not been reached, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c1) is displayed.

  In FIG. 132 (c2), the character selection screen is displayed. However, the character selection screen shown in FIG. The difference is that even the character is not displayed as an option. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which a selectable character can be recognized ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20 Princess is open” or the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options can also be applied to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If Daitomo's password has not been entered, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c2) is displayed. On this screen, only Yoshimune can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c2 '), a password is input or trial play is selected, so that a habit character can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 132 (c3), the hold frame selection screen is displayed, but the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (55) is that all the other options are unreleased except for the hold frame A option. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed as the names of the reserved slots. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c3) is displayed. On this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c3 '), the password is entered, so the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 132 (c4), the hold display selection screen is displayed, but the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (63) is that all other options are unreleased except for the option of icon A. The other options are different in that they do not even display the name of any pending display. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c4) is displayed. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c4 '), the password B is entered, so the icon B can also be selected. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 132 (c5), the background display selection screen is displayed. However, the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (70) is that all other options are unreleased except for the background A option. The difference is that other options are not even displayed as background names. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c5) is displayed. On this screen, only background A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c5 '), the background B can be selected because the password is input. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 132 (d1), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all settings is displayed, but since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 128 (74b6-1), description thereof is omitted. 132 (d2) shows an initialization completion screen, but since it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 128 (74b8-1), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 132 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-holds display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 132 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

  A corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 132 (e1). For example, if Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “Start Daitomo” is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, When the voice “play is started” is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “start Daitomo. Let's do our best today” is output. Note that different sound effects are output when the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when it is started by quick start, and when it is started by entering a password. The same sound effect may be output, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Also, the sound effect may vary depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 132 (e1) through model customization, no sound effect may be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. An animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or instead of the corresponding sound effect. If the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) halfway, but may be output as it is.

  Also, when this demo screen is displayed with quick start set, when trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed In at least one of these cases, the fixed period may not be able to call the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c). The top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) may not be called for a certain period.

  FIG. 132 (e1-1) shows a state where a menu icon MI, a volume adjustment icon VI, and a brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1) is displayed. FIG.

  It should be noted that after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, one minute). Also good. In addition, if the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid.

  Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not being displayed (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped in a state where there is no hold, or immediately after it is stopped), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 123 can be called. Alternatively, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1) may be returned.

  In addition, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the luminance adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and the certain period is displayed in FIG. The model customization screen shown in FIG.

  Further, even during a period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 are called. May be possible.

  Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 and the screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1). Both of them may not be displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be executable or may be restricted so that they cannot be executed.

  FIG. 132 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed via FIG. 131 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 131 (b3-2). The output sound from the speaker 120 here is a voice saying “Thank you for your work”. Further, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using a variation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or it is expressed that the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with a display size (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon h11. Thereby, although the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be easily identified, they may be the same size. Further, the variation icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), multiple types of display modes for the normal notice are prepared for the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol. In the following description, the expectation level of jackpot is expressed by the color. The default white is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white variation icon does not predict the expectation level of the jackpot, but the expectation level of the jackpot may be predicted (in this case, the icon color with the lowest expectation level of the jackpot is used). White blinking has the lowest expectation level for jackpots (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the normal notice display mode is a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of expectation of jackpot. The gold color is rich in jackpots, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation level for jackpots than that, for example, it may be said that the jackpot is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-read notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when it is more than red, it means red, gold, and iridescent.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 133 (A1), the navigation character YM of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may disappear temporarily or disappear. Further, the symbol variation display may be terminated, and the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed during the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, or it may disappear temporarily or disappear. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. Further, it may be displayed only during a part or all of the entire period during the display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. The navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  In FIG. 133 (a 2-1), a treasure box icon I 1 of change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons may change when the display is made. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and a decorative symbol. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started is an object to be changed. However, even if the display is started simultaneously with the start of the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. When the display of the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what is changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Furthermore, even if a change notice display is displayed, there may be a fake notice that changes nothing depending on the change notice display. In addition, the change notice display may be determined as one object to be changed, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 133 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As for the appearance timing of the icon of the change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol variation starts, when the variation icon h0 has been moved, when winning the special symbol starting point (when holding increases) , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the time of success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, super reach At the start, you can list super-reaching, etc. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the change notice display icon. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Also, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure chest icon I1, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (size, color, animation) of the treasure chest or carpet. Also good. In addition, when the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous to the player The probability of changing to a display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpot may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but there may be a case where an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice notice of change, pre-read notice display, etc.) is changed. There may be. In addition, there are effects display other than navigation characters (holding icon, change icon, notice notice of change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for prefetch mode, etc.), etc. (1 presentation display, multiple presentation displays, or all presentation displays) may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the advance notice display, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than changing the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is performed by “the advance notice for changing the effect display (the change notice display, the advance notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. When the change is changed, the effect display that is changed infrequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, compared to the case where the effect display that is changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit or not.

  In FIG. 133 (A 3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 remains. The treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 133 (A 4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I 1 changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, and an effect smoke image appears from inside. The smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM, and is clearer than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see. Note that when an icon other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another notice may be given. In FIG. 133 (A 5-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed. In other words, the scarlet (default color) kimono that the navigation character YM has been wearing has changed to a red kimono. It may be in a state where it is suggested that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change due to the change of the kimono of the navigation character YM to the red kimono. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. Further, it may change to blinking white, blue, or green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed in the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. Change into kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and when the display mode of the hold icon and / or the change icon has changed a plurality of times, the navigation character is digested first. The color of the hold icon or the variable icon to be displayed may correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. A color with a high expectation level for jackpots may be displayed with priority, or a color with a low level of expectation for jackpots may be displayed with priority. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with a high value may be displayed, and the hold icon or The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the holding icon and / or the changing icon that is changing may be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing It may also be displayed at random from among the colors of the variation icons. In addition, the treasure chest icon I1 with the lid still open is still displayed beside the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (A 6-1), and only the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol has been displayed with high-speed fluctuation.

  In FIG. 133 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state, and “decorative 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to display the variation. In FIG. 133 (A 8), the background screen of the decorative design display device 208 has been changed to a wilderness background screen, and the left design temporarily stopped is the decorative design display device. The right symbol that has also been temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the wilderness background screen h, a duel scene is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. In addition, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and the first hold icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. Note that during the super reach production, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'in the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden. Further, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach production. Further, during the super reach production, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (the left base icon bIl, the four stages hs1 to hs4, the base hs0 (hs0 ′)). The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icons h0 may be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

  In FIG. 133 (A9), the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which has been standing up until then, changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 is directed and the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 133 (A10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM, and in FIG. 133 (A11), the change icon h0 that has been white until then changes to red. As described above, the variation icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation degree for the big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 133 (A12), Tono-sama's navigation character YM has returned to the posture in which it stands facing the front. The Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A12) remains in the display mode of red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of scarlet kimono).

  In FIG. 133 (A13), although not shown, a button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. Thereafter, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a decorative cut-in image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. The cut-in image of Tono-sama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is difficult to see compared to the case where the cut-in image of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of Tono-sama is deleted, the duel scene animation display is continued, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first large board acting as shown in FIG. 115 (a). 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. The effects in which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the first big board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth big board behavioral thing 224Gd are not performed, and an effect display that is lost is performed. Furthermore, after the effect display that is lost is performed, the revival effect may be displayed and the effect display that is a big hit may be performed. In addition, when the effect which the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd operate | moves is displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed will be hidden, but you may display continuously.

  After that, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 115 (a) operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 133 (a 14-1). In FIG. 133 (A 14-1), a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 133 (A9) to (A12) corresponds to an effect that changes the display mode of the change icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be seen as an effect different from the super reach effect that was started when the super reach effect was started. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (hold) At the time of winning), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the success of a certain production, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , And the start time of super reach can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the start timing of the change effect. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Also, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes is not only during Super Reach production, but also when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the change icon h0 finishes moving, and wins a special figure start opening. Time (when holding increases), start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, success of a certain performance, first stop of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-continuous performance (at the start of re-variation), reach You can list the state start, super reach start, and so on. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing at which the change icon h0 changes. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production described here is also a game production, which includes a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed. In addition, when the navigation character YM performs an animation to change the display mode of the change icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and when the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed (successful) and when it is not changed (failure). There may be.

  Further, there may be a case where the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In this case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbols are displayed are switched by wipe. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode (display mode of scarlet kimono) after being switched by wipe, or the navigation character YM may be used as a pre-reading notice for the next symbol variation display. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 133 (15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman fell and the main character Tono-sama won was displayed, and Tono-sama's navigation character YM also took a victory pose. However, the middle symbol is not displayed yet, and the middle symbol of “decoration 7” is displayed in FIG. 16 (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second ornament is displayed. The design is also changing. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). In FIG. 133 (A 15-1), a big hit animation by the main character may be executed.

  Here, it can be seen that FIG. 133 (15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed is a super reach production, but it appears that the middle symbol is displayed and the victory is confirmed (A 16-1). ) Can be regarded as a super reach production, or can be viewed as a super reach production until just before the stop display is made. Further, as described above, the super reach production here corresponds to an example of the final judge production, and the super reach production is being executed until the final judge production result is finalized (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). Also good. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is started with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display form of special figure A. In addition, although the 1st special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, since the 1st sub-control part 400 is the state which has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control part 300, it judges that it is a symbol fixed stop. Therefore, the fluctuation variation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” respectively. In the 4 symbol display device, display is performed in a manner that the symbol is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big win start effect display.

  During the super reach, both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judgment effect is started. Further, when the final judgment effect is started, the variation icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or disappeared. Both characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, when other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS are displayed so far, they may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started.

  In place of FIG. 133 (A 2-1), as shown in FIG. 2 (A-2-2), a balloon display such as “Change! As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as “Preparing for change” may be added. Thereafter, returning to FIG. 133 (A 3-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon character YM balloon display corresponds to a notice effect (a sign effect) of the start of the change notice display. In other words, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as “Change !?”, or the navigation character will be displayed in the future (“Preparing for change” will be displayed). Within a change or after a change that is marked “Preparing for change”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (A 3-1) instead of FIG. 133 (A 3-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS again. A carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure box icon I1 may fly over the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 133 (A 4-1) instead of FIG. 133 (A 4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the navigation character YM may change or change easily. In the case of FIG. 133 (A 4-2), it is predicted that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono having the same color as smoke. Also, the expected degree of change or the big hit in the hold may be notified according to the type of change animation in the change notification display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (A- 5-1) instead of FIG. 133 (A- 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character YM itself may become larger. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to a change in color. Note that the kimono color of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (a 5-2) may be amber (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A-5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0, that is, the expected degree of jackpot, is higher in the display mode larger in the default color than in the display mode smaller in the default color, and in the display mode smaller in red. The red and large display mode may be higher. Moreover, as long as it is a size and a color, the color may be prioritized, for example, the red and small display modes may be higher than the default and large display modes. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized. For example, the display mode larger in the default color may be higher than the display mode smaller in red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size in addition to a case where it is large and a case where it is small.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to a gold color. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose redemption expectation is higher than red. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or higher, or the change itself to red or higher may be determined. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the big hit expectation may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono that is a premier color, the color of the variation icon h0 may always be changed to the rainbow color. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the navigation character YM is informed of a big hit directly by the display form of the navigation character YM. When the display mode is such as wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, the result is that it is easy to win big hits. Indirect notifications can be made.

  Further, the navigation character YM may change the variation icon h0 even when the display mode is not changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Furthermore, although the character of the main character is a so-called always-display character, the navigation character YM that changes the change icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the change icon h0 is changed. Further, it may be a character displayed only when a notice is given. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character that changes the variation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the variation icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to FIG. 133 (A 6-1), through FIG. 134 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) and then returning to FIG. Until the treasure box icon I1 is hidden, the navigation character YM may change a plurality of times. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, a change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 is repeatedly opened and closed.

  Further, following FIG. 133 (A 6-1), a change animation as shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-3-1) to (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the notice of change notice (here, the UFO icon UFI). In FIG. 134 (a 6-3-2) continuing from FIG. 134 (a 6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI that has come toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 134 (a 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Alternatively, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 134 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 134 (6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or the display mode may be reduced (downgraded).

Further, FIG. 134 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 133 (A 14-1), which is a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, “decoration 6” different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying display), and in the following diagram (a 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol All the decorative symbols of the symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-3), the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all displayed in the normal density again. In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed to switch between a super reach effect scene (effect display) and a normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 133 (A1)). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 134 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is temporarily displayed without a pattern and with the same color. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 134 (a 14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing in FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-7), the wiping effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. Yes. A hold frame UI is also displayed, and a change icon h0 and a first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 134 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the change icon h0 itself may be deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode with the red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed to the default state is not visible because the navigation character is not displayed, but the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state. May be visible. (For example, the display which switches from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed to the default state, the animation display which returns to the default state from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed, etc. are mentioned.)
At the time of wipeout (FIG. 134 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 134 (A 14-2-7)), the fluctuation icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed but not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, it may be configured such that a rebirth effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the revival effect is always performed when displayed, and the revival effect may or may not be performed when not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 134 (a 14-2-1) to FIG. 134 (a 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (pedestal hs0 ′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variation icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden when they are displayed so far.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 133.

  Subsequent to FIG. 133 (A 16-1), the display as shown in FIG. 135 (A 16-2-1) to FIG. 133 (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (a 16-2-2), the entire screen starts to become thin. Thereafter, it disappears once in the re-drawing effect, and the screen shown in FIG. 135 (A 16-2-1) (the screen of Tono-sama win) may be displayed again, or FIG. 133 (A 14-2-3). ) (Screen of defeat of Tono-sama) may be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a jackpot combination or a loss of combination) with a normal background as shown in the figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed with a shaking display.

  In addition, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen. If the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the variation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, a probability change) is performed. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a golden or rainbow premium. If this is the case, an advantageous jackpot may be determined.

  FIGS. 135 (i) to (i12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of variations and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 135 (1), a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 135 (2), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 135 (3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 135 (ii-1), a change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been in a standing posture (initial posture) up to that point, changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 is directed and the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 135 (15), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM. However, in FIG. 13 (6), the display mode of the change icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect has failed. Yes. In FIG. 135 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture again.

  In FIG. 135 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the display-type navigation character YM wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 135 (9), the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 135 (11), the change icon h0, which has been white until then, has changed to red, and a normal notice has been started. In FIG. 12 (12), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture while maintaining the display mode with the red kimono. After that, although not shown, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 135 (I-4-2-1) instead of FIG. 135 (I4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. In FIG. (I-4-2-2), a change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or may be an aspect in which the display position is switched instantaneously. When the navigation character YM leaves the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, “Business trip” on the signboard) is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. An icon display indicating “medium” may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Further, a change effect may be performed only for the hold icon to be prefetched. For example, only the state where the number of holds is 1 may be performed on the first hold icon h11, or may be performed on a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target hold, and may not be performed again if one failure occurs. .

  Moreover, you may perform a change effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Further, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not leave the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the change next to the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the hold-down change of the prefetch target. There may be a variation in which no change animation is performed between the variation following the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the variation of the prefetch target. In addition, a change animation may be performed for a change in which the navigation character YM is red.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a change icon change effect and a change icon change effect by the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 136 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 136 (2), the effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. Note that the effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 136 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 136 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the blinking white mode. In other words, the promotion is successful. There are a plurality of types of production icons, and the success probability of the promotion production may vary depending on the production icons that appear. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 136 (4), the UFO icon UFI disappears. In FIG. 136 (5), three decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state. In FIG. 136 (No. 6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 136 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 136 (U8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 136 (9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a pose that draws a bow, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 136 (U10), an arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the change icon h0. In FIG. 136 (U11), the first on-hold icon h11 that is the display mode of white blinking is hit, In FIG. 12 (12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or may be always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Moreover, it may be performed for the first hold icon h11 only for the state where the number of hold is 1, or may be performed for a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target suspension, and may not be performed again if one time is failed. Moreover, you may perform a promotion effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is performed only for one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of the hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). Alternatively, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. . In FIG. 136 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. In FIG. Has been. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 136 (U15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 136 (U16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the base hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 136 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 136 (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 136 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 136 (U 20-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the default display mode to a display mode with a red kimono. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 136 (U21), and only the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon may be expressed.

  In FIG. 136 (U23), it reaches the reach state, and in FIG. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear in the hold frame UI, and the hold icon also disappears when the hold icon remains. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 136 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sinking, the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 136 (25) in the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue variation icon h0 is displayed on the lowered base hs0 '. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Further, both the base hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (U27-1), as a continuation of the super reach production, a duel scene where the main character and the enemy swordsman are confronting each other is displayed on the wilderness background screen h. . Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 136, a modification, and the like.

  In FIG. 137 (U 29), the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and a scene in which the lord is collapsed is displayed. Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (U30), the super reach effect is finished, the normal background is restored, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the pedestal hs0 ′ and the variation icon h0 are displayed. Yes. In FIG. 137 (U 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now is starting to rise with the variation icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the hold frame UI is also displayed again. The navigation character YM is displayed in a default display mode.

  Further, instead of FIG. 136 (U20-1), in FIG. 137 (U20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a premium rainbow-colored kimono is worn. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow, so that the big hit is confirmed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premium rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a prefetch notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be prefetched may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  Further, instead of FIG. 136 (U27-1), in FIG. 137 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation of the display mode wearing the red kimono is performed. Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode, or change the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the notice with the effect icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decoration symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured so that after a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a notice icon and / or change notice is not displayed, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. There may be a case where an effect icon and / or a change notice display is performed later. In addition, although described as one decorative design, a plurality of decorative designs may be used, or all decorative designs may be used. In addition, in the state where the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the announcement icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but it may be performed.

  FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

  In FIG. 137 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 137 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 137 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in the same figure (E 4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E 3-1) instead of FIG. 137 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is a red kimono. The display mode changes to Thus, the change animation itself may give a notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode is changed to the red or higher display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is determined that the red smoke image is changed to the red or higher display mode. It may be a notice display.

  In addition, in FIG. 137 (E 3-1) instead of FIG. 137 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the currently displayed symbol variation display or After that, the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) by the symbol variation display started. As described above, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be performed by the change animation itself. Note that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the navigation character is changed to the rainbow-colored display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary that the symbol variation and / or the hold in which the color smoke image is displayed be confirmed as a big hit (may be a big hit big).

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 137 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess's navigation character. The character type to be changed may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 137 (E 4-2), the navigation character is changed to a navigation character (for example, a long-length character) that cannot be selected by the player. It should be noted that the chief navigation character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the change icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold that the navigation character has changed. You may be comprised so that the expectation degree of the jackpot may be high.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, It may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot on hold is high, or configured so that a princess (bancho) appears and / or a super-reach effect is likely to occur (or always occurs). It may be.

  When the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to a navigation character that can be selected by the player, so that the player is changed to a navigation character that cannot be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that can be selected by the player. It may be configured such that the navigation character that cannot be promoted is more likely to promote the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player is more likely to play the game than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the user may be configured to facilitate the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold The degree may be high.

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 137 (E 4-1), the character does not change, and the change effect of itself has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode alone, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be determined that the navigation character YM changes to a display mode of red or red or higher.

  Further, the color of the treasure box icon I1 may be used to predict the expected degree of jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display started thereafter. In other words, a normal notice or a prefetch notice may be performed according to the color of the treasure box icon I1.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (1), the sea background is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 138 (1) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 138 (2), the number of hold in FIG. 1 is increased, and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 138 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. In addition, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (4).

  In FIG. 138 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 138 (6), a background change notice, which is a kind of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice target (prefetch target hold) is the hold increased at the timing of FIG. 138 (2) (second hold at this timing). In the background change notice, an image of a cocoon appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a cocoon image by an animation in which the cocoon is closed (see FIG. 138 (7)). For this reason, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the heel and become invisible. Instead of the bag image, an overlapping image from the front side may appear in the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the reservation frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may have an effect in which images do not overlap at all.

  The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 138 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the expected image big hit expectation of prefetch target hold may be represented by the color of the appearance image (here, the image of the cocoon), or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the color of the cocoon appears. The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a notice of change notice. Also, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to a mountain background if the color of the coral is green. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 138 (8), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In FIG. Disappeared. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. The navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character changes from Tono-sama character to robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

  In FIG. 138 (11), the vehicle has entered a reach state. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIG. 138 (9-1) and FIG. 11 (11). Note that the display mode of the change icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode upon reaching the reach state. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 are all disappeared. After that, it evolved into a super reach production and changed to a super reach production background (here, the wilderness background). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (13), a scene where Tono-sama was defeated is displayed in the background of the wilderness. It should be noted that the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

  In FIG. 138 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 138 (15), in the wipe display here, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 138 (16), the wipe character is wiped out, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM starts to be seen.

  In FIG. 138 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the red change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 is resumed.

  In FIG. 138 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  Then, after the first hold is digested and the symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 138 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol variation display has been started and the pre-read target pending symbol variation has ended, but the background remains the night background.

  In FIG. 138 (21), the background change notice is started again, and an image of a heel appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen again becomes a heel image by an animation in which the heel is closed (FIG. 138 (22)). reference). In FIG. 138 (23), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In FIG. Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 138 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has returned to the sea background, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the Tono-sama character.

  In addition, in FIG. 138 (9-1) instead of FIG. 138 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the character depending on the background may also change depending on the reliability of the big hit. Or it may have changed from the first.

  Note that the navigation character YM may change depending on the production background, regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the production background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to have a high degree of expectation of the symbol variation and / or the jackpot in the hold (or the big jackpot confirmation (may be a big jackpot richness)). It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the notice and / or super reach effect that the navigation character that does not match the background appears is high (or necessarily occurs).

  Or conversely, even if the background is changed, the type of the navigation character YM may not be changed, or may not be changed absolutely.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 139 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 139 (or 2-1), a speech balloon for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (roar or princess) is displayed by the currently displayed Tono-sama navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-1), the display of the princess navigation character YM1 is added in addition to the Tono-sama navigation character YM, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode of appearing instantaneously. In the case of animation display, an animation in which a character cannot be initially seen by a smoke image may be used, or an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

  In FIG. 139 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Tono-sama navigation character YM and princess navigation character YM1, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in an initial posture. In FIG. 139 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of variations. However, the displayed navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, Tono-sama navigation character YM) is displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 139 (or 5), a speech balloon that calls 呼 ぶ is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the navigator character YM2 is added, and the user has successfully called the bag. In other words, all three people are now ready. In this production, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change increases, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to premier, and the expectation of hitting a big hit with the change is higher when one or more navigation characters gather. Or the degree of expectation for a big hit after the next change may be high. In addition, when all three people are together, the rainbow color of the premiere or the big hit may be confirmed. In FIG. 139 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state in a state where all three persons are aligned, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) in both the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Further, instead of FIG. 139 (or 2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given in FIG. (Or 2-2-1). That is, in FIG. 139 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM has been announced, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette announcement is started. . The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a pending change notice). In FIG. 139 (or 2-2), a princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but no navigation character may appear (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, a navy navigation character YM2) may appear. May appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but may be configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared. In this case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, For example, three characters may be displayed), the promotion effect of characters already appearing may be performed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). When the stoppage is displayed, the princess appears in the first time, the princess's kimono turns red in the second time, the princess's kimono changes to gold in the third time, etc.).

  Also, instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG.

  Also, instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), in FIG. (Or 3-3), not the princess's navigation character YM1, but the frog's navigation character YM2 appears. Thus, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 139 (or 3-1), Tono-sama's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the nephew's navigation character YM2 came, and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change, the probability that it will change to a premier or near-premier color, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit due to the change, or a big hit after the next change will be changed. Expectations may change or may not affect them at all.

  Further, instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. In other words, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-1), a Tono-sama navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and a princess navigation character YM1 is displayed for one person. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-3), the habit navigator character YM2 is displayed at the position left by one person. In this way, even if the order of display positions (Tono-sama, niece, princess) is fixed, the order may be disrupted (dono, princess, niece). (A big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit big.

  Also, instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), when the number of navigation characters increases as shown in FIG. "), Or may be notified by voice from a speaker, or by flashing a lamp or the like. In FIG. 139 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all members have gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when everyone gathered successfully, the character display of “all members gathering” is always displayed, but a different character display (for example, “It ’s super hot” or “All members gathering”) is displayed. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect), a big jackpot rich, or a specific reach mode may be surely started. In this case as well, in addition to the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like.

  Further, instead of FIG. 139 (or 6-1), as shown in the same figure (or 6-2), characters other than Tono-sama, Hime, and Samurai (here, Minowa character YM3 imitating cactus) increase. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit.

  In addition, if “爺” is displayed even though “Princess” is specified, it may be a premier production (a big hit finalizing production) or a big hit, and call “Princess”. However, if “が” is displayed more frequently, a big hit (or big hit is confirmed) may be given if the character (“princess”) as it is called appears. Further, depending on the display mode of a navigation character that calls another navigation character (in this example, Tono-sama), the other navigation character may be likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character that calls other navigation characters, there may be cases where other navigation characters are likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for other navigation characters to appear (stock) when the princess's navigation character calls than the Tono-sama navigation character. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, a plurality of Tono-sama navigation characters YM may be displayed, or may be indicated as Tono-sama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the navigation character of the same kind, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, the presentation performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, in the case where an effect of releasing a character from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-continuous effect start may be started when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer notice start may be started when the spear is released. . A plurality of characters may be emitted. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released simultaneously, an effect different from that of a single release may be performed. For example, if Tono-sama and Hime-sama are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than Tono-sama alone may be started.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a modification or the like shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 140 (ki 1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and the princess navigation character YM1 of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture on the right side. ing. Also, a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 140 (ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 out of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 has its smoke. Wrapped in images. That is, the smoke image does not reach the Tona-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 140 (ki 4), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In FIG. 140 (ki 5), the treasure box icon I1 disappears.

  Instead of FIG. 140 (ki 2-1), in the same figure (ki 2-2-1), the pose of Tono-sama's navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 140 (ki 2-2-2), the Tono-sama navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 140 (ki 2-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. Also, Tonosama's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 140 (ki-3-1) instead of FIG. 140 (ki-3-1), smoke images appearing from the treasure chest icon I1 are displayed for both the Tonosama navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1. Wrapping the navigation character. In FIG. 140 (ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the Tono-sama navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1 have changed to display forms with red kimonos. That is, the display mode has changed for both of them. Here, both have changed to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Further, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, the direction in which one of the characters (for example, princess) has changed may be hotter than the case in which the other character (for example, Yoshimune) has changed, and the expectation degree of jackpot may be the same. Moreover, the direction in which both characters have changed may be hotter than the case in which one character has changed. Moreover, the direction in which one character changes depending on the change mode may be hotter than the change in both characters. For example, a combination of the Tono-like navigation character YM in the default display mode and the Princess Navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the Tono-sama navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and the red With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the character after the change may change depending on the character that changes. For example, if the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the change is hot, and if it is the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Also good. In addition, if the Tono-like navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is confirmed, the jackpot with a probability change is confirmed ( Advantageous jackpot determination).

  In this example, there is one navigation character that is always displayed, and when another navigation character is called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed, the navigation character YM is displayed. The present embodiment can also be applied when there is a period during which one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

  FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 7 (7) show examples of effects in which button effects are involved with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 140 (<1-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In FIG. 140 (<3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 140 (<4>), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 140 (<5>), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 140 (<6>), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the ton character is visually recognized by the effect image. It has become difficult. In FIG. 140 (<7>), the display character is changed to a Tono-like navigation character wearing a red kimono.

  In FIG. 140 (<1-2-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, but here, the button display icon 136D is not displayed. That is, the back button effect is performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 140 (<1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. 140 (<1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

  It should be noted that both the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) may be changed, the back button effect may be given priority, or another button effect may be given priority. The same may be applied when the back button is overlapped.

  When the pre-read button notice overlaps with the change button notice (normal notice), the pre-read button notice may be given priority, or the change button notice may be given priority.

  In addition, in FIG. 140 (<2-2>) instead of FIG. 140 (<2-1>), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but at a position away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. Note that the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed constantly or before the effective period starts.

  FIG. 141 shows an effect example in which the navigation character YM is accompanied by the effect of the button hold icon.

  In FIG. 141 (ku-3-1), the Navi-like navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 141 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and a button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Here, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (<1-3-2a>), as shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-3-3a), an effect smoke image appears. Part or all of the character YM is concealed, and is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not cause any change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are not changed. However, there may be a case where a transition is made to the later-described diagram (<1-3-4) via the state shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-3a).

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (<1-3-2a>), as shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-3-3b1), the button image 136a disappears for the button hold icon, An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11 and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-3b2>), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (<1-3-2a>), the process proceeds to FIG. 141 (<1-3-3-3b2) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1). As shown, an icon that is a button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-3-3b1>), the display mode of the first hold icon h <b> 11 remains a white circle as shown in FIG. YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change in the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it passes through FIG. 141 (ku 1-3-b1), but the display mode is switched instantaneously. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed in the case of going through FIG. 141 (<1-3-3-3b1). There may be a case where it changes immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or a case where the chance button 136 changes slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (<1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-4) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1>). Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  Further, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next button has started without operating the chance button (FIG. 141 (<1-3-2b1>)), the first decorative symbol has still started. In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has been started), the variation icon h0 may become a button hold icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and if the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 141 (<1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to a blue circle display mode (success pattern). In the case of a change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, but may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the change icon h0, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next button has started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may not be changed. You may be comprised so that it may change automatically after the next fluctuation | variation is started, without operating a button.

  Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (FIG. 141 (<1-3-2b1>)), FIG. -2b2 '), an effect image is applied to the variation icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case of shifting to FIG. 141 (<1-3-2b3 ') or a case of FIG. 141 (<1-3-2b3>).

  In addition, although the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 141 (ku-3-1) was a default display mode, even if it is the navigation character YM of the promoted display mode, it is the same. That is, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 141 (ku 1-3-4). When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are stored, some or all of the hold icons are changed to button hold icons. Depending on the button operation, the hold icon, the change icon, and the navigation character YM are displayed. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 142 (key 2), the number of the hold in FIG. 1 is increased, and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 142 (key 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 142 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 142 (Ke 5-1), and in FIG. 142 (Ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears, and the Tona-sama navigation character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 142 (K-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) corresponding to the prefetch target hold.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning a pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 142 (K2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a pre-reading target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 142 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode that is displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here remains displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 142 (Ken 9-1), a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM has a display mode changed to a display mode with a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 133 (A 4-1) (FIG. 142 (K 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Moreover, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure chest icon I1 appearing. That is, there may be a case where the change notice display is not performed.

  In FIG. 142 (p. 13), the change of the prefetch target hold is started, and the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change in the prefetch target hold currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear after the three symbols or temporary stop (shaking display) in the variation of the decorative pattern of the pre-reading target hold until the symbol stops, or one or two decorative symbols May disappear once temporarily stopped (first stop or second stop).

  Further, the navigation character YM disappears at the stop display timing in FIG. 142 (7) and does not have to be displayed across the variation.

  Further, instead of FIG. 142 (K5-1), as shown in FIG. 142 (K5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the production icon display area DIS, but a hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may also be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variation icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, the production icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  Further, instead of FIG. 142 (K5-1), as shown in (K5-3) in FIG. 142, the navigation character YM is movable within the hold icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 142 (key 5-1), as shown in FIG. 142 (key 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  Note that the navigation character may perform an animation of moving through a plurality of display areas (for example, an effect icon display area DIS, a hold icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (Figure 6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, the pending digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the swaying is displayed in a shaking state without any holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (K6-2-4), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-6), there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 in a state where there is no hold, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started variation. The second decorative design has begun to fluctuate. At this time, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-7), an increase animation of a hold icon representing a hold that has already been digested (a hold of a started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 143 (K 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and an erase animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (Ken 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. Yes. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Actually, FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but an erasing animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, may be simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  Further, instead of FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3a), as shown in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b1), there is a case where the vehicle enters the reach state, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured not to change inside, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Further, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b2), a super-reaching effect is developed, and in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene where Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman are facing each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may be promoted when it is developed to super reach, and conversely, the navigation character YM is not developed to super reach, and is configured so that the display manner is not promoted in the case of normal reach. May be. Or conversely, even if it is a normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the “navigator character promotion” symbol is stopped as a middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Thereafter, in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect described with reference to FIGS. 134 (A 14-2-4) to (A 14-2-6) is executed, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which are combinations of misses, are displayed in a shaking manner. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-3b6), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of misses, is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also default Are displayed as they are.

  When FIG. 143 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8) and (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are put together, the symbol variation of the pre-read target suspension is completed. Even if the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. When it is erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is displayed before the pre-reading target pending symbol variation ends (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed with one or more temporary stops, simultaneously with the temporary stop, after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol is displayed. All symbols (3 symbols, left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in this example) are temporarily stopped before and after temporary stop. It may be deleted before or after the symbol change of the pre-read target hold is ended (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) becomes the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 144 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the base hs0 is arranged. An effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (this a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. The second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. Yes. These five hold icons are all in the default display mode.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 144, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh piece The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the third hold, the fourth stage is white, and the fifth and subsequent stages are gray. When the four holds, the fifth stage is white, and the sixth and later stages are white. The stage turns gray. As described above, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

  In addition, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 144 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by 1, and in FIG. 144 (ko a3), an increase animation of holding is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is only the eighth stage hs8.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (this a5), a navigation character YM having a default display mode appears, and a balloon “two more full” is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of suspensions is N or more (in this example, 6 or more).

  In FIG. 144 (this a6), the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (this a7), seven holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, a balloon “One more full” is added. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. In addition, the last eighth stage hs8 also changes to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 144 (this a8), the special figure 2 hold increases by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (this a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Is added with a balloon “full tank”. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigation character YM performs notification regarding the number of holds using a balloon, but it may not be performed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM may change when 8 holds are stored (when the tank is full). In FIG. 144 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 144 (this a11), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon that “the hold is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and a pre-reading notice is executed. . Note that the notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Also, the degree of expectation for the jackpot on hold may be notified in advance by a notification displayed in a balloon. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the hold is full, but the navigation character may be changed in accordance with the next variation of the symbol variation in which the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Moreover, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may vary depending on the character. For example, even if the navigation character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono, Good.

  FIG. 145 shows an example of an effect in which a normal decoration pattern is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 145 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first hold icon h11 with a circle representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In FIG. 145 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variation display of the usual decorative pattern. As a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “Geki” as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 145 (this b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is informed that the lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 145 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigation character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the player wins the regular drawing lottery. In the following FIG. 145 (this b4), since the regular drawing lottery is won, the electric Chu is released, and the navigation character YM notifies that the electric Chu is being released. In FIG. 145 (this b5-1), when the electric Chu is being opened, there is a winning after the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 145 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing 2 hold are displayed (see Fig. 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all in the default display mode. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is designated as the special figure 1. It is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon of from the front side.

  In FIG. 145 (this b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following same figure (this b8), since the opening time of the electric chew has ended, the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. I'm talking. It should be noted that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 145 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  After that, in FIG. 145 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 145 (this b12), the holding of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A rhombus variation icon is displayed on the base hs0.

  In FIG. 145 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 145 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode with a red kimono. A balloon “This change is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. Yes. Further, the normal notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  In addition, in FIG. 145 (this b15-2-1) instead of FIG. 145 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon “This change is” is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reservation of special figure 2 proceeds, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (this b15-2-3), the last symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the navigation character YM has a balloon “This change is”, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from FIG. 145 (b15-2-1). In FIG. 145 (this b15-2-4), a balloon “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is finished. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (this b15-2-5). In addition, when it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue further. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may necessarily disappear. Further, even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 145 (this b15-2-1) to the same figure (this b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM is continued, and the navigation character YM is displayed. On the contrary, the effect by the navigation character YM may end and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  The navigation character YM described in FIG. 145 (this b1) to FIG. (This b15-1) and FIG. (This b15-2-1) to FIG. Only the advance notice is performed and the prefetch notice is not made, but the prefetch notice may be made.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a change notice display is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (Sa 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 146 (sa 2), the hold in FIG. 1 increases and a third hold icon h13 and a fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 146 (S 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 146 (sa4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (sa5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, since the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, it has been notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear. The treasure box icon I1 in the change notice display is in a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The stand-by display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 146 (S7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (sa8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (SA 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby. Thus, the treasure chest icon I1 may be displayed across a plurality of variations.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (Sa 11-1), and in FIG. 146 (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears, and the tomb-like navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 146 (S12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear whenever the smoke image is displayed.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning a pre-read target suspension (timing in FIG. 146 (S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are prefetch notices for the same prefetch target hold (the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 146 (S2) in this example). However, the treasure box icon of the change notice display may be different from the prefetch target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 146 (S12), when the Tono-sama navigation character YM appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

  In FIG. 146 (sa 14), the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 146 (Sa 15-1), a treasure box is opened, a smoke image comes out from inside, and envelops the Tono-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 146 (S16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of Tonosama's navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode with a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Note that the change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure chest icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 146 (S2)). In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In addition, in FIG. 146 (S 10-2-1) instead of FIG. 146 (S 10-1), although no Tona-sama navigation character YM has appeared, the carpet icon I2 has disappeared and a treasure box with a change notice display is displayed. The icon I1 is in the standby display. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (sa 10-2-2). The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 146 (sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may also change. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the change icon h0 may not change.

  Further, instead of FIG. 146 (S11-1), in FIG. 11 (S21-2), the smoke icon is displayed, but the navigation icon YM is not visible, and the carpet icon I2 disappears. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended the standby display. Thus, the timing when the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. The timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of variation of the decorative symbol may be used. Note that the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, but the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished. (For example, a change after the next change after the standby display has ended, or within a change in which the standby display has ended). Further, the change notice display may not be displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display). For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation that ended and the fluctuation within the waiting display).

  Furthermore, instead of FIG. 146 (S13), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. In 13-13-2), the treasure box is not opened, the navigation character YM is not changed, the display mode of the change icon h0 is not changed, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Disappears. Thus, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using a hold frame different from the hold frame described so far.

  The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 147 (Shi 1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. In other words, the hold frame UI and the components (pedestal hs0 and the like) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 147 (Sh 1), the display area of the hold frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIIf1, the upper frame UIIf2, and the right frame UIIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not displayed. In addition, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 147 (Shi 1) is the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIF3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI. Are promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (shi 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 147 (Sh 2-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I 2, and in the same figure (Sh 3), only the carpet icon I 2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I 1 is It remains in the production icon display area DIS. In FIG. 147 (4), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and an icon with a character display of “frame promotion” appears from there, informing (predicting) the promotion of the holding frame UI. In FIG. 147 (5), the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that even if the “frame promotion” icon appears, the reservation frame UI may not be promoted. Further, when the “frame promotion” icon appears, the holding frame UI may be promoted without fail.

  Further, instead of FIG. 147 (Sh 2-1), the lower half of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the sea background is displayed. Due to the lower body of this huge panda, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed in front of the lower half of the panda. This huge panda is passing from the top to the bottom and eventually enters the area of the reservation frame UI, and part or all of the reservation frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda, FIG. In the state shown in (Sh-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in FIG. Then, the entire holding frame UI is overlapped with the panda image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Note that the entire holding frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

  FIG. 147 (Sh 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode with a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. Note that the display mode of the change icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, among the left frame UIf1, etc., all of the hold icon, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be changed, or only a part thereof may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and the holding frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 147 (and 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed. In addition to the change in the holding frame UI, There is also a change outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production is easily started, the pseudo-continuous production is easily started, or the design is switched to a design that appears when the design is a big hit with certainty. Moreover, if the reach production is started in a state where this level is high, the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  If the appearance of a giant panda is a big hit announcement, the first decorative pattern may overlap the passing panda image from the front side so that it is displayed in front of the panda image. Even if it is a notice, the 1st decoration design may be overlapped with the picture of the panda which passes.

  Further, instead of FIG. 147 (Sh 2-1), in FIG. (Sh 2-3-1), a wrinkle image for wiping effect is added to the holding frame UI, and FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state where the haze image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 2 (2-3-2) is a state where the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state).

  FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a treasure chest icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon appears as a hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 148 (Su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. In FIG. 148 (Su 3), the treasure box icon The hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 148 (su4), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the change icon h0 is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is displayed on the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being executed. In FIG. 148 (su5), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  Further, instead of FIG. 148 (su1-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed in the same drawing (su1-2-1). The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot overlaps at least a part of the relatively low hold icon from the front side. Note that at least a part of the hold icon in the prefetch notice mode may overlap at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 148 (Su1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 148 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap has changed.

  In FIG. 148 (Su2-1) instead of FIG. 148 (Su2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened and a change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  Further, instead of FIG. 148 (su 2-1), in FIG. 2-1 (su 2-3-1), a treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and a change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 148 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image has disappeared, and only the display mode of the variation icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap has changed.

  Note that icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation character are also icons (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 149 shows an effect example in which the meter character is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW whose meter frame mf is white is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-1) is empty. When this meter display becomes full, the navigation character YM is promoted. It should be noted that by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), the ease of storing the meter may be notified, or a pre-reading notification and / or a notification of the change may be performed.

  In FIG. 149 (set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 4” is displayed in a shaking manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the symbol “decoration 4”. In FIG. 149 (set 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is displayed. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 149 (set 4), the meter rising item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by one level. In addition, the degree of meter rise varies depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 149 (set 4), the symbol change display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the lost decorative symbols. In FIG. (Set 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is suspended and symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 149 (Set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In this roulette production, there is a case where something happens (when there is no loss) and a case where something does not occur (when there is a loss). As an example of something, there is a change of a hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. In addition, for example, when there is a character-type super reach including Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Samurai Super Reach as one kind of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of super reach to be developed (for example, Character-type super reach), specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), and the like.

  In FIG. 149 (Set 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. In FIG. 149 (Set 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW, and white It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 149 (Set 10), the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by two levels. The blue meter rising item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 149 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. (Set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 149 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. (Set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  In FIG. 149 (set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the figure (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 149 (Set 16), the chance button 136 is operated. In FIG. 149 (Set 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter up icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is a display form of a balloon, and a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. This meter up icon MUI also overlaps with a part of white meter display MW (a part of meter frame mf), like button display icon 136D. The meter up icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter up icon MUI. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter up icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display only. Moreover, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter is increased only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured like this.

  In FIG. 149 (set 18), the green meter rising item UpIm in the meter rising icon MUI moves to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 149 (Set 19), the green meter rising item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by three levels. The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 149 (Set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to a character display of “promotion”, and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. (Set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. The display mode is changed (promoted). The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display “promotion” shown in FIG. 149 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 149 (set 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced. Note that the change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 (set 21) returns to the empty state, but may remain full. Further, when the meter display becomes full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  Instead of FIG. 149 (Case 1-1), the meter display may not always be displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a predetermined position in the effect icon display area DIS, as shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Moreover, a meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneously with the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 149 (Set 1-2-2) and the drawing (Set 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 149 (Set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rising item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 149, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises thereafter. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (corresponding to false). Alternatively, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if a meter rising item appears.

  In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may accumulate. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears or during the symbol variation, and in this case, the meter display may cause the meter to accumulate within the variation. It will be a notice that there is.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In place of FIG. 149 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 150 (Set 1-3-1), the white display MW in an empty state is displayed when the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed without holding. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 149 (Set 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 150 (Set 1-3-1). MW is full at 5th level.

  In FIG. 150 (set 1-3- 3a), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. A gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 150 (Set 1-3-4a) is filled at a stretch by the golden meter rising item UpIg. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue. However, if the meter is still stored, the blue gauge may be full. Alternatively, it may be filled with a golden gauge by being filled at a stretch by the golden meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 150 (set 1-3-b), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, a rainbow colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 150 (set 1-3-4b) is also filled at a stroke by the rainbow colored meter rising item UpIn. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. When the battery is in the accumulated state, it may be full with the blue gauge, or it may be filled with the rainbow gauge when the rainbow colored meter up item UpIn is filled at once. It may be in a tan state.

  White, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent items are prepared as meter rising items. Among these items, only the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn and the golden meter-rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by two levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by three levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by four levels.

  In addition, the rainbow meter rising item UpIn also functions as a jackpot confirmation notice. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow meter up item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter up item UpIn, or other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning differs when the meter is full with a combination of meter-up items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  Note that the color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a prefetch notice. Moreover, the expectation degree of jackpot may be represented by the color.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be linked. For example, when a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the navigation character YM displays a golden kimono. If it is an aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may necessarily appear.

  Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as a normal notice. Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of jackpot. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this example, the meter is stored until the meter reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In addition, in the meter display which becomes full in 6 levels of FIG. 149, it accumulates until the meter becomes 18 (this meter is also full three times). Here, when the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while the navigation character is promoted. You may make it save the part which is not saved. For example, when a red meter rising item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and the meter is further stored at two levels.

  If the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the amount that cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation ends, or may be displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. Also, it may be rounded down as much as it could not be stored. For example, the meter is stored, and the meter at that time may be zero, may be full, may be specially displayed, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter rising items UpI or only one blue meter rising item UpIb are displayed.

  In the example starting with FIG. 150 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 149 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 150 (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI that has arrived. Irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a red kimono as shown in FIG. "Is attached. By this “Up high probability”, it is informed that the meter rising item is in a state of being easily stored.

  Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, an “Up high probability” notification may occur or may occur. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up high probability” may not be performed.

  Further, depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different. For example, the red navigation character YM is notified of “Up high probability”, the gold navigation character YM is displayed with intense heat, and the rainbow colored navigation character YM is displayed with an iron plate display. May be. Note that the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  In place of FIG. 149 (Set 5-1), in FIG. 150 (Set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is white blinking and is one level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also blinking white. Yes. Thereafter, after the meter is once full and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 150 (Set 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode with the green kimono, The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter is full again and returned to an empty state, in FIG. 150 (Set 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a rainbow-colored kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to a rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage state and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. The color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the big hit is confirmed or the expectation degree of the big hit is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and released to produce an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is released when it is stored up to 2 levels, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when it is released when the meter is stored up to 4 levels, an effect equivalent to red is produced. Is done.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In place of FIG. 149 (Set 6-1), in FIG. 151 (Set 6-2), a roulette display icon RI and a meter up icon MUI are displayed on the white flashing meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf flashes white. However, a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is difficult to see compared to the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. In addition, the meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI may overlap from the front side to at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI. You may wrap. In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, if there is a warning that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although there is a notification that there is a possibility of being displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, the meter frame may not be notified. You may be comprised so that it may not alert | report that a meter raise icon may be displayed. Further, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed is not limited to the meter frame, and may be performed by other display or production means.

  Instead of FIG. 149 (Set 7-1), in FIG. 151 (Set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, since the meter rising icon MUI still overlaps, it is difficult to view. In this way, the meter rising icons may overlap. In addition, when meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, or the higher meter rise degree may be given priority, or the meter rise degree A lower value may be prioritized. Further, the meter rising icon does not overlap the navigation character YM from the front side, but may overlap.

  Further, instead of FIG. 149 (Set 7-1), in FIG. 151 (Set 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear which color meter rise icon is displayed, and thereafter, several color meter rise icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this manner, when it is informed that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although the color is unknown, the roulette display icon RI is displayed as shown in FIG. 151 (set 7-3-2). The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is given is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 151 (Set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 is changed, and the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many meters the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

  In FIG. 151 (set 7-3-4), a display that is an enlarged blue meter rising icon that overlaps the roulette display icon RI becomes a blue meter rising icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW It moves to 'and is displayed overlapping with white blinking meter display MW'. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes light and gradually disappears. It should be noted that the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter rising item UpIb is captured (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW ', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

  Note that a blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and may be captured in the white blinking meter display MW ′. In this case, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed simultaneously with the display, May have been displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rising item UpIb is enlarged from the blue meter rising icon may be displayed before being displayed or simultaneously with the display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (Ce-20-2-1) instead of FIG. 149 (Ce-20-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the character display of “Stock” and is in an empty state. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. It should be noted that icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variation icon) and other effects display that change only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the treasure chest icon I1 may be changed.

  As described above, the description regarding the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 87 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. That is, all descriptions including the description that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Or conversely, the matter described using FIGS. 149 to 151 can be applied to the description using FIGS. 62 to 87.

  FIG. 152 shows an effect example in which a telop effect is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (Part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 152 (No. 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that there is a possibility that the navigation character YM may change, and corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” and a character display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Predictive” are flowed from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, no text is displayed on the telop display trp, and no text is displayed on the telop display. The telop display displays “XX high accuracy”, “XX & XX high accuracy”, “XX high accuracy”. It may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that “preparing”, “XX or XX high-definition preparing”, “high-definition preparing”, etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, “XX high accuracy”, “XX & ○○ high accuracy”, “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation in progress” ”,“ Preparing with high accuracy ”, etc. may not be displayed. In addition, “XX high preparation in preparation”, “XX or ○○ high preparation in preparation”, “high preparation in preparation”, etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the effect displayed in the telop. You may alert | report this beforehand. “XX” and “XX” described here have various effects (for example, changes in hold (holding icon and / or variable icon), pseudo-ream, advance notice in a highly anticipated color, high expectation for jackpot This indicates the name of the notice (so-called harsh notice).

  The high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect that is notified in the telop rather than the case where the notice that is notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is not notified as the high-probability state by the telop display. This shows a state where the frequency of being performed becomes high. In other words, “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” in FIGS. 152 (1) to (14), (2-2), (2-3), (8-2). "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where “Navi character change is highly likely” is not notified in the telop display. In addition, the “high accuracy preparation” included in “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy preparation”, etc. described above is displayed in a telop display. The staged display is now in a high probability state (changes after the next change that started displaying the telop that includes “Predicting high accuracy” or changes that started displaying the telop that includes “Preparing highly accurate”. )) (Or the possibility of a high probability state).

  In FIG. 152 (Part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative design may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 152 (No. 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 152 (No. 6). The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 152 (part 7), a change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 152 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 152 (No. 10), the symbol variation display is started, and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 152 (No. 11).

  Note that the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” in the telop display trp notifies the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 152 (No. 12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 152 (Part 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While the telop display trp is being displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM is changed. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 152 (part 14), the leaping state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the time of super-reach start (for example, FIG. 136 (24)), at the time of temporary stop of the decorative design (for example, at the time of the first stop, the second stop, the third stop) , Symbol stop characters, start of next change, etc.

  In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured such that only a change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  In addition, instead of FIG. 152 (part 2-1), as shown in FIG. 152 (part 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages. Different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In the telop display, a high-probability display may be displayed for other notices. For the same prefetch target hold, the displayed timing may be the same, and one may be later than the other. In addition, when one “XX high probability” telop display appears, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display (for example, “Navi-Character High Accuracy”) regarding the same notice may be displayed separately, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 152 (part 2-1), the same contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in FIG. 152 (part 2-3). That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to appeal that the expectation of jackpot is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of items are displayed, the expectation degree of jackpot may actually be the same as when only one item is displayed. Moreover, you may repeat displaying a plurality of the same telop displays. That is, each time display of a telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same contents may be displayed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 152 (No. 8-1), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), as shown in FIG. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of “complete” is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may further change.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  FIG. 153 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (only 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 153 (only 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In FIG. The display shifts to reach production, and all the displays disappear from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

  In FIG. 153 (4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the symbol of the enemy swordsman on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a reduced first decorative symbol, a change icon h0, and a navigation character YM. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

  In FIG. 153 (Ta 5a), the wilderness background that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Here, in place of FIG. 153 (1a-1), in FIG. 153 (1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the frame.

  In addition, the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged, but the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown to FIG. 153 (only 1a-2), it may straddle a some display apparatus. For example, a pattern straddling from the beginning of the display, a pattern displayed straddling by moving from the original position, a pattern displaying straddling with an image change, or an image enlarged and displayed straddling Or a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. Further, when the display is enlarged as shown in FIG. 153 (1a-2), the expectation level of the big hit is increased, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is displayed. May be easy to change. The navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and the display device A in the foreground partially overlaps the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 153 (1a-2) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Further, in place of FIG. 153 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 153 (only 1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, holding) The change of the icon or the change icon) may be easily performed. Further, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the level of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of the hold icon and the change icon, etc.) They may be different or may be the same without any influence. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM will change may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The above has described the movement of the navigation character YM, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variation icon moves to another display device.

  In the example shown in FIG. 153 (1a-3), it can also be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be moved to another location on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 153 (1a-3) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 153 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 153 (only 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be regarded as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, a hold icon, It may be easy to change the variation icon).

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 153 (1a-4) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased) or may be necessarily divided (increased).

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In FIG. 154 (only 1b), the sea background is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 154 (T2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. In the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 154 (only 3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon “searching” is displayed instead. The third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared displays the same character (Mr.) YM 'as the navigation character YM and is running. On top of that, a character display indicating that a search is in progress is displayed. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with an image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The signboard icon “searching” may be a notification indicating that the navigation character YM is likely to succeed in the change effect (promotion effect). In addition, the success probability is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Moreover, although this color may change a color, a display character, etc., it may not change. Moreover, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

  In FIG. 154 (Ta 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been fully opened (initial state) so far, are placed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Come on. Note that this period corresponds to the period of the production effect.

  In FIG. 154 (only 5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, the robot moves to a fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but may be a position before contact.

  FIG. 154 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the character (Mr. Tono) YM 'who was running took a pose with his thumb up, A character display indicating level up is displayed on the screen. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a thousand carton box is displayed. The display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the thousand-thousand box. For example, if the carton box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode with a blue kimono. In addition, the color box, the open / close state, and the like of this thousand box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 154 (only 7b), the character (Mr.) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been changed to a display mode with a red kimono.

  In FIG. 154 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed in each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 154 (9b) are in the middle of wipe-in. In FIG. 154 (10b), the wipe-in is completed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (T10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the signboard icon has been displayed.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (only 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing the red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the wipe-in animation (animation closing from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (animation opening from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 154 (Ta 12b), the wipe-out is completed, and the sea background is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And the navigation character is promoted.)

  The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 154 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-2), a moving animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case as well, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame obstructs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. A navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-3).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-2 ′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. 208N shows an example of enlarged display. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-2 ′), only the right hand and the right foot toe of the navigation character YM are displayed, but the right hand and the right foot toe are enlarged and displayed. Thus, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part that enters the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM having a larger display size than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (only 1a-3-3 ′). . In this way, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more easily changed than the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. The change of the production (for example, the change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be easily performed, or may be the same without any influence. When the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Note that the moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 155 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

  Moreover, instead of FIG. 154 (it 8b), the pattern which failed in the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM is shown by FIG. 155 (it 5b-2). In FIG. 154 (only 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. It is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stopped in the middle also return to the initial state, but the notification of the change effect (promotion effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (only 5b-2), the character (Mr.) YM 'takes a pose in which the character is depressed backward. The failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, failure notification may be started when the vehicle stops before reaching a certain position.

  Also, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, the failure may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the productions that have been divided into successes and failures as described above.

  In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the N times of change from the promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change in the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure is completed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 154 (6b-1), FIG. 155 (6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, a fully closed position). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) has failed although the display device 208N has moved is shown. Also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (only 6b-2), the character (Mr.) YM 'of the pose that is depressed backward is displayed as before. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and an orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Or, conversely, if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if it will be in the state shown to FIG. 155 (it 6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted, and conversely, if it will be in this state, failure confirmation may be sufficient.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS are provided, and a base hs0 is arranged in the change icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

  Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (1c), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Furthermore, a default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (T2c), a wrinkle image for wiping effect is displayed, and the state shown in FIG. 156 (T3c) is a state where the wrinkle image is fully closed (wipe-in state). It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (only 4), wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (only 5c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (5c) after the wipe effect is finished, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed. The mini game animation by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed, and the mini (fortune-telling) of betting (fortune-telling) changes (promotions) in the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. In the stage of FIG. 156 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the betting (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and FIG. I do not know until the stage. For this reason, there is a case where at least the second display device 208S can be focused until the explanation about the mini game (here, “Promotion of Yoshimune if entering the cup”) is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (only 6c-1), the cup-in is successfully completed. When the cup-in is successful, the wiping effect is started again. In FIG. 156 (it 7c), the haze image starts to close again, and the state shown in (t) 8c is a state where the haze image is fully closed (wipe-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (it 9c), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (it 10c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (or 10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 156 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 156 (12c), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode of red kimono.

  Further, in FIG. 156 (6c-2) instead of FIG. 156 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. As described above, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. . Further, as shown in FIG. 156 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  In addition, when wiping out from FIG. 156 (only 8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM is promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG.

  Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. In addition, when successful (in this example, FIG. 156 (6c-1)) and when failed (in this example, FIG. 156 (6c-2)) or indulgent (in this example, FIG. 156 (5c)) Different presentation operations may be performed. An effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  Note that the mini game described with reference to FIG. 156 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example when another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, “COPANDA” of 07 is set in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 121B, “Holding frame B” of 02 is set in “Holding frame selection”, and “Holding display selection” “Icon C” of 03 is set, and “Background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a a1), the hold frame UI of the hold frame B is displayed, and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a a1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. A co-panda navigation character YM is also displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (a a3-1), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 157 (a a4-1), the carpet icon I2 Disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 157 (aa5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Note that the change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, it may be a back button or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 157 (a a6), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the co-panda to the head length. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 121 (b). Note that the character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, samurai or princess), or may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 157 (a a7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 157 (a 8), a reach state is entered. A balloon icon “NEXT” suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigation character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 157 (a a8).

  In FIG. 157 (a9), a pseudo-continuous pattern (design of Tono-sama character) is temporarily stopped on the middle design of the first decorative design. In FIG. A cut-in display consisting of In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (a a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a12), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  The longest navigation character YM shown in FIG. 157 (a a13) is again provided with a “NEXT” balloon icon that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect, and it is still expected that the pseudo-continuation will continue. Then, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, it enters a reach state and further develops into a super reach production (swordsman reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (aa15) changes to the wilderness background, which is the background display of the swordsman reach, and the main character and the enemy swordsman are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS are disappeared. Further, the base hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed on the base hs0. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having the longest length is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  A “chance” balloon icon that hits a big hit is added to the long-length navigation character YM shown in FIG. 157 (a a16), and the long-length navigation character YM executes a turn effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a a18) displays a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other in the super reach production. A “decoration 6” that is different from the design (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying). Although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, the navigator character YM having the longest length is also displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a a19) is in the middle of the wipe-in. In FIG. 157 (a a20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the navigation character YM of the co-panda starts to be visible while returning to the background of the background E (sky background). In FIG. 157 (a a22), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 6” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 137 (E2) to (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its own display mode. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has been lost, but the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed due to the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by himself) without using the treasure chest icon I1. Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit gaming state, a transition to a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probable change state and an electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, if the hold icon changes from hidden to displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden There may be a pre-reading notice. If the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold may be consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate the pre-reading notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target with the fluctuation that the hold has increased. It may be configured such that the prefetching notice by the hold icon is restricted, and the prefetching notice and / or the notice of the change may be performed after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

  In this example, a prefetch notice with another hold icon may be performed during execution of a prefetch notice with one hold icon. However, a prefetch notice with another hold icon is performed while a prefetch notice with one hold icon is being executed. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is consumed (may be until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Also good.

  In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player will give the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may make it not break. Further, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may make it not break. Further, in this example, there is a case where the change notice and / or the prefetch notice is performed by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the change notice and / or the prefetch notice may not be performed. In addition, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be more easily promoted with the hold icon and / or the variable icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character may change. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot within the symbol variation and / or the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot may be rich)), and / or a notice that the navigation character appears and / or It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 157.

  Instead of FIG. 157 (a a3-1), in FIG. 158 (a a3-2), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate IL. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a production means different from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 157 (a a3-1), in FIG. 158 (a a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the family crest member 224E). It is carried out. In other words, the family crest character 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Although there is no hold icon here, if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. Thereafter, the family crest member 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest actor 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest actor 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the ease of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest character 224E.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (a 3-1), in FIG. 158 (a a 3-4), instead of the treasure chest icon I 1, a change notice is displayed by sound output from the speaker 120. Note that the change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 or the game frame frame lamp 452.

  Moreover, instead of FIG. 157 (a a-1), as shown in FIG. 158 (a a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, There is a case where the icon I1 jumps on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  In addition, in FIG. 158 (a a6-2) instead of FIG. 157 (a a6-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (a a-1), in FIG. 158 (a a6-3), the co-panda navigation character YM is a co-panda having the same co-panda but different clothes color (here, red clothes). The navigation character YM has succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect).

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (a a-1), in FIG. 158 (a b1), as in the example shown in FIG. 156, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). The hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the base hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. . In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the navigation icon YM of the co-panda is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (a b1), a conversation notice is performed by a notice of the character display of “Navi character changes” and the character of the frog, and the change notice display is performed by this conversation notice. It has been broken. In other words, the change of the navigation character YM is notified in advance by the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the production means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. Yes. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 158 (a b2), the navigation character YM is changed from a co-panda to a head length that is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (A a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 158 (A c1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 123 (9) and the brightness (light quantity) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 (3) are “user set values”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed to the effect at the time of execution and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 and / or the game frame. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written as “actual set value” on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 158 (ac2), the fact that there is a possibility that the “severe fever” notice may be performed is notified by the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means that may be given the “severe heat” notice. ing. The sound volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. Thereafter, in FIG. 158 (ac3), the notice of “Intense heat” is executed, the letters “Intense heat” are displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, sound is output from the speaker 120, and the game board The lamp 442 and the game frame frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the “hot heat” notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light with a luminance higher than the luminance level set by the player. In addition, at the time of production, the volume and brightness may be forcibly below the user set value in addition to exceeding the user set value (hereinafter the same). In addition, the timing at which the volume and luminance are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the luminance may change at the timing when the sound that is approaching intense heat is output, or the sound that is approaching intense heat. The volume and brightness may change during the output. In addition, when a specific effect is executed, only the volume of the volume and brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and light may be emitted. In some cases, both may be exceeded.

  It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and brightness may be possible even on a game machine that does not have a convenient volume adjustment window VW or brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness can be used. The technical idea here can also be applied when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color of the image, etc. (hereinafter the same).

  As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 158 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described below.

  FIG. 159 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 159 are songs that the user can select according to the number of consecutive hits. For example, unless the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, the song “Large behavior” cannot be selected. A plurality of music pieces may be selectable. For example, if 15 jackpots are made, all the music pieces with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  The serial number 12 is a music that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start effect execution). If the back button navigation mode is set, the jackpot During the start interval, guidance about operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. Note that the guidance does not need to be notified when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  The music numbers 13 and 14 are music numbers that can be selected on the condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. “Collaboration SP” here refers to a super reach production where multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production where Yoshimune and Panda co-star at Swordsman Reach). “Big hit” means that the premier character “楓” appeared in the cut-in image in Super Reach and was a big hit.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed.

  In FIG. 160 (a), the probability variation state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is present, and the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. A second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (a1). 3. Further, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority changing machine, and in FIG. 160, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all in the default display mode. In addition, it is a big hit triple ream. Further, in the song name display section MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a song having that song name. That is, the music that is output here is the music that is output in the probability variation state. Further, on the left side of the music title display portion MN, icons of up and down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u, d. In addition, a space background screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the space background screen is a background screen for a probability change state.

  In FIG. 160 (a 2), the lower key 137 d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 160 (a 3), the song name in the song title display section MN is changed to “mega giga summer”. Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay (for example, 500 milliseconds) from the music selection operation, there is a period in which the music name on the music title display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title displayed in the music title display unit MN may be configured so that the music actually output from the speaker 120 matches. In FIG. 160 (A4), the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When a song is changed, the song is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time at which the song flows is determined by power-on or RTC (Real Time Clock) production, or from the continuation of the last output In such a case, the data may be output from the middle.

  In FIG. 160 (b), the special figure 2 hold increases and the special 2 becomes full (the hold number display displayed in the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The display of the fourth hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in FIG. 6 (a), the fourth hold icon 24 in the pre-read notice display mode (white blinking) is displayed. Has been. After that, three suspensions of special figure 2 are digested, and in FIG. 160 (b), the special figure 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Yes. In addition, the remaining number of reservations in FIG. 2 is 1, and the first reservation icon h21 is changed to a red display mode.

  In FIG. 160 (I 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 has been consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the decorative symbol variation display. Even in the state of FIG. 160 (A 10), the selected music is still “Mega Giga Summer”. In FIG. The song change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect that forcibly changes the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, because the song change notice is displayed, the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is announced for the jackpot confirmation (or rich jackpot), but the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if “Break DREAM”, which is the theme song of the chief choir of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the big hit is high, or the big hit is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), ”Is not output, it may be a failure, and there may be a case where the symbol variation displaying the music change notice is lost. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot richness) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where a notice other than the music change notice is made. A pre-reading notice may be made to notice that the degree is high. Further, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is surely confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). However, the song change notice may forcibly replace the song selected by the player, which may be annoying for the player in some cases. It may be confirmed.

  A song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Further, although the music of “Mega Giga Summer” output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” may be output. Note that the chief character C11 appearing in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display unit MN.

  In FIG. 160 (I 13), the song title in the song title display unit MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. Note that even if the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” continues to be output as it is in FIG. 160 (b) in all or part of the period from FIG. 160 (b) to (b) 15-1). Alternatively, “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be output from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 159, “Distance” is not a song released next to “Mega Giga Summer”, but a song different from “Make DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the music immediately before “Make DREAM” in the opening order. In the music change notice here, such a “Distance” music is put between them, and “Breaking DREAM” is finally output. Note that “sound DREAM” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN at the stage of FIG.

  In FIG. 160 (b), the song change effect sound is output again from the speaker 120, and the long character C11 raises one hand. The music piece “Distance” is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music title in the music title display unit MN is changed to “Distance”, but may be output.

  In FIG. 160 (I 15), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Make DREAM”, and a song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 again. The music change notice may be successful at the stage where “sound DREAM” is displayed on the music name display unit MN, and the music “sound DREAM” is output from the speaker 120 in FIG. That is, when “sound DREAM” is displayed on the song name display unit MN, the “sound DREAM” music is always output from the speaker 120. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is displayed, there may be a case where the music “sound DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

  Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, “Make DREAM” is always output. However, in FIG. 160 (I 15), the original “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed on the song name display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (failure), and “mega giga summer” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. Alternatively, the case where “Distance” is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 160 (b) is also a failure (displacement), and “Distance” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the “Mega Giga Summer” song may be started.

  Depending on whether “Distance” is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 160 (b) or “Your Fragrance” to be released next to “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed. A jackpot expectation may be expressed for variations and / or symbol variations within the hold. In other words, the expectation of jackpot may be higher when “Distance” is displayed than when “Your Fragrance” is displayed.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot may be expressed for the change and / or the design change within the hold depending on the number of changes of the music by the music change notice. For example, it may be configured such that when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold is likely to be a big hit. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the design fluctuation within the hold may be confirmed as big hit (or rich in big hit). On the contrary, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, it is possible to confirm the loss.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (I 16), an animation of “Breaking DREAM” is also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (a 19), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, which are combinations of jackpots with probability variation, are displayed in a shaking manner. In 20), the combination is displayed in a definite manner. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to “Breaking DREAM”, and then the “Breaking DREAM” music is output from the speaker 120, and “Delay DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is “sound DREAM”, the music “sound DREAM” is output from the speaker 120 and / or “sound DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. In other words, even if a music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next music is not displayed unless an effect display corresponding to the music is performed.

  161 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 160.

  161 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (A21), and a big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (during the execution of the big hit start effect) It is.

  The timing in FIG. 161 (A22) is the timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. On the decorative symbol display device 208, when the first round is started, a music selection screen is automatically displayed. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even in the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the first round (“1R”) and the number of balls (number of winning balls) (0 pt).

  A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since it has achieved 4 consecutive villas with this big hit, “Kiseki no Universe” has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The “New Universe” display is marked with “New”. In this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, so that “may be there” and “mega giga summer” that have already been released. "Is not displayed. Here, the newly opened “miracle of miracle” is selected, and the rust portion of “miracle of miracle” is output from the speaker 120. In the music release list GR, the previous “gain DREAM” is not displayed, and “gain DREAM” cannot be selected. However, when the “profit DREAM” effect is executed, the “profit DREAM” may be released. In this case, the display position of “Make DREAM” in the song release list GR may be a position immediately below the song released up to the previous time (“Your Fragrance”) or “Kiseki no Kiseki” released this time. It may be a position directly under the “space”. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 161, since the release order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music from the top music, but in this case, the question mark is displayed in a row of three question marks. It will be sandwiched. In addition, when the production of “Dream DREAM” is executed, “Make DREAM” among the songs released according to the current number of consecutive resorts (“Space of Kiseki”) and “Make DREAM” Only one may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 161 (b), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is aligned with a display in which three question marks are displayed below the “space of miracle” display in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music is scheduled to be released in the future. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 161 (A24), the game ball is starting to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is placed on a display with three question marks aligned, scrolling downward automatically starts (FIG. 161 (b)), the cursor csd goes to the end, and the top “is there” Return to "Maybe". In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, the player may scroll by his own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks, the names of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or, conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged is not displayed, and only the opened music name may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 161 (I 27), the automatic scrolling is not finished, and the rust portion of “the universe of miracle” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (in this example, the rust portion) is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. For example, when output for a certain period of time ends, the next song The music may not be output until the next is selected. Also, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or all of the back may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the rust portion).

  Also in FIG. 161 (A 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended and the cursor csd has not returned to the head “may be there”, but the speaker 120 replaces “the universe of miracle” with “ The output of the “rust” part may have been started. It may be configured such that the music “may be there” is not output until the cursor csd is set to “may be there”. 161 (A 30) shows a state where the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. It has returned to "I can't do it" and automatic scrolling has ended. Originally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is positioned on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the adjustment or before the adjustment). Although the output of the music is started, “May be there” is output in the middle of the automatic scrolling, so in FIG. 161 (A 31), the music output at the time of FIG. 161 (A 30) The continuation of is output as is. In addition, after the cursor csd is set to “may be there” (may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), it may be newly “may be there”. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus portion of “may be there” (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song selection).

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of “Mega Giga Summer” as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 161 (b) to determine “mega giga summer”. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 161 (I 35), the determined “mega giga summer” is displayed in red, and a music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. 160 (i36) shows a round effect screen for the second round, and the title “Mega Giga Summer” of the selected music is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been. Also, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning when the round effect starts. In addition, when all the music is output not only from the chorus part but also from the beginning of the music when the music is selected, it may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

  In addition, in FIG. 161 (I 15-2-1) instead of FIG. 160 (I 15-1), the song name “CREA” is displayed on the song name display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, it is a music that the player cannot select. From the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 160 (I 15-2-2), the music “CREA” is output, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the animation of the character “CREA”. The lyrics of the song “CREA” are also displayed. As described above, when a song that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation level of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case where it loses may be included. In the subsequent music selection by the player, the music “CREA” may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it is possible to select the music selection during the big hit game, it may be impossible to select the music selection during the pattern change, and vice versa, the selection is not possible during the big hit game selection, and the music selection during the pattern change. It may be possible.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of an effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 162, as in FIG. 158 (ac1), “Volume” and “User setting value” of “luminance” are shown in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure, and “Volume” in the lower right. And “actual setting value” of “luminance”. In addition, the types of “BGM”, “SE (sound effect)”, and “light emission” among the effects that are actually executed are also shown.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 are displayed in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to actual setting values, the presentation control data itself may instruct to ignore the user setting value and execute the value specified by the presentation data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may manage themselves based on a table in which effects that ignore the values are collected, or may be managed based on commands from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa3), the left symbol that has been temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 has moved to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and has been temporarily stopped. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 162 (Wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach development ramp pattern. However, it emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa4), the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd operate to advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and enter the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 162 (Wa4), BGM disappears, and the effect sound at the time of the movement of the super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value. In this way, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guiding plate IL perform the rendering operation, but the sound volume and the luminance remain at the user set values.

  It should be noted that the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd temporarily return to the initial position at an appropriate timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa6), the scene after the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman have a duel on the background screen of the wilderness and the Ton-sama and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed. In FIG. 162 (Wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the super reach lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 are Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 162 (Wa8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In FIG. 162 (Wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (Wa10). The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation effective period. During this period (FIGS. 162 (u7-1) to 162 (u11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result sound effect sound is output. Are output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to an indication that the effect of changing the volume and brightness settings may start.

  In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 162 (Ua10), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 162 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears and the jackpot decision sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 also emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and brightness are forcibly increased.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the effect described with reference to FIG. 162 (Wa11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform a revival effect.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa12), the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are operated again, and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. In FIG. 162 (Wa13), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. In FIG. 9 (a14), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (FIG. 162 (Ua12) to FIG. 162 (Ua14)), as in FIG. 162 (Ua11-1), the jackpot sound effect sound is output at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value in accordance with the jackpot determination lamp pattern.

  Note that even when the effect is not performed due to a failure of the accessory, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

  In addition, when the button image 136 is displayed as in FIG. 162 (Wa7-1), the volume and luminance may be forcibly changed. That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the button effect as a result (and hence a jackpot notice), and such a previous change may be handled as one of the jackpot final effects.

  Here, the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the movement of the accessory to the effect position are completed. The volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the condition, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol variation, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol variation. Further, here, the sound volume and the luminance are all changed, but only the sound volume may be changed, or only the luminance may be changed (the same applies hereinafter).

  Eventually, in FIG. 162 (Wa15), in response to the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receiving a command that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the sub-control unit 400, 500 receives the command to return the car box function 224H to the initial position, the car box function 224H moves upward. Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the jackpot sound effect from the speaker 120 is pulled down to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emitting according to the jackpot determine lamp pattern also reaches the user set value. Has been lowered. This is returned to the user setting value when the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receives a command to return the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and fades and gradually disappears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the scene after the swordsman slashes fades in. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are beginning to return to the initial positions. During this time (FIG. 162 (Wa16) to FIG. 162 (Wa17)), as in FIG. 162 (Wa15), the jackpot sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 that emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern also emit light at the brightness set by the user.

  Note that, during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIG. 162 (Wa11-1) to FIG. 162 (Wa17), the volume and / or luminance changes from the user set value, and other sound data. The volume and / or brightness may return to the user setting value when switching to the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user set value across a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched one or more times.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 162.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (Wa18), the display of the scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are stopped at the initial position. In FIG. 163 (Wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach win use ramp pattern. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and brightness return to the original is not limited to the timing in FIG. 162 (Wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (thousand box accessory 224H) starts to return from the effect position toward the initial position). Display switching timing), timing at which the duel scene victory is confirmed (timing in FIG. 163 (Wa19-1)), or timing at which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. It may be.

  In FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman falls and the main character Tono-sama wins is displayed, and the Tono-sama navigation character YM also takes a victory pose. In FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character “Yataze” is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value in accordance with the super reach winning use lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big winning decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 162 (Ua1-1), in FIG. 163 (Ua11-2), after the Tonama and the swordsman slashed in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 162 (Ua10). Is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed as a middle symbol (shake display). This is a display suggesting that the button effect has failed, and at this time, the super reach defeat BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 according to the super reach defeat lamp pattern. And the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, when the production fails, or when the loss is dense or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or luminance is changed from the user set value. Also good.

  In addition, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (U11-2 ′) instead of FIG. 162 (U11-1) is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (U11-2). In this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is lower than the user setting value. As described above, the volume and / or the luminance may be reduced when the production fails or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the luminance may be decreased when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

  In place of FIG. 162 (Wa7-1), the button effect is not started in FIG. 163 (Wa7-1-1), and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The main character, Tono-sama's character, displays an enlarged display, notifying that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the effect (movable means) such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, if a specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (U7-2-3), the screen returns to the display after the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other, and the sound volume and brightness return to the same level as the user set value. ing.

  It should be noted that the volume and / or the luminance may be forcibly changed not only according to the accessory or display but also according to the effect by other effect means. Examples of other rendering means include a light guide plate IL, a versatile writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in accordance with winning in a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a start opening, an attacker) or passing through a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  Further, instead of FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), in the example continued from FIG. 163 (Wa19-2-1), it was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. The display of the scene where the protagonist wins fades out as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-3), and then the first decorative design is displayed as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-4). The display is swayed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In this example, after the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed in FIG. 162 (Wa11-1), the state continues until FIG. 163 (Wa19-2-3), and then returns to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until the same three decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Moreover, you may continue until the shaking display is complete | finished. Further, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  Note that the volume and / or luminance is forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, but may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the luminance may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value that is the user setting value or a value that is smaller than the minimum value that is the user setting value. Good.

  Further, the luminance may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the luminance may decrease. Further, the luminance may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. When the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value that is forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Further, the player may be able to adjust the volume or luminance when the volume or luminance is changed, or may not be adjustable when the volume or luminance is changed.

  FIG. 162 (Ub) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon in which the volume or / and the luminance are not forcibly changed. For example, when changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is not so high, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed forcibly. For example, when the big hit expectation increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, the volume or / and the brightness will not be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Also good. Or conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon changes, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed.

  FIG. 162 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed at the appearance of an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation level of jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. The hot effect is an effect in which red, gold, and rainbow colors are used. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. The amount of change may be different when red (for example, one level up), when gold (for example, two level up), or when rainbow (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. There may be.

  FIG. 162 (Ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative pattern of the loss is temporarily stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Ud-2), a revival effect with a wipe effect is then executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the revival effect.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in FIG. 164 and FIG. 165, the customization setting described above is performed. That is, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 121 (b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Reservation frame selection”, “Reservation frame D” of 04 with a wrinkle image for wiping effect added. In “hold display selection”, “icon C” of 03 is set, and in “background display selection”, “background E” of 05 is set.

  In the description here, the color used in the production represents the level of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of big hit expectation increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, the color etc. as a display mode of a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation icon are mention | raise | lifted. Hereinafter, the change of the color in the direction in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This can also be applied to the above description.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D1) displays a holding frame UI of the holding frame D, and a copanda as a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the stop display shown in FIG. 164 (D3). Here, the pre-reading notice hold is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 164 (D4), one hold is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

  In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 164 (D5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 are started. The image appears from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 do not have to be performed during the appearance of the wrinkle image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 164 (D6), the bag image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 164 (D7), the first decorative symbol also starts to change, and in FIG. 164 (D8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Also in FIG. 164 (D8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

  In FIG. 164 (D 9-1), the wipeout is started and the wrinkle image for wiping effect starts to open. In FIG. 164 (D10), the wrinkle image is fully opened (wipe out state). In the wiping effect here, the holding frame is changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 164 (D10) is a “hold frame R” that is different from the “hold frame D” selected by the player in the customization settings, and is surrounded by a red frame. Become a frame. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected. It should be noted that this red frame makes the navigation character YM's feet invisible. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of being easily changed, and a “holding change !? time” is displayed beside the co-panda of the navigation character YM. The character display is displayed. Note that the hold for the pre-reading notice is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold is used in FIG. 164 (d). Here, the “pending change !? time” corresponds to the above-described “high probability state regarding production”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (d12), a bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 that is the target of the pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile is changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the hold icons or the change icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits There may be. These all correspond to failure of promotion production.

  In FIG. 164 (D15), a reach state is reached, and in FIG. 164 (D16), the suspended change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted in two stages, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 164 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 164 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 164 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3. In FIG. 164 (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is It has changed to a red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D19), the medium symbol that has been the red reserved change symbol is changed to “decoration 2”, and “decoration 1” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 1”. Is displayed in a variable display (temporary stop). In FIG. 164 (D20), the decoration symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

  In FIG. 164 (D22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11 so far, has moved to the base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0 in the red display mode. Even when the pre-reading notice target hold is consumed, the character display of “hold change !? time” continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 164 (d), a golden light beam is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0. In FIG. 164 (d), the variation icon that has been red until now has changed to gold.

  In FIG. 164 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. In super reach production, the sky background switches to the wilderness background, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super-reach state, all of the holding frame UI remains except for the base hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 164 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of “holding frame R” after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 164 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is finished, the non-displayed items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is finished, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation is displayed. The hold frame D may be displayed from the start of display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red. However, if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the expectation of jackpot increases. Also good.

  It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) is more than the case where the pre-read hold icon is displayed on the hold frame selected by the player (for example, “hold frame D”). When the pre-read hold icon is displayed, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-read hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player When the prefetch hold icon is displayed in a hold frame that is not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) than when the prefetch hold icon is displayed in (for example, “hold frame D”). However, even if it is the display mode of the same prefetch hold icon, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the prefetch hold icon. It may be.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 164.

  In FIG. 165 (d 9-2-1) instead of FIG. 164 (d 9-1), both the hold icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to a special mode (character). Further, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the expected degree of jackpot. Here, the ease of change to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots is determined according to the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (D 9-2-2), a mini game is played with the panda of the navigation character YM. The character that has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation level of jackpot. The Samurai character wins with a probability of 50%, the Princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the Tono-sama character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the Tono-sama character, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon of a jackpot-determined color (here, rainbow).

  In FIG. 165 (E 9-2-3), a janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played janken at the same time. As a result, both Samurai characters lost and Tono-sama character won. A plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 165 (E 9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and after the state (wipe-in state) of the bag image in FIG. (E 9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 9 (E 9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

  FIGS. 165 (o1) to (o12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of variations.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (O1), the hold frame UI of the hold frame D is displayed, and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (e), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (e 2), the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and the third hold icon h 13 is increased. Here, the pre-reading notice hold is a hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 165 (O 3), the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 165 (O 4), one hold is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The variation display of the decorative design has been started. In FIG. 165 (O5), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed on standby. Thereafter, one hold is consumed, and the hold for the pre-reading notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 165 (O7), the combination of the decorative pattern of the lose is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 is continuously displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 165 (e. 9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold for the pre-reading notice, is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure chest icon I1 is still displayed while being placed on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of variations. In FIG. 165 (O10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. In other words, in FIG. 165 (v. 11), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 is widened, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 165 (O12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the co-panda selected by the player in the customization setting described above is changed to the navigation character YM of the head length. The chief navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected.

  In this example, a true symbol variation display such as a special symbol variation display is displayed, and a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed by the change, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed is changed by the change notice display for the third time in the pseudo series, or before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the fluctuation, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo series, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo series. It may change.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and the fact that it is set to the auto button mode is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 166 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing background on the sea background. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 166 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, it is configured that the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. It may be.

  In FIG. 166 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 on which a button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is configured. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the conversation notice is made than when the conversation notice is not made. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A6). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 166 (A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  At the timing of FIG. 166 (A7), the suspension of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to be displayed at this time. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 166 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts vibrating according to the appearance of the button hold icon.

  In FIG. 166 (A10), a certain period elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation notice is started. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 166 (A11), the strawberry conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display for the auto button is “Summer vacation still?” The character display is displayed. For the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 166 (A12) to (A13), as an operation promotion mode for the button holding icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A15), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A15) has finished oscillating and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 166 (A14), the chance button 136 has finished oscillating and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation effective period of the button hold icon may end, for example, when a predetermined effective period elapses, may end when the decorative symbol makes the first stop, It may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. In FIG. 166 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 that is the button hold icon is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

  In FIG. 166 (A17), the hold decrease animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the button hold icon display mode starts moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In FIG. In this figure (A19), the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation h0 of the blue display style is displayed in (A20). It has changed.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 166.

  After that, in FIG. 167 (A22), the display of the variation of the first decorative symbol is started. In FIG.

  In this example, the auto button mode is always set, but the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button hold icon is confirmed and displayed regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set. In this case, the display mode is automatically changed after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the button hold icon display mode is the hold icon, the icon changes to the blue display mode hold icon according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0). The display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  Further, the auto button mode may be configured to end by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the automatic button mode may not be ended even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is not displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. When the button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may end.

  When the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode. The display icon may change to a change icon h0. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Further, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, it does not change to the change icon h0 of the blue display mode, whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and may be changed during the auto button mode, but not changed during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

  Furthermore, when the auto button mode is not set and the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the character display “Summer vacation is still ~” as shown in FIG. 166 (A11) is displayed. It is not updated to the conversation image CI2 of niece. However, it may be updated.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), in FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In addition, a meter display MW ′ is also displayed in FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-1). The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the habit conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without the button operation. Yes.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), in FIG. 167 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even in the production that requires the chance button 136 to be operated a plurality of times. If the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may work for the remaining button effect images.

  In addition, in FIG. 167 (Aa5-4) instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), a button effect image (button is displayed on the second display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 167 (Aa5-4), there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, but one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are The button function may be disabled.

  In addition, in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-1) instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2), a button striking effect is started, and a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and a striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . The auto button function does not work for the button repeated striking effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. Eventually, in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and a response display is performed. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-5), the chance button 136 is started to be repeatedly hit, and a response display such as an increase in the hitting meter RHM is also displayed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. It continues to vibrate and continues to light blue. In the examples so far, the chance button 136 has only to be operated once. However, in this example, since the continuous hitting is necessary, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of a long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes longer as in the case of continuous hitting, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT has become zero. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. Thereafter, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be configured to operate when operated once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press automatic continuous hit function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing a continuous hit operation by performing a long press for a certain period is performed. However, when the auto button function does not work, the long press auto-strike function may not work.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 166.

  In the example continued from FIG. 168 (A 8-2-1) instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), after the effective period of operation of the button hold icon has started, This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as a response effect of the button hold icon, and the habit conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the prefetching notice, and the update of the habit conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice corresponds to the prefetching notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. In addition, the change of the button variation icon in FIG. 166 (A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect for which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed and the habit conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Or, conversely, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

  Further, the above description using FIG. 168 (A A 8-2-1) to FIG. 168 (A A 8-2-4) was an explanation during the auto button mode setting, but the auto button mode is not yet set. The same applies to.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3), even when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (here, blue). Indicates. Note that different notification may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  In addition, in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3 ′) instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in the normal color (here, blinking white). An example is shown.

  As another example, in FIG. 168 (Ab1), during the big hit game, a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is made. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (Ab2), a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed along with the display of the third round. May be disabled, or conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  FIG. 168 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 168 (Ba5) are diagrams showing examples of effects related to the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 168 (Ba1-1), an effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 168 (Ba2), when a button hold icon (first hold icon h11) for which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. In FIG. 168 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 that is the button hold icon is changed (see FIG. 168 (Ba1-5)).

  FIG. 168 (Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 168 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 168 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting and becomes a point reporting the back button.

  The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation effective period described so far will be further described in detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described so far is displayed. The remaining period meter MT has a remaining time display area MT1 whose display mode changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a reduced display is performed), and a display mode that is behind the remaining time display area and according to the passage of time. Is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 (in this example, increasing display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color and shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). The case where it is displayed by is mentioned. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a reduced manner as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. In this case, the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) can be noticed. On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed as time passes, Accordingly, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). There are cases where variations in the way of enjoying can be increased and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. The remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 are displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first. (In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the presentation examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to make various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character A”) is being displayed. In that case, it may be configured such that the navigation character B that is displayed later may overlap the navigation character A that is displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B that is displayed later is displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions that do not overlap each other. For example, there is a case where the navigation character YM that is always displayed is overlapped by a navigation character that makes a notice of the change and / or a prefetch notice during one or more changes. Furthermore, a change notice display may be performed by performing an effect display that suggests that a change notice display may be displayed by a navigation character.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol change display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. Also, a ball removal notification such as “please remove the ball” is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. This ball removal notification display is a little transparent, and when the ball removal notification display is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the rear display is slightly visible. Hereinafter, what is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, or displayed on the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlapping”. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may be a display in which the rear display is completely invisible. Further, a sound such as “please remove the sphere” is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second decorative symbol at the upper left and the second reserved number display at the upper right, and does not overlap these displays. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second decorative symbol or / and the second reserved number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen that notifies the current setting state, and does not overlap the frame RW. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the holding frame UI, and does not overlap the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold frame UI, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, and the luminance adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the luminance adjustment icon BI are also hidden. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. One decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation is not performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies to the case where the ball emptying operation is performed and the dish full tank error is once resolved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball empty notification is newly displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the variation display of the first decorative symbol. In FIG. 169 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. Further, by operating the up / down keys of the operation key unit, a bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and the bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume adjustment bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed simultaneously. Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB or the brightness adjustment bar display may be always displayed or may be displayed only for a certain period. Moreover, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB and the ball removal notification display are displayed at positions that do not overlap. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Further, the display of the ball removal notification is misaligned between the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, and does not overlap these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α4), a super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. The ball removal notification display is also displayed here, and the left design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper left, the right design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball removal notification overlapped. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background. Note that the volume can be adjusted even during super reach, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α4). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α5), a big hit game start screen is displayed, but the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α5). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps with the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display at the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handed warning. This corresponds to the mini-right-handed display in FIG. 119 (52) described above). There is no overlap with the right-hand suggestion display. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display or may overlap. The right-hand suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-hand. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is a big hit from the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) big hit state to the first big hit (single villa), but the latent probability change state. The big hit of the first time (single villa) from the first time (single villa) and the first one (single villa) from the sudden probability change state (high figure of high accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and / or the sudden probability variation state described above indicates only the state that has shifted from the normal state, and excludes those that have occurred in the probability variation state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each jackpot. In this case, the right-handed instruction screen is overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed warning in FIG. 118 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display during the right-handed warning in FIG. 174 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, a left-handed warning display (corresponding to a liquid crystal display during left-handed leftward strike in FIG. 174 described later) is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the right-hand suggestion display is performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed, but the right-hand suggestion display may not be performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (α7), the first round is started and a round effect is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the round effect display. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the round number display at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap the round number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the round number display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification has a different display position from the number of balls displayed (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap this number of balls displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number-of-balls display, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α8) of the fourth round, a promotion effect is performed that suggests whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable prize opening will be open for a long time and easy to pass V in the fifth round. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect is successful is executed. In other words, it is reported that the game is a big hit game in which the probability change condition is easily established. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of the success effect. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α8), the display of the star “V Chance GET” is also started. The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the display of “V Chance GET” indicated by the star, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the star sign “V Chance GET”, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the jackpot game and prompts the player to pass V in this round. The message “Aim at V” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the indication “Aim at V”.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (α10), there is a passing of the game ball (V passing) to the probability variation operating area in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation has been confirmed. The display of “V” is large. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “V”. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (α10), the display of the star “V Chance GET” may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is completed, a big hit game ending effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 169 (α11). In the above jackpot game, the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, so the probability change state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the jackpot game ends. (High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that the state is shifted to the probability change state (the effect during probability change) is performed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In the end effect of the big hit game, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α12) displays a prepaid card forgotten warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned alert display in FIG. 119 (57)). The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the prepaid card forgotten warning display. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgotten warning display, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α13), the display of the number of big hits (BONUS × 3) is displayed immediately below the right-hand suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. In addition, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right side of the screen, and icons of up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball removal notification has a display position that is different from the display of the number of jackpot reams, and does not overlap this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of jackpot reams, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display unit MN and does not overlap the song title display unit MN. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the up / down key icons, and does not overlap the up / down key icons. The ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the up / down key icons, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap the second hold number display. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the second hold number display, or may overlap.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB shown in FIG. 169 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 169 (α14), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α15), a music selection screen shown in FIG. 161 is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the music release list GR.

  Further, in FIG. 169 (α16), the music selection is finished and the round effect is started. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α16), the name of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display, and does not overlap the song title display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α17) in the fourth round, a message “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. In FIG. 169 (α18) in the fifth round, “ The indication “Aim at V” is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps these indications displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 169 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. Further, FIG. 169 (α18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to when the special electric power operating signal of the main control unit 300 is turned on from off. In this case, the period between FIG. 169 (α17) and FIG. 169 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round. It is the period from on to off.

  In FIG. 169 (α19), “V” is displayed on the right side of the screen based on the fact that V has passed, and the ball removal notification display overlaps this “V” display. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of “V”.

  Note that FIG. 169 (α20) may be a state in which 5R is being executed and a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit) (Period corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game progresses to 15 rounds (FIG. 169 (α21) to (23) in FIG. 169). In FIG. 169 (α24), as in FIG. ) Is displayed, and the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 169 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the interval between rounds.

  Note that there is a time lag between the timing at the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub control unit 400 to perform various controls.

  In FIG. 169, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the interval between rounds. For example, “5R” is displayed during the inter-round interval between 5 and 6 rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

  The same applies to the end of the 15th round, and the round interval period may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In this example, a right-hand warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but a left-hand warning display may not be displayed, but a left-hand warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  As described above, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example, but the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 172 and 173). It is applicable to the display of the notification regarding.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (β) is such that the display behind the ball removal notification display is completely invisible.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) overlaps the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or may overlap the entire volume adjustment icon VI. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. However, the display may be such that the back side display is completely invisible, such as the ball removal notification display shown in FIG. 170 (β).

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ2) overlaps the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. This ball removal notification display does not overlap the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM overlaps the volume display bar display VB. 170 (γ1) may also be displayed so that the back side display is completely invisible, as in the case of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). It should be noted that the display is not limited to the volume adjustment bar, but can be set by the player during the symbol variation, and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo (the above-described effect customization screen shown in FIGS. 123 (V) and (V ′) A list of missions achieved by player operation regardless of the state of change of the pattern during the setting of the song title display unit MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. And game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of extended games of current play, etc.), character and background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-1) overlaps the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. When the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-1), a volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed. As shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-2), In the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB, the ball removal notification display has priority and is displayed on the front side. Note that the volume adjustment bar display VB may be given priority and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume adjustment bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 170 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 170 (γ3-2), the ball removal notification display is overlapped with the volume adjustment bar display VB.

  In FIG. 170 (δ 3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 170 (δ 3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation, so that the ball removal notification is made. Is overlaid on the display. Here, the ball removal notification display overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the ball removal notification display. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to displays related to other errors described later.

  In FIG. 170 (ε), the indication of the ball removal notification is displayed only with characters without a frame display.

  FIG. 170 (ζ1) shows an example in which the ball removal notification display is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 49). By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative design and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 170 (ζ2), the surrounding image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim at V” shown in FIG. 169 (α9) and hides the character display.

  In FIG. 170 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 169 (α17).

  In FIG. 170 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim at V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 170 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim at V at next R” displayed on the right side.

  In FIG. 170 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap the entire volume adjustment bar display VB. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 170 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume adjustment bar display VB and a part of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of error A to error E shown in FIG. 171 will be described later. In these errors A to E, the ball removal notification may or may not be included.

  In FIG. 171 (ι1), an error A notification transmissive display is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 171 (ι1 ′), an opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 171 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 170 (γ3-1). Is the same as the explanation in FIG. 170 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 171 (ι 3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparent display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the error that has occurred first is error A. From the speaker 120, the warning sound of the latest error E is output. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all displayed errors occur.

  In FIG. 171 (ι 3-2), since error E has been eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears and a warning sound of error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, a warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

  In FIG. 171 (ι3-2 ′), the volume adjustment bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification transparency display). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparency display of the lowest error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume adjustment bar display VB.

  In FIG. 171 (ι4-1), when errors occur in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Is done. An error with a high priority is an error with a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, the order of the list described in FIG. In FIG. 171 (ι4-1), error B is the highest priority error.

  In FIG. 171 (ι4-2), since the error B has been eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the second error E that has been output so far is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 171 (ι5-1), error A occurs, a transparent display of error A notification is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. Error Z is an error that stops the game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (ι5-2), the display is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to error Z are not displayed. ing. The error that stops the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) that the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries. That is, it is an error that prevents the main control unit 300 from performing various lotteries, or even if it can be performed. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as error Z, is not limited to an error that stops the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later, an error that stops the payout operation, or the like. Also good. Also, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 174 described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 174 May not be displayed in the error Z display mode. Further, if the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries, commands are not transmitted to the sub-control units 400 and 500, so that the sub-control units 400 and 500 do not perform various lotteries as a result.

  In FIG. 171 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, on the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opacity display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. The error display in FIG. 171 (κ1) is a display that makes the display behind the error display completely invisible, but is a slightly transparent display so that the display of the ball removal notification overlaps from the front side. If displayed, the rear display may be slightly visible.

  In FIG. 171 (κ2), a ball removal notification display is added in the state shown in FIG. Here, the ball removal error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E). Also good. Instead of the error of ball removal notification, an error with a high occurrence frequency may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 171 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. Note that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 171 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  It should be noted that the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display is overlapped by the ball removal notification display, and conversely, the ball removal notification display is overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. May be.

  FIG. 171 (λ 1-1) is during symbol variation display, and in the middle of symbol variation display, a simultaneous effect executed on a plurality of game machines is started. FIG. 171 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effects at the normal time (no error occurs and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 171 (λ1-2), the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of simultaneous effects during normal times. The volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the reverse may be possible. As for error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 171 (λ2 ′) to be described later, but it may be displayed overlapping with the background display of simultaneous effects. However, the reverse may be possible.

  FIG. 171 (λ2) shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during a super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display OFD of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of simultaneous effects is displayed on those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

  FIG. 171 (λ2 ′) shows an example in the case where simultaneous effects occur during error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach production is in progress also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbols, or in the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error display (transparent display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect is generated. The simultaneous effect display in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the simultaneous effect display in the separate frame display section OFD. Or, conversely, the display of simultaneous effects in the separate frame display portion OFD may overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  Further, in a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”). .) Overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As described above, in the description using FIGS. 169 to 171, the word “error” and the word “warning” are used. However, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is possible to notify that an error has occurred. It may also be a notification that an instruction has been given to eliminate an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / Errors that can be detected by the main controller>
Next, errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, start opening 2 (electrical chew), large winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning outlet exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error, and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on), and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). It is an error that returns when the error occurs. Switch (sensor) disconnection error is when the power is on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and any of the special figure 60 start port, normal start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (harness disconnected or connector disconnected) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and an unconnected device (special figure 60 start port, general map start port, attacker) is connected in a power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) This error returns when it is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave).

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 51) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when a normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 51) is not activated, and an error of the big prize opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in a big winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 51) is an abnormal value.

  The big prize exit excess error occurs when the number of discharges is greater than the number of entries during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer that has generated a large prize exit excess error This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The extra prize winning error is generated when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric utility operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered is equal to the number of balls discharged. This error returns when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the return process for the extra prize winning prize excess error, the number of passes related to the probability variation area is set to zero.

  The impact abnormality error is a predetermined state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and the probability variation area (specific area) is valid. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes outside the probability variation region validity period and outside the probability variation region validity period.

  Solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has never performed an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF during the probability variation area valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 172 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (not playable). However, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the priority may not be the order of the list described in FIG. The details of the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. The term “when the winning end display period ends” of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended.

<Errors that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>
Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a tray full tank error (bottom pan full error, dish full tank error), a payout shortage error, a payout number switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are a magnetic abnormality error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, an impact sensor error, etc. (not shown).

  Also, the error generation conditions, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the fire operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 173 (a). Note that “stop” described in the item “stop firing” shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  FIG. 173 (b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and enters the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch non-connection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, (Payout control communication error, switch level abnormality error, winning rate abnormality error, door opening error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, or the priority may be the same.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, an operation of a magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), and only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) may be overwritten and others One or a plurality of devices may continue notification for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of a notification mode of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The liquid crystal display described in FIG. 174 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is cleared and is not displayed when the error is cleared. However, after the error is cleared, a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) is set. ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured not to be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 174 may be a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the inside of “” is repeatedly output by sound. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then, it may be configured not to output sound, or may be configured to output sound for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

  The error illumination LED described in FIG. 174 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is configured to be lit only when an error relating to payout occurs. However, it may be configured so that some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control) are turned on, or may be configured not to be turned on in part or all. Good. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning) is configured not to turn on the error illumination LED, but may be turned on. Note that the error illumination LED may be constantly lit, or may be informed that an error has occurred by turning off when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 174 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is lit during a period when the payout device 152 is paying out. During the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out, the light is turned off. Further, the payout illumination LED is lit when a part of an error relating to payout (in this example, an insufficient payout error) occurs, but may be lit only during a period when payout by the payout device 152 is being performed, It may be configured to light up when an error relating to payout occurs. The decorative LED described in FIG. 174 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decorative LED. Or may be configured so as not to be provided), and performs a light emission effect according to various effects. Moreover, even if the decoration LED described in FIG. 174 performs a light emission effect at the time of occurrence of an error, the light emission effect may be stopped and lighted with an error light emission pattern. (As an example of recovery, it may be configured so that the lighting effect progresses in another layer even during an error and the lighting effect at the time of error recovery returns when returning from the error. However, it may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until a timing at which it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or may be configured to return from the effect data at the time when the error occurred. Good) Here, error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and to turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) errors related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) errors related to power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) warnings related to sub-controls (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / payout error>
First, an error related to payout will be described. In this example, “error related to payout (payout control unit 600)” includes a tray full tank error (hereinafter also referred to as a “plate full tank error”), a glass frame open error, a payout shortage error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, A payout number switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit unconnected error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error can be mentioned. Here, the 7-segment LED for payout error display is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through a payout substrate case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when an underfill full tank error occurs, the number “2” is applied to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the under-plate full error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to the effect that an underfill full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, a case where a lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. .

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Flashing of the frame lamp or panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sounding of a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  When a door opening error occurs, the number “1” is set on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification by the first light emitting means is performed, and notification by the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame Flashing lamps and panel lamps), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by the display means) of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the game ball payout may be interrupted, and the game ball payout may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  Further, when a payout number shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in this example) (lighting LED for payout illumination is turned on in this example). Note that other error notification modes for payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / power supply error>
Next, an error relating to the power supply will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error relating to the power supply occurs, error notification is not performed. Note that the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. In addition, about the error regarding a power supply, although alerting | reporting is not performed in this example, you may alert | report by a display means, a sound output means, and various LED. Further, a power supply state confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit after power-on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, when an error occurs when power is turned off after power-on It may be configured to be lit up.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to main control>
Next, errors relating to main control and the like will be described. In this example, “error related to main control (main control unit 300)” includes magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, shock error Examples include errors, winning rate abnormality errors, winning prize excess winning errors, winning prize exhaust excess errors, solenoid error errors (large winning mouth error errors).

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) Flashing of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetism (magnet) detection error has occurred), and sound output means ( In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example) is performed by the speaker 120). In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, when an abnormal impact error has occurred, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Notification (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an abnormal shock error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Further, when an error in excess of winning a prize opening occurs, notification by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that a big prize opening excess error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, a notification is made by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to indicate that an extra prize winning prize excess error has occurred).

  In addition, when a big prize outlet discharge excess error occurs, error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notifications (light emitting means (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps)) (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps flashing)) and display means ( In this example, a notification (displaying characters indicating that a big prize mouth discharge excess error has occurred in this example) by a decorative symbol display device 208) and a notification (in this example, a speaker 120) by a notification (this example) Then, a sound effect sound indicating that an extra prize exit excess error has occurred may be performed.

  In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (a special prize opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification (in this example, a decoration LED (decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used. Blinking of the frame lamp and the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred), and sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Note that the winning rate error error includes the general winning opening (in this example, the general winning opening 226), the starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special figure starting opening 232), and the large winning opening (in this example, the variable winning opening). 234), the same error notification may be performed, but different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error has occurred. Another error corresponding to the winning rate error is an abnormal winning error. The abnormal winning error is a target game (for example, the general winning port 226, the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc.) under certain conditions (for example, when the N-ball is launched, the big hit This is an error that occurs when more than a certain number of winnings are detected in the electric support (other than during normal high accuracy). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  Note that an error relating to main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) ), Notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. Note that other error notification modes relating to main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / warning / error related to sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the “warning / error regarding the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)” in this example include an impact warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, notification (in this example, display of characters indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). No notification will be made.

  Further, when a hitting warning is generated, notification (display of characters indicating that a hitting warning has occurred in this example) by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and sound output means ( In this example, a notification is made by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a strike warning has occurred), but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The effect moving means error means various effect moving means (in this example, the effect moving body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest member 224E, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the thousand box). Production movable means provided on a game board such as an accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106 may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). If there is an effect moving means for the frame, it may not be included, or the effect moving means may not be provided on the frame). Is an error that occurs. The abnormality mentioned here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in an OFF state. It may indicate a case where it does not turn ON even if retry operation is performed one or more times, or a case where it is determined that the sensor is kept ON. Further, the initial operation may be configured by all or any one or two of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect moving means whose initial position sensor is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. The sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a sensor failure, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect moving means. (For example, when the initial movement is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C and the production movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the production movable bodies A to C is the origin. After the return operation is performed (appears to operate for the production movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C. In addition, after the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation, the other operations movable means may be configured to perform the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initialized. The operation is then performed, and then the initial operation of the production movable body A → the production movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of production movement means are not in the initial position, the production is started from the production movement means having a higher priority. An operation (an initial operation including an origin return operation or an origin return operation) may be performed.

  Further, the effect moving means error may occur when the effect moving means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit of FIG. 93) when the connection of the effect moving means is not correctly connected, or when the harness of the effect moving means is disconnected or the connector is damaged. 422), etc., even if it is not normally connected. It should be noted that “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of effect moving means” and “error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing various operations moving means when power is turned on” are different errors. The notification may be divided into two.

  Further, the effect moving means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the returning display.

  The error related to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control and payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  Further, an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect movable means error) may be configured such that, in addition to the error display by the display means, a decoration LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is lit or blinks. Alternatively, an error may be notified by the sound output means, or both of them may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect moving means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is ended and the game is ended. The blinking display by the decoration LED on the panel is finished, part of the decoration LED on the frame is turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, the error of the rendering means A It is conceivable that the notification is continued, the error notification of the effect means B is ended, a part of the effect means C is ended, and the other part is continued as it is.The effect means A to C are sound output means, display means, Decorative LED, etc.)
When displaying the liquid crystal loading display when the power is turned on, an error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or it may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, a symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or symbol variation display) or a return indication (display in preparation) is displayed. The The display during return is a display that is displayed when the game control is returned during symbol fluctuation or big hit. If the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0), If the big hit is being made, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, the start or end of a specific round, the start or end of a jackpot start effect, the start or end of a jackpot end display). Here, during the return display, all or part of the error display described above may be displayed. However, all or part of the other error displays are not displayed. May be. Further, the above-described error display is not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, but some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change notice display.

  When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G that can be selected by the player when the hold prefetch notice is started. There may be a case where the icon A changes to a mode of an icon that cannot be selected by the player when the reservation pre-reading notice is started.

  Note that a plurality of operation means related to effects may be provided. Here, when the operation unit A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation unit B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation unit A (or an image indicating the appearance of the operation unit A or “operation unit”). Character display such as “Press A.” Hereinafter, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B, or “ Character display such as “Press the operating means B”, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “operating means image B”) may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image relating to the operating means on which the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol pattern is fixed and displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button functions for both operation means. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. Further, the navigation device image B may be configured such that the change in the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to be successful than the case where the operation device image A is displayed. The success rate of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, it may be the same.) In addition, the display mode of the navigation character is changed to a display mode with a higher expectation degree of big hit when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured so as to be easy, but may be reversed, and may be configured so that the display mode in which the navigation character is easily changed does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but it may be reversed or the same. . Further, there may be an effect (promotion effect or demoting effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, and during the operation effective period of the operation means A and outside the operation effective period of the operation means B. Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B changes to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operation means, that is, the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as examples, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  The effects that can be selected by the player are special figure start gates, general figure start entrances, general winning entrances, and / or effect gates (entering into the gate, no prize ball will be played even if a sensor is detected, only the effect There may be a case where the number of points increases according to the points obtained by passing through the gate to be performed. Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative design display device 208 It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for drawing an effect to be acquired (gacha effect)” is performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between display and non-display of the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between display and non-display of the navigation character may be possible at all times, or may be possible only during display of the navigation character, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.) and may be configured so that navigation characters cannot be displayed or hidden during the super reach production, and the super reach production is in progress. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only when the symbol is stopped (when the special symbol is stopped).

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 175 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 175, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 90 are not provided.

  FIG. 176 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 176), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 176) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the rear surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of medals can be made electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title or the like can project toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 176 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) relating to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] being executed,
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow display mode, etc.]
When the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, High expectations for jackpots]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 135 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), etc.],
The second icon is an effect that changes the variation icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, an effect shown in FIG. 135 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (11)]. Is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [e.g., Tono-sama display mode wearing a default color kimono, Tosama-s display mode, co-panda display mode]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed simultaneously in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed in the icon display area at the same time as the variable icon during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  “Straddling” means that a symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

  In addition, “an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variation displays” means “an icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then displayed again”. .

  The second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of display.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition here, there are n or more holdings, there is a holding for which a pre-reading notice is performed, a player is customizing, a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, Conversation notice etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a preview notice of a pre-reading notice, the second icon is stocked, and the expectation of jackpot in the running symbol change display is You can list things that are expensive, winning the lottery. In other words, the certain conditions may be all of the above-mentioned enumerations. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 133 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2)-Fig. (A 6-3-4a), Fig. 141 (K1-3-1)-Fig. (K1-3-4), meter production shown in Fig. 149, diagram 147 (Sh2-2-1) to FIG. (Sh2-2-3), FIG. 158 (Ab1) to (Ab2), FIG. 138 (O6) to FIG. (O8), FIG. 165 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about a mode changing from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. In this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the aspect.

  The second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 141 ( [1-3-1) to FIG. ((1-3-3b2), FIG. 158 (A4-2), FIG. 158 (A6-2)] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally a jackpot symbol mode than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed [for example, the expectation of big hit is high]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is It may be “when there is no change to the fourth display mode”.

  Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is finally a big hit symbol mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. The confirmation display may be difficult.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 136 (U20-1), FIG. 145 (This b15-1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a warning display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed”, “the warning of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode for a notice of jackpot in the symbol change display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-reading notice [for example, FIG. 141 (Ke 5-1) to FIG. (Ke 13), FIG. 144 (Koa a11)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice” may be “a prefetch notice is performed by the second icon”.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a pre-read notice display mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  In addition, when any one of the change icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, neither icon is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the case.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variation icon having a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon having a default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode are in the state of being displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big win symbol pattern than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Or, conversely, the change icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The state of being displayed is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the state where both the second icons are displayed.

  The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode. When the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. The confirmation may be displayed without fail. Even though the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, even though the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variation icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, advantageous jackpots are confirmed (for example, jackpot with probability change, long-round jackpot is confirmed), rare reach (for example, full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or other premier effects appear. It may be easy, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or conversely, it may be difficult to hit the revival. Further, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button pops out, rotates, or dents, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). . Also, you can get special benefits for production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, or open a special jackpot round (for example, the second attacker opens) Round) may be started.

  In addition, the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach) may be suggested by the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, if the display mode of the variation icon is Tono-sama and the display mode of the second icon is a swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach where Ton-sama and the swordsman battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the change icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is Tono-sama, it will function as a change notice (normal notice) only after the two icons are displayed. It may be configured.

  Further, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the variation icon of the second display mode, and the third display mode The jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different from the second icon combination.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the first display mode more than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the probability that the variation icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is that the variation icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. In the case of changing to the second display mode, the variation icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, “than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is changed from the first display mode to the first icon. It may be “than the case where an effect of changing to the second display mode is performed”.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may surely change from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variation icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

  Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed as the fifth icon more than when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be easily changed.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variation icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variation icon is always changed. Also good.

  Furthermore, the change icon of the display mode that is easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. In addition, a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 139, the example shown in FIG. 140 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may be easily changed.

  Further, depending on a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icons having the same display mode or a combination of the second icons having a different display mode), it is easy to hit a big hit, a hold icon or the variation icon The display mode may be easily changed, or a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 140 (7)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, for example, the third display mode may change to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  The second icon is a display mode related to the operation unit, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operation unit. The display mode related to the operation unit may be a display mode imitating the operation unit, a display mode that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode related to the operation effective period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. There may be a combination of these display modes, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode may be changed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which notification for prompting operation of the operation means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.

  Moreover, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode [for example, the display mode of the number shown in FIG. 137 (E 4-3)] that is not selected by the player.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that cannot be selected by the player. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the second icon may change without any other display effect” means that “the display mode of the second icon depends on the effect of the second icon. May change. "

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (3) to FIG. (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the variation icon may change without any other display effect” may mean that the display mode of the change icon may change due to the effect of the change icon. It may be.

Also,
“One type of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”),
The hold icon has a plurality of display modes [for example, icons A to G for holding display selection in FIG. 121 (b), FIGS. 136 (u2), (u3), (u12), Default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.)
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to a hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, a change icon h0, etc.]
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 135 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), etc.],
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (i-9) to 11 (11). Etc.] is an icon that may be used for
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a Tono-sama wearing a default-colored kimono, a display mode of a Tokusama, or a display mode of a copanda]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained. Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 133 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2)-Fig. (A 6-3-4a), Fig. 141 (K1-3-1)-Fig. (K1-3-4), meter production shown in Fig. 149, diagram 147 (Sh2-2-1) to FIG. (Sh2-2-3), FIG. 158 (Ab1) to (Ab2), FIG. 138 (O6) to FIG. (O8), FIG. 165 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 141 ( (1-3-1) to FIG. ((1-3-3b2, FIG. 158 (A4-2), FIG. 158 (A6-2))] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 136 (U20-1), FIG. 145 (This b15-1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 144 (core a11)] in FIGS. 141 (K5-1) to (K13).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 139, the example shown in FIG. 140 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 140 (7)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon having a display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (3) to FIG. 4 (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display mode of the first icon may change without any other display effects” means that “the display mode of the first icon is due to the advance notice by the first icon. May change. "

Also,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is a" concept icon that includes both a hold icon and a variable icon "
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, the holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding,
The fluctuation icon is an icon representing a digested hold [for example, a fluctuation icon h0].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The“ on-hold icon ”described above is a“ hold icon ”.
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, the holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “icon relating to hold display” described above is a “fluctuation icon”, and the change icon may be an icon representing a reserved hold [for example, a change icon h0]. Good.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, the speaker 120, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452, the Thousand box accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
If the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet in FIG. 166 (A11)”. ~ "Response display" may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (the time from FIG. 166 (A6) to immediately before (A11) in FIG. 166)] has elapsed since the first period has started, The first performance may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, the operation effective period (period from FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. 166 (A14)]), the second operation is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIGS. 167 (Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) rises) is executed. Sometimes
In the auto button mode, even if a second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 166 Example of state of continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, the second effect is executed when the operation means is operated until the second time elapses after the second period is started. And
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one state [for example, white lighting] of the first state and the second state to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],
When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Explained.

  According to the described invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operating means. May be possible.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state where the auto button mode is not set.

  During the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted and the operation means B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. Also good.

  In addition, during the period of the second period, presentation means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emission means, etc.) may be changed.

Also,
“When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 168 (Aa8-3) ]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  By doing so, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, the operation means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operation means. There are cases where it is possible. Also, regardless of whether the auto button mode is set or not, during the second period, notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated, and improve the willingness to operate the operation means. May be possible.

Also,
“At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [for example, FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 168 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-2) and 168 (Aa8-2-1)] in the period until immediately before, when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect are displayed. At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 168 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

  If the operation means is operated from the start of the first period to the lapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Then, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed during the auto button mode, one button display functions as the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a case where a sense of incongruity that the user has to operate the button by himself / herself is generated and the interest of the game is improved.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, And at least one of the second effects is executed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that the first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the end of the first period.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation before the end of the second period, the second effect may be executed.
“The effect means means image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). The second display device 208S, etc.)
The multiple types of effects are multiple types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effect [for example, a response display of “Is summer vacation still?” In FIG. 166 (A11)],
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
"One type of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), etc.]] is displayed as the operation display. When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the operation means is operated when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. Two response displays may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] representing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH. Display, character display of “press”, display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.].

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice effect on the jackpot in the symbol change display (normal notice)”,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on a symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display being executed is finished [for example, a symbol variation to be started next. Display, the next symbol variation display to be started next, or the announcement effect on the jackpot in the next next symbol variation display (pre-reading notice)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

Also,
“The first period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as“ first operation valid period ”),
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is enabled (hereinafter referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  In addition, the meter display which shows the operation effective period of at least any one of said 1st operation effective period and said 2nd operation effective period [For example, display of remaining period meter MT shown to FIG. 166 (A5-1)] ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. Note that the remaining period meter MT may also be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1).

  Further, the meter display may be a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases), or the display color changes with time, for example, a display that is grayed out when there is no remaining period. Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation effective period may be displayed only during the non-auto button mode, and may not be displayed during the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the frog conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, conversation notice shown in FIGS. 166 to 168] or not [for example, FIG. 166 to FIG. There may be a button change icon and a button hold icon] shown in 168.

Also,
“The game device is characterized in that the operation means is a means that may perform a production operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.].”
Also explained.

  Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state where the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is provided with effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. Good.

  In addition, the second state may be deformed (for example, protruded or recessed), or the effect moving means is operating [for example, advanced state, backward state, vibrating state, rotating state, cured state, etc. Etc.].

  The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in a second mode,
The first embodiment and the second embodiment may be different embodiments.

  The first aspect may be an aspect in which the light is extinguished, and the second aspect may be an aspect in which the light is on.

  The first aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In the above description,
[Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, gaming board lamp 442, gaming table frame lamp 452, thousand carton box accessory 224H, etc.]
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 121 (b), (c) an effect by each option of holding frame selection, ( e) production by each choice of hold display selection, (f) production by each choice of background display selection, music output production of the song name shown in FIG. 159],
One type of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by a navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect]
During execution of the first effect, when a third effect [for example, a change notice, treasure change notice, a wipe effect, a background change notice, etc. by the treasure box icon I1] is executed, the first effect When changed to the second effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a a3-1) to FIG. (A a6-1), FIG. 160 (a 11) to (a 15-1), FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 138 (1), the background change notice in FIG. 6 (6) to FIG. 7 (7) (wipe-in and wipe-out of the samurai image for wiping effect) ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in (8) to (21) in the same figure changes, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. .

  The first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during the symbol variation display. Also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until a simultaneous effect such as an island simultaneous effect is started.

  As an example of the production means, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means, and the like. Further, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a picture by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the production means, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed according to the light emission color, etc.) may differ depending on the mode. .

Also,
“The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), The second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, (b) an effect display by each option of character selection in FIG. 121 (b) or (c) an effect display by each option of holding frame selection, (e) Effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) effect display by each option of the background display selection, and the song name shown in FIG. 159 displayed on the song name display unit MN in FIG.
The second effect is a second effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM, an effect display by the holding frame UI, the song title display unit MN “Distance” shown in FIGS. ”, The song title display unit MN“ Make DREAM ”in FIG. 160 (I 15-1).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
“The third effect is a third effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an icon of MG, a giant panda, and a character of“ Conversation notice including a character display of “change”, a spear image, a spear image for a wiping effect, a character C11 of the head length of FIG. 160 (A11) to FIG. 160 (A15-1)]
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, only a part of the third effect display may overlap with only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. All of the third effect display and only a part of the first effect display may overlap, or all of the third effect display may be overlapped. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (holding icon), and an icon regarding the symbol variation display being performed (variation icon). There is a case. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol variation display, or closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol stop display. May be displayed near the first effect display than the hold icon, or closer to the first effect display than the variation icon. It may be done.

Also,
“Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [e.g., FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. FIG. 140 (<2-1> to FIG. 140 (<7))],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  In addition, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, Even if there is a case where a change is made according to the operation of the operation means, and a case where a change is made in response to the start of execution of a pre-reading notice (intrusion into the pre-reading mode (corresponding to the second effect display)) Good.

Also,
“When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 157 (a a4-1) to FIG. (A a6-1)] ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without the execution of the third effect [e.g., FIG. 137 (E2) to FIG. Easier to transition to a state that is more advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state, a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Here, when the third performance is executed, a configuration in which the player is surely shifted to a state advantageous to the player may be employed. Or, conversely, even if the third performance is executed, there may be a case where the player does not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit gaming state can be mentioned. Moreover, a super reach state may be sufficient and a pseudo-continuous production state may be sufficient. On the other hand, as an advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit game is ended can be given. Further, it may be a round promotion state in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the first effect may be selected [for example, the case of FIG. 124 (37) to FIG. 50 (50)],
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the third effect is executed and the first effect is not changed to the second effect during execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) to Fig. 3-2-2), Fig. 141 (K-1-3-1) to Fig. (K-1-3-3b2), Fig. 158 (A4-2), Fig. 158 (Aa6-2). If there is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, the third effect may not be changed from the first effect display to the second effect display even if the third effect is executed. In the case where the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect. When the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, when the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
The second production is one of the productions that can be selected by the player.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
“Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120],
The effect means includes display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, a music title display unit MN in FIG. 160 (A 15-1), (A 16) to (A 18), etc.],
The music display is a display related to the music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music title and lyrics]
The first performance is a first music display [for example, “Mega Giga Summer”],
The game table characterized in that the second performance is a second music display [for example, “gain DREAM”]. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode]
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode]. And
The second icon is an icon that is displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG. 157 (a a1) to FIG.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “stretching” is to sandwich a symbol stop display period (variable stop period). In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

Also,
“The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0]
The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”) [for example, hold icon h11],
The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. The icon may be
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [e.g., the production icon display area DIS in the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI]
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, “hold frame D”],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, “hold frame R”],
The first aspect is different from the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display area may be an area where an area icon is displayed, an area where a holding frame is displayed, or an area where a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. The area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, navigation character icon) display area.

  The third effect may be an effect of switching the aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One type of the multiple types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, telop display trp shown in FIG. 152] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice of a normal notice according to the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmed (or a big hit big hit) notice by a bancho character C11) ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is an effect of a prefetch notice [for example, an effect of a prefetch notice by the color of a treasure box icon]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Next, examples of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In the example of the effects described below, display means (for example, any one, two or all of the decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51, etc.) In addition, a notice icon, a notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a change icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows five types of notice icons. Of these five types of notice icons, four are box-shaped icons, and the remaining one is an operation means type (button type) icon.

  There are four types of box-shaped icons of different colors, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared for each. The mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and the mode d is a display mode in which the box is opened.

  In the above description and the following description, the type and display mode may differ depending on the color difference and the display method. For example, the color of the first type or the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type or the second display mode is also white, but the display type of the second type or the second display mode is blinking (white and Alternate display with other colors (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and the display mode. The color of the third type and the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type and the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type and the fifth display mode is red, the sixth type and the fourth type The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh type and the seventh display mode is rainbow. Various icons and various displays may be provided with first to seventh types and display modes, and the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first display mode to the seventh display mode. There is. Among the first to seventh types and display modes, the types and display modes with larger numbers (seventh is the largest) may or may not be the display mode that is more advantageous to the player. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation level (reliability) of the jackpot, or the more likely that an effect is likely to start. In the following description, changing from the nth display mode to the (n + 1) th display mode may be said to be one step up or one step promotion. Moreover, changing from the nth display mode to the n + m display mode may be said to increase or promote the display mode. Furthermore, a display mode with a relatively large number of n may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode with a relatively small number of n may be referred to as a lower display mode. It should be noted that both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies to the following description).

  Although there is only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode consisting of only a button image simulating the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 49 and 90. The modes b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The aspect a is an aspect indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid because there is no remaining time display meter in the aspects b and c. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full (display in which the operation valid period remains for all periods), and in mode c, the remaining time display meter is displayed as 0 (no operation valid period remains at all). ). That is, the mode “b” is a mode before starting the timing (countdown) of the operation effective period or immediately after the timing is started. In addition, the mode c is a mode at the time when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136 or after the operation has elapsed. When the timing of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. The mode d is a display mode of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation valid period display. The button icon may have a plurality of different types of icons as in the case of the box-type icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons of different colors.

  The types of notice icons and button icons are not limited to colors, and there may be icons with different icon sizes and shapes, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as icon size, shape, color, etc. May be combined. For example, no. In addition to the one box icon, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a thousand box icon imitating the thousand box box feature 224H shown in FIG. Moreover, the size of the icon may be increased as the reliability increases (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Further, the red box icon and the gold box icon box may have different box shapes.

  The notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position where the display is first started. In other words, the first position may be moved to the second position and continuously displayed (stocked) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. There may be a case where the display (stock) is continued without changing the display position. Mode a is a mode at the start of stocking, but is also a mode at the start of display. The aspect d is an aspect when the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) is used for production, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing, and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the button icon always changes from the mode c to the mode d after the operation effective period elapses. However, the button icon may or may not change. Also good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the button icon may not change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased, may continue to be displayed as in the aspect a, and the display in which only the remaining time display meter of the aspect b or the aspect c is not displayed (the peripheral edge portion is the aspect a). Display different from the above) may be displayed, and the display may be changed to the mode d but may be configured not to display a notice display described later. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the mode d may be displayed after the mode c is once displayed.

  The appearance rate and reliability differ for each type of notice icon. Appearance rates are likely to be displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. That is, A is the most easily displayed (the frequency of display is high). Although not shown in FIG. 177 (a), E is the least displayed (the display frequency is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the jackpot, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display in which the icon is used (the reliability of the normal warning), or the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target (the prediction warning Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of description, A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, it means that it is easy to hit big hits (always hit big = reliability 100%), and F is hardest to hit big. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the fourth type or the fourth display mode is C, the reliability represented by the fifth type or the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the sixth type or the sixth display mode is The reliability represented by the seventh type and the seventh display mode is correct. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is foretold. However, in this specification, even those with a reliability of 0% may be referred to as a notice.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows 31 types of notice icons. The description of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the contents of the presentation in the figure. In this description, “always performed” means that “not always performed” It may be read as “may be.” In addition, descriptions such as “sometimes” and “sometimes” may be read as “always” in the modified example.

  Further, “VS swordsman reach” described in “Outline of production contents” is the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 118, FIG. 133, etc. It is a super reach (not shown) developed from 3). Note that the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed may be more likely to be a big hit when the “all-group gathering reach” is performed than when the “VS swordsman reach” is performed. The “thousand box (combination)” becomes the thousand-thousand box combination 224H shown in FIG. 115 and the like, and the “family crest (combination)” becomes the family crest combination 224E shown in FIG. 115 and the like.

  In addition, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 177 (b) may function as a notice display. The notice display is a display that starts when a notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) may change to mode d, and a notice display may appear from inside. In this case, it is not known what notice display appears until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. In other words, the relationship between the notification icon and the notification display is not predetermined as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, and is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be determined in advance as a one-to-one relation or a many-to-one relation. For example, a red box notice icon and a red change notice display (No. 7) are set in a one-to-one relationship in advance, and if a red box notice icon is displayed, the red box notice icon is always displayed. It may be determined that the icon changes to the mode d and the notice of red change appears from the inside, or the notice icon of the red box changes to the mode d, and the icon of the mode a remains unchanged. In some cases, it may disappear, and when it changes to the mode d, a notice of red change may appear. In addition, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that shows the contents is prepared, and it can be seen that one or more kinds of notice icons are included in this transparent box-shaped icon. May be. If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode changes to mode d, but if there are multiple kinds of notice display, know I can't. In addition, when multiple types of notice display are included, roulette display may be performed in a transparent box. In addition, there is a possibility that it is displayed when the notice icon is used by the “notice icon in a form in which it is not known what kind of notice display appears” such as a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 177 (a). A “notice display” may be announced. For example, if “Gekiatsu” is displayed (notice) in a balloon or the like by a notice icon on the box, a notice notice “Gekiatsu” may be displayed when the notice icon on the box is used. It may be displayed or not displayed. In addition, if “Gekiatsu” and “?” Are displayed (notice) in a balloon or roulette display etc. by the notice icon of the box, when the notice icon of the box is used, “Gekiatsu” and “?” Either one of them may be displayed without fail, or both may not be displayed, and a different notice display may be displayed. In this way, a plurality of options may be notified in advance by a notification icon (and / or a notification different from the notification icon) in advance, and one or a plurality of notification displays may be displayed.

  In the case where the icon shown in FIG. 177 (b) is a notice icon, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is set in a one-to-one relationship in advance, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to a notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to a certain notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

  In the description of the outline of the contents of the effect in FIG. 177 (b), “With displayed variation” is a description when the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If there is, change it to “In accordance with the change in which the notice icon is used”. That is, the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, while the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display started after the displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 177 (b), Aspect A and Aspect B are shown, but only Aspect A is functioning when functioning as a notice display, and Aspect A is stocked when functioning as a notice icon. A mode B is a mode when a notice icon is used, and a mode in which a circle is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may be usable again without disappearing. In this case, after changing from aspect A to aspect B, it returns to aspect A again, but during the period displayed in aspect B, the notice icon cannot be used, and after returning to aspect A, it can be used. Become. In addition, there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which the mode B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

  The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 177 (b) include different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the displayed color as described in the above display mode. That is, the red color (fifth display mode) “red change” (No. 8) has a higher degree of reliability for the big hit than the default color “change” (No. 7) represented by “de”. .

  Moreover, although the appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 177 (b), this appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). In addition, No. The appearance rate of 16 “XX high-prospect notice” varies depending on the contents of XX. For example, “appearance notice during hold icon change high probability” and “prediction notice during stock icon stock high probability” have an appearance rate of B. Note that the “notice during stock icon stock high accuracy” may be displayed only while the effect for stock icon stock is being executed, or may be displayed before the effect for stock icon stock is started. In addition, the appearance rate is “C” for the “predicting high accuracy production”, the “predicting high accuracy of the timer”, and the “predicting high accuracy of action of the object”. However, the appearance rate may be the same even if the contents of XX are different. This “XX high-priority notice” is more likely to be executed when it is displayed than when it is not displayed. However, if it is displayed, it may be executed.

  In addition, No. 2 “chance” icon or No. When the “red chance” icon 3 functions as a notice display, even if the “chance” is noticed by other notice effects, the reach effect may not occur, but the “chance” icon or “red chance” When the “chance” is notified by the icon, the normal reach production may be generated. Also, other notice effects (for example, notice effects with a high frequency of appearance such as conversation notices), notice effects with a higher appearance frequency than the notice by the notice display, and notice effects that are displayed when the symbol variation display is a short variation. The “chance” icon or “red chance” icon is more likely than the “chance” or “red chance” icon, rather than the “chance” or “chance !?” ”May be configured so that a reach effect (a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) may occur more easily, or in both cases There is no difference and the probability of occurrence may be the same.

  The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 177 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the mini-game effect. A mini game is a kind of effect display, and two types of mini games are prepared. As two types of mini-games, there are a mini-game (mini-game A) for pretending to acquire Yoshimune's treasure and a mini-game (mini-game B) for pre-confronting Janken. Each mini-game uses a dedicated icon. The mini game is automatically started when the start condition is set, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the determination result or the result of prefetching.

  FIG. 178 shows a mini game icon.

  FIG. 178 (a) shows four types of mini game A icons. All of these four types of icons for the mini game A include a box-shaped icon image (box image) shown in FIG. 177 (a). The “box” icon includes a white box image of the first display mode, that is, a white box notice icon. The “red box” icon includes a red box image of the fifth display mode, that is, a red box notice icon. The “gold box” icon includes a gold box image of the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The “rainbow box” icon includes a rainbow box image of the seventh display mode, that is, a rainbow box notice icon. Of these four types of icons, the remaining three types of icons other than the “rainbow box” icon each have four modes (modes a to d). Only two of the two modes (mode c and mode d) are provided. Aspects a to c are modes in which respective notice icons are placed on the carpet, and a meter display of hit points (HP) is shown thereon. In the mini game A, if the character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet and the attack is effective, this hit point (HP) decreases, and when HP becomes 0, a treasure (notice icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of aspect a, the gauge of the third display aspect (blue) is full and HP is 100 points. In the meter display of the mode b, the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and the HP is 50 points. In the meter display of the mode c, the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is displayed a little, and the HP is 10 points. And the aspect d is an aspect displayed after HP becomes 0, the carpet disappears and the meter display also disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and below that, the notice icon is acquired. This is a mode in which the characters “Get !!” are displayed.

  In the mini game A, display of the four types of icons for the mini game A is started in any manner. That is, when display is started in mode a, the remaining HP at the start of display (when it appears) is 100/100, and when display is started in mode b, the remaining HP at the start of display is 50 When the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 10/100. FIG. 178 (a) shows the appearance rate for each aspect, but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). The icon for the mini game A in the rainbow box has little HP left from the start of display, and you can always acquire a treasure (notice icon), but other icons must have a treasure (notice icon). There are cases where it is possible and sometimes it is not possible. Note that the icon for the mini-game A in the rainbow box may be able to acquire a notice icon during the display of the symbol variation that has been displayed, or the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display. In addition, a notice icon may be obtained. However, the notice icon may be acquired without fail during the symbol variation display that has been started, or may be acquired only when the symbol variation display is started next.

  FIG. 178 (b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the symbol variation display and the acquisition probability of the notice icon. The mini game A icon may be displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. That is, there is a case where the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display where the display is started is carried over and displayed. The meter display in the mode when the display of the icon for the mini game A is started decreases by 10 points every time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini-game A in the rainbow box can acquire a notice icon once an effective attack is determined.

  When the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display for which the mini game A icon has been displayed is disclosed, if the remaining HP points are 60 points or more, the meter display is in the third display mode (blue The probability that the notice icon can be obtained during the symbol variation display that is displayed and started is 10%. If the remaining HP points are 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and a notice icon is acquired during the symbol variation display that has been started. The probability of being able to do is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 or 20 at the start of symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and a notice icon is acquired during the symbol variation display that has started. The probability of being 100% is 100%.

  FIG. 178 (c) shows two types of opponent icons for mini-game B. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini game B is a swordsman character icon, and the other icon is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described with reference to FIG. Therefore, a swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than a panda character icon. In the mini-game B of Janken confrontation notice, when a certain character's icon and these opponent's icons perform Janken confrontation and a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), a notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, when a character is defeated (when an opponent wins), a notice icon cannot be acquired.

  Further, each of the opponent's character icons is provided with modes a to f. The aspect a is an aspect before the start of the mini-game or after waiting for the mini-game to start. Aspect b is an aspect when goo is given in a janken confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choke is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when par is given. The mode e is a mode when the opponent's character is defeated in the Janken showdown (when a certain character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the opponent's character wins in the Janken showdown ( (When a certain character is defeated).

  FIG. 178 (d) shows the expected expectation level of the notice icon in the mini game B. In the above description, the character is a certain character. However, in the mini game B, the character of the villager, the character of the samurai, and the character of Yoshimune A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six battle cards as shown in FIG. 178 (d), and the expected degree of acquisition is determined for each. A indicates that the degree of expected acquisition is 100%, B indicates that it is 80%, C indicates that it is 60%, D indicates that it is 40%, and E indicates 20% F represents 10%, and G represents greater than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent character than the swordsman character icon, but the expected expectation of the notice icon is higher than the swordsman character icon. In addition, if it is a confrontation between Yoshimune and Panda, it is possible to acquire the notice icon with a probability of 100% regardless of the kind of the notice icon. The notice icon for the rainbow box is selected only for a big hit. The “-” display in FIG. 178 (d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (expected expectation degree 0%).

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating the hold icon and the change icon.

  The hold icon is an icon related to an undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon related to a digested symbol variation display, and both icons are icons related to a symbol variation display. Here, the “change of XX hold” is “design change display corresponding to XX hold”.

  FIG. 179 (a) shows each mode for each type of the hold icon and the change icon. The description of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. 1 is a default mode. 2-No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is a hold icon, it will be in the pre-reading notice mode, and if it is a variable icon, it will be in the normal notice form. The hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of start winning), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol variation, or may be changed by the effect during the symbol variation display. May be displayed. The variation icon of the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (timing according to the start of symbol variation) or may be displayed by changing depending on the effect during symbol variation display.

  The hold icon and the change icon can be changed (ranked up) step by step in the order of default mode> blinking white> blue> green> red> gold> rainbow. For example, in the case of ranking up during blue holding, it changes to green holding. Note that the hold icon and the change icon do not necessarily change one step at a time. For example, in the icon change notice display to be described later, there is one in which a change mode is determined in advance when the change of the icon mode is successful, regardless of the mode of the change target icon (for example, FIG. 179 (b No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When the change notice by the default mode icon itself is performed, it is normally ranked up to blink white, but when the default form icon is changed by the icon change notice, it does not change to white blinking and is blue-holding. Rank up. In addition, the default icon is No. 2-No. 7, no. 14-No. 19, the VS display mode of FIG. 189 described later, and the icon display mode with the letters “SP” of FIG. 240 described later. 2-No. 7 icon is NO. 14-No. 19 icons, the VS display mode shown in FIG. 189, and the icon display mode with the letters “SP” shown in FIG. 240 to be described later are not changed, but may change. No. 8-No. Although the display mode of 13 is assumed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning a prize, icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and / or No. 14 to No. 19) The icon may change. Further, only the default mode may be changed.

  The display mode of the fluctuation icon is determined according to the determination result, but even if the determination result is lost, the display mode is other than the default display mode. Production may be performed. In addition, among the displayed hold icons, the display mode of which hold icon is to be displayed is determined according to the result of prefetching. Even if it exists, the production | generation which makes a display mode other than a default display mode may be performed. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

  No. 8 and no. 9 is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the button effect (for example, the button notice effect) or during the button effect. Here, no. The function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks for “Button A” in FIG. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is displayed even when the chance button 136 is operated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started. Is not changed from blue to rainbow, and the operation effective period starts after (or immediately after or simultaneously with) the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon, and the operation effective period ends. When the chance button 136 is operated until the operation is performed, or when the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is changed from blue to rainbow. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button A icon may be configured not to change. When the button A icon has the function (2), after the button A icon is displayed, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started (that is, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon). When the chance button 136 is operated before the symbol variation display), the display mode of the button A icon is changed from blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and it may be configured to always change. When the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set even during the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon. That is, the same function as the function (1) may be included. , No. For the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” in No. 9, no. This is the same as the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in FIG.

  No. Reference numeral 10 denotes an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer notice effect) or during the timer notice effect.

  No. 216 (Ec1) to FIG. 216 (Ec8) and 216 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5), which will be described later, It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion effect.

  No. 12 is displayed at the start or before the start of the roulette hold (N selection hold) effect in FIGS. 211 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) to be described later, or during the effect. There is an icon. In this example, the roulette icon itself is changed so that it stops at the roulette. However, the roulette icon may be configured so that an icon different from the roulette icon always changes to the state stopped at the roulette. There may be a case where an icon other than the roulette icon changes.

  No. 13 is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and the meter decreases until it is digested if it is a hold icon and disappears if it is a variable icon. If the performance is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is a success, and some change or something occurs. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. If the meter display does not eventually become 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image is in a state indicating the final remaining HP. ing. In the case of a hold icon, there may be an effect that the meter display is reduced in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display becomes zero. Moreover, when it is a holding | maintenance icon, the production | generation which a meter reduces in one or several symbol fluctuation | variation display may be performed, and the fluctuation | variation in which the production | generation which a meter reduces is performed, and the fluctuation | variation which is not performed may exist. Further, even when displayed as a hold icon, the effect that the meter is actually reduced may be performed only on the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. Further, in the description so far, the meter display is a type of decreasing, but it may be of an increasing type. If it is an increasing type, it will be successful if the meter display becomes full within the effective period.

  No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini game A described with reference to FIGS. 178 (a) and (b). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game A or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet carrying the notice icon. The aspect a is a waiting pose, the aspect b is a ready pose, and the aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. 19 is a character that confronts a certain icon (a character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c)) that is displayed in the Janken battle notice of mini game B described with reference to FIGS. 178 (c) and (d). Icon). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game B or during the mini game B. The aspect a is an aspect before the start of the mini-game or after waiting for the mini-game to start. Aspect b is an aspect when goo is given in a janken confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choke is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when par is given. In addition, mode e is a mode when defeated in a Janken showdown (when the opponent's character wins), and mode f is, on the other hand, when defeated in a Janken showdown (when the opponent's character loses) It is an aspect. In addition, No. 14-No. The 19 icons correspond to white blinking icons.

  No. 1 shown in FIG. Nos. 14 to 16 are dedicated icons for the mini game A. Since No. 17 to No. 19 are icons dedicated to the mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini game will be started, and these dedicated icons will be displayed in advance of the mini game. Also works.

  In addition, in FIG. 179 (a), the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown, but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). The symbol representing the reliability here is the same as the symbol representing the reliability described with reference to FIG.

  In addition to the types shown in FIG. 179 (a), there are types of hold icons and variable icons.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for the effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the aspect of the icon. In addition, the display is also used for an effect that fails to change the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. In other words, this is a display that also appears in an invariant animation in which the icon mode change has failed and the icon mode does not change. The description of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

  No. 1-No. A mode a in each display of 16 is a mode at the start of the change animation (a mode at the time of starting display of the icon change notice display and a default mode), and a mode b is a mode when the icon is changed. No. 11-No. A mode c in each display of 15 is a mode when the icon mode change is successful, and may be displayed with a change animation. On the other hand, no. 11-No. A mode d in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon has failed, and is a mode in which it may be displayed with a non-change animation. No. The display of 17 is a display of the giant panda displayed in FIG. 147 (Sh2-2-1) to (Sh2-2-3), and there is no change in form from the time of appearance to the time of change.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the appearance rate of each type of display. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). In addition, FIG. 179 (b) also shows the types of icons that change the mode. That is, no. 1-No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the fluctuation icon, or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, no. 11-No. Each display of 16 changes only the mode of the fluctuation icon. The display of 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so as to change only the mode of the hold icon, or may be changed so that the mode of the change icon or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. Also good. No. The display of 17 pandas may be changed so as to change only the mode of the fluctuation icon, or may be changed so that the mode of the hold icon or the mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed. May be.

  No. 1-No. No. 3 balloon display, No. 3 4-No. Each display of No. 6 bomber system, No. 7-No. Each display of 10 flying boats, 12-No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune displays has a different color display. The color difference here is the same if there is a case where the success probability of the icon mode change, that is, the probability that there is no icon mode change, and the probability (icon change rate) in the case of the icon mode change depending on the displayed color. In some cases. In addition, even when the icon mode is changed, the number of icons whose mode is changed may differ depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 179 (b), “icon change ratio” is shown as the success probability of icon change, and “probability of the number of icons to change” is shown as the probability of the number of icons to be changed. For example, no. 4-No. In each display of the bomber system No. 6, the display probability of the default color (No. 4) represented by “de” is more successful than the display of other colors (No. 5, 6). Is expensive. However, the default color bomber display (No. 4) can only raise the icon display mode by one level. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the (n + 1) th display mode. For example, when the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode) is changed, the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode) and the hold icon of the blue mode (third display mode) is changed. When changing the mode, the mode is changed to the green mode (fourth display mode). However, it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode) only when the mode of the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) is changed. On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (No. 5 “red bomber”) is used when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. The display mode is always changed to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as that of itself. That is, the display mode is always changed from the nth display mode to the fifth display mode. For example, whether the default icon (first display mode) or the blue mode (third display mode) hold icon, when changing the mode, the red mode (fifth display) Be sure to change the mode. In addition, the gold-colored (sixth display mode) bomber display (No. 6 “gold bomber”) is also used when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. The display mode is always changed to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as that of itself. That is, the display mode is always changed from the nth display mode to the sixth display mode. For example, even if it is a hold icon of a default mode (1st display mode) or a hold icon of a green mode (4th display mode), when changing a mode, it is a gold mode (6th display). Be sure to change the mode. Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success of the icon mode change than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, no. 4-No. In the display of the 6 bomber system, as the display mode increases, the success probability of the icon mode change decreases, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon is easy to hit. In addition, No. 1-No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system 3. However, in the display of the bomber system, in the default color display (No. 4), the success rate of the icon mode change is 100%, and if the default color bomber is displayed, the icon mode always changes. To do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display when the default color bomber is displayed. For example, the mode of the variation icon and the mode of one hold icon may change, or the mode of the two hold icons may change. Note that if there are two icons after the start of the symbol change display that displays the default color bomber, the default color bomber will not change the two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the symbol variation display and the display of the default color bomber, the two displayed icons may change. There may be. For this note, see 7-No. No. 10 flying boat system display and / or No. 10 It can also be applied to the display of 17 “pandas”. On the other hand, in the balloon-based display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success rate of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, the mode is limited to only one icon. Change.

  No. 7-No. In each display of 10 flying boats, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success probability of the icon mode change is 100%, and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the mode of the icon is Always changes. Moreover, the default color flying boat (No. 7) has a probability of 50% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display where the default color flying boat is displayed. Change the aspect of the icon. However, again, the flying boat of the default color can only raise the icon display mode by one level. On the other hand, flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as that of itself. Therefore, no. 7-No. In the display of 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to win big by the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. The timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the symbol variation display in which the default color flying boat is displayed, but may be the time at which the default color flying boat is displayed. (The same applies to the following).

  Furthermore, no. 12-No. In the display of 15 Yoshimune, both the default color display represented by “de” (No. 12) and the red display (No. 13 “Akayoshi Mune”) have a probability of success of changing the mode of the variable icon is 50. %. Note that Yoshimune's display changes are limited to the change icon, and only one change icon is displayed, so there is no case of changing the mode of two or more icons. In the golden display (No. 14, “Kinyoshi Mune”), the success probability of the change in the mode of the variation icon is 25%, which is lower than the display of “Akayoshi Mune”. However, in the rainbow-colored display (No. 15 “Nijiyoshi Mune”), the success probability of the variation icon mode change is 100%, which is higher than the “Kinyoshi Mune” display. Further, even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variation icon to the same display mode as itself.

  In the number length display (No. 16), the success probability of the variation icon mode change is 100%. When this number length display is displayed, the variation icon mode is always raised by one step.

  In the display of the panda (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%. When the display of this panda is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is always raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display where the panda is displayed, the mode of the two hold icons is changed with a probability of 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), only a maximum of two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and all the displayed icons may be changed regardless of the number. There may be a case where the hold icon or all the displayed icons are changed.

  Next, effects in which various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179 are used will be described using specific examples.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a notice icon is stocked by winning in mini-game B, a notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon, and the display mode of the variable icon changes. It is.

  In FIG. 180, it is a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electricity support state (non-time-short state)), and the following production examples are examples of production in the normal state unless otherwise specified. 180 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. 51. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The display device 208 may be used (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in these special drawings 1 are both No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “2” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Note that the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1) is white, but this white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following drawings, a background screen may be shown, but when it is white, it indicates that the background screen is omitted as in FIG. 180 (A1).

  In FIG. 180 (A2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A2), the hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

  In FIG. 180 (A 3-1), the third hold icon h 13 is displayed on the third stage hs 3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 180 (A 3-1), the first hold icon h 11 and the second hold icon h 12, which have been the default display mode so far, are both No. 1 in FIG. It changes into the icon of the aspect a of the kind of villager described in 17. Here, the default display mode icon has changed to the villager type mode a icon, but the pre-read notice display mode (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 in FIG. 179 (a)) The green display mode icon described in No. 4 may be changed to a villager type icon. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is better than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. However, the upper display mode (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) tends to be the icon of the Yoshimune type. Further, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold for the pre-reading notice is a default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager type icon. Furthermore, only the first hold icon h11 may change to a villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may change to a villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change to the villager type icon may be one or more. Note that the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are changed to villager type icons, so that a mini-game (specific mini-game) is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A game (mini game B in this example) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini game) may be announced. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display for starting the mini game B (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 180 (A4), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"- “Decoration 7”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol in the upper left also displays a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”).

  In FIG. 180 (A 5), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped. In the 2-hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS that has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 180 (A5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far has started moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the villager character has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and is the default display mode that has been displayed on the third stage hs3 so far, but the pre-reading notice target hold third The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Note that the appearance animation of the opponent icon and the animation of moving the hold icon may be started at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon may be started first, or the movement of the hold icon is reversed. The animation may be started first.

  In FIG. 180 (A6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped, but the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the villager type aspect a (standby aspect) is displayed as the change icon h0. The icon is displayed. The villager character with the variation icon h0 is performing a standby animation (default animation). Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon ends, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the type a of the panta shown in FIG. 178 (c) as the opponent icon TI ( (Standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, on the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS that is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. In this appearance area AS, a character display “Premium” is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when winning the mini-game B Janken confrontation is displayed. That is, the display start position of the notice icon YI is a position in the appearance area AS. In other words, the first area can be said to be a notice area for notifying icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 180 (A6), No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed. Furthermore, a stock area SS, which is a second area, is provided on the appearance area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. Note that the appearance area AS and the stock area SS may not be overlapped. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the animation of moving the hold icon may end simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end first, or conversely, the hold icon The moving animation may end first. Also, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or the notice icon YI on the contrary. It may appear first.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini-game B Janken confrontation is started. In the mini game B, if the villager character with the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI perform a battle showdown, and the villager character with the fluctuation icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS YI can be acquired. The Janken showdown of the mini game B may be started simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The Janken confrontation here is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the “box” notice icon YI, so according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. 178 (d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be earned. That is, the villager wins with a probability of 60%.

  In FIG. 180 (A 8-1), a Janken showdown animation is performed by the villager character with the fluctuation icon h 0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI. It changes to the icon of the aspect when it is put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has been changed to an icon of a panda type aspect c (an aspect when a choke is put out). As a result, the villager character with the variation icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type aspect a (standby aspect), and a standby animation is executed.

  In FIG. 180 (A 9-1), the change icon h 0 is changed to an icon of the villager type aspect f (mode when winning), and the opponent icon TI is changed to the panda type aspect e (when defeated). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A 9-1), an animation for celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is executed. In the first hold icon h11, the standby animation is continued, but if a mini game result is obtained, an animation corresponding to the result may be executed. In other words, the hold icon changed to the icon of the same character as the change icon h0 is executed only for an animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, an animation griefing the defeat, or an animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. May be. Similarly, an animation corresponding to the result of the mini game may be executed even with the hold icon that is changed to an icon of a different character instead of the same character as the variation icon h0.

  In FIG. 180 (A10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. 1 “box” notice icon YI comes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at that certain position (stock display) (See FIG. 180 (A11)). In FIG. 180 (A12), the animation that celebrates the victory of the villager character with the variation icon h0 is continued, but the opponent icon TI that has been defeated is the icon of the panda type aspect a (standby aspect) The panda character is performing a standby animation (default animation).

  In FIG. 180 (13), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area ("decoration 6"-"decoration 4"- “Decoration 1”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  FIG. 180 (A14) is in the stop display (determined display), and in the change icon h0, the erase animation is started while continuing the animation celebrating that the villager character has won, and the change icon h0. The villager's character gradually disappears in the base hs0. FIG. 180 (A15) is also in the stop display (determined display), and the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared.

  The mini game B may end at the same time as the end of the symbol variation display, may end at the same time as the end of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, or end at the same time as the end of the fixed display of the first ornament symbol. May be.

  In FIG. 180 (A 16), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped. In the 2-hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 is reduced by 1 to “1”. In addition, in FIG. 180 (A 16), the hold icon movement animation is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far has started moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. In addition, although it is the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 that is the hold for the pre-reading notice starts to move toward the first stage hs1.

  In FIG. 180 (A17), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped, but the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the villager type aspect a (standby aspect) is displayed as the change icon h0. The icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has previously competed is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of a panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. panda. However, the opponent's character may change for each confrontation (for each symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character (village character) whose hold icon has changed first, but the character may change each time the hold is digested (shifted). For example, there may be a case where the villager changes to 爺, a change from 爺 to Yoshimune, a change from villager to Yoshimune, or a change from 爺 to villager. As described with reference to FIG. 178 (d), if the confrontation is Yoshimune vs. Panda, the notice icon can be acquired with a probability of 100% regardless of the kind of notice icon. In addition, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. No. 2 “red box” notice icon YI appears.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and the second mini-game B battle competition is also started. The second Janken confrontation is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of “red box”, so according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. Can be earned. That is, the probability is lower than the first time and the villager wins with a probability of 40%.

  In FIG. 180 (A 19-1), a Janken showdown animation is performed by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI. It changes to the icon of the aspect when it is put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI is changed to an icon of a panda type aspect d (an aspect when a par is put out). As a result, the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins.

  In FIG. 180 (a20), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager type mode e (mode at the time of defeat), and the opponent icon TI shows the panda type mode f (mode when winning). ), And on the base hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A21), a replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started. . That is, the villager character, which has been the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 until then, gradually disappears, and at the same time, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variation icon h0. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, because of the loss of Janken confrontation, the “red box” notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS cannot be obtained, and in FIG. 180 (21), it appears with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS. The area AS itself gradually fades out to the right edge of the screen, and the “red box” notice icon YI gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 180 (A 22), the default icon of the variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 180 (A 23), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area (“decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “Decoration 7”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  In FIG. 180 (A 24), the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, is digested, and the symbol variation display that becomes the prefetch target change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner, and the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 in the variable icon display region CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is both displayed as “0”.

  In FIG. 180 (A 25), a conversation notice as a normal notice is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L. It should be noted that during the period in which the mini game B is being performed, other effects were not performed. However, even if the mini game B is being performed, other effects such as a conversation notice are also performed. Good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 117 (10) to (12). That is, when the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed in the central area. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 does not overlap the stock-displayed notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. That is, the notice icon YI that has been continuously displayed in the stock area overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI1 from the front side, even though it has been displayed from the front of the conversation image CI1.

  Even in the case of a notice effect display (for example, a super reach effect display etc.) performed using the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon YI is not overlapped with the notice display. It may continue to be displayed. Or, conversely, the display of the notice effect performed using the full screen may have a period of being overlapped and temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is used to display a notice effect, the notice icon YI continues to be displayed without being overlapped. Also, in the user customization screen during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 126 (93), the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the volume adjustment bar display VB, or conversely, the volume adjustment. It may be overlapped with the bar display VB. Further, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display related to various errors and the warning described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174, or on the contrary, the display related to the error and the display related to the warning may be overwritten. You may wrap. For example, when the importance of an error or warning is low, or when the relationship with fraud is low, the display of the notice icon YI is given priority, and the notice icon YI may continue to be displayed in stock without overlapping. Good.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. The button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period, and It is constituted by. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (A 26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the bag, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the conversation image CI2 of the bag and is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the bag. It has not been.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 180 (A27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing in FIG. 180 (A 28) is within the above-mentioned operation valid period, and at this timing, the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 step by step and a diagram showing a modification of the effect example.

  In FIG. 181 (A 29) following FIG. 180 (A 28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the conversation image CI 2 of the cocoon is reached from the operation promotion notification image. The text display changes to "Leach is!" The notice text display such as “Leach is!” May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. May also be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (a 30-1), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to visually recognize. Yes.

  In FIG. 181 (A 31-1), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 181 (A32), when the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, An animation in which the notice display YH jumps out is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is the No. shown in FIG. 7 is a red “red change” notice display, and the “red change” notice display is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two stages. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 181 (a 33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the red “red change” notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 181 (A 34), the changing icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 181 (A 34), the “red change” notice display YH changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208 c. In FIG. 181 (A35), the ball of light YHb flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. In FIG. 181 (A 36), the display mode of the change icon h 0, which is the default display mode until the start of the animation after the change icon change animation is finished, is No. 179 (a). 3 is changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Note that the change icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 181 (A 38), the normal reach effect has ended, and “decoration 5” that is not “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In other words, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates and fluctuates.

  In FIG. 181 (A 39), the combination of “decoration 6” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The change icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. Note that the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

  Subsequently, a modified example of the production example shown in FIGS. 180A-1 to 181A40 will be described. Hereinafter, differences from the production examples described so far will be mainly described, and description of overlapping points may be omitted.

  The first modification is the same up to FIG. 180 (A7), and instead of FIG. 180 (A8-1), as shown in FIG. 181 (A8-2-1), Whereas the villager character with the change icon h0 is in the state b when the goo is put out, the panda character with the opponent icon TI is in the form d when the par is put out, and the villager with the change icon h0 Lose the character. In FIG. 181 (a 8-2-2), the change icon h 0 is changed to an icon of the villager type aspect e (mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is changed to the panda type aspect f (winning). The icon is changed to the icon of the mode when the game is performed), and a loss production (animation that grieves the defeat) is performed.

  In FIG. 181 (A 8-2-3) in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed in the appearance area because the villager character of the change icon h 0 has lost. The villager character with the change icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI are performing standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 181 (A 8-2-4), the symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 180 (A 8-2-5), the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing is stopped. The villager character of the change icon h0 is being displayed (determined display is in progress) and gradually disappears in the base hs0 by the erasure animation. FIG. 181 (a 8-2-6) is also in the stop display (determined display), and the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared.

  Thereafter, as in FIGS. 179 (A 16) to 180 (A 19-1), the second Janken confrontation is performed, and the villager character with the variation icon h 0 is lost in the second Janken confrontation. In FIG. 181 (A 8-2-7), as in FIG. 181 (A 8-2-2), a loss effect of the villager character with the change icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 181 (a 8-2-8), as in FIG. 180 (a 21), the replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of “red box” gradually disappears from the screen. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 181 (A 8-2-9), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed, in FIG. The symbol variation display that is the subject variation has started.

  The first modified example described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gas.

  Subsequently, a second modification will be described. In FIG. 181 (A 22), if the notice icon YI that has been stocked is used, the notice icon YI changes to the mode d (the box is opened). In this second modification, the operation of the chance button 136 Will be involved.

  The second modification is the same up to FIG. 181 (A 31-1), and FIG. 181 (A 31-2-1) is the state where the reach effect is started, as in FIG. 181 (A 31-1). It is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modification, as shown in FIG. 181 (31-2-2), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. Note that the timing of FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation effective period. It may be displayed simultaneously with the start of.

  The operation effective period is started at the timing of FIG. 181 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. It is shown in a display mode when time has elapsed.

  The timing of FIG. 181 (A 31-2-5) is within the above-mentioned operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 181 (a 31-2-6), the notice icon YI which is the form a which is the display form in which the box is closed is displayed in the box. The display changes to the display mode d which is an open display mode, and an animation (box opening animation) in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG.

  Here, the operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or is not displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed. Further, the erasing animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed simultaneously with the box opening animation, the erasing animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. May be executed.

  Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has elapsed. In the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated, the box opening animation may be varied depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating third to sixth modification examples of the production examples in FIGS. 180 (A1) to 181 (A40).

  In the third modified example, the notice icon YI is not a “box” icon, but the No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 is a “button” icon. The icon of the “button” may be displayed from the beginning in the appearance area AS, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be changed from another icon in the stock area. It may be a changed icon.

  The “button” notice icon YI shown in FIG. 182 (A 31-3-1) is an icon of the form a indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, there is no remaining time display meter. . That is, only the button 136a is used.

  In FIG. 182 (A 31-3-2), the mode of the “button” notice icon YI is changed to the mode b with the remaining time display meter MT added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is a full tank display, and is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may be in a non-display mode.

  In FIG. 182 (A 31-3-3), the operation effective period is started, and in the same figure (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

  The timing in FIG. 182 (A 31-3-5) is within the above-mentioned operation valid period, and at this timing, the player operates the chance button 136. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-described operation valid period, in FIG. 182 (A 31-3-6), the mode of the “button” notice icon YI is the display mode of the effect image (smoke image). In the same figure (A 31-3-7), the effect image (smoke image) disappears, and a red “red change” notice appears. The change in the state of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is a display of an animation (animation after operation). The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG.

  Note that the change of the notice button YI of the “button” to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be executed when the operation valid period has passed without. Further, in the configuration executed even when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated, the post-operation animation may be made different depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Further, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period.

  In the fourth modification, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

  The fourth modified example is the same up to FIG. 180 (A 18), and FIG. 182 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. This is a state where the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 182 (a 19-2-2), the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used while the mini game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is a display form in which the box is closed changes to the form d which is a display form in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH jumps out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is the No. shown in FIG. 6 is a notice display of “change” in the default color, and is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

  In FIG. 182 (A 19-2-3), similarly to FIG. 180 (A 20), the loss effect of the villager character with the change icon h0 is performed. Also, in FIG. 182 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B disappears in the middle of the mini game B, and the default color “change” is displayed by the hold icon change animation. 181 changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c as shown in FIG. 181 (A34), and the light ball YHb indicates the first hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the pre-reading notice object. It flies toward the end and hits the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 182 (A 19-2-4), while the losing effect of the villager character in mini game B continues, the hold icon change animation ends, and the first hold icon that was the default display mode before the animation started. The display mode of h11 is No. in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking mode described in 2. In other words, the display mode of the hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the prefetch notice target is changed to the display form of the prefetch notice. Thereafter, as in FIG. 180 (A21), the replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of “red box” gradually disappears from the screen. Eventually, after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display that becomes the prefetch target variation is started.

  In the fifth modification, the notice display changes the combination pattern of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbols.

  The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 180 (A 18), and FIG. 182 (A 19-3-1) is the same as FIG. This is a state where the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-2), the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used in a state where the mini game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is a display form in which the box is closed changes to the form d which is a display form in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH jumps out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is the No. shown in FIG. 12 “chance eyes” pre-reading notice display, which is once displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The pre-reading notice display of “chance eyes” here is a display for notifying the occurrence of a pre-reading notice in which the combination of chance eyes is fixedly displayed when the first decorative symbol is subsequently displayed.

  In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the “chance eye” notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-4), the “chance eye” notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the notice icon YI box is opened (appears). Is displayed. On the other hand, since it was lost in the Janken confrontation, the replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of “red box” gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 182 (a 19-3-5), the first decorative symbol variation display changes from high-speed variation to low-speed variation. In this example, the chance eye digestion effect starts after the first decorative symbol's change display becomes a low speed change, but the chance eye digest effect starts immediately after the “chance eye” notice display YH appears. May be. As shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-6), after the display of the first decorative symbol has changed at a low speed, the “chance eye” notice display YH is a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-7), the ball of light YHb flies toward the first decorative symbol that fluctuates at low speed, and hits the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all of the three decorative symbols changing at low speed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-9) In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 1” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 5”, which are chances, fluctuate and fluctuate. The chances of “decoration 1” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 5” are “decoration 2” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 6” and “decoration 3” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 7”. Like the chance item, the pre-read target variation (next symbol variation display) is a weak chance item that is relatively hard to hit and the strong chance item that is relatively easy to hit is “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”. -"Decoration 1", "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 8", "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 8". In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 is displayed to notify that the chance of “decoration 1” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In 3-11), chances of “decoration 1”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed.

  In the sixth modification, No. 1 in FIG. This is an example in which the notice display YH of “Chance” of No. 2 is combined with the pre-reading notice that the suspended change symbol temporarily stops on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 (a 19-4-1) shows a state where the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the mini-game B Janken confrontation. In FIG. 182 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. In addition, since it lost to Janken confrontation, the display mode of a villager's character changes into a default display mode, and the opponent icon TI has disappeared. In addition, the notice icon YI of “red box” disappears together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. That is, the “chance” notice display YH appears after the start of reach, and the “chance” notice display YH here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It corresponds to a kind of. The currently displayed symbol variation display is the symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice subject variation, and the “chance” notice display YH is different from the symbol variation display of the prefetching notice subject variation. Corresponds to the normal notice of symbol variation display. After the “chance” notice display YH is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 182 (a 19-4-4). Note that the notice icon YI may disappear with an erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 182 (a 19-4-5), the “chance” notice display YH disappears in the reach state.

  And in FIG. 182 (a 19-4-6), the suspended change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, one of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the stage is promoted two stages and the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted by one stage. In FIG. 182 (A 19-4-6), the blue holding change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, the holding change animation as shown in FIG. A certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). Note that the hold change symbol HHZ is a pre-reading notice regarding the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating a seventh modification to a tenth modification of the effects in FIGS. 180 (A1) to 181 (A40).

  The seventh modified example is the same up to FIG. 181 (A 30-1), and FIG. 183 (A 31-4-1) is a change subject to the pre-reading notice as in FIG. 181 (A 31-1). Reach production has begun with symbol variation display. In FIG. 183 (A 31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of reach, and the No. in FIG. 2 “chance” notice YH appears. The notice display YH of the “chance” that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol change display that is the change subject to the pre-read notice. Note that after the “chance” notice display YH is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 183 (a 31-4-3).

  The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to an opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-1), a hold icon representing a hold prior to the pre-reading notice hold is displayed at the time of winning a hold (third hold) that is a pre-reading notice target. The icon changes to TI. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold prior to the pre-reading notice hold changes also to the character (in this case, a villager character) that fights the character of the opponent icon TI. In the eighth modification, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, the icon changes to a panda character type icon. In addition, the second hold icon h12 is changed to an icon of a villager character type. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-2), the symbol variation display is ended, and in FIG. 3 (A 3-2-3), the hold icon movement animation is started and the right base of the production icon display area DIS is displayed. In the icon bIr, the effect image EF1 is displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-4), the change icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 fights the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the villager). Icon). In addition, an appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the production icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained when winning the mini-game B janken confrontation is displayed. Has been.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the mini-game B Janken confrontation is also started. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-6), the Janken showdown animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI that is the variation icon h 0 and the villager character of the first hold icon h 11, and the first hold icon h 11. The villager character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-7), an animation is started to celebrate the victory of the villager character of the first hold icon h11. In 2-8), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-10), the mini game B is finished, and in the first stage hs 1 of the hold icon display area HIS, a replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started. Yes. In addition, on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, a replacement animation of the panda character icon and the variation icon of the default display mode is started. Each replacement animation may be an animation that returns to the display mode before changing to a villager character or a panda character, or a different display mode from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, even if the display mode before the change is the default display mode, it may be replaced with the display mode of the pre-reading notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-11), both the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. The notice icon YI is still displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in which the hold that becomes the second hold in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-11) is the prefetch notice target, and is used during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. . However, it may be used in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be used during the symbol variation display corresponding to the first suspension that was the icon of the villager character.

  The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 183 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8). In the ninth modified example, after the notice icon YI that has appeared from the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, it does not move into the stock area SS, but instead moves to the hold icon display area HIS. In place of the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold for the pre-reading notice, the stock icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS (FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b2) to FIG. -2-8b3)). It can also be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of the notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS may be moved once into the stock area SS and then moved to the hold icon display area HIS. Moreover, the hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b4), the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon YI replaced with the second hold icon h12 becomes the change icon h0 and is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI which is the change icon h0 is used in the base hs0 and changes to the state d in which the box is opened. 2 “chance” notice YH appears. Since FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b5) is before the start of reach, the notice display “YH” of “chance” here indicates that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the current symbol variation display. A notice is displayed.

  The notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS, or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then moved to the base hs0 and replaced with the change icon h0 during the pre-reading notice subject change display. Alternatively, during the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice target hold, the display may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the pre-reading notice target hold.

  Further, the notice icon YI may be used in the state of a hold icon, and a notice display YH for a pre-read notice may appear. Also in this case, the notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS, or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then displayed during or after the symbol fluctuation display prior to the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-reading notice subject hold. It may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon for the pre-reading notice target hold.

  The tenth modified example is also the same as the eighth modified example halfway. That is, FIG. 183 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8). Also in the tenth modified example, after the notice icon YI that has appeared from the appearance area AS is once displayed large, it does not move into the stock area SS but moves to the hold icon display area HIS. In the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 of the villager icon who played the mini game B. That is, a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the pre-reading notice hold is replaced. In some cases, a plurality of notice icons may be acquired, and in that case, the number of acquired hold icons may be replaced. That is, a configuration in which one notice icon YI is replaced with one hold icon may be adopted. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi are collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icon indicate numbers indicating the plurality of numbers, or the hold icon A plurality of notice icons replaced by may be displayed in a color representing the plurality of icons. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c3), the character “Yayed” of the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remains, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. Note that the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variation icon h0, remains in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing when the mode changes to the mode a. It should be noted that the characters “Yayed” may disappear at the same time as the first hold icon h11 of the villager icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or before the first hold icon h11 of the villager icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may disappear. For example, it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 183 (a 3-2-8c2).

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 becomes the change icon h0 and is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c4) is the symbol variation display before the target variation of the prefetch notice. During the execution of the symbol variation display, an animation for stocking the notice icon is started. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c4) is the notice icon YI, but is not a notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice. The animation started here is an animation that stocks the notice icon used in the target change of the prefetch notice. A change icon h0 shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the notice icon used in the target change of the pre-read notice.

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, and an effect image EF4 is displayed to notify that the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice is stocked. Note that some icons are starting to appear slightly behind the effect image EF4. In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 jumps out of the variation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the change icon h0 has changed to a default display mode. This default display mode is a display mode when the change icon h0 is started to be displayed as the hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, the display mode has changed in various ways after the start of display, but has returned to the display mode before the change. In addition, you may display in display modes other than the display mode before changing.

  In FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the prefetch notice in the stock area SS.

  Note that the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c3) may be used before becoming the change icon. In addition, an animation for moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the pre-read notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the symbol change in which the notice icon YI is used is performed. The display may be notified in advance. FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8c7) is followed by FIG. 180 (A 22).

  FIG. 184 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect example shown in FIGS. 180 (a1) to 181 (a40).

  In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same up to FIG. 180 (A2). In FIG. 184 (A3-3-1), the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS disappears, and the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon are displayed. The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, a region where the change icon display region CIS and the production icon display region DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated region MGS. In the mini game exclusive area MGS shown in FIG. 184 (A3-3-1), an appearance area AS that is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the form a in the variable icon display area CIS in the mini game dedicated area MGS. Here, the variation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol variation display is changed to a panda character of the opponent icon TI. In the back of the appearance area AS, an entrance through which the character enters and exits is provided.

  In FIG. 184 (A3-3-2), the symbol variation display is finished, but the panda character of the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the change icon h0 is changed to the opponent icon TI, it is continuously displayed as the opponent icon TI even if the corresponding symbol change display ends. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays the role of both the fluctuation icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the symbol variation display, but when the symbol variation display ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. Note that the icon of the panda character may only play the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variation icon h0 may be erased.

  In FIG. 184 (A3-3-3), the symbol variation display is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is a villager character icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed to the mini game dedicated area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 184 (A3-3-4), the villager character icon, which has been the first hold icon h11 so far, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS in the mini-game exclusive area MGS. . On the other hand, the icon of the panda character that was the variation icon in the previous symbol variation display continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the villager versus panda janken confrontation is started (FIG. 184 (A3-3-5 )). When Janken confrontation is started, a notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. Note that the notice icon YI may appear simultaneously with the start of the Janken showdown, or the notice icon YI may appear before the start of the Janken showdown.

  In FIG. 184 (A3-3-6), the villager character with the change icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 184 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. Has been started. Also, an animation to celebrate winning the Janken showdown has begun. In FIG. 184 (A3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 183 (A3-3-9), the animation for celebrating the victory of Janken confrontation ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 184 (A-3-10), the icon of the villager character that is the variation icon h0 exits from the doorway provided in the back of the appearance area AS, and then the symbol The change display ends (FIG. 184 (a3-3-11)). Note that the icon of the villager character that is the variation icon h0 may exit from the entrance provided in the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display is completed. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all Janken battles are completed. However, the icon of the swordsman character may be changed along the way. The exit timing of the icon of the villager character may be simultaneous with the symbol variation display. Further, when the Janken confrontation continues after this, the villager's character icon may be displayed in the mini-game dedicated area MGS until all the Janken confrontations are completed without leaving. There may be a case where the opponent icon TI and / or the icon of the character that is the changed icon h0 exited from the entrance / exit. Also, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI leaves when the mini game ends.

  In the modification example shown in FIG. 184 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 9 (A 9-2-2), the change icon h0 is changed to No. 179 in FIG. 19 is an icon of a Yoshimune character, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of a panda character. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), the Janken confrontation is won with a probability of 100%, and in this example, a notice icon of “rainbow box” with a big hit is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 184 (A 9-2-2), the symbol variation display is ended while the notice icon of “rainbow box” is displayed in stock. The notice icon of “Rainbow box” has a decisive reliability for the jackpot and functions as a look-ahead notice. Note that the notice icon of “rainbow box” may function as a notice of the change.

  In addition, with the box-shaped notice icon, it is more advantageous for the player that the notice display (item) contained in the box is “red box” than “box” (for example, notice that is easy to develop into super reach) Display or a notice display with high reliability of jackpot), and the “gold box” is more advantageous to the player than the “red box”. Therefore, only a box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, whether or not the notice notice actually appears, how much advantageous notice the notice notice appears. Whether it is a display can be estimated in advance. As described with reference to FIG. 177 (a), since the reliability of the jackpot is determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, the color of the box-shaped notice icon is determined by the ease of jackpot and the game This shows both the ease of obtaining the notice display which is advantageous to the user. It should be noted that, depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease of obtaining an advantageous notice display may be indicated, or only the likelihood of winning a big hit may be indicated.

  The modification shown in FIG. 184 (A 3-4) is an example in which the hold icon for the pre-reading notice target hold may also be used in the mini game. In other words, in FIG. 184 (A 3-4), the third hold icon h <b> 13 representing the prefetch notice hold is also changed to the icon of the villager character, and participates in the Janken confrontation. As a result, if the Janken confrontation is won, the notice display used during the execution of the symbol change display of the pre-read notice subject hold may be obtained. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold behind the pre-reading notice hold may be changed to an icon that can participate in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the pre-reading notice target hold changes to a variable animation and a mini game is played, the mini-game is played until the mini game ends or until the symbol change display of the pre-reading notice hold is finished. It may be in the form of an icon that can participate in the game, and thereafter it may return to the original display form. In addition, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) is finished, the dedicated icon that can participate in the mini game (for example, mini game B) does not change, but a new mini game (of the same type) Even if it may change to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (for example, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (for example, mini game A) Good.

  The modification shown in FIG. 184 (A 3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. In other words, in FIG. 184 (A 3-4), the first hold icon h 11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the samurai character, and the second hold icon h 12 is displayed as No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed with 18 villager character type icons.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 184 (A 3-6), the hold icon that is first digested displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game is displayed as an icon that can also participate in the mini game. In addition, there is a case where at least a part of the hold icon that will be digested later may overlap. That is, in FIG. 184 (A 3-6), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon of the 19 Yoshimune character type is displayed, the second reserved icon h12 is also displayed with the icon of the same Yoshimune character type, and the back foot of the icon of the Yoshimune character as the first reserved icon h11 is It overlaps with the forefoot of the icon of the Yoshimune character which is 21 hold icon h12.

  In addition, the overlap relationship may be reversed, or a hold icon with a high reliability of the big hit may be displayed in front. Furthermore, the hold icon being displayed may indicate the expected degree of change in the prefetch target. For example, it may be easier to make a big hit with the pre-reading object change when two icons are displayed than when only one hold icon of the character of Yoshimune is displayed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 184 (A 31-5-1) to FIG. 31 (A 31-5-3), the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 184 (A 31-5-1) is the same state as FIG. 181 (A 31-1), and in FIG. 184 (A 31-5-2), the notice of mode a which is a display mode in which the box is closed is shown. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on. After FIG. 184 (A 31-5-3), it continues to FIG. 181 (A 33). Note that when the display of the cursor CS is pointed, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect that gives advance notice that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect that the box vibrates) and a display of the cursor CS may be used in combination, and further, a second modification example is shown. As shown in FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

  In FIG. 184 (a 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, and the display changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from the box. It is popping out.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-2-1) to FIG. (A 30-2-4), an effect is provided in which an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened is executed. FIG. 184 (A 30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 181 (A 30-1). In FIG. 184 (A 30-2-2), the icon of the box displayed as the notice icon YI is displayed. An animated production that vibrates in a rattling manner is being executed. With this animation production, the user is reminded that the notice icon YI may be used. This animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. In addition, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started simultaneously with the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Furthermore, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed when a box-shaped notice icon is used, or an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation effect may be executed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be executed while the symbol variation is stopped, or may be stopped once the symbol variation is stopped, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol variation display is started again. Alternatively, this animation effect may be started and ended within a single symbol variation display period, and may not be executed across successive symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 184 (A 30-2-3), the reach state is reached, but the animation production in which the box icon vibrates is continued, and during this reach state, this animation production is switched to the box opening animation production. The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 184 (a 30-2-4) changes to the form d which is the display form in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out from the box. Then, it continues to FIG. 181 (a33).

  Note that the effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened may be executed across the reach effect as in this example, or may not be performed across the reach effect. Further, if an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may be always opened or may not be opened.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-3-1) to FIG. (A 30-3-4), a modified example of the effect in which the box is opened in advance is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates in a rattling manner indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, as shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-3-2), if the vibration is weak, the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is far, and when the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is closer, FIG. 3-3) Change to strong vibration. In other words, the vibration increases as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 184 (A 30-3-4), when the vibration is maximized, the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the notice display YH pops out from inside. Then, it continues to FIG. 181 (a33).

  In addition, the reliability of the notice icon YI or the advantage of the notice display contained therein may be represented by the strength of vibration. That is, the higher the reliability and the advantage, the greater the vibration.

  FIG. 184 (a 30-3-4 ') shows an example in which the box of the notice icon YI is not opened despite the maximum vibration. In this way, in the animation production in which the box icon vibrates, there is a case where the production is performed. When the lost decorative pattern is stopped, the notice icon YI disappears.

  Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

  FIG. 185 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed and a display mode of the fluctuation icon is changed by using the stocked notice icons. FIG.

  The description here will focus on the differences from the example of production shown in FIGS. 180 (A1) to 181 (A40) in which only one notice icon is stocked.

  In FIG. 185 (ii-1), as in FIG. 180 (A4), the symbol variation display is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area. ("Decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. It changes into the icon of the aspect a of the kind of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold of the prefetch notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 185 (ii) after the symbol variation display is started, the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed as the opponent icon TI in the form a of the type of panta, as in FIG. 180 (A7). In addition, a notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock area SS as a second area is provided on the appearance area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. In the stock area SS in this example, a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3 are provided, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

  In FIG. 185 (I 3), as in FIG. 180 (A 8-1), the Janken showdown animation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character with the change icon h 0 wins. In FIG. 185 (i4), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variation icon h0. In FIG. 185 (i5), the animation displayed in the appearance area AS is shown in FIG. 177 (a). No. shown in FIG. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 185 (2)) in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 185 (6), as in FIG. 180 (A15), the symbol variation display is finished, the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing is being stopped (determined display), and the variation icon h0 is also disappeared.

  In FIG. 185 (7) after the symbol variation display is started, the second mini-game B Janken battle is started. In addition, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. No. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed. In FIG. 185 (I8), a mini-game B Janken showdown animation is performed, and the villager character with the change icon h0 has won the second victory. In FIG. 185 (9), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the change icon h0. In FIG. 185 (10), the animation displayed in the appearance area AS is shown in FIG. 177 (a). No. shown in FIG. A “box” notice icon YI of 1 comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. In the following FIG. 185 (11), a second “box” notice icon YI is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 185 (ii)) in the stock area SS. In other words, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the notice icon YI that was stocked one time before. The interval between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. In addition, you may stock at random in the vacant area | region, without providing 1st stock position SS1 and 2nd stock position SS2. Further, when the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). The third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

  In FIG. 185 (12), as in FIG. 180 (A23), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 185 (13), as in FIG. 180 (A24), the symbol variation display that becomes the prefetch target variation is started, and in FIG. 185 (I14-1), as in FIG. The conversation notice will start. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (ii-14-1), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in the central area. Two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap with a part of the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama from the front side. After the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 185 (15), the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to a form d which is a display form in which the box is opened, and a “Leach” notice display YH is popping out from the box. This “reach” notice display YH also overlaps a part of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 from the front side. The notice display YH of “reach” at this timing is a notice for notifying that a reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the current symbol change display.

  In FIG. 185 (16), the conversation notice is updated as in FIG. 180 (A26). In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel displaying the operation promotion notification image together with the heel character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 180 (A 26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, no display corresponding to this is performed. The first notice icon YI, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, has not yet been deleted in FIG. 185 (16), but has been deleted in FIG. Note that the “Leach” notice display YH remains displayed. The operation valid period has not started in FIG. As described above, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation effective period, but may be deleted at the same time as the operation effective period starts, and is deleted after the operation effective period starts. May be.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing of FIG. 185 (19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

  In FIG. 185 (い 20), in the same manner as in FIG. 180 (爺 20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, the habit conversation image CI2 is displayed from the operation promotion notification image. It changes to the character display of “Leach is!” To foresee that the reach production will start with the symbol change display. Therefore, the same thing (the reach effect is started with the currently displayed symbol variation display) is also notified by a different notice (here, the strawberry conversation image CI2) from the notice display YH of “Leach”. Will be. In addition, when two types of notices are performed in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the occurrence of normal reach may be notified in advance by the notice display YH of “Leach” displayed earlier, and the occurrence of super reach may be notified in the conversation notice displayed later. By performing such a time-series notice, the production (reach type) may appear to be promoted. Or, conversely, the occurrence of super reach may be announced in advance by the notice display YH of “reach” displayed earlier, and the occurrence of normal reach may be notified in the conversation notice displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same variation, either may be better. Also, for example, when the notice display YH notifies “Leach” and the conversation notice displays “Continue” for notifying the pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous notice (for example, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped) after the reach occurs. ) Occurs and a notice can be given until the pseudo-continuous production starts.

  In addition, even if the pseudo-continuous notice is made twice by the notice display YH and other notices in one segment during the symbol change display (period from the start of the pattern change to the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous use), the pseudo-ream is 1 It may be configured to perform only once (that is, temporarily stop once), or may be configured to generate pseudo-continuations (temporary stop occurs) as many times as the advance notice is made.

  In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, it is possible to perform the promotion effect or the relegation effect within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, a promotion effect can be performed as the number of pseudo-continuous events increases. For example, the notification of the third display mode may be performed in the first variation of the pseudo continuous number, and the fifth display mode may be notified in the second variation of the pseudo continuous number. Note that the third display mode may be notified in the second variation of the pseudo continuous number, and further, the second display mode may be notified in the second variation of the pseudo continuous number as a demotion effect. Good. In addition, if it is not a pseudo-continuous effect, the third display mode may be firstly announced and then the fifth display mode may be previously notified within one symbol variation display, or conversely, Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be notified, and then the third display mode may be notified.

  It should be noted that the notice text display such as “Leach is!” In the frog conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, the chance button 136 may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

  In FIG. 185 (22), as in FIG. 181 (A 30-1), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and niece's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative design becomes easier to see. Yes. Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and niece's conversation image CI2 may disappear at the same time, or Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 displayed on the back side may disappear first, or 爺 displayed on the near side. The conversation image CI2 may disappear first.

  In FIG. 185 (23), reach production is started as noticed, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI stocked second in the reach state is used. In other words, as shown in FIG. 185 (24), a box of the notice icon YI opens, and a notice display “HH” of “change” pops out from inside. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, a notice icon YI with a high-priority notice display YH may be used earlier or later. Further, the higher the reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be used first, or it may be used later. In addition, the noticed change YH of the “change” that has appeared here overlaps the temporarily stopped right design (here “decoration 6”, which is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap. "Change" notice display YH overlaps the right pattern from the front.This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, but at the second stock position SS2. This is related to the notice display YH released from the notice icon Y2 being stocked.

  In FIG. 185 (い 25), the used notice icon YI disappears and the “change” notice display YH is still displayed. In the following FIG. 185 (26), the changing icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 185 (い 26), the “change” notice display YH changes to the light ball YHb while overlapping the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 185 (27), the ball of light YHb flies toward the variation icon h0 and hits the variation icon h0. Again, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been released affects the light ball YHb at a position different from the example shown in FIGS. 181 (34) to (35). It flies toward the change icon h0 on the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is emitted to the same position (for example, the position of the “change” notice display YH shown in FIG. 181 (A) 32), It may change to the light ball YHb at the position and fly toward the change icon h0 along the same locus.

  In FIG. 185 (i28), the display mode of the change icon h0, which is the default display mode until the start of the animation after the change icon change animation is finished, is shown in No. 179 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 185, the “reach” notice display YH is displayed, the reach effect is announced, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display where the reach effect is not started. However, the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end, and this results in the symbol variation display not displaying the “reach” notice display YH, In the symbol variation display in which the “Leach” notice display YH is displayed, it is easier to finally determine and display the big hit symbol form.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a modification example of the effect example shown in FIG. 185 and an effect example of the mini-game A for the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-2-1) to (ii-14-2-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-2-1) is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 186 (ii-14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS indicates the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS indicates the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 185 (ii)). In addition, the display of the cursor CS also overlaps with Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 from the front side.

  In FIG. 186 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 that the display of the cursor CS has pointed to then opens, and the box A “Leach” notice display YH pops out from inside.

  The notice icon YI box may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may be a back button without being displayed. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated with the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected with the cursor CS is opened by operating the chance button 136. It may be. Alternatively, the display of the cursor CS may indicate the notice icon YI which is not used. Further, the cursor CS may be displayed or may not be displayed. In this case, when the cursor CS is not displayed, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol, or conversely, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference between the two. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-3-1) to (ii-14-3-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-3-1) is the state shown in FIG. 185 (ii-14-1). In FIG. 186 (ii-14-3-2), two cursors CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are indicated. As a result, it is not clear which notice icon YI is used first.

  In FIG. 186 (ii-14-3-3), the two cursors CS are both disappeared, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 is opened, and the notice of “reach” is opened from the box. The display YH is popping out.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-4-1) to (ii-14-4-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (ii-14-4-1) is the state shown in FIG. 185 (ii-14-1). In FIG. 186 (14-4-2), two cursors CS are displayed, and both notice icons YI are respectively indicated. In this example, as shown in FIG. 186 (14-14-3), after both the display of the two cursors CS disappears, both of the notice icons YI pointed to by the display of the two cursors CS until then are displayed. The box opens and the notice icon YH of “REACH” pops out from the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 185 (2)). From the box of the previous notice icon YI, a notice display YH of “change” is popping out. Both boxes of the notice icon YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in order of stock, or may be opened first when the notice display YH having a higher advantage appears, or may be opened later. Further, the higher the reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI, the higher the degree of reliability, the earlier may be opened, or the later may be opened. Thereafter, the “reach” notice display YH is erased as shown in FIG. 185 (i 20), while the “change” notice display YH is displayed in the right pattern that is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (i 26). It changes to the ball of light YHb with the overlapping state. After that, the variation icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variation icon h0, which is the default display mode until the start of the animation, is No. in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking mode described in 2. Note that the end of the variable icon change animation may precede the disappearance of the “reach” notice display YH, or may be erased simultaneously or later.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-1) to (1-2-4), the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI is an example.

  In FIG. 186 (ii-2-1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is the upper limit of four, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Among these hold icons, for example, the third hold is a pre-reading notice hold, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 can all participate in the mini game (village character icon). Has changed. The maximum stock number of the notice icon YI is “3” (maximum hold number−1), which is less than 4 which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 1 or FIG. However, it may be the same number as the maximum number of reservations in Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2, or it may be the same number as the total number of the maximum number of reservations in Special Figure 1 and the maximum number of reservations in Special Figure 2. The number may be one (for example, 8) or less than the total number. Moreover, it may be larger than the maximum number of reservations or may be larger than the total number.

  In FIG. 186 (I 1-2-2), the mini game B is further won in a state where two notice icons YI have already been acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 186 (I-2-3), the third notice icon YI that comes out of the appearance area AS is temporarily displayed. In this state, the third enlarged notice icon YI displayed in an overlapping manner overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is difficult to see for a moment. However, the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS is set to a position away from the second stock position SS2, so that it does not overlap with the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2. You can also.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (I 1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 185) provided in the stock area SS. (See (2)) A notice icon YI is displayed for each. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 186 (ii1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

  On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 186 (I 1-2-4 ′) overlaps a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock. The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to view.

  The stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap the appearance area AS so as not to overlap the appearance area AS or overlap the appearance area AS. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The example of production shown after FIG. 186 (1) is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of production of mini game A for Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

  In FIG. 186 (U1), as in FIG. 180 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. In addition, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in these special drawings 1 are both No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In FIG. 186 (U2), as in FIG. 180 (A2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. Become one. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (U2), the hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

  In FIG. 186 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 181 (No. 3), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are both No. 1 in FIG. 14 is changed to the icon of the aspect a of the type of Yoshimune (bow) described in FIG. The change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 that is the target hold of the pre-reading notice is increased or displayed at the same time as the increase display. It may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started, the change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (change of the hold icon) may be completed. The change of the hold icon may be completed simultaneously with the start of the increase animation, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. In addition, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started simultaneously with the increase animation. Then, after the increase animation is started, the change animation may be started. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are changed to the icons of the aspect A of the Yoshimune (bow) type, so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (in this example, mini game A)) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini game) is performed. You may give a notice. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game A. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 186 (U4), the symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 186 (No. 5), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (No. 5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped. However, in the second decorative symbol in the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper right decorative symbol is displayed. In the 2-hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the production icon display area DIS that has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A shown in FIG. 178 (a) is started, and the icon AI slightly appears on the right end of the screen. 'Is starting to appear. In addition, in FIG. 186 (5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and so far on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character started to move toward the first stage hs1 and is the default display mode that has been displayed on the third stage hs3 so far, but is read ahead. The third hold icon h13, which is the target for hold of the notice, has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is slightly lowered. Note that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the moving animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started earlier, or vice versa. The moving animation of the hold icon may be started first.

  In FIG. 186 (6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the variation icon h0 is used as the variation ah type (await) Icon) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of this variation icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet on the white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 177 (a)). The icon AI ′ on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. This icon AI 'is different from the mini game A icon AI shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (No. 7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in FIG. 186 (U7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI ′. The However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (a state of 0).

  Also in FIG. 186 (8), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued. Here, the hit point (HP) is displayed as a part of the appearance animation in the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 186 (No. 8), a blue gauge gag is beginning to be visible, though slightly. As described with reference to FIG. 178 (b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of points of HP. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen when the color of the gauge is seen that the number of HP points is 60 or more. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the icon AI for the mini game A includes an aspect a in which the gauge is full, an aspect b in which the gauge is half, and an aspect c in which the gauge is only a little. Since there is only the mode d, it can be expected that the gauge increases to a full tank state when the blue gauge gag is visible. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color corresponding to the number of points of the HP, or according to the increase of the gauge, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 186 (No. 9), the blue gauge gag has increased to half, and in FIG. 186 (No. 10), the blue gauge gag has increased to a full tank. That is, the remaining HP points are 100, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is completed. Eventually, in this example, the “box” icon of aspect a appears as the icon AI for the mini game A.

  In FIG. 186 (U11), the mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 has changed to the mode of b having a bow, and the mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first reserved icon h11 is also It changes to a mode b with a bow that is slightly different from the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 186 (U12), both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first reserved icon h11 fire arrows and change to the mode c.

  In FIG. 186 (U13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 that is close to the icon AI for the mini game A is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The arrow fired by the character flies toward the carpet. In FIG. 186 (U 14-1), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows have successfully hit the carpet.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of the example of the mini game A in which the Yoshimune treasure acquisition is announced.

  In FIG. 187 (U15-1) continuing from FIG. 186 (U14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points because two arrows are pierced. In FIG. 187 (U15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed. In FIG. 187 (U16), the blue gauge gag that is full (100 points) decreases. I'm starting. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display starts to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 187 (U17), the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue until then to green from the point when it becomes 50 points or less. It should be noted that the damage calculation may be started when the arrow is stuck in the carpet. That is, damage calculation may be started at the timing of FIG. 186 (13) when the first arrow hits the carpet, and the gauge gag may be decreased.

  Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the floating icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first reserved icon h11 continue to be displayed in the state c, but the character changes to the waiting state a. May be.

  In FIG. 187 (No. 18), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- “Decoration 1”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  FIG. 187 (U19) is in the stopped display (determined display), and the erasing animation of the change icon h0 is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 gradually enters the base hs0. Disappears. FIG. 187 (20) is also in the stop display (determined display), and the fluctuation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

  In FIG. 187 (U 21), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but the variable display is started in the second decorative symbol in the upper left. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 187 (U22), the movement animation of the hold icon has started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is displayed in the variation icon display area. The second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode that has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far, but has been reserved for the pre-reading notice, has been moved toward the first stage hs1. The movement has started. Further, in the second hold number display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (U22), the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “1”.

  Also in FIG. 187 (U23), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed as the change icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (U24), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. In the same diagram (U25), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 is displayed. Changes to a mode b with a bow. In FIG. 187 (U26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 fires an arrow and changes to the mode c. In FIG. 187 (U27), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character with the change icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In FIG. In the same figure (U 29), the green gauge gag, which was the remaining 40 points, starts to decrease, and when it becomes 20 points or less, it changes from green until then to red. ing. Further, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 187 (U30), the gauge gag is cleared to 0 point. In this way, the hit point (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini game A, has been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. Note that the number of damages applied may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

  In FIG. 187 (U 31), the mini game A icon AI whose meter display MTh is 0 is covered by the effect image EF 5, and in FIG. Icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (U33), when the mini game A icon AI of mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (U32) in the same figure), the minigame A icon of mode d is used. The icon AI is the No. shown in FIG. Instead of the “box” mode a notice icon YI of 1, the box a closed notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG.

  Eventually, in FIG. 187 (U35), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). "-" Decoration 7 ") is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  FIGS. 187 (U36) to (U37) are in the stop display (determined display), the erasing animation of the change icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 is It gradually disappears in pedestal hs0. Further, here, the pedestal hs0, which has been lowered a little, is rising toward the original height. FIG. 187 (U38) is also in the stop display (determined display), the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared, and the base hs0 is returned to the original height. Note that the notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Thereafter, FIG. 180 (a24) follows. In this example, hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 187 (U17), and the remaining hit points are 40 in (U21) to (U24) in FIG. 187). The hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit point may be recovered when the next symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating the middle of the first modification to the third modification of the production example in FIGS. 186 () to 187 () 38.

  The first modification is an example of acquiring the notice icon one shot, and the process is the same up to FIG. 186 (U14-1). In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification is originally displayed, but is not displayed here. In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The icon AI for the mini game A in the state a is covered with the effect image EF5. In FIG. 15 (U), the effect image EF5 disappears and the icon AI for the mini game A in the aspect d is displayed. Yes. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag is reduced are omitted, and the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d is displayed at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display where the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display where the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-4), when the mini game A icon AI of mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (U 15-2-3) in the same figure), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the “a” box “a” is changed to the notice icon YI of the form “a”, and the notice icon YI of the form “a” with the box closed is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG.

  Eventually, in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-6), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") are stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  In FIG. 188 (U15-2-7), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (U15-2-7), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol at the upper left, variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-8), the movement animation of the hold icon has started, and the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is The movement to the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is started, and the second hold icon h12 that is the default display mode but has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far is the pre-reading notice target hold is displayed in the first stage. The movement is started toward hs1. In addition, in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is started again, and the icon AI ′ is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

  In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-9), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped, but the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the change icon h0 is the type of Yoshimune (bow). An icon of a mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (U15-2-9), the hold number of Special Figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “1”. Furthermore, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet on the white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 177 (a)). The icon AI ′ on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI ′. Is done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (a state of 0). In FIG. 188 (U15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, the empty meter display MTh added earlier is hit points as part of the appearance animation. An animation displaying (HP) is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the remaining HP points are 100, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is completed. Eventually, the “box” icon of aspect a also appears as the mini game A icon AI.

  In FIG. 188 (U15-2-12), the character aspect of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 has changed to a form b with a bow, and then the Yoshimune ( A bow is fired from the character of (bow). In FIG. 188 (U15-2-13), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here the damage point notification display and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 188 (U 15-2-14), the icon AI for the mini game A in the state a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5. In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears and the icon AI for the mini game A in the form d is displayed at a stroke.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-16), when the mini game A icon AI of mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (U 15-2-3) in the same figure), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the “a” aspect “a”, and as shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-17), the notice icon YI of the aspect “a” with the box closed is It is displayed under the notice icon YI previously stocked in 5). In this way, one announcement icon is succeeded in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 188 (U15-2-2b1) to (U15-2-2b5), the process is the same up to FIG. The modification here is also an example of acquiring the notice icon in one shot, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are executed without being omitted. In FIG. 188 (U15-2-2b1), damage point notification (a red number “100”) is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was full (100 points) starts to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag is The green gauge gag continues to decrease further. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display starts to fade and gradually disappears.

  In addition, you may give a notice by the display of a damage point alert | report or the color of a carpet. For example, if the damage point notification display color is rainbow, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the "rainbow box" notice icon, you can get the "rainbow box" notice icon, The big hit of the pre-reading object change is determined from the characteristic of the notice icon of “rainbow box”. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the damage point notification display color is a rainbow color may be a big hit decision. Alternatively, when the damage point display color is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of obtaining the notification icon may be higher than when the damage color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the damage point display color is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the damage color is the default color. The same applies to the case of carpet color.

  In FIG. 188 (U15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease. Also, the damage point notification display is almost disappearing.

  In FIG. 188 (U15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease. Also, the damage point notification display is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 188 (U15-2-2b4), the gauge gag is cleared to 0 point.

  When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the mini game A icon AI is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-2b5). The notice icon YI can be acquired.

  From FIG. 188 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. 15 (U 15-3-3) in the third modified example, FIG. 188 (U 15-2-1) to FIG. It is the same as -2-3). In the third modified example, the next mini game A icon AI appears earlier than the first modified example, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-3-4), when the mini game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the icon of the mini game A icon to be performed in the next change is displayed. The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI ′ is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. In FIG. 188 (U 15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet on the white color of the first display mode. An icon AI ′ on which a box image (notification icon YI of the “a” box “a” shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is displayed is displayed. Note that the stock display of the notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI ′ may be the same, the stock display may be earlier, or conversely, the entire display may be earlier. It should be noted that the meter display MTh is added to the icon AI ′ after the next change is started.

  Eventually, in FIG. 188 (U15-3-6), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") are stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modification of the production example of FIGS. 186 () to 187 () and the middle of the fourth to fifth modifications.

  In FIG. 189 (U15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modified example, the stop icon is being displayed (determined being displayed), and the fluctuation icon h0 that was the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) has completely disappeared. Yes.

  In FIG. 189 (U15-3-8) where the next symbol variation display is started, an empty meter display MTh of the empty HP is additionally displayed on the icon AI ′, and FIG. 189 (U15-3-9) continues. ), An animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to a full tank. Thereafter, the flow is the same as in FIG. 188 (U 15-2-12).

  From FIG. 189 (U 15-4-1) to FIG. 15 (U 15-4-5) in the fourth modified example, FIG. 188 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. It is the same as -3--5). In the fourth modification, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one symbol variation display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini game A icon AI may be the upper limit of the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the stocked notice icon YI is used before the new notice icon YI is acquired, or the Gasse mini-game A is performed, and the new notice icon YI is obtained. Can't win.

  In FIG. 188 (U 15-4-6), an empty HP meter display MTh is additionally displayed on the new icon AI ′ in the symbol variation display in which one notice icon YI has already been acquired, and continues. In FIG. 188 (U15-4-7), an animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to a full tank. The symbol variation display is still continued, and in FIG. 188 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the mode c until now, is also the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first reserved icon h11. ) Also changed to a mode b with a bow, aiming for a carpet of a new mini game A icon AI. In the fourth modification, a plurality of attacks can be performed in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini game A icon AI may be attacked only once.

  Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 188 (U 15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 is also the Yoshimune ( The arrow fired from the (bow) character was also stuck in the carpet, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points) The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the same figure (U15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and is reduced to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 point, as shown in FIG. 188 (U 15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 point, It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. In addition, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 following FIG. 188 (U15-4-12), the mini game A continues and it is possible to acquire the second notice icon. . In the same manner as described for the number of appearances of the icon AI for the mini game A, the number of acquired notification icons YI can be set in various ways based on the maximum stock number. That is, the acquisition number of the notice icon YI may be limited to the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.

  The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (u-1-2-1), a background screen that has been omitted so far is displayed. This background screen is a sea background screen. In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 186 (U 1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. In addition, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in these special drawings 1 are both No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In FIG. 189 (U1-2-1), as in FIG. 186 (U2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. , There are three in all. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (U 1-2-1), the hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

  In FIG. 189 (U1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon having a display mode that is not shown in FIG. 179 (a). That is, it is a display mode (VS display mode) in which VS is displayed as a character, and a display mode for notifying that the mini game A is performed in a symbol variation display corresponding to the hold before the hold of the hold icon of this display mode. It is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed with the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold and / or the second hold. In addition, when the hold icon of the VS display mode is displayed, the mini game A may be always executed or may not be executed. Note that the hold of the hold icon in the VS display mode becomes the target hold of the prefetch notice, and the VS display form is a kind of display form of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-4), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-5), the hold that has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (U1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but the variable display is started in the second decorative symbol in the upper left. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

  In FIG. 189 (U1-2-6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in FIG. 189 (U1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is displayed. Has been started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI was displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by the effect image EF6. Has been. In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-7), the flame effect image EF6 is thinned, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to be slightly visible.

  In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d has a mini game instead of the holding frame UI. A dedicated area MSS appears. In the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 189 (U 1-2-8), two Yoshimune (bow) icons YMI1, YMI2 are displayed. Both of these two icons YMI1, YMI2 are displayed in the form a (standby form). In addition, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI ′ with a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and a dedicated area for meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided. A meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 189 (U 1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the remaining HP points are 100.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (U 1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A. The mini game A may be started simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decorative symbol may be started. The mini game A may be started before the symbol variation display is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and a mini game battle card is displayed in characters (here, “Yoshimune” VS “Carpet”).

  In FIG. 189 (U 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears, and in FIG. Both characters are changed to a mode b having a bow and aiming at the carpet of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that the mini-game A will be played in the next change. In this example, since two icons of Yoshimune (bow) are displayed, there is a higher possibility that the mini-game A will be performed in the next change than when only one icon of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed. . The number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be obtained.

  Alternatively, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow) may correspond to the number of held icons before the held icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of the hold icons before the VS display mode hold icon is three, the number of the icons of Yoshimune (bow) is also three. If there are two hold icons, the icon of Yoshimune (bow) will be two. In addition, the number of confrontation is determined according to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack for one icon of Yoshimune (bow). The number of times may be displayed in the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A.

  Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1, YMI2, and in FIG. 189 (U1-2-12), the two arrows are stuck in the carpet, the damage calculation is performed, and the damage point notification (" No. 40 ”is displayed, and the blue gauge gag that is full (100 points) is starting to decrease in FIG.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the fifth modification of the example of production shown in FIGS. 186 (U1) to 187 (U38) and an example of the stage where the stocked notice icon YI is promoted.

  In FIG. 190 (u-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modified example, since one attack during one symbol variation display is completed, a semi-transparent notice image such as “following the next variation” is displayed. Is displayed. The exclusive area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. Note that this preview image may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 190 (U1-2-15), the notice image disappears, and in FIG. 190 (U1-2-16), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing (“decoration 6”-“decoration”). 4 "-" decoration 1 ") is stopped.

  FIG. 190 (U 1-2-17) shows a stop display (determined display), and the stabbed arrow disappears from the carpet. In FIG. 190 (U 1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region is displayed. The symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the hold that has been the first hold so far has been consumed, and the symbol variation display has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (U1-2-18), the variable display is started in the second decorative symbol in the upper left.

  After that, arrows are fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 190 (U 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the following FIG. 190 (U 1-2-20) In the meter display MTh shown, the gauge gag disappears, decreasing to 0 point. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the mini game A icon AI is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 190 (U 1-222), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (U1-2-23), when the mini game A icon AI in the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (U1-2-22) in the same figure). , The icon AI for the mini game A in the mode d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 1 instead of the notice icon YI of the “box” aspect “a”, as shown in FIG. 190 (U 1-2-24), the notice icon YI of the aspect “a” with the box closed is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 190 (U 1-2-24), the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the translucent flame effect image EF6. In FIG. 190 (U 1-2-25), the flame effect is displayed. It is obscured by the image EF6. Note that the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started before the stock of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for the mini game A in the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started at the same time as the stock of the notice icon YI is completed.

  In FIG. 190 (U 1-226), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is finished, the flame effect image EF6 is completely disappeared, and the dedicated display area MSS of the mini game A appears in the effect display area 208d. Returning to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS. The default display mode change icon h0 corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 189 (U1-2-3) to (U1-2-5). In addition, a first hold icon h11 having a default display mode is displayed in the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIGS. 189 (U1-2-3) to (U1-2-5). It corresponds to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed as it is in the VS display mode, or any one of the icons in blue to rainbow colors It may be displayed in a manner.

  Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode is the target hold of the pre-reading notice, and is stocked as shown in FIG. 190 (U 1-226). The notice icon YI may be used during the fourth reserved symbol variation display. Further, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol variation display.

  Eventually, in FIG. 190 (U1-227), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center (“decoration 4”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7") are stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted.

  In FIG. 190 (E1-1), the mini game A icon AI of mode d is displayed. The change icon h0 is an icon of a Yoshimune (bow) character, but the first hold icon h11 is an icon of a default display mode. Also in this modification, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the prefetch notice hold. In addition, the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d starts to move toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 190 (E2), the notice icon YI changed from the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a notice icon of mode “a” of “box”. Also, the symbol variation display is completed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a combination of the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol and the decorative symbol of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”) in the central region. The second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Furthermore, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 190 (E3), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (E3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol at the upper left, variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 190 (E4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is displayed as the change icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has become the change icon h0 changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (E5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is slightly different from the mini game A described so far, and a notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI in which a target icon is hung on a parachute appears. In FIG. 190 (E6), the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the parachute has descended from the upper right corner of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 shown in FIG. Then, it changes to the mode b with a bow and aims at the target icon. Eventually, an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow). In FIG. 190 (E8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 190 (E9), a character “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation is displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. The arrow fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character of the change icon h0 may or may not hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. .

  In FIG. 190 (E10), when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is displayed as No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 2 “red box” notice icon has been promoted (FIG. 190 (11)).

  Eventually, the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI disappears as shown in FIG. 190 (E12), and in the following figure (E13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when the notice icon YI of the “red box” of the aspect a which is the display form in which the box is closed is changed to the form d which is the display form in which the box is opened, the notice display YH is displayed from the box. A pop-up animation is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is the No. shown in FIG. 7 is a notice display of red “red change”, and is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two steps.

  In FIG. 190 (E13), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the changing icon change animation using the red “red change” notice display YH is started. In FIG. 190 (E14), the red “red change” notice display YH changes to a light ball YHb.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted and a modification of the effect example.

  In FIG. 190 (E15) following FIG. 190 (E14), the light ball YHb in which the red “red change” notice display YH has changed is aimed at the change icon h0 which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow). When the flying icon h0 flies and hits the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and the effect image EF8 disappears, the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to No. 179 shown in FIG. 4 is changed to a “green” variation icon (FIG. 190 (16)).

  In this example, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is performed. However, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may be played together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI has appeared, but the hold icon may change to a notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to a notice icon promotion icon. There may be. Furthermore, a notice icon acquisition icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to a notice icon promotion icon. In addition, the appearance of the special icon YSI for the advance notice icon is a notice for the advance notice that the advance notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the advance notice icon YI may also notice that the advance notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to do. Then, here, the change icon h0 is used to perform the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted, but there may be cases where the notice is given using something other than the change icon h0 or the hold icon. It is good or you may make a notice.

  Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-1), the mini game A icon AI of the mode d is displayed. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are icons of Yoshimune (bow) characters. The hold of the first hold icon h <b> 11 becomes a prefetch notice hold. In addition, the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d starts to move toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-2), the symbol change display is continued, and the notice icon YI of the “box” aspect a changed from the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-3), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-3), the hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character. If a mini-game for acquiring a notice icon is performed on the currently displayed symbol variation display, the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the second hold icon h12 may not be used. It may be possible to use it. That is, during the symbol fluctuation display in which there is an increase in hold, the increased hold icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for obtaining the notice icon.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-5), the symbol variation display ends without using the stock-displayed notice icon YI, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central region. The combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also displays the same combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Furthermore, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-6), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-6), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol in the upper left, variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 191 (E1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display mode. The change icon h0 is displayed as it is.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the change display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modified example. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-9), the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this modification shown in FIG. In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the aspect b with a bow and aims at the target icon. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character of the hold icon, and in the same figure (E1-2-12), the fired arrow moves toward the target icon. I'm flying. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-14), the letters “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed beside the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI, and FIG. 191 (E1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is promoted from the previous “box” to the “red box” notice icon. (FIG. 191 (E1-2-16)).

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-18), a box of the notice icon YI is opened, and from the inside, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 19 “VS Swordsman Reach” notice YH pops out. The notice display YH of “VS swordsman reach” is a face icon of the swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-19), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of “VS swordsman reach” is still displayed.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-20), the notice display YH of “VS swordsman reach” disappears, but at the same time as the notice display YH disappears, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach starts as noticed. . When the notice display YH of “VS swordsman reach” is displayed, the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach may or may not be started. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-21), an image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large, and the first decoration shown in the same figure (E1-2-22) continues. In the symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the base hs0. The hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are continuously displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be deleted, or conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-223), “decoration 5” as the middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated. In the following FIG. 191 (E1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described with reference to FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 134 (A 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is temporarily displayed as a wipe without a pattern and the same color. With this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variation icon h0 may be displayed.

  143 (E1-2-25) wipes out, the background returns to the normal background, and the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) has also returned to the default display mode. . However, the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character may be used until the first hold icon h11 is digested, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

  In 143 (E1-226), the display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”.

  In this modified example, a mini game for further acquiring a notice icon may be performed together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also in this modified example, the hold icon may be changed to a notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may be changed to a notice icon promotion icon. Furthermore, a notice icon acquisition icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to a notice icon promotion icon. In addition, the appearance of the special icon YSI for the advance notice icon is a notice for the advance notice that the advance notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the advance notice icon YI may also notice that the advance notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to do. Then, in this modified example, an effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted is executed using the hold icon, but there is a case where the notice is given using other than the variable icon h0 or the hold icon. Or you may be sure to give a notice.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram showing step-by-step example effects in which a button notice display YH appears from the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 192 (a1), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is both displayed as “0”. Two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 192 (a2), the first notice icon YI stocked first (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI opens the box. The display mode is changed to the mode d, and the No. shown in FIG. 21 “button” notice display YH pops out. This “button” notice display YH is a button image imitating the chance button 136, and is a display for notifying that the button effect will be performed in the displayed symbol variation display. In some cases, the button effect is not actually performed.

  In FIG. 192 (a3), the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, but the notice display YH of “button” remains displayed. In the following FIG. 192 (a4), the “button” notice display YH is changed to a light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 9 (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end part of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 192 (a6), a button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, on the button image icon 136aI, a character “Preparing” indicating that the button operation is not yet received is displayed. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the characters “in preparation” is also a display indicating that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It is also a notice to announce.

  In FIG. 192 (a7), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 192 (a8), “decoration 6” that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before the transition to the super reach effect has moved under the second symbol display area and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 6” that has been changed moves below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the characters “in preparation” that have been displayed in the lower right corner until now are moved to the lower left corner before the transition to the super reach effect. In FIG. 192 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variation icon h0 overlap each other during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes through the back side of the variation icon h0. As a result, the variation icon h0 overlaps a part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. Note that the button image icon 136aI may pass through the labor side of the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 may partially overlap the button image icon 136aI from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the characters “in preparation” may be moved so as not to overlap the variation icon h0. Or you may make it move to a movement position instantaneously, without performing the animation which moves the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation". That is, the display position may be switched instantaneously. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 192 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 192 (a10), the movement of the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the characters “in preparation” to the lower left corner is completed.

  Eventually, super reach production started, and here, VS swordsman reach has started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a11) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The animation of a duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the middle of the duel animation, as shown in FIG. 192 (a13), the second notice icon YI (stock notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) that was stocked later and remained until now is displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 20 “UP” notice display YH pops out. This “UP” notice display YH is a displayed symbol variation display, which is a notice that the effect will be promoted. When the “UP” notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. Or you may not be promoted. When the “UP” notice display YH is displayed, the notice display YH is used immediately, and as shown in FIG. 192 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) displayed in the lower left corner is displayed with the flame effect image EF6 ′ together with the characters “in preparation”. It becomes difficult to see. In FIG. 192 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6 ′ disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red). Yes.

  The duel scene animation continues while the cut-in image CI3 is displayed (FIG. 192 (a16)). In FIG. 192 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started again. This second promotion of the button image icon 136aI promotes the button image icon 136aI without any notice. However, the advancement may be notified by other notices, the notice may be given without fail, or the notice may not be given. In FIG. 192 (a17), the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red) is again covered with the flame effect image EF6 'together with the characters “in preparation”, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 192 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6 'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Note that the operation lever is not shown in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90, but the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Further, instead of the operation lever, a transmission part 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction shown in FIG. 58 or the like, or a second chance button 137 may be used.

  In FIG. 192 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 disappears, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the final stage, and the time for starting the button effect is approaching. In FIG. 192 (a20), an animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes a lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the character “Preparing” disappears, and after passing through the same figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22). Thereafter, in FIG. 192 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is additionally displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and no display corresponding to this is performed even if the lever is operated. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 192 (a24)). The button production here becomes a kind of final judgment production. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 192 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing of FIG. 192 (a26) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 118, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a27) is switched from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first decoration display device 208L shown in FIG. The 1 large board acting part 224Ga to the 4th large board acting part 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior Compared with the case where it is not overlapped by the object 224Gd, it is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 115 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. 115 is a jackpot finalizing effect.

  192 (a27) may be performed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various actors return to the initial position, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is also finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judgment result. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a28), “decoration 6” as the middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune has won. Thereafter, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

  In FIG. 193 (Ob1), the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started, and an image of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (Ob1). Two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (b2), an animation of a duel scene between the hero Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Also, the first notice icon YI stocked first (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d and the notice display YH of "button" has jumped out of the box. The “button” notice display YH in this effect example is a notice for notifying that the “button” notice display YH itself is stocked.

  In FIG. 193 (b3), the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is erased, but the notice display YH of “button” remains displayed. In the following FIG. 193 (B4), the “button” notice display YH changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. (A5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end part of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 192 (a6), a button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. On the button image icon 136aI, characters “× 1” representing the number of stocks are displayed. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

  In FIG. 193 (b7), the second notice icon YI stocked later (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) is used, and the notice “button” is displayed again from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 193 (b8), the second notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, and the notice button YH of the “button” is changed to a light ball YHb. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner, and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 193 (b9), the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is “× 3”. This means that when the light ball YHb collides with the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 193 (b8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the “button” notice display YH is a notice that the “button” notice display YH itself is stocked, and the “button” notice display YH is displayed. Whether the button image icon 136aI is stocked is not notified in advance, and in this way, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for a single “button” notice display YH. For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one “button” notice display YH. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for a single “button” notice display YH. The number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the “button” notice display YH. For example, in the notice display YH of the “button” in the first display mode, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the “button” in the fifth display form, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI. May be 5. Note that the maximum stock number of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, ten. In other words, the maximum stock count for the number of button effects is 10 times.

  In FIG. 193 (b10), it is predicted that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI and the button effect is started. In FIG. 193 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. Note that the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI has decreased from “× 3” to “× 2” at this stage. Thereafter, in FIG. 193 (b12), the button image 136a is slightly reduced, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (b12), the operation valid period is not started, and even when the button is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 193 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 193 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 193 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 117, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (b16) is switched from the duel scene animation display to the non-display screen, and also shown in FIG. The 1 large board acting part 224Ga to the 4th large board acting part 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The light guide plate IL also emits light.

  It should be noted that the effect using various kinds of accessories in FIG. 193 (b16) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when it has elapsed.

  In FIG. 193 (b17), each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd returns to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a super reach. There is a promotion of the production. In other words, in VS swordsman reach, it is predicted that pandas will participate in order to help Yoshimune, the main character. Thus, in FIG. 193 (b18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating, and in FIG. 193 (b19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button It is predicted that the production will start. In FIG. 193 (b20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation effective period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from “× 2” to “× 1”.

  The timing of FIG. 193 (b21) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing, the player operates the chance button 136. Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (b22), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a gold cut-in image GCT in which “Go !! Go !!!!” is displayed in the sixth display mode (gold). It is foretold that the expectation of jackpot is quite high.

  Note that the display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 193 (b22) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. May also be executed.

  In FIG. 193 (b23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and returns to the duel scene animation. In FIG. 193 (b24), the duel scene animation is about to end. In FIG. 193 (b25), the final judge effect is started, and a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a part of this final judge effect. In FIG. 193 (b26), it is predicted that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times, and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 193 (b27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, and the effect image EF10 is added to the larger default button image 136a. In the same figure (b28), the button of the fifth display mode (red) is displayed. Promoted to image 136. The promotion to the fifth display mode (red) button image 136 further increases the degree of expectation of the big hit. It should be noted that the button image icon 136aI and the stock number display disappear at the stage of FIG. 193 (b27).

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked and other effect examples.

  In FIG. 194 (B29) following FIG. 193 (B28), the button image 136a of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly reduced, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is additionally displayed. Yes. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (b29), the operation valid period has not started, and no display corresponding to this is performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 194 (b30)). A remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 194 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing in FIG. 194 (b32) is within the above-mentioned operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 118, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a27) is switched from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first decoration display device 208L shown in FIG. The 1 large board acting part 224Ga to the 4th large board acting part 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior Compared with the case where it is not overlapped by the object 224Gd, it is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 115 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. 115 is a jackpot finalizing effect.

  Note that the effects using various kinds of accessories in FIG. 194 (b33) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various actors return to the initial position, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is also finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judgment result. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (b34), “decoration 6” as a middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune has won. Thereafter, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested (used), as shown in FIG. 193 (b12), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. An operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 194 (b30), the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested. When it is (used), it may be configured such that an operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed without fail, and the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is one. It may be configured such that the button of the button image 136a displayed as an operation promotion notification image when it is used (used) is always promoted. In this example, when one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed. When one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), an operation promotion notification is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be promoted in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one of the stocked button image icons 136aI is digested, and may change from red to gold when two are digested. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is obtained. However, in the case of an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the operation lever 139), the emission color of the light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light. Will be promoted.

  In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image. However, only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time is displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed. As the operation promotion notification image, a character notation such as “push button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press” (even a character notation indicating an operation method) Button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image imitating the shape of the operation means (for example, a button display 136a), an image indicating the passage of the operation effective period of the operation means and / or the remaining time of the operation effective period (for example, the remaining time) Time display meter MT), character display relating to operation (for example, “push button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press”) and other image display (for example, one or more “shapes of operation means” Character image display different from the image imitating the image (the displayed symbol variation display may be more likely to be a big hit in the end than the case where the character image is displayed as the operation prompting notification display). ) May be displayed.

  FIGS. 194 (c1) to (c7) are diagrams showing a first example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation in stages.

  In FIG. 194 (c1), the first decorative symbol in the central area is stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon is ended, and the icon of the villager type aspect a (standby aspect) is displayed as the variation icon h0. Is displayed. Further, as the first hold icon h11, an icon of the villager type aspect a (standby aspect) is displayed. Furthermore, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, but this second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an icon of the type a (standby mode) of the type of panta shown in FIG. 178 (c) is displayed as an opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI is also executing a standby animation (default animation). In the appearance area AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (Oc2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini-game B Janken confrontation is started. In this example, the mini-game B Janken battle is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (c3), between the icon of the villager character that is the variation icon h0 and the icon of the panta character that is the opponent icon, An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (c3), the operation valid period is not started, and even when the button is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 194 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 194 (Oc5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing of FIG. 194 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the Janken showdown is started, and the Janken showdown animation is performed. In FIG. 194 (c7), the villager character with the variation icon h0 wins. Then, it continues to FIG.

  The start of the Janken battle may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, or the mini game is started even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period. It may be configured so that the mini-game is easier to win, that is, the notice icon YI is more easily acquired when the operation is performed than when the operation is not performed within the operation valid period.

  FIGS. 194 (d1) to (d7) are diagrams illustrating a second example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

  FIGS. 194 (d1) to (d2) are the same as FIGS. 194 (c1) to (c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

  In FIG. 194 (d3), the stock notice icon YI that has been stocked is used, and the notice button YH of “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 194 (Od4), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the “button” notice display YH is still displayed. In FIG. 194 (Od5), the “button” notice display YH is It moves toward the icon of the villager character that is the fluctuation icon h0 and the icon of the panta character that is the opponent icon. In FIG. 194 (d6), the “button” notice display YH is located between the icon of the villager character that is the change icon h0 and the icon of the panta character that is the opponent icon.

  In FIG. 194 (Od7), a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is additionally displayed in the “button” notice display YH. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (Od7), the operation valid period has not started, and no display corresponding to this is performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and thereafter, the operation is the same as FIG. 194 (c6) and the like.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI is known before the release.

  In FIG. 195 (or a1), the symbol variation display is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a combination of the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- “Decoration 7”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 195 (or a1) is the No. 1 icon in FIG. It changes into the icon of the aspect a of the kind of villager described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 indicating the target hold of the prefetch notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 195 (or a2), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped. However, in the second decorative symbol in the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper right decorative symbol is displayed. In the 2-hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 is reduced by 1 to “1”. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS that has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 195 (or a2), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far has started moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode starts moving toward the first stage hs1.

  In FIG. 195 (or a3-1), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed. However, the moving animation of the hold icon is ended, and the villager type aspect a (standby) is displayed as the change icon h0. Icon) is displayed. The villager character with the variation icon h0 is performing a standby animation (default animation). Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon ends, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the type a of the panta shown in FIG. 178 (c) as the opponent icon TI ( (Standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). In the appearance area AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 "change" notice icon YI is displayed. In addition, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 181 and the like, the “change” in FIG. 6 is the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the character of change, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is a frame display. Since the “change” notice icon YI is displayed with the default color “change”, the player can use the notice icon obtained by winning the Janken confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini-game B Janken confrontation is started. In FIG. 195 (or a5), the Janken showdown animation is performed by the villager character of the variation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the variation icon h0 wins.

  In FIG. 195 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, the “change” notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS comes out of the appearance area AS and is displayed once larger, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 195 (or a8). The stock is displayed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock is also displayed with the text “change” in the default color.

  In the base hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a9), the replacement animation of the villager character display mode and the default display mode is started. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the appearance area AS that has become empty gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 195 (or a10), the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 195 (or a11), the symbol variation display is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a combination of the decorative symbol of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- “Decoration 7”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  In FIG. 195 (or a12), the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, is digested, and the symbol variation display as the prefetch target change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Until now, the notice icon YI of “change” has been displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 195 (or a14), the change icon change animation using the “change” notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock until then is started. In this variable icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 195 (or a14), an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on is added to the notice icon YI of “change”. The “change” notice icon YI corresponds to the “change” notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 195 (or a15), the “change” notice icon YI (“change” notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. . In FIG. 195 (or a16), the display mode of the change icon h0, which is the default display mode until the start of the animation after the change icon change animation is finished, is shown in No. 179 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking mode described in 2.

  In this example, it may be seen that the “change” notice icon YI itself hits the change icon h0.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-2) is an example in which the same type of notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three notice icons YI of “change” are displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, a “red change” notice icon YI, a “super hot” notice icon YI, and an “SP” notice icon YI are displayed. It should be noted that the types are not limited to all different types, and may be partially different types. For example, a “change” notice icon YI, a “change” notice icon YI, and a “SP” notice icon YI may be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice icons YI (here, “change” notice icons YI) are stocked in the stock area SS.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI (stocked) are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of “red change” and “Gekiatsu” The notice icon YI of “SP” and the notice icon YI of “SP” are not limited to all different types, but may be partially different, for example, the same as the notice icon YI of “change” A “change” notice icon YI and a “SP” notice icon YI may be displayed, and the “box” notice icon YI and the “red box” notice icon YI shown in FIG. The “button” notice icon YI may be stocked, the “box” notice icon YI, the “box” notice icon YI, and the “gold box” notice icon YI. ,stock There may be a case to be.

  In each of the examples shown in FIG. 195 (or d), FIG. (Or e), or (or f), a box-shaped notice icon YI whose contents are not shown in FIG. 177 (a) is displayed in the appearance area AS. Is an example in which a plurality are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (or d), three “box” notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (or e), a “box” notice icon YI, a “box” notice icon YI, and a “red box” notice icon YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. It is. That is, the same type of box icons and different types of box icons are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (or f), a notice box YI for “box”, a notice icon YI for “red box”, and a notice icon YI for “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. It is. That is, different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

  Here, the example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), (or e), or (or f) appears if the mini-game is successful. In this example, all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. Note that if the mini game is successful, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be acquired. In addition, a roulette notice that sequentially displays notice icons YI that can be acquired in the appearance area AS is performed, and before the mini game is started / during the mini game / after the mini game is successful, It may be configured to stop and confirm an acquirable (or acquired) notice icon.

  Next, an effect example in which one stock icon that is stocked is used multiple times will be described.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects in which one stock notice icon that is stocked is used a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 196 (A 1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. In addition, the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 196 (a 2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 179 (b) is started with the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In FIG. 196 (a 3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display is finished, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed in the No. 179 shown in FIG. Sixteen “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The icon change notice display notifies that the notice icon YI is acquired or notifies that the icon display mode changes. Here, the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI has been acquired. In FIG. The notification icon YI of the “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 5A. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 196 (A6), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed, in FIG. Has been started.

  When the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading variation is started, the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used and the box is closed as shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of a certain aspect a changes to the aspect d which is a display form in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH jumps out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is the No. shown in FIG. 6 is a display for displaying a notice of a change in the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. by one step.

  In the example of production so far, when the notice icon YI is used once and changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, it is erased as it is, but in this example of production, in FIG. As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. When the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed state, there is a possibility that the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display that is the currently-read target variation. I will foresee that. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed state, the box may not be opened again or may be opened again. Moreover, even if it does not open continuously (even if it does not open immediately), it may open while the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be reopened during a specific period (for example, a specific period straddling the continuous symbol variation display) regardless of the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that it is reopened, it may be closed again and reopened more than twice.

  In FIG. 196 (A10), the “change” notice display YH released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the variable icon, which has been the default display form (first display form) so far, blinks white. The display mode (second display mode) is changed.

  Also, in FIG. 196 (A11), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode A changes to the open display mode D again, and is the second from the box. The notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is the No. shown in FIG. The “reach” notice display of 17 is a display for notifying that a reach change effect is performed or more than normal reach in the displayed symbol variation display. In this way, a different type of notice display may appear than the type of the first (previous) notice display YH. However, the same kind of notice display YH may appear continuously. Further, it may be configured such that only a type of notice display different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or configured so that only a type of notice display that is the same as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be. In addition, it is possible to warn that the normal reach will be performed by displaying the “reach” notice. In this case, when the “reach” notice is displayed, a normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display where the notice is displayed. It will be decided to do.

  In FIG. 196 (A12), the notice icon YI changes again to the form a which is a display form in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. In addition, the notice display YH disappears after a certain display period after the appearance (FIG. 196 (A 13)), but if the reach display is a reach indication of “Leach”, It may continue to be displayed until reach production is started.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 196 (A14), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, when the “reach” notice display YH appears, the reach effect is always performed. However, because the “reach” notice display YH appears, the reach effect is not necessarily performed. Alternatively, even if the “Leach” notice display YH appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the symbol variation display may end. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach production, the notice icon YI changes to the form d which is an open display form, and the third notice display YH from the box is released (FIG. 196 (A 16)). The notice display YH released here is the No. shown in FIG. 2 is a default color “chance” notice display. When the notice display of the default color “chance” is displayed during the reach, it becomes a display for notifying the increase in the reliability that is a big hit by the change. In this case, a different type of notice display appears from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH. This is because the reach presentation has already started, and the “reach” notice display YH cannot appear again. If there is no such situation, even if the same kind of notice display YH appears. Good. Note that the “reach” notice display YH may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, when the “REACH” notice display YH is displayed again during normal reach, the “REACH” notice display YH may be displayed to notify the advancement to super reach. There may be a case where it always develops into a reach and a case where it does not evolve into a super reach. In addition, if the “Leach” notice YH is displayed during the execution of Super Reach A, which is less reliable than the Super Reach B, it will be noticed that Super Reach A will develop to Super Reach B. In that case, it may necessarily develop into super reach B, and may or may not develop into super reach B. In addition, the reach effect may be limited to the notice display that appears. In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of notice displays YH coming out of the same notice icon YI (for example, up to five), and the notice display YH appears within the range up to the upper limit number. . As described above, although there is an upper limit, the larger the number of the notice display YH that comes out from the same notice icon YI, or the kind of the notice display YH that comes out from the same notice icon YI. As the number increases, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may not be related to the number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice display YH coming out of the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. Conversely, the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH that comes out of the same notice icon YI.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has released the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display form a. The notice icon YI may be configured to always disappear when it is opened once during reach. Alternatively, the notification display YH may be configured to always disappear when the maximum number is released. Furthermore, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit, it may be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the warning display YH is not released up to the upper limit number. Alternatively, the display may return to the closed display mode a and continue to be displayed without being opened again, or may continue to be displayed as the open display mode b.

  In FIG. 196 (A18), the normal reach effect is ended, and “decoration 5” that is not “decoration 6” fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. In other words, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates and fluctuates.

  In FIG. 196 (A19), the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The change icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. Note that the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

  In the example described here, the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed, the advance notice of the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but rather than the symbol variation display where the reach effect is not started, The symbol variation display in which the reach production has started is finally easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form. As a result, the “reach” is not displayed as the symbol variation display in which the “Leach” notice display YH is not displayed. In the case of the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH is displayed, it is easier to finally determine and display the big hit symbol form. In addition, in FIG. 196 (A 8-1), a “change” notice is released first, and in the second figure (A 11), a “reach” notice is released. , A “change” notice display may be released, or a “red change” notice display (No. 7 notice display shown in FIG. 177B) of the same type as the “change” notice display is emitted. May be.

  Next, an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH is released from the same notice icon YI that is stocked will be described.

  The process is the same up to FIG. 196 (A7), and when the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, as shown in FIG. 196 (A8-2-1), the stock notice icon YI is used. Then, the display changes to the display mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is the No. shown in FIG. 27 “Oval” notice display. If the predetermined number (here, 3) can be collected, the super-reach effect or the Senryoku box feature described in FIG. 192 (a27) etc. can be collected. Although there is a display notifying that the performance will be performed, there are cases where a predetermined number cannot be collected. Even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, there may be cases where neither a super reach effect nor a thousand carton effect is performed. However, if one sheet appears, the predetermined number of sheets may be collected without fail, and if the predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super-reach effect and the effect of the thousand-and-a-kind box effect may be performed. When the “Oval” notice display YH appears, it is displayed in stock in the area next to the second decorative symbol display (Oval stock area KS) (FIG. 196 (A 8-2-2)). The oval stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 196 (A5)) in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and these two areas do not overlap at all. However, these two regions may overlap at least partially, or may be the same region. Further, the stock notice icon YI and the stocked “Oval” notice display YH do not overlap, but at least part of them may overlap, and all may overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a 8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has released the “small-size” notice display YH returns to the form b which is the closed display form, and the same figure (a 8-2-2). ) The symbol variation display is continued. Note that the “small size” notice display YH may be configured such that only one sheet can be stocked per symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 196 (A 8-2-4), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode A changes to the open display mode d again, and two of the boxes appear in the box. An eye-catching notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of “Oval” but the No. shown in FIG. 7 is a notice display of “red change”, and the notice display of “red change” is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two stages. In FIG. 196 (A 8-2-5), the notice icon YI again changes to the mode a which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. In addition, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon which has been the default display mode (first display mode) has changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). Yes.

  In FIG. 196 (A 8-2-6), the notice icon YI is changed again to the form d which is the opened display form, and the third notice display YH is released from the box. Here, two notices YH of “Oval” are released all at once. As described above, a plurality of the notice indications YH may be released in one release. However, only one may be released in one release. In FIG. 196 (a 8-2-7), these two “oval” notices are displayed in stock in the oval stock area KS, and the oval stock area shown in FIG. 196 (a 8-2-7) is displayed. In the KS, three “small” notice display YH, which is a predetermined number, are stocked. In this example, the “Oval” notice display YH is released a plurality of times (in this example, twice) from one notice icon YI, but the “Oval” notice display YH is displayed only once from one notice icon YI. You may comprise so that it may not be discharge | released. Further, it may be configured such that only the “small” notice display YH is not released from one notice icon YI.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH is released from the same notice icon YI that is stocked, and other examples of effects.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-8) following FIG. 196 (A 8-2-7), the three “Oval” notice display YH, which is a predetermined number, is stocked in the O-format stock area KS. These three “small” notice display YH are used. In other words, the three “small” notices YH, which are a predetermined number, are used immediately when they are accumulated. Here, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the mode of 28 “3 oval” notice display YH, it is re-displayed relatively large in the center of the screen. No. The 28 “3 oval” notice display YH is a notice for notifying that the super reach A, the super reach B, the VS swordsman reach, or the super reach beyond the collective reach. However, even if the “three oval” notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or when the “three oval” notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect is always performed. It may be done.

  Note that the three “Oval” notices YH are not used immediately when the three “Oval” notices YH are accumulated, but after the three “Oval” notices YH continue to be stocked. And may be used. In addition, the “small-format” notice display YH can be stocked across the symbol variation display and can be stocked up to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target, but three symbols are accumulated until the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. If not, the notice display YH of “the oval stock that has been stocked up to that point at the end of the pre-reading symbol variation display” is erased from the oval stock area KS. Or it may be used separately even if three sheets are not stored. It should be noted that the stock of the “small” notice display YH may be configured not to straddle the symbol variation display. In that case, when the symbol variation display in which the “small” notice display YH is stocked ends, “ The oval notice display YH is erased.

  In addition, No. 1 shown in FIG. Each of the 30 “character stock” notice displays (“Tono”, “、”, “Princess”) is the same as the “Oval” notice display described here. The area for stocking the notice display of the character may be provided as an area different from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

  No. 1 shown in FIG. 27 “Oval” or No. Each of the 30 “character stock” icons (“don”, “爺”, “princess”) is displayed as a notice display YH and then stocked in each stock area (small-format stock area KS or character stock area not shown). As a result, it functions as a notice icon. The notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI and the notice icon YI may be stocked. In other words, the notice icon YI may be stocked without using the notice display YH.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-9), the notice display YH of “3 oval sheets” disappears, and the reach effect is started. That is, the “decoration 7” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10a), the VS swordsman reach super-reach production has started as noticed. An animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

  Also in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-11) during the super reach production, the notice icon YI is changed to the form d which is the opened display form, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is the No. shown in FIG. 4 is a notice display of “Gekiatsu”. The notice display of “Gekiatsu” displayed after the start of the reach production corresponds to a kind of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display form A, but the notice display YH of “Super Hot” is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 197 (A 8-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6" is displayed in a large size, and then the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b1) to FIG. 8 (A 8-2-10b11) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  The process is the same up to FIG. 197 (A 8-2-9), and FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10a). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b2), “Decoration 6” as a middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated. The notice icon YI in the closed state is still displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b3), a wipe effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Display. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b5), wipe-out starts and the display of the back gradually begins to appear. Here, the first decorative pattern ("Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6"-"Decoration 7") that is fluctuating is beginning to be visible. In the following FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS starts to be seen. When the player starts to see the notice icon YI here, the notice display YH is further released from the notice icon YI after the completion of the wipeout (after the end of the wipe effect), as shown in FIG. 190 (E10). The advance notice icon YI itself is expected. Note that the notice icon YI may remain off at the wipeout stage and may not be displayed again. Note that the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI displayed in stock during execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed during the wipe effect is displayed. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Further, the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI used once or more, but the same applies to the notice icon YI that is not used (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 180 (A11)). Yes (the same applies below).

  In FIG. 197 (a 8-2-10b7), the wipe-out is performed and the background returns to the normal background, but the change icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). In the first decorative design, the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” fluctuates and fluctuates. Further, a closed notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Although the advancement of the notice icon YI itself has not occurred, for example, it may be promoted from the “box” type to the “red box” type.

  In FIG. 197 (a 8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed again to the form d which is an open display form, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is the No. shown in FIG. 5 is a notice display of “Iron plate”. The notice display of “iron plate” is a display for notifying that the jackpot has been confirmed in the symbol change display to be prefetched, that is, the symbol change display currently being performed. Here, a notice display of “change” may be released here, and the change icon YI may be promoted by one stage, leading to a revival effect described later. Alternatively, even a change icon of a default display mode may release a notice display of “red change” and lead to a revival effect described later. Furthermore, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display form A, but the “iron plate” notice display YH is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b10), the restoration effect is started. In FIG. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 7” is displayed in a shaking manner. Thereafter, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

  Note that the notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Moreover, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit effect or the gaming state after the big hit, or such carry over may be prohibited. As described above, the above also applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 180 (11)).

  FIGS. 197 (1-2-1) to (1-2-6) are diagrams showing other examples in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  In FIG. 197 (A 1-2-1), as in FIG. 196 (A 1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. In addition, the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  Thereafter, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 196 (A 2) to FIG. 9 (A 7) and FIG. 196 (A 8-2-1) to FIG. (A 1-2-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b1). Thereafter, a wipe effect is started through the same state as that shown in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b2) (FIG. 197 (A 1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b3) to FIG. 197 (A 8-2-10b6).

  In FIG. 197 (A 1-2-4), the wipe effect is finished and the background is returned to the normal background, but the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). In the first decorative design, the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” fluctuates and fluctuates. Further, a closed notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Note that the notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the wipe-out stage, and may be redisplayed when the next change is started, or may be redisplayed during the big hit game. Note that the notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. In the first place, during the big hit game, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed.

  In FIG. 197 (A 1-2-5), the notice icon YI changes to the form d which is an open display form, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of “red change”. The notice display of “red change” here is No. shown in FIG. Unlike the notice display of “red change” shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 197 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the change icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same display mode (in the fifth display mode) as the display mode of the notice display of “red change”. It changes to a certain red display mode). In other words, it has been promoted four levels here. In this example, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed without performing the revival effect.

  According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further pre-reading notice instead of the current design fluctuation display which was the pre-reading object symbol changing display. If the symbol variation display behind the current symbol variation display has a higher expectation level for the jackpot as a result of the look-ahead (for example, it may be a variation with a long variation time. May be as in this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) above the variation icon (see FIG. 197 (1-2-6)) of the third display mode (“blue” display mode) that is lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the fluctuation icon that is lost, or it may be more than the display mode of the fluctuation icon that is lost. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). In addition, when the variation icon of the loss variation is the third display mode or more, it may be like this example, and when it is the third display mode or less, it may be like this example. Further, this example may be used regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the prefetching notice is not limited to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, but other prefetching notices may be given (for example, a chance eye, a prefetch background change (red stage change), etc.).

  Note that the “red change” notice display is released here, but the “change” notice display may be emitted. In addition, a notice display for releasing the change to the display mode (for example, green one level higher than blue in this example) above the display mode of the change icon h0 (for example, one level or a plurality of levels) is released. Also good.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked in stages.

  In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. These hold icons h11 and 12 are both the default display modes. A change icon h0 having a default display mode is also displayed. Note that nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 198 (A 1-3-2) showing the state of the symbol variation display in a state where the hold is digested and the special drawing is no longer held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. Yes. In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-3), the first notice icon YI stocked first is used, and the first notice icon YI changes to a form d which is a display form in which a box is opened. , “Red change” notice YH is emitted from the box. In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-4), the notice icon YI is returned to the form a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 is It has changed to the third display mode (display mode of “blue”).

  Subsequently, in FIG. 198 (A 1-3-5), the second notice icon YI stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is displayed in the form d which is a display form in which the box is opened. Changed, the “Leach” notice display YH is released from the box. In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears and the “Leach” notice display YH is displayed. In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-7), “Leach” is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, reach production is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (A1-3-8), display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach production, the remaining notice icon YI changes again to the open display mode, and the second notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 198 (A 1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of the default color “chance”. In FIG. 198 (A1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears and the “chance” notice display YH is displayed.

  In FIG. 198 (A 1-3-11), the normal reach effect is finished, and “decoration 5”, not “decoration 6”, fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates and is then confirmed and displayed.

  In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in order of stock, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the order of stock. Further, the number of use of the notice icon YI was twice for the notice icon YI stocked earlier, whereas the notice icon YI stocked after that was only once. As described above, the number of times of use may be different depending on the notice icon YI, but may be the same. When the number of times of use of the notice icon YI is the same, the number of use may be the same during a period from when one notice icon is stocked until all of the plurality of notice icons are used. For example, if the previously stocked notice icon is used twice, the later stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously stocked notice icon is used three times, it will be stocked later. The notice icon is also used three times. Thus, you may match | combine with the use frequency of another icon. Further, the number of times of use may be determined in advance. In this case, no matter how many are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the notice icon YI stocked first may be configured so that the notice icon YI is used more frequently than the notice icon YI stocked later, and conversely, the notice icon YI may be configured to be less. .

  Further, the maximum number of times of use may be determined in advance or may be changed. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change depending on the gaming state (normal state, electric support state (short time state), probability change state)), and the maximum number of times of use increases in a certain look-ahead zone state. Also good. Further, in a certain game state (for example, a normal state, but may be in an electric support state (short-time state) or in a certain change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 198 (A 1-4-1) to FIG. 198 (A 1-4-11) are diagrams showing another example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked in stages.

  FIG. 198 (A 1-4-1) to FIG. (A 1-4-4) are in the same state as FIG. (A 1-3-1) to FIG. In FIG. 198 (A1-4-5), the first notice icon YI previously stocked is continuously used. As a result, the “reach” notice YH is released. In FIG. 198 (A1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used continuously disappears, and the “Leach” notice display YH is displayed. ), The “Leach” notice display YH disappears, and the reach effect is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect has been started. The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the notice color YH of the default color “chance” is released (FIG. 198 (A 1-4-9)). In FIG. 198 (A1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI disappears and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

  In FIG. 198 (A 1-4-11), the normal reach effect is finished, and the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates and is then fixedly displayed.

  As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in order of stock. That is, it may be configured such that when the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, use of the next stocked notice icon YI is started.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state in which the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI is known before the release.

  199 (a1) to 199 (aa3) are in the same state as FIGS. 196 (a1-1) to 196 (a3). In FIG. 199 (aa4), the effect icon display area DIS On the right base icon bIr, the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” here is a notice for notifying that the notice icon YI is acquired, but in the same way as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 6 "change" notice icon YI is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of “Bancho” is displayed as No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 that the “change” notice icon YI has been acquired, and the player simply looks at the display (just reads the character), and the notice display YH released from the notice icon is “change”. Recognize that this is a notice.

  In FIG. 199 (Ia5), the “change” notice icon YI moves to the stock area SS, and in FIG. 199 (Ia6), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 199 (a7), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display that becomes the prefetch target variation is displayed in the same diagram (a8). Has been started.

  When the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading subject variation is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described with reference to FIG. 180 is started. The detailed description will be left to the above description. Briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a9), the Tono-like conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono does not overlap with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a10), the conversation announcement image CI2 in which the conversation advance notice is updated and the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Is displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (Ia10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the frog conversation image CI2 is displayed at a position shifted from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the two do not overlap.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 199 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing of FIG. 199 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 199 (Ia13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-described operation valid period, the habit conversation image CI2 notifies the start of reach production from the operation promotion notification image. "Leach is!" The notice text display such as “Leach is!” May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. May also be displayed.

  In addition, the changing icon change animation is started in a state where the habit conversation image CI <b> 2 changed to the character display “Leach is!” Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 199 (Ia14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on is added to the notice icon YI of “change”. In FIG. 199 (Ia15), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. The change icon h0 that the light ball collides has changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking).

  The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 199 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH. In FIG. 199 (a16), the notice display YH of “change” is shown in FIG. 177 (b). It changes to the aspect b shown in. In other words, the mode is changed to indicate that it has been used. In addition, during the mode b, since it is a notice display YH, it cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 199 (Ia17), the notice display YH of the mode b has changed to the notice icon YI, which can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia18), the conversation image CI1 of Tono and the conversation image CI2 of the bag are deleted, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

  In FIG. 199 (a19), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Display of the normal reach effect is started on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a20). During the normal reach production, the change icon change animation is started, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI (FIG. 199 (Ia21)), and in FIG. The ball flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. The change icon h0 hit by the ball of light has now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

  The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 199 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH. In FIG. 199 (a23), the notice display YH of “change” is shown in FIG. 177 (b). However, in the same figure (Ia24), it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used again. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia24) displays a super reach development effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia25) continues to display the VS swordsman reach. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia26), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Even when the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed, and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 199 (Ia27), a change icon change animation is started in the middle of the duel scene animation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI. In FIG. 199 (Ia28), the stock area A ball of light flies from the SS toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a production example and the like continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 199 (Ia29) continuing from FIG. 199 (Ia28), in the changing icon change animation, the changing icon h0 hit by the ball of light is changed to the fourth display mode (green display mode). . In addition, the “change” notice display YH is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 200 (a30), it returns to the notice icon YI and is usable.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (Ia31), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is displayed large together with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated. Is still displayed in stock.

  Then, here again, the wipe effect is started (FIG. 200 (Ia32)), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH displayed in stock disappears. In FIG. 200 (Ia34), wiping out begins and the back display gradually begins to appear. Here, the first decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6") that are fluctuating are beginning to appear. In the following FIG. 200 (Ia35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS starts to be seen.

  In FIG. 200 (Ia36), the wipe-out is performed and the background returns to the normal background, but the change icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). In the first decorative design, the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 200 (a37), the notice icon YI disappears. Note that the notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may disappear at the wipe-out stage and may not be displayed again, or disappears at the end of the wipe effect. There may be a case where it does not disappear until the super reach production ends, or there may be a case where it does not disappear until the confirmation is displayed. Note that the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI displayed in stock during execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed during the wipe effect is displayed. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (Ia38), the first decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”.

  Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

  The process is the same up to FIG. 199 (a6), and thereafter, before the symbol variation display is finished, No. No. 21 “button” notice icon YI, After the 17 “reach” notice icons YI are continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 199 (b1), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 199 (Ib2), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH is released from the notice icon simply by looking at the display or reading the characters are changed to the next change (the pattern that becomes the pre-read target change). It is carried over to the fluctuation display.

  In the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading subject variation, the same conversation notice as the conversation notice that has been described so far, such as FIG. 199 (a9) to FIG. 199 (aa17), is started (FIG. 200 (b3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice is minimized, and the explanation of the stock notice icon YI is explained. In FIG. 200 (b4), among the three notice icons YI of “change” notice icon YI, “button” notice icon YI, and “reach” notice icon YI, “button” notice icon YI and , An effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on is added to each of the notice icons YI of “Leach”. In FIG. 200 (Ib5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each, and the notice button YH of the “button” in the mode b is displayed and the notice display YH of the “reach” in the mode b is also displayed. Here, in the stock area SS, the circles of the modes b of each other partially overlap, but may be displayed so as not to overlap. Also, the earlier stocked order may be overlapped later, and conversely, the later order may be overlapped earlier. In FIG. 200 (Ib5), since the “button” notice display is used, the button effect is executed in the conversation notice. That is, an operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 200 (b6), both the “button” notice display YH and the “reach” notice display YH have returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

  Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period (FIG. 200 (b7). Then, the reach indication is started from the use of the “reach” notice display from the operation promotion notification image. It changes to the character display of “Reach is!”

  When the conversation notice ends, in FIG. 200 (Ib10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of “reach”. The effect image EF11 may be added to the “Leach” notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop is performed. May be added before the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state occurs). In FIG. 200 (Ib11), the effect image EF11 disappears and the “reach” notice display YH of the mode b is displayed. In FIG. 200 (Ib12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

  When the reach state is reached, a change icon change animation is started, and an effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI as shown in FIG. 200 (b13). In FIG. 200 (Ib14), the light ball flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. In FIG. 200 (Ib15), the change icon h0 hit by the light ball is the second icon. The display mode (display mode of blinking white) is changed. In addition, the “change” notice display YH is changed to the mode b again. However, in FIG. 200 (a16), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (Ib17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach production, the change icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the “change” notice icon YI (FIG. 199 (b18)).

  FIG. 201 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  In FIG. 201 (Ib19) following FIG. 200 (Ib18), the light ball flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. In FIG. 200 (Ib20), the change that the light ball hits. The icon h0 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Further, the “change” notice display YH is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 201 (b b21), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (Ib21), a super reach development effect is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (Ib22), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (Ib23), an animation of a duel scene between the hero Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Even when the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed, and the three notice icons YI are still displayed in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 201 (Ib24), the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI in the middle of the duel animation, and in the following FIG. 201 (Ib25), the first decorative symbol display The device 208L displays an operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (Ib25), the operation valid period is not started, and no display corresponding to this is performed even if the button is operated. Further, the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again, but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 201 (Ib26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (I b27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing of FIG. 201 (Ib28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for determining whether or not the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama shown in FIG. 118 (32) appears. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama does not appear and the duel scene The animation stays in progress (FIG. 201 (b29) to FIG. 201 (bb31). Note that the change icon change animation starts in response to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. The display mode of the variation icon may change.

  In FIG. 201 (Ib32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the “button” notice icon YI. In FIG. 201 (Ib33), the chance button 136 is imitated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (Ib34) is in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started. It is shown. Further, the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again (FIG. 201 (b b33)), but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used.

  The timing shown in FIG. 201 (Ib35) is within the above-described operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (Ib36), “decoration 5” as the middle symbol is displayed in a large size together with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated. ing. Thereafter, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a wipe effect performed after FIG. 200 (Ia32) is performed, and after the notice icon YI is erased as shown in FIG. "-Decoration 5"-"decoration 6" combination of the decorative patterns of losing is confirmed and displayed.

  Note that the display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 201 (Ib36) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed in some cases.

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect for notice icon stock in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 202 (c1) is a state in which no special figure is held, and the decorative display of the decorative symbol is not performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (c), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is provided with a roulette RLT for a notice icon stock. This roulette RLT is divided into a left area and a right area. In the left area, the name (icon name) of one of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b) stops. . On the other hand, the cross mark, question mark, or surprise mark stops in the right area. In addition, for both the left and right areas, multiple area colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) are available and used in combination with icon names and marks (symbols). Is done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 202 (C1), the icon name “change” is displayed on the green area in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. The icon YI cannot be acquired. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

  After that, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92, and in the first decorative design display device 208L shown in FIG. However, in the second decorative symbol at the upper left, the variable display is started. Further, in the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the animation of increasing the variation icon is started, and the variation icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG.

  When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is started also in the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock (Fig. 202 (c4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but the start of the roulette display may be simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of the symbol variation display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variation display of the left area of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of “reach” is displayed on the green background (FIG. 202 (c. 5)). On the other hand, the change display of the right area is continued. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 202 (C 7-1), the change display of the right region is also stopped, and a question mark is displayed on a green background. This combination can acquire a notice icon of “reach?”, And a notice icon YI of “reach?” Is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. The “reach?” Notice icon YI is an icon of a weak notice that a reach effect may be performed, and the reach effect is often not performed as compared to the case where the “reach” notice icon YI is used. .

  Note that the roulette RLT display may be turned off when the “Leach?” Notice icon YI is acquired, but in this example, the display continues. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the design variation display in a state where the variation display of the left region and the right region is stopped. However, the display of the roulette RLT displays the variation display of the left region and / or the right region. The symbol variation display may be straddled in the performed state. In addition, the RLT display (the state in which the left region and / or the right region change display is performed or the state in which the left region and / or the right region change display is stopped) is not displayed during the stop display of the symbol. It may be configured as follows.

  In FIG. 202 (c) 9-1, the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In the symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of “REACH?” Is not used, and the reach effect is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combinations of the decorative patterns of the decorations “decoration 4”-“decoration 1” fluctuate and fluctuate. In FIG. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, the notice icon YI of “REACH?” Disappears when the confirmation display is performed. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next change or may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

  The number of times the roulette fluctuates is once per symbol variation display here, but may vary a plurality of times. In addition, there may be a difference in the number of roulette changes in one symbol variation display between the symbol variation display of the pre-reading target variation and the symbol variation display before that. However, the number of roulette fluctuations may be increased, or vice versa, compared to the previous symbol fluctuation display. For example, in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target variation, the roulette display may be performed once as the prefetching advance notice, and in the symbol variation display of the prefetch target variation, the roulette display may be performed three times as the normal announcement. However, these numbers may not be fixed and may be zero.

  Further, the notice icon YI may be stocked by an effect different from the roulette display described here (for example, mini-game such as Janken confrontation), and the notice icon YI is displayed while the roulette display is being performed. It is not necessary to produce a mini game or the like that can be acquired. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which roulette display is performed or performed, it is not necessary to perform effects such as a mini game that can acquire the notice icon YI.

  Next, reach reach production will be described.

  The process is the same up to FIG. 202 (c. 8). In FIG. 202 (c. 9-2-1), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on is displayed for the notice icon YI of “Reach?”. It has been added. In the following FIG. 202 (U 9-2-2), reach reach production is started, and turn variation is performed in the first decorative symbol. That is, here, the left design and the right design in the first decorative design are switched to low-speed fluctuation, the left design rotates upward, the right design rotates downward, and the effect of temporarily stopping at the vertical center position is executed. 202 (U 9-2-3) However, as shown in Fig. 202 (U 9-2-4), the temporary stop is not performed, and the reach production effect ends in failure. Although it disappears when the reach production effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of “reach?” During the reach production effect, as shown in FIG. The “REACH?” Notice icon YI is shown with a circle indicating that it has been used, but the circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI can be reused. First decoration in 9-2-5a) In the pattern, all the three decorative patterns are fluctuated at a low speed. However, although the combination is confirmed and displayed (FIG. 202 (9-2-6a)), the notice icon YI of “REACH?” Is not displayed before the decoration symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In this example, an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI. May be. For example, the notice icon YI itself may increase or the notice icon YI itself may change color. During use, the original mode may be restored or the mode may be changed.

  Next, other examples of reach production will be described.

  FIG. 202 (U 9-2-4b) is the same state as FIG. 202 (U 9-2-4a), and is a state after failing to reach the reach. In this example, all three decorative symbols do not change at low speed as they are, but conversely switch to high speed fluctuation (FIG. 202 (c. 9-2-5b), shown in the notice icon YI of “Reach?”). 202 (U 9-2-6 b) where the circle has disappeared, the effect image EF 11 is added again to the notice icon YI of “Reach?” In the following FIG. 202 (U 9-2-7 b), In the first decorative symbol, the swaying movement starts again, and here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol each start moving toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, without passing through the middle symbol. In front of the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed (Fig. 202 (U9-2-9b)), and then a temporary stop is performed, and a reach state is established (Fig. 202 (U9-9)). 2-10b)), final In the meantime, the reach production has been successful, as shown in Fig. 202 (c) 9-2-2 to (c) 9-2-4a or (c) 9-2-4b. The reach production in the same figure (U 9-2-5b) to the same figure (U 9-2-9b) or the later figure (U 9-2-9b ') is a series of reach production. There may be.

  Next, an example will be described in which the reach variation effect is failed despite the start of the variation variation.

  As shown in the previous FIG. 202 (C 9-2-8b), the left symbol and the right symbol each start moving toward the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol have passed the middle symbol, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol as shown in (Fig. 203 (U 9-2-9b)) is not performed. No temporary stop is performed, and all three decorative symbols fluctuate at low speed (FIG. 202 (c. 9-2-9b′2)). In FIG. The combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7”-“decoration 8” fluctuates, and the combination is confirmed and displayed.

  The effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of “reach?” Every time a new change in turn is started, but the reach image effect is included as a series of effects. May be added to the notice icon YI of “reach?” Only once.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock, and an effect example with button operation.

  FIG. 203 (c. 9-2-4c) is an example continued from FIG. 202 (c. 9-2-3), and shows a successful example of reach production. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned at the center in the vertical direction, and the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed before the temporary stop (FIG. 203 (c. 9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. The reach state is established (FIG. 203 (c. 9-2-5c)).

  FIG. 203 (U 7-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 202 (C 6-2). In FIG. 203 (C 7-2-1), the right region of the roulette RLT has a red background. A surprise mark is displayed. This results in a combination of the icon name “reach” on a green background and a surprise mark on a red background. With this combination, it is possible to obtain the “reach” notice icon YI having higher reliability than the “reach?” Notice icon YI. Further, the combination of the icon name “reach” on the red background and the question mark on the green background may allow only the “reach?” Notice icon YI to be acquired, or the “reach” notice icon YI. May be obtained. In addition, the icon name of “Leach” on the red background and the surprise mark on the red background, and the “Leach” notice icon YI, are more surprised on the green background and the icon name of “Reach”. The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, if the icon name “Leach” is displayed on a red background and a question mark is displayed on a green background, and the “Leach” notice icon YI is acquired, the icon name “Leach” is displayed on a green background and the question is displayed on a red background. The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color on which the icon name is displayed is related to the reliability of the jackpot than the background color on which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if the icon name of “Reach” is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background and the “Leach” notice icon YI is acquired, the icon name of “Reach” on the green background and the icon background on the green background are surprised. The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the icon name of “reach” is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background and the notice icon YI of “reach” is acquired, the icon name of “reach” is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background. When the “Leach” notice icon YI is displayed and the symbol reach display using the “Leach” notice icon is likely to be a big hit, it is the same. However, the background color on which the icon name is displayed and the background color on which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship to the jackpot reliability. Alternatively, the background color on which the mark (symbol) is displayed may relate to the jackpot reliability more than the background color on which the icon name is displayed.

  In addition, the color name in the above description can be represented by a display mode. That is, “red” is the fifth display mode, and “green” is the fourth display mode (the same applies to the following description).

  FIG. 203 (c. 7-3-1) is also an example continued from FIG. 202 (c. 5-3). In FIG. 203 (c. 7-3-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has a red background. The icon name of “reach” is displayed, and a surprise mark is displayed on a red background in the right area. With this combination, the “reach” notice icon YI may be acquired for the first time. That is, if the background color is neither the red area nor the red area, the “reach” notice icon YI cannot be obtained. It becomes the notice icon YI. Also, in this case, the red background may stop more easily when the red background stops first than when the green background stops first, or the probability is the same. It may be.

  FIG. 203 (C 7-4-1) is another example continued from FIG. 202 (C 5-5). In FIG. 203 (C 7-4-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has A box icon shown in 177 (a) is displayed, and the number of stocks is displayed in the right area. In this example, one “box” icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) can be obtained. The stock number is 0-3. Further, either “box” or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if a cross mark and a rainbow, a box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be obtained, and if “box” and red, a “red box” notice icon YI can be obtained. it can.

  FIG. 203 (U 7-5-1) is another example continued from FIG. 202 (U 5-5). In FIG. 203 (C 7-5-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has a gold (Sixth display mode) The icon name of “reach” is displayed on the background, and a surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. In this combination, as shown in FIG. 203 (c. 7-5-2), a gold “reach” notice icon YI can be obtained. The golden “reach” notice icon is more reliable than the regular “reach” notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

  In addition, even if both the left area and the right area are gold backgrounds in this way, only the same notice icon as the notice icon that can be obtained when both the left area and the right area are red backgrounds can be obtained. The gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background with respect to the change in the look-ahead target.

  Also, a contradiction may occur between the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI. For example, although the display of the roulette RLT is “reach” and “?”, The notice icon YI is the notice icon of “reach”, and the display of the roulette RLT is “reach” and “!” The notice icon YI may be a notice icon of “SP” representing super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green display icon although the background is a gold background in the display of the roulette RLT. Such a contradiction may make it easier for the big hit symbol to be finally displayed in a final display than in the case where a contradiction does not occur. Further, when the roulette RLT is displayed and the background is a gold background, the notice icon YI may be a green display icon, etc., and the jackpot may be confirmed.

  Further, the roulette may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at “reach” and “x”, the right region may be changed again to finally form a combination of “reach” and “!”. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at “reach” and “?”, The combination of “SP” and “?” May be finally obtained by changing the left region again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the “box” icon and “× 1” shown in FIG. 177 (a), the “red box” icon and “ It may be a combination of “× 2”. Further, even when only one of the left region and the right region is changing and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be changed again.

  Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, the icon name is “reach”, but the same applies to the names of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark or only the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the surprise mark or only the surprise mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. Also good. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 or No. 23 or No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the jackpot confirmation such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. In other words, only a combination of “patrum” and “cross mark” or a combination of “patrum” and “surprise mark” may be displayed. In addition, the icon names of the notice icons that lead to relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, “Red Chance” of No. 3, “Gekiatsu” of No. 4, and “Iron Plate” of No. 5) Name) may be combined with “surprise mark” alone. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the jackpot determination may be rainbow (seventh display mode) for both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

  In addition, the mark (symbol) may be notified in advance by the background color of the icon name of the notification icon that leads to the jackpot determination (for example, the icon name “No. 5“ Iron plate ”). For example, if the background color of the “iron plate” that stopped first is green, it will be a notice that the cross mark may be stopped, and if it is rainbow color, the stop of the surprise mark is confirmed. Also good.

  Further, the icon name (left area in this example) may be stopped first, or the mark (right area in this example) may be stopped first. If the mark stops first when it is not known which stops first, the cross mark may not be stopped.

  Further, when a notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.

  Next, an example of production accompanied with button operations will be described.

  In FIG. 203 (aa1), there is no special drawing hold, and the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is performed. Only one “box” notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. . In FIG. 203 (d), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the notice icon YI that has been stocked. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. Note that the timing of FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation effective period. It may be displayed simultaneously with the start of.

  The operation effective period is started at the timing of FIG. 203 (a3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (aa4) is a display mode when a little time elapses after the operation effective period starts. It is shown in

  The timing shown in FIG. 203 (a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 203 (a6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in FIG. 203 (a7), The effect icon EF13 disappears, and the notice icon YI which is the form a which is the display form in which the box is closed is changed to the form d which is the display form in which the box is opened. An animation that pops out (box opening animation) is displayed.

  Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has elapsed.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 203 (D8), the notice icon YI changes from the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not deleted. In FIG. 203 (a9), the notice display YH of “red change” released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the variable icon, which has been the default display form (first display form) so far, is blue. The display mode (third display mode) is changed.

  In FIG. 203 (a10), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stock notice icon YI, and thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 203 (a12) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-described operation valid period, in FIG. 203 (a13), the notice icon YI changes to the state d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “Leach” is displayed from the inside. Has been released. In FIG. 203 (d), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed state a.

  In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image is not displayed, and a so-called back button effect may be performed.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the “button” notice icon YI changes according to the button operation, and other examples.

  In FIG. 204 (Eb1), the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is executed, and an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in FIG. 204 (D b1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 21 “button” notice icons YI are stocked. In FIG. 204 (Eb2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”. In FIG. 204 (Eb3), a larger area is displayed in the central area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, and then the button image 136a is slightly reduced, and a remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 204 (b4)). Further, in this example, the characters “continuous hit” requesting continuous operation of the chance button 136 and a confrontation meter MTV indicating the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and the swordsman are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). At the start of display of the confrontation meter MTV, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (D b4), the operation valid period has not started, and no display corresponding to this is performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 204 (b5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204 (Eb6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation meter MTV confronts the position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. Meter MTV may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 204 (b7) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (Eb8), the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI, and the display mode of the notice icon YI changes. However, here, the effect image EF11 does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used.

  Since the repeated hitting operation is requested, the player operates the chance button 136 even at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (b9). Then, also in FIG. 204 (Eb10), the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI, and the display mode of the notice icon YI changes. The effect image EF11 immediately disappears (FIG. 204 (Eb11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (Eb12). Then, also in FIG. 204 (Eb13), the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI, and the display mode of the notice icon YI changes. If the interval between the button operations of the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and disappeared from the notice icon YI at a high speed, and the effect image EF11 seems to be constantly lit.

  The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period starts, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases as time passes. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit so as not to lose the increase speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter wins over the increase of the red meter, and the blue meter increases. When everything becomes a blue meter as shown in FIG. 204 (Eb13), a Yoshimune cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 204 (Eb13). On the other hand, when everything becomes a red meter, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI may be the time when the blue meter is increased by one scale on the confrontation meter MTV, not every time the chance button 136 is operated once.

  Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

  204 (Oa1) is the same state as that shown in FIG. 180 (A9-1), and the villager character icon of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the panda character icon of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 204 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started when the villager character of the variation icon h0 wins. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of “1” of “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. At this stage, the display of the number of stocks (here, “stock × 1”) is started between the second decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second reserved number display. That is, the display of the number of stocks is started before the notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, and it is not clear how many notice icons could be acquired by just looking at the appearance area AS. Can know the acquired number by displaying the stock number before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 204 (Oa3), a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 204 (Oa3), a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 204 (Oa4) showing the state of the symbol variation display in a state where the hold is exhausted and the special drawing is no longer held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the number of stocks Is also displayed as “stock × 1”.

  In FIG. 204 (Oa5), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 204 (Oa6), the notice icon YI changes to a state d in which the box is opened, and the notice change YH of “change” is released from the box. Since the notice icon YI is used in this manner, the display of the number of stocks temporarily changes to “stock × 0” (FIG. 204 (Oa6)), and then the display of the number of stocks itself disappears (FIG. 204). (Oa7)). Then, it continues to FIG. 181 (a33). When the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the number of stocks does not change. In this case, “stock × 1” continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, if it is used once, the display of the number of stocks may be temporarily set to “stock × 0” and immediately returned to “stock × 1”. . In addition, when the number of stocks of the notice icon becomes 0, “stock × 0” may not be displayed and the display of the stock number itself may be deleted as shown in FIG.

  Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS, that is, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side are provided.

  FIG. 204 (Ob1) is also the same state as shown in FIG. 180 (A-9-1), and the villager character icon of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the panda character icon of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 204 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. Thereafter, one “box” notice icon YI is stocked one by one in the first stock area SSR on the right side and in the second stock area SSL on the left side (FIG. 204 (a3)). An animation in which the notice icon YI of “box” is split may be displayed, but may be displayed instantaneously in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of acquired notice icons YI is only one.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 204 (Ob4) showing the state of the symbol variation display in a state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, the left side first stock area SSL and the right side second stock area SSR are also displayed. In addition, one “box” notice icon YI is stocked one by one.

  In FIG. 204 (Ob5), a reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. Also, an effect that tells which notice icon YI is used (which box is opened) or an effect that gives notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used simultaneously. That is, as shown in FIG. 204 (Ob6), both notice icons YI are simultaneously changed to the state d in which the box is opened, and the notice notice YH of “change” is released from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (Oa7), the two notice icons YI disappear simultaneously.

  FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that continues from FIG. 204 and an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  In FIG. 205 (Ob8) following FIG.204 (Ob7), the “change” notice display YH released to the left and right respectively changes to a light ball YHb. Accordingly, one light ball YHb is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 205 (Ob9), both the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb fly toward the change icon h0, and the change icon h0 is united to change the display mode of the change icon h0. A changing animation is displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 205 (Ob10) changes from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is a two-step change because it is based on two notice icons YI. Note that it may be changed only for one step. Then, it continues to FIG. 181 (a37).

  Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is sequentially performed from a predetermined position of the stock area SS. For example, the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position are stocked in this order. However, contrary to this order, it may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position. In such an irregular case, In comparison, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher, or on the contrary. Normally, the stock is stored in both the first stock region SSR on the right side and the second stock region SSL on the left side, but irregularly, only one stock region (for example, the left second stock region SSL) ) May only be stocked. Even in such an irregular case, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than that in a normal case, or may be lower. Furthermore, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock region SSR on the right side is more normal and is preferred, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher when stocked in the second stock region SSL on the left side. Or, conversely, it may be lowered.

  Further, even if the acquired notice icon YI is a “white” notice icon, when the white notice icon YI is displayed in the respective areas SSL and SSR, both of the two notice icons YI are displayed. The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed. In the latter case, there may be an expectation for the notice display YH released from the obtained notice icon YI. For example, when the two white notice icons YI are displayed, No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 is released, but when a white notice icon YI and a red notice icon YI are displayed, No. 6 shown in FIG. 7 red “red change” notice may be emitted.

  FIGS. 205 (c1) to (d) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  A background screen that has been omitted so far is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (Oc1), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (U1-2-1). Like, the sea background screen is displayed. In FIG. 205 (Oc1), the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed in FIG. As with the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH shown in a4), No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 that the “change” notice icon YI has been acquired.

  In FIG. 205 (Oc2), the “change” notice icon YI moves to the stock area SS, and in FIG. 205 (Oc3), it is displayed in the stock area SS. In this example, the band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the acquired notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display regarding the acquired notice icon YI is performed at two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol, the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to the second non-illustrated here) 4 on the back side of the display of the 4 hold icon h14).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 205 (Oc4), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed, in Fig. 205 (Oc5), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is displayed. Has been started. When the symbol variation display, which is the prefetch target variation, is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 205 (Oc6-1), the changing icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 205 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. In FIG. 205 (Oc7), the stocked “change” notice icon YI is displayed. Disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 205 (Oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. As shown in FIG. 205 (Oc9), the change icon h0 that has collided with the ball of light has changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). On the other hand, no effect is performed on the band icon OBI, and no change occurs in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI displayed on the band icon OBI. However, some animation such as a change icon change animation is also executed in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may also occur in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI.

  The notice icon YI in the stock area SS disappears quickly with use, but the band icon OBI is displayed at least until the change icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 205 (c10). Furthermore, it disappears after the change of the fluctuation icon h0.

  The example shown in FIG. 205 (Oc6-2-1) and thereafter is an example in which the “change” notice icon YI is reused. In FIG. 205 (Oc6-1), the previous notice icon YI in FIG. 205 (Oc6-1) is changed to the “change” notice display of the mode b shown in FIG. 177 (b). Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (Oc6-2-2), it has returned to the notice icon YI and is usable. In Fig. 205 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and the display of the normal reach effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in Fig. 205 (Oc6-2-3). When the normal reach production is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach production, and accordingly, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the acquired notice icon YI disappears. On the other hand, even during normal reach production, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 205 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect is finished, and the sea background screen is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The OBI display is also back. Thus, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. Thereafter, during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in other words, before the confirmation display shown in FIG. 205 (Oc6-2-7) to (Oc6-2-8) is performed, the display of the band icon OBI disappears. . Also, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS disappears. In this example, it can be seen that there is no subsequent hold and the display related to the notice icon YI (the display of the band icon OBI, the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. However, before the confirmation display, the display related to the notice icon YI (the display of the band icon OBI and the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice The display related to the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the confirmation display.

  FIG. 205 (v) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS, the display using the band icon OBI is also performed. In other words, one band icon OBI is displayed for each notice icon YI.

  In the examples so far, the band icon OBI has been displayed as a background display. However, in the example shown in FIG. 206 (Oe), the display area of the first decorative symbol is narrowed by the band icon OBI. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the band icon OBI.

  In the example shown in FIG. 206 (of), three notice icons YI that are the maximum stock number are stocked and three band icons OBI are displayed, so that the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 The first decorative symbol is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock, which is narrowed to about / 4. However, the first decorative design may be prioritized so that the first decorative design overlaps the notice icon YI. The second hold number display is not overlapped with the band icon OBI. In addition, both the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon are narrowed, but the second decorative symbol, the second hold number display, and the stock are stored. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. In addition, as an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the change icon h0, the hold icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice (the Tono-sama conversation) Images CI1, Ｃ conversation image CI2, mini game, icon change notice, timer notice effect, meter display (white meter MW described above, meter display MD described later, etc.), etc. can be listed. As the display narrowed by the display, all of the above-listed ones may be applied, but some of the above-listed ones may not be applied, and the display that is not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. As an example, the second decorative symbol display, the second reserved number display, the stock notice icon YI, the volume adjustment bar Display VB, display of the mode name set to ON by effect customization (for example, the above-mentioned upper right frame RW and the mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (explained using FIGS. 172 to 174) Display related to various errors and warnings), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI, FIG. 132 (e1) “Current Ditomo mode level (here, level 1) and experience Display of value (EXP) (0 in this case), display of simultaneous effects, etc. That is, the display that is not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI can be all of the above-listed displays. On the other hand, some of the above listed may not apply.

  FIG. 206 is a diagram illustrating an effect example or the like by a configuration in which display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has focused on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the same applies to the vertical arrangement. That is, the hardware configuration is simply different, and the technique described in this specification cannot be applied. From the technical point of view, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontal, it is vertical. Even if it exists, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means disposed below will be described as the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 206 (aa1) shows the fourth display means 208M 'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (K a1) is in a state at the initial position. The fourth display means 208M ′ is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M ′ at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M ′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position (overlapping from the front side in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It is possible to move from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M ′ in FIG. 206 (K a2 ′). That is, the fourth display unit 208M 'is also a movable unit that can be moved up and down. Further, in addition to the lifting / lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modification of the fourth display unit 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  On the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a a1), a holding frame UI ′ having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI displayed so far in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Has been. The hold frame UI 'also has a hold icon display area HIS &', a change icon display area CIS ', and an effect icon display area DIS'. A pedestal hs0 'is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS'. The hold icon display area HIS 'is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1 'to fourth stage hs4') are arranged on the left base icon bIl '. The effect icon display area DIS 'is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr 'is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

  Further, in the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a a1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 ′ and the second stage hs2 ′. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in these special drawings 1 are both No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “2” and “0”) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS '. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Furthermore, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. This background screen is a sea background screen. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display unit 208M ′ is white, but this white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Then, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. The state shown in FIG. 206 (a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (a1).

  In FIG. 206 (a2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (a a2), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”. The fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a a2) is the first display mode which has been the default display mode so far, either in accordance with the increase in the special figure hold or regardless of the special figure hold increase. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are shown in No. 179 of FIG. It changes into the icon of the aspect a of the kind of villager described in 17. A third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3 '. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. The state shown in FIG. 206 (a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (a3-1).

  In the right base icon bIr ′ of the effect icon display area DIS ′ in the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a a3), as the opponent icon TI, the type a (a) of the type of pant shown in FIG. The standby mode icon is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner, an appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the No. shown in FIG. No. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 206 (a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (a6).

  In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a a4), a mini-game B Janken confrontation is performed, and the villager character with the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the panda character with the opponent icon TI and appears. Stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. In other words, the “box” notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is out of the appearance area AS and once displayed. The state shown in FIG. 206 (A4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (A10).

  The fourth display means 208M ′ is also provided with a stock area SS for stocking the notice icon YI. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a5), the stock area SS is notified. Icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 206 (a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (a11).

  FIG. 206 (a6) shows a state in which symbol variation is being displayed in a state in which the suspension of digestion has progressed and the suspension of the special figure has ceased. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display that is a prefetch target variation. Note that neither the panda character of the opponent icon TI nor the appearance area AS has disappeared. The variation icon h0 is a default display mode. The state shown in FIG. 206 (A6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (A24).

  In FIG. 206 (a7), the notice icon YI of the state a with the box closed is used, and the state is changed to the form d with the box opened, and the “REACH” notice display YH is released from the box. In the figure (a8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the "reach" notice display YH is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain display period after the appearance, and in FIG. 206 (a 9), the notice display YH of “Leach” is turned off. After this, a reach effect may be performed or it may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the “reach” notice display YH may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

  Subsequently, a modification will be described. The process is the same up to FIG. 206 (ca4). In FIG. 206 (ca5 '), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display means 208M ′ moves from the fourth display means 208M ′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, there is a period during which the notice icon YI is displayed across the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the animation does not straddle the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and jumps (moves instantaneously) from the fourth display means 208M ′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also good.

  The fourth display unit 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (a2 ′) has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the center area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Yes. The fourth display means 208M ′ may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, may move simultaneously with the start of the mini game, may move during the mini game, You may move after the mini game ends only if you win the game. Moreover, before the result of a mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of a mini game. In this case, it is easier for the person who has moved to win the mini-game than to not move, or it may be more difficult to win. Note that the fourth display unit M ′ may be configured to be stationary at the operation position across one or more symbol variation displays during execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini-game is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, the initial position (or the initial position (or after the symbol variation display ends) after the mini-game result in the symbol variation display is obtained. The fourth display means M ′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position. Further, the fourth display means M 'is configured not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to stand still at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M ′ may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, the fourth display means M ′ may be configured to display at least a part of the period in which the symbol variation display is fixedly displayed, or the entire period even when the fourth display means M ′ is moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. In FIG. 3, the stationary state is maintained. Note that the movement may be continued or stopped in a temporary stop state in the pseudo-continuous effect or a state of fluctuation fluctuation before the confirmation display. Also, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the decorative display is displayed on the fourth display means M ′. Further, the fourth display means M ′ may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or the predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing at which the symbol variation display is determined and displayed.

  FIG. 206 (b1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M 'is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, a holding frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (Cb1), an icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is displayed. In addition, a background image is displayed on the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. In the subsequent fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (Cb2), the name (here “change”) of the stocked notice icon YM is displayed as a band icon OBI ′. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI 'and may be a full screen.

  In the example shown in FIG. 206 (b3 ′), a band icon OBI ″ is displayed from the fourth display means 208M ′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI ″ includes a stock notice. The name of the icon YM (here “change”) is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI ″ is displayed across the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the example shown in FIG. 206 (b3 '), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 205 (e) and (f). The way is applicable. That is, a portion of the band icon OBI ″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, also when the 4th display means 208M 'moves and the area | region which overlaps with the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L expands, the 1st decoration symbol of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L is displayed. The display area may be similarly reduced in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M ′.

  The fourth display means 208M ′ described above can be replaced with the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or other display means (for example, , A light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I described later, and the like).

  Next, an example of the effect using other effect means will be described.

  The state shown in FIG. 206 (C1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A7), and in the following FIG. 199 (C2), the mini-game dedicated accessory is placed on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 has appeared. The mini-game B Janken confrontation is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by this mini-game dedicated object 225. In the mini game-dedicated character 225, the left side is a villager character with the fluctuation icon h0, and the right side is a panda character with the opponent icon TI. The directing action of the mini-game dedicated character 225 may be started after the Janken showdown animation is started, may be started simultaneously with the start of the Janken showdown animation, or started before the Janken showdown animation is started. It may be. When the mini game is won, an effect of enlivening the victory may be performed by the mini game dedicated accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M ′ and FIG. 115). It may be performed by a movable effect by a thousand carton box accessory 224H or the like, or may be performed by a light emission effect by a light emitting means.

  Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) are also related to the mini game. Production may be performed.

  FIGS. 206 (d1) to (d5) are diagrams showing examples of effects using the POV display 224I.

  In this example, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body described with reference to FIG. 116 is provided in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer and can be moved in the vertical direction, and can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The state shown in FIGS. 206 (d1) to (d3) is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 180 (7) to 180 (9-1). In FIG. 206 (d4), FIG. 180 (A 9-1) is the same state as that shown in FIG. 9, that is, the state where the mini-game B janken confrontation is performed and the villager character with the variation icon h 0 has won the panda character with the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 206 (Kd4), the POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the POV display 224I includes the symbol of the notice icon YI acquired by winning the mini game and “GET”. Is displayed. Here, even if the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area The effect display may be performed. In addition, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is accelerating until the POV display 224I reaches the constant speed state or when the POV display 224I is decelerating until the POV display 224I returns to the stationary state from the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even when the vehicle is accelerating or decelerating. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only when the vehicle is accelerating or decelerating. Further, at the time of acceleration or deceleration, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display on the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Also good. Alternatively, effect display may be performed in the display area during acceleration, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

  In FIG. 206 (d5), the POV display 224I has returned to the initial position from the position on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible. .

  FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (a e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 207 (kae1) are in the initial positions of each other and in the open state (separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device The 208L display screen is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (a e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (a 3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 207 (a e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (a e). is there.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (Ke4) is a state in which the hold that has been the first hold so far has been consumed and the symbol variation display has been started. The first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 207 (a4) remains stopped. However, in the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, In the second hold number display that is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the change display is started, and the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

  In FIG. 207 (kae5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1 ′ is displayed separately on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 207 (Ke6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that have been in the initial position are starting to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap the both ends of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 207 (Ke7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is invisible. . When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N come into contact with each other, the effect image EF1 'that has been divided so far is displayed as one.

  In FIG. 207 (e8), the effect image EF1 ′ disappears, the villager character with the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The character is displayed. In addition, an appearance area AS is surrounded by a frame in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the No. 2 shown in FIG. No. 1 “box” notice icon YI is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a janken confrontation count display (here, “first time”) of the mini game B is displayed on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The number of times displayed here indicates the current number of times of confrontation, but may be a number of times (for example, “3 more times”) for notifying how many times the Janken confrontation will be performed thereafter. According to this example, the hold icon is not displayed.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (Ke9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A3-7), and the mini-game B Janken battle is started.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (Ke10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A 9-1), in which the villager character with the variation icon h0 has won the panda character with the opponent icon TI. .

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (a e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 180 (A10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display The notice icon YI is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the notice icon YI displayed in a large size overlaps a part of the villager character of the variation icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (F12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (Ke13) is that the villager character with the change icon h0 disappears and the panda character with the opponent icon TI disappears because the mini-game B janken showdown in the currently displayed symbol change display is completed. Is waiting for the Janken showdown at the next change and is running a wait animation. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible here, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N open, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L When the display screen becomes visible, the change icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the base hs0 in the change icon display area CIS ′.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (Ke14) is a state in which the symbol variation display is completed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the villager character of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As the character of the change icon h0, the character No. shown in FIG. No. 18 spear character, It is also a character of 19 Yoshimune. The second Janken showdown will be held.

  Note that neither the second decorative symbol display device 208M nor the third decorative symbol display device 208N is configured to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. In addition, even when both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position, at least of the period during which the symbol variation display is fixedly displayed. It is configured to maintain a stationary state during some period or all periods. Note that the movement may be continued or stopped in a temporary stop state in the pseudo-continuous effect or a state of fluctuation fluctuation before the confirmation display. Further, only when the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or only when the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. You may make it stop operation like this. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing at which the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (a15) is the No. shown in FIG. Although the “red box” notice icon YI of No. 2 is displayed, the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is defeated by the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second Janken confrontation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 207 (Ke15), “second time” is displayed as the number-of-times display of the mini-game B janken confrontation on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. .

  In FIG. 207 (Ke16), it is notified that the Janken confrontation has ended, straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 207 (Ke17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that have been closed so far begin to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 207 (Ke18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative patterns of “4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed.

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206, or other display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, which will be described later). It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I or the like.

  Further, in the description so far, the default color “change” notice display shown in FIG. 177 (b) is a notice display that raises the level of the display mode by one level, and the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed, it is foretold that it will change to the second display mode (display mode of white flashing), and it has actually changed to the second display mode (display mode of white flashing). Only when the display mode is the display mode (default display mode), it is possible to change the display to the third display mode (blue display mode) by displaying the notice in two steps. When the display mode is the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) or more, it is a notice display that is raised by one level, and only one level is actually changed.

  Note that a notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini game while a certain mini game is being executed. However, a notice different from the mini game may be given while the mini game is being executed. The notice icon may be configured not to be stocked.

  Note that there is a possibility that a mini-game may occur in advance (for example, a mini-game preparation display or a telop display described as “mini-game high accuracy”).

  It should be noted that the notice icon is likely to be acquired before the mini game is started or during the mini game, for example, other notices (for example, a telop display indicating “Highly predictive icon acquisition”). ). Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the notice icon is likely to be obtained more than the case where it is not notified that the notice icon is likely to be obtained by another notice.

  When the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination of “box”, “red box”, “gold box” is stocked or “gold box”. May be configured such that the jackpot is determined in the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons are digested. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon related to the pre-read notice, or may be used as an icon related to the normal notice.

  In addition, in the mini game which acquires a notice icon, the notice of the said change may be performed. For example, when the carpet shown in FIG. 186 (U13) is in a stationary state but an animation is displayed in which the carpet escapes from the arrow, the animation is displayed at that time. Corresponds to the advance notice (usual notice) regarding the jackpot in the variable display. Moreover, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a big hit confirmation notice.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (U13), when the animation that the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed and the super reach effect is performed by the change, the change is lost due to the change. The mini game A may end. In this case, the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) that was the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the hold icon of the default display mode, or the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) may remain as it is. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains, it becomes a holding icon corresponding to white blinking (second display mode level). Moreover, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the above-described super reach (for example, during a wipe effect). Further, it may be displayed as a default fluctuation icon h0 at the start of the next fluctuation. Furthermore, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the change icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escaped from the arrow, was displayed may disappear during the super reach (for example, during the wipe production), or the super It may disappear once during reach (for example, during a wipe effect) and redisplayed in the default display mode.

  In addition, it is a big hit in the symbol variation display that the notice icon is digested when the notice icon is stocked b (a <b) than the case where the a is stocked (a is an integer of 0 or more). You may be comprised so that it may be easy.

  FIG. 208 is a diagram showing step-by-step effects using the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 179 (b).

  In FIG. 208 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 208 (A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 “Red Bomber” icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen and icon change animation is started. In other words, the “red bomber” icon IHI displayed here corresponds to an icon change notice display. In the icon change animation, a bullet is fired at the hold icon while the “red bomber” icon IHI flies from right to left. Note that the “red bomber” icon IHI may pause before the target hold icon. In addition, this temporary stop may be a temporary stop of a gaze disguised as a target icon. It should be noted that the “red bomber” icon IHI performs an animation passing through the stock area SS described above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the “red bomber” icon IHI may be overlapped by the stock notice icon, and conversely, the notice stocked by the “red bomber” icon IHI. Icons may be overlapped.

  In FIG. 208 (A3-1), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the “red bomber” icon IHI includes a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 208 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 208 (A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 208 (A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as “Red Bomber”. The change is in progress, and the change is completed in FIG. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation from FIG. 208 (A2-1) to immediately before (A7). In this example, after the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen, the icon display change has been completed, but before the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen, The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed simultaneously with the disappearance of the “red bomber” icon IHI from the screen.

  The red bomber icon RBI may be configured to always fire the red bullet icon BTI, or may be configured to fire other color bullet icons BTI. In this case, the change mode of the icon may be determined depending on the color of the bomber, and the change mode of the icon may be determined depending on the color of the bullet. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the icon change mode may be determined by the color of the upper one (here, gold), or the lower one (here The change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of red.

  In FIG. 208 (A1 ′), the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is in a default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 208 (A2 '), the No. shown in FIG. 4 “bomber” icon IHI appears (displayed) at the right end of the screen, and icon change animation is started. Also in the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 208 (A5 ')). In this example, since the icon IHI of “bomber” is used as the icon change notice display, the display mode is raised by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 208 (A7), the first hold icon h11 that has been in the green display mode (fourth display mode) is changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode). In addition, in the icon change animation by the icon IHI of the “bomber”, if it is a hold icon in the default display mode (first display mode), white flash will be skipped and promoted to blue only for the first attack. However, since the second and subsequent attacks can only be raised one step at a time, a total of three attacks (default color → blue → Green → red) is required. The first attack may be configured to increase only one level (that is, default color → white blinking).

  FIG. 208 (A3-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In this icon change animation, the target is the fluctuation icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 208 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 208 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 is red. To the display mode (fifth display mode).

  In this example, the “red bomber” icon IHI is used. However, the icon change animation using the “bomber” icon IHI shown in FIG. 208 (A2 ′) also changes the icon h0. May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variation icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variation icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variation icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

  FIG. 208 (A4-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 208 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI fires the red bullet icon BTI and then the icon. Until the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 (here, the first hold icon h11) is paused, it pauses before the target hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (A4-2-4) to (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI moves toward the left end of the screen when the change of the icon display mode ends. Fly away.

  FIG. 208 (A2-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a white flashing display mode (second display mode). The display mode of white blinking may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the display is started. That is, in the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the first display mode, and the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the third display mode. It may be. If the icon change notice shown in FIG. 179 (b) is displayed in the state where the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed). When it appears, attention is focused on the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white).

  In FIG. 208 (A2-2-2), a bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 208 (A2-2-4), The first hold icon h11 has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  The icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) does not change, but other icons (in this case, the second hold icon h12 that is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The fluctuation icon h0) may change, or other icons may change together with the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). Moreover, even if the icon of a 2nd display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the display mode of an icon does not change (in the case of a gaze effect). Alternatively, on the contrary, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon display mode may be changed. In addition, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, the second hold icon if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon. It may be an icon.) May be in a state of being easily changed. Here, on the basis of the first hold icon h11 in the second display mode (blinking white display mode), only the adjacent icon (the second hold icon h12 or the fluctuation icon h0) may change, or the first Although it has been described that the icon next to the hold icon h11 may be changed, it is not a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be notified that the icon to which the main gun of the tank faces may change. Moreover, it replaced with the aspect of a tank and No. shown to FIG. No. 10 “timer” type display mode may be used. No. 8 “Button A” type display mode and No. 8 9 "button B" types may be displayed.

  FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 209 (A3-3-1) is a modification example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even when the icon “HIH” of “Red Bomber” appears. That is, in this example, an icon invariant animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the icon-invariant animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI just flies off the holding frame UI (FIG. 209 (A3-3-1) to FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all displayed hold icons has not changed. Also, the aspect of the fluctuation icon h0 has not changed. In the icon unchanged animation, the “red bomber” icon IHI may be hidden on the way.

  As shown in this example, even when the red bomber icon RBI passes through, all the hold icons (the default display mode hold) are compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. (Including icons) may be a look-ahead notice with high reliability of jackpot. Similarly, the change icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot. Or, if there is a hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice such as a flashing white display mode among the displayed icons, the hold icon is compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. If the display mode of the fluctuation icon is the display mode of the normal warning, the fluctuation icon is compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. Or a normal notice with high reliability of jackpot.

  FIG. 209 (A3-4-1) is also a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and here, the icon invariant animation is executed. In this icon unchanged animation, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, and h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon as shown in FIG. 209 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). However, it disappears outside the screen or overlaps with the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, but it may fall off as it is. Further, although the fired bullet icon BTI overlaps with an icon different from the target icon, it may fly off the screen without the effect image EF14 being generated. Further, if the fired bullet icon BTI is a trajectory that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, the hold icon is not displayed (dotted line in FIG. 209 (A3-4-3)). (See), and there may be a case where the object does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon and fly off the screen through a trajectory. . In this FIG. 209 (A3-4-4), the mode of all displayed hold icons has not changed.

  In FIG. 209 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI has jumped off the screen earlier than the bullet icon BTI, but the reverse may be the same. It may be.

  In addition, examples shown in FIG. 209 (A3-3-1) to FIG. (A3-3-3) and examples shown in FIG. 209 (A3-4-1) to FIG. In this example, the icon IHI of the “red bomber” is used, but the icon invariant animation using the icon IHI of the “bomber” shown in FIG. 208 (A2 ′) may be executed. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. In some cases, an icon change animation and an icon invariant animation using the “Gold Bomber” icon of 6 are executed.

  In addition, the bullet icon BTI is fired with the change icon h0 as a target, but an icon invariant animation that does not hit the change icon h0 and does not hit any of the held icons h11 and h12 may be executed.

  In addition, even if the icon change notice display such as the “bomber” icon IHI is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed still. After that, it may disappear. Furthermore, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the “red bomber” icon IHI or the icon invariant animation is not performed by the “red bomber” icon IHI, the “red bomber” The icon displayed at the start of the symbol variation display where the “Red Bomber” icon IHI is displayed is more likely to change to the “red” display mode than when the “IHI” icon is not displayed. The “red bomber” icon IHI may not be displayed, and the “red” display mode may be easily changed.

  In addition, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold of the target for which the hold change is to be made (the hold of the first hold icon h11 in this example) is not the target of the hold change (this In the example, the hold may be easier to hit than the hold of the second hold icon h12. In addition, even if the hold icon has the same display mode (for example, the hold icon of the white flashing display mode (second display mode)), the hold that has failed to change from white flashing to blue and remains flashing white The icon may be a look-ahead notice with higher reliability of the jackpot than the blinking white blinking icon that has not been subject to pending change. Similarly, the change icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot.

  FIG. 209 (A3-5-1) is also a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon invariant animation, and finally the icon change that the bullet icon BTI hits. It is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 209 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon-invariant animation scene (FIG. 209 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the bullet icon BTI returns to the first scene. The hit icon h11 is hit (in FIG. 209 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Thereafter, this is the same as FIG. 208 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as the icon-invariant animation is reproduced halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also matches the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon-invariant animation halfway, but completely different trajectories. You may come back and hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI will disappear from the screen. After the, after the may come back to hit the target icon. Fig. 209 (A3-5-4), subsequent to FIG. 208 (A7).

  FIG. 209 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, a button image is added to the display of the icon change notice and becomes a combined effect with the button effect.

  First, a red bomber icon RBI appears and icon change animation or icon change animation is started. Thereafter, the red bomber icon RBI pauses in front of the target hold icon (FIG. 209 (A3-6-1)). Then, a button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 209 (A3-6-2)). Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is not added, but may be added. In addition, the operation validity period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

  The timing of FIG. 209 (A3-6-3) is within the above-mentioned operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 209 (A3-6-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI may be fired on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. . The bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the bullet icon BTI is fired regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated. However, when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to when the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon need not be hit. When the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

  FIG. 209 (A3-7-1) is also a modification example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1). Here, the first hold icon h11 is a button image. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 8 is a “button A” icon. The icon of “button A” is an icon for notifying that an icon change notice will be made by button operation. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-2), a button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI as in FIG. 209 (A3-6-2). Note that the remaining time display meter MT is not added here, but may be added.

  The timing shown in FIG. 209 (A3-7-3) is within the above-described operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 209 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11 that is the icon of “button A” (FIG. 209 (A3-7-5)). In FIG. 209 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that was the icon of “button A” has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 209 (A3′-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2 ′). That is, the first hold icon h11 is a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 209 (A3′-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI. The plurality of bullet icons BTI may be fired simultaneously or may be fired one by one in order. Here, two white bullet icons BTI are fired simultaneously. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one hold icon may be attacked by one bullet icon BTI, or one hold icon may be attacked by a plurality of bullet icons BTI. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are target icons. A bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12 is displayed in front, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the back side. This relationship may be reversed. Further, a plurality of bullet icons BTI may not be overlapped.

  In FIG. 209 (A3′-2-3), bullet icons BTI and BTI are hit one by one on the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, and the first hold icon h11 is also the second hold icon h12. Are also covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which has been the green display mode (fourth display mode), changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode ( The second hold icon h12 that was the first display mode) has changed to a blue display mode (third display mode).

  FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the effect example depicted in FIG. 208.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 210 (A3-2-1) to (A3-2-4) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 209 (A3′-2-1) to 209 (A3′-2-4). It is a modified example of. Here, the “Red Bomber” icon IHI appears. The first hold icon is a white blinking display mode (second display mode). In FIG. 210 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI is firing two red bullet icons BTI. Of the two bullet icons BTI fired, one hits the first hold icon h11, and the other does not hit any icon (FIG. 210 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the prefetch notice is made is hit, and the hold icon for which the prefetch notice is not made (the second hold icon h12) is not hit. In FIG. 210 (A3-2-3), only the first hold icon h11 that has been hit is covered by the effect image EF14. In the following FIG. 210 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears, and Only the 1 hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  Note that the bullet icon BTI may hit a hold icon for which no pre-reading notice has been made. In addition, the bullet icon BTI may hit only the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is not performed. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is not performed. Or, conversely, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is performed.

  Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the hold icon (the hold icon in the first display mode) that has not been pre-readed in advance, and the pre-read notice in the white flashing display mode (the second display mode) is performed. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the hold icon, the hold icon that has not been prefetched has a higher expectation of jackpot than the hold icon that has been prefetched so far. It changes to the hold icon. In this way, for icons having different display modes, which icon changes to a red display mode, whether all icons change to a red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI Various patterns such as whether one icon does not change while being fired can be considered, and it may function effectively as a stuttering effect.

  Note that the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is performed may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is likely to hit, that is, the holding change is easier than the holding icon for which the pre-reading notice is not performed. Further, the variation icon may be configured such that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit than the hold icon, that is, it is more likely to change the hold.

  Furthermore, the firing of a plurality of bullet icons BTI can also be applied to the “gold bomber” icon shown in FIG. 179 (b).

  FIG. 210 (A3-8-1) is also a modification example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses just above the fluctuation icon h0. Then, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI while being paused, and the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 210 (A3-8-2)). Even when started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused just above the variation icon h0, ie, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. When the next change starts, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0 as shown in FIG. 210 (A3-8-4). In this way, when the symbol variation display is straddled, the icon change may always succeed, or even when the symbol variation display is straddled, there may be a failure. The figure When straddling the variable display, the hold icon may change and the change icon may not change, or conversely, the change icon may change and the hold icon may not change. Good.

  210 (A3-9-1) to FIG. 210 (A3-9-5) are modified examples of FIGS. 209 (A3-8-1) to 209 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of the “red bomber” flies away without performing the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI, even if the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

  It should be noted that in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, an effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is sure to be performed regardless of whether or not it hits (whether or not the icon changes). May be.

  FIG. 210 (A3-10-1) is also a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1). In this example, the prefetch target change hold is the second hold indicated by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 210 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI paused immediately above the change icon h0 in front of the hold icon fires the red bullet icon BTI with the second hold icon h12 as a target, but does not hit (see FIG. 210 (A3-10-2)), and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 210 (A3-10-3)). Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is temporarily stopped immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 210 (A3-10-4)) A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the first hold icon h11 that is put on hold, but it is not hit again (FIG. 210 (A3-10-5)), and the symbol variation display is terminated (FIG. 210 ( A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the pre-reading target variation is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. That is, the symbol change display started here is the change to be read-ahead, and the red bomber icon RBI flips over to make the change icon h0 the target icon, and before the change icon h0. Returning to the position, the bullet icon BTI is fired with the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 210 (A3-10-8)), and then flew away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 210 (A3-10-10)). Although illustration is omitted, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

  Note that FIG. 210 (A3-10-9 ′) is a modified example continued from FIG. 210 (A3-10-8). As a result, all three times have failed. In this example, the icon change animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon change animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. May be. Further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times for the same icon or may be performed a plurality of times for different icons.

  FIG. 210 (A2-3-1) is an example continued from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 210 (A2-3-1), there are three types of bombers icons IHI, such as “Bomber”, “Red Bomber”, and “Gold Bomber”. Note that the types of icon change notices that appear may be different as shown in this example, or may be the same. Also, systems such as bombers may or may not be aligned (for example, “red balloon”, “gold bomber”, “red flying boat”).

  In this way, when the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers appear, the icon change effect may be performed on all the machines, but as shown in FIG. 210 (A2-3-2), one bomber Only the icon (here, the “red bomber” icon) IHI may perform the icon change effect, or even if the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers that are a part perform the icon change effect Good.

  In FIG. 210 (A2-3-3), the change icon which has been the default display mode has changed to a red display mode, and the icon change effect has been successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, the plurality of icons may be changed, or only one icon may be changed.

  In addition, the icon of “bomber” or the No. shown in FIG. In the case of 7 “flying boat” icons, two icons can be changed by one machine.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the effect example depicted in FIG. 208.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-2), the hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is a No. 1 icon shown in FIG. This is an icon of 12 “roulette” display modes. This "roulette" display mode icon is displayed by switching the display mode of N choices selected from 2 to 5 choices (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopped at roulette The hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three options of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched in the order of “blue → green → red → blue →”. That is, in the second hold icon h12 in the “roulette” display mode shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-3), an icon in the “blue” display mode is displayed, and in the same diagram (A1-2-4). In the second hold icon h12 in the “roulette” display mode shown, an icon in the “green” display mode is displayed, and the second hold icon in the “roulette” display mode shown in FIG. In the icon h12, an icon having a “red” display mode is displayed. In the subsequent drawings, this is indicated by an arrow mark indicating the fluctuation. In FIG. 211 (A1-2-7), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol in the upper left also displays a combination of lost decorative symbols (“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon having a display form of “roulette”. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed, and an icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the first hold icon h11 as a target.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 208 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the icon of “red” display mode is visible in the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 208 (A1-2-11) following FIG. 208 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the “red” display mode. Also, the “Red Bomber” icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. If the icon change animation is not performed by the “red bomber” icon IHI, or if the icon change animation is not performed by the “red bomber” icon IHI, that is, the “red bomber” is Even when the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to change to the “red” display mode more easily than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the ease of change of the “red” display mode may be the same as when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed.

  The example shown in FIGS. 211 (A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) is an example in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 152 is executed.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-3-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-2) displays the first decorative symbol in the central area. Fluctuation display has started. In the following FIG. 211 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed as a letter that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change, and this corresponds to an example of a display of an icon change notice. In this telop display trp, a character display such as “pending change is highly likely” continues to flow from the right to the left of the screen.

  After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed with an icon IHI of “red bomber”, and an icon change animation is displayed. Has been started. That is, as the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the first hold icon h11 as a target. When the icon for displaying the icon change notice (in this case, the icon IHI of “red bomber”) is displayed in a state where the telop display trp such as “highly on hold change is being displayed” is displayed, The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than the state where the telop display trp such as “medium” is not displayed.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the “red” display mode.

  Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-1), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration” in the central region). 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and the second decorative symbol in the upper left also displays a combination of lost decorative symbols (“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-2), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped. However, in the second decorative symbol in the upper left, variable display is started. In the second hold number display in the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the change icon display area CIS, and the hold icon and the change icon are not visible.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display region HIS and the variation icon display region CIS. That is, a hut sil appears over the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of the hut sil is displayed by silhouette display. In FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), the fluctuation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the color of an icon or the like is displayed in a color representing a shadow, not a usual color. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of jackpot. It may be a notice that suggests.

  After the silhouette notice starts, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-4), an icon IHI of “red bomber” appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an icon change animation starts. The That is, in the state where the silhouette notice is being performed, the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sil as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-4). Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes through the cabin sill and fires a red bullet icon BTI while passing. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the cabin and is displayed by silhouette display.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-7), a state in which a bullet icon BTI is likely to hit is displayed on the first hold icon h11 by a silhouette display. Further, in FIG. 211 (A1-4-8), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 is displayed by silhouette display. In FIG. 211 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to “red”. It should be noted that it may be displayed in a silhouette display so that it does not know which display mode has changed until the silhouette notice ends.

  FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed and other examples of effects.

  In FIG. 212 (A1-4-10), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols in the center area (“decoration 6”-“decoration”). 4 "-" decoration 1 ") is stopped and the second decorative symbol at the upper left also displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

  FIG. 212 (A1-4-11) is in a stop display (determined display is in progress), the fluctuation icon h0 is disappeared, and FIG. 212 (A1-4-12) is also in a stop display (determined display is in progress). In the same figure (A1-4-13), the hold that was the first hold until now, that is, the hold of the first hold icon changed to the “red” display mode is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. . In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the center area remains stopped, but the second decorative symbol in the upper left starts variable display, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of Special Figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “1”. In addition, in the hut sil, it can be seen that the moving animation of the hold icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first hold icon changed to the “red” display mode is displayed at the position of the change icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-14), after the first decorative symbol variable display is started in the central area, and the first decorative symbol variable display is started, The silhouette notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-15) displays a change icon h0 changed to a red display mode.

  In addition, the silhouette notice effect itself may be promoted by the effect of the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI. For example, the hut sil may be promoted to become a house, and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sil may be changed to red, and the display mode of the hold icon may be easily changed to a red display mode. . Then, after the silhouette notice ends (after the hut sil disappears) or simultaneously with the end, the display mode of the hold icon may change.

  FIG. 212 (B1-1) to FIG. 212 (B8) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted after the icon change notice display is displayed.

  In FIG. 212 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 212 (B2), the default color “bomber” icon IHI, which is an icon change notice display, appears (displayed) at the right end of the screen, and icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the “bomber” icon IHI pauses on the change icon h0 as shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1), and as shown in FIG. The icon “HIB” of the “bomber” is displayed with a flashing light indicating the change, and then the icon “HIB” of the “red bomber” is promoted. In addition, in the case of being promoted in the same bomber system (“bomber” icon IHI is promoted to “gold bomber” icon IHI, or “red bomber” icon IHI is “gold” Or if the icon changes to a different system (the “bomber” icon IHI is promoted to the “flying boat” icon IHI, or the “bomber” icon) Or if the IHI is promoted to the “Red Flying Boat” icon IHI).

  In FIG. 212 (B6), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 212 (B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 212 (B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is changed to the “red” display mode.

  FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 212 (B3-2-5) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by a button effect.

  FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 212 (B2), and the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1). is there. In FIG. 212 (B3-2-2), a button image 136a is added on the “bomber” icon IHI which is an icon change notice display. Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is not added, but may be added. In addition, the operation validity period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the above-described operation valid period, in FIG. 209 (B3-2-4), after the flash display indicating the change is made on the “bomber” icon IHI, “red” It has been promoted to the icon “HIB” of the “bomber” (FIG. 209 (B3-2-5)). . After that, it continues to FIG. 212 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change. The promotion of the “bomber” icon IHI is executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be executed when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. Further, the button image 136a is added on the “bomber” icon IHI, but the button image 136a may not be added, and the button image 136a may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

  FIG. 212 (B3-3-1) to FIG. 212 (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 212 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, and the box is changed to a state d in which the box is opened. 20 “UP” notice display YH is released, and in FIG. (B3-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears and “UP” notice display YH is displayed. The notice display YH of “UP” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 212 (B3-3-4), the light ball YHb is temporarily stopped on the change icon h0. It flies toward the icon IHI of the “bomber” and hits the icon IHI of the “bomber”. Then, in FIG. 212 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI of “bomber” is promoted to the icon IHI of “red bomber”. FIG. 209 (B3-3-6) is followed by FIG. 212 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted on the way over a plurality of variations.

  FIG. 213 (B3-4-1) is an example continued from FIG. 212 (B2). In this example, the hold of the prefetch target change is indicated by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-1). Represents a second hold.

  The state shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1), and the icon IHI of the default color “bomber” that is an icon change notice display is a change icon. Pauses just above h0. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B4), and the flashing display of the change is made on the icon IHI of “bomber”. In this example, in FIG. 213 (B3-4-3) where the promotion failed and the flashing display disappeared, the “bomber” icon IHI remains. Eventually, in FIG. 211 (B3-4-3), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “Decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped, and the second decorative symbol in the upper left is also displayed in combination with a combination of the decorative symbols of “losing” (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”). Yes.

  Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the “bomber” icon IHI remains suspended immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 213 (B3-4-5)). In the following FIG. 213 (B3-4-6), a flashing light indicating change is again displayed on the “bomber” icon IHI, and this time the promotion is successful, and the flashing light disappears (B3-4-7). ) Is promoted to “Red Bomber” icon IHI. The red bomber icon RBI that was successfully promoted fires the red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but does not hit here as shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-8). In FIG. 213 (B3-4-9), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 6” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

  This time, the hold that was the pre-reading target change is digested, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 213 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol change display started here is the change to be read-ahead, and the red bomber icon RBI flips over to make the change icon h0 the target icon, and before the change icon h0. Returning to the position, the red bullet icon BTI is fired with the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 213 (B3-4-11)). Then, although continuing to FIG. 208 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variation icon may not change.

  In this example, the promotion was successful for the second time, but the presentation may end without the promotion being successful. Further, the icon IHI of the “red bomber” may be further changed to the icon IHI of the “gold bomber”. In this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after the promotion, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before the promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 213 (B3-4-3).

  FIG. 213 (B1-2-1) to FIG. 213 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 213 (B1-2-1) shows that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. Yes. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-2-2), a timer notice effect is started, and a timer notice display TYH is displayed on the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-2), the remaining time (in this case, 5 seconds) until the reference time for starting the promotion effect is displayed. In 3), a countdown is started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-4), a default color “bomber” icon IHI, which is an icon change notice display, is displayed, directly above the change icon h0. And then pauses (FIG. 213 (B1-2-5)) and enters a standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (becomes 0 seconds), and in the subsequent figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is a character of “attention”. It has switched to. The promotion effect is started at the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (becomes 0 seconds). There may be a case where the promotion effect is started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-2-8), the “Imperial” character is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, and the “bomber” icon IHI that has been in a standby state so far is displayed with a flashing flashing change. Is displayed. Eventually, the flashing display disappeared, and in FIG. 213 (B1-2-9) where the flashing display disappeared, the icon was promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. It is easier to promote the icon change notice display via the timer notice effect than when not using the timer notice effect. In addition, when the timer notice effect is passed, the display itself of the icon change notice may be always promoted. In FIG. 213 (B1-2-10), the timer notice effect is finished, and the timer notice display TYH is not displayed. Note that the timer advance notice display TYH may be used to make a notice of the type in which the icon change notice display is promoted. For example, “red” may be displayed instead of “attention”.

  When the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (0 seconds), an icon change notice display (for example, the “bomber” icon IHI) may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that an icon change notice may be displayed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH may be used to notify the color of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if a white background, the “Bomber” icon IHI is predicted, if a red background, the “Red Bomber” icon IHI is predicted, and if a gold background, You may foresee the appearance of the icon “HIB” for “bombers”. However, such a notice need not be made.

  In addition, this example is an example in which the timer notice effect and the promotion effect are combined, but both are independent, and after the timer notice effect starts, the “bomber” icon IHI appears and the timer notice display TYH Even if there is no remaining time, the promotion effect is not started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the “bomber” icon IHI is irrelevant to the timer notice effect. In addition, the timing when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears and the timing when the “bomber” icon IHI is put on hold may coincide by chance.

  Next, an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. Yes. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS. Further, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 149 or the like is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The meter display MD shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-1) is in a state where up to 5 scales are already stored when 6 scales are full. When the meter display MD becomes full, the icon IHI of the “bomber”, which is an icon change notice display, is promoted. The meter display MD may be a display that is always displayed except for a specific state such as a super reach effect being executed, or a display that starts displaying when the display start condition is satisfied. It may be.

  Eventually, in FIG. 213 (B1-3-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"- “Decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped, and the second decorative symbol in the upper left is also displayed in combination with a combination of the decorative symbols of “losing” (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”). Yes.

  Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 213 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-4), the “red bomber” icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon IHI of the “red bomber” displayed here is the No. shown in FIG. 20 “up” notice display YH is mounted. In FIG. (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the “up” notice display YH is dropped. The “up” notice display YH is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD becomes full, and in the following figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display “promotion”. It has changed.

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted via a meter effect, and other effect examples.

  In FIG. 214 (B1-3-8) following FIG. 213 (B1-3-7), in response to the meter display MD being full, the icon IHI of the default color “bomber” is changed. In FIG. 214 (B1-3-9) in which a flashing flashing display is made and the flashing display is turned off, the icon is promoted to an icon IHI of “red bomber”. The display color of the icon change notice changed here matches the background color of the character display “promotion” in the meter display MD, and the icon change notice is displayed at the stage of FIG. 213 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is foretold. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 214 (B1-3-10) has returned to an empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may be changed (promoted) or may not be changed (promoted) (failure).

  FIG. 213 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 213 (B1-4-4) illustrate an example in which an icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

  A meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 213 (B1-4-1). This meter display MD is in a state in which it is already stored up to 5 scales when 6 scales are full. Further, in FIG. 213 (B1-4-1) during the symbol variation display, a notice display YH of “UP” is displayed. In the following FIG. 213 (B1-4-2), the notice display YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the following figure (B1-4-3), the meter display MD becomes full. The display MD changes to a display of “bombing” with a red background. Here, it is predicted that an icon of a bomber of background color will appear as an icon change notice display. If the display changes to the gold background “bombing”, the “golden bomber” icon may appear. If the display changes to the white background “bombing”, the “bombing” icon appears. It may be displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to give a notice of the icon change notice to appear. Even in this case, when the meter display MD becomes full, the “bomber” icon, the “red bomber” icon, Alternatively, the “gold bomber” icon may be displayed.

  In FIG. 214 (B1-4-4), the “red bomber” icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen.

  It should be noted that when the notice of icon change notice is displayed by the meter display MD, the icon change notice may or may not appear.

  214 (C1) to (C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 214 (C1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. During the stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 214 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. However, when the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, FIG. 214 (C3) shows. As shown, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (C4), and the No. shown in FIG. 179 (b) is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Thirteen red “Akayoshi Mune” icons IHI are displayed. This “Akayoshi Mune” icon corresponds to a display of an icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the “Red Bomber” icon and the like. The icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode) when the icon is successfully changed. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of the pre-reading notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the notice of the normal advance notice.

  In FIG. 214 (C5), the change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is started. That is, the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune”, which was the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 179 (b), has changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of the “Akayoshi Mune” standing in front is facing the change icon h0, holding the sword, and the sword oscillates. In FIG. 214 (C6), the wave is oscillated from the sword of “Akayoshi Mune”, but the display mode of the change icon h0 is the default, and in FIG. (C7), the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is It has returned to aspect a and the change animation is complete | finished. In other words, the change production here has failed. In FIG. 214 (C8), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is displayed on the right base icon bIr as in the form a.

  In FIG. 214 (C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is displayed on the right base icon bIr as in the form a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. In FIG. 214 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the fluctuation icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune”. In FIG. 214 (C11), the change icon h0, which was the default display mode until then, has changed to a red display mode, and a normal notice is started. In FIG. 214 (C12-1), the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” has changed from aspect b to aspect c, appealing that the change effect has been successful. When the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune”, which was the icon change notice display, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

  The icon IHI of the “Akayoshi Mune” described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono shown in FIG. 135, FIG. 142, etc., and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 135, FIG. 142, etc. And are mutually applicable.

  In addition, when the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed to a red display mode without failing. In particular, the display mode may be changed to a red display mode, or may eventually fail.

  FIG. 214 (C12-2) shows the state after the change icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display form, and finally the change effect has failed, and the icon IHI of “Akayoshi Mune” However, it changes from the aspect b to the aspect d, and it is alerting | reporting that the change production failed.

  Next, an example using an icon change notice display not shown in FIG. 179 (b) will be described.

  In FIG. 214 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 214 (D2), the “red thundercloud” icon starts to be displayed small on the hold icons h11 and h12. This “red thundercloud” icon corresponds to a display of an icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the “red bomber” icon and the like. As with the “Red Bomber” icon and the “Akayoshi Mune” icon, the “Red Thundercloud” icon changes to the same display mode as that of itself, that is, the red display mode ( The icon is changed to the fifth display mode.

  The “red thundercloud” icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation after the display is started. There may be cases where the lightning does not grow into a large thundercloud. In this case, it may be displayed as a gaze, or may always grow into a large thundercloud.

  The “red thundercloud” icon IHI shown in FIG. 214 (D3) grows from the top to cover the area from the fluctuation icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS, and the “red thundercloud” icon IHI Below, a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are also displayed.

  In FIG. 214 (D4), lightning has fallen from the “red thundercloud” icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 214 (D5), the first hold icon h11 in which lightning has dropped is an effect image. In the same figure (D6) where the effect image EF16 disappears and is covered by the EF16, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, the default display mode remains, and the change effect has failed. The “red thundercloud” icon IHI is directed to one or a plurality of icons of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon at the same time or sequentially, and when the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon of the lightning is changed. The display mode changes to red. In FIG. 214 (D6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the “red thunder cloud” icon IHI is displayed. Has been.

  In FIG. 214 (D7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is displayed, and the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the icon change notice display not shown in FIG. 179 (b) and other examples of effects.

  In FIG. 215 (D8) following FIG. 214 (D7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the special figure is no longer held, and the next change is in a state of waiting for a prize. However, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is still displayed.

  The symbol demo is started when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the state where the symbol variation display has not been started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed with the hold being 0. (FIG. 215 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. In addition, although the illustration of the background screen is omitted, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variation display of FIG. 214 (D7). However, the background screen of the symbol demo may be switched. Furthermore, when the symbol demo is started, display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. Note that the display start timing of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, may be simultaneously with the start of the symbol demo, or may be after the start of the symbol demo. Detailed description of these icons MI, VI, and BI has been made with reference to FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (D9), even during the symbol demonstration, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is still displayed.

  The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state in which the symbol change display has not been started since the fixed symbol stop symbol display has been performed with the hold being zero. Furthermore, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in this state, the design demo is switched to the anime demo. When the animation demo is started, the background screen changes and switches to the animation demo screen (FIG. 215 (D10)). When the screen is switched to the demonstration screen of this animation, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is hidden. On the other hand, in this example, even when the screen is switched to the animation demonstration screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI remain displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when the screen is switched to the animation demonstration screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be changed or may not be displayed.

  Note that, when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the screen may be switched to an animation demonstration screen. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demonstration screen, the “red thunder cloud” icon IHI may be hidden, or the second time may be displayed after switching.

  Eventually, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92, the special figure 1 holding is increased by one, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the screen is switched from the animation demonstration screen to the display screen shown in FIG. 215 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the “red thundercloud” that has grown greatly is displayed again. However, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI may not be displayed when the symbol demo or the animation demo is sandwiched.

  In FIG. 215 (D8), the symbol variation display started in FIG. 215 (D11) is stopped and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of the special figure 1 held becomes 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. ing. For this reason, the next variation is started immediately, and after the symbol variation display here, the suspension of the special diagram 1 starts to be accumulated, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this time, as shown in FIG. 215 (D13), the “red thundercloud” icon IHI continues to be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates and fluctuates. The “red thundercloud” icon IHI starts the erase animation when the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched. However, the number of times may be reset by sandwiching the symbol demo or the anime demo. The start timing of the erasure animation may be the same as the start of the next symbol variation display after the symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times, may be after the start, or the first stop is performed. It may be the timing. In the erase animation, the “red thundercloud” icon IHI gradually becomes smaller and eventually disappears (FIG. 215 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change effect by the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is completed without any success.

  In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on one of the icons for each change. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon changes. In addition, thundercloud icons include a default thundercloud icon and a gold thundercloud icon. However, the color of the clouds may be the same, and the type may be divided according to the color of lightning. That is, an icon with a red lightning may be changed to red when the change effect is successful. In this case, there is a case where the type of display of the icon change notice is not known until thunder falls, and the icon of the thundercloud can be noticed. In addition, only when the default color lightning falls, it may be configured not to know which display mode is changed. For example, even if the default color lightning falls on the default color icon, it may change to red. On the other hand, other colors (display mode) change to the same color (display mode) as the lightning color (display mode), and thus function as a notice of the changed display mode.

  FIG. 215 (Ea1) to FIG. 215 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of an effect in which the icon of the “timer” display mode and the icon change notice display are combined.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 10 “Timer” display mode icons. This “timer” display mode icon is an icon that changes to a display mode of the fourth display mode or higher when the timer reaches zero. However, there may be cases where the timer does not change even when the timer reaches 0, or the timer may always change when the timer reaches 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the “timer” display mode shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the countdown start. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. An icon of a special mode with the character “Timer” appears on the right end of the screen in the icon of “bomber” of 4 default colors. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as “timer-acting dedicated bomber” icon IHI. The icon IHI of “timer-operated dedicated bomber” corresponds to the display of an icon change notice. The “timer-operated dedicated bomber” icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or variable icon is displayed with the “timer” display mode icon, and is displayed with the “timer” display mode icon. Even if it is, it may not appear. However, when the “timer” display mode icon is displayed, it may appear. In FIG. 215 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “timer operation dedicated bomber” that has appeared is started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown and is displayed as in the aspect a.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is fired from the bomber icon TBI with the word “Timer” attached. The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the “timer” display mode. It should be noted that the icon TBI of the bomber with the word “Timer” is not targeted for anything other than the “timer” display mode icon, but may be targeted. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI hits, the display mode of “timer” may be changed.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of the “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 215 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the countdown start to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown starts only when the bullet icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is an animation from FIG. 215 (Ea2-1) to immediately before (Ea6). It can be seen that the bullet icon BTI corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In this case, the display is started by firing from the icon TBI of the bomber with the word “Timer”. Thereafter, the animation up to the point immediately before the change to the mode b is completed corresponds to the icon change animation.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” is a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, as shown in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In FIG. 215 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the “timer” display mode, has changed to a green display mode (fourth display mode). It should be noted that the timer may be activated even if the “timer” hold icon is not attacked by the “timer activation dedicated bomber” icon IHI. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation is started by the “timer activation dedicated bomber” icon IHI, or conversely, a look-ahead notice with a lower jackpot reliability. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same. In addition, the “Timer” hold icon may be started even if the timer is not attacked by the “Timer Activating Bomber” icon IHI, and conversely, the “Timer Activating Bomber” icon The timer may not start unless it is attacked by IHI.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-1), in the state where the “timer” display mode icon is displayed, not the “timer activation dedicated bomber” icon IHI but the general-purpose “red bomber” icon IHI has appeared. In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired from the “red bomber” icon IHI, and the fired bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” display mode. Hit. Then, the countdown is started with the first hold icon h11 of “timer”. In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” is a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time the timer becomes 0, the same figure (Ea2-2-4) As shown, the first hold icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the icon IHI of “red bomber”. . In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the “timer” display mode, has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which a certain type of hold icon and icon change notice display are combined.

  FIGS. 216 (Eb1) to (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example of combining the hold icon of the type of “bomb” not shown in FIG. 179 (a) and the icon change notice display.

  In FIG. 216 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of a “bomb” type not shown in FIG. 179 (a). This “bomb” type icon is an icon that changes its display when the bomb explodes. In this respect, it is similar to the “timer” icon, but the “timer” icon is counted down. Since the display mode of the icon changes when it reaches 0, the timing of the display mode change is easy to understand, whereas the “bomb” makes it difficult to know when it will explode. As a result, the timing of the display mode change However, they are different in that they are difficult to understand. The icon of the “bomb” type has a lead wire, and it is necessary to ignite this lead wire in order to fire the “bomb”.

  In FIG. 216 (Eb2), an icon IHI of “red bomber” which is an icon change notice display appears on the right end of the screen, and an icon change animation is started. In FIG. 216 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the first hold icon h11 of “bomb”. In FIG. 216 (Eb4), the first hold An ignition icon CYI is dropped at the sight of the bomb icon that is the icon h11. Note that the “red bomber” icon IHI may be an icon in which a flamethrower is fixedly deployed. In this case, the icons separated from the aircraft, such as the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI, Disappear. The first hold icon h11 of “bomb” may or may not ignite the lead wire well even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The lead wire of the bomb icon that is the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 216 (Eb5) is ignited, and in FIG. 216 (Eb6), the lead wire is burned and shortened. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 216 (Eb7-1), the first holding icon h11 of “bomb” exploded, and as shown in the same figure (Eb8), the first holding icon h11 of “red bomber” The display mode is changed to the same red display mode as the icon IHI.

  FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 216 (Eb6). In FIG. 216 (Eb6), although the lead wire is burned and shortened, FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) Then, the fire of the lead wire disappeared on the way. For this reason, the first hold icon h11 of “bomb” does not explode and the display mode does not change. The “bomb” icon, in which the fire of the lead wire has been extinguished, continues to be displayed as it is. The “bomb” mode in which the fire of the lead wire has disappeared in the middle corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of “white blinking”). In FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variation display is completed, and in FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-3), the “bomb” icon in the form in which the lead wire disappeared in the middle is displayed as the variation icon h0. Has been. In addition, even if it is a case where a conducting wire has disappeared in the middle, the conducting wire that has disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to a change after the next change. In FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-3) following FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed.

  Note that even if the “bomb” icon (hold icon or variable icon) is not attacked by the icon change notice display such as the “red bomber” icon IHI, the lead wire may be ignited naturally. Good. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when ignited by displaying an icon change notice, or on the contrary, a look-ahead notice with a lower jackpot reliability may be used. The reliability may be the same. In addition, the “bomb” icon may ignite spontaneously even if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, and conversely, unless it is attacked by the icon change notice display, the lead line will ignite. You don't have to.

  It should be noted that the icon (holding icon and / or variation icon) is changed to No. shown in FIG. 2-No. 19 icons, the “bomb” icon described above, a hold icon in the VS display mode, and a “pat lamp” icon to be described later may be notified in advance.

  216 (Ec1) to FIG. 216 (Ec8) are the same as those shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which combined the icon of 11 "target" and the display of the icon change notice of the kind which is not shown by FIG. 179 (b).

  In FIG. 216 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 11 is a display mode icon. In the icon of the “target” display mode, when an arrow is not inserted in the target icon, the mode a shown in FIG. 179 (a) is maintained, and the jackpot reliability in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon is maintained. The degree is about the level of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), but when an arrow is inserted into the target icon, it changes to mode b shown in FIG. The reliability of the big hit at is increased to the level of the sixth display mode (gold display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 216 (Ec2), an icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears on the upper right of the display screen. The icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying this parachute is a kind of icon change notice display, but it is a kind of icon change notice display not shown in FIG. 179 (b). In FIG. 179 (b), icon change animation has started, and Yoshimune in Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute is aiming for the target icon that is the first hold icon h11 with a bow and arrow. In Ec3), an arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon which is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 216 (Ec5-1), the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In the subsequent FIG. 216 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. 179 (a). In this example, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). In FIG. 216 (Ec7-1), Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 216 (Ec8)). .

  FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. (Ec4). In FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the subsequent figure (Ec5-2-2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is until now. After that, Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11 (FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-3)), and the icon eventually appears in the same way as when hit. The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, if one failure occurs within one symbol variation display, the challenge cannot be retaken and the process ends. However, the Yoshimune icon YMP carrying the parachute again appears in the next change, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. In addition, even if you fail once in the design variation table, you may be able to try again up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times including the re-challenge). It may be configured such that it can be re-challenged up to a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating another effect example using a bomber icon as a display of an icon change notice.

  FIG. 217 (Ed1) to FIG. 217 (Ed5) are examples in which the types of icons not shown in FIG. 179 (a) are combined with the display of the icon change notice of the type not shown in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 217 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 1 is an icon of a “pat lamp” type not shown in FIG. 179 (a). When the icon of the “patrol” is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the patrol icon is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow display mode), that is, the jackpot is determined. To the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 217 (Ed1), No. 1 shown in FIG. An icon of a special mode in which a patrol lamp is attached and a letter “pat” is added to the “bomber” icon of the default color of 4 appears on the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as an icon IHI of “Patrol Lamp Acting Bomber”. The icon IHI of “Patrol lamp activation dedicated bomber” corresponds to display of an icon change notice. The icon IHI for “Patrol lamp operation dedicated bomber” may appear when the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is displayed with the icon for the “Patrol” display mode, and is displayed with the icon for the “Patrol” display mode. Even if it is, it may not appear. However, it may be made to appear whenever the icon of the display mode of “Patrol” is displayed. In FIG. 217 (Ed1), an icon change animation using the icon “IHI” of the “Patrol Lamp Acting Bomber” that has appeared is started.

  In FIG. 217 (Ed2), the bullet icon BTI of the default color from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the patrol lamp is attached and the letter “pat” is attached is targeted at the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of “Patrol”. Has been fired. In FIG. 217 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first “patrol” first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 217 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the patrol lamp icon of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is informed that the first hold is a big hit confirmed hold. It should be noted that the icon IHI of “Patrol lamp actuating bomber” has jumped to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (Ea5).

  FIG. 217 (Fa1) to FIG. 217 (Fa5) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the appearance change notice of the icon change notice is performed using a movable accessory or the like.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) in the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). In addition, a change icon h0 having a default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-1), the fourth large board behavior arranged at the lower right among the large board actings arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 115 and the like. The accessory 224Gd starts to advance from the initial position toward the position where the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L coincides with the advancement of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion that overlaps with the fourth large board acting tool 224Gd. The operation of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd is an operation for notifying that an icon change notice display appears from the vicinity of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. The display is a notice as to what color icon change notice appears. That is, the appearance itself of the icon change notice display is notified in advance by the effect and the effect image EF17, and the appearance position is notified in advance by the effect object and the effect image EF17 notifies the appearance of the displayed display.

  Note that the icon display mode may be changed more easily when the accessory is operated than when the accessory is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Moreover, although it may be configured so that the icon display mode is likely to change depending on the number of actuated items, the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa3), the fourth large board acting 224Gd moves to the maximum advanced position, and in FIG. 217 (Fa4), the fourth large board acting 224Gd moves back to the initial position. I'm starting. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 217 (Fa2) to (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 also changes in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large board acting tool 224Gd. When the fourth large board act 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts to move back toward the initial position, the icon “HIB” of the “red bomber” as an icon change notice display begins to appear behind it. Thus, the “red bomber” icon IHI appears, and after FIG. 217 (Fa5), the same effect as that after FIG. 208 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon does not change. There may be.

  FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which an appearance change notice is displayed using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I that has been hidden in the initial position so far appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before rotating. It is a state.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I has an icon of “red bomber”. IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the “Red Bomber” icon IHI is foretold.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the “red bomber” icon IHI is still displayed. The icon IHI appears. When the “red bomber” icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-5)). Thus, the “red bomber” icon IHI appears, and after FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after FIG. 208 (A3-1) is executed. May not change.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) can be visually recognized. An effect display may be performed. In addition, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is accelerating until the POV display 224I reaches the constant speed state or when the POV display 224I is decelerating until the POV display 224I returns to the stationary state from the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even when the vehicle is accelerating or decelerating. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only when the vehicle is accelerating or decelerating. Further, at the time of acceleration or deceleration, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display on the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Also good. Alternatively, effect display may be performed in the display area during acceleration, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The remarks described here are also applicable to the following example of the POV display 224I.

  Also, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the “red bomber” icon IHI may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or the earlier the appearance timing of the icon. Alternatively, both may be at the same timing.

  Here, the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described, but the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display shown in FIG. 206). The appearance notice may be executed by means 208M ′, etc., or another notice may be executed.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing examples of various notices related to the icon change notice display.

  FIG. 218 (Fb1) to FIG. 218 (Fb9) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the success rate of the change of the icon display mode is notified using the accessory effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 218 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-1), and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The state shown in FIG. 218 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-2), the “red bomber” icon IHI appears, and the change effect of the icon display mode is started.

  In FIG. 218 (Fb3), the accessory effect is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The effect effect here is the third large board acting item arranged at the lower left among the large board acting items arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 115 and the like. 224Gc and the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd arranged in the lower right start to advance from the respective initial positions toward the position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This effect rendering is continued until immediately before the icon display mode changes, but the function is provided before the bullet icon BTI is fired. In this effect production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is predicted according to how many large board behaviors are operated among the four large board behaviors 224Ga to 224Gd. That is, if all four are operating, it will be successful with 100% probability, if three are operating, it will be successful with 75% probability, if only two are operating, it will be successful with 50% probability, and only one will operate. If not, it predicts that it will only succeed with a probability of 25%.

  Of the four large board behaviors 224Ga to 224Gd, the highest probability of success is the highest if the first board behavior 224Ga is operated, and the next highest probability of success is the second board behavior 224Gb is operated. The third success probability 224Gd may be the third highest probability of success, and the fourth successor 224Ge may be the lowest success probability. Alternatively, the success probability can be notified according to the position from which the initial position is advanced. For example, the probability of success may be increased as it approaches the maximum advance position.

  Moreover, although it may be comprised so that the change of the display mode of an icon may occur more easily when the accessory operates, it does not need to change easily. Moreover, although it may be configured so that the icon display mode is likely to change depending on the number of actuated items, the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (Fb8), the accessory effect ends when the change of the icon display mode is completed.

  FIG. 218 (Fc1) to FIG. 218 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of notifying the promotion of the icon change notice display itself.

  In FIG. 218 (Fc1), an icon IHI of the default color “bomber” appears, and an effect of changing the icon display mode is started. Here, the notice effect is started before the “bomber” icon IHI is temporarily stopped. Here, as in the effects shown in FIGS. 217 (Fa2-1) to (Fa4), the fourth large board acting 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapped with the fourth large board acting part 224Gd is started in accordance with the advancement of the fourth large board acting part 224Gd. An effect image EF17 is displayed in the vicinity. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 is foreseeing the display mode in which the default color “bomber” icon IHI is promoted. Here, a red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 218 (Fc5), it is promoted to an icon IHI of “red bomber”. FIG. 218 (Fc6) is followed by FIG. 212 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  In this example, the operation of the fourth large board behavioral item 224Gd is a kind of swaying effect regardless of the notice, but the promotion is more likely to occur when the role is activated than when it is not. May be. However, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change. Further, it may be configured such that promotion is likely to occur according to the number of actuated items. That is, it may be configured such that promotion is more likely to occur as the number of actuated items increases. However, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change here.

  FIG. 218 (Fd1) to FIG. 218 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of the change effect of the icon display mode using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 218 (Fa1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position so far appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is in a state before rotating. . Note that the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 218 (Fd2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I displays “red bomber icon RBI and default The display area of the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partly overlap.

  The POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd3) displays a state in which the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI targeting the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) displays a state in which the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14.

  Then, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd5-1) displays a first hold icon h11 that has changed to a red display mode together with a red bomber icon RBI.

  In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side may be visible or not visible. It may be. While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the “red bomber” icon IHI and / or the effect image EF14 is displayed on the display screen portion behind the POV display 224I that rotates at a constant speed. It does not have to be displayed.

  In FIG. 218 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode and the second in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 is displayed and the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. However, the “red bomber” icon IHI may be displayed.

  The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing a constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time that the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, it may change after the POV display 224I has stopped rotating at a constant speed.

  Although the example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 206). The above display may be executed by 'etc.). That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. -1) and (A3-1) in the same figure, and the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene in FIG. 208 (A3-1). It may be. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I but the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206, the light guide plate IL, and the like. Alternatively, it may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. Further, such enlarged display can also be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the notification regarding the display of the icon change notification is used. However, the notification can also be applied to the appearance notification of the notification icon. For example, the probability that a notice icon may appear may be expressed depending on how many of the large board behaviors 224Ga to 224Gd are actuated (the greater the number of works that are played, Higher).

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and other display means.

  The example shown in FIGS. 219 (Fd5-2-1) to (Fd5-2-2) is a modification of the previous FIGS. 218 (Fd5-1) to 218 (Fd6). The display on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-1) is a display of an icon change notice (an icon IHI of “red bomber”) and a display showing the display mode of the changed icon. It does not indicate whether the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-1), it can be seen slightly that the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image EF14.

  In FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode and a red display. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I does not know the target icon, but displays whether or not the icon display mode change effect has been successfully displayed. When the success of the change effect of the icon display mode is displayed on the POV display 224I, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The display of the change in the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change in the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative design display device 208L may be performed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative design. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

  Further, in this example, although the target icon is unknown by the POV display 224I, it can also be used as a notice as to whether or not the icon display mode change effect is successful.

  Hereinafter, in FIG. 219, an example of the effect in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 are combined will be described. However, as described in FIG. The technology described in this specification cannot be applied only by the difference in the configuration of the display, and can be applied regardless of whether the arrangement of the display means is horizontal or vertical if viewed as a technical idea. It is.

  In FIGS. 219 (Fe1) to (Fe6), the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display means 208M ′ is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example completed only in 208M '.

  The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe1) is different from the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (f1) whether or not the background screen is displayed. Is the same. Further, the state of the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG.

  In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the “red bomber” icon IHI as an icon change notice display appears on the right end of the screen. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown, an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe4), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. And in the 4th display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe6), the display mode of the 1st holding | maintenance icon h11 has changed into the display mode of red. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 219 (Fe1) to (Fe6), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  FIGS. 219 (Fe2-2-1) to (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation from FIG. 219 (Fe2-1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The “Red Bomber” icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. (Fe2-2-2) uses the “Red Bomber” icon IHI. A change animation is started, and a red bullet icon BTI is fired from a red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-3), the lower end region in which the bullet icon BTI is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M ′ at the initial position. It is difficult to see for a moment. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved into the display screen of the fourth display means 208M ′ at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. 'Indicates the tip of the bullet icon BTI. Although the fourth display means 208M ′ at the initial position overlaps with the upper edge portion of the frame fm and cannot be seen, the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . However, it may not be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-5), a default display mode (first display) in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the base hs0 ′ of the variable icon display area CIS ′. A part of the variation icon h0 of the aspect) overlaps. In this situation, a red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed to a red display mode. On the other hand, the “Red Bomber” icon IHI is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-6).

  The change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M ′ and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. In addition, the “red bomber” icon IHI may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 220 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 220 (Ff1) are in their initial positions and open (separated), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 220 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 208 (A2-1), and here, the “red bomber” icon as the icon change notice display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. IHI has begun to appear, and on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. (Ff3), the entire icon IHI of “Red Bomber” is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 220 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI moves to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 220 (Ff4) is red. The third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started to move in the left direction instead of the icon RBI of the bomber in the left direction ((Ff5) to Ff6)). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and can no longer move to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 220 (Ff7), the red bomber icon RBI has moved to the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side, the entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed.

  In FIG. 220 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position has started moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. Since it is displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position before the target first hold icon h11, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 220 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. The entire red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 220 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. The red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 220 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode. In addition, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further to the left side from the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 220 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Disappeared from.

  In the example described above, one image is displayed across a plurality of display means, but the same image is not displayed on the plurality of display means. For example, the same image may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but may be displayed.

  Even when the icon invariant animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the third decorative symbol display device 208N through the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In some cases, an animation may be performed, but when an icon-changing animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 220 (Fg), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a “bomber” icon IHI, a “red bomber” icon IHI, and a “gold bomber” icon IHI as display of a plurality of icon change notices. Is displayed. These bombers may start moving animation all at once as in the example shown in FIG. 210 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock, May be executed.

  In addition, the hold icon or the change icon itself may also serve as a display of the icon change notice. In this case, the change icon itself notifies that it changes, or another icon different from itself (the hold icon or the change icon). Icon) will change.

  Also, a notice display (icon to notify that the icon change notice display is performed in any one of the symbol change displays that are on hold, or in the currently performed symbol change display. (Pre-change notice display) may be performed. For example, the “Bomber” icon IHI is only visible at the right edge of the screen, or the “Bomber” icon IHI appears and waits in the dedicated stock area (standby area). Display. Further, a notice may be given with a telop display trp shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-3). In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparation display may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, an icon change notice preparation display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. In addition, there may be a dedicated area for displaying a stock display in preparation for icon change notice. Further, at least a part (including all) of the area where the icon change notice preparation display is displayed may be displayed in an area overlapping with the icon change notice display, or may be displayed in a non-overlapping area. .

  In addition, before the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as “bomber” icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, the change notice and / or the pre-read notice , “The icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (pending icon and / or variable icon)” changes to a display mode (for example, an enlarged display mode) different from the display mode that changes due to the icon change notice. Thus, it may be notified that the icon changes due to the icon change notice, or the display form of the icon changes depending on other indications such as a cursor display to "an icon whose display form changes after the icon change notice" By displaying a display that suggests that the The may be foretold.

  In addition, after the icon change notice (icon change notice by another notice display such as the “bomber” icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, it is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of notices (notice display by various display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), notice sound by speakers, operation means and notice operation of various devices, etc.) There may be various notices described in the present specification. For example, there may be a case where the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes in a state in which the fluctuation big hit definite sound is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed in a state where the big hit definite sound is output. However, the various notices may not be performed during the execution of the notice that informs that the change is a big hit. Further, there may be various notices that are performed only during the notice that informs that the change is a big hit.

  While various notices may not be performed during the execution of the island simultaneous performance, it may be performed. Moreover, there may be various notices performed only during the execution of the island simultaneous performance.

  Further, there may be various notices that are performed and various notices that are not performed depending on the effect background or effect mode, and conversely, there may be various effects that are always performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the sea background screen, an icon change notice (an icon change notice by another notice display such as a “bomber” icon or an icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed. Then, the icon change notice display may not be displayed. The effect background may be selectable by the player. In this case, it is possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

  As mentioned above, although the example of an effect using the various icons and display demonstrated using FIGS. 177-179, or those icons and displays other than a display was demonstrated, it summarizes at the end and explains seven examples of effects. To do.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram roughly showing seven example effects in which various icons and displays are used. In FIG. 221, the stage of the production is shown stepwise from the left to the right in the figure. FIG. 221 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 221 (1) and (2) roughly show an example of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 178.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (1), a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in these special drawings 1 are both No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “2” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (1), a mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game is displayed. A mini game B (Janken Showdown) is held in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game window MGW, an icon of a Yoshimune character is displayed. The icon of this Yoshimune character is No. 1 which is a kind of a hold icon or a variation icon shown in FIG. It is the same as the 19 “Janken” icon, and the icon of the Yoshimune character of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (1). On the other hand, on the right side in the mini game window MGW, an icon of a swordsman character as an opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c) is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (1), an icon of a swordsman character of aspect a is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (1), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon of the same Yoshimune character as the 19th aspect c icon and the icon of the swordsman character of the aspect d shown in FIG. 178 (c) are displayed. In other words, in this Janken confrontation, Yoshimune made a choke, and the swordsman gave a par, and the character “Victory Yoshimune” is also displayed in the mini game window MGW. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (1), No. 179 shown in FIG. The icon of the same Yoshimune character as the icon of the 19th aspect f is displayed together with the characters “Yoshimune Victory”, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune also displays a balloon with “pending change”, which is the default until then. The display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of FIG. 3 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (Janken confrontation) is displayed. Is performed on the left base icon bIl arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side and the center in FIG. 221 (2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as the opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c). A hold icon h12 is displayed as shown in FIG. 19 “Janken” icons.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the icon of the swordsman character of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon. In other words, in this Janken confrontation, the swordsman gave a par, Yoshimune gave a choki, and Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the icon of the character of Yoshimune in the mode f, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is “pending change”. A written balloon is also displayed. The first holding icon h11 next to it is an icon of a swordsman character until now, but No. 1 in FIG. 3 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). In the example shown in FIG. 221 (2), the mini game B using the hold icon is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon used in the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed with the opponent's icon becomes the prefetch target hold icon.

  As described above, there may be a case where a mini game is played with a hold icon as shown in FIG. 221 (2) and a case where a mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 221 (1). In addition, the example here is an example of a mini game whether or not the display mode of the hold icon changes, but even if it is a mini game whether or not various notice icons shown in FIG. 177 can be acquired. Good.

  In FIG. 221 (3) and FIG. An example of the effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon changes is roughly shown by the change notice display BCH of 16 “bancho”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 221 (3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of FIG. 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is the change icon. It is displayed on the base hs0 of the display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 221 (3) and (4), both the first hold icon h11 and the change icon h0 are the same as those shown in No. The default display mode described in 1 is displayed. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 221 (3) and (4), No16 in FIG. 179 (b) is placed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display BCH of the “bancho” in the mode a described in the item (1) is displayed. Here, the change notice display BCH of “bancho” is added with a balloon marked “hold change”, and it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (3), the “banch” change notice display BCH disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. (Blue display mode). It should be noted that the timing at which the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or the timing at which the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears. It may be earlier or, conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (4), the “bancho” change notice display BCH does not disappear from above the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the “bancho” change notice display BCH. However, it has been announced that the display mode of the hold icon will be changed once more. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Note that the timing at which the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of “bancho” changes (restart notice start timing) and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same. The notice start timing may be earlier or, conversely, the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (4), the “banner” change notice display BCH disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. (Green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon has changed twice in one symbol change display. However, in the symbol change display next to the symbol change display in which the display mode of the hold icon has changed once. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon may change three or more times during one symbol variation display. Further, the “bancho” icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 221 (4) is used again without disappearing for the re-notice, but the icon or display subject to the notice disappears (non-display). The change notice display may be used many times until it is displayed. For example, if the icon to be notified is a hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, and further until the change icon disappears, in other words, the design change display of the prefetch target change is started. Until the change display is completed, the change notice display is used, and the display mode may be changed repeatedly. The icon or display to be notified may be a notification icon or a notification display, and the display mode of the notification icon or the notification display may be repeatedly changed until the notification icon or the notification display disappears. Moreover, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case where the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon does not change. In addition, even if the “changing length” change notice display BCH shown in the center of the symbol variation display 173 (4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon may not change again. That is, the “bancho” change notice display BCH may not be used again to change the notice target icon.

  FIG. 221 (5) and FIG. An example of the effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon changes is roughly shown by the change notice display of the 4 and 5 bomber systems.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 221 (5) and (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special drawing 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode changes. The icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (5), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as No. 179 in FIG. 4 is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (5), No. 179 in FIG. The default color “bomber” icon IHI described in No. 4 has appeared, and an icon change animation using the “bomber” icon IHI has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode). The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). Yes. The change in the display mode of the icon by the default color “bomber” icon IHI goes up only one step, so it cannot be changed to the icon of the fifth display mode unless it is the icon of the fourth display mode.

  On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (6), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as No. 179 in FIG. 1 is displayed in the first display mode described in 1 (default display mode). In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L includes a No. 179 in FIG. A red “red bomber” icon IHI described in 5 appears, and an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI has started. Further, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display about a change effect of an icon display mode using a change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started, and may be hidden after that, or the bullet icon BTI is displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired and then hidden, or it may continue to be displayed until the change of the icon display mode is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). Yes. In the change of the display mode of the icon by the red (fifth display mode) “red bomber” icon IHI, the level of the icon display mode before the change is changed to the icon of the fifth display mode. Can do.

  In FIG. 221 (7), a pan full error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 180 (A12), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays an error message (please remove the ball) (warning message). (Hereinafter referred to as “error display EWM”). The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side, and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. The error display EWM may overlap all of the notice icons YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least partially from the front side only after the notice icon YI is used (for example, display of the mode d shown in FIG. 177 (a)), or the notice icon Only before the YI is used (for example, the display of the aspect a shown in FIG. 177 (a)), at least a portion may overlap from the front side. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM. It may be overlapped only for a certain period after the start.

  Or, on the contrary, the notice icon YI may overlap with at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the importance of the error display EWM is low or when the relationship with fraud is low). Alternatively, this may be only after the notice icon YI is used, or only before the notice icon YI is used. The example shown in FIG. 221 (7) is related to the notice icon, but the relation to the notice display is the same as described here.

  In FIG. 221 (8), a pan full error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 208 (A2-1), and an error display EWM such as “please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. This error display EWM does not overlap with the change effect of the icon display mode. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of icons (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for changing the display mode of the icon. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with a mini game (for example, an icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

  However, the error display EWM is at least a part of an icon display change effect (for example, at least a part of a change notice display), or at least a part of a mini game (for example, an icon or display of a character appearing in a mini game). May be overlapped from the front side or at least part of the display period of the error display EWM, and may overlap over the entire period (for example, start of the error display EWM). There may be an overlap only for a certain period of time.

  FIGS. 221 (7) and (8) are examples of the error display EWM such as “please remove the ball”. However, the indications and warnings regarding various errors described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174 are shown. The same applies to the display regarding.

  In the game table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 221, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of losing (in the case of gasses), and in the case of a big win, It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

  As described above, the description using FIGS. 177 to 221 can be combined with the simultaneous effects and the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-described volume display bar display VB) described with reference to FIG. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 215, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI can be combined with the customization scene.

  In the description using FIGS. 177 to 221, the example is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine). However, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses a ball (pachinko ball). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and for example, can be applied to the enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine described with reference to FIG.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two fourth display means 208M ′, a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a first icon may be displayed.
The first icon is an icon related to symbol variation display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, variation icon h0],
The display means is a means in which a second icon may be displayed,
The display means is a means in which notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)] may be displayed.
The second icon is an icon of a different type from the notice icon [for example, an icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 178 (a), an icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 178 (c)]. The icon is not an icon representing the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The display means is a means in which an effect display may be displayed,
The effect display is an effect display in which any one of the displayed first icons [e.g., one or more (all or a part of) icons] and the second icon are used. [For example, display of mini game A or B]
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 180 (A 11), FIG. 183 (A 3-2-9), FIG. (A 3-2-8c1), Fig. (A 3-2-8c7), Fig. 185 (I 11), Fig. 187 (U 34), Fig. 188 (U 15-2-17), Fig. 190 (U 1-2-24), Fig. 195 (K a8) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the player can be entertained by paying attention to the process of whether or not the notice icon is acquired, after the effect display using the two icons is displayed.

  The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, a first hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 1, and displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 2. A second second hold icon, a third third hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 3, and a fourth fourth hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 4 There may be. The notice icon may be a different type of icon from the change icon and the hold icon.

  Here, the number of held is the number of the start of the symbol variation display is suspended, and the first icon can be exemplified by a variation icon in addition to the suspension icon. The variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed, and is an icon representing a digested suspension. That is, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the unreserved hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as a variation icon corresponding to the started symbol variation display.

  Note that the number of holds may be displayed depending on the number of the first icons being displayed, and the number of holds may not be displayed depending on the number of the notice icons being displayed.

  The effect display may be a display of an effect using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

  When the effect display is performed, the notice icon may be displayed.

  One of the icons may be one first icon or a plurality of first icons (for example, all or part of the displayed first icons).

  The second icon may be a production icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the effect may be an icon for notifying the start of the notice effect, an icon for a mini game, or an icon that also serves as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that also serves as a variable icon.

  The effect display includes an effect of a mini game using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of performing a mini game using any one of the icons and the second icon.

  “The notice icon may be displayed” means that the notice icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, “the notice icon may not be displayed” may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It does not have to be included. This concept also applies in the following description.

  The notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. There may be. For example, the display means includes an appearance area where the display of the notice icon starts and a stock area where the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (partially overlapped). It ’s okay, but they do n’t all overlap.) The stock area is a display area where the notice icon continues to be displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, and may disappear in the stock area, or the display mode may change. Or it may go out of the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

  The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) using any one of the icons and the second icon at the same time, or any one of the icon and the second icon. There may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon for the one is used later.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect using only one of the displayed first icons. . The notice icon may be displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect using only the second icon.

In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed,
As the notice display, a plurality of kinds of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
One type of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. "Change notice"],
One type of the plurality of types of notice display is the second notice display [for example, No. 17 “Reach” notice]
A certain notice icon [e.g., No. When the 1 “box” notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 181 (a 33), FIG. 186 (ii 14-4-3)]. ,
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 185 (15), FIG. 186 (14-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since it is not known, there is a case where attention can be paid until the certain notice icon is used. That is, there is no one-to-one relationship between the notice icon and the notice display, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed simply by looking at the type of the notice icon. The notice icon may continue to be viewed with interest until the display is displayed.

  Here, in the first place, it may be unclear that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the notice display may be displayed or the notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear which case will occur. The fact that the notice display itself is unclear means that, as a result, it is also unclear which type of the notice display of the plural kinds of notice displays is displayed.

  Further, only one kind of notice icon may be prepared as the notice icon. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of kinds of notice displays may be displayed. The notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. That itself may be unknown.

  The display means may be means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the certain notice icon used when the certain notice icon is used. That is, at the time when the notice icon is displayed, an aspect in which the notice display displayed after the notice icon is used is one of a plurality of kinds of notice displays may be recognized. In short, a mode in which the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is predetermined in a one-to-one manner may be used.

  In addition, “when a certain notice icon is used” refers to, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used for production, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is displayed. It may be a case of a change or a case where a certain notice icon disappears (when it is not displayed) (the same applies to the following).

  The notice display may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may continue to be displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. May be.

  When a certain notice icon of a plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, one kind of notice display (hereinafter referred to as “some notice display”) is displayed. It may be unclear which of the multiple types of notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed.

  Moreover, there may be a case where it is not predicted that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. There may be cases where there is no prior notice. Or, conversely, there may be a case in which the first notice display is displayed only when the certain notice icon is displayed, or the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foretold.

Also, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In other words, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons changes to the display mode of the notice. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the first icon can be focused even after the effect display is over.

  Here, “any one of the displayed first icons” may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may be the first icon that is not. Further, any of the icons may be a plurality of icons or a single icon (for example, all or part of the displayed first icons).

  The first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is performed, or may be a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. . For example, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different between the display mode before the effect display and the display mode for which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may return to the previous display mode, or the display mode may remain as it is without returning to the previous display mode. The display mode may change. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before the effect display and the display mode for which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. Later, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without changing. In any case described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

  Note that when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed, or the displayed first icon is displayed. The display mode of any icon of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons is more when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be easy to change.

  The effect display includes a plurality of types of effect display, and any one of the icons is more effective than the type of effect display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. In the type of effect display that does not change the display mode, the application frequency may be higher or lower, or the appearance frequency of both may be the same. Further, one type of effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display, and the first effect display is displayed rather than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. May be more likely to change the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons.

In addition, the “second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to be finalized and displayed in the event of the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, just because the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is not necessarily finalized, and even in the symbol variation display where the second notice display is displayed, In particular, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the loss is displayed. Or, on the contrary, if the second notice display (for example, a premier notice) is displayed, the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed, and the symbol pattern of the big hit is surely finally displayed. May be.

  The display means is a means in which a third notice display may be displayed. The third notice display is a display for performing a prefetch notice (for example, a chance prefetch notice or the like). In the event that the third notice display is displayed, it may be easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol form in the case where the third notice display is displayed. That is, just because the third notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is not necessarily finalized, and even in the symbol variation display where the third notice display is displayed, In particular, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the loss is displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol pattern of the jackpot may be finally displayed in a final display by the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed.

“The first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, No. 179 shown in FIG. 1-No. 19 display modes], the display is started in one type of display mode.
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a “default” display mode],
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display mode is a second display mode [e.g., "Murajin" (Janken) display mode, Yoshimune (bow) display mode],
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first display mode may be a default display mode. The second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, a display mode that may be used for the effect display or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display may be used.

In addition, “the effect display is the display of the first icon of the second display mode being displayed [for example, the hold icon or the change icon of the display mode of“ village ”(Janken), the display mode of Yoshimune (bow) Display of an effect using the “hold icon or variable icon” and the second icon [eg, panda opponent icon TI, mini game A icon AI] [eg, start from FIG. 185 (a 8-1)] Janken confrontation animation, Yoshimune treasure acquisition shown in FIGS. 186 to 187]
The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Moreover, it is foretold that the effect display is displayed by displaying the first icon of the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the fact that the effect display is displayed does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the effect display is displayed. That is, merely displaying the first icon in the second display mode does not give a notice until the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the presentation display.

  Further, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. Alternatively, a configuration in which the advance notice icon is not notified only by displaying the first icon in the first display mode may be employed.

  Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be displayed without fail, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

  It may be unclear whether the notice icon will be displayed thereafter only by displaying the first icon in the second display mode.

  In addition, the second icon may be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

  Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be displayed simultaneously, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed first, or the second icon may be displayed first.

  Even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed. If the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed.

  The second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed without fail.

  Further, the second icon may not be displayed in a state where the first icon is not displayed, and may be displayed in the opposite direction. In other words, the second icon may not appear alone, but may appear on the contrary.

In addition, after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may be started [for example, an opponent started from FIG. Icon appearance animation, icon animation for mini game A started from FIG. 186 (5)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “second icon” here is not the hold icon, the icon that also serves as the hold icon, the fluctuation icon, and the icon that also serves as the fluctuation icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter referred to as “display mode for effect display”).

  The display of the second icon may not be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Even if “the display of the second icon is not started” here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or the first icon may be displayed at the same time as being displayed in the second display mode.

  When the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode), the second icon may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, the first icon in the second display mode may be displayed after the second icon is displayed.

  When the second icon is the variation icon or the hold icon (including the case where the second icon also serves as the variation icon or the hold icon), the second icon is displayed after the first icon is displayed. The second icon may or may not change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display). Good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, effect display). Display mode) may or may not be changed. Alternatively, at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon changes from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, effect display). Display mode) may or may not be changed.

  The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon in the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon in the second display mode is displayed). Only before or at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) Thereafter, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, a certain combination of 2 or 3) There may be.

  The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the first icon of the second display mode.

In addition, “a plurality of the first icons in the second display mode may be displayed [for example, FIG. 180 (A 3-1), FIG. 186 (U 3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that only one first icon of the second display mode may be displayed. A plurality of the first icons in the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Further, only one second icon may be displayed or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.

In addition, as the effect display, a first effect display may be displayed,
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed,
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 180 (A11)],
After the second effect display is displayed, the notice icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 181 (a 8-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the second effect display is a so-called fake effect display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 185 (11), FIG. 188 (15-2-17)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed after the effect display is displayed one or more times. That is, a plurality of notice icons may be stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed only after the effect display is performed once, and 0 or one notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by an effect other than the effect display.

In addition, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Even when the second number of notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the loss is finally displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of notice icons are displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern may be finally displayed.

  Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice form, it may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol form. Good.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] that can be operated by the player,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the effect display, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow after FIG. 180 (a 9-1) after FIG. 194 (c7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Even if the operation means is not operated, a notice icon may be displayed. Conversely, a notice icon may be displayed only when the operation means is operated.

  During the display of the effect display, the operation means may or may not be able to be operated, and if it is possible, the notice icon may be displayed more easily or vice versa. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same when it is made and when it cannot be made.

  During the display of the effect display, a display regarding the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) may be displayed or may not be displayed. The operation display here may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or a display prompting an operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). May be a display including the operation promotion display, or may be a display including an operation effective period display (operation effective period display) of the operation means. Only the validity period display may be displayed. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display mode of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include a mode change of the operation means itself (for example, a color change, a protrusion amount change, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, it includes “production movable means [for example, FIG. 206 (C1)],
After the display of the effect display is started [for example, the mini game dedicated accessory 225 shown in FIG. 206 (c2)], the effect moving means may perform the effect operation.
When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 206 (C2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The effect moving means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. In other words, the effect moving means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the display of the effect display ends. Alternatively, the effect moving means may be configured to perform an effect operation during the display of the effect display.

  When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even when the effect operation is performed. Also good. Alternatively, a notice icon may be displayed whenever the effect operation is performed.

  When the effect operation is performed, a pre-reading notice may be started, or a normal notice (a notice regarding the symbol variation display performed when the effect operation is performed) may be started. There may be. Further, when the production operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be easier to start than when the production operation is not performed, but when the production operation is performed, the pre-reading notice is not started. There may be. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be displayed whenever the presentation operation is performed. Further, when the production operation is performed, the normal notice may be easier to start than when the production operation is not performed, but the normal notice is not started even when the production operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, the normal notice may always be displayed when the presentation operation is performed.

  However, during the display of the effect display, the effect moving means may never perform the effect operation, and the effect moving means performs the effect operation regardless of the display of the effect display. May be done.

In addition, the notice icon is a kind of notice form of a plurality of kinds of notice forms [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 177 (a)]. Is an icon that starts displaying at
The notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, “red box”] rather than the first notice mode [for example, “box”]. In the symbol variation display that is executed when the notice icon is used, the big hit symbol mode may be easily finalized (for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 177 (a)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the notice icon is used before the symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “forecast subject fluctuation”) subject to notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a pre-read notice. In some cases, it may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice is a pre-read notice or a normal notice simply by looking at the notice with the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be used in the production before the notice subject change ends. In this case as well, a notice by the notice icon may be used as a pre-read notice or a normal notice.

  The notice display may be displayed more easily when the notice icon is displayed in the first notice form than when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice form. A certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.

“The display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, change icon h0] may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the first icon is the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variation icon or an icon that also serves as the variation icon.

Further, the display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1] may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon representing the number of holds by the number being displayed,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the first icon is the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 90]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two fourth display means 208M ′, a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1] displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon is an icon of a different type from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)], and the display means A notice display [e.g. notice display YH] may be displayed.
As the notice display, a plurality of kinds of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
When the notice icon is used, one kind of notice display among the plural kinds of notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 181 (A 32), FIG. 190 (E 13), FIG. 191 (E1-2-18), FIG. 196 (A8-1), FIG. 196 (A8-2-1), FIG. 198 (A1-3-3), FIG. 199 (Ia15), FIG. (Ia28) etc.]
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [for example, FIG. 181 (A 35), FIG. 191 (E 15), FIG. 191 (E 1-2-20), etc.],
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden, but the notice icon may be used again for presentation, and a certain notice display of the plurality of kinds of notice displays may be displayed [for example, 196 (A11), FIG. 16 (A16), FIG. 196 (A8-2-4), FIG. (A8-2-6), FIG. 198 (A1-3-9), FIG. 199 (Ia28) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even after the notice icon is used, the display state of the notice icon can be noticed, and the player may be entertained.

  The “when the notice icon is used” means, for example, a case where the notice icon is used for production, and more specifically, a case where the display mode of the notice icon changes. The notice icon may disappear (when it is not displayed) (the same applies to the following).

  When the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may not be displayed. Even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is re-produced with production. It may be used and some notice display may be displayed.

In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
One type of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. "Change notice"],
One type of the plurality of types of notice display is the second notice display [for example, No. 17 “Reach” notice]
A certain notice icon [e.g., No. When the 1 “box” notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 196 (A 8-1), FIG. 198 (A 1-3-3). ), FIG. 199 (Ia15), the same figure (Ia28), etc.]
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 196 (A11)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, before the notice icon is used, it may not be noticed that the notice display is displayed.

  In addition, it may be configured such that it is not notified which kind of notice display of the plural kinds of notice display is displayed before the notice icon is used.

  Moreover, there may be a case where it is not predicted that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. There may be cases where there is no prior notice. Or, conversely, there may be a case in which the first notice display is displayed only when the certain notice icon is displayed, or the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foretold.

In addition, when a certain kind of notice icon among the plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, a kind of notice display associated with the certain kind of notice icon is displayed [ For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 177 (b) in a one-to-one relationship.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The plurality of types of notification displays and the plurality of types of notification icons may be associated with each other for each type.

  The plurality of types of notice display and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, on a one-to-one basis, or on a one-to-many basis. Or may be associated in a many-to-many manner.

In addition, “the certain kind of notice icon is not hidden even if it is used once, and the certain kind of notice icon is used several times until the certain kind of notice icon is hidden. The type of notice display associated with the type of notice icon is displayed a plurality of times [for example, FIG. 199 (a15) and (iia28)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to be finalized and displayed in the event of the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon is used for the first time [for example, No. shown in FIG. 27 “Oval” notice display YH] and the notice display type displayed when the notice icon is used for the Nth time (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] may be the same. [For example, FIG. 196 (a 8-2-2) and the same figure (a 8-2-6)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  However, there may be differences, and different types of notice display may be displayed. Or, conversely, it may be the same.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT]
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 200 (Ib4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 200 (Ib5)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display [for example, display of an operation promoting notification image] including at least an image [for example, a button image 136a] simulating the operation means,
The notice icon may be used after the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 181 (a 31-2-2), FIG. 203 (e a2)] [for example, FIG. −6), FIG. 203 (D a7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”). , A display including an operation effective period of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period display”), or only the image and the operation promotion display, or the image And only the operation valid period display may be displayed. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display mode of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include a mode change of the operation means itself (for example, a color change, a protrusion amount change, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 181 (a 31-2-5), FIG. 203 (e a5)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 181 (a 31-2-6 ), FIG. 203 (a7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow after FIG. 180 (a 9-1) following FIG. 194 (c7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it includes “production movable means [for example, a family crest role 224E, a thousand box box feature 224H shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a notice for notifying that the effect moving means performs an effect operation [for example, No. shown in FIG. No. 24 “Operation of Thousand Boxes”, No. 24 25 “family crest actor action”] may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display for notifying that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation advance notice display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 185 (11), FIG. 188 (15-2-17)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon is a kind of notice form of a plurality of kinds of notice forms [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 177 (a)]. Is an icon that starts displaying at
The notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, “red box”] rather than the first notice mode [for example, “box”]. In the symbol variation display that is executed when the notice icon is used, the big hit symbol mode may be easily finalized (for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 177 (a)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 90]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two fourth display means 208M ′, a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1] displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The hold icon is a first icon display mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 1 “default” icon display mode, or No. 1 No. 2 “white blinking” icon display mode, “Roulette” display mode shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-3), or No. 2 shown in FIG. 10 “timer display mode” may be displayed,
The hold icon is a second icon display mode [for example, No. 179 shown in FIG. 5 "red icon display mode" may be displayed,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 179 (a)],
The display means is a means in which a change notice display [for example, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 179 (b)] may be displayed.
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [for example, icon change animation] that changes the mode of any one of the held icons that are displayed.
The change notice display is a first change notice mode [for example, No. 179 shown in FIG. 4 is a display that may be displayed in the form of the “bomber” icon of 4,
The change notice display indicates a second change notice mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 “red bombers” icon aspect] may be displayed,
The change notice display of the first change notice mode (hereinafter referred to as “first change notice display”) [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The first change animation may be performed after the 4 “bomber” icon IHI] is displayed.
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any one of the held icons being displayed is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, as shown in FIG. 209 (A3′-2-4), the first hold icon h11 may be changed to a blue display mode instead of a red display mode. ) As shown in red),
The change notice display of the second change notice mode (hereinafter referred to as “second change notice display”) [for example, No. shown in FIG. The first change animation may be performed after the 5 “red bomber” icon IHI is displayed,
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 208 (A6), FIG. 208 (A4-2-3), FIG. 208 (A2-2-4), FIG. 209 (A3-5-4), FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), FIG. (A3-2-4), FIG. 212 (B8), FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 218 (Fd6), FIG. 219 (Fe6), and FIG. 220 (Ff11) are displayed in red. Will always change],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  A fourth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice icon. In addition, a fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice display.

  When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, any one of the hold icons displayed is an icon other than the second icon display form. It may be changed to a display mode (for example, one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or a sixth icon display mode).

  The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display is the m-th change animation by the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies below).

  A plurality of types of change notice display is prepared as the change notice display, and one type of change notice display of the plurality of types of change notice display is a first change notice display, One type of change notice display of the change notice display is a second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be more easily executed when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

  Here, the first change animation changes the mode of any one of the held icons displayed, but the change notice display indicates the mode of any one of the held icons. May be interpreted as changing

  Any one of the hold icons among the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or a single hold icon, for example, all or some of the displayed hold icons. (It is the same in the following).

  The aspect before the change of any one of the held icons may be the first icon display aspect, the third icon display aspect, or the like. That is, the mode when the change notice display starts on any of the hold icons is not necessarily the default mode.

Also,
"A game machine with display means,
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol is easy to confirm and display,
The display means is a means in which a change notice display may be displayed,
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons.
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice form,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in a second change notice form,
The change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used rather than the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode. The first change animation is more likely to change the state of any one of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  According to this game stand, it can be made to guess what aspect (here 2nd icon display aspect) the aspect of the said hold icon may change with the aspect of the said change notice display, It may be possible to entertain the player. For example, the change notice display mode is related to the changed state of the hold icon, and if the change notice display mode is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold is displayed. It can be estimated that the aspect after the change of the icon is also the red aspect (here, the second icon display aspect).

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used, any one of the hold icons displayed among the hold icons being displayed It may be changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, a sixth icon display mode), or may be changed to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice form is used, any one of the hold icons being displayed is changed to the first change animation. There may be a case where the icon display mode is changed to a mode other than the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode). The seventh icon display mode may be a jackpot determined mode (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the state of any one of the hold icons is a prefetch notice mode but a big hit confirmation is determined. Although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) that does not last until, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, the big hit is confirmed. May be changed to a premier aspect (premier aspect). In addition, you may change to the mode (premium mode) of big hit determination. In addition, the seventh icon display mode is not originally a big hit determination mode, but may be handled as a big hit determination mode. In this case, the pre-reading notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and this contradiction becomes a premier and a big hit.

  The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is a mode with the highest display frequency. The second icon display mode may be a prefetch notice mode. In addition, the first change animation is more easily executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than in the first change notice mode. Also good.

In addition, the “hold icon is a third icon display mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 3 in “blue” icon display mode],
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. The big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 179 (a)],
If the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed by displaying the first change notice display, any one of the hold icons among the hold icons is displayed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, it is changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 209 (A3′-2-4). Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third icon display mode may also be a pre-read notice mode.

  The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In the first change animation in which the first change notice display is used, any one of the held icons displayed is displayed as the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. It may be easy to change the display mode. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

In addition, even if the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the state of all displayed held icons is not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 208 (A6), FIG. 208 (A4-2-3), FIG. 208 (A2-2-4), FIG. 209 (A3-5-4), FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), and FIG. 210 (A3-2). -4), 212 (B8), 215 (Ea2-2-5), 216 (Eb8), 218 (Fd6), 219 (Fe6), and 220 (Ff11) as shown in green No hold icon changed to aspect]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, there may be a first invariant animation [for example, icon invariant animation] using the change notice display.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the first unchanged animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of all the held icons that are displayed does not change. [For example]
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the first unchanged animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the held icons that are displayed does not change [ For example, as shown in FIG. 209 (A3-3-3) and FIG. 209 (A3-4-4), the display mode of all the hold icons does not change]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “first invariant animation is a scene in which the state of any one of the held icons being displayed has failed to be changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. A3-3-2) to the scene in FIG. (A3-3-3) and the scene in FIG. 209 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, a third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first invariant animation [for example, FIG. 209 (A3-4-1) to FIG. (A3-4-2)] [for example, FIG. 209 (A3-5-1) to (A3-5-2)],
In the third change animation, a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. (A3-5-3) to scene (A3-5-4) in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the first change animation, a scene in which the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons is changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 208 (A4 -1) to scene (A5) of FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

here,
“There may be a first invariant animation using the change notice.
The change notice display is a display constituted by a plurality of change notice icons,
One icon of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,
One icon of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,
The first invariant animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as “first scene”) that fails to change the mode of any one of the displayed held icons. Is an animation
The first scene is a scene that has failed using the second change notice icon,
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as a “second scene”) that has succeeded in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons. Animation,
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  The first change animation includes any one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. An animation that may be displayed, and the first unchanged animation is an animation in which one of the first scene and the second scene may be displayed, The successful scene may be displayed more easily when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference in the ease of displaying the successful scene between the two cases.

  The first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first scene in which the icon is used is not displayed, and the first unchanged animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed. When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and when the first scene is displayed. The failed scene may always be displayed.

  Further, the first change animation may be one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second invariant animation. When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even if the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be an aspect that is not necessarily displayed.

  There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"There may be a third change animation using the change notice display,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first unchanged animation until halfway,
In the third change animation, a scene (hereinafter referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that was finally successful using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  The third change animation is an animation that makes a change in the status of the held icon a failure and succeeds. The third change animation has a lower appearance frequency than the first change animation. However, it may be higher or the same.

  Corresponds to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation. In the case of the symbol variation display, there may be cases where the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finalized and displayed in the end (the reliability (expectedness) of the jackpot is high), or conversely, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally finalized. It may be difficult to display (the reliability of the jackpot (expectedness) is low), or the reliability of the jackpot (expectedness) may be the same.

In addition, “the first change notice display using the second change notice display is used rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose aspect has been changed by the first change animation using the first change notice display. In some cases, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose form has been changed by the change animation may be easier to be finalized and displayed in the event that the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed. The first change animation using the first change notice display changes to the third display mode (second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 209 (A3′2-4)), but the second change notice display. In the first change animation in which is used, the display changes to the fifth display mode (first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 209 (A7)). Confidence,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the first change notice display may change to the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 212 (B4) to FIG. 212 (B5), FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) to FIG. FIG. (B3-2-5), FIG. 212 (B3-3-3) to FIG. (B3-3-5), FIG. 213 (B1-2-5) to FIG. (B1-2-9), FIG. 213 (B1-3-6) to FIG. 214 (B1-3-9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The change notice display mode started in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. The notice display mode may further change to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, there may be a case where the second change notice mode is changed, and before the first change animation is started, the second change notice mode is changed. Or may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation is completed.

  The change notice display mode displayed in the first change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the first change notice mode than the frequency when the change notice mode changes to the second change notice mode. The frequency of the case may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

  The change notice display mode displayed in the first change notice mode may be configured not to change to another mode.

  The change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode may be configured not to change to the first change notice mode, or on the contrary, the change notice display mode may change. Good.

  Even if the change notification display mode displayed in the second change notification mode (for example, red mode) may change to the third change notification mode (for example, gold mode or rainbow mode). Good. Also, the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change while being displayed in the second change notice mode than the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the third change notice mode. The frequency of the case may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

  When the change notice display changes from the first change notice form to the second change notice form than when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning. The first change animation for changing any one of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Or, conversely, the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning rather than when the change notice display changes from the first change notice form to the second change notice form. The first change animation that changes any one of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be more easily executed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation for changing any one of the held icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

  The first change notice than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose form has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display that is displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning. The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation using the change notification display changed from the mode to the second change notification mode is finally the jackpot symbol mode. There may be cases where it is easy to be confirmed (the reliability of the jackpot is high (expected)), or conversely, the big hit symbol pattern is difficult to be finally displayed (the reliability of the jackpot (expected) is low) ) There may be cases, and the reliability (expected degree) of jackpot may be the same for both.

Further, the display means is a means in which a variation icon may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
A second change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The second change animation is an animation [for example, icon change animation] for changing the aspect of the variable icon,
If the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed by displaying the first change notice display, the mode of the displayed variation icon is the second icon. It may be changed to the display mode,
If the second change animation using the second change notice display is performed by displaying the second change notice display, the mode of the displayed variation icon is the second icon. The display mode is changed [for example, FIG. 208 (A3-2-4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fluctuation icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

  The variable icon can also be viewed as an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, and can be said to be a kind of a hold icon in a broad sense, but here, it is distinguished from a hold icon. However, the variation icon mode is the same as the hold icon mode and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

  In addition, the “hold icon” that has been described so far can be replaced with a “variable icon”, and the “first change animation” can be replaced with a “second change animation”. The “icon” can also be replaced with a “variable icon”, and the “first change animation” can also be replaced with a “second change animation”. These are the same in the following.

  In addition, the second change animation is more easily executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than in the first change notice mode. It may be. According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, it is possible to have a big hit expectation in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and if the first change animation is executed, then With the symbolic variation display initiated, the jackpot expectation can be expected and the player is interested in which change animation of the first change animation or the second change animation is executed, There are cases where the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, a second invariant animation [for example, icon invariant animation] using the change notice display may be performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second unchanged animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed fluctuation icon does not change,
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the second non-change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variation icon does not change [for example, FIG. 209 (A3-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The second invariant animation here is an animation in which the aspect of the fluctuation icon does not change, and if the change of the aspect of the fluctuation icon is regarded as successful, the second change animation is displayed. It corresponds to success, and when the second unchanged animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission portion 191, a second chance button 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The first change notice mode is a mode [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-2)] including a display related to the operation means [for example, display of the button image 136a].
When the operation means is operated during display of the first change notice display, the change notice display form changes from the first change notice form to the second change notice form. [For example, FIG. 212 (B3-2-5)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Any one of the held icons may change to the eighth icon display mode by the first change animation, or may not change. Further, the variation icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The 8th icon display mode here is a mode including a display about the above-mentioned operation means.

  The operation means is a means for setting an operation effective period, and a display relating to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed at least during the operation effective period, and within the operation effective period. When the operation means is operated, the change notice display mode is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode in accordance with the operation, and within the operation effective period. If the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation valid period has elapsed. In addition, when the mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode according to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation effective period May change from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  However, if the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the change notice display, the hold icon, or the variation icon changes to the second change notice form or the second icon display form. You don't have to. Alternatively, it may be changed to the second change notice mode or the second icon display form at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has passed, The display may be started again in the change notice mode, and the hold icon or the change icon may be started again in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon is the eighth icon until the operation is performed. It may continue to be displayed in the display mode.

  The operation display may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display for prompting operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). The display may include a display including only the operation promotion display, a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation effective display. Only the period display may be used. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display mode of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include a mode change of the operation means itself (for example, a color change, a protrusion amount change, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the change notice display form is changed from the first change notice form. You may change to the said 2nd change notice mode. Alternatively, the first change notice mode may change from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode and may not change (for example, the first change notice mode remains).

In addition, “the change notice display is a display that may be displayed across the continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 210 (A3-8-1) to FIG. 210 (A3-8-3), FIG. (A3-9-1) to (A3-9-3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  “Straddling” as used herein refers to interposing a symbol stop display period (variable stop period). Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, even during the display of the stop display of the symbol, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, a display that disappears in the middle, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

  “Display that may be displayed across the continuous symbol fluctuation display” means “display that is always displayed”, but “display that may be erased and redisplayed” included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect ends.

In addition, “the change notice display [for example,“ Red Thundercloud ”icon IHI] is a display that is displayed at least in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols that are stopped are displayed [for example, FIG. 215 (D9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The change notice display may be a display that is displayed only in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols that are stopped are displayed, or a display that is displayed in other states. May be.

In addition, the “change notice display [for example,“ Red Thundercloud ”icon IHI]” may be displayed during a predetermined number of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The change notice display may be a display that disappears (display that is not displayed) when the predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays are completed.

In addition, “the change notice display [for example,“ Red Thundercloud ”icon IHI] temporarily disappears even during the predetermined number of symbol variation displays [for example, in FIG. 215 (D10)]. If an animation demo screen showing is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, the change notice display may disappear temporarily or partly during some or all periods of the super reach effect.

  The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character that performs an explanation display or the like).

  The change notice display may be a display that is always displayed during a certain period. The certain period may be a period until the reservation subject to the pre-reading notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variation display corresponding to the reservation subject to the pre-reading notice ends, or a predetermined number of times. This may be a period until the symbol variation display ends (hereinafter the same).

  The change notice display may be hidden while the symbol is stopped or no demonstration is displayed. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no suspension or a demonstration display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped with no hold.

  The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once in a certain period.

Further, when the first change animation is not displayed even though the change notice display is displayed [for example, when the first unchanged animation, the second changed animation, or the second unchanged animation is displayed, , The change notice display may be hidden while still
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

  The change notice display may be displayed and the first unchanged animation may be performed. The first unchanged animation may be the same animation as the first changed animation. The change notice notice may be displayed and the second unchanged animation may be performed. The second unchanged animation may be the same animation as the second changed animation. As described above, when the first invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to a failure, but until the middle (for example, at least the first part, the first half part, or whether the status of the hold icon changes) Since the animations are the same, the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation or the display of the first non-change animation is started. It may not be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, even if the change notice display is displayed, the first change animation and the first unchanged animation may not be displayed.

In addition, before the display of the first change animation is started, there is a case in which it is informed that the state of any one of the held icons being displayed is in a state of being easily changed [for example, Notification by the telop display trp shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The notification that the mode of any of the held icons is in a state of being easily changed (hereinafter referred to as “change prior notification”) is performed when the change notification display is displayed in the second change notification mode. You may be notified. For example, the second change notice mode may include a display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the change advance notice. Alternatively, the change prior notification may be performed separately from the change advance notice display. The first change animation may be more easily performed when the change notice display is performed than when the change advance notification is not performed. That is, the mode of any one of the held icons that are displayed may be easily changed. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to execute, or the ease of execution may be the same.

  Further, the change prior notification may be started or notified before the display of the first change animation is started after the change notice display is displayed. Alternatively, the change prior notification may be started or notified before the change notice display is displayed.

In addition, “the first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any one of the plurality of held icons displayed [for example, FIG. 209 (A3′-2-1) to Fig. (A3'-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first change animation is an animation including a scene that has succeeded in changing the mode of any one of the plurality of hold icons displayed, and the first non-change animation. May be an animation including a scene that fails to change the mode of any of the plurality of held icons displayed.

  The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be executed at the same time, and the mode of any one or a plurality of hold icons displayed may change. In this case, a scene that changes the mode of one or more hold icons and a scene that fails to change the mode of one or more hold icons may be displayed.

  Further, the first change animation may be an animation that always changes the mode of any one of the plurality of hold icons displayed. The first invariant animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one of the plurality of held icons being displayed.

In addition, when the second change notice display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the icon change rate is 100%. 8 “Red Flying Boat”],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  There may be a case where a first invariant animation using the change notice display is performed. The first invariant animation here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the on-hold icons that are displayed, and if the mode of the on-hold icon changes is considered successful, When the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to success, and when the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

  Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene that has succeeded in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons, and the first invariant The animation may be an animation that includes a scene that fails to change the mode of any one of the displayed held icons.

In addition, “the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
The fourth icon display mode is a mode that suggests that the mode of the held icon of the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, the display mode of “bomb” shown in FIG. 216 (Eb1), etc. ],
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation using the second change notice display [For example, FIG. 216 (Eb8)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the held icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [for example, the fire of the lead wire shown in FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) Display mode of the “bomb” that has disappeared]
The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) continued from Eb6)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice form is used as the hold icon form displayed in the fourth icon display form, The first icon display mode may be changed.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display indicating the length of the remaining time until the mode of the hold icon changes (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc.) Or a display including a change in size, length, color, or the like. ← Dynamite is a display that changes the length of the lead wire. Further, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode is used. When the first change animation is started, a display indicating that the remaining time has elapsed (for example, a countdown display, a change in shape, size, length, color, etc. as time passes) Display) may be performed.

In addition, the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 90]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  Next, examples of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 49, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In the example of the effects described below, display means (for example, any one, two or all of the decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51, etc.) In addition, a notice icon, notice display, mini game A icon, mini game B icon, hold icon, change icon, icon change notice display, chance up meter, timer notice, etc. are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  First, an effect in which various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 222 are used will be described using a specific example.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 222 shows a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric support state (non-time-short state)), and the following production examples are examples of production in the normal state unless otherwise specified. FIG. 222 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. 51. This first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown may be used (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 222A1 to A15, an indication indicating that a chance up meter is being prepared is displayed before the chance up meter is displayed, and an announcement is made that the chance up meter is displayed. The state of being broken is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Note that the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1) is white, but this white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but when it is white, it indicates that the background screen is omitted as in FIG. 222 (A1).

  In FIG. 222 (A2), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire holding icon display area HIS. This warns that there is a possibility that a chance up meter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “CUM”) preparation display may be displayed. Note that the CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, the CPU preparation display may be displayed whenever the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Further, in this production example, the flame effect EF101 covers the entire holding icon display area HIS, but it may cover only a part of the holding icon display area HIS, or the entire variation icon display area CIS. Alternatively, a part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. Further, although the flame effect EF101 is displayed in an opaque state in which the back side is not visible, it may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner so that the image displayed on the back side can be visually recognized.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A3) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The start point SP is displayed at one end of the meter and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter in the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, the start point SP shows that the Sabohani character SBH is waiting, and a balloon with the letters “STANDBY” is also displayed. In other words, the chance up meter is displayed in advance. This CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. In this effect example, it is shown that the chance up point displayed in the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter is not notified. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS is entirely covered and hidden by the CUM preparation display MTY, while the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually recognized without changing the display mode. It is possible. Note that the display mode of at least one of the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may change. Further, in this effect example, display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started during the display of the symbol variation before reaching reach, but display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started during display of the reach effect display after reaching reach. It may be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A4), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, a reach state is formed, and a fluctuation variation display is performed. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the shaking fluctuation display is performed may be overlapped with a part of the display during CUM preparation, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap with the display during CUM preparation.

  In FIG. 222 (A5), the “decoration 7” that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before the transition to the super reach effect has moved under the second symbol, and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that has been moved moves below the second reserved number display. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the transition to the super reach effect. In addition, when the production | generation which transfers to a super reach production is started, you may make it hide the display MTY in CUM preparation. Moreover, when the production | generation which transfers to a super reach production is started, the display MTY in CUM preparation may be displayed and may be non-displayed. Further, FIG. 222 (A5) shows a state in which the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started and the frame hung out on the lower side of the display screen while leaving the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. . FIG. 222 (A6) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed downward with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining.

  FIG. 222 (A7) shows a state in which the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed. Here, when the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, a chance up meter effect may be performed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 8A displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. An animation of a duel scene with an enemy swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the base hs0. The hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are continuously displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be deleted, or conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 222 (A9) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display displayed in the early stage (at the time of introduction) of super reach. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current reach production progress is roughly determined by the position. Is informed. The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may refer to an effect using the chance up meter CMT as an explanation effect. Here, the traveling speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur. In other words, the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 can be said to be a display of a chance up point indicating a place where a chance up has occurred, and the chance up meter CMT can increase the chance during the reach (during super reach). It can also be said that the meter indicates the location of the occurrence. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the display of the state developed to the super reach shown in FIG. 222 (A7) is started. Display may be started at the same time, display may be started when the reach state is reached, display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative pattern changes The display may be started when the display is started. Further, the timing at which the check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, may be simultaneously with the display of the chance up meter CMT, or the chance. It may be after the up meter CMT is displayed. The placard display may be started before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or the chance up meter CMT. It may be after the is displayed.

  FIG. 222 (A10) shows a state where the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. Note that the “START !!” balloon may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, or whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Regardless of this, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may always be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, it may be notified that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at checkpoints CP1 to CP3 by displaying a balloon “START !!”.

  FIG. 222 (A11) is the same effect example as the effect example shown in FIG. 29 (2). Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to 29 (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) are performed.

  In FIGS. 222 (A12) to (A13), the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (26) to (27) are performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A14), a state is shown in which the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed in a state where three “decorations 7” are arranged. At this time, a special jackpot background displayed when the background is a jackpot is displayed. The default (normal) background, the background in the pre-reading mode, the background that suggests the development of super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background that is displayed when reaching reach is displayed. Also good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (A15), the display is finalized with a combination of big-decoration decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Here, after the super reach, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden, but it may be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (the jackpot symbol mode) is stopped and displayed, the promotion to the probability big jackpot may be confirmed. .

  In this production example, the CUM preparation in-progress display is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (A9), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. It may be switched at the timing of FIG. (A4), may be switched at the timing of FIG. 222 (A5) to FIG. (A6), which is a period of transition from normal reach to super reach, or after the start of super reach, It may be switched in FIG. 222 (A7) to FIG. 222 (A13) in which super reach is being performed, or may be switched after super reach is completed. In this case, the occurrence of a chance-up notice occurring during the super reach is notified afterwards.

  In this production example, since the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach production, the display of the CUM preparation for notifying that the production by the chance up meter CMT is started is displayed. It can be said that the notice is displayed.

  In this production example, a chance up notice is generated at every checkpoint and it is a big hit, but when no chance up notice occurs at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints) Even if there is no up notice or a chance up notice at some checkpoints), it may be a big hit. For example, in FIG. 30 (18b), an example in which a big hit is shown even when the lever image 136Va is not displayed and no chance up notice is generated. Also, if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, the big-hit symbol mode may be finalized more easily than when no chance-up notices occur at all and / or some checkpoints. Good. In addition, there is no need to relate to the number of chance up notice occurrences and the likelihood of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed is more final than the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The effect example shown in FIGS. 222 (B1) to (B8) is another effect example following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever effect shown in FIG. (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, but the effect of the effect is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 222 (B3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are again displayed in the normal density. In FIG. (B4), the wipe effect is performed and the super-reach effect scene (effect) Display) and the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach production shown in FIG. 222 (A1) or the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 222 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 once becomes a wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. A change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT may also be displayed. FIG. 222 (B6) illustrates a state where the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background. In FIG. 222 (B7), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. As shown in B8), it is fixedly displayed in a pattern pattern of loss. A hold frame UI is also displayed, and a change icon h0 and a first hold icon h11 are also displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The chance up meter CMT and / or CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at the time of wipeout (FIG. 222 (B6) to FIG. 222 (B7)). The configuration may be such that the rebirth effect is easier to perform than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the revival effect is always performed when displayed, and the revival effect may or may not be performed when not displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of transition to super reach after the next change.

  In this production example, the chance up notice is generated at all checkpoints and it is lost, but if there is no chance up notice at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints) Even if there is no up-notification or a chance-up notice occurs at some checkpoints), it may be lost. In addition, if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, it may be more difficult for the big-hit symbol form to be finally displayed and confirmed than when no chance-up notices occur at all and / or some checkpoints. Good.

  In this production example, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed. However, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, when a power interruption / recovery occurs when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as a pre-reading notice, it may be deleted at the next fluctuation or may be displayed again at the start of the next fluctuation. In addition, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY at the start of the next change may be displayed when the display screen is restored after power failure / recovery, or redisplayed after the display screen is restored (for example, Redisplay by animation / no animation).

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A8), a background change notice is shown. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the sea background is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (A1), a state immediately after the symbol variation display is started during the stop display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is shown. At this time, the second decorative symbol starts to change.

  FIG. 223 (A2) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 223 (A3), a background change notice is started as a kind of notice (the change notice). The subject of the background change notice here is the symbol variation display being executed. In the background change notice, an image of a cocoon appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of a cocoon by an animation in which the cocoon is closed (see FIG. 223 (A4)). For this reason, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variation icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. Instead of the bag image, an overlapping image from the front side may appear in a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the variation icon h0. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the change icon h0 may be an effect in which images do not overlap at all. In addition to the change notice, the background change notice may be executed when a stage change effect, a prefetch notice, or a super reach suggesting background is changed.

  In the background change notice, the big hit expectation degree may be expressed by a display mode (for example, a color, a shape, a pattern, or the like) of the appearance image (here, a cocoon image). Also, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to a mountain background if the color of the coral is green. Moreover, you may notify that a prefetch zone will generate | occur | produce with the display mode of a bag. Here, the prefetch zone refers to an effect mode in which a dedicated prefetch background is displayed when there is a prefetch target hold within the hold. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 223 (A5), the bag is opened and the hold frame UI and the change icon h0 are starting to be seen, but a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY appears instead of the hold icon display area HIS is shown. At this time, the background is changed from the sea background to the super reach background. In other words, by changing to the background of super reach, it is foretold that the transition to super reach will occur in this change. In addition, as a pre-reading notice, it may be noticed that the shift to the super reach is made due to the pre-reading target change. If a plurality of types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that the super reach always corresponds to the displayed background. Note that there may be cases where it does not develop into super reach, and it may be suggested that it always develops into super reach corresponding to the background displayed on the condition that it has been reached. In addition, there may be a case of shifting to another type of super reach.

  In FIG. 223 (A6), the wrinkle is completely opened and the wrinkle image disappears. By the background change notice, the background of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed to the background of super reach. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is predicted. Note that the CUM preparing display MTY may start displaying after the haze image is completely opened. Moreover, even if the background of the super reach is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed, or may be always displayed.

  FIG. 223 (A7) shows a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is reached.

  In FIG. 223 (A8), “decoration 7” that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a moves below the second ornament symbol, and “decoration 7” that fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c The state of moving below the 2 on-hold number display is shown. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach production. FIG. 223 (A8) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed downward with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining. This example shows an example in which the reach transition effect is special. In addition, you may make it transfer to a super reach through the same process as when a normal background is displayed. At this time, an animation in which the display area CIS of the fluctuation icon moves is performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 222A8 to A15 are performed.

  223 (B1) to FIG. (B3) are the result of the production of FIG. 222 (A8) to FIG. (A11) through FIG. 223 (A1) to FIG. An example of an effect in which “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol and is lost is shown.

  FIG. 223 (B1) shows that Tono-sama is defeated by the swordsman and “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing. Thereafter, after the effects of FIGS. 222 (B2) to (B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (B2) wipes out, and the background is the background at the start of the symbol variation. It shows a return to a sea background. In FIG. 223 (B3), the wiping effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, and then loses symbol. It is displayed in a fixed manner. Further, after the wipeout, the chance up meter CMT is erased. Note that, when the background is a special background (for example, a super-reach background, etc.) at the time of wipeout, the big hit may be determined.

  FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C7) show a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 223 (C4), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It shows what is happening. At this time, the display MTY in preparation for CUM is erased, but it may be displayed.

  After that, FIG. 223 (C5) shows a state in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. At this time, the variation icon is deleted. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is being displayed.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (C6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed again so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. . Here, when the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same manner as that displayed in the previous symbol variation display, or in a different display mode (animation). It may be displayed again, or the flame effect EF101 may be displayed without an animation. Thereafter, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 223 (C7).

  That is, in this production example, the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM in-progress display MTY in FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C3) functions as a pre-reading advance notice of the production by the chance up meter in the next change. It can be said that the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in 223 (C6) to (C7) in FIG.

  In this production example, every time the symbol variation display starts, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the production by the chance up meter is performed. Count down the number of symbol fluctuation display until it is performed (for example, “2 more changes”, “1 more change”, etc.) and the chance up meter It may be displayed. That is, in some cases, the countdown display can provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode that suggests that an effect by the chance up meter is performed. Even in this case, the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY may be provided. Then, when the effect change by the chance up meter is started when the change icon is displayed in a display mode that suggests that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, the symbol change display becomes the target of the pre-reading notice. The fluctuation icon may be deleted. In addition, when the change is displayed in the display mode which suggests that the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed in the display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started. It is not necessary to delete the fluctuation icon. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the variation icon is changed (for example, a display mode that suggests that an effect by the chance up meter is performed) May be changed to a default display mode).

  In addition, when the symbol variation display is started, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and when the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter is performed, the symbol fluctuation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. When an effect by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, or the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. There may be a case where the display MTY in preparation for CUM is displayed and a case where it is not displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is hidden during the display of the chance up meter, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at a position overlapping with the chance up meter, or may be displayed at a position not overlapping. . In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter is displayed in the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading notice and the type of super reach performed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading notice. The type of super reach performed may be the same, may be different, or may be the same or different.

  FIGS. 223 (D1) to (D7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 223 (D4) -FIG. (D5), FIG. 223 (C4) -FIG. (C5) is different, and the display MTY in preparation for CUM is continuously displayed even while the decorative symbols are changing and being displayed. Is shown. An animation may be displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. In this case, the animation may be continuously performed while the symbol is stopped, or a different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. . Further, the animation may not be performed and the still image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 223 (D6) to (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY during chance up meter preparation step by step.

  FIGS. 224 (A1) to (A7) show another example in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effect shown in FIG. 224 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 224 (A2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, one start of symbol variation display is held, and the number of holds is two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a pre-reading notice is made by the hold display. Is shown. In this production example, the hold icon is displayed by blue hold, but the hold icon is displayed in another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 179 (a), etc.). Alternatively, a hold icon having a default display mode may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 224 (A4), it is confirmed that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is displayed. It is shown.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (A6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire holding icon display area HIS. This warns that there is a possibility that the display MTY in preparation for CUM may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 224 (A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice is generated, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, and the symbol variation display that is started next is the CUM. A state in which the preparation display MTY is displayed is shown. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a prefetch notice. However, when the hold that is the subject of the prefetch notice is the first hold, the CUM preparation display in the symbol variation display that is started next. MTY functions as a notice for the chance up meter CMT in the fluctuation. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a pre-reading notice and does not need to function as the notice. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as the notice, and does not have to function as the prefetch notice. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as the notice.
There is a case.

  FIGS. 224 (B1) to (B11) show another example in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (B1), since the hold is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “0” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  FIG. 224 (B2) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, one start of symbol variation display is held, and the number of holds is 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a pre-reading notice is made by the hold display. Is shown. Note that the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Further, the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) may be displayed during the execution of the increase icon of the hold icon. Further, when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) is displayed without displaying the hold icon, and / or after the hold icon is displayed and / or during execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, FIG. 224 (B4). The flame effect EF101 shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 224 (B4), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire holding icon display area HIS. This warns that there is a possibility that the display MTY in preparation for CUM may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 224 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

  In FIG. 224 (B6), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It shows what is happening. At this time, the display of the MUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

  After that, FIG. 224 (B7) shows a state in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is deleted, but the CUM preparation display MTY remains displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 224 (B8) to (B11), the hold digest animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY. A state is shown in which a variation icon moving animation is performed in which the first hold icon h11 that has been moved moves toward the center of the upper surface of the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. In this example, the same moving icon moving animation is performed regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. However, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 224 (B9 ′), an animation in which the variation icon h0 is boiled out from the center of the pedestal hs0 may be performed. Good. Note that, regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, one of the plurality of variable icon moving animations may be selected and executed.

  In this way, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as a prefetching notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

  FIGS. 224 (C1) to (C4) are diagrams showing a state in which a display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is being performed. Here, the effect shown in FIG. 224 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 224 (C2) shows a state in which the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is started and the CUM preparation display MTY rises from below the display screen. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS rises in such a manner that the hold icon display area HIS is raised to the CUM preparing display MTY. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (C3), the hold icon display area HIS is arranged above the CUM preparation display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (C3), there is only one hold in FIG. 1 and only the first hold icon h11 is displayed. However, for ease of explanation, the second hold icon h12 to the second hold icon are displayed. The 4-hold icon h14 is indicated by a broken line.

  Thereafter, when the display start animation for the CUM preparation display MTY is completed, a balloon with the letters “STANDBY” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH as shown in FIG. 224 (C4), and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Is displayed in advance. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon (in the example shown in FIG. 224 (C4), the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13). It should be noted that at least one of the four held icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon, or the entire four held icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon. Good. Further, in this effect example, the balloon is overlapped with a part of the hold icon display area HIS, but may be overlapped with the entire hold icon display area HIS.

  Note that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 224 (C3 ′) instead of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 224 (C3). Specifically, the frame of the CUM preparation display MTY may be extended upward and displayed so as to indicate the hold icon display area HIS on the upper surface of the frame. The CUM preparation display MTY may be different from the CUM preparation display MTY displayed during super reach.

  FIGS. 224 (D1) to (D2) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show another display example of the flame effect for notifying the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Yes.

  FIG. 224 (D1) shows a state in which a large flame effect EF102 different from the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 222 (A2) is displayed. The large flame effect EF102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI with difficulty in visual recognition. This large flame effect EF102 warns that a CUM preparation display is displayed. When the large flame effect EF102 is displayed, the big hit symbol pattern may be displayed more easily than when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 222 (A2) is displayed. You may make it easy to generate a chance up notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (D2), when the large flame effect EF102 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. At this time, the holding frame UI is framed downward with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining. At this time, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. Further, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. Thereafter, for example, after the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A4) to (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) are performed. The production shown in (A15) or 222 (b1) to (B8) is performed.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY in preparation for the chance up meter step by step.

  FIG. 225 (A1) to FIG. 225 (A3) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show an effect example in which a CUM preparation display is displayed in silhouette while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. .

  The effect example shown in FIG. 225 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A2). Thereafter, in FIG. 225 (A2), during display of the flame effect EF101, a CUM preparation silhouette display MTYa simulating the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a form displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. . At this time, the CUM-preparing silhouette display MTYa is displayed in black as a whole, and a state is displayed as if the silhouette is displayed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa during CUM preparation also functions as a notice that the chance up meter CMT will produce an effect. In addition, it is suggested that a plurality of display modes of the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM are prepared, and the display mode is changed (promoted), so that the occurrence rate of the chance up notice is increased in the performance by the chance up meter CMT. You may make it suggest, and it may be suggested that the reliability of jackpot increases.

  After that, a reach state is formed, and FIG. 225 (A3) shows a state of transition to super reach. During this time, the silhouette display MTYa during CUM preparation is continuously displayed. Note that the CUM preparation silhouette display MTYa may be deleted while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. In this case, for example, the deletion animation is performed when the CUM preparation silhouette display MTYa is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be hidden without the erase animation. Thereafter, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (25) are performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A12) to (A15) are performed. ) Or the effects shown in FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. 222 (B8) are performed.

  225 (B1) to FIG. 225 (B6) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show other effects examples of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

  FIG. 225 (B1) shows a state where the wipe effect has started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from a lower left corner portion to an upper right corner portion of the display screen in a display manner as if the calendar is touched. In FIG. 225 (B1), the wipe effect is started in a state where the sea background is displayed, but the background does not change before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 225 (B1), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the position where the hold icon display area HIS was displayed, and it is predicted that the production by the chance up meter is started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a visible manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B2), the display area after switching (the drowned back side) is enlarged, and most of the display MTY in preparation for CUM is visible. In addition, in the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a pre-reading notice or a change notice concerning the chance up meter CMT may be given.

  FIG. 225 (B3) shows a state where the display area after switching is further enlarged. It should be noted that a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM preparation display MTY and a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT may be partly visible when the background fades in the wipe effect. The in-preparation display MTY and other notices may be visible. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 225 (B4) to (B6), the display area after switching is enlarged so that the background is blurred, and the display area after switching is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B6). Are all visible. Thereafter, for example, after the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A4) to (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) are performed. ) To (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) to (B8). In the state of FIG. 225 (B1), the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. May be. Further, a rank-up CUM preparing display MTY, which will be described later, may be displayed after the wipe effect. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, or the ranked CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

  FIG. 225 (C1) to FIG. 225 (C4) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A1), and show other examples of effects of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

  FIG. 225 (C1) shows a state in which the background screen switching effect is started. As shown in FIG. 225 (C1), this background image switching effect is obtained by reducing the background image before switching and then displaying the right side of the background image before switching in the depth direction as shown in FIG. 225 (C2). The image is moved and displayed on the right side in the depth direction, and the background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after switching is displayed in such a manner that the left side is directed in the depth direction. The background image after switching shows a state in which the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the display position of the hold icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. In addition, in a state where the background image before switching and the background image after switching are displayed side by side, the background image after switching may not be displayed and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, in the background screen switching effect, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, but the display other than the CUM preparation display MTY (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes) is changed. It may be displayed in the background image. In addition, the background image after switching may be a background image of a notice, for example, a background image on which an intense heat notice is displayed may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 225 (C3), the background image before switching is deleted, and the background image after switching including the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is reduced and displayed. Thereafter, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 225 (C4). Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A4) to (A11) are performed. 29 (3) to FIG. 25 (25), and then the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 225 (D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, and the warning notice is displayed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display on which the notice display of gas is displayed may be a loss determination. Further, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the notice display of the gas is displayed. In addition, even when the flame effect EF101 is displayed after the next change in which the notice display of gas is performed when there is one or more holds at the time when the symbol change display in which gas display is displayed is started, Good. In this case, a pattern (a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed until the end) is displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started, and the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice. There may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is finally displayed.

  FIG. 225 (E1) to FIG. 225 (E9) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show how a timer notice effect is being performed.

  FIG. 225 (E1) to FIG. 225 (E2) show a state in which the timer notice display TMY rises from below from the hold icon display area HIS, and the hold icon display area HIS is lifted by the timer notice display TMY. At this time, the letters “STANDBY” are displayed on the timer advance notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer advance notice is suspended. When the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TMY in this effect example is performed, it is notified that the hold icon or the change icon changes. Compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 224 (C2), it may be possible to grasp whether or not the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the Sabohani character SBH appears. It may be difficult to specify whether the CUM preparation display MTY or the timer advance notice TMY is displayed. Before the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer announcement display TMY are displayed, for example, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is deleted, the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer announcement display TMY are displayed. Either of them may be displayed. The timer notice in this production example is a notice of a change in the hold icon (fluctuation icon), but the timer notice as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, 38, and 40 to 48 was performed. Needless to say, any notice effect executed as a result can be performed. Further, the display mode of the timer notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 225, and any display form of the timer notice display described above can be applied. In this example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. And the area in which the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be overlapped or may be displayed so as not to overlap.

  In FIG. 225 (E3), the display on the timer notice display TMY is changed to “10:00”, and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (fluctuation icon) may change when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown in the timer notice display is started. Note that the start timing of the countdown in the timer notice display is not limited to that described above. For example, after the “STANDBY” display is changed to the number of seconds, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. In addition, the number of seconds may be displayed from the stage when the display of the timer preview display TMY is started. In this case, the countdown may be started after the display animation of the timer preview display TMY is completed. The countdown may be started from the stage where the display of TMY is started.

  FIG. 225 (E4) shows a state in which 0.01 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Thereafter, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, the timer display becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. 225 (E5).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (E6), the timer notice display TMY switches from “00:00” to “change!” And overlaps at least a part of the first hold icon h11. Thus, the effect EF103 is displayed and the change icon change animation is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change animation of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of “change!”, Or “change!” Is displayed after the change animation of the hold icon is started. Alternatively, the change icon change animation may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of “change!”.

  Thereafter, when the change animation of the hold icon ends and the effect EF103 is deleted, as shown in FIG. 225 (E7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is changed to the blue hold display mode. . That is, a state in which the rank of the hold icon is increased by two levels is shown. Note that the rank of the hold icon may be increased by one step before and after the change animation of the hold icon, or may be increased by three or more steps. In addition, the rank may be lowered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 225 (E8) to (E9), the timer preview display TMY is subjected to a frame-out animation that is framed out below the display screen. By this frame-out animation, the hold icon display area HIS is also lowered and returned to the default display position.

  In this effect example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM in-progress display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is further moved upward and displayed below the timer notice display TMY. The CUM preparation in progress display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the end of the timer notice effect, and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed after the symbol variation started next after the timer notice effect ends, and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

  FIG. 225 (F1) to FIG. 225 (F2) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A2), for example, and show other display modes of the CUM preparing display MTY.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). That is, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of a check point (in this effect example, the second check point CP2) where a chance-up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is made before it is done. In this case, a chance-up notice may be always performed at the check point previously notified by the CUM preparing display MTY. Further, when the check point is notified in advance by the CUM preparation display MTY, a chance-up notice may be generated more easily than when the check point is not notified. In addition, in the CUM preparation display MTY, some or all of the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In this case, the checkpoint may be displayed according to the probability of occurrence of the chance-up notice, or the checkpoint may be displayed regardless of the probability of occurrence. Thereafter, after the effects shown in FIGS. 222A4 to A7 are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 225F2 are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 225 (F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A8), except that a checkpoint is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and the description thereof will be omitted. A checkpoint is displayed when the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started, and is also displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a reach occurs or shifts to a super reach) after the display of the CUM preparation display MTY starts. You may make it increase a checkpoint.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display mode of the display MTY during chance up meter preparation.

  FIG. 226 (A1) to FIG. 226 (A3) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A3), for example. At least a part of the check points are displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the check The point shows that the chance advance notice is always executed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 225 (F1). In FIG. 226 (A1), the second checkpoint CP2 displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice. Is displayed in the information, and as shown in FIG. 29 (6) and described above, this is a display mode for notifying that a chance-up notice has occurred. That is, in this production example, by performing this display, it is notified that a chance-up notice is always performed. It should be noted that the chance-up notice may not actually be performed, and in this case, the game may proceed as if the chance-up notice was performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A2) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F2). As shown in FIG. 22 (A2), the second checkpoint CP2 remains marked with red even after the transition to the super reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other check points (first check point CP1, third check point CP3) that are not displayed are displayed. Then, the production by the chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (A3 ′), the display of the second checkpoint CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 226 (A3) and FIG. (A3 ′), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. 25 (25) are performed, and then FIG. 222 (A12) to FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. In the case where a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance that the chance check up may not be given by the displayed checkpoints. The up notice may be made without fail, or the chance up notice may or may not be given. In addition, in the case where a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM ready display MTY, the game may proceed as though the chance up notice was not actually performed, but the chance up notice was made. In this case, a checkpoint that is considered to have been a chance up may or may not notify that a chance up notice has occurred, and may or may not be notified. Also good.

  FIG. 226 (B1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (B1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a red-marked manner in the CUM preparation display MTY, but “UP” indicating that a notice has appeared is not displayed. It is shown. In this case, for example, “UP” may be displayed after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and a chance up notice is generated.

  FIG. 226 (C1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (C1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, but it is not marked in red, and the characters “UP” are not displayed. It shows how a “question mark” is displayed instead of a letter. This suggests that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur at some check points in the production by the chance up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of “question mark” <“!” <“UP”.

  FIG. 226 (D1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (D1), all the checkpoints displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and characters such as “question mark”, “!”, “UP” are displayed for each checkpoint. An additional note may indicate the expected degree of occurrence of a chance-up notice for each checkpoint.

  FIG. 226 (E1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). FIG. 226 (E1) shows a state in which the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY changes from “STANDBY” to “chance up highly likely”. When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance up notice is likely to occur at each check point in the production by the chance up meter CMT. In a balloon, after “STANDBY” is displayed once, it may change to “chance up highly accurate”, or “STANDBY” and “chance up highly accurate” are alternately displayed. May be. In addition, “STANDBY” may be displayed instead of “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 226 (F1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). FIG. 226 (F1) shows a state in which the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY changes from “STANDBY” to “Chance Up Once Confirmed”. When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance up notice is always generated once in the production by the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is difficult to specify at which checkpoint the chance-up notice is generated, but the chance-up notice is always generated n times (in this production example, once). Is foretold. It should be noted that the number of chance-up notices that must be generated may be one or two or more. In the balloon, “STANDBY” may be displayed once and then changed to “Chance Up Once Confirmed”, or “STANDBY” display and “Chance Up Once Confirmed” display may be switched alternately. May be. In addition, “STANDBY” is displayed instead of “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 226 (G1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (G1), a placard displaying “V” is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is informed that the big hit is confirmed. In addition to “V”, for example, a placard on which “development” is displayed may be arranged, and in this case, it may be notified that it is determined that super reach will be developed. . In addition, by placing a placard with a “question mark” on it, when a Sabohani character reaches the final point, it will / do not develop any kind of performance (for example, superreach development, superreach development) It may be suggested that a pattern production or the like is performed. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is alert | reported that a certain effect is performed by a placard, there may be a case where it does not perform what kind of effect.

  FIG. 226 (H1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (H1), a placard displaying “Intense heat” is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (a) a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In some cases, (b) a pre-reading notice and / or notice notice regarding the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be performed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of (a) described above, or may be performed only in the case of (b) described above.

  FIG. 226 (I1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (I1), a placard displaying “V” is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and a display that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP is performed. And it is informing that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH may be displayed at the start point SP, and may be displayed at the final point GP. May be left as is. Even when “V” is displayed on the placard, there may be a case where a big hit or a case where a big hit is not made. In addition, (a) when a notice notification related to the symbol variation display in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed, or (b) a pre-reading notice and / or notice notification regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It may be done. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of (a) described above, or may be performed only in the case of (b) described above.

  FIG. 226 (J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (I1), and shows a state in which a savory character SBH is also displayed at the start point SP. That is, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is arranged at both the start point SP and the final point GP, thereby notifying that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH at the start point SP may be moved and displayed, or may not be moved and displayed. The Sabohani character SBH at the start point SP may be deleted, and only the Sabohani character SBH displayed at the final point GP may remain displayed.

  FIG. 226 (K1) to FIG. 226 (K2) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A2), for example, and another notice display is shown during display of the CUM preparation display MTY. ing. FIG. 226 (K1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (K2), it is shown that the conversation notice is started during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. Needless to say, a notice other than the conversation notice may be given during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY. In this production example, the CUM preparation display TMY is started before other notices. However, other notices (for example, a hold icon and a change icon) that always start before the CUM preparation display TMY are displayed. For example, a notice that the display mode of the icon changes, a notice that starts when the change starts, or the like, or another notice that always starts simultaneously with the CUM preparation display TMY. Also, other notices of the same type may be displayed at the same timing as when the display is started before the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be started after the display. In addition, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, other notices may not be performed, and only a specific notice among a plurality of kinds of notices can be executed. It may not be executed. For example, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the change effect of the display mode of the non-displayed hold icon may not be performed or may be performed. Specifically, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the “change” notice display appears from the “box” notice icon YI shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, and then the hold icon and the change icon are displayed. A notice effect that changes the aspect may be performed or may not be performed. Further, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, an icon change notice by the “bomber” icon IHI shown in FIGS. 208 to 221 may be executed. In this case, for example, the “bomber” icon IHI or The effect displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombed hold icon, and the change icon may be displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to overlap.

  FIGS. 226 (L1) to (L2) are examples of effects following FIG. 222 (A3), for example, and an example in which only a partial display of the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparing display. Show. In FIG. 226 (L1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the “STANDBY” balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and the other components are not displayed. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified in advance. In addition, the structure to display is not limited to what was mentioned above, You may display any as long as it is a part of element which comprises display MTY in preparation for CUM. FIG. 226 (L2) shows a state in which the state has subsequently shifted to super reach. As shown in FIG. 226 (L2), after a part of the display is performed as the CUM preparation display, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the CUM preparation display component is added as the time elapses.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (M1) to (M7) correspond to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (8). That is, in FIG. 29 (3), after the production by the chance-up meter CMT is started, the Sabohani character SBH progresses on the meter, but in FIG. 226 (M1), the chance increases inside. Although an effect is provided by the meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM preparation in progress display MTY remains displayed. Thereafter, FIG. 226 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4) shows that the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being made due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. However, since the chance up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY remains displayed, it is difficult to recognize the progress of the performance in the chance up meta CMT. Also, in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the words “chance up BOY passed” is displayed to notify the occurrence of a chance up notice, whereas in FIG. 226 (M3), CUM is being prepared. Since the display MTY remains displayed, such notification is not performed. Thereafter, also in FIG. 226 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29 (6), the CUM preparing display MTY remains displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is the letter “UP”. It is displayed at the top and shows the history of the advance notice. Thereafter, in FIG. 226 (M5), the CUM preparing display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (7) corresponding to FIG. 226 (M5), the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (M6), the balloon of the Sabohan character SBH is erased, suggesting that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 226 (M7) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 29 (8). In this production example, as described above, the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed inside, and the first check point CP1 is marked in red as the history of the chance up notice at the first check point CP1. In addition, the characters “UP” are also displayed. Note that the position of the Sabohani character SBH has reached the vicinity of the second check point CP2, and notifies that a chance up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 may occur.

  As described above, in the production example shown in FIGS. 226 (M1) to (M7), while the production by the chance up meter CMT progresses with the start of the super reach, the super reach is performed as the display. It is shown that the CUM preparation in progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT in the middle. At this time, for the chance-up notice (the appearance of a bouy) corresponding to the first check point CP1 that occurred during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed after the chance-up notice has occurred. It is displayed as a history. Note that it may not be displayed as a history. In addition, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be a timing at which the super reach starts or may be a timing in the middle of the super reach. When it is the timing of the start of super reach, the big hit symbol pattern may be displayed more easily than when the timing is in the middle of super reach, and vice versa. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or the timing at which the super reach is in progress.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display mode of the display during the chance up meter preparation.

  FIGS. 227 (A1) to (A9) show a modification of the display mode of the CUM preparation display. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 227 (A3) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTYb in a different form from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3) is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3) is displayed at a position where the display position overlaps the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM in-progress display MTYb is displayed in a form in which a letter “Preparing meter” is attached in a rectangular frame. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (A4) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 227 (A4) to (A8) are the same as those shown in FIG. 222 (A4), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. Since the effects shown in (A8) are the same, description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 227 (A9) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, the CUM preparing display MTYb may be erased by the chance up meter switching animation, and a display in which the chance up meter CMT appears may be performed. For example, the chance up meter switching animation may be such that the chance up meter CMT appears after the effect is deleted after the effect is displayed and the CUM preparation display MTYb is hidden. Note that the switch-up display may be performed from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance-up meter CMT without performing the chance up meter switching animation. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to (A15) or the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (B1) to (B8) are performed. In this production example, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, a balloon with the letters “START !!!!” may be displayed or no balloon may be displayed.

  FIGS. 227 (B1) to (B5) illustrate another mode in which the CUM ready display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3) appears. FIG. 227 (B1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 228 (A1).

  FIGS. 227 (B1) to (B2) show that the CUM preparation display MTYb rises from below from the hold icon display area HIS, and the hold icon display area HIS is lifted by the CUM preparation display MTYb. Yes.

  FIG. 227 (B3) shows a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol and the reach state is reached.

  In FIG. 227 (B4), “decoration 7” that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before the transition to the super reach effect has moved under the second symbol, and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that has been moved moves below the second reserved number display. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTYb is continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. In FIG. 227 (B4), the erase animation is started and the holding frame UI moves downward. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the CUM preparing display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to visually recognize as shown in FIG. 227 (B5). The variable icon display area CIS is framed out below the display screen, leaving the base hs0. That is, FIG. 227 (B5) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed downward with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining. In this production example, the erase animation is performed at the timing when the hold icon is not displayed, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the erase animation.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the display during the chance up meter preparation.

  FIGS. 228A1 to A11 show a modification of the display position of the CUM preparing display MTY. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 228 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 228 (A2), the explosion effect EF104 is displayed in the center of the left side of the display screen, and the appearance of the CUM-preparing display appearance animation is shown. That is, in this effect example, the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is not started in the hold icon display area HIS, but the display is started at the upper left portion of the display screen. The explosion effect EF104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, the CUM preparing display MTY may appear without performing the CUM preparing display appearance animation. That is, the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF104.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A3), when the explosion effect EF104 is deleted, the CUM preparation display MTY appears. The display position of the CUM ready display MTY is substantially the center of the left end portion of the display screen, unlike FIG. 222 (A3). In this example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 228 (A4) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol to reach a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than the state where the decorative design is not overlapped by the CUM preparation display MTY. ing. The CUM preparation display MTY may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design.

  In FIG. 228 (A5), “decoration 7” that has fluctuated and fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before the transition to the super reach effect has moved below the second decorative symbol and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that has been moved moves below the second reserved number display. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the transition to the super reach effect. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative design. Note that, even when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (A4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (A5). May be displayed overlapping the rear side of the decorative design. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Further, FIG. 228 (A5) shows a state in which the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started and the screen is scrolled out to the lower side of the display screen while leaving the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A6) to (A8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A6) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A6) to (A8), except that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 228 (A9) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 228 (A10), when the CUM preparing display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), while the CUM preparation display MTY. Sabohani character SBH may start moving at the same time as switching to chance up meter CMT (the latter). Also, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to move may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only for the former or only the latter. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (B1) to FIG. 228 (B5) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 228 (A2).

  In FIG. 228 (B1), unlike FIG. 228 (A3), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed in a size larger than the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY may be the same as or different from the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may be the same or different.

  FIG. 228 (B2) shows a state in which the reduced-size CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and the state is shifted to super reach. Thereafter, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves is started at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (B3). At this time, the balloon with “STANDBY” is deleted. Note that the balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as will be described later, the balloon may be erased after the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be erased before being enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 228 (B4) shows a state in which the moving animation is completed and the CUM ready display MTY has moved to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM ready display MTY is enlarged and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Note that the display position may be switched without performing moving animation. In this case, the display size of the display MTY in preparation for CUM is reduced from before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY may be enlarged after the movement animation is completed, the movement animation may start after the enlargement display, or the CUM preparation display MTY is moved by the movement animation. While the image is being displayed, the display may be gradually enlarged. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM ready display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 228 (B5), the CUM ready display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the chance up. Production by the meter CMT is started.

  228 (C1) to (C4) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 228 (A2).

  Unlike FIG. 228 (A3), FIG. 228 (C1) shows an example in which only a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparation display. In FIG. 228 (C1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the “STANDBY” balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and other configurations are not displayed. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified in advance. In addition, the structure to display is not limited to what was mentioned above, You may display any as long as it is a part of element which comprises display MTY in preparation for CUM.

  FIG. 228 (C2) shows a state in which the state has subsequently shifted to super reach. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (C3), a switching animation, which is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF105 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display, and the state in which the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the explosion effect EF105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and as shown in FIG. 228 (C4), a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation, or the switching animation may be performed to switch from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, the display may be switched from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the display during the chance up meter preparation.

  FIG. 229 (A1) to FIG. 229 (A11) show a modification of the display mode and display position of the display during CUM preparation. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 229 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 229 (A2), the explosion effect EF106 is displayed in the center of the left side of the display screen, and the appearance of the CUM preparation display appearance animation is shown. That is, in this effect example, the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is not started in the hold icon display area HIS, but the display is started at the upper left portion of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, as will be described later, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYc is different. The explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, the CUM preparation display MTYc may appear without performing the CUM preparation display animation. That is, the CUM preparing display MTYc may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF106.

  FIG. 229 (A3) shows a state in which the CUM preparing display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is a display mode different from that in FIG. 228 (A3), and is a mode in which characters being meter-prepared are displayed in a square frame.

  FIG. 229 (A4) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol to reach a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTYc is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where the decorative design is not overlapped by the CUM preparation display MTYc. ing. The CUM preparation display MTYc may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 229 (A5) to (A8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 229 (A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A5) to (A8) in that the display mode of the display MTYc during CUM preparation is different. Since it is the same, explanation is omitted.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (A9), a switching animation, which is an animation for switching from the CUM preparing display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display MTYc, and the state in which the CUM preparation display MTYc disappears is displayed. In addition, although the display mode of this switching animation is the same as the CUM preparation display appearance animation shown in FIG. 229 (A2) and described above, a different display mode may be used. In addition, the display mode of the switching animation and the display appearance animation during CUM preparation may be the same display mode or different display modes. Further, the switching animation may not be performed.

  Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 229 (A10), the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the appearance animation in which the chance up meter CMT appears is started. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearance animation. Moreover, there may be a case where an appearance animation is performed and a case where it is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the appearance animation is completed and the flame effect EF101 is erased, a chance up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 229 (A11), and then an effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  FIGS. 229 (B1) to (B8) show an example in which the timer notice display functions as a CUM preparing display.

  FIG. 229 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating 1 is displayed. Further, a variation icon h0 is also displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. In FIG. 229 (B1), the timer notice effect has been started. For example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and is displayed on the center left side of the display screen. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “60:00”. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 229 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, a reach state is formed, and a fluctuation variation display is performed. ing. At this time, the timer preview display TM1 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the timer preliminary notification TM1. . The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. In addition, while this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, another type of timer notice display disclosed in this specification may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer notice display may be the same as or different from the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 229 (B2). Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be always displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the kind of notice that is performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display being “00:00” may be different depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen). In this case, the timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM preparation display, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, the timer display countdown is performed, so that the pseudo-ream is executed. Good). Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B2), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “15:00”.

  In FIG. 229 (B3), “decoration 7” that fluctuated and fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before moving to the super reach production moved below the second decorative symbol and fluctuated and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that has been moved moves below the second reserved number display. In this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is also continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. In addition, when the production | generation which transfers to a super reach production is started, you may make it non-display timer notice display TM1, and may display it, and may hide. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B3), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “10:57”. In FIG. 229 (B3), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the state where the frame hung out on the lower side of the display screen is left leaving the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. . FIG. 229 (B4) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:21”.

  FIG. 229 (B5) shows a state in which the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “05:53”. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 5B shows a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. An animation of a duel scene with an enemy swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the base hs0. The hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are continuously displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be deleted, or conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 229 (B7) shows a state in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the super reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (B8), a switching animation which is an animation for switching from the timer notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the timer advance notice display TM1, and a state in which the display during CUM preparation disappears is displayed. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 229 (A10) to (A11) are performed. In this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is displayed. There may be a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed (a warning notice display by a timer notice display). In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or another notice may be given. Also good.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the chance up meter effect is performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed in the period shown in FIGS. 230A1 to A5 are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 222A1 to A8, and FIGS. The effects performed in the period shown in FIG. (A14) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 29 (2) to (11), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, when the player depresses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A15), as shown in FIG. 230 (A16), a Tono-like cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) is displayed. . Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example includes a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and the gold cut-in image CI3. The reliability of the big hit increases in the order of a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image, and a gold cut-in image. Note that a cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. This weak cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image having a display mode different from the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer in the vertical direction than the gold cut-in image CI3. This is a weak cut-in image that is short, surrounded by a green frame, and shows a sword swinging with a shout of “Ikuze!”. The weak cut-in image CI3b has a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3, but suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high, but may indicate that the reliability does not change. . That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2 is not displayed, and a state in which no chance up notice has occurred is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 230 (A17), the second check point CP2 is not marked with a red marking, and indicates that no chance-up notice has occurred above the second check point CP2. “×” is displayed, and a history that no chance-up notice has occurred has been shown. It should be noted that it is not necessary to leave a history of the absence of the chance-up notice when the chance-up notice has not occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint). Passing through CP1 as it is, the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the characters “UP” may not be performed. As shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′), the display at the first checkpoint CP1 is erased. In addition, when a chance-up notice does not occur, a history may or may not be left, which is the case in any of the embodiments described herein. It should be noted that this weak cut-in image CI3b shown in Fig. 230 (A16) has an effect button 136 within the operation effective period. It may be displayed on the condition that it has been created, or it may be displayed when the production button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and this is shown in FIG. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed even when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. May be always displayed, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. And the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed when the operation effective period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A18), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 230 (A19) uses the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice. Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A20), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH has started to move and is positioned before the final point GP. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows a state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Note that the Sabohani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, since the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, the red marking is not attached at the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT, and the third check point CP3 is located above the third check point CP3. “×” indicating that the chance up notice has not occurred is displayed, and the history that the chance up notice has not occurred is displayed.

  Thereafter, the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A22), but the operations of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not performed, and FIG. 230 (A23). As shown, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 230 (A25), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed at the normal density again. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (B4) to (B8) are performed. In this effect example, a chance-up notice is not generated at the third check point CP3, the button image 136a is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 may be operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and a big hit result may be derived. Further, when no chance up notice is generated at the third checkpoint CP3, it may be suggested that the loss has been confirmed. In addition, when the production in this production example is performed, there may be a case where it finally loses and a big hit, in which case the case where the final display mode is finally displayed, You may comprise so that the production | presentation of this production example may generate | occur | produce more easily than the case where a jackpot display mode is finally displayed.

  In this production example, only one of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 is notified of a chance up, and then a losing is shown. However, in any of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3, There may be a case where a chance-up notice is made and then a losing may be derived, or there may be a case where a losing is derived without any chance-up notice being made at any checkpoint. In addition, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, at least one chance up advance notice may be performed, or even when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up advance notice is performed once. May not occur, the chance up notice may occur one or more times, or the chance up notice may be generated at all check points. It goes without saying that this can be applied to any of the chance-up notice effects disclosed in this specification.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating a state in which another pattern of the chance up meter effect performed during the super reach effect is performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 231 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 231 (A3) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 230 (A3), when the background color of the balloon displayed near the Sabohani character SBH is red and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white The chance up notice is more likely to occur, and the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed. When the background color of the balloon is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). There may be cases where a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the balloon is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. Further, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the balloon is displayed in a rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. In this example, the background color of the balloon is changed. However, the shape of the balloon may be changed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 231 (A4) to (A14) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 231 (A4) to (A14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 230 (A4) to 230 (A14) except that the background color of the balloon is different, so the description is omitted. .

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (A15), as shown in FIG. 231 (A16), the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13) described above is displayed. Is displayed. At this timing, only the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, and the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Only when it is displayed, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed or when it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, a chance up notice is given. It is determined that a notification (for example, a balloon with the letters “chance-up gold cut-in” in FIG. 231) is displayed and the weak cut-in image CI3b and the red cut-in image are displayed. If it is displayed or displayed, a notification indicating that a chance up has occurred is not displayed, but the red cut-in image is not displayed. Similarly, the notification may be performed in the same manner as the gold cut-in image CI3. In this case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image is displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image is displayed are only written in characters. And other display modes (for example, speech balloons) may be different. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 231 (A16) to (A26) are performed. The effects performed in the period of FIGS. 231 (A16) to (A26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (26), and thus the description thereof is omitted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A13) to (A15) are performed. In this production example, even if the production lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (A23), the various production movable bodies shown in FIG. 231 (A24) may not operate and a loss may be derived. In this case, the case where the jackpot display mode is finally displayed may be more likely to produce the effect of this example than the case where the loss display mode is finally displayed. Good.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram for describing an example of a change effect of the display mode of the display during the chance up meter preparation.

  FIGS. 232 (A1) to (A3) are modified examples of FIG. 231 (A3), and the CUM ready display MTYb shown in FIGS. 227 (A1) to (A9) is displayed in another display mode. It shows how it is.

  FIG. 232 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 227 (A2). FIG. 232 (A1) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTYb is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 232 (A1) is the same as the CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3), but the background color is red, and the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is A chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case of white, and the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed. When the background color of the CUM ready display MTYb is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this production example). In some cases, the chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three check points. Further, even when the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice is generated. Further, when the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, chance up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when displayed in rainbow colors, the big hit may be determined. In this example, the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is changed. However, the shape of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be changed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 232 (A2) to (A3) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 232 (A1) to (A3) are the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (A3) to (A9), except that the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different. Since it is the same as that, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B4) are modified examples of FIG. 231 (A3), and show how the background color of the balloon changes during display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 232 (B1) are the same as those in FIG. 222 (A3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (B2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is enveloped in red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Has been. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is performed by the Sabohani character SBH which is a component of the CUM preparing display MTY.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), it is notified that the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after the rank increase, but may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank increase may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, It may be notified that the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY after the change is changed to a rainbow color and the jackpot is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow, it may be notified that the big hit is fixed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 notifies the CUM preparation display MTY to be ranked up, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

  Thereafter, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 232 (B4) is a modified example of FIG. 231 (A4), and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 232 (C1) to (C6) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

  FIG. 232 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 222 (A3), and shows a state in which the notice icon YI is stocked. This notice icon YI appears, for example, in any production example shown in FIGS. 180 to 207.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 232 (C2), the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is a display form in which the box is closed is used, and the display is changed to the form d which is a display form in which the box is opened, and is ranked up from the box. An animation is displayed in which a notice display of “UP” is announced. The “UP” display that appears here is a display for notifying the rank-up of the CUM preparing display MTY. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 232 (C3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 232 (C4), the promotion animation using the notice display of “UP” is started. In FIG. 232 (C4), after the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF108 in the right symbol display area 208c, it is turned to the balloon displayed near the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown flying and hitting the balloon. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation is performed when the promotion animation is performed and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. There may be a case where the display MTY in preparation for CUM ranks up without being displayed. As described above, in this effect example, a notice display is performed using elements other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (C5), it is notified that the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Note that after the rank of the CUM ready display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color. In addition, there may be a case where the display MTY being prepared for CUM is not ranked up despite the promotion animation being performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 232 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation variation display is performed. It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 232 (D1) to (D3) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 232 (D1) is the same as that in FIG. 222 (A3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (D2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the effect EF109 in which the entire CUM preparation display MTY is enveloped in a large flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is informed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display MTY and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (D3), it is notified that the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red, and the CUM ready display MTY is ranked up. Note that after the rank of the CUM ready display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color. Further, even if the effect EF109 notifies the CUM preparation display MTY to be ranked up, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up. Also, as shown in FIG. 232 (D2 ′), the color of the flame effect EF109 may be the same color as the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY after the change (in this production example, red). Thus, the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank increase may be notified in advance. Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (D3 ′), the balloon color of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank increase may change to a rainbow color. In this case, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. The As shown in FIG. 231 (A3), the balloon color of the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in rainbow from the beginning.

  FIGS. 232 (E1) to (E6) show an effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer notice being displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 232 (E1) is the same as that in FIG. 222 (A3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (E2), the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “03:00”, and a certain notice is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started (in this example, the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up) Is suggested to be done. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display MTY and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 232 (E3) to (E4), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00” is reached.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 232 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (E6), it is notified that the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red, and the CUM ready display MTY is ranked up. Note that after the rank of the CUM ready display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the display during preparation for the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 233 (A1) to FIG. 7 (A7), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variations. The effect pattern which ranks up in the case is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C6), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 233 (A7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again. In this production example, as a result of the redisplay, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH is changed from white to red, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Note that after the rank of the CUM ready display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color. For example, the background color of the speech balloon in this production example is prepared in three types: white (default color), red (high expectation), and rainbow (big hit confirmed), both before and after redisplay A pattern that does not change in white, a pattern that does not change in red before and after redisplay, a pattern that does not change in rainbow color before and after redisplay, and a white that redisplays before redisplay The pattern that changes to red afterwards, the pattern that changes to white after redisplaying, and the pattern that changes to red after redisplaying, the pattern that changes to red after redisplaying, and white in the first stage It is configured to be displayed in any one of the following display patterns: a red color after the first redisplay and a rainbow color after the second redisplay. In addition, a display mode speech bubble that is an expectation level between a white background speech bubble and a red background speech bubble, or a display level that is an expectation between a red background speech bubble and a rainbow background speech bubble. A balloon of an aspect may be prepared. Further, there may be a display form of a speech balloon (for example, a speech balloon with a blinking white display mode) suggesting that the background color of the speech balloon may change. This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

  In FIG. 233 (B1) to FIG. 8 (B8), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading advance notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variations. This shows another effect pattern that ranks up in some cases. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (D1) to (D6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 233 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is enveloped in red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is shown. Note that the timing at which the display of the effect EF107 in which the Sabohan character SBH is enveloped in flames is started and the rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is not limited to the above, but may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols may be determined and displayed, or another reach effect may be displayed. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up may be any of the timings described above.

  When the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed as described above, the background color of the balloon displayed near the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 233 (B8). , It is notified that the display MTY during CUM preparation has been upgraded. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after the rank increase, but may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank increase may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, It may be notified that the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY after the change is changed to a rainbow color and the jackpot is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow, it may be notified that the big hit is fixed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 causes the CUM preparation display MTY to be ranked up, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

  233 (C1) to (C4) show another display mode of the CUM ready display MTY that has been upgraded.

  FIG. 233 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and shows a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3), and the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. Thus, a chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case where the color of the meter portion is white, and the jackpot symbol pattern is more easily displayed. When the color of the meter portion is red, a chance up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). There may be cases where a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the meter portion is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice is generated. In addition, when the color of the meter portion is red, chance up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the meter portion is displayed in a rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Moreover, in this production example, although the example which changes the color of a meter part was shown, you may make it change the shape of a meter part. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (C2) to (C4) are performed. In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (C2) to (C4) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from that described above. Therefore, explanation is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white and a default display mode is obtained. Note that the color of the meter portion may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  233 (D1) to (D4) show other display modes of the rank-up CUM preparing display MTY.

  FIG. 233 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and shows a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM ready display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM ready display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3), and the color of the savory character SBH itself that constitutes the CUM ready display MTY Is red, a chance-up notice is more likely to occur than when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color, and the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. If the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example) There may be cases where a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice is generated. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, chance chance advance notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when displayed in rainbow colors, the big hit may be determined. In this example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed. However, the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (D2) to (D4) are performed. In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (D2) to (D4) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from that described above. Therefore, explanation is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 233 (D4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the Sabohani character SBH becomes the default color and the default display mode. Even after the switch-up display on the chance up meter CMT, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be red.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the display during the chance up meter preparation.

  FIG. 234 (A1) to FIG. 234 (A4) show other display modes of the CUM preparing display MTY.

  FIG. 234 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and shows a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started. In this production example, the display mode of the CUM ready display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM ready display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), and the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM ready display MTY is a princess. The character HME is changed to the character HME, and the case where the big hit symbol display mode is fixedly displayed than the case where the lost symbol display mode is fixedly displayed is more suitable for the princess character HME than when the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. It is easy to display. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this production example). A chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the princess character HME is displayed, there may be a case where the chance-up notice never occurs. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the chance up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be fixed. In this example, the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohani character SBH. However, a character other than the princess character HME may be displayed. Further, the player may select a character displayed in the CUM ready display MTY in advance. For example, when the player sets the princess character HME to appear in advance, the CUM is being prepared. The princess character HME may be displayed on the display MTY, and when the character to appear is not selected, the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed as a default character. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 234 (A2) to (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 234 (A2) to (A4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 231 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from that described above. Therefore, explanation is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 234 (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the savory character SBH. Note that the princess character HME may continue to be displayed even after being switched to the chance up meter CMT.

  FIGS. 234 (B1) to (B7) show other patterns of the rank-up effect of the display MTY being prepared for CUM.

  FIG. 234 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and shows a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 234 (B2), a small button image 136as and a small remaining time display meter MTs are displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohan character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. The state of prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is shown. Note that the operation valid period has not yet started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B2).

  Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B3), and in FIG. 234 (B4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MTs according to the elapsed time from the start of the operation effective period. It is shown that is decreasing. A plurality of button images may be displayed including the small button image 136as. In this case, all the displayed button images can be handled by one operation of the effect button 136. An operation to be performed may be accepted, or only an operation corresponding to any one of the button images may be accepted. In addition, when the button effect relating to the execution of the pre-reading notice and the button effect relating to the execution of the symbol change display notice being executed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the change notice”) are performed simultaneously, The operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice may be prioritized by the operation of the button 136, or the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the prefetch notice may be given priority. Alternatively, one operation of the effect button 136 enables both the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice and the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the prefetch notice. You may make it do. In addition, when a plurality of button effects related to the pre-reading notice are performed simultaneously, when the effect button 136 is operated, only the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to any one of the button effects related to the pre-reading notice is enabled. Alternatively, all operations of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effects related to a plurality of pre-reading notices being executed may be validated. In addition, when a plurality of button effects related to the change notice are performed simultaneously, when the effect button 136 is operated, only the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to any one of the button effects related to the change notice is valid. Alternatively, all operations of the effect buttons 136 corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of change notices being executed may be validated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B5), as shown in FIG. 234 (B6), a switching animation is displayed in which the effect EF110 in which a balloon is exploded is displayed. It is notified that the display MTY in preparation for CUM is ranked up. That is, in this example of the effect, a state is shown in which the effect of raising the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is performed by a button effect different from the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY. Note that the switching animation need not be performed.

  After that, when the explosion effect EF110 is erased, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparing display MTY changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 234 (B7). The CUM preparation in progress display MTY is ranked up. Note that after the rank of the CUM ready display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color. In this example, the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up by operating the effect button 136 during the operation effective period, but the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up, or the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated. In addition, when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, the CUM preparing display MTY may or may not be ranked up. In addition, when the button effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 234 (B2), the CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up.

  234 (C1) to (C6) show other patterns of effects produced by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 234 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 231 (A5), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. This production example is different from the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A5) in that four check points are arranged in the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are different. The fourth checkpoint CP4 is arranged between the two. That is, it is reported that a chance-up notice may occur when the Sabohani character SBH as the cursor reaches the fourth check point CP4. When the CUM ready display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance increase in which the number of checkpoints is increased as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode illustrated in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, when the CUM ready display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance increase in which the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, the number of checkpoints in the chance up meter CMT is the same between the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a ranked display form and the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the default display form. It may be. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance increase in which the number of checkpoints is increased as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode illustrated in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail. Further, when the CUM ready display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance increase in which the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail.

  FIG. 234 (C2) shows a state in which a chance-up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, and the Sabohani character SBH is moving on the meter.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 234 (C3), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4, an animation is started in which the blade edge of the sword that the lord holds is shining brightly. That is, this effect is a chance-up notice at the fourth checkpoint CP4, and this chance-up notice is more likely to occur when the big-hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed than when the lost pattern form is confirmed and displayed. It has become.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (C4), a balloon with the words “chance up sharp sword” is displayed near the savohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is given. We are informing you. Note that the timing at which the animation with the sword tip starts may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon with the Sabohani character SBH, or the balloon with the Sabohani character SBH is displayed after the animation with the sword tip starts. Alternatively, an animation in which the tip of the sword is shining may be started after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the fourth checkpoint CP4 during the execution of the animation in which the sword is shining, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 234 (C5), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the generated notice may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (C6), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  In this production example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode in which no rank is raised, but the meter portion of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance up meter CMT There may be a case in which at least one of them is displayed in a display mode that is ranked up. In this case, the Sabohani character SBH or the meter portion may be ranked up when the chance up meter CMT starts displaying, or only the Sabohani character SBH is ranked up when the chance up meter CMT starts displaying. In some cases, the meter portion may be ranked up while the production by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. In addition, only the meter portion may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts displaying, and the Sabohani character SBH may be ranked up while the performance by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. In addition, the display may be displayed in the rank-up display mode only when the chance up meter CMT starts displaying, and the rank up is not performed while the performance by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. Also good.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the chance up meter is ranked up during production by the chance up meter. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 235 (A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A5), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 235 (A6) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color that is ranked up from the default color, white, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. This suggests that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each checkpoint, and that it is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in a big hit symbol form. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 235 (A7) to (A26) are performed. In addition, the display of the meter part of the chance up meter CMT in FIG. 235 (A6) and FIG. 235 (A7) has the same display mode. The effects shown in FIGS. 235 (A7) to (A26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 231 (A7) to (A26) except that the color of the meter portion in the chance up meter CMT is different. The description is omitted. In the case where the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed in a fixed manner rather than in the case where the lost symbol pattern is displayed in a fixed manner, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, savohani It may be configured to be displayed more easily in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME, etc.) that is ranked higher than the character SBH.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the ranked chance up meter.

  FIG. 236 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 235 (A5), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is started, the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice is generated as compared with the case where the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color. In addition, the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. If the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example) There may be cases where a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice is generated. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, chance chance advance notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when displayed in rainbow colors, the big hit may be determined. In this example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed. However, the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed.

  FIG. 236 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 235 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance up meter CMT. In FIG. 236 (B1), the background color of the placard arranged at the final point GP has changed from the default color (for example, white) to red, and this also increases the chance up meter CMT. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface displaying “V” or “Development”) is changed to red, and the surface displaying “x” is the default color. You may make it display, and you may make it change a background color into red also about the surface where "x" was displayed. In this example, the display mode of the final point GP is changed, but the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up.

  FIG. 236 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 235 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance up meter CMT. FIG. 236 (C1) shows a state in which the second check point CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (square and white display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the display mode of the second check point CP2 is round and red, and for example, it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 always occurs. Note that the display mode of other checkpoints may be changed to a higher-ranked mode. Further, in this effect example, the shape and color of the check point are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

  FIG. 236 (D1) to FIG. (D2) show effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to FIG. (A11), and the effects by the chance up meter CMT are started. , The background color of the balloon of “START !!!!” that informs the start of the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is shown in red, which increases the chance up meter CMT. The situation is suggested. This balloon of “START !!” is then erased as shown in FIG. 236 (D2). In this production example, since the time when the balloon “START !!” is displayed is short, it may be easy for the player to pay attention to the display of “START !!”. In this production example, after a balloon of “START!” Is displayed, it is erased when a predetermined time elapses. However, if the balloon is in a display mode in which the balloon is ranked up, it is not erased. The display may be maintained as it is. Moreover, in this production example, the background color of the speech balloon is changed, but the color of the text of the speech balloon may be changed. Moreover, the content of the character displayed in the balloon may be changed, or the character notation may be used as it is.

  FIGS. 236 (E1) to (E6) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 235 (A5) and correspond to the effects shown in FIGS. 230 (A6) to (A11). .

  FIG. 236 (E1) shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT is changed to the princess character HME, thereby notifying that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. Note that in the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon in which the characters “START !!” are displayed is displayed in a default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY displayed before the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (E1) is displayed may be the Sabohani character SBH or the princess character. It may be HME or another character. In this effect example, a Sabohani character SBH is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and a state in which the character is changed to a princess character HME when switched to the chance up meter CMT is shown. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 236 (E2) to (E6) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 236 (E2) to (E6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 230 (A7) to (A11) except that the characters displayed on the chance up meter CMT are different. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  FIGS. 236 (F1) to (F7) show another example of the effect following, for example, FIG. 235 (A5), and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up during the execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 236 (F1) shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, the notice icon YI is stocked. This notice icon YI appears, for example, in any production example shown in FIGS. 180 to 207.

  FIG. 236 (F2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). In other words, during the period from FIG. 236 (F1) to FIG. (F2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIGS. 235 (A6) to (A10) are performed except that the notice icon YI is displayed. Has been done. Thereafter, in FIG. 236 (F3), after a chance-up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is moving toward the second check point CP2.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (F4), the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the display changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and is ranked up from the box. An animation is displayed in which a notice display of “UP” is announced. The “UP” display that appears here is a display for notifying the rank up of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 236 (F5), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 236 (F5), the promotion animation using the “UP” notice display is started. In FIG. 236 (F6), the notice display of “UP” changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, then flies toward the chance up meter CMT and hits the chance up meter CMT. It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or when the promotion animation is performed and the chance up meter is ranked up, without the promotion animation being performed. The chance up meter CMT may be ranked up. Thus, in this production example, the notice display is performed by elements other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT, and the state where the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 236 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank-up of the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed.

  FIG. 236 (G1) to FIG. 207 (G7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 235 (A5), and shows how the chance up meter CMT is ranked up by timer notice.

  FIG. 236 (G1) shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is in a default display mode.

  FIG. 236 (G2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 236 (G1) to FIG. (G2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 235 (A6) to FIG. Thereafter, in FIG. 236 (G3), after the chance-up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is moving toward the second check point CP2. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “03:00”, and after the timer display countdown is started, a notice is given three seconds later (in this example, the rank of the chance up meter CMT is increased). It has been suggested to be done. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this production example, a notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT, and a state in which the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is shown. The countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer preview display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the execution of the animation in which the timer preview display TM1 appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 236 (G4) to (G5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00” is reached.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 236 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. In this effect, after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the word “attention” is displayed, and then the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. If the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” without displaying characters, the rank of the chance up meter CMT may be increased. In addition, there is a case where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up after the character of “attention” is displayed, and the case of the chance up meter CMT being ranked up without displaying the character of “attention”. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 236 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from the default color white to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank-up of the chance up meter CMT, the color of the meter portion is not limited to change from white to red, but may change to another color.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of rank-up of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 237 (A1) to (A7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 235 (A5), and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up during execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 237 (A1) shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is in a default display mode.

  FIG. 237 (A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 237 (A1) to FIG. (A2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 235 (A6) to FIG. Thereafter, in FIG. 237 (A3), after a chance-up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is moving toward the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, FIG. 237 (A4) shows that the SBHani character SBH stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 237 (A5), the smoke effect EF112 is displayed so as to cover the entire Sabohan character SBH.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (A6), the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself constituting the chance up meter CMT is changed from the default color to red, and the chance up notice is likely to occur. It is suggested that the mode is easily displayed. If the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example) There may be cases where a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, there may be a case where no chance up notice is generated. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, chance chance advance notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when displayed in rainbow colors, the big hit may be determined. In this example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed. However, the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 237 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH resumes traveling on the meter and heads for the second checkpoint CP2. In this example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH may not change even though the rank-up animation is performed.

  FIGS. 237 (B1) to (B8) show another production example following FIG. 231 (A5), for example, and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up during execution of the production by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (B1) to (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 237 (B3) shows a state in which a balloon with the characters “next point chance up effect high probability” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH traveling on the meter of the chance up meter CMT. Yes. By displaying this balloon, it is informed that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 where the Sabohani character SBH arrives next. For example, instead of the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3), as shown in FIG. 237 (B3 ′), a balloon with the letters “next point chance up effect!” Is displayed. Thus, it may be notified that a chance-up notice is always generated at the second check point CP2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 237 (B3 ″), there may be a case where a balloon with the words “Is the next point a chance up effect produced?” May be displayed. In this case, the second checkpoint In CP2, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice may occur but may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3 ″) is displayed, for example, the chance-up notice is made less likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 than when the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3) is displayed. Also good. Further, by displaying only “high probability” in the balloon, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at any checkpoint regardless of a specific checkpoint. Note that only a balloon with the characters “next point chance up effect high probability” in FIG. 237 (B3) may be displayed, and “next point chance up effect occurs!” In FIG. 237 (B3 ′)! Only the balloons with the characters "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the characters “next point chance up effect high probability” in FIG. 237 (B3) and / or a character “next point chance up effect has occurred!” In FIG. 237 (B3 ′) is attached. There may be a case where a displayed balloon is displayed, and a case where a balloon with characters of FIG. 237 (B3 ″) is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (B4), the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 changes from the default display mode to the chance-up display mode (round and red display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that a chance-up advance notice may always occur at a checkpoint that has been upgraded by changing the display mode. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (B5) to (B8) are performed. The effects performed in the period of FIGS. 237 (B5) to (B8) are the same as those of FIG. 231 (A12) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in (A17) and described above, the description is omitted.

  237 (C1) to (C6) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 230 (A24), and shows a state in which a revival effect is being performed.

  FIG. 237 (C1) shows that as a result of the super reach, Tono-sama was defeated by the swordsman, and all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol were displayed at normal density again. Yes.

  Thereafter, FIG. 237 (C2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH at the final point GP notices something. That is, it is foretold that a rebirth effect will be generated by the Sabohani character SBH.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (C3), the revival cut-in PCI with the characters “Please do your best !!” is displayed together with the princess character, and then displayed large as shown in FIG. 237 (C4). Tono-sama character YMN appears with a sword. At this time, the Tono-sama character YMN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the front face side of the chance up meter CMT, and a part thereof is difficult to view. It should be noted that a part of Tonosama character YMN may be overlapped by chance up meter CMT, and a part of Tonosama character YMN may be difficult to view. In addition, the character-like character YMN may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the chance up meter CMT, or the character-like character YMN and the chance up meter CMT may overlap or may not overlap. Further, when the Tono-sama character YMN appears, the Tono-sama character YMN and the chance up meter CMN may necessarily overlap each other. In this production example, the revival cut-in PCI is displayed after the revival effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH, but the revival effect is generated by the savohani character SBH without prior notice. A resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, a notice that a resurrection effect will occur after a notice that a resurrection effect will be generated by the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice that a resurrection effect by the Sabohani character SBH will occur. There may be cases where a rebirth effect occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 237 (C5), Tono-sama character YMN cuts the sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts “decoration 6” as the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (C6), the middle symbol is changed from “decoration 6” to “decoration 7”, and the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is derived, It is notified that it became. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT is changed from the display of “×” to the display of “V”.

  In this effect example, for example, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is maintained without being erased when a combination of decorative patterns for losing is derived, the appearance of the revival effect is shown. In this case, the revival effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the ranked-up chance up meter preparation display MTY is displayed in the display mode in which the rank is continuously increased even when the chance up meter CMT is switched.

  238 (A1) to (A5) are the effects following FIG. 235 (A3), and are switched to the chance up meter CMT in a state where the color of the meter portion constituting the display MTY in preparation for CUM is red. In this case, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is continuously red. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 238 (A4) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, when the CUM preparation display MTY is up, the state of the chance up state is taken over even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. Thereafter, the performance shown in FIG. 238 (A5) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 238 (A5) is the same as that in FIG. 235 (A7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 238 (B1) to (B5) are the effects following FIG. 235 (A3), and the chance-up meter CMT in a state where the color of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. It shows a state that the Sabohani character SBH of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red when it is switched to. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (D1) to (D3), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 238 (B4) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (B5), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP in a red display state.

  FIGS. 238 (C1) to (C5) are effects following FIG. 235 (A3), in which the princess character HME is displayed in place of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. When the chance up meter CMT is switched, the character constituting the chance up meter CMT is also a princess character HME. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 234 (A1) to (A3), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 238 (C4) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the displayed character is still the princess character HME. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (C5), the character that constitutes the chance up meter CMT is the princess character HME and starts moving from the start point SP.

  Note that it is needless to say that the effect example shown in FIG. 238 can be applied to both the CUM preparation display MTY and the chance up meter CMT effect example shown in this specification.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be easier to rank up when the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up than when the rank is not up. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is not ranked up, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed in the default display mode more easily than when the rank is increased. It should be noted that the CUM ready display MTY and / or the chance up meter CMT are more likely to rank up when the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a final display than when the final symbol pattern is finally displayed. May be configured. For example, (1) a pattern in which the CUM ready display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) the CUM ready display MTY is the default display mode, and the chance up meter A pattern that is a display mode in which the CMT is ranked up, (3) a display mode in which the CUM ready display MTY is ranked up, and a pattern in which the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (4) a CUM ready display MTY is When a pattern that is a display mode that is ranked up and that is a display mode in which the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is prepared, the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2) rather than the pattern (1). The case is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol form, the pattern (3) In person when it is displayed in the pattern of even (4) than when displayed it may easily be determined displayed in big hit symbol manner. In addition, the case where the pattern (3) is displayed may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol form than the case where the pattern (2) is displayed, or the case where the pattern (3) is displayed. The case where the pattern (2) is displayed may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol form. In addition, the case of displaying with the pattern of (1) is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern pattern than the case of displaying with the pattern of (2), and (3) than the case of displaying with the pattern of (4). ) May be more easily confirmed and displayed in a lost pattern. In addition, the case where the pattern (3) is displayed in the pattern (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost pattern mode than the case where the pattern (2) is displayed. The case where the pattern (2) is displayed may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol form.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which a chance up meter preparing display is displayed in advance.

  FIGS. 239 (A1) to (A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold by the conversation notice. Note that FIG. 239 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 239 (A2) shows a state in which the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 239 (A3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a cocoon conversation image CI2 in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed together with a heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (A3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 239 (A3), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the spider, and the conversation of Tono-sama is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In this production example, the CUM ready display MTY is more easily displayed when the conversation notice is performed than when the conversation notice is not performed. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 does not have to be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as FIG. 239 (A2) is displayed). It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A. The operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started thereafter.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 239 (A4) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation effective period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (A5). When the person presses the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 239 (A6), the word “standby !!” may be displayed in the habit conversation image CI2 instead of the operation promotion notification image. . As a result, it is notified that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. It should be noted that the notice text display such as “Standby !!” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. In such a case, the characters “Standby !!” by the conversation image CI2 may be not displayed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed. May be displayed. Further, even if the operation valid period has passed without the production button 136 being operated, the characters “standby!” May be displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY may also be displayed. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated, a character display other than “Standby !!” or a notice may be performed. It should be noted that only when the word “standby !!” is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the bag, the word “standby !!” is displayed even if the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, When a character display other than “Standby !!” or a notice is given by the frog conversation image CI2, it may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the character display or the notice of the frog conversation image CI2 may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, regardless of the character display or the notice on the frog conversation image CI2. In addition, even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, it may be configured such that the character display or the notice of the habit conversation image CI2 is displayed. This is applicable to any conversation notice described in this specification.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (A7), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and niece's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. The hold icon display area HIS is displayed so as to cover the entire area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (A8), a CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (B1) to (B5) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold by the effect display by the notice icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (B1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (B1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 180 to 207 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (B2), the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the mode is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation in which the notice display SH jumps out is displayed. The notice display SH of Sabohani that has appeared here is a display that notifies that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 239 (B3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the Sabohani notice display SH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (B4), the Sabohani notice display SH is used, the Sabohani notice display SH is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. The After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (B5), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (B4) to (B5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (C1) to (C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is forewarned by the notice effect by the navigation character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In this effect example, the navigation character YM by the Tono-sama character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM performs various effects and notices according to the progress of the game.

  FIG. 239 (C2) shows a state in which a navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. Specifically, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon with the characters “Standby !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (C3), the navigation character YM is deleted, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire holding icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM may not be deleted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (C4), a CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (C3) to (C4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (D1) to (D7) show a state in which the result of successful mini-games is displayed and the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foreseeing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the mini-game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 239 (D1), a square mini-game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS. In this mini-game display area MGD, the title of the mini game “Janken” The character “Confrontation” and the appearance of the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confronting each other are displayed. That is, the minigame display area MGD shows a state in which the mini-game of the Janken confrontation is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 239 (D2), the characters “Jakenken” are displayed to inform that the result of the mini game is derived.

  In FIG. 239 (D3), the character “Pon” is displayed, and the state where the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are each posing a pose of Janken. Specifically, Tono-sama's character gives out “Choki” and the swordsman character gives out “par”. Therefore, the result that Tono-sama's character won the swordsman character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (D4), in the mini game display area MGD, a character “Victory Yoshimune” indicating that the Tono-sama character has won is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (D5), While the swordsman character is erased, a balloon with the word “Standby!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the Tono-sama character, and a CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (D6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire holding icon display area HIS. At this time, although the mini game display area MGD is displayed, it may be deleted before the display of the flame effect EF101 is started, or at the timing when the display of the flame effect EF101 is started. It may be deleted, or may be deleted after the flame effect EF101 is displayed. In addition, the mini game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (D7), a CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 239 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A3), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (E1) to (E3) show how the result of failure in the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 239 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 239 (D2).

  In FIG. 239 (E1), the characters “Pon” are displayed, and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character each take a pose of Janken. In this production example, Tono-sama's character gives out “Choki” and the swordsman character gives out “goo”. Therefore, the result that Tono-sama's character was defeated by the swordsman character has been derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (E2), in the mini-game display area MGD, the character “Yoshimune defeat” indicating that the Tono-sama character has been defeated is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (E3), The mini game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed. Here, an animation may be performed in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. In addition, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed after the Tono-sama character has been defeated, and then the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, by performing these notice effects for notifying the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed as compared with the case where the notice of the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY is not performed. It suggests that it is easy to be.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating another effect example for notifying that the display in preparation for the chance up meter is displayed.

  240A1 to FIG. 240A6 illustrate a state in which an example of a pending change animation is performed. Here, FIG. 240 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 240 (A2), No. 1 shown in FIG. The 4 “bomber” icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen and the pending change animation starts. That is, the “bomber” icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation, the bullets are fired (bombed) toward the hold icon while the “bomber” icon IHI flies from right to left. The “bomber” icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this temporary stop may be a temporary stop of a gaze disguised as a target icon. Also, in this production example, the letter “SP” is attached to the icon “HI” of “bomber”, and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is the pre-reading notice of super reach. It is suggested that the display mode is as follows. In addition, when the hold change animation is performed by the “bomber” icon IHI, the hold icon may be successfully bombed and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed. The display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  In FIG. 240 (A3), a white bullet icon is fired from a white bomber icon. That is, the “bomber” icon IHI includes a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 240 (A4), the bullet icon overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 240 (A5), the bullet icon hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 240 (A6), the effect image EF112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the “SP” display mode that pre-reads that super-reach will be performed. As a result, by pre-reading foreseeing that the super reach will be performed, the pre-reading is also indirectly informed that the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Even when the super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of “SP”, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed. In this production example, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the pre-reading advance notice is given, and as a result, the pre-reading notice is also indirectly given to the display of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM preparation display MTY. However, an indirect prefetching notice about the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM in-progress display MTY may be made by performing a super reach prefetching notice using a hold icon or another type of prefetching notice, With a change icon or other type of change notice, a super reach notice is given for the symbol change display that is being executed, and an indirect notice about the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM ready display MTY is given. Also good.

  FIG. 240 (B1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is notified in the conversation advance notice. 240 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 239 (A2), for example.

  FIG. 240 (B1) shows a state in which the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In this production example, the character “STANDBY” is displayed together with the character of Sabohani, not the conversation image CI2. Sabohani's conversation image CIsh is displayed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, but the player recognizes that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, etc. There are cases where it is possible. Note that the decorative symbol display position may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the Sabohani conversation image CIsh or Tono-sama conversation image CI1 so that the decoration symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B1), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by Sabohani's conversation image CIsh, and the Tonama-sama's conversation image CI1 is more than the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In this effect example, the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed by displaying the Sabo Hani conversation image CI1 including the Sabo Hani character constituting the CUM preparing display MTY. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 does not have to be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as FIG. 239 (A2) is displayed). It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A. Further, in this effect example, when the Sabohani conversation image CIsh is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. Also good.

  240 (C1) to (C3) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced in the conversation announcement, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Note that FIG. 240 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 239 (A2), for example.

  FIG. 240 (C1) shows a state in which the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the frog's conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this production example, the conversation image CI2 is displayed with a question mark added to the “standby” character in place of the production button 136a and the remaining time meter display. This suggests that MTY may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 240 (C2), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and niece's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. The hold icon display area HIS is displayed so as to cover the entire area. However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 240 (C3), the flame effect EF101 is erased, but the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed. That is, a state in which the GUM conversation notice is performed without displaying the CUM preparation display MTY is shown. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, this effect example can also be applied to a pre-reading notice, and the prefetching notice hold of Gasse (as a result, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed) or the CUM is being prepared. The change may be executed for each change until the change of the pre-reading notice target hold for displaying the display MTY.

  240 (D1) to FIG. 240 (D2) show, for example, a state in which a timer advance notice is displayed in preparation for a timer advance notice to be performed by the timer advance notice TM1 following FIG. 239 (A6). Show.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which an animation (frame-in animation) is performed in which the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen.

  After that, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 240 (D2), in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is not displayed, the characters “STANDBY” are displayed, and the notice that the timer notice is started. The display is done. In addition, there may be a case where a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed instead of the notice that the timer notice starts is displayed. Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1 switches from “STANDBY” to time display, and the timer notice is started. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display MTY may always be displayed or the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed when a notification indicating “Standby” is displayed by another announcement display such as a conversation announcement display. There may be a case where an indication in preparation indicating that other effects are being prepared, such as a display in preparation for a timer notice effect. This also applies to the production examples shown in FIGS. 240 (E1) to (E3) and FIGS. 240 (F1) to (F3).

  240 (E1) to (E3) show that after the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed and the timer notice is started.

  FIG. 240 (E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A2), and shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS.

  Thereafter, when the flame effect 101 is deleted, as shown in FIGS. 240 (E2) to (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower part of the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY is displayed. The state where the hold icon display area HIS is lifted is shown. At this time, the letters “STANDBY” are displayed on the timer advance notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer advance notice is suspended. 240 (E2) to FIG. 240 (E3) are similar to those shown in FIG. 225 (E1) to FIG. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 225 (E3) and thereafter are performed. In this production example, a state in which the start of the timer notice is notified by the flame effect EF101 for notifying the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is shown.

  FIG. 240 (F1) to FIG. 240 (F3) show a state in which a chance button preparing display for notifying that the chance button effect is performed is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “1” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Also, in this effect example, a state in which the light effect EF113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF113, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 240 (F3), the light effect EF113 is erased and the production is performed. A character “Preparing” is displayed above the button 136a to notify that the chance button effect will be started (chance button effect notice). Since the operation valid period has not started, nothing happens even if the effect button 136 is operated. It should be noted that after the chance button effect notice is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed as a result of operating the effect button 136 in the chance button effect. In addition, after the light effect EF113 is displayed, there may be a display for notifying that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which a chance-up notice is performed at a checkpoint not shown in the chance-up meter.

  FIGS. 241 (A1) to (A7) are, for example, following FIG. 222 (A11). In the production by the chance up meter CMT, at the checkpoint not shown in the meter, the chance up notice (the sharp sword (Notice display) is shown. The effects performed in the period of FIGS. 241 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 230 (A6) to (A10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 241 (A3) shows that the savory character SBH is heading from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2, and is at a substantially middle point between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2. Yes. At this time, the blade of the sword held by Tono-sama's character is shining brightly, and the sharpness is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice (a chance up notice of a sharp sword) is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 241 (A4), the effect EF114 is displayed at the place where the Sabohani character SBH is located in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the animation in which the fourth check point CP4 occurs is started. The situation is shown. The fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF114. For example, the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed by a fade-in animation in which the fourth checkpoint CP4 fades in. It may be. Alternatively, the display of increasing some checkpoints may not be performed, and the entire chance up meter CMT may be switched and displayed, and the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed on the chance up meter CMT after switching. Further, prior notification (notice) may be performed by displaying the fourth check point CP4 before the chance up notice of a sharp sword starts.

  In FIG. 241 (A5), a balloon with the letters “chance up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that a chance up notice has been made. Note that the timing at which the display of the sword blade shining starts and the timing at which the display of the balloon of the savohani character SBH starts may be the same, or after the display of the sword blade shining starts, A balloon may be displayed, or a display in which the blade edge of the sword shines after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started may be displayed. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the fourth checkpoint CP4 while the notice of the sword blade is shining is displayed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 241 (A6), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 241 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH starts to move toward the second check point CP2. In this production example, the chance up notice is performed at the check points not shown in the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up notice is performed only at the check points shown in the chance up meter CMT. May be.

FIGS. 241 (B1) to (B7) show another effect pattern in which a chance-up notice (a sharp notice of a sharp sword) is given at a checkpoint not shown on the meter in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that FIG. 241 (B1
) To (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (A1) to (A3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 241 (B4) shows a state in which a balloon with the word “chance up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, notifying that a chance up notice has been made. ing. In this production example, notification that the chance up notice has been made is performed, but the checkpoint corresponding to the chance up notice is not displayed. Note that in the chance up meter CMT, when a chance up notice is made at a point other than the point where the check point is indicated in advance, a balloon for notifying the occurrence of the chance up may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 241 (B5), after the balloon is erased, as shown in FIG. 241 (B6), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving toward the second check point CP2. In this example, the checkpoint is not displayed, but the word “UP” is displayed at the meter position corresponding to the timing when the chance up notice is made, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Suggests that. Here, the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the characters are not overlapped. Note that the characters “UP” may not be displayed. For example, in the chance up meter CMT, only when a chance up notice is generated at a timing corresponding to a check point displayed in advance in the meter portion, it is handled. The characters “UP” may be displayed at the position.

  FIG. 241 (B7) shows a state where the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of production using a chance up meter.

  FIG. 242 (A1) is another example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 242 (A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in a green bar shape, and the progress of the current reach performance is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRKa instead of the Sabohani character SBH. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the traveling speed of the marker MRKa is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but may be constant. Also, in this effect example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the first check point CP1a to the third check point CP3a are displayed with solid white circle display marks. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (2f), a character or a symbol such as a question mark may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, by displaying characters / symbols such as “question mark”, “!”, “UP”, a notice related to the chance up notice, or a character such as a high probability state, the chance up notice is generated. You may make it suggest easiness. In addition, “!”, “Question mark”, “heat”, etc. are displayed in the mark, and in addition to the indication that indicates the likelihood of the chance up notice, or the chance up notice is likely to occur. You may make it foretell the ease of jackpot with the suggestion. The start point and the final point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa.

  FIG. 242 (A2) shows a state in which the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, FIG. 242 (A3) shows a state in which the marker MRKa has reached the first check point CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first check point CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A4), it is shown that the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. In addition, the mark of the first check point CP1a is erased. The mark of the first check point CP1a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. In addition, the mark may be erased before the boy character BOY appears, the mark may be erased when the boy character BOY appears, or the mark is erased after the boy character BOY appears. May be.

  When a Boyi character BOY appears, as shown in FIG. 242 (A5), a balloon with the words “Chance Up BOY Passed !!” is displayed near the marker MRKa, and a chance up notice has been made. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 242 (A5) to (A6), the marker MRKa stands by at the first check point CP1a at least while the boy character BOY appears and at least a balloon is displayed.

  Thereafter, FIGS. 242 (A7) to (A8) show how the marker MRKa starts moving. At this time, instead of displaying the mark at the first check point CP1a, the characters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. Note that the Boyi character BOY is out of the frame from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A8).

  Thereafter, when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 242 (A10), and the button effect is started. . At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second check point CP2a. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A10), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has not started, and no effect is performed even if the effect button 136 is operated. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 242 (A11), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A12), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2a is not displayed, and a state in which no chance up notice has occurred is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A13), the mark of the second check point CP2a is erased, but the characters “UP” are not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display for notifying that a chance-up notice has not occurred may or may not be performed. Note that the mark of the second check point CP2a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be deleted when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 is operated. Further, the mark may be deleted before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. After that, the mark may be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (A14), the marker MRKa starts moving from the second check point CP2a, and when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a as shown in FIG. 242 (A15), In 242 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice to notify that the notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is positioned before the final point. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows a state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Note that the marker MRKa may be stopped at the third check point CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 or until the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, since the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice is not displayed, at the third checkpoint CP3a in the chance-up meter CMTa, the mark is deleted and the character “UP” is not displayed in the gauge portion. .

  Thereafter, the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A18), but the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not operated, and FIG. 242 (A19) shows the operation. As shown, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, the chance up meter CMTa shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. Note that the mark of the third check point CP3a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be deleted when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 is operated. Also, the mark may be erased before the middle symbol is displayed, the mark may be erased when the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 242 (A21), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed at the normal density again. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (B4) to (B8) are performed. In this effect example, the chance check advance is not generated at the third check point CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated, but the result of losing is shown. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 may be operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and a big hit result may be derived. Further, when no chance up notice is generated at the third checkpoint CP3a, it may be suggested that the loss has been confirmed.

  FIG. 242 (B1) to FIG. 242 (B6) show another effect pattern continued from FIG. 242 (A1). The effect shown in FIG. 242 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 242 (A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 242 (B2) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 242 (B1) is performed. The effects shown in FIG. 242 (A2) to FIG.

  FIG. 242 (B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second check point CP2a and the button effect has been started. Further, in this effect example, the state of “Geki” in the display of the characters “Gekiatsu !!!” is displayed in the portion corresponding to the second check point CP2a of the gauge portion in the chance up meter CMTa. It is shown. That is, in this production example, in addition to the display of “UP” indicating that the chance-up notice has been performed in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTa, the display of the character of the change notice (“Gekiatsu !!!!”) is displayed. ) May be displayed. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 242 (A9) to (A13) are performed. During this time, the characters “Gekiatsu !!!” are continuously displayed in the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white as the marker MRKa progresses, “Gekiatsu !! "!" Gradually appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (B3), the characters “Gekiatsu !!!” appear completely. By seeing this, the player may be able to further improve his expectation for a big hit. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 231 (A19) to (A23) are performed. At this time, it goes without saying that the chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 242 (B3) is displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A19). In the case where a chance up notice is generated in FIG. 231 (B2), a part or all of the characters “Gekiatsu !!” are overlapped by the display of “UP” indicating that the chance up notice has been made. May be.

  When the effect lever 136V is operated by the player in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 242 (B4), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H are activated. The light guide plate IL emits light, and an effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is not displayed, but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the Senryo box part 224H return to the initial positions, respectively, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted resumes while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT fades in along with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. . This operation is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17 (38) to (44), for example.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 242 (B5) shows a state where the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the duel scene animation display, the enemy swordsman shows a faint expression and appears to be defeated. In the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in this effect example, since the chance up notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third check point CP3a has occurred, the characters “UP” are displayed over the gauge portion. In this effect example, it is shown that the entire contents displayed on the gauge portion of the marker MRKa can be visually recognized for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (B5). As shown in FIG. 242 (B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be deleted at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is resumed, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be deleted. This is the same when the result of the loss is derived.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 242 (B6), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A13) to (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of effects using the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 243 (A1) to (A6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 242 (B1) to (B6).

  FIG. 243 (A1) shows a state in which the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 242 (B1), a state in which the progressed portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion is changed from green to white instead of white is shown. This rainbow-colored display is a notice display confirming the jackpot, and the fact that the jackpot is confirmed is notified when the gauge portion changes to a rainbow color. In this production example, the progressed portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge has been changed from green to rainbow, but it may be changed to another color, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the changing color. You may make it do. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may not be changed from green to green, and the big hit symbol pattern may be displayed more easily than when it is changed to white, or may be changed from green to red or gold. May be. In addition, a pattern may appear in the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. Further, in this production example, the big hit announcement is performed in the display mode of the advanced part of the marker MRKa. May be performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (A2) to (A6) are performed. In the production example shown in FIGS. 243 (A2) to (A6), the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa is different, and the characters “Gekiatsu !!” are displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Since it is the same as the example of production shown to FIG. 242 (B2)-the same figure (B6) except the point which is not, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 243 (B1) to (B16) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A1) to (A15), and the timing at which the chance up meter CMTc generates a chance up notice. It is shown that the number of occurrences is informed although not clearly indicated.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is, for example, the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), and the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is shown in FIG. 222 (A3). The CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 6 extends upward, the gauge is also disposed above, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. In this information display area, the number of chance up notices or a big hit notice may be given. Thereafter, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 222A3 to A7 are performed.

  FIG. 243 (B2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 222 (A8). The effect shown in FIG. 243 (B2) is the same as that shown in FIG. 222 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 243 (B3) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this production example, no checkpoint is displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing when the chance up notice is generated and the number of times that the chance up notice is generated. In addition, the chance up meter CMTc extends upward as well as the CUM preparation display MTYa, and the gauge is also disposed above, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 243 (B4), the characters “3 more places” are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but the chance up three times It is informed that there is a possibility of notice. FIG. 243 (B4) shows a state in which the Sabohani character SBH functioning as a cursor starts to move. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 243 (B5).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 243 (B6), it is shown that a boyfriend character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being made due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY.

  Then, in FIG. 243 (B7), a balloon with the letters “chance up BOY passed !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, notifying that a chance up notice has been made. That is, the player may be able to understand that this timing is the first check point. In addition, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display is changed to “two more places”, and it is reported that there is a possibility that the chance up notice will occur two more times. Note that the display of the number of occurrences of chance up notice in the information display area may be changed before the boy character BOY appears, or the number of occurrences of chance up notice in the information display area at the timing when the boy character BOY appears. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the boy character BOY appears. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, and the information display is performed at the timing when the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed.

  After that, in FIG. 243 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance up notice is generated, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved by the appearance of the notice. "UP" indicating that this is displayed above it, indicating that a chance up notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is partially overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the generated notice may be displayed.

  FIG. 243 (B9) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 231 (A19). In this production example, although not shown in particular, the gold cut-in image CI3 that is the second chance-up notice is displayed in the manner described above, and the position corresponding to the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The second check point CP2 marked in red and the letters “UP” are displayed, and the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is also changed to “one more place” ing.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 243 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the letters “chance up lever” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice by lever effect is started. We are informing you. At this time, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is changed to “0 more places”, and it is notified that there is no possibility of further occurrence of the chance up notice. Yes. Note that a chance-up notice may occur after “0 places left” is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. May be changed, or after the lever image 136Va is displayed, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 243 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 marked in red is displayed at a position corresponding to the timing at which the chance up notice is generated, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it to indicate the history of the occurrence of a chance up notice. At this time, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice “0 more places” displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is deleted. The display may be continued without deleting the display of “0 places left”. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (B11), the effective operation period of the effect lever 136V has not yet started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts and the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 243 (B12), a state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (B13), the player When the effect lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 243 (B14), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H are operated, and the light guide plate IL is emitted. The effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is not displayed, but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the Senryo box part 224H return to the initial positions, respectively, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted resumes while fading in. This operation is performed, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 17 (38) to (44).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 243 (B15) shows a state where the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the duel scene animation display, the enemy swordsman shows a faint expression and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character “V” indicating that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP and the placard is a big hit is shown. In the information display area, “Congratulations !!” is displayed, congratulating the jackpot being derived. It is not necessary to display “Congratulations !!”. In addition, when the result of losing is derived, for example, a character such as “sorry” may be displayed to comfortably display the player, or no display may be performed in the information display area. May be. In addition, for example, when performing a revival effect as shown in FIGS. 237 (C1) to (C6), a display such as “!!!!” may be displayed in the information display area, and the revival effect may be performed. It may be suggested that there is.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 243 (B16), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A13) to (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the effect using the chance up meter illustrated in FIG. 243.

  244 (A1) to FIG. (A3) are effects in which a display for notifying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is performed in the information display area in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIGS. 243 (B1) to (B2). An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 244 (A1), characters “3 more places” are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It is reported that there is a possibility that a chance up notice will occur three times in the production. It should be noted that the number of notifications in the information display area and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may always coincide with each other, and there may be a case where they coincide with each other and a case where they do not coincide with each other. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (A2) to (A3) are performed. The effects performed in the period shown in FIGS. 244 (A1) to (A3) are the same as those in FIGS. 222 (A3) to (A8) except that the display mode of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  According to this production example, for example, when the timing at which a chance-up notice is generated is fixed for each super reach, it may be possible to infer the type of super reach that develops. In addition, for example, when the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice is configured to be displayed with a different number depending on the reliability of the jackpot, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol fluctuation that causes the super reach. There are cases where it is possible.

  The effect shown in FIG. 244 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 243 (B4). In FIG. 244 (B1), in addition to displaying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the timing of occurrence of the chance up notice. Yes. As described above, part or all of the timing at which the chance up notice is generated may be notified by the chance up meter CMTc, and the number of times the chance up notice is generated may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 243 (B4), the display shown in FIG. 244 (B1) may be performed.

  244 (C1) to (C4) in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc do not display the number of occurrences of the chance up notice and foresee that the chance up notice may occur. It shows a state. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be displayed.

  FIG. 244 (C1) shows a state in which the Sabohani character SBH functioning as a cursor starts to move. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 244 (C2). Note that this effect example is different from the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (B4) to (B5), and the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is not displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc.

  In FIG. 244 (C3), in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, “BOY is about to appear” and a question mark are displayed. It is informed that there is a possibility of a chance up notice due to the appearance of. That is, in this production example, although the timing is not clear, a state in which it is notified that a chance-up notice may occur is shown. It should be noted that the contents of the chance-up notice that occurs in particular may not be notified, but only the possibility that the chance-up notice may occur may be notified.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 244 (C4), it is shown that the boyfriend character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being made due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. Even when “BOY is about to appear” is displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, there is a case where the boy character BOY is not displayed and a chance announcement is given that no chance up notice is generated. Also good. In addition, there may be a case in which it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice of a different type from the chance-up notice due to the appearance of the boyy character BOY may occur at the timing when the boyy character BOY is displayed. In this case, for example, a big hit may be confirmed, or a chance notice may be given without a chance up notice.

  In FIG. 244 (C5), a balloon with the letters “chance up BOY passed !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that a chance up notice has been made. At this time, the characters “BOY is coming soon” in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are deleted. The display in the information display area may be erased before the boy character BOY is displayed, or may be erased when the boy character BOY is displayed, or the boy character BOY is displayed. It may be erased later. In addition, the display in the information display area may be deleted before the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, may be deleted when the balloon is displayed, or is deleted after the balloon is displayed. May be. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 243 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 or “UP” may be displayed to display a history that a chance up notice has occurred. It should be noted that part or all of the timing at which the chance up notice is generated is notified by the chance up meter CMTc, and before the chance up notice corresponding to the timing notified by the chance up meter CMTc is made, As described above, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a display for giving a notice that a chance up notice such as “BOY is coming soon” may occur. In other words, when a checkpoint is displayed, “BOY is about to appear” may be displayed before the timing at which the Boy character BOY is displayed.

  FIGS. 244 (D1) to (D5) show another production pattern of the production following FIG. 243 (B8), and notifies that the number of occurrences of chance up notice increases in the production by the chance up meter CMTc. It shows how the production is being performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 244 (D1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 243 (B8), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 244 (D2), a state is shown in which an effect (smoke effect EF115) of generating smoke is displayed in front of the Sabohani character SBH traveling toward the final point GP.

  After that, when the smoke effect EF115 is erased, the Princess Chibi character CHM appears as shown in FIG. 244 (D3), and as shown in FIG. A balloon with the characters “1UP!” Is displayed, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may increase by one. While the performance to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the Princess Chibi character CHM is being performed, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped and displayed, but the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the Princess Chibi character CHM is displayed. May be in progress while an effect of increasing is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 244 (D5), when the Chibi princess character CHM is deleted, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is “two more places”. ”To“ 3 more places ”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that the chance up notice will occur three more times. It should be noted that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated before the “1UP!” Balloon of the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance up notice at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated before the Princess Chibi character CHM is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is updated at the timing when the Princess Chibi character CHM is deleted. Alternatively, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the princess Chibi character CHM is erased. Further, since the Sabohani character SBH was stopped while the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice by the Princess Chibi character CHM was being performed, the Sabohani character SBH was not shown in the progress of the actual super reach. Since Sabohani's character SBH is accelerating and hurry up, the Sabohani character SBH will be accelerated, and the Sabohani character SBH will be warped to respond to the progress of actual super reach. The display position of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may be adjusted, for example, by changing the display position to the position to be performed, or the display position of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may not be adjusted.

  In this production example, the Chibi princess character CHM that performs only the chance-up meter CMTc-related production is introduced to increase the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice. An element (for example, Sabohani character SBH) may be used to perform an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of a chance-up notice in the same manner as the rank-up effect described above, for example. Further, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be performed by other elements not constituting the chance up meter CMTc. For example, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the timer notice described above. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the effect by the notice icon YI, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased according to the result of the mini game, and FIG. You may make it increase the frequency | count of generation | occurrence | production of a chance up notice by the effect using the navigation character YM shown to C1). In addition, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is not limited to one, but may be two or more. For example, “0 UP!” Is displayed, and the effect of the asesty where the number of occurrences of the chance up notice does not increase is displayed. It may be done. This is also applicable when chance points are displayed.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of effects using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 243.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 245 (A1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 245 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. In FIG. 245 (A1), the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold icon display area HIS, which is difficult to view. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A1), there is one hold in FIG. 1, and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second hold number display. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 180 to 207 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, characters “Meter × 1” are displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and it is predicted that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed once.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 245 (A2), the notice icon YI of the aspect a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the display is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation is displayed in which a notice display of “UP” is announced. The notice display of “UP” that appears here is a notice that gives an advance notice of an increase in the number of developments of effects using the chance up meter CMTc. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying in advance that the box is opened (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 245 (A3), the used notice icon YI disappears and a notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 245 (A4), the promotion animation using the “UP” notice display is started. In FIG. 245 (A4), after the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF116 in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies toward the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and the information display area A state of hitting a “1” portion indicating the number of times in “meter × 1” is shown. At this time, the entire display MTYa during CUM preparation may be difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the portion “1” in “meter × 1” is difficult to visually recognize. In this production example, the number of developments using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation, or the number of developments using the chance up meter CMTc after the promotion animation. There may be a case where the number of developments of effects using the chance up meter CMTc increases without a promotion animation being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (A5), the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area becomes “meter × 2”, and the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is developed once and can be performed twice. It is notified that there is sex. Thereafter, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 222A3 to A7 are performed.

  The effect shown in FIG. 245 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 243 (B2), and the contents of the effect are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Omitted.

  FIG. 245 (A7) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this effect example, even when the CUM preparation display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the development number of effects using the chance up meter CMTc is continuously displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. In FIG. 245 (A7), the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area becomes “meter × 1” at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM ready display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, and the chance up meter CMTc is It is shown that the first effect used has been started. The display of “meter × 2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter × 1” before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTTYa. The display of “meter × 2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter × 1” after the display is switched to the meter CMTc. In this effect example, as in the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, and the display count of the chance-up notice and the display timing are shown. ing.

  FIG. 245 (A8) shows a state where the Sabohani character SBH functioning as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. It should be noted that the balloon “START !!” may not be displayed. Further, “START !!” may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 245 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a “question mark”, and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the effect using the chance up meter CMTc can develop. It suggests that there is sex. Thereafter, for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (16) are performed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 245 (A10), an effect similar to that in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. In addition, the display of the placard at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMTc is still “question mark”.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 245 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is not started as a chance up notice. The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 245 (A10) to (A12), the Sabohani character SBH passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is, and the third checkpoint. Neither marking in CP3 nor display of the characters “UP” is performed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not yet started. The operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts thereafter, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 245 (A12) shows a state in which the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, the Sabohani character SBH is located before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A13) within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. A message that the swordsman has won or lost is displayed along with a line that says "Did you remove it?" In addition, the chance up meter CMTc displays a letter “Development” on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach effect is developed. Along with this, the production by the chance up meter CMTc is developed, suggesting that the second production is started.

  Then, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 245 (A15), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 245 (A16). Is started. In addition, the chance up meter CMTc shows that the savory character SBH rides on the flying carpet and moves toward the start point SP. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMTc is developed, and the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area is changed to “meter × 0”, assuming that the second production is performed. Note that the display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the cut-in image CI4 is displayed. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. Also, the display in the information display area may change before the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant, or the information display area at the timing when the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant starts. The display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant is started. Further, the display of “meter × 1” may be deleted without changing the display to “meter × 0”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 245 (A16) to (A18), a display for changing the chance up meter CMTc while the Sabohani character SBH is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH on the way to the start point SP. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIG. 245 (A17), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the sixth check point CP6 appears, and FIG. 245 (A18) As shown, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

  FIG. 245 (A18) shows a state where the Sabohani character SBH is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMTc, the fifth check point CP5 and the sixth check point CP6 are in the display state before the change (the red mark is not attached and the character display of “UP” is not performed). It has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

  Thereafter, FIG. 245 (A19) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 245 (A19), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 245 (A19), a chance-up notice indicating that the co-panda cheering team KPD48 composed of three co-panda characters is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fifth check point CP5. And the fact that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach for the big hit has been dramatically increased. Note that the co-panda cheering party KPD48 may appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear. Thereafter, for example, an effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 30 (31b) to (34b). After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, FIGS. An effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. In addition, it may be notified that a loss occurs.

  In this effect example, an effect that increases the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed by an element different from the constituent element of the CUM preparation display MTYa and the chance up meter CMTc. You may make it produce the production | generation which increases the frequency | count of development of the production using the chance up meter CMTc using the component (for example, Sabohani character SBH) of display MTYa or the chance up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked and displayed. Further, in this production example, the example in which the number of chance up meters CMTc displayed corresponds to the number of times the super reach is developed is shown. However, the chance up meter CMTc is displayed while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, or the super reach is displayed. It can also be applied to cases where there are a plurality of scenes where the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as when it is shifted to. In addition, when multiple executions of production by chance up meter are stocked, there may be cases where all or only a part is used, or when execution of production by chance up meter is stocked In addition, it may be configured to be used entirely.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of the pre-reading notice using the display for preparing the chance up meter step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “2” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also No. in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A2) to (A5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A2) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. Description is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 223 (D4) to (D5), the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed during the symbol temporary stop display and stop display, or during the symbol temporary stop display and stop. There may be both a case where the CUM ready display MTY is displayed and a case where it is not displayed during the display. The same applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 246 (A10) to (A11). This is also applicable to any of the embodiments described herein.

  In FIG. 246 (A6), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is consumed, the special figure display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) arranged in the first stage hs1 is changed to the change icon display area CIS. The second hold icon h12 arranged on the second stage hs2 is moved to the first stage hs1 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A7) to (A8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (C6) to (C7) except that the number of reservations in FIG. Description is omitted.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 246 (A9), the light effect EF117 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2, and a state in which the checkpoint appearance animation is performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (A10), the light effect EF117 disappears, and the second check point CP2 appears. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a check point for notifying the timing at which a chance-up notice is generated is displayed during display of the CUM preparation display MTY. In this production example, only a part of the checkpoints (second checkpoint CP2) displayed on the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. Of the checkpoints displayed on the CMT, all checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3) may be displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. Further, in this effect example, the effect that the checkpoint appears using the component (gauge portion) of the CUM preparation display MTY is performed, but elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY (for example, the above-mentioned) The checkpoint may appear by an effect using the notice item YI, mini game, timer notice, etc.).

  After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 246 (A11), it is determined by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 4-decoration 1”. Is displayed. At this time, the variation icon is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed while the decorative symbol is being displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed while the decoration symbol is being displayed. May be.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, the special figure display of special figure 1 is started, and the special figure display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 246 (A2). After the flame effect EF101 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 246 (A12), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variation display, that is, the mode in which the second check point CP2 is displayed. Thereafter, for example, an effect similar to the effect shown in FIGS. 222A4 to A7 is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 246A13 is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 246 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 246 (A14) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 that are not displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY appear. It should be noted that an effect that newly appears also at the checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2) that has already appeared in the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed. Note that a checkpoint that is not displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY may appear before the display on the chance increasing meter CMT is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparing display MTY. A checkpoint that is not displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear at the timing when the display is switched to the meter CMT, or after the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. You may make it the checkpoint which was not displayed in the display MTY in preparation appear. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A15) to (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (A15) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A10) to (A11), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed during execution of the continuous notification by the CUM preparation display MTY. However, the CUM preparation display MTY is not performed in advance, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed only in the currently running symbol variation display. Also good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, an effect in which a check point appears on the CUM preparing display MTY may be performed as described above. In addition to the effect of appearing checkpoints in the CUM preparation display MTY, there may be an effect of deleting the appearing checkpoints. In addition, in the production where a checkpoint appears, a chance up notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint may be always performed, or a case where a chance effect notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint is not given is performed. There may be. All checkpoints may appear. This is the effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F1) and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (A1) to (A3), (B1), (C1), and (D1). Is also applicable.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining another display pattern of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 247 (A1) to (A15) are another example of the production following FIG. 222 (A7), and the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor in addition to the savohani character SBH on the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 247 (A1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A7), and shows a transition to a super reach effect. In addition, a CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen.

  Thereafter, FIG. 247 (A2) shows a state where the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, in addition to the Sabohani character SBH as a cursor, a marker MRKb composed of an inverted triangle is also displayed at the foot of the Sabohani character SBH. That is, the state of displaying the progress of super reach with two cursors is shown. The Sabohani character SBH partially overlaps the marker MRKb, but may be displayed at a position where the marker MRKb does not overlap the Sabohani character SBH (for example, below the gauge). In this effect example, the marker MRKb moves in synchronization with the Sabohani character SBH. Thereafter, in the period shown in FIGS. 247 (A2) to (A15), for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) are performed. Note that the effects performed in the period shown in FIGS. 247 (A2) to (A15) are shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. Since this is the same, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH are moving in synchronization. For example, during the execution of the button production or the lever production, the Sabohani character SBH waits at a checkpoint (for example, The marker MRKb is allowed to move while an animation indicating that the step is not performed due to being stepped on), and there may be a period in which the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH do not move in synchronization. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the savory character SBH may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. In addition, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH warps to the check point, and the occurrence of the chance up notice corresponding to the warped check point may be notified. . In addition, when a chance up notice is not generated at a certain check point, the Sabohani character SBH warps to a check point at a position corresponding to the chance up notice that has not occurred and corresponds to the check point. You may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot has improved by having produced the chance up notice. Further, in this production example, the example in the case of a big hit has been described, but the marker MRKb can also be displayed in the same manner in the case of a loss. In this case, for example, the revival effect may start without reaching the marker MRKb and / or the Sabohani character SBH final point GP. In this production example, the Sabohan character SBH is displayed as the CUM preparation display MTY, and the marker MRK is not displayed. However, the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and the Sabohani character is displayed. The SBH may not be displayed, and the Sabohan character SBH and the marker MRK may be displayed while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the Sabohan character SBH is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and (3) Sabohani on the CUM preparation display MTY. In the case where there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, there may be a case (1), a case (2), or a case (3). Also good. In addition, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (3). In addition, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (2).

  FIGS. 247 (B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 227 (A7).

  247 (B1) to (B2) are, for example, effects following FIG. 222 (A7), and show a transition to a super reach effect. In addition, a CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen.

  Thereafter, FIG. 247 (B3) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the gauge configuration in the chance up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 222 (A9). Specifically, only one checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2) is displayed on the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 247 (B3), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this production example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and the production by the chance up meter CMT starts and ends during the super reach production. Yes. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that there is an example in which the production by the chance up meter CMT for notifying the timing when the chance up notice is performed only for a certain period during the super reach production.

  FIG. 247 (B4) shows that the Sabohani character SBH functioning as a cursor has started moving. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which an effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed in the period from the start to the end of the button effect is shown. In this effect example, the period from the start point SP to the second check point CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (B4), the operation effective period has not yet started, and the operation effective period starts thereafter.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 247 (B5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, the chance up meter CMT shows that the savory character SBH has moved to a position corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (B6), as shown in FIG. 247 (B7), the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13) described above is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the savohani character SBH moves to the second check point CP2 at an accelerated speed regardless of the display position. In addition, you may warp to 2nd checkpoint CP2. Note that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of reaching the second check point CP2), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated at a timing deviating from the timing of reaching the check point. In this case, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (B8), a balloon with the letters “chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in surrounded by a golden frame is displayed. It is informing that a notice has been made by displaying an image. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the Tono-sama character image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after the arrival, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. Further, in this effect example, the point at which the chance up notice is generated by the second check point CP2 is shown, but the final point GPa may be shown as the point at which the chance up notice is generated. In this case, the final point GPa may not be reached. When the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GPa, a chance up notice is generated, and when the Sabohani character SBH does not reach the final point GPa. The chance up notice may not be generated. Also, the final point GPa may be reached without fail. In this case, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GPa, a chance-up notice may occur, or even if the final point GPa is reached. There may be cases where a chance-up notice does not occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 247 (B9), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, the Sabohani character SBH starts to move, and FIG. 247 (B10) shows a situation where the final point GPa has been reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is deleted, and the super reach effect is continuously performed.

  In this production example, the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed in a part of the period in the super reach, but the period other than the super reach (for example, a part of the period in the normal reach or the reach state is not established). You may make it carry out in the one part period in a symbol fluctuation display.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram for describing an effect example of the chance up meter executed in another super reach.

  FIG. 248 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16) are, for example, another production example following FIG. 16 (24). It shows how it is.

  FIG. 248 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 16 (24), and shows a transition to super reach.

  FIG. 248 (A2) shows a state in which the effect of Hime Reach, which is an example of super reach, has been started. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title display of “May be there ...” which is a song sung by the princess character is performed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The movement to the part is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 258 (A3), a princess character appears and dances, and a band-like lyrics display area slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap the front side of the princess character. The LYC is arranged extending from side to side. In the lyrics display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally, and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed as the song progresses. It is configured to move in the right direction and notifies the timing of singing. In the lyric display area LYC shown in FIG. 258 (A3), “but true kindness” is displayed, and the character of “gentle” is displayed in bold and large size compared to other characters. Yes. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the “excellent” part. In other words, it can be said that the character “excellent” has a checkpoint function in the above-described chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the timing of occurrence of the chance up notice is suggested by the lyrics, but for example, in the dialogue in the conversation notice, the display mode of a specific character is different from that of other characters and the voice that matches the dialogue is output. Then, it may be suggested that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to the specific character in the speech is output.

  FIG. 248 (A4) shows a state in which the marker MRKc is moving according to the song of the princess character. Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (A5), at the timing when the princess character sings the “excellent” part, the upper and lower frames of the lyrics display area LYC change from the default display mode white to red, and a chance up notice is performed. Is shown.

  Then, in FIG. 248 (A6), a balloon with the characters “chance-up lyric frame is red” is displayed in the vicinity of the character “excellent” to notify that the chance-up notice has been made. Note that a balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, a balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, or the display of the lyrics display area LYC. A balloon may be displayed before the aspect changes. Note that the lyrics frame may be ranked in the order of white> red> gold> rainbow, or may be ranked up by skipping one or more ranks such as white to gold. In this case, the expectation of jackpot is higher in the order of rainbow color> golden> red> white, and in the case of rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. In addition, a change mode may be notified (for example, “excellent” is made red) by a character that notifies the timing of “excellent” or the like. Further, in this production example, the case where there is one point at which the chance up notice is generated has been described, but there may be a plurality of points at which the chance up notice is generated. Further, the point at which the chance up notice is generated may change depending on the color of the lyrics frame even in the same reach. Further, the point at which the chance up notice is generated may be the same regardless of the color of the lyrics frame.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (A7), the marker MRKc continues to move along with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “but true tenderness” has been sung. In this production example, the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice is displayed only while the phrase displayed when the chance-up notice occurs. However, when a chance-up notice occurs. It may be possible to display a history that a chance up notice has occurred even after switching from a phrase displayed on the page to another phrase. For example, a phrase in which a chance up notice has occurred is displayed in the lyrics display area LYC. It may be displayed in a separate display area to indicate the type of chance up notice that has occurred, the number of chance up notices that have occurred, or the type of chance up notice that has occurred. You may make it display explicitly or implicitly.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 248 (A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase “may be there” is displayed, and these characters are all in the same display mode.

  FIG. 248 (A9) shows the timing when the marker MRKc has moved along with the song of the princess character and has finished singing the phrase “may be there”.

  Then, in FIG. 248 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the final judge effect by the button effect is started is shown. When the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once deleted. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A10), the operation effective period has not yet started, and the operation effective period starts thereafter. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A12), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again in FIG. 248 (A13), and the lyrics display area LYC includes The phrase “I don't know” is displayed, showing how the final judge was successful. Thereafter, the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character, and when the “unknown” phrase is finished singing at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A14), the marker MRKc is also positioned on the right side of the “unknown” phrase. It becomes like this. In the case of loss, when the effect button 136 is pressed, for example, the screen is darkened, the song cannot be sung to the end, and an effect display in which the final judge effect has failed is performed.

  In FIG. 248 (A15), the lyric display area LYC is erased, and the state in which the song is completely sung is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (A16), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit.

  FIGS. 248 (B1) to (B11) show another production example following FIG. 222 (A8), for example, and it is shown in advance that a chance up notice will occur during the execution of the production by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 248 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 222 (A8), for example, and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 248 (B1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. In this example, a treasure chest TRG is displayed above the second check point CP2 in the gauge portion. This treasure chest TRG indicates that there is a possibility that it will be released when a Sabohani character SBH comes close, and a chance up notice will be announced. In the period from FIG. 248 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG.

  In FIG. 248 (B3), after Sabohani character SBH has started to move, a state of approaching treasure chest TRG is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (B4), treasure chest TRG is opened, and characters “UP” appear in treasure chest TRG. As a result, at the second check point CP2, it is notified that a chance-up notice will be generated by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In this production example, the Sabohani character SBH opens the treasure box before reaching the second check point CP2 to notify the occurrence of the chance up notice. However, when the second check point CP2 is reached, The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the fact that the treasure chest TRG itself appears at the second check point CP2 may be notified that a chance-up notice is likely to occur.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (B5), the treasure chest TRG is erased together with the characters “UP” and the Sabohani character SBH continues toward the second check point CP2. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 248 (B6) to (B11) are performed. The effects performed in the period from FIG. 248 (B6) to FIG. 29 (B11) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (9) to FIG.

  In this production example, when the treasure chest TRG is opened and the characters “UP” appear, the advance notice is given in advance that a chance up notice will occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the corresponding checkpoint. However, for example, the occurrence of a chance-up notification may be notified in advance so that it becomes a more reliable aspect. Further, an icon suggesting the content of a chance up notice that may occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the checkpoint where the treasure chest TRG is arranged may appear from the treasure chest TRG. A treasure chest TRG is arranged at one checkpoint CP1, and when the treasure chest TRG is opened, a face-up icon of a boyi character BOY appears and a chance-up notice that a boyi character BOY appears will be given. You may make a notice.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the effect produced by the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 249 (A1) to (A6) show how a plurality of chance-up notices are generated at one checkpoint.

  FIG. 249 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29 (1). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 249 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (3), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 249 (A3) shows that the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being made due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. Further, in this effect example, a copanda character KPD appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance-up notice is also given by the appearance of the copanda character KPD. Here, the co-panda character KPD overlaps with the swordsman character in the super reach production. The co-panda character KPD may be overlapped with the swordsman character. Here, the co-panda character KPD may appear after the boy character BOY has appeared, the boy character BOY may appear after the co-panda character KPD has appeared, and the boy character BOY The co-panda character KPD may appear at the same time.

  Then, in FIG. 249 (A4), a balloon with a letter “chance up boy passing! An accompanying balloon is also displayed, informing that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first checkpoint CP1. Note that the “Chance Up Boy Pass!” Balloon and the “Chance Up Copanda Appearance!” Balloon may be displayed at the same time, or after the “Chance Up Boy Pass!” Balloon is displayed, A speech bubble “Chance Up Copanda Appears!” May be displayed, or after a speech bubble “Chance Up Copanda Appears !!” may be displayed, a speech bubble “Pass Chance Up Boy !!” may be displayed. The balloon of the savohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD appear, or during the appearance of the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD (for example, during the appearance of the appearing animation). It may be displayed, or may be displayed before the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD. In addition, the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice is displayed by displaying the Boyi character BOY and the co-panda character KPD, but it may not be stopped. Further, for example, it may be notified that a plurality of chance up notices are generated by one balloon such as “Chance up BOY passed! And copanda appeared!”.

  FIG. 249 (A5) shows a state where the Boyi character BOY and the co-panda character KPD are erased by the frame-out animation, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is also erased. Note that the balloon may be erased after the boyi character BOY and the copanda character KPD are erased, or the boyi character BOY and the copanda character KPD may be erased after the balloon is erased. The balloon may be erased while the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD are being erased (while the frame-out animation is being displayed). Further, the Sabohani character has started moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT. Thereafter, the performance shown in FIG. 249 (A6) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 249 (A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (8), and a description thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In this production example, even if a plurality of chance up notices are generated, only one “UP” character indicating that the chance up notice has occurred is displayed, but the number corresponding to the number of chance up notices that have occurred. “UP” (in this production example, two “UP” displays) may be displayed.

  FIG. 249 (B1) to FIG. (B7) show that when there is a checkpoint for which no chance up notice has occurred in the production by the chance up meter during super reach, a chance up notice is given at the check point. The example of the production to be given is shown. In the period from FIG. 249 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 230 (A6) to FIG.

  Thereafter, when the movement of the Sabohani character SBH stops at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (B3), the pause icon PSE overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT on the front side as shown in FIG. 249 (B4). Is displayed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT is temporarily stopped by the pause icon PSE overlapping the chance up meter CMT is shown. Note that a temporary stop may be displayed by some or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (B5), a super-reach effect is interrupted, and a cut-in indicating that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the effect of other contents is performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. The cut-in display is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed together with the pause icon PSE even during the period in which the display of the cut-in of the princess is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. In addition, the princess cut-in may be displayed before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is paused by displaying the pause icon PSE. In this case, for example, the princess cut-in is displayed. During the period, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and when the princess cut-in display is finished and the super reach effect is resumed, the pause icon PSE is displayed on the chance up meter CMT and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. You may make it perform the production which the production by CMT pauses. Also, during the period in which the pause icon PSE is displayed, the super reach effect is paused, while the chance up meter CMT does not stop the effect, and the Sabohani character SBH may advance. The effect of the super reach may not be paused, and the effect at the chance up meter CMT may be paused. In addition, when the cut-in display by the princess character is performed, there may be a case where the pause icon PSE is displayed and the effect is paused or no pause is performed. In this case, the big hit symbol pattern may be determined and stopped more easily than when the temporary stop is not performed. Further, the progress of the super reach production is progressing from the position of the Sabohani character SBH shown in the chance up meter CMT, and the pause icon PSE is displayed to pause the super reach production. An effect may be performed in which the progress and the position of the Sabohani character SBH are aligned.

  FIG. 249 (B6) shows a state in which the cut-in display by the princess character is finished and the suspended super reach effect is resumed. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (B7), the pause icon PSE is deleted, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is resumed. At this time, the reach effect has been rewritten and the display of the second checkpoint CP2, which has been displayed to the effect that the chance up notice has not occurred, is displayed in a red-marked manner, and the chance up notice is given. A character “UP” is also displayed to indicate that the error has occurred. That is, in actuality, the chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 has not been performed, but it is represented as being performed, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In this production example, a state where the pause icon PSE overlaps the chance up meter CMT is shown. For example, in the case where the information display area described above is provided in the chance up meter. In the information display area, the characters “pause” may be displayed, or only the characters “pause” are displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and a chance up meter such as a bar display or a SBHani character SBH is displayed. Images constituting the CMT may be hidden.

  FIGS. 249 (C1) to (C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

  FIG. 249 (C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 29 (1). Specifically, when the transition is made to super reach (swordsman reach), a chance up meter CMTx formed in a strip shape at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed on the left and right. The display of the chance up meter CMTx changes in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue decreases from the left to the right from the start point SPx to the final point GPx according to the progress of the effect of super reach. In the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the characters “beginning” are displayed, and in the area on the right side of the end point GPx, the characters “end” are displayed, and the start point SPx and the end point of the chance up meter CMTx are displayed. The point GPx is clearly indicated. Further, a check point CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance up meter CMTx, which indicates that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may be performed at a timing when a marker MRKx described later reaches the check point CPx. Note that the checkpoint CPx is a display mode with a question mark in a white circle, suggesting that there is a possibility that some chance up notice will be given, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, the question mark may not be attached in the white circle, and the question mark may or may not be attached. In addition, marks, characters, and symbols different from the question mark may be attached in the white circle.

  In FIG. 249 (C2), the production by the chance up meter CMTx is started, and the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the production of the super reach, and the gauge decreases correspondingly. It shows how they are doing.

  Thereafter, when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (C3), as shown in FIG. 249 (C4), a balloon labeled “Intense heat” is displayed in the oval frame. It is displayed together with the face display YSMN, and a chance up advance notice (high heat notice) with high reliability of jackpot is performed. It should be noted that even when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, there may be a case where the chance-up notice is not performed, or another type of chance-up notice may be performed. Further, while the chance-up notice is being performed, the marker MRKx may wait at the position of the check point CPx, or may proceed toward the final point GPx without waiting.

  FIG. 249 (C5) shows a state in which the display YSMN of Tono-sama is erased, the chance-up notice is finished, and the chance-up meter CMTx is advanced in accordance with the progress of the super reach production.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, which is a big hit. Is done. When the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, there may be a case in which the main character, Tono, is defeated by the enemy swordsman.

  FIGS. 249 (D1) to (D6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 249 (C1) to (C6). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 249 (D1), the display at the check point CPx is a display mode in which the letters “heat” are added in white circles, and the timing at which the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx. Therefore, the advance notice of intense heat shown in FIG. 249 (D4) is announced. Note that other types of chance-up notices may be announced. Further, in the case of a display mode in which characters of “heat” are added in white circles, a chance up notice may or may not occur. In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (D1 ′), a balloon with the characters “a“ high heat ”notice occurs at this timing” may be displayed near the check point CPx. The effects shown in FIGS. 249 (D1) to (D6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 249 (C1) to (C6) except that the display mode of the checkpoint CPx is different. Description is omitted. In addition, before the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the characters “question mark” may change to “heat”.

  FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining another effect pattern of effects by the chance up meter.

  FIG. 250 (A1) to FIG. 250 (A4) show a state in which a notice different from the chance up notice is performed using the components of the chance up meter CMT in the production by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 250 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 29 (2), for example. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 250 (A3), since the boyi character BOY has appeared at the first checkpoint CP1, a balloon with the letters “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is given. Informs that it was done. At this time, the background color of the speech balloon is red, which suggests that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display being executed than when the background color of the speech balloon is the default color (white). ing. In other words, the background color of the balloon is red, which indicates that the advance notice is being performed. Thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (A4) is performed. Note that the background color of the balloon is configured to be displayed in red rather than the default color (white) in the case where the big hit symbol display mode is fixedly displayed than in the case where the lost symbol display mode is fixedly displayed. Also good.

  Thereafter, when the chance up notice is finished, as shown in FIG. 250 (A4), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is increased by the occurrence of the chance up notice. The characters “UP” are displayed, and the Sabohani character SBH starts moving.

  FIG. 250 (B1) to FIG. 250 (B18) illustrate an effect example in which an effect is generated by the chance up meter CMT during symbol variation other than super reach. FIG. 250 (B1) is an example of an effect following FIG. 222 (A2), for example. The effect shown in FIG. 250 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 250 (B2) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this production example shows, for example, the progress status of the decorative symbol variation display, and the Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current decoration depends on the position. The progress status of the symbol variation display is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this production example, the placard is rotated and displayed including a display of “x” and a question mark, so that the player has a sense of expectation as to whether the production will be lost or the production will develop. ing. Here, the traveling speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 250 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur.

  FIG. 250 (B3) to FIG. 250 (B4) show a state in which the Sabohani character SBH functioning as a cursor has started moving. At this time, a balloon written as “START !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH.

  FIG. 250 (B5) shows a state in which the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B6), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a cocoon conversation image CI2 in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed together with a heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 250 (B6), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Tono-sama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A. The operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started thereafter.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 250 (B7) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. 250 (B8), in the conversation image CI2 of the frog, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the frame on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is outlined in gold, and “It ’s super hot! A notice will be made that the characters "" are displayed. Then, a balloon with a letter “chance-up gold frame notice occurrence !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance-up notice has been made by the conversation image CI2 of the bag. Note that the balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the habit conversation image CI2 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the habit conversation image CI2 changes. In FIG. 250 (B8), No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 “Gold Bomber” icon IHI appears on the right side of the screen and the pending change animation starts. That is, the “gold bomber” icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation in this production example, a bullet is fired (bombed) toward the change icon h0 while the icon IHI of “Gold Bomber” flies from right to left. Note that the icon IHI of “Gold Bomber” may be temporarily stopped before the target change icon h0. In addition, this temporary stop may be a temporary stop of a gaze disguised as a target icon. Moreover, in this production example, when the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the “gold bomber”, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is the gold display mode. It has been suggested that In addition, when the hold change animation by the “gold bomber” icon IHI is performed, the display of the hold icon may be changed due to the successful bombing on the change icon h0, or the bomb on the change icon h0. The display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change due to failure. In this production example, after the display mode of the frog conversation image CI2 changes, the “Illustration of gold bomber” icon IHI may appear and the hold change animation may start, or after the hold change animation starts. The display mode of the habit conversation image CI2 may be changed. That is, the period during which the chance up notice relating to the first check point CP1 is performed and the period during which the chance up notice relating to the second check point CP2 are performed may overlap. Further, the hold-change animation may be started after the balloon of the Sabohan character SBH is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the hold-change animation is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B9), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, and the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice. Is displayed above it, indicating the history that a chance up notice has occurred. FIG. 250 (B9) shows a state in which a gold bullet icon is fired from a gold bomber icon. That is, the “gold bomber” icon IHI includes a gold bomber icon and a gold bullet icon. The target here is the fluctuation icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (B10), the bullet icon hits the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the gold display mode. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH is traveling on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second checkpoint CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Note that the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, or the Sabohani character SBH changes to the second checkpoint after the display mode of the change icon h0 changes. CP2 may be reached. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 and stands by.

  Then, in FIG. 250 (B11), a balloon with the word “chance up money reserve” is displayed in the vicinity of the savohani character SBH, and a chance up notice that the change icon h0 becomes a gold display mode has occurred. Is informed. Note that a balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or a balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B12), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, indicating the history that a chance-up notice has occurred.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (B13), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, a reach state is formed, and a fluctuation variation display is performed. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the fluctuation variation display is performed may overlap with a part of the chance up meter CMT, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 250 (B14), “decoration 7” that fluctuated and fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before the transition to the super reach production moved below the second decorative symbol and fluctuated and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the “decoration 7” that has been moved has moved below the second reserved number display. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, and a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed at this timing. A background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, or after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. The background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the third check point CP3 after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

  Then, in FIG. 250 (B15), a balloon with the word “chance up Claire background” is displayed in the vicinity of the savohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is displayed that a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. It has been reported that. Note that the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B16), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, and the third checkpoint CP3 is marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice. Is displayed above it, indicating the history that a chance up notice has occurred. In FIG. 250 (B16), the background image including the spirit character CLA is switched to the default background image. The background image including the spirit character CLA may be continuously displayed until the super reach background image is displayed. In FIG. 250 (B16), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the state where the frame houts the floating icon display area CIS and the frame out of the display screen is left is shown. .

  FIG. 250 (B17) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed downward with the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS remaining. FIG. 250 (B17) shows a state where the savory character SBH has reached the final point GP. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in the form of being displayed as “SP”, and it is informed that the shift to the super reach is made.

  FIG. 250 (B18) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as achieving the purpose. Even after the transition to the super reach, an effect by a new chance up meter may be started. The chance-up meter CMT may be deleted before the super reach effect is started, may be deleted after the super reach effect is started, or is deleted when the super reach effect is started. May be. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In this case, the CUM preparing display MTY is not necessarily displayed.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by the chance up meter performed in the probability variation state.

  FIGS. 251 (A1) to (A19) show a state in which an effect using a chance up meter is performed as a pre-reading notice in the probability variation state.

  FIG. 251 (A1) shows a state in which the first symbol variation display of special figure 2 is performed after the end of the big hit game. The control state shown in FIGS. 251 (A1) to (A19) is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (a probability variation state with electric support). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 251 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 4, so the four hold icons (first hold icon h21 to fourth hold icon h24) in the special figure 2 are arranged in the horizontal direction. The left hold icon is the older hold icon. Note that the hold icon of the special figure 1 may also be displayed. Further, in this effect example, a background image of the universe in which the effect of the rocket heading to the planet is displayed as the background image in the probability variation state with electric support. In addition, in this production example, it is applied to a so-called ST machine in which a probability variation state with an electric support of 50 rotations is given after the completion of all the big hit games. It may be a spec that is in a probable state with electric support until it is done. Further, it may be a so-called V-ST machine that is given a certain variation state with electric support of predetermined rotation (for example, 50 rotations) when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning award in the big hit game. In addition, the game state in this production example may be a special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state (electric support state) instead of the probability variation state with electric support, or a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state. Also good. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The hold number of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 4. . The second decorative symbol is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative symbol is also displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-handed display for instructing the player to launch a game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is performed, and below that, a normal low probability special figure low probability is displayed. The number of consecutive hits, which is the number of jackpots that have occurred from the occurrence of a big hit in the state to the normal low probability special figure low probability state again, is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. “BONUS × 3” is displayed, showing a sash. Also, below the display of the number of consecutive resorts, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Also, in this effect example, a song title display section MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the song title of the currently output song (in this case, the default title “may be there” ]) Is displayed, and the music piece having the title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music that is output here is the music that is output in the probability variation state. Further, on the left side of the music title display portion MN, icons of up and down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u, d.

  In FIG. 251 (A2), the special symbol 2 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5”. . Note that the remaining number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, which is the default display mode.

  FIG. 251 (A3) shows that the suspension of special figure 2 has been consumed and that the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. Even in the state of FIG. 251 (A3), the selected music is still “may be there”. Note that a pre-reading notice or a change notice may be given by a music change notice, or an effect of forcibly changing the music selected by the player to another music may be given by the music change notice.

  In FIG. 251 (A4), a background change notice, which is a kind of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice in this production example is a notice that the continuous notice starts. The background change notice target (prefetch target hold) is a hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 251 (A2). In the background change notice, a cocoon image (FSML, FSMR) appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a cocoon image by an animation in which the cocoon is closed (see FIG. 251 (A5)). For this reason, the hold icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbols, and the song title display portion MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the bag and become invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then enters a mute state. Note that output of only the music may be stopped and sound effects may be output.

  The background change notice may be started at the timing when the prefetch target is suspended. In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the expected big hit expectation of pre-reading target hold may be represented by the color of the appearance image (here, the image of the kite). For example, if the color of the kite is green, the background itself changes to the mountain background It may also function as a notice. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  FIG. 251 (A6) shows a state in which an animation for opening a cocoon is being performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 251 (A7), the eyelids are completely opened, and the images of the eyelids (FSML, FSMR) disappear. In this production example, the continuous notice is started by the background change notice. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title “Is it possible to perform a large board” indicating the content of the effect of the continuous notice is displayed, and a chance up meter CMty is displayed above the title. The chance up meter CMty in this production example has a start point SPy and a final point GPy, and a first check point CP1y and a second check point CP2y arranged between them, and each of them is displayed in a white circle, and a band-like shape is formed between the points. It is tied with a gauge. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of a question mark and “!” Is added in a white circle, and a pre-reading notice about the symbol change corresponding to the final point GPy is made. In other words, it is foretold that the final judgment effect, which is the final effect for notifying whether or not a big hit has been made, will be performed after four symbol variation displays, including the symbol variation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first check point CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second check point CP2y It corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold, and the final point GPy corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the third hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. In addition, another prefetch notice may be performed about the point which is not displayed at all among each point. Further, the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the continuous notice effect, but for example, the display mode may change for each symbol variation display. In addition, at the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y, it may be notified that a chance-up notice is performed when the check point is reached. In addition, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the big hit. For example, when “heat” is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than the symbol consisting of “!” And a question mark is displayed, and when “this” is displayed, the big hit symbol form is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. It may be. Further, depending on the display mode in the white circles at each point, it may be possible to give notice of the ease of development to super reach and the change, or the kind of super reach. Further, not only the final point GPy but also other points may display a notice in white circles. For example, even if some kind of notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the previous checkpoint (white circle or You may win a big hit with the symbol variation corresponding to the checkpoint that displays some sort of notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A8), a Tono-like character YMy that functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 251 (A9), Tono-sama's character is carrying a thousand carton boxes, and an effect display is given in which the peasant who is begging is just giving a gift. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A10), the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 251 (A11) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the second hold display, the hold in the special figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold in the special figure 2 indicates 2. Further, the display of the remaining number of symbol fluctuations is updated to “48 more times”. At this time, the character YMy of Tono-sama in the chance up meter CMty has moved from the start point SPy to the first check point CP1y. Also, Tono-sama's character who carried the Thousand Box is showing a state of struggling to throw the Thousand Box to the peasant with a reddish face, and is expecting a big hit. Thereafter, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A12), the display is stopped with a combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 4—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 251 (A13) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the second hold display, the hold in the special figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold in the special figure 2 indicates 1. In addition, the display of the remaining number of symbol variations is updated to “47 more times”. At this time, the character YMy in the chance up meter CMty is moved from the first check point CP1y to the second check point CP2y. In addition, Tono-sama's character who carried the Thousand Box is shown throwing the Thousand Box toward the farmer's family, and has a higher expectation for the jackpot. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A14), the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 251 (A15) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the second hold display, the hold in FIG. 1 indicates 3 and the hold in FIG. 2 indicates 0. In addition, the display of the remaining number of symbol fluctuations is updated to “46 more times”. At this time, it is notified that the character YMy of Tono-sama in the chance up meter CMty has moved from the second check point CP2y to the final point GPy, and this is a variation in which the final judgment effect is performed.

  FIG. 251 (A16) shows that the thousands of boxes thrown by Tono-san reached the peasant as a result of the final judge production, and the oval was scattered from the boxes. That is, it is informed that a jackpot result is derived as a success of giving to a farmer. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (A17), the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is derived, and the manner in which the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (A18), the display is finalized with a combination of big-decoration decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (A19), a big hit start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, “Super Yoshimune Bonus” is displayed indicating that a jackpot game with a probability change jackpot is started due to the arrangement of the probability change jackpot (special jackpot).

  In this effect example, for example, this effect may be performed from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation in the ST by the variation pattern table.

  In this production example, the continuous notice is performed by the production by the chance up meter, but such production by the chance up meter can be applied to the slot machine. For example, an AT (assist time) that is an advantageous gaming state in which a correct payout order is notified, which is a slot machine that can be controlled to obtain a high payout by stopping reels in the correct order (pushing order). In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the number of AT remaining games on the display, the final point is made to correspond to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and the AT state is continued by the display at the final point. Alternatively, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a final judgment effect regarding whether or not the remaining number of games in the AT state is added will be performed. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, it is suggested that the AT state is easily continued, the ease of adding the remaining number of games in the AT state, the number of games to be added, etc. May be. In addition, at each of the start point, the final point, and one or more check points arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed in the white circle corresponding to the timing of the lever ON or the first stop or the second stop, or the winning combination is displayed. It may be displayed as a history in a white circle.

  FIGS. 251 (B1) to (B8) are effects following FIG. 251 (A15), and show how the loss result is derived as a result of continuous notice.

  FIG. 251 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 251 (A15). In this production example, a game ball is won at the second special figure start opening 232 between the production shown in FIG. 251 (A15) and the production shown in FIG. 251 (B1). , Special figure 2 is increased by one. In FIG. 251 (B1), as a result of the judge performance, Tonama failed to throw the Thousand Boxes and did not reach the peasant. Has been done. That is, it is notified that the result of losing is derived as failure of giving to the farmer. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (B2), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is derived, and the state of fluctuation fluctuation is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (B3), the display is finalized with the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that there may be a case where after a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived, a rebirth effect is performed and a combination of large winning decorative symbols is derived.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (B4), after the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, in FIG. 251 (B5), the background changes to the background in the probable state with electric support. The background change effect is started. When the background change effect is started, a haze image (FSML, FSMR) appears from the left and right, and the whole display screen becomes a haze image by an animation in which the haze is closed (see FIG. 251 (B6)). For this reason, the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMty are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelids and become invisible. At this time, the music for continuous notice effect output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then enters a mute state. Note that output of only the music may be stopped and sound effects may be output.

  In FIG. 251 (B7), the wrinkle opens and the change display of the first decorative symbol begins to appear, and in FIG. 251 (B8), the wrinkle is completely opened and the wrinkle image disappears. At this time, since the hold of special figure 2 is “0”, the hold icon is not displayed. However, when there is a hold of special figure 2, the hold icon is visible during the execution of the animation in which the kite opens. start. Note that the hold icon may be displayed after the bag is fully opened. Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (B8), the background image after the opening of the fence is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

  FIG. 252 is a diagram for describing an example in which the advance notice by the chance up meter is performed by a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

  FIGS. 252 (A1) to (A5) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the appearance notification of the CUM preparation display MTY is performed using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 252 (A1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position so far appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is in a state (stationary) before rotating. State).

  In FIG. 252 (A2), the POV display 224I starts to rotate on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the constant speed rotation is reached, the “Sabohani” icon SH is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the CUM preparation is performed. Appearance of the middle display MTY is announced. During acceleration of the POV display 224I, none of the light emitting elements of the POV display 224I emits light, so that the change display of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the hold frame UI are visually recognized. It is possible.

  In FIG. 252 (A3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the “Sabohani” icon SH is still displayed. On the far side, the flame effect EF101 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. It is displayed so as to cover the whole.

  When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts the rotational deceleration operation, and then the POV display 224I is in a stationary state as shown in FIG. 252 (A4), and then in FIG. 252 (A5). As shown, it returns to the initial position. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this way, the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY is forewarned, but the CUM preparation display MTY may not appear. The display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY after the POV display 224I starts the deceleration operation, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY. The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY at the timing when the POV display 224I starts the deceleration operation.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) can be visually recognized. An effect display may be performed. In the acceleration state until the POV display 224I reaches the constant speed state from the stationary state or in the deceleration state until the POV display 224I returns from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area is more easily visible than the constant speed state. Even in the deceleration state, the effect display may be performed in the display area. Or you may perform an effect display in the said display area only in an acceleration state and a deceleration state. In the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display on the POV display 224I stand out. Alternatively, an effect display may be performed in the display area in the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The note described here is also applicable to an effect example using the POV display 224I disclosed in this specification.

  Also, the constant speed rotation end timing of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the “Sabohani” icon SH may be earlier than the constant speed rotation end timing, or the icon appearance timing may be earlier. Alternatively, both may be at the same timing.

  Here, the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described. However, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means shown in FIG. 206). 208M ′ etc.), the above-mentioned appearance notice may be executed, or another notice may be executed.

  FIG. 252 (B1) to FIG. 25 (B2) illustrate an effect example in which an effect is generated by the chance up meter by the configuration in which the display unit is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has focused on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to descriptions in other embodiments in this specification). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the display means can be applied even in a vertical arrangement. That is, the hardware configuration is simply different, and the technique described in this specification cannot be applied. From the technical point of view, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontal, it is vertical. Needless to say, the present invention is applicable even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means disposed below will be described as the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 252 (B1) shows the fourth display means 208M 'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 252 (B1) is in the initial position. This fourth display means 208M ′ is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame of the fourth display means 208M ′ in the initial position is on the front side at the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is overlapping. The fourth display means 208M ′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position (overlapping from the front side in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). For example, it is possible to move from the initial position toward the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (K a2 ′). That is, the fourth display unit 208M 'is also a movable unit that can be moved up and down. Further, in addition to the lifting / lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modification of the fourth display unit 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  On the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 252 (B1), a hold frame having a configuration similar to the hold frame UI displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. This hold frame also has a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and an effect icon display area. A pedestal on which the variation icon is placed is arranged in the variation icon display area. The hold icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first stage to fourth stage) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In addition, in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (in this case, “2” and “0”) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. This basic configuration is the same in FIGS. 252 (C1) to (C2) described later.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (B1), after reaching “decoration 7”, the state is shifted to super reach production (swordsman reach). On the other hand, on the fourth display means 208M ', the above-mentioned CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and the start of the production by the chance up meter CMT is notified. At this time, the hold frame including the change icon is not displayed, but the change icon may be displayed. In addition, a hold frame may be displayed. Further, during the period when the CUM preparation display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M ′, the variation icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the hold frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 252 (B2), the display is switched from the CUM ready display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. Thereafter, an effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed on the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIGS. 252 (C1) to (C2) show an example in which the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A8) to (A11) are realized by using the fourth display means 208M '.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (C1), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the approximate center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after reaching “decoration 7”, the state is shifted to super reach production (swordsman reach). On the other hand, on the fourth display means 208M ′, “VS swordsman reach” for notifying the type of the super reach effect is displayed.

  Thereafter, a moving animation in which the CUM ready display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M ′ is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM ready display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M ′. When displayed, the moving animation is complete. In this case, the CUM ready display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M '. Specifically, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed so as to straddle these display means, or may be displayed so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means, You may comprise so that there may be a case where it straddles between these display means, and a case where it does not straddle.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), while the CUM preparation display MTY. Sabohani character SBH may start moving at the same time as switching to chance up meter CMT (the latter). Also, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to move may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only for the former or only the latter.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N illustrated in FIG. 51 and the like.

  FIGS. 253 (A1) to (A7) show a state in which a chance-up notice is given due to the appearance of a boy character BOY that occurs at the first checkpoint CP1.

  FIG. 253 (A1) shows a state where an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed, which has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is displayed, and a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the production has started, and the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. In addition, a pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS constituting the holding frame UI is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and a variation icon having a default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the upper portion, and the second reserved number is displayed below (in this case, the special symbol 1 is “1” and the special symbol 2 is displayed). “0” is displayed).

  In FIG. 253 (A2), a boyi character BOY as a chance-up notice character appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

  Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (A3) is shown to start moving in the right direction as the boy character BOY moves in the right direction on the display screen. Yes. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moving in accordance with the original movement display of the boy character BOY. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, of the character and chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to a position where the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the maximum movement position of the decorative symbol display device 208M is reached, “chance up BOY passed !!” is added in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A balloon appears. Note that a balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position, or a balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (A5), the Boyi character moves to the right so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M starts moving toward the initial position. As the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves, the portion of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M that does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L is changed from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first. The display position is shifted to the decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position after the boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the Boyi character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at the timing when the Boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 253 (A6) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to the initial position. At this time, the character and chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the boyfriend character BOY continues to move to the right of the display screen and is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N from the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the frame is out of the right end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 253 (A7), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is above it. Displayed, showing the history of the occurrence of the advance notice.

  FIGS. 253 (B1) to (B4) are production examples corresponding to FIGS. 253 (A3) to (A6), in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 253 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 253 (A2).

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (B1) shows that the boy character BOY starts moving in the right direction as the character BOY moves in the right direction on the display screen. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT Is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps on the front side, and therefore the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second one. It will be hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 253 (B2) to (B4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 253 (B2) to (B4) are shown in FIGS. 253 (A4) to (A6) except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In the description so far, for example, in the case where an error or simultaneous production shown in FIGS. 169 to 174 occurs or volume / brightness adjustment is performed during the production display, it is shown in FIGS. 169 to 174. Displayed as described above.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M ′ Etc.], and
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first effect display [for example, gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first notice display [for example, CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (3)],
The period display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during the super reach effect. etc],
The period display is a display for notifying a first timing during the display of the reach effect display [for example, a timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the second check point CP2, etc.]
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start during the display of the reach effect display.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (3) to (A9), the CUM preparation display MTY is a chance up. Etc. displayed before the meter CMT is displayed]
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the period display is displayed by displaying the notice display before it is notified that a certain period is started by the period display, so that a certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it is possible to keep track of the start of the period display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The period display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started even during the display of the reach effect display. Further, the period display may be always started during the display of the reach effect display, or may be not started during the display of the reach effect display.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify other than the first timing during the display of the reach effect display. Also good. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

  In addition, only the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. There may be. In addition, the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed before the period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. May be.

  In addition, the first notice display may be a notice that only the period display is displayed, or may be a notice that other than the period display is displayed. In addition, the first notice display may be a notice that the period display is displayed, or may be a notice that the period display is not displayed.

  Instead of the notice display, the notice can be given by the operation of the effect movable body, the sound output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means.

  The notice display may be started during the big hit game.

  In addition, the notice display may be displayed during the display of the period display. For example, the notice display may function as a notice display for notifying that the first effect display is displayed.

  Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed. For example, the notice display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. May be.

  In addition, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is not displayed. For example, the notice display may be displayed as a function for notifying that the period display has been displayed.

It should be noted that “a game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display,
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing in a certain period,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

  In addition, “the period display is a display notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display” is “the period display is a timing at which a chance up notice (or a chance up effect) is performed”. It may be a display of a meter (chance up timing meter) for informing the user.

Further, as a case where it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance up effect is performed is notified by the display during the preparation for the chance up meter (that is, the display during the preparation for the chance up meter is displayed regardless of the display mode of the preparation for the chance up meter). When a chance up point is notified by the chance up meter just by being displayed (for example, when the chance up meter is displayed when the chance up preparation display is displayed, or when the chance up meter is displayed at least once by the chance up meter. For example, when announces a chance up point)
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by a period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display informing of the first timing.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that one or more timings among a plurality of timings including the first timing are notified by the period display. . Moreover, there may be a timing that cannot be specified among timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that “a timing at which all certain effects are performed” is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be a notice display informing one or more timings of timings at which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed. There may be a timing at which the notification is not made.
(6) The first notice display may be a notice display informed of “timing at which all certain effects are performed” that is notified in the period display.

Further, when it is not possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance up effect is performed is indicated by the display during the chance up meter preparation (for example, once the chance up preparation display is displayed or there is a chance up meter, the chance up meter is displayed once. As an example, if you do not notify the chance up point)
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that cannot specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it is not possible to specify in the period display that “the timing at which all certain effects are performed” is notified.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display in which “the timing at which all certain effects are performed” that is notified in the period display is not notified.

  Moreover, the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed may be notified by the period display.

  In addition, the period display may notify the timing when one or more certain effects are performed, and may not notify the timing when a certain effect is performed once.

  Further, when the period display is displayed, the cursor display may have already moved.

  The cursor display may move after the period display is displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)],
The period display is a period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, the period from the first timing in the super reach shown in FIG. 222 (A9) to (A12) until the middle symbol is derived. Etc.]
The cursor display is changed from the second position [for example, the start point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)] to the first position [for example, the second position in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)]. 2 check point CP2 etc.], and then moving to a third position [for example, the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)], the start and end of the certain period are notified. Configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the timing of the first position may be easily understood.

  Here, the period display may include only the cursor display, or may include displays other than the cursor display. Moreover, the period display may necessarily include a cursor display, or may not include a cursor display.

  Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify a period other than the certain period during the display of the reach effect display. . In addition, the period display may necessarily notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the certain period during the display of the reach effect display. .

  In addition, the cursor display may be configured to notify only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position. The display may be configured to notify other than from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position. Further, the cursor display may be configured to always notify from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position. The display may move from the second position through the first position to the third position, so that there is a case where notification from the start to the end of a certain period may not be notified.

  Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position. The display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period, other than moving from the second position to the third position via the first position.

  Moreover, only the first timing may be notified when the cursor display reaches the first position, or the first timing when the cursor display reaches the first position. Other things may also be notified. In addition, it may be informed that the first timing is reached when the cursor display reaches the first position, or the first timing is reached when the cursor display reaches the first position. May not be notified.

  Further, it may be notified that the cursor display is at the first position only by reaching the first position, or the cursor display may be the first timing even if the cursor display does not reach the first position. It may be notified that it is timing.

  Note that the positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be first position> second position> third position, or other positional relationship. The cursor display may be configured to move in the order of the second position> the first position> the third position. More precisely, “the position where the cursor display reaches first when the cursor display moves” is the front, and “the position where the cursor display reaches after” is the back.

In addition, “the period display is a chance-up display [for example, the second checkpoint CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29 (15) and the chances of the jackpot being increased due to the appearance of the chance-up notice” Display of “UP” characters to indicate that] may be displayed,
The chance-up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second check When point CP2 is marked in red or the display of the letters “UP” is displayed, a chance-up notice by displaying gold cut-in CI3 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the second checkpoint CP2. Etc.)
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15). Thus, when the chance up notice by the display of the gold cut-in CI3 is started, the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red and the letters “UP” are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

  Here, the period display may be the one in which only the chance up display may be displayed, or the display other than the chance up display may be displayed. Further, the period display may be one in which the chance up display is always displayed, or the chance up display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first effect display may be performed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, a display other than the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first effect display may be performed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

  In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first effect display may be performed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance-up display may be displayed at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

  In addition, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, or the first display at the first timing. Even when the display of the effect display is not started, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

  When the chance up display is displayed, the chance up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position, or the chance up display is displayed. In such a case, the chance display may be performed before the cursor display reaches the third position.

In addition, the first notice display is a display that may be moved. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (A8) to (A10), the CUM preparation display MTY is moved and displayed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display may perform a moving display, it may be possible to cause the line of sight to be guided to the first notice display so that the first notice display is noticed.

  Here, the first notice display may be one in which only movement display is performed, or may be in display other than the movement display. In addition, the first notice display may be one that always performs moving display, or may be one that does not perform moving display.

In addition, after the first notice display starts the moving display, the display of the period display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (A8) to (A11), the CUM preparation display After the MTY is moved and displayed, the CUM ready display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the timing at which the display of the period display is started can be grasped.

  Here, only the display of the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the moving display, or the display other than the period display after the first notice display starts the moving display may also be displayed. May be started. In addition, the period display may be started after the first notice display starts moving display, or the period display may not start after the first notice display starts moving display. There may be.

  Note that the period display may be moved and displayed.

  Further, it may be notified that a certain period has started after the moving display of the first notice display is completed.

  Moreover, the timing at which the moving display of the first notice display is started can be set as appropriate.

Further, “the display position of the first notice display is changed by the moving display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (A8) to (A10), the moving display of the CUM ready display MTY displays the CUM The display position of the in-preparation display MTY has been changed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the display of the first notice display can be changed by changing the display position of the first notice display.

  Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by moving display, or there may be a change other than the display position of the first notice display by moving display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may always be changed by moving display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by moving display.

  Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by a display other than the movement display.

In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), etc.],
The first notice display includes a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon constituting the CUM ready display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3) is red, or a CUM shown in FIG. 238 (A1). In the display mode in which the meter portion constituting the in-preparation display MTY is red, the display mode in which the Sabohan character SBH constituting the CUM in-progress display MTY shown in FIG. 238 (B1) is red, or in FIG. 238 (C1) The display of the CUM preparation display MTY to be displayed may be displayed in a display mode or the like in which the cursor is the princess character HME].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display form, the jackpot symbol form is finally more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Also good. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display mode and the second display mode may be partially different display modes, or all may be different display modes.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, only the jackpot symbol form is finally determined, compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. It may be easy to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Symbol aspects other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol pattern is always finalized as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. It may be easy to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. There may be a case where the big hit symbol pattern is difficult to be confirmed and displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed and the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. Also good. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be displayed in the final display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the final display. There may be.

  The first notice display may be displayed only in one display mode.

  Further, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally finally displayed in the order of the third display mode <the second display mode <the first display mode.

  The first notice display may be configured to be able to display in three or more display modes.

  Further, the ease with which the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern does not have to be changed depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

In addition, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more effective than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Display of the first effect display is easy to start at the timing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a sense of expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

  Here, in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed at the first timing than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Only the display of the effect display may be easy to start, and the first notice display is displayed in the first display form when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. Instead, display other than the display of the first effect display may be easily started at the first timing. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first presentation is performed at the first timing than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. The display of the display may be easily started, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. However, it may be difficult to start displaying the first effect display at the first timing.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may always start at the first timing, or the first effect display at the first timing. There may be a case where the display of the display does not start.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display does not necessarily start at the first timing, or the first display at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started.

In addition, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B3). In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY displayed in the default display mode is ranked up with the background color of the balloon changed to red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where an expectation that changes to the second display mode can be given even if the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.

  Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display form may change only to the second display form, or the first notice display displayed in the first display form. However, there may be a case where the display mode is changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, the first notice display displayed in the first display form may be changed to the second display form, or the first notice display displayed in the first display form is the second display form. The display mode may not change.

  In addition, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, or the first display displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. The notice display may also change to the second display mode.

  Note that the display mode of the first notice display may be changed by the operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the display mode is changed by displaying the operation promotion display including the button image. It may be changed, or the display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state where the operation promotion display is not displayed.

  In addition, the display mode of the first notice display may change as a result of the other notice display being performed, and the display form of the first notice display is suddenly performed without any effect such as the notice display. May change.

  Further, it may be notified that the display mode of the first notice display changes depending on the period display.

  Further, the display mode of the first notice display after the change may be noticed.

In addition, “the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 222 (A11)],
The period display includes a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 235 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (A1). The display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH to be red is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (B1) is red, and FIG. 236 (C1) The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 236 (D1) is red, A display in which a princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 236 (E1) is displayed. Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is the fourth display in comparison with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 238 (A1) to (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, the chance up meter CMT is also easily ranked up],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where a sense of expectation can be given to the display mode of the first notice display.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  The period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes, or all may be different display modes.

  In addition, the period display is in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first display is displayed in the first display mode. Only when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. However, display modes other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. In addition, the period display is in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be displayed without fail, and the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. It may be difficult to display in the fourth display mode.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

  In addition, when the substitute notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the fourth display mode, and the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more effective than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. Easy to display in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form, the period display is the third display form than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. It may be easier to display only in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. The display may be easily displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is the third display form than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. It may be displayed without fail, and when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form, the period display is more effective than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display form. It may be difficult to display in the third display mode.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. There may be.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

  Also, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may not be known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. When there is only one display mode of the advance notice, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in the final display than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the display of the period display may vary, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

  Here, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be easier to finally display only the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In addition, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode are finally displayed in the final display than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It may be easy. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is likely that the big hit symbol pattern mode will always be confirmed and displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the big hit symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Also good.

  Note that when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may or may not be finally displayed in the final display.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 222 (A11)],
The period display includes a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 235 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (A1). The display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH to be red is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (B1) is red, and FIG. 236 (C1) The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 236 (D1) is red, A display in which a princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 236 (E1) is displayed. Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display mode of the period display may be different, a player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  The period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes, or all may be different display modes.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally display only the big hit symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally display the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is likely that the big hit symbol pattern mode will always be confirmed and displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the big hit symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Also good.

  Note that when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may or may not be finally displayed in the final display.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display [for example, the display of the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 222 (A2), and FIGS. 223 (A3) to (A5)襖 effect shown, display of explosion effect EF104 shown in FIG. 228 (A2), conversation notice shown in FIG. 239 (A2) to FIG. (A6), and FIG. 239 (B1) to FIG. A notice by a notice icon YI, a notice by a navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 239 (C1) to (C2), a notice by a mini game shown in FIGS. 239 (D1) to (D5), etc.]
The second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed,
The second notice display is a display for notifying that the first notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the line of sight can be focused on the period display step by step, and the expectation can be gradually increased.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second notice display is displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or there is a case other than the second notice display before the first notice display is displayed. A display may also be displayed. In addition, the second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may not be displayed before the first notice display is displayed. Also good.

  In addition, the second notice display may be a notice that only the first notice display is displayed, or a notice other than that the first notice display is displayed. May be. In addition, the second notice display may always give notice that the first notice display is displayed, or may not give notice that the first notice display is displayed. .

  The first notice display may be displayed whenever the second notice display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed even if the second notice display is displayed. .

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. Rather than being able to finally display the big hit symbol form,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the second notice display is displayed.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the last notice display is displayed rather than when the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. In particular, only the jackpot symbol pattern may be confirmed and displayed, or when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. Eventually, it may be easier to confirm and display a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect as compared with the case where one notice display is displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the final notice display is displayed rather than when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display. The jackpot symbol pattern may not be displayed in a fixed manner, or when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. There may be a case where it is difficult to finally determine and display the big hit symbol form as compared to the case where the previous notice display is displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern may be finally displayed without confirmation, or the jackpot symbol pattern is not finally displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed, the big hit symbol pattern may not necessarily be finalized and finally the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed. There may be cases.

  Further, the ease with which the big-hit symbol mode is determined and displayed may or may not change even if the second notice display is performed.

In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. The jackpot symbol is easy to confirm and display
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a sense of expectation that the first notice display is displayed.

  Here, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, only the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed compared to the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. May be easier to be confirmed, or when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. Eventually, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed. In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern must be displayed in the end, rather than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. The final display may be easier to display, and if the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the period display is not displayed when the first notice display is not displayed. In some cases, the big hit symbol pattern may not be confirmed and displayed.

  If the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finalized and the jackpot symbol may not be finalized. May be.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display, the jackpot symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. There may be.

In addition, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are at least partly the same display mode [for example, the CUM ready display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3) and FIG. 222 (A9 ), The display mode is at least the same in that the SBBO character SBH is arranged, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the player may be able to recall the relationship between the first notice display and the period display.

  Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially the same display mode, or all may be the same display mode.

In addition, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes. [For example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9) has a checkpoint (first The display mode is different from at least the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3) in that the checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the first notice display and the period display may be distinguished and easily recognized.

  Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partly different display modes or all different display modes.

In addition, “the display of the period is displayed by the display of the first notice display, so that the reach effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 222 (A3 ) To (A9), it is announced that the reach effect display is displayed when the CUM preparation display MTY displays and the chance up meter CMT provides an effect. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a sense of expectation for the big hit can be given by displaying the first notice display.

  Here, it is possible to notify only that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display. By notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying “”, it is also possible to notify other than displaying the reach effect display. In addition, it is possible to be sure that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display is displayed. By displaying the display of the period display in advance, it may not be notified that the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, it may be announced that only the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display is displayed. By notifying that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may be notified that a display other than the reach effect display is also displayed.

  In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed only by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. The display of the reach effect display may be notified in advance other than the advance notification that the period display is displayed.

  In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that only the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. By notifying that the display other than the period display is also displayed, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying only that the first notice display is displayed, so that the period display is displayed, or other than the first notice display. It may be notified that the period display is displayed by displaying the previous notice display, or the reach effect display is displayed.

  Note that “when the period display is predicted to be displayed” may mean “when the period display is predicted in advance” or “the period display is It is an effect that accompanies the reach effect display, and it may be a case where the reach effect display is directly foretold and the period display is foreseeed indirectly. It may be a case where the period display is foreseeing that the period display will be displayed directly and the reach effect display is informed indirectly.

In addition, the first notice display and the period display may be started in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (A3) to (A9), a CUM preparation display. MTY and chance up meter CMT are displayed during execution of the same symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the time when the period display is displayed may be easily recognized.

  Here, the first notice display and the period display may be started only in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display are started in different symbol variation displays. There may be cases. In addition, the first notice display and the period display may always be started in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may not be started in the same symbol variation display. There may be.

  The first notice display may be displayed before one or more decorative symbols temporarily stop, may be displayed before the decorative symbols become intelligent, or reach effect display is started. It may be displayed before the display or before the period display is displayed.

  Further, the first notice display may be always displayed by the same symbol variation display as the period display.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed, for example, in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed may be displayed.

In addition, the “first notice display is a display that may be displayed in a symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (A3) to (A14) in the same figure, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed before the symbol variation display in which the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the first notice display functions as a pre-read notice, and there may be a sense of expectation for the symbol variation display executed later.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display display is started, or the period display may be started. The display may be started even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first notice display may always be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display display is started. The display may not be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be performed.

  The first notice display may be always displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed by the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

  The first notice display may be displayed during the symbol stop display, or may be displayed during the symbol stop display.

In addition, the first notice display is a display that is also displayed during the symbol stop display period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (D3) to (D6), the CUM preparation display MTY is a symbol. It is displayed even during stop display],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a sense of expectation can be given even during the symbol stop display period.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the symbol stop display period, or may be displayed during a period other than the symbol stop display period. The first notice display may be displayed without fail during the symbol stop display period, or may not be displayed during the symbol stop display period.

In addition, the first notice display is a display that is not displayed during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (C3) to (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is It is not displayed while the symbol is stopped]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the first notice display is not displayed during the symbol stop display period, so that the game may be sharpened in some cases.

  Here, the first notice display may be hidden only during the symbol stop display period, or may be hidden during a period other than the symbol stop display period. . Further, the first notice display may be always hidden during the symbol stop display period, or may not be hidden during the symbol stop display period.

  When the symbol variation display is started, the first notice display may be displayed again.

In addition, “the first notice display is a continuous notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (A1) to (A16), before the symbol variation display in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed. The CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in each of the multiple symbol variation displays to be performed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first notice display may be continuously performed, thereby enhancing the expectation.

In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the expectation for the reach effect display can be improved.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be displayed during display of a display other than the reach effect display. There may be something. In addition, the first notice display may always be started during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

  The first notice display may be displayed while the reach effect display is being displayed and until a certain period starts, or may be displayed before the reach effect display is started. It may be done.

In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (A3) to (A4). In addition, the CUM ready display MTY is displayed before reaching reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started, thereby providing a sense of expectation for the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed. Can do.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or other than before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started. In addition, the first notice display may always be started before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be a thing.

  The first notice display may be displayed during the reach effect display, may be displayed before the reach effect display is started, and is also displayed during the reach effect display. You may make it do.

  Further, the reach production display is a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first notice display may be started during the execution of the normal reach that is performed before the super reach is started. The display may be started during the symbol variation display before the effect display is started, and may be displayed until the period during which the normal reach in the reach effect display is executed.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner or finally the lost symbol mode is determined and displayed is determined as a jackpot determination performed at the start of symbol variation [for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b) The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display state of the variation icon, and the jackpot determination is performed by a start port provided on the game board [for example, Acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232] [for example, acquired in the winning acceptance process in the winning port winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. 97] It is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using random numbers [for example, special figure 1 winning random value, special figure 1 random value, special figure 2 winning random value, special figure 2 random value] In the big hit lottery (Hereinafter, referred to as “big hit probability”) is determined in advance [for example, a high probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 109 (a) and a low for failure determination shown in FIG. 109 (b). The game table characterized in that the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the variation icon. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain performance is performed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started changes,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect moving means (including image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versatile lighter, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Moreover, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a big hit than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
One type of display of multiple types is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of the plurality of types of operations is a production operation,
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, an operation other than the presentation operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the presentation operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to that provided on the game board, and may be provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
The case where the certain effect occurs is easier to hit than the case where it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
A hot production display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or during big hit. Even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing at which the third effect display is displayed by the period display may not be notified,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a prepaid card forgetting prevention notification, light emission by an LED, an effect operation by an accessory May be performed. Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 3rd display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation in which the determination result is a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “hit symbol variation”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation”) in which the result of the determination of success or failure is out of place.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured such that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the loss symbol variation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
The game stand, wherein the power output movable means may perform the effect operation during display of the third effect display.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is hidden until a certain period in the reach ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period in the reach.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The period display is a display for notifying the timing for displaying the second effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second timing”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance increase is notified may be fixed in correspondence with the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. In such a case, the location where the chance up is notified may be changed such that the notification is made three times and the notification is made only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, or may be easier to miss. Also, the likelihood of being a big hit does not have to vary depending on the number of timing notifications. Also, the larger the number of chance ups, the more likely it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances up, the easier it will be to win.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display;
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation,
There may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
The first speed is different from the second speed;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to appendix 26,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which a display mode of at least a part of the time display changes with the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display whose display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display whose display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. In addition, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there are the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
With operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Between the start of the first period and the end thereof, the first timing is notified,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 33,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to attachment 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming machine according to appendix 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
When the countdown display is displayed, it always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
Rather than being displayed in the first display mode, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
The countdown display starts and ends within one symbol variation display period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to appendix 41,
The time notification by the countdown display is continued even during the movement of the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to appendix 41,
During the movement of the countdown display, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
The game stand according to appendix 44,
When the time until the certain performance is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 45,
In some cases, the second display mode does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
An amusement machine according to appendix 47,
In some cases, the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display;
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed,
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the first display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming machine according to appendix 51, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display starts to be displayed,
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
A gaming machine according to appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine according to appendix 53,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 52 to 54,
Providing production movable means that can perform multiple types of actions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
A gaming machine according to appendices 51 to 55,
The first display is configured not to be displayed until the certain period has elapsed after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again before the certain period elapses.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 58, wherein
The certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 59, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The gaming machine according to appendix 63, wherein
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size.
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It ’s easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 67,
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 68,
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming machine according to appendix 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table.

(Appendix 71)
The game stand according to appendix 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
The display position of the first display is changed by the moving display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
While the moving display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming machine according to appendix 74,
The timing notification is a notification for notifying that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to appendix 74 or 75,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming machine according to appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
A gaming machine according to appendix 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. The expectation of jackpot is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. High expectations for jackpots,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2)
In the game stand described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3)
A gaming table according to appendix A1 or A2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
One state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
When the first meter display is started in the second state, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the display is started in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first time,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a second time.
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6,
One display of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A8)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed,
If the fifth state is displayed than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A10,
The display means can display a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A12)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The period display is a display for informing the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
The notice display is a notice for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A13)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display moves from the second position (start position) through the first position to the third position (end position) so that the start to end of the first period is notified. Configured,
The second position is a position before the first position;
The first position is a position before the third position;
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A14)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A14,
The period display is a display in which movement display may be performed.
A game stand with the head of that.

(Appendix A16)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A15,
The moving display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A17)
A gaming table according to appendix A15 or A16,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, it is finally a big hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode. The design is easy to confirm and display
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A19)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A18,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached rather than the display in the first display mode. Easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A20)
A gaming table according to appendix A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A20,
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer),
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
The case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A22)
A game machine according to appendix A21,
Depending on the display mode of the notice display, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A23)
The game stand according to appendix A21 or A22,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display form, the period display is more easily displayed in the fourth display form than when the notice display is displayed in the first display form. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A23,
When the notice display is displayed in the first display form, the period display is more easily displayed in the third display form than when the notice display is displayed in the second display form. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A24,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display,
The notice display is a first notice display,
In some cases, the second notice display may give notice that the first notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A26)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A25,
The symbol change display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the first notice display is not announced by the second notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A26,
In the case where the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed more definitely than the case where the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A28)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A30)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A29,
By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the advance notice display, it is announced that the period display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A31)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A30,
The notice display may be performed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A31,
The notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32,
The notice display also displays the period during which the symbol stop display is performed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32,
The notice display is not displayed during the period when the symbol stop display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A35)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A34,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A36)
The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  FIG. 254 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 254, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  In addition, the aspect in which the display unit 903 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 described above with reference to FIG. 1 may be adopted, and the display unit 903 may be provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 254 is used to enclose a sphere, circulate the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and use the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Next, a slot machine (cylinder gaming machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 255 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 illustrated in FIG. 255 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 255), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 1025, the game information display unit 1026, and the payout number display unit 1027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display unit.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operations of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Under the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 256 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 257 to 345, a ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine. The reference numerals shown in FIG. 257 to FIG. 345 are used only for the explanation using FIG. 257 to FIG. 345 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the explanation using, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 257 to 345 are given priority. On the other hand, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 257 to 345 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 256, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in Fig. 257 to the technical idea shown in Figs. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 259). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 259) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 260) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 257 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 that are launched into the game area 124 of the game, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 259) by the player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 257 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 258 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 257 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear that is operated by turning on the power A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 259 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 259 is a so-called right-handed machine. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N need only be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 259 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a lens cut in the transmission region. An irradiating means (light emitting body) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position in the vicinity of the side edge of the light guide plate, and the light radiated from the irradiating means is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region is predetermined. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. For example, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut that is shaped like a character's face or a lens cut that simulates an effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 258 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 is provided with two variable winning holes. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmitting portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  Furthermore, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 270, etc.) not shown here is prepared as the effect moving means. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 260, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 260, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 261 (a) to 261 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. FIG. 261 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 261 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 261 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, as will be described later, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 261 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol changes at a high speed (scrolled) for each symbol display area. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 259 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, among the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a single decorative symbol display device or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices has a fifth symbol. It may be displayed. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 261 (b) may be reduced, or may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. 261 (b). When the fifth symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays the symbol. It is a kind of means. When the 5th symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the 5th symbol is displayed in an area outside the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG. 261 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 261 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  260, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the big counter value determining random number counter initial value generating counter, the big hit special figure determining random number counter, and the small hit time Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 262 (a) according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for timer number determination for special drawing and for universal use, both of which determine a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  260 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 260 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that there has been a win. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 260 (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 260, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 262 (b)) described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the prior / no-go determination is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hits in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure pre-determination table, random number ranges corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 261 (a) are defined. Depending on which random number range the figure-determining random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 261 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure here is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 262 (b)) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading notice) of the pre-determination result is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 262 (b), a normal-related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 261 (c)) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general figure B shown in FIG. 261 (c) is obtained. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 262 (b), the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, special figure 2 is in operation, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start region) (entrance rate) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In general reach, generally, decorative symbols having the same two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 259) are stopped and displayed (strictly temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 262 (b) is completed, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 262 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 260 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 262 (a). Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 264 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 will be described.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 265, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following drawings unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 265, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are omitted, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is located to the right of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (b). The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Note that, as described above, the hold icon or the fluctuation icon corresponds to the icon related to the symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 265, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there are a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 265 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 265, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. The red lighting state is shown. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lighting” is used here, it may be “flashing” (hereinafter the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 265 (a), both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display a stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a loose pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 265 (a) are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 265 (b), the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 265 (b) are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (c), a reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. In addition, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 265 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 265 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (h), a character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. The display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 265 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 265 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 265 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunate” is displayed, there is a case where a big hit is caused by a reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is not always accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 is provided with a chance button 136 that can perform an advance / retreat operation and a transmission portion 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 266 (a) shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 266 (b) shows a state in which the transmission part 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. 266 (b), it can vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 266 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 266 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 266 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 267 (a), the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 267 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 267 (c) is a diagram showing part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 268, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 268 (a) to (c), “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, a notification that prompts the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (a), the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation valid state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 268 (c), when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 268 (c), the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 268 (a), when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 269 (a) to (c) represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (a) is an example in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and is a notice effect without using the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The judge effect here is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the shaking display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variation display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the shaking display. Eventually, the shaking display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (a), when the operation timing of the operating means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the three decorative symbols are displayed in a shaking manner. The execution period is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the execution period of the shortened shaking display.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), before notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (b) is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and a judgment effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that it aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, and the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 269 (a) and the example shown in FIG. (B) are examples in which, even if the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (c) is an example of the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the decorative symbols. The operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) while the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (c), when the operation timing of the operation unit B is delayed, the period of the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation unit B is shortened. The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 269 (c), when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 269 (d) is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the variation display of the decorative design, or a judge showing the end in the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 269 (d), the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. The final judgment effect here is also a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, the accessory etc. arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described.

  FIG. 270 (a) is a diagram showing a movable accessory arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 270 (a), the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. A family crest member 224E is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (a).

  FIG. 270 (b) is a diagram for explaining the family crest character 224E.

  As shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 270 (b), the family crest character 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest member 224E starts operation, as shown in the right side of FIG. 270 (b), the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device. Overlap the 208L display screen from the front (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. The light emission mode of the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 270 (b) is the first mode (default mode).

On the front side of the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 270 (a), the eight generations 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb shown in FIG. 259 are arranged. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb may be collectively referred to as a logo character 224F. Note that a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed in front of the logo accessory 224F. However, the light guide plate IL may be disposed between the logo combination 224F and the family crest combination 224E, or may be disposed between the family crest combination 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. (C) is a figure for demonstrating the logo accessory 224F.

  As shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 270 (c), the logo accessory 224F is arranged at an initial position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In other words, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are arranged side by side and in contact with each other. When the logo object 224F starts to operate, as shown in the center diagram of FIG. 270 (c), the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are in contact with each other side by side from the initial position. It descends to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). The position of the logo accessory 224F shown in the center diagram of FIG. 270 (c) is referred to as the maximum operating position. As shown in the drawing on the right side of FIG. 270 (c), the logo accessory 224F can perform a separating operation along the rail member 224Fr at the maximum operating position. That is, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa arranged on the left side moves to the left, and the general character 224Fb arranged on the right side moves to the right. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production. The light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F shown in FIG. 270 (c) is also the first mode (default mode).

  The aspect of the family crest character 224E (light emission aspect), the aspect of the logo accessory 224F (display aspect), the aspect of the other accessory having the light emission function, and the light emission means (LED etc. for the game board shown in FIG. 260) The mode (light emission mode) of the lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542), and various icons and various displays (display of the notification area HZ (background color and character color) described later) (display mode) on the liquid crystal display means are as follows. The 1st aspect-the 7th aspect are prepared. For example, the first mode corresponds to a white mode, the second mode corresponds to a white flash mode, the third mode corresponds to a blue mode, the fourth mode corresponds to a green mode, The fifth aspect corresponds to a red aspect, the sixth aspect corresponds to a golden aspect, and the seventh aspect corresponds to an iridescent aspect. Among the aspects of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, the aspect with a larger number is an advantageous aspect for the player. For example, the larger the number, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit, or the easier start of a certain effect. The mode may change (promote) so as to rise one step at a time, for example, the first mode → the second mode → the third mode → ..., the first mode → the fifth mode, or In some cases, the first mode is changed (promoted) so as to rise in a plurality of steps at once, such as the seventh mode. The first mode is a defill mode, and is the mode that appears most easily. The second aspect or more may be a notice form. For example, in the hold icon, the second mode or more is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and in the variation icon, the second mode or more is the display mode of the normal notice. What has been described here is the same for each of the following effects. For example, the second mode is white blinking display or light emission, and the fifth mode is red display light emission.

  Further, the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F described here are examples of effect moving means. In the effect example described below, the second decorative symbol display device 208M replaces the crest character 224E. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate instead of the logo accessory 224F. Alternatively, other movable display means (for example, the fourth display means 208M ′) and effect movable means (for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd) operate in place of the family crest character 224E. Alternatively, in place of the logo accessory 224F, other movable display means (for example, POV display 224I) and effect movable means (for example, the thousand-cage box accessory 224) may operate.

  FIG. 270 (d) is a diagram showing a modification of the multi-purpose display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214, which are configured by 7-segment LEDs shown in FIG. 259. . In FIG. 270 (d), five rows of LEDs in which eight LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row are prepared. The top row L1 functions as a first special figure display device, the second row L2 from the top functions as a second special figure display device, and the third row L3 from the top is a universal diagram display device. Function as. In each of the columns L1, L2, and L3, the stop symbol form is displayed by combining a pattern of lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of eight LEDs. The fourth column L4 from the top functions as a round display device that displays the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the bottom column L5 is a column that displays a status display such as whether or not the player is right-handed. These LED rows L1 to L5 are constituted by one device. Further, the main controller 300 controls lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of these LED rows L1 to L5.

  FIG. 270 (e) is an enlarged view of the components such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in each drawing in parentheses in FIGS. 272 to 309. Here, each component will be described in advance. Keep it. In FIGS. 272 to 309, each figure written in parentheses is given a reference numeral, but the constituent elements not attached with the reference numerals apply the reference numerals attached in FIG. 270 (e).

  Here, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. A hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. In this hold icon display area, one hold icon is displayed on each pedestal. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (e), two symbol variation displays of the special diagram 1 are held, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. It is displayed. The change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the first display mode (default display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. Although nothing is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 270 (e), the tutorial display portion TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may display a preview and a demonstration effect display. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (e) displays a clear sky background. In the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, Decorative symbols are displayed at high speed.

  Below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, from the left, the speaker 120, the family crest character 224E described with reference to FIG. 270 (b), and the logo character 224F described with reference to FIG. 270 (c) are provided. It is shown. In FIG. 270 (e), both the light emission mode of the family crest character 224E and the light emission mode of the logo character 224F are the first mode (default mode). Both the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F can move. However, here, the moving motion cannot be expressed, and the light emitting operation is expressed. That is, the positions of the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F will be described by re-illustrating the crest character 224E itself or the logo character 224F itself.

  Further, on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, various operations such as the operation key unit 181 (the OK button 181b and the cross key 181a), the chance button 136, and the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. Means are shown. The second chance button 137 may be the transmission part 191 or an operation lever (not shown). In FIG. 270 (e), both the light emission mode of the chance button 136 and the light emission mode of the second chance button 137 are the first mode (default mode). In addition, the structure which is not provided with some operation means, such as the 2nd chance button 137, may be sufficient.

  Below the various operation means, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown. The special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 are square, Lights up in white during 1 fluctuation display, and lights up in a lost lighting mode (in this case, a gray lighting mode) or a jackpot lighting mode (in this case, a black lighting mode) during the stop display in FIG. In FIG. 270 (e), the special figure 1 is being displayed in a symbol variation state, and the square special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 is lit in white. The fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 may be LEDs or the like provided separately from the liquid crystal display device, or may be provided in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be provided in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be provided in the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, a notification area HZ is displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Each effect described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 309 is an effect using the notification area HZ. As will be described in detail later, in the notification area HZ, information related to the special bonus jackpot or various notices are displayed in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram summarizing the preconditions and the like in the performance using the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 271 (a) is a table summarizing various notice displays displayed in the notification area HZ, and FIG. 271 (b) is a table summarizing the expectation of each display. Note that the degree of expectation in FIG. 271 is an excerpt of some of the various degrees of expectation, and the alphabet representing the degree of expectation is “S”, “A” when written in descending order of expectation. ”,“ B ”,“ C ”,“ D ”. “S” is 100% and “A” is less than 100%, but “A” may be “S”. That is, it may be 100%. “D” having the lowest expectation may be 0% or higher than 0%.

  The state in which the “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which what kind of effects will be performed after that, and whether any kind of effects will be performed, is kept secret. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the degree of expectation that normal reach is started is low, and the degree of expectation that super-reach is started and the expectation of jackpot are quite low or 0%.

  On the other hand, the state in which “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol has been stopped (temporarily stopped) in the currently displayed symbol variation display. That is, it is a state in which the pseudo-continuous effect is surely started. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is not necessarily started but may be in a state of notifying that it may start. In addition, a state in which “continue?” Is displayed is a state in which a pseudo-continuous production may be started, and a state in which “continuation” is displayed indicates that the pseudo-continuous production is always started. You may comprise so that it may be in the state which announces.

  The state in which “Chance” is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which the degree of expectation is higher than the state in which the “question mark” is displayed. When “Chance” is displayed, a certain effect may be ranked up. As shown in FIG. 271 (b), the degree of expectation that normal reach is started is high. However, the degree of expectation to develop to super reach is low. The expectation of jackpot is also low.

  The state in which “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is notified that there is a high possibility of developing into a super reach effect in the current symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the degree of expectation that normal reach is started is very high, and the degree of expectation to develop to super reach is also very high. The expectation of jackpot is high. Note that the degree of expectation to develop to super reach may be “S”. Further, “highly likely to develop into a super reach production” may be about a certain type of super reach production. Specifically, it may be a battle-type super reach production or a story-type super reach production. Moreover, it may be about a specific super reach production.

The state in which “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is notified that it has been confirmed that the big hit symbol will be finally displayed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. That is, it is a state in which it is notified in advance that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the degree of expectation that normal reach is started is very high, and the degree of expectation to develop to super reach is also very high. And the expectation degree of jackpot is 100%. Therefore, it may be a big hit without going through super reach, or it may be a big hit without going through even normal reach. However, the expectation degree at which normal reach is started and the expectation degree to develop to super reach may be “S”. Note that even if the jackpot is confirmed, for example, there may be a case of losing with a probability of 1/65536. Further, the state in which “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ may be configured such that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than the state in which at least “question mark” is displayed.
Further, as described above, the determination of whether or not a big hit is made is performed by the main control unit 300 (step S213 shown in FIG. 262 (b)). Unless the state of the control state (game state) such as the uncertain change state is changed, the winning probability of the jackpot is not changed. The presentation using the notification area HZ is performed by the sub-control units 400 and 500. However, since “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the main control unit 300 does not make a big hit. As a result of this being a big hit, “large board behavior” is merely displayed as an effect in the notification area HZ.

  As described above, as a notice display displayed in the notification area HZ, “Chance” has a higher expectation level than “Question mark”, and “SP” has a higher expectation value than “Chance”. The degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than “SP” than “SP”. In the following explanation, “question mark”, “Chance”, “SP”, and “large board behavior” will be used for explanation, but “question mark” is notice display 1, “Chance” is notice display 2, and “SP” is The notice display 3 and “large board behavior” can be read as the notice display 4, and the size of the number after the notice display represents the high expectation of the big hit.

  FIG. 271 (c) is a table summarizing timings at which various notification contents are displayed in the notification area HZ.

  “Timing 1” is a certain timing before the start of the last re-variation (maximum number of re-variations) of the pseudo-continuous production. At this timing 1, any notification content may be displayed in the notification area HZ.

  “Timing 2” is a certain timing after the final re-variation (maximum number of re-variations) of the pseudo-continuous production is started. At timing 2, since the re-variation due to the pseudo-continuous effect is no longer started in the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display, “continuation” is not displayed in the notification area HZ.

  “Timing 3” is a certain timing after the start of the super reach production. At this timing 3, since the super reach effect is started and the pseudo-continuous effect is not started with the currently changing display of the decorative symbols, “continuation” and “SP” are displayed in the notification area HZ. Will no longer be displayed.

  “Timing 4” is a certain timing after the display of shaking (swing fluctuation) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing in the decorative symbol variation display. At this timing, since there is a possibility of a big hit from the rebirth effect, there is a possibility that “question mark” and “large board behavior” are displayed in the notification area HZ.

  As described above, in the notification area HZ, as one symbol variation display progresses, in other words, as the effect progresses, the displayed notification content is limited. Since notification contents may be displayed in the notification area HZ in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, when the chance button 136 is operated earlier, the notice information can be obtained in the notification area HZ. There is. When the notification content is displayed in the notification area HZ, there are cases where the start of the pseudo-continuous production and the development to the super reach production can be expected, and there is a case where the big hit can be expected, so the interest of the game may be improved. As a result, the operation of the chance button 136 may be promoted.

  Here, the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. The alphabet representing “variation time” in FIG. 271 is written in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” when written from the longest time. That is, a plurality of types of variation time are prepared for the special symbol variation display, and among these types of variation time, the longest variation time is “A”, and “D” is, for example, 10 Represents a group of multiple types of time less than a second. Therefore, “D” includes the shortest variation time. The alphabet representing “appearance rate” in FIG. 271 is written in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” when written in descending order of appearance rate.

  FIG. 271 (d) shows the case where the reach effect is not performed at the top. “Reach 1” is a type of normal reach, specifically “search reach”. Here, only one type of normal reach is shown, but there are a plurality of types. “SP1” is an abbreviation for Super Reach 1 and specifically “Okake Reach”. “SP2” is an abbreviation for Super Reach 2 and specifically “Swordsman Reach”. In Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Super Reach 2 has a lower appearance rate, a longer fluctuation time, and a higher expectation level for jackpots.

  Further, the light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F described with reference to FIG. 271 (e) will also be described. The logo accessory 224F may change its light emission mode when the chance button 136 is operated only during reach. However, the display prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is not performed, and the chance button 136 functions as a back button. From the default first mode, the logo accessory 224F is promoted twice to the third mode when the chance button 136 is operated twice only during the reach, and further, the chance button 136 is set during the reach. When operated once, it is promoted to the fourth mode, and when the chance button 136 is operated once more during reach, it is further promoted to the fifth mode. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated twice, instead of being promoted two steps to become the third mode, it is promoted one step to be the second mode, and when operated again, the third mode is set. If it is operated once more, it may become the fourth mode. The number of operations is not limited to this (“2 times, 1 time, 1 time”), but various patterns (“1 time, 1 time, 1 time”, “1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, 4 times) One pattern may be selected based on the lottery result. Further, the mode does not change when the chance button 136 is operated except during the reach. However, when the chance button 136 is operated only during the quasi-continuous production or during the chance button effective period, the mode of the logo accessory 224F may be changed even during the reach. Alternatively, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F may be changed only in a specific state during the reach. Furthermore, the logo accessory 224F may change its form according to the performance without the chance button 136 being operated. In the example to be described later, the mode of the logo accessory 224F may change according to the operation of the chance button 136 only during execution of the development effect to the super reach during the normal reach. Moreover, the light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F functions as a notice. To the extent that the logo accessory 224F has changed to the third mode, the degree of expectation to develop to super reach is low due to the currently displayed display of decorative symbols, and the degree of expectation to develop to super reach 1 is also super reach 2. Expectation to develop is also low. In addition, the expectation of winning a big hit with the currently displayed decorative symbol variation is also low. On the other hand, when the logo accessory 224F reaches the fifth mode, the expectation to develop to super reach is very high due to the currently variable display of decorative symbols, and the expectation to develop to super reach 1 is also super reach 2. Expectation to develop is also very high. In addition, the expectation of winning a big hit with the currently displayed display of decorative symbols is very high.

  FIG. 271 (f) is a table in which various effect patterns other than the start of the pseudo-continuous effect are summarized.

  The column of “logo light emission” in this table represents the light emission mode of the final step of the logo accessory 224F that can emit light when operated during reach.

  For example, no. For 01, the “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ, but the reach effect is not started, and therefore the light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change, and finally the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is determined. It is an example to be displayed.

  On the other hand, no. No. 14, after “Ohban behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 is operated four times during the reach, the logo accessory 224F is promoted to the fifth mode, and is developed into a super reach 2 swordsman reach. Finally, this is an example in which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  This effect pattern is merely an example, but it is configured such that the presence or absence of development to super reach 1 and the degree of big hit expectation can be grasped to some extent by the mode of the logo accessory 224F that emits light by the back button effect. In the production pattern summarized in FIG. 271 (f), the fourth aspect of the logo accessory 224F (green light emission) can be expected to develop into Super Reach 1, but it does not develop into Super Reach 2. It has become. Further, the fifth aspect (red light emission) of the logo accessory 224F has been confirmed to be developed into super reach, and can be expected to develop into super reach 2.

  Subsequently, before describing in detail the effect using the notification area HZ, a representative example will be roughly described. Note that the items described here are the same in the following examples unless otherwise specified, and redundant descriptions may be omitted.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram roughly showing a representative example of the effect using the notification area HZ.

  In the drawings of FIGS. 272 to 309, there are a plurality of examples shown in one figure. However, in different examples, the type of () writing code is different. Moreover, the downward arrow is not attached | subjected to the figure which is the last of each example. Each example may be a continuation from a certain scene in another example, or may be a continuation from another certain scene in another example, and this is described in each example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (A1), the variation icon h0 is displayed in the second mode, and the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c respectively High-speed fluctuation of the symbol is performed. The number “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the notification area HZ, a number may be displayed in addition to the display of the notification content shown in FIG. The background of the notification area HZ in which numbers are displayed is a default mode (white which is the first mode). In addition, the background of the notification area HZ takes any one of the first to seventh aspects described above. Moreover, the mode (color) of the characters and numbers displayed in the notification area HZ may be black, or any one of the first to seventh modes described above. The number displayed in the notification area HZ decreases by “1” when the chance button 136 is operated once. That is, in FIG. 272 (A1), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same figure (A2), the number in the notification area HZ is “1”. Note that the notification area HZ is swayed (swayed) as a whole in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The shaking display here can be regarded as a kind of response display. In FIG. 272 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated once more. In FIG. 272 (A3), “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ. That is, the display is switched from the number display to the notice display. As described above, in the notification area HZ, the numerical display does not become “0”, and may be switched to the notice display at the timing when it becomes “0”. The number display may be “0”. As shown in FIG. 272 (A3), the background of the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed is changed to the seventh mode (rainbow color). Further, at the same time as the display of “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the big hit confirmation notice effect is started. The jackpot confirmation notice effect here is an effect that the logo accessory 224F emits light in the same manner as the background aspect of the notification area HZ (the rainbow color of the seventh aspect) at the initial position. Only when “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the logo accessory 224F changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color), and the operation of the chance button 136 does not change to the seventh mode (rainbow color). . Note that the operation of the chance button 136 does not change to the seventh aspect (rainbow color), but the logo accessory 224F may change to the seventh aspect (rainbow color) in other effects. In addition to the effect that the logo accessory 224F changes to the seventh mode as the jackpot finalizing announcement effect, for example, the effect that the logo accessory 224F moves, the effect movable means other than the logo accessory 224F (for example, the crest character 224E) Etc.) effects that change the mode (for example, change to the seventh mode), effects that effect moving means other than the logo accessory 224F (for example, family crest actor 224E, etc.) operate, and the jackpot confirmation notice sound from the speaker 120 It is possible to list effects that are output, effects that the LEDs of various lamps change (for example, change to the seventh aspect), and the like. In other words, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the jackpot confirmation notice effect. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, the seventh aspect may be an aspect that is used only for the jackpot confirmation notice, or may be an aspect that is not used other than the jackpot confirmation notice. Furthermore, the big hit confirmation notice effect may be started before “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, or may be started after “big board behavior” is displayed.

  In the following description, the number displayed in the notification area HZ disappears, the notice display is displayed in the notification area HZ, and / or the number displayed in the notification area HZ disappears, The effect produced by other effect means is referred to as a notification area development effect.

  The representative example described above is an example in which a certain notification is given after a button operation is performed the same number as the number in the state where the number related to the button operation is displayed, and then a big hit. Since the result of the symbol change in which a certain notification is performed is configured to be a big hit, a certain notification can be called a so-called big hit fixed notification. In addition, as will be described later, other notifications may be made, and in that case, there may be no big hit. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification (effect) may include all of a certain liquid crystal display, output of a certain sound, light emission of a certain light emitting means, or only one of them, Two combinations may be used. Further, for example, only a certain sound output may be a jackpot confirmation notification, and another certain liquid crystal display or light emission of a certain light emitting means may be a notification (effect) performed in association with the jackpot confirmation notification.

  Further, the number displayed in the notification area HZ may be decreased by 2 or more when the chance button 136 is operated once. For example, it may decrease by “5” in a certain state, or decrease by “10” in a different state. Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it may not decrease or may increase on the contrary.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. FIG. 272 (B1) is the same as FIG. (A1), the number “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 272 (B2), the number in the notification area HZ is not “1”, but is switched to the notice display. That is, in FIG. 272 (B2) after one operation of the chance button 136, “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ. Thus, even if the number display in the notification area HZ is a display of “2” or more, it may be switched to the notice display. Note that the background of the notification area HZ in which “SP” is displayed remains the first mode. Further, the logo accessory 224F remains in the first mode. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 272 (B3), the button effect is started, and the chance button 136, which was the default first mode until then, is changed to the fifth mode, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the display device 208L, in the middle symbol display area 208b, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid is displayed as one set. The button image 136a is also displayed in the fifth mode. Note that these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are images that prompt the operation of the chance button 136, but it is not always necessary that these three images are one set. Any one image or two images Even an image is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136. Moreover, although these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are shown in the center area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, they may be shown in other areas. The area where these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed is an area wider than the notification area HZ, but conversely, it may be a narrow area or an area of the same size. In addition, the notification area HZ may be a part of the area where these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed. Conversely, the area where these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed is as follows. It may be a part of the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (B3), in response to this button effect, the chance button 136 is operated once, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Yes. That is, a conversation notice (line notice) is started. Even in this conversation notice, the line “I saw a swordsman” is displayed on the ground of the default mode (first mode), and it is predicted that it will develop into a swordsman reach. That is, this conversation notice is a notice related to the big hit, but directly corresponds to a notice specifying an effect (super-reaching to be developed) to be executed later. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 272 (B7), the swordsman reach is started. In this example, first, “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and it is predicted that it will develop into super reach. However, the type of Super Reach that develops (Okake Reach or Swordsman Reach) is unknown. On the other hand, in the conversation notice started later, the kind of super reach that is developed is also noticed. In addition, both the notice display in the notification area HZ and the conversation notice are common in that they are started by the operation of the chance button 136.

  The “preparing button” displayed in the lower left will be described later.

  In the representative example described above, after a number of button operations are performed less than the number in the state where the number related to the button operation is displayed, a notification different from a certain notification is made, and then other button effects are displayed. The result of the button effect is an effect of notifying a certain effect (super reach effect occurrence), and then a certain effect (super reach effect) is performed. As another notification described above, it is configured to always develop into a super reach in the case of the symbol variation in which the notification including the display of “SP” is performed. According to this example, it is possible to know the development of super reach prior to other button effects by the notification area development effect, and save the trouble of operating with other button effects. In particular, the labor is reduced when the other button effects are button hit effects. Further, the notification area development effect and the other button effects are configured so that the range of information to be known in advance is different, so that it is possible to dare to send off and not notify. For example, the notice display of “SP” in the notification area HZ, which is one of the notification area development effects, is Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2. It is a notice of the development to reach 2.

  The notification may be specified up to the type of super reach where notification in the notification area HZ develops, and the notification may not be specified up to the type of super reach where notification in the conversation announcement develops. Moreover, it is good also as a notification which can specify to the kind of super reach to which the alerting | reporting in the alerting | reporting area | region HZ develops, and to the kind of super reach to which the alerting | reporting in conversation announcement also develops. Or it is good also as information which cannot be specified to the kind of super reach which the information in the information field HZ develops, and it cannot be specified to the kind of super reach which the information in conversation notice develops.

  Next, another example is described with reference to FIG. 272 (C1). In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 272 (C1), the number “2” is displayed. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated. In FIG. 272 (C2), the number in the notification area HZ remains “2”, and button presentation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the button effect is started prior to the notice display in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (C3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. In this conversation notice, the dialogue “The sign of Tono is ...” is displayed on the ground of the third aspect (blue), and it is foretold that it may be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display . The conversation notice here is a weak notice because it is the groundwork of the third mode (blue), and is different from the conversation notice “I saw a swordsman” shown in FIG. 272 (B5). . That is, the conversation notice “The sign of the shrine is ...” is not a notice that specifies the effect to be executed after this. Further, in the notification area HZ that has been the display of the numeral “2” until then, “large board behavior” is displayed. That is, the display is switched from the number display to the notice display. Also in this case, the background of the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color), and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. Further, the logo accessory 224F is also changed to the seventh aspect (rainbow color). In this example, a plurality of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation notice is started and the timing at which “large board behavior” (notice display) starts to be displayed in the notification area HZ may be the same, or the conversation notice may be earlier. However, the notice display in the notification area HZ may be earlier. In this example, both the conversation notice and the notice display in the notification area HZ are notices related to the big hit expectation, but the notice display in the notice area HZ has a higher expectation. This is also apparent from the background aspect (third aspect) of the conversation notice and the background aspect (seventh aspect) of the notification area HZ.

  The representative example described above is an example in which both a jackpot confirmation notification (effect) and an effect performed after the button is operated in another button effect are started by one button operation. In other button effects, a weak pattern effect (effect using the third mode) is performed after the button is operated. That is, in this example, the button effect of the weak pattern overlaps the effect of the strong pattern in the notification area development effect (for example, the big hit confirmation notification). Since the weak pattern effect and the big hit confirmation notification (effect) may overlap, the weak pattern effect may also be a big hit. It can be recognized that, after that, even when a weak pattern effect occurs, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit. There are effects such as. Further, the effect of the weak pattern (for example, the effect using the aspect of the fourth aspect or less, or the effect of using the aspect of the third aspect or less) is the strong pattern (for example, the effect using the aspect of the fifth aspect or more). The appearance frequency is relatively high or the big hit expectation is low compared to the production of.

  Next, another example will be described. Although the number “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 272 (D1), the chance button 136 is not operated in this example. In FIG. 272 (D2), the chance button 136 changes to the fifth mode and starts to vibrate, and the button effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the button effect here, a button image 136a 'larger than the button image 136a shown in FIG. 272 (B3) or the like is displayed. In FIG. 272 (D3), the chance button 136 that vibrates is operated once, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. . In this conversation notice, the line “It's hot” is displayed on the ground of the fifth aspect (red), and it is a strong notice that it is predicted that there is a high probability that it will be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. That is, the conversation notice “Hot is hot” here has a higher expectation of jackpot than the conversation notice “The sign of the shrine is ...” shown in FIG. 272 (C4). In addition, as a result of the button effect, the logo accessory 224F is also changed to the fifth mode (red) which is the same mode as the background mode of the dialogue. Further, “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ that has been the display of the numeral “2” until then. In this example, the conversation notice is a definitive notice (a notice advantageous to the player) than the notice display in the notification area HZ. Moreover, since the background conversation notice in the fifth aspect is higher than the background notice display in the first aspect in the notification area HZ, the degree of expectation is high. Note that the notice display in the notification area HZ may be “Chance” or “Question mark” having a lower expectation than “SP”.

  As described above, the notice display in the notification area HZ and the notice effect other than the notice area HZ may be notified of the same effect, or may be notified of the big hit expectation degree, or may be notified of different from each other. is there. In addition, even if the same effect is notified in advance or both are notified about the jackpot expectation, the expectation may be the same in the notification display in the notification area HZ and in the notification effect other than the notification area HZ. It may be different. For example, the notification display in the notification area HZ may have a higher expectation. Or conversely, there may be a case where the degree of expectation is higher in the notice effect other than in the notification area HZ.

  In this example, the conversation notice based on the frog conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 272 (D4) is a notice related to the big hit, but may be a notice related to the big hit and may be a notice of development to super reach. In this case, when the logo accessory 224F changes to the fifth mode (red), the development to super reach may be confirmed. However, it is different from the conversation notice “I saw a swordsman” shown in FIG. 272 (B5), and is not a notice specifying whether it will develop into Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2.

  In the representative example described above, the weak pattern effect (display of “chance”) in the notification area development effect overlaps the strong pattern effect by another effect (button effect). Since the other button effects are strong patterns, the buttons vibrate when the operation is accepted. In this state, a button operation is performed, and a certain effect in the notification area development effect (an effect other than the big hit confirmation) is performed. Here, super reach production is performed. The player operates the chance button 136 while hoping for the occurrence of the jackpot confirmation notification. However, the player notices that the button vibrates by the operation and notices other button effects, or although the jackpot is not confirmed, it vibrates strongly. Since it is a pattern production, it is possible to entertain and enjoy the certain production (production other than the big hit decision). In addition, the chance button 136 is vibrated, so that the presentation is purely realistic.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (E1), the combination of decorative symbols after the swordsman reach is displayed. In other words, here, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loser (“decoration 6” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 6”) is displayed in a shaking manner on the background screen of the swordsman reach. Note that “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (E2), a wipe effect is executed, and a Tono-sama character riding a motorcycle is displayed on a background screen of the same pattern. In this wipe effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the lose (“decoration 6” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 6”) disappears. On the other hand, the notification area HZ and the fifth symbol pd5 are displayed, and the model title is also displayed in the lower right. In FIG. 272 (E2), the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background. That is, when the wipe effect is finished, the background is switched and the background is returned to a clear sky. Further, in this example, the revival effect is not started, and the shaking display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”) is displayed again.

  As the wipe effect, the effect shown in FIG. 223 (A2) to FIG. (A6), the effect shown in FIG. (B2), or the effect shown in FIG. 225 (B1) to FIG. It may be an effect or an effect shown in (C1) to (C3).

  In the representative example described above, a configuration in which a shaking display is performed after a switching display (wipe effect) that is performed after a display that suggests a loss in a reach effect (super reach effect) with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is performed. , A notification in the notification area development effect (here, a notice display of “SP” in the notification area HZ) is performed by a display in a wipe effect or a shaking display. In addition, the certain notification (notice display of “SP” in the notification area HZ) may be performed only by the display in the wipe effect among the display and the swing display in the wipe effect, or only by the swing display. Also good.

  Next, another example is described with reference to FIG. 272 (F1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (F1), a swordsman reach (super reach 2) effect is performed. In FIG. 272 (F2), a final judge effect is started and a large button of the fifth mode is displayed. An image 136a ′ and an operation promotion display are displayed. When this final judgment effect is started, the entire notification area HZ is hidden. That is, “SP” that has been displayed until now disappears. Note that the frame display that defines the notification area HZ may remain, and only the notice display may be hidden. In FIG. 272 (F2), the chance button 136 of the fifth mode is operated once, and in the subsequent first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The screen is switched to a screen in which a combination of symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is displayed in a shaking manner. Here, the wipe effect is started as shown in FIG. 272 (F4), but the notification area HZ remains disappeared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (F5), the revival effect has not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the discoloration (“decoration 6” − “Decoration 7” − “decoration 6”) is redisplayed. Here, the final judge effect is merely an effect, and the result of the determination of the success / failure (the result of whether or not the big hit) is already determined by the determination of whether or not the main control unit 300 starts the change (lottery), The final judge production is called a success / no-judge production, or is said to be a production when a decision is made. In addition, the final judge effect (final judge effect with operation) triggered by the operation of the chance button 136 is also referred to as a hit / judgment button effect or a button effect at the time of determination of success / failure.

  In the representative example described above, a certain notification in the notification area development effect (here, “SP” notice display in the notification area HZ) is completed before the start of the final judge effect (big hit judge effect). The certain notification is not re-displayed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Note that the above notification may not be ended but temporarily hidden, and may be displayed again later.

  Although several representative examples have been described above, all the following drawings relate to the concept of the representative example described here. In addition, parts related to the concept of the representative figure can be combined with each other partly or entirely. In addition, the representative example described above is an example in which a portion related to the description is picked up and shown for convenience of explanation, and there are cases where it may or may not be performed simultaneously with a certain display in another example. Including.

  FIG. 273 is a diagram illustrating a plurality of examples in which the chance button 136 is not operated in a state where the number is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 273 (A1), the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) of the lost pattern is fixedly displayed on a clear sky background (normal background). In the notification area HZ in the upper right, the frame display that defines the notification area HZ remains, but nothing is displayed in the background of the first mode. Of the three displayed hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 is in the second mode, and the remaining hold icons h12 and h13 are all in the default mode (first mode).

  In FIG. 273 (A2), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the second mode is moving toward the base on which the variable icon is displayed, and the hold icon that has been the second hold icon h12 so far is the display position of the first hold icon. The hold icon, which has been the third hold icon h13 so far, has moved toward the display position of the second hold icon. When the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the number display is started in the notification area HZ. The display of this number may be simultaneously with the start of the special symbol variation display or may be simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Strictly speaking, the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol may be slightly delayed from the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be after the start of symbol variation display. Moreover, it may be after the start of the decorative symbol variation display. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 273 (A2), a number “5” is displayed. In FIG. 273 (A3), the movement of the hold icon is completed. Therefore, the display of numbers in the notification area HZ is started before the completion of the movement of the hold icon. Even when the fluctuation icon h0 is reached, the second mode remains.

  Here, the initial value of the number displayed in the notification area HZ is not limited to “5”, may be “10”, may be “20”, may be “1”, Sometimes it is “99”. “10” is the highest appearance frequency among the initial values of the numbers displayed in the notification area HZ. Although the initial value does not have a one-to-one relationship with the fluctuation time of the special figure, a longer fluctuation time tends to be a large number of initial values. For example, in the relatively long variation time 1 and the relatively short variation time 2, the variation time of the special figure tends to be a larger initial value in the variation time 2 than in the variation time 1. The longer the variation time is, the higher the expectation level for the big hit is. Specifically, a relatively long variation time is selected when the result of the success / failure lottery is a big hit. Further, when the initial value is “1”, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the big hit is confirmed or when the initial value is “5” or “10”. Also, when the initial value is “99”, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the big hit is confirmed or when the initial value is “5” or “10”.

  The number range displayed in the notification area HZ may be 99 or less and 1 or more, or 0 may be displayed.

  Also, when the special symbol variation display of the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation times of “D” shown in FIG. 271 (d) starts, the number “99” is displayed in the notification area HZ. Do not show. That is, in the symbol variation display that is displayed over the shortest variation time among the variation times of “D”, the display of the number in the notification area HZ is not started as a display representing “99”. Yes. In addition, in the symbol variation display displayed over the variation time (for example, 120 seconds) of “A” shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display is started as a display indicating the number “99” in the notification area HZ. You may be comprised so that there may be a case. Furthermore, in the symbol variation display displayed over the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation times “D” shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display of the number in the notification area HZ indicates “5”. It may be configured that display may be started as Alternatively, in the symbol variation display displayed over the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation times of “D” shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display of the number in the notification area HZ is not started. It may be.

  In FIG. 273 (A4), the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. Strictly speaking, the first stop is displayed in a shaking manner. Here, “decoration 6” is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 273 (A5), the second stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and “decoration 5” is displayed in a shaking manner. In this example, the third stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b without operating the chance button 136. As a result, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 273 (A6), “decoration 6” — “decoration 8” — “decoration 5”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is displayed in a shaking manner.

  In FIG. 273 (A7), the display of the number (“5”) in the notification area HZ disappears in a state where the display of the combination of the decorative symbols is performed. That is, the number display in the notification area HZ disappears prior to the final display of the decorative symbol. Here, although the frame display that defines the notification area HZ remains, the entire notification area HZ may disappear. In addition, an erasing animation of the change icon h0 that has been displayed in the second mode has been started. In this erasing animation, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is gradually faded. The timing at which the display of the number in the notification area HZ disappears may be the same as the timing at which the animation for deleting the variable icon starts, or the timing at which the display of the number disappears may be earlier, or the deletion animation The timing at which is started may be earlier. Also in FIG. 273 (A8), the erasing animation continues, and the shaking display of the combination of decorative symbols continues. In FIG. 273 (A9), the erasing animation is completed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared. In addition, a combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a definite manner. The completion timing of the erase animation and the display start timing of the confirmation display of the combination of decorative symbols may be simultaneous, the completion timing of the erase animation may be earlier, or the display start timing of the confirmation display May be early. For example, the change icon h0 may be displayed until the confirmation display.

  Next, another example will be described. In the same figure (B2) following FIG. 273 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In the same figure (B3), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “4” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. Has been. In FIG. 273 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 273 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “3”, and the operation of the chance button 136 continues. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 273 (B6), the display changes from a number display to a “question mark” display. Here, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to a “question mark” display, or may change from “2” to a “question mark” display. ”To“ question mark ”in some cases. FIG. 273 (B7) shows a state in which a “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ. Thereafter, the display returns to the same state as in FIG. Except for the display content of the notification area HZ, the same as in FIG. That is, when returning to FIG. 273 (A3), the display of the notification area HZ is not “5” but “question mark”, and thereafter, FIG. (A4), FIG.・ Continue. In the following description, the same applies to the case of “returning to the same state as in FIG. In the example described above, No. 1 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the 01 pattern.

  Next, another example will be described. In FIG. 273 (B3), (C2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. (C3), the number in the notification area HZ is decreased to “2”, and the chance button 136 is pressed once. In the same figure (C4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “1”. In FIG. 273 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 273 (C5), the notification area HZ changes from the display of the number “1” to the display of the “question mark”. The display returns to the same state as that shown in FIG. 3A except for the display contents, and the subsequent operations are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 273 (B3), (D2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. (C3), the notification area HZ is changed from displaying the number “3” to displaying the “question mark”. It changes, and it returns to the same state as the figure (A3) except the display content of the alerting | reporting area | region HZ, and after that, it becomes the same as FIG.

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIG. 273, the display may be switched to the notice display without operating the chance button 136 the same number of times as the number displayed in the notification area HZ. In each example, only the “question mark” with the lowest expectation is displayed.

  Note that the notice display with the lowest expectation may be displayed only when the operating means is operated the same number of times as the number displayed in the notification area HZ. Or, if the warning display with the lowest degree of expectation is displayed before operating the same number of times, assuming that it is displayed only when the same number of times is operated, conversely, the jackpot is confirmed as a premier treatment. Also good. In addition, the number of operations in which a notice display with the lowest expectation appears may be greater than the number of operations in which another notice display appears. The initial value may be increased, and other notice displays are displayed before “1”, whereas the notice display with the lowest expectation is displayed before “1”. It may not be displayed. In addition, when the initial value is a first number (for example, a number of 2 or more (“5”)), the initial value is larger than the first number (for example, a number of 98 or less ( The notice display with the lowest expectation may be displayed as compared with the case of “20”)). Further, the notice display with the lowest expectation may be replaced with the notice display with the highest frequency of display. Further, the notice display with the lowest expectation may be a notice display with the highest frequency of display.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram illustrating an example in which search reach that is normal reach is performed.

  From FIG. 274 (A1) to (A4) is the same as from FIG. 273 (A1) to (A4). In FIG. 274 (A5), the reach state is established without operating the chance button 136. doing. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 274 (A7), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappear, and the display is switched to the fifth symbol pd5, and the search reach effect is started. . When the search reach effect is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the search reach. In FIG. 274 (A8), a Tono-sama character appears, and if an enemy is found, it is displayed that it develops into a super reach production. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated even during reach, and the number “5” remains displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 274 (A10), the enemy cannot be found, and the development to super reach production has failed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6" are displayed in a shaking manner. Even when the shaking display is started, the display of numbers in the notification area HZ does not disappear. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 274 (A14), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the loss is performed. The number display in the notification area HZ disappears before the confirmation display is performed. The number display in the notification area HZ may disappear before the shaking display is started, may disappear at the same time as the shaking display starts, may disappear at the same time as the confirmation display, or the confirmation display may not be displayed. It may disappear after it is started.

  Next, another example will be described. In FIG. 274 (A3), (B2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 274 (B3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “4” and the notification area HZ swings. Has been. In FIG. 274 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 274 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “3”, and the operation of the chance button 136 continues. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 274 (B6), the display changes from a number display to a “question mark” display. Here, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to the display of the “question mark”, or may change from “2” to the display of the “question mark”. ”To“ question mark ”in some cases. Eventually, as in the example shown in FIGS. 274 (A4) to (A10), the reach state is established and the search reach effect is started, but the development to the super reach effect ends in failure. During this time, in the notification area HZ, the display of “question mark” is still displayed. The chance button 136 is not operated.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram illustrating an example and the like continued from FIG.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 275 (B15) following FIG. 274 (B14), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the losing, is displayed in a shaking manner. ing. Even if the shaking display is started, the notice display in the notification area HZ does not disappear. Also in this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 275 (B18), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the losing is performed. The notice display in the notification area HZ disappears before the confirmation display is performed. The notice display in the notification area HZ may disappear before the shaking display starts, may disappear at the same time as the shaking display starts, may disappear at the same time as the confirmation display, or the confirmation display starts. It may disappear after being done. The example described above is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated at an early stage after the special symbol variation display is started, but the notice display with the lowest expectation (display of “question mark”). This is an example that only displayed.

  Next, three examples will be described. These three examples are all No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to the 02 pattern.

  In the first example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 275 (A2) during the search reach production that continues from FIG. 274 (B12), and in FIG. Is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (A4), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first mode (default mode) so far, changes to the third mode. During the search reach production, there is no notification that prompts the operation of the chance button 136, which corresponds to the back button production. However, when the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the mode of the logo accessory 224F is 2 The stage has been promoted. The two-stage promotion is a two-stage promotion in that it corresponds to the first to third aspects in the display mode of the hold icon, but the display of the hold icon in the aspect representing the big hit expectation in the form of the logo accessory 224F When the thing corresponding to the 2nd aspect in an aspect is not prepared, it can be said that it is only a promotion rather than a two-step promotion. In this example and / or other examples, a two-stage promotion may be used, or a simple promotion may be used. The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 275 (A5)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the third mode as shown in FIG. 275 (A6). is there. Soon, it returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13) except for the mode of the logo accessory 224F, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. In this first example, the chance button 136 is operated even at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started, and the chance button 136 is operated even during reach.

  Next, the second example will be described. In the second example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 275 (C2) during the search reach production that continues from FIG. 274 (A8), and in the same figure (C3), the number of the notification area HZ is “4”. And the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 275 (C3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 275 (C4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “3”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Although the chance button 136 is still operated (see FIG. 275 (C5)), the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the third mode. On the other hand, in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 275 (C6), the display changes from a number display to a “question mark” display. Here, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to the display of the “question mark”, or may change from “2” to the display of the “question mark”. ”To“ question mark ”in some cases. Soon, it returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13) except for the mode of the logo accessory 224F, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. In the second example, the chance button 136 is not operated until reaching reach, that is, at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started, and the chance button 136 is operated after reaching reach.

  Finally, a third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated three times before reach and the display of the notification area HZ becomes the number “2”, and the reach state is developed. After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing of FIG. 275 (D2). In FIG. (D3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “1” and the notification area HZ shakes. It is displayed. In FIG. 275 (D3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 275 (D4), the display of the notification area HZ is changed from the number “1” to the display of the “question mark”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. The chance button 136 is operated after this (see FIG. 275 (D5)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the third mode as shown in FIG. 275 (D6). is there. Soon, it returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13) except for the mode of the logo accessory 224F, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 274 (B14). In this third example, although the chance button 136 is operated at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started, the chance button 136 is not operated until the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the notice display, and the reach button 136 is reached. Is operated again, and the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the notice display. The timing at which the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the advance notice display and the timing at which the mode of the logo accessory 224F is promoted are the same, but the timing at which the display of the notification area HZ is switched may be earlier. The timing at which the aspect changes may be earlier.

  The three examples described above with reference to FIG. 275 are summarized as follows. In the first example, the start of the notification area development effect is first, and the mode change of the logo accessory 224F is later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the accessory 224F is first, the start of the notification area development effect is later, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo accessory 224F are at the same timing. In the description of the subsequent effects, there may be a difference in the flow of effects as in these three examples, but the description here may be used and the description may be omitted.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram showing an example of development to super reach 1 (Okkake Reach).

  From FIG. 276 (A1) to FIG. (A9), except that the number displayed in the notification area HZ is “10” instead of “5”, from FIG. 274 (A1) to FIG. The search reach effect is performed with the chance button 136 not being operated. Since the number displayed in the notification area HZ is “10”, the player knows that the big hit expectation is higher than the case of “5”, the fluctuation time is longer, and both. Attention is paid to the symbol variation display. In addition, the willingness to operate is improved, such as preparing for operation of the operating means.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A10), a state in which a bad merchant who is one of Tono-sama's enemies has been discovered is displayed. In the same figure (A11), super reach production is performed. Is introduced, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. The fifth symbol pd5 remains displayed. In FIG. 276 (A12), as a continuation of the introduction effect, the family crest character 224E that has been in the initial position so far rises to a position overlapping the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. The family crest member 224E located on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L emits light in the fifth mode. Note that the logo accessory 224F that is in the initial position and has not started operating remains in the default mode (first mode). Here, the logo accessory 224F may also emit light in the fifth mode, but the logo accessory 224F does not operate and only emits light at the initial position.

  It should be noted that, when the logo accessory 224F is operated, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the logo accessory 224E is operated, and the effect effect by the family crest agent 224E corresponds to a weak pattern. To do. In other words, while the weak pattern has one acting character (for example, a family crest character 224E), the strong pattern has a plurality of acting characters (e.g., eight generations 224Fa and general character 224F). Or a family crest character 224E, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and a general character 224F).

  In FIG. 276 (A13), the introductory effect has ended, and the Okakake reach effect, which is Super Reach 1, has started. When the octopus reach production is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the octopus reach. When the super reach effect is started, the notification area HZ is displayed again, and the number “10” is still displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 276 (A13). In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated even during super reach production. It should be noted that the final judge performance is not performed in the super-reach 1 Okakke reach production.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A17), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are displayed in a shaking manner. Even if the shaking display is started, the notification area HZ does not disappear, and a numerical display continues to be displayed. In FIG. 276 (A18), the wipe effect described with reference to FIG. 272 (E2) is started. Even during the wipe effect, the notification area HZ does not disappear, and the display of numbers continues. In FIG. 276 (A19), an animation of a Tono-sama character riding a motorcycle is displayed, and in FIG. 276 (A20), wipe-out is performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A20), the revival effect has not been started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration” on the normal background) 6 ") is displayed again, and these combinations are displayed in a shaking manner. Even at the timing of wipeout, the notification area HZ does not disappear and the display of numbers continues to be displayed. However, the display of numbers disappears during the shaking display. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 276 (A23), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the loss is performed.

  In the example described above, the notification area HZ does not disappear and the numerical display continues to be displayed even when the display of shaking of the combination of decorative symbols is started. However, FIGS. Unlike the notice display described using, the number display may disappear (may end).

  FIG. 277 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 is operated before the reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 277 (A2) following FIG. 276 (A1), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 277 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. Has been. In FIG. 276 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 276 (A4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “8”. The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. Thereafter, the notification area HZ is the same as FIG. 276 (A3) to FIG. That is, after that, the chance button 136 is not operated at all, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing pattern is confirmed and displayed although the chance button 136 has been developed as the top reach of the spar reach 1. In this example, as in the representative example described with reference to FIGS. 272 (E1) to (E3), the notification display of the notification area HZ may be started even if the shaking display is started or the wipe effect is started. , It does not become non-display, but becomes non-display after the shake display after wipeout is resumed.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the reach effect.

  In FIG. 278, three examples are shown. These three examples are all No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to the pattern of 05.

  In the first example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 278 (A2) during the search reach production, which continues from FIG. 277 (A12), and the chance button 136 continues in FIG. Is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (A4), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first mode (default mode), changes to the third mode. In FIG. 278 (A4), the chance button 136 is further operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (A5), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green). In this example, the mode of the logo accessory 224F is promoted by three stages by operating the chance button 136 three times during the reach. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit after that (see FIG. 278 (A6)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the fourth mode as shown in FIG. 278 (A7). is there. Soon, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and the subsequent steps are the same as those of FIG.

  Subsequently, in the second example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 278 (B2) during the search reach production, which continues from FIG. 276 (A8). In FIG. While decreasing to “9”, the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 278 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 278 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “8”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Further, in FIG. 278 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 278 (B5), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “7”, and the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is further promoted by one stage. It changes to the 4th mode (green). The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 278 (B7), the display is changed from the number display to the “Chance” display. On the other hand, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains the fourth aspect. Soon, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and the subsequent steps are the same as those of FIG.

  Finally, a third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated seven times before reach and the display of the notification area HZ becomes the number “3” and the reach state is developed. After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing of FIG. 278 (C2). In FIG. 3 (C3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “2” and the notification area HZ shakes. It is displayed. In FIG. 278 (C2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same figure (C4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “1”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Further, in FIG. 278 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 278 (C5), the display of the notification area HZ is changed from the number “1” to the display of “Chance”, and the logo object The aspect of 224F is further promoted by one step and changed to the fourth aspect (green). The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 278 (C6)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the fourth mode as shown in FIG. 278 (C7). is there. In addition, the display of the notification area HZ also remains “Chance”. Soon, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and the subsequent steps are the same as those of FIG.

  As described above, the three examples described with reference to FIG. 278 are summarized as follows. In the first example, the start of the notification area development effect is first, the mode change of the logo accessory 224F is later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the accessory 224F is first, the start of the notification area development effect is later, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo accessory 224F are at the same timing.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 is operated before the reach effect is started and the chance button 136 is operated even during the reach effect.

  FIG. 279 (A1) to FIG. (A2) are the same as FIG. 276 (A1) to FIG. (A2). In FIG. 279 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and FIG. In A4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “9”, and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 279 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 279 (A5), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 279 (A7), the display is changed from the number display to the “Chance” display. Thereafter, the operation of the chance button 136 is stopped, and the search reach is started in FIG. 279 (A12). In FIG. 279 (A14) during the search reach, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same figure (A15), the chance button 136 is operated once again. Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (A16), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first mode (default mode) so far, changes to the third mode. In FIG. 279 (A16), the chance button 136 is further operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (A17), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green). The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit after this (see FIG. 279 (A18)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the fourth mode as shown in FIG. 279 (A19). is there. In addition, the display of the notification area HZ also remains “Chance”. That is, during the execution of the development effect for super reach shown in FIG. 279 (A19), the mode of the logo accessory 224F is the fourth mode (green). In FIG. 279 (A20), the enemy cannot be found, the development to the super reach production ends in failure, and the development to the super reach production ends. When the development effect to super reach is finished, the mode of the logo accessory 224F returns to the default mode (first mode). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 279 (A21), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is displayed in a shaking manner. The timing at which the mode of the logo accessory 224F returns to the default mode may be at the same time as the end of the development stage for super reach, or before the end of the development stage, or the development stage. It may be after the end of the production and before the start of the shaking display, or at the same time as the start of the shaking display. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may not return until generation | occurrence | production of the other effect accompanying light emission of the other logo accessory 224F. The notice display in the notification area HZ does not disappear even when the shaking display is started, but disappears before the confirmation display shown in FIG. 279 (A24) is performed (see FIG. 279 (A22)). The example described with reference to FIG. 279 is No. shown in FIG. This corresponds to the 04 pattern example.

  FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of developing to super reach 1 and making a big hit.

  FIG. 280 (A1) to FIG. 280 (A5) are the same as FIG. 279 (A1) to FIG. 280 (A5), and the number “8” is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. Has been. After this, the chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 280 (A6)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 280 (A7), the display changes from “number” to “SP”. Thereafter, the operation of the chance button 136 is stopped, and in FIG. 280 (A12), search reach is started as in the example described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 280 (A14) during the search reach, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 280 (A15), the chance button 136 is operated once again. Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (A16), the logo accessory 224F that has been the first mode (default mode) is changed to the third mode. In FIG. 280 (A16), the chance button 136 is further operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (A17), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green). The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit after this (see FIG. 280 (A18)), but the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more, and as shown in FIG. The fourth mode remains during execution of the roaring effect. Further, the display of the notification area HZ also remains “SP”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 280 (A20), a state in which the development effect for super reach has been completed and a bad merchant who is one of Tono-sama's enemies has been discovered is displayed. When the development effect for super reach is finished, the mode of the logo accessory 224F is again returned to the default mode (first mode). That is, even when the development to the super reach is successful, the logo accessory 224F returns to the default mode (first mode).

  Subsequently, in FIGS. 280 (A21) to (A25), the super-reach 1 surprise effect is performed from the introduction effect of the super-reach effect, as in FIGS. 276 (A11) to (A15). Yes. As described above, the final judge effect is not executed in Super Reach 1, and in FIG. 280 (A26), the background image of the Okakke Reach effect is suddenly switched to the background image of the jackpot finalizing effect. In FIG. Both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have been in their initial positions appear before the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. That is, the family crest member 224E rises to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emits light in the seventh mode. Further, the logo accessory 224F also descends to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (to the maximum operating position), and further performs the separation operation described with reference to FIG. The generals 224Fb emit light in the seventh mode on both sides of the family crest 224E. In FIG. 280 (A28), the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each return to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit finalizing animation in which Tono catches the bad merchant. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode.

  FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 281 (A29) continuing from FIG. 280 (A28), “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols, is displayed in a shaking manner. ing. The notice display (in this case, “SP”) of the notification area HZ does not disappear even when the shaking display is started, but disappears before the confirmation display shown in FIG. 281 (A31) is performed (FIG. 281 (A30)). reference). Note that the timing of returning to the default mode of the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F may be at the end of the finalized display, or until the jackpot start effect to be started thereafter, in the seventh mode. It may emit light. Alternatively, it may return to the default mode at a certain timing during the shaking display (for example, the same timing as when the notice display in the notification area HZ disappears), may return at the start of the confirmation display, or is being confirmed. You may return to

  In the example described above, No. 1 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the 07 pattern example.

  FIG. 282 is a diagram illustrating an example of development to super reach 2.

  From FIG. 282 (A1) to (A9) is the same as from FIG. 276 (A1) to (A9), and the search reach effect is performed without operating the chance button 136. The number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 282 (A10), the appearance of a swordsman who is another enemy of Tonama-sama's enemies is displayed. In the same figure (A11), a super The introduction effect of the reach effect is started, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. The fifth symbol pd5 remains displayed. In FIG. 278 (A12), as a continuation of the introductory effect, a strong pattern of the accessory action effect is performed. That is, both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have been in their initial positions appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb perform separation operations. The family crest character 224E is located between them, and each of the three characters 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E emits light in the fifth mode.

  In FIG. 282 (A13), the introductory effect is finished, and the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F return to the initial positions to be in the first state. Swordsman Reach Production has begun. When the swordsman reach production is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the swordsman reach. When the super reach effect is started, the notification area HZ is displayed again, and the number “10” is still displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 282 (A13). In FIG. 282 (A15) during the super reach effect, the button effect is started, and the button image 136a and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 282 (A16), the operation effective period is started, but in this example, the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period. However, even when the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 282 (A17), the weak pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the fourth mode is displayed. This cut-in image CIw is an image that is also displayed when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Further, in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIw, the family crest combination 224E and the logo combination 224F emit light in the same mode (fourth mode) as the background of the cut-in image CIw. Here, the cut-in image CIw is displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed even without the button operation, but the cut-in image CIw is displayed only when there is a button operation. May be. In addition, a certain cut-in effect and a certain dialogue notice before the start of the super reach effect are not displayed without a button operation, and a certain cut-in effect during the execution of the super reach effect is displayed without a button operation. You may comprise. Moreover, the structure provided with the cut-in effect and the serif notice that display contents differ depending on whether the button operation is performed or not may be provided.

  Here, in the normal button production, even if the operation means such as the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, that is, when the button image 136a or the like is not displayed, FIG. 282 (A17). Although some effects such as the display of the cut-in image CIw as shown may be executed, numbers are displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 (operation means) is not operated, and the number display disappears. However, any production (for example, a notification area development production) is not started, and can be said to be one of the differences between the two.

  Eventually, the final judgment effect is started in FIG. 282 (A18), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Here, the final judgment effect does not involve operation of an operation means such as a button operation, but the judgment result is automatically displayed when time comes.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 282 (A20), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are displayed in a shaking manner. 276 (A18) to FIG. 23 (A23), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing is performed without operating the chance button 136.

  In the swordsman reach production that is Super Reach 2, as shown in FIG. 282 (A15), the normal button production always occurs once, and the final judge production with the operation of the operation means such as the button operation (the button at the time of determination of success / failure (Judge effect) may or may not occur. The big hit expectation degree is higher when the final judgment accompanying the operation of the operating means does not occur than when the final judgment effect does not occur. That is, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol form by the currently performed symbol variation display. Note that the super reach that does not generate the final judge effect accompanying the operation of the operation means may be super reach 3 in order to distinguish it from the super reach that generates the final judge effect that involves the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the chance button 136 has not been operated once. However, when the chance button 136 is operated once during the button production in FIG. 282 (A16), the cut is performed according to the button operation. While the in-image CIw is displayed, the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” or switched to the notice display. However, during the button production, the operation of the chance button 136 may be valid only for the button production, and the display of the notification area HZ may not be changed.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating an example of developing to super reach 2 after operating the chance button 136 at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started.

  The state shown in FIG. 283 (A2) is a state continued from FIG. 280 (A2), and FIG. 283 (A2) to FIG. (A12) are the same as FIG. 280 (A3) to FIG. 280 (A13). When the chance button 136 is operated four or more times, the notification area HZ is changed from a numerical display to a “SP” display, and then a search reach effect is started. In FIG. 283 (13), the effect of development to super reach continues. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated during the search reach production.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 283 (A14) displays a state in which a swordsman, another enemy among Tono-sama's enemies, has been discovered. FIG. 283 (A15) to FIG. 283 (A19) following FIG. 283 (A14) are the same as FIG. 282 (A11) to FIG. 282 (A15), and the role of strong patterns in the introduction effect of the super reach effect. After the object movement effect was performed, the swordsman reach effect, which is Super Reach 2, was developed. First, a normal button effect was started. In FIG. 283 (A20), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, a weak pattern cut-in image CIw is displayed in FIG. 283 (A21). Even if the chance button 136 is operated, the notice display in the notification area HZ does not change.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram illustrating an example and the like continued from FIG.

  FIG. 283 (A22) and subsequent figures following FIG. 283 (A21) are the same as FIG. On the display device 208L, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”) is once displayed in a shaking manner and then confirmed.

  The state shown in FIG. 284 (B2) is a state continued from FIG. 283 (A16), and FIG. 284 (B2) to FIG. (B7) are the same as FIG. 283 (A18) to FIG. 280 (A22). It is. That is, the swordsman reach production which is Super Reach 2 is developed. First, the normal button production, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation valid period, but the cut-in image CIw of the weak pattern is displayed. Judge production without operation has been started. In the same figure (B8) following FIG. 284 (B7), the background image of the swordsman reach is switched to the background image of the jackpot finalizing effect. In FIG. (B9), the crest character 224E which has been in the initial position until then is displayed. Both the logo accessory 224F appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. In FIG. 284 (B10), the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each return to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit determination animation in which the swordsman has fallen and the lord has won. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 284 (B11), “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols, is displayed in a shaking manner. The notice display of the notification area HZ (here, “SP”) does not disappear even when the shaking display is started, but disappears before the confirmation display is performed. In FIG. 281 (B12), the notice display of the notification area HZ is displayed. In the state of disappearing, “decoration 6” − “decoration 6” − “decoration 6”, which is a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols, is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the search reach effect before the development to the super reach 2.

  In FIG. 285, three examples are shown. These three examples are all No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to 12 patterns.

  In the first example, “SP” is already displayed in the notification area HZ in FIG. 285 (A2) following FIG. 283 (A12). In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 285 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once again. Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (A4), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first mode (default mode) so far, changes to the third mode. In FIG. 285 (A4), the chance button 136 is further operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (A5), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green). In FIG. 285 (A5), the chance button 136 is operated once more, and the logo accessory 224F changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode (red) as shown in FIG. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit after this (see FIG. 285 (A7)), but the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any further, and as shown in FIG. 285 (A8), it develops into a super reach. The fourth mode remains during execution of the roaring effect. Further, the display of the notification area HZ also remains “SP”. Eventually, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 283 (A13), and when the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is again the default aspect (first Return to the embodiment (see FIG. 283 (A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 283 (A15).

  Subsequently, in the second example, in FIG. 285 (B2) following FIG. 282 (A8), the number “10” is still displayed in the notification area HZ. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 285 (B3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” and the notification area HZ is swayed. In FIG. 285 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 285 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Further, in FIG. 285 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 285 (B5), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “7”, and the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is further promoted by one level. It changes to the 4th mode (green). In FIG. 285 (B5), the chance button 136 is operated once more, and as shown in FIG. 285 (B6), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “6”, and the logo accessory 224F is changed from the fourth mode. It has changed to the 5th mode (red). The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 285 (B7)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 285 (B8), in the notification area HZ, the number display is changed to the display of “SP”. Eventually, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 283 (A13), and when the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is again the default aspect (first Return to the embodiment) (see FIG. 283 (see A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 283 (A15).

  Finally, a third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated six times before reach and the display of the notification area HZ becomes the number “4” and the reach state is developed. After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing of FIG. 285 (C2). In FIG. 3 (C3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “2” and the notification area HZ shakes. It is displayed. In FIG. 285 (C2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 285 (C4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “2”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Further, in FIG. 285 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 285 (C5), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “1”, and the mode of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by one step. It has changed to 4 modes (green). In FIG. 285 (C5), the chance button 136 is operated once again, and as shown in FIG. 285 (C6), the display of the notification area HZ changes from the number “1” to the display of “SP”. The logo accessory 224F changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode (red). In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed a total of 10 times, and “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ so that the expected degree of big hit (“B” in FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed. On the other hand, as a back button during reach, the logo accessory 224F is changed to the fifth mode (red) with a very high expectation degree of big hit (“A” in FIG. 271 (e)) just by pressing four times. . The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 285 (C7)), but the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains in the fifth mode as shown in FIG. 285 (C8). is there. Further, the display of the notification area HZ also remains “SP”. Eventually, except for the aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 283 (A13), and when the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is again the default aspect (first Return to the embodiment) (see FIG. 283 (see A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 283 (A15).

  As described above, the three examples described with reference to FIG. 285 are summarized. In the first example, the start of the notification area development effect is first, the mode change of the logo accessory 224F is later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the accessory 224F is first, the start of the notification area development effect is later, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo accessory 224F are at the same timing.

  FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example in which a cut-in image of a strong pattern in a normal button effect is displayed and a big hit is made through a final judge effect accompanied by an operation.

  The state shown in FIG. 286 (A2) is a state continued from FIG. 283 (A16), and FIG. 286 (A2) to FIG. It is. That is, the swordsman reach production which is Super Reach 2 is developed. First, the chance button 136 is operated once in the operation effective period by the normal button production.

  In response to the operation of the chance button 136, in FIG. 286 (A6), a strong pattern cut-in image CIs whose background is the sixth mode is displayed. The cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern overlaps with a part of the notification area HZ (a part including the characters “SP”) on which the notice display of “SP” is displayed, and the notification is compared with before the overlap. Part of the region HZ including the characters “SP” is difficult to visually recognize. Further, in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIs, the family crest combination 224E and the logo combination 224F emit light in the same mode (sixth mode) as the background mode of the cut-in image CIs. Even if there is no button operation, the strong pattern cut-in image CIs may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed, but the strong pattern cut-in image CIw is displayed only when there is a button operation. If there is no button operation, a cut-in image CIw with a weak pattern may be displayed.

  In FIG. 286 (A7), the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern disappears, and the characters “SP” displayed in the notification area HZ are easily visible. Further, both the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F are returned to the default mode (first mode). Subsequently, in this example, the letters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started. When the character “SP” disappears from the notification area HZ at this timing, the final judge effect accompanied by the operation is always started after this. For this reason, some players notice that the final judge production accompanied by the operation is started after the disappearance of the character “SP”. In FIGS. 286 (A9) to (A10), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the introduction animation of the final judge effect accompanied by the operation is displayed, and the image that seems to be a button image has begun to appear slightly. In FIG. 286 (A11), the final judge effect accompanied by the operation is started, and a large button image 136a 'and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 286 (A12), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 286 (A13), the large button image 136a ′ etc. disappears and switches to the background image of the jackpot finalizing effect, and in FIG. Both the object 224E and the logo accessory 224F appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. In FIG. 286 (A15), the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each return to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit determination animation in which the swordsman has fallen and the lord has won. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 286 (A16), “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols, is displayed in a shaking manner. Then, the combined confirmation is displayed. The notice display (in this case, “SP”) in the notification area HZ disappears before the start of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation, and is not displayed again but remains disappeared. As will be described later, the notice display of “large board behavior” does not disappear before the start of the final judgment effect, but is continuously displayed until the shaking display is started, and disappears after the shaking display is started. On the other hand, the notice display of “question mark” and “Chance” disappears before the start of the final judge production accompanied by the operation, and is not displayed again, and remains disappeared, similarly to “SP”. Note that the timing at which characters such as “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ may be the same as that in FIG. 286 (A11) or may be immediately before.

  FIG. 287 is a diagram illustrating an example in which “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  FIGS. 287 (A1) to (A5) are the same as FIGS. 279 (A1) to (A5). In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 287 (A5), the numeral “8” is displayed. ing. After this, the chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 287 (A6)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. In addition, the background of the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed is changed to the seventh mode (rainbow color). Furthermore, the big hit confirmation notice effect is started simultaneously with the display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ. Here, the jackpot confirmation notice effect is the same effect as the jackpot confirmation notice effect described with reference to FIG. 272 (A3), and the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. The period during which the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh aspect may be a predetermined period, or a certain effect (for example, a first stop of a decorative design, a reach effect, etc.) is started. It may be a period until. In this example, the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh mode for a predetermined period (FIG. 287 (A7)), and then returns to the default mode (first mode). On the other hand, in the notification area HZ, the display of “large board behavior” continues to be displayed on the background of the seventh aspect (rainbow color). Even if the logo accessory 224F returns to the default mode, the player can confirm that the jackpot confirmation notice state is still continued by looking at the display of the notification area HZ, It can be performed. Note that the logo accessory 224F may also continue to emit light in the seventh aspect.

  287 (A9) to (A12) are the same as FIGS. 280 (A9) to 280 (A12) except for the display mode of the notification area HZ. Has been started. As shown in FIG. 287 (A13), the chance button 136 is operated once as shown in FIG. 287 (A13), and in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (A15), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first mode (default mode), changes to the third mode. In FIG. 287 (A16), the chance button 136 is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (A17), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green), and the chance button 136 is operated once again, as shown in FIG. 287 (A17). As shown, the logo accessory 224F changes from the fourth aspect to the fifth aspect (red). Thereafter, the player thinks that the logo item 224F has changed to the seventh mode (rainbow color) once, so that it will change here, and as shown in FIG. 287 (A18), the chance button 136 However, the mode of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more, and as shown in FIG. 287 (A19), it remains in the fourth mode during the execution of the super-reaching development effect. On the other hand, in the notification area HZ, the display of “large board behavior” continues to be displayed on the background of the seventh aspect (rainbow color).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 287 (A20), the appearance of the swordsman who is the enemy of Tonama-sama is displayed. The subsequent notification from FIG. 287 (A21) to FIG. 287 (A25) is a notification. It is the same as FIG. 282 (A11) to FIG. 282 (A15) except for the difference in display mode of the area HZ, and after the strong-pattern actor action effect is performed in the introduction effect of the super reach effect, the super reach 2 is performed. It has developed into a swordsman reach production, and first, a normal button production has begun. It should be noted that the display of “large board behavior” continues to be displayed in the background of the seventh aspect (rainbow color) in the notification area HZ also between FIGS. 287 (A23) and 287 (A25).

  FIG. 288 is a diagram illustrating an example and the like continued from FIG.

  FIG. 287 (A26) to FIG. 288 (A36) are the same as FIG. 286 (A11) to FIG. 286 (A16) except for the difference in the display mode of the notification area HZ. That is, in a normal button production, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation effective period (FIG. 287 (A26)), and a strong pattern cut-in image CIs is displayed according to the operation (FIG. 287). A27)). The cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern overlaps the “large board behavior” display in the notification area HZ in the same way as the “SP” display, but does not overlap the “large board behavior” display. Also good. For example, the cut-in image CIs may be overlapped with the display of the notification area HZ. Note that the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F emit light in the sixth mode in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIs. Subsequently, the final judge effect accompanied by the operation is started, but even when the final judge effect is started, the display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ is not disappeared and continues to be displayed (FIG. 288 (A31)). ). Therefore, although it is not known from the change in the display mode of the notification area HZ that the final judge production accompanied with the operation is started after this, the display of “large board behavior” continues to be displayed without disappearing. It can be confirmed that the jackpot finalizing notice state is continued, and the game can be performed with peace of mind. Even in the final judgment effect here, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation valid period (FIG. 288 (A32)), and the background image of the jackpot finalizing effect is switched according to this button operation (FIG. 288 (A33)). ) Both of the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F appear and emit light in the seventh mode (FIG. 288 (A34)). Thereafter, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a big hit confirmation animation is displayed in which the swordsman has fallen down and Tono-sama has won (FIG. 288 (A35)). -“Decoration 6” is displayed in a shaking manner (FIG. 288 (A36)). The display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed without disappearing until the shaking display is started. Then, before the confirmation display is performed, the display of “large board behavior” disappears from the notification area HZ, and in FIG. 288 (A37), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. On the other hand, the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode even if the confirmation display is started. The display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ may also be continuously displayed without being erased before the confirmation display, and may continue to be displayed until the big hit start effect or after the big hit start effect.

  In the example described above, No. 1 shown in FIG. This corresponds to an example of 14 patterns.

  FIG. 288 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. 283 (A22). As a result of the judgment effect without operation being performed in a state where “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the judgment result is the loss of the lord. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B2), the lord is tilted. Subsequently, in FIG. 288 (B3), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 288 (B4), FIG. 272 (E2) is displayed. The wiping effect described by using is started. Even during the wipe effect, the display of “SP” in the notification area HZ does not disappear, and in FIG. (B6), wipe-out is performed, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”) on the normal background. -The shaking display of “Decoration 6”) is redisplayed. Here, the restoration effect is started, and the animation of the restoration effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B7). In the animation of the revival effect, a princess appears and overlaps with the display of “SP” in the notification area HZ, so that the display of “SP” is difficult to see compared to before the start of the animation. It should be noted that the decorative symbol shaking display disappears, and the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed so as to overlap the animation of the revival effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the revival effect has ended and the background image of the jackpot determination effect has been switched. Note that the display of “SP” in the notification area HZ becomes visible, and the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is continued. In the following FIG. 288 (B9), both the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that were in the initial positions so far appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. Yes. In FIG. 288 (B10), the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each return to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. -“Decoration 6” is displayed shaking. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode. In FIG. 288 (B11), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed in a state where the notice display of the notification area HZ has disappeared.

  FIG. 289 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 289 (A1) to (A3) are the same as FIGS. 276 (A1) to 276 (A3), the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is still operated. Not. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 289 (A4), a ninja mini character NJ appears on the tutorial display unit TT1, and throws a shuriken toward the variation icon h0 of the second mode. In FIG. 289 (A5), the shuriken hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is enveloped by the effect image EFB and disappears for a moment, but in the same figure (A7), the effect image EFB disappears and changes. The icon h0 has changed to the third mode. That is, in this example, a change animation of the change icon h0 is performed from FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. In FIG. 289 (A7), the ninja mini character NJ has disappeared, and this ninja mini character NJ corresponds to a change notice character for notifying that the display mode of the change icon changes. The display mode of the hold icon is not limited to the change icon, and the change icon and the hold icon are collectively icons related to the symbol change display. Therefore, the ninja mini character NJ is an icon related to the symbol change display. It is also a character notifying that the display mode of will change. In this example, when the ninja mini character NJ appears, it is predicted that the display mode of the icon may change. However, the ninja mini character NJ may disappear in the super reach production etc. It may be a character that continues to be displayed across the symbol variation display. Furthermore, even if a ninja mini character NJ appears, the shuriken may not be thrown, or the shuriken may not be thrown. The ninja mini-character NJ may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M (not shown here), or a third character like a Tono-sama character on the stage in the example described later. It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. While the change animation of the change icon h0 described above is being performed, the number “10” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but the chance button 136 is not operated.

  In FIG. 289 (A8), the button effect is started, and the button image 136a and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 289 (A9), the operation effective period is started, but here also the chance button 136 is not operated, and the operation effective period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation valid period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays the princess's conversation image CI <b> 4 that is a conversation advance notice. In other words, a dialogue that is not a dialogue that specifies an effect to be executed after this is displayed on the background of the third aspect (blue). Further, the logo accessory 224F is also changed to the third mode (blue). The princess conversation image CI4 may be an image that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated, a different image (for example, an image dedicated to no operation) is displayed. Or a conversation image may not be displayed. Further, instead of the dialogue “The sign of the shrine is ...”, “Is it a quasi-continuous ...”, which is a dialogue specifying an effect to be executed later, may be displayed.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation notice, disappears and the logo accessory 224F returns to the first mode, the decorative symbol is stopped from the first stop (temporary stop) to the second from FIG. 289 (A12) to FIG. A stop (temporary stop) is performed, and in FIG. 289 (A16), a “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. So far, the chance button 136 has not been operated, and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 289 (A17), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (displayed in a shaking manner). When the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in this way, the notification area HZ itself is not displayed, and the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started (the same applies to the following). Note that the frame display that defines the notification area HZ may remain, and only the numerical display may be hidden. Further, the display of numbers in the notification area HZ or the entire notification area HZ may be hidden before the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, or may be hidden after the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop. . When the quasi-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 289 (A17) to (A19), an animation of the quasi-continuous introduction effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 289 (A20), the pseudo-continuous effect is started and the decorative symbols are re-varied. Further, when the change of the decorative symbol is started again, the display of the notification area HZ that has disappeared until then is resumed, and the number “10” is displayed again in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 289 (A20). Yes. It should be noted that “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuations is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the decorative symbol has been re-varied. This state in the pseudo-continuous production is called a “pseudo 2” state, and the relationship between each state in the pseudo-continuous production and the number (initial value) displayed in the notification area HZ is determined in advance. Is associated with the number “10”. In FIG. 289 (A20), the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. Note that a number “10” is also set in the number (initial value) of the notification area HZ displayed in response to the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, which is the same as the number associated with “pseudo 2”. It is.

  During the re-change of the decorative design, the change animation of the change icon h0 is started again. That is, as shown in FIG. 289 (A22), a ninja mini character NJ reappears and throws a shuriken toward the variation icon h0 of the third mode. In FIG. 289 (A23), the shuriken hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is wrapped in the effect image EFB and disappears for a moment, but in the same figure (A24), the effect image EFB disappears and changes. The icon h0 has changed to the fourth mode.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 289 (A26), the button effect is started again, but here also the chance button 136 is not operated, and the operation valid period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation valid period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays the princess's conversation image CI <b> 4 that is a conversation advance notice. Here, the line “dono” is displayed on the base of the fifth aspect (red). Further, the logo accessory 224F is also changed to the fifth mode (red). In addition, instead of the dialogue “Tono ...”, “To the third time”, which is a dialogue specifying the performance to be executed later, may be displayed.

  FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation notice, disappears and the logo accessory 224F returns to the first mode, the decorative symbol is stopped from the first stop (temporary stop) to the second in FIGS. 290 (A30) to (A33). A stop (temporary stop) is performed, and in FIG. 290 (A34), a “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance button 136 has not been operated yet, and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 290 (A35), the “continuation” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swayed), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed, and the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 290 (A36) to (A37), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays an animation of a pseudo-continuous introduction effect.

  In FIG. 290 (A38), the pseudo-continuous effect is started and the decorative symbols are re-varied. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 290 (A38), “× 3” representing the number of pseudo-continuous operations is displayed. “Pseudo 3” is associated with the number “20”, and in FIG. 290 (A38), the number “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ. It should be noted that “10” and “20” are not unique numbers at the time of pseudo-continuous production, but may be configured so that values differ depending on lottery. For example, “Pseudo 2” in a certain variation may be “20”, and “Pseudo 2” in a certain variation may be “5”.

  During the re-change of the decorative symbol, the change animation of the change icon h0 is started again, and in FIG. 290 (A42), the change icon h0 is changed to the fifth mode.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 290 (A44), the button effect is started again, but here also the chance button 136 is not operated, and the operation valid period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation valid period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays the princess's conversation image CI <b> 4 that is a conversation advance notice. In FIG. 290 (A46), as in FIG. 289 (A28), the line “Tono” is displayed on the background of the fifth mode (red). Also in this case, the logo accessory 224F is changed to the fifth mode (red). In addition, instead of the dialogue “Tono ...”, “Continue end ...”, which is a dialogue specifying the performance to be executed later, may be displayed, or “To reach ...” is displayed. May be.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation notice, disappears and the logo accessory 224F returns to the first mode, the decorative symbol is stopped from the first stop (temporary stop) to the second in FIGS. 290 (A48) to (A50). Stop (temporary stop) is performed and the reach state is established. In FIG. 290 (A51), the search reach effect is started. Even when the search reach effect is started, the chance button 136 is not operated, and the number “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 291 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG. 290.

  From FIG. 290 (A52) to FIG. 291 (A57) to FIG. 291 (A72), FIG. 287 (A13) to FIG. 288 (FIG. 288) except for the display mode of the notification area HZ and the point of operation of the chance button 136. The same as A37). That is, in this example, the chance button 136 is never operated until the end. Therefore, the chance button operation during the search reach as shown in FIG. 287 (A13) to (A18) is not performed, and the mode change of the logo accessory 224F does not occur. In addition, the number “20” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but as shown in FIG. 291 (A63), the number “20” disappears from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started. In this example, the swordsman reach that is Super Reach 2 was developed, and the chance button operation was not performed in the normal button production during the swordsman reach production. However, as shown in FIG. 292 (A61), the cut-in image of the strong pattern CIs is displayed, and the chance button operation is not performed even in the final judge production accompanied by the operation. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Both 224E and the logo accessory 224F appear and emit light in the seventh mode (FIG. 291 (A69)). Thereafter, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a big hit confirmation animation is displayed in which the swordsman has fallen and Tono-sama has won (FIG. 291 (A70)). -After the display of “decoration 6” is shaken (FIG. 291 (A71)), the confirmation display is reached (FIG. 291 (A72)).

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291, after the quasi-continuous production up to pseudo 3 is performed during a single display of the decorative symbols, the normal reach search reach is changed to the super reach 2 swordsman reach. Developed and finally hit big. In this example, the chance button operation was not performed all at once, but there was a chance button operation after the operation valid period even if the chance button operation was not performed in the state where the display prompting the chance button operation was made Although the same effect display as the case is displayed, the effect display may be displayed only when the chance button operation is performed. In addition, when the chance button operation is not performed in a state in which the chance button operation is prompted, what is the display mode of the effect display that is displayed when the chance button operation is performed after the operation valid period has elapsed? You may make it display the effect display of a different display mode.

  When the chance button operation is performed at the timing of FIG. 289 (A27), the number “9” may be displayed in the notification area HZ or may be switched to the notice display. In addition, when the chance button operation is performed at the timing of FIG. 290 (A45), the number “19” may be displayed in the notification area HZ, or the notice display may be switched here.

  Further, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291, change animation of a change icon, button effect, and re-change start by pseudo-continuous effect are repeated a plurality of times in the order described. It can be said that the three effects such as the change icon change animation, the button effect, and the re-variation start by the pseudo-continuous effect are related effects. In particular, when a conversation image related to a pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as a button effect, the three effects are effects related to each other. However, the three effects may be effects that are not related at all.

  FIG. 292 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button operation is performed in the button effect.

  In FIG. 292 (A2) continuing from FIG. 289 (A7), a button effect is started. In FIG. 292 (A3), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 292 (A4), the conversation notice is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIG. 289 (A10) when there is no chance button operation. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 292 (A4), the displayed number decreases from “10” to “9” and is displayed in a shaking manner. The following FIG. 292 (A5) to FIG. (A13) are the same as FIG. 289 (A11) to FIG. 282 (A19) except for the difference in the display mode of the notification area HZ. That is, after the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 292 (A3), the chance button 136 is not operated, and the number “9” is displayed in the notification area HZ until the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. It continues to be. In FIG. 292 (A11), when the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. After that, through the pseudo continuous introduction effects shown in FIGS. 292 (A12) to (A13), in FIG. 292 (A14), the state becomes “pseudo 2”, and the re-variation of the decorative symbols is started. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed even during the pseudo continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 292 (A14). In the notification area HZ where the display has been resumed, the number “9” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”, and in response to the start of the special symbol design change display. Thus, the number is restored to the number when the display of the notification area HZ is started (the number displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 289 (A2)). The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 289 (A21).

  FIG. 293 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button operation is performed before the pseudo-continuous performance starts.

  The state shown in FIG. 293 (A2) is a state continued from FIG. 276 (A2), and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 293 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 293 (A3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “9” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 293 (A4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A5), the display is changed from the number display to the “continuation” display. That is, in the notification area HZ, the display of the number “9” may change to the display of “continuation”, or the display of the number “1” may change to the display of “continuation”. In any case, it is foretold that the display of the “continuation” character in the notification area HZ will confirm that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. After that, although not shown in the figure, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A4) to 289 (A15) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed. In FIG. 293 (A7), the middle symbol display area 208b is simulated. A decorative symbol “continuation”, which is a continuous symbol, appears. While the illustration is omitted, the characters “continue” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters “continuation” are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A7). In FIG. 293 (A8), the “Continue” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. After that, the pseudo-continuous effect is started in FIG. 293 (A11) through the pseudo-continuous introduction effect shown in FIGS. It becomes the state of. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed even during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 293 (A11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number that was “continue” until it disappeared is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”.

  In the following FIG. 293 (A12), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 293 (A13), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” and the notification area HZ is swayed. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 293 (A14)). In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A15), the number display is changed again to the “continuation” display, and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed again. It is foretold that it will be confirmed. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A22) to 290 (A33) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed. In FIG. 293 (A17), the middle symbol display area 208b is simulated. A decorative symbol “continuation”, which is a continuous symbol, appears. While the illustration is omitted, the “continuation” character continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the “continuation” character is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A17). In FIG. 293 (A18), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, through the pseudo-continuous introduction effects of FIGS. 293 (A19) to (A20), in FIG. 293 (A21), the pseudo-continuous effects are started (re-decoration of decorative symbols is started). It becomes the state of. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 293 (A21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number that was “continue” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “20” associated with “pseudo 3”.

  In the following FIG. 293 (A22), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 293 (A23), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “19” and the notification area HZ is swayed. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 293 (A24)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A25), the number display is changed to the display of “SP”, and this time the super reach effect is performed. It is foretold that it is very likely that After that, although not shown in the figure, after the same situation as FIG. 290 (A40) to FIG. 291 (A63) except for the mode of the notification area HZ, the characters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ. In the same manner as 291 (A64), the introduction animation of the final judge effect is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 291 (A65).

  FIG. 294 is a diagram illustrating an example in which another effect is performed prior to the effect notified in the notification area HZ.

  From FIG. 294 (A2) to FIG. (A4) is the same as FIG. 293 (A2) to FIG. 293 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated three times or more. In FIG. The display of HZ has changed from the display of numbers to the display of “SP”. Since the display of “SP” in the notification area HZ is displayed, it is predicted that there is a very high possibility that a super reach effect will be performed. Thereafter, although not shown in the figure, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A4) to 289 (A15) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed, and in FIG. 294 (A7), the middle symbol display area 208b is simulated. A decorative symbol “continuation”, which is a continuous symbol, appears. While the illustration is omitted, the characters “SP” are continuously displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters “SP” are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A7). However, in this example, the super reach effect is not started here, and in FIG. 294 (A8), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous effect is started in FIG. 294 (A11) through the pseudo continuous introduction effect shown in FIGS. 294 (A9) to (A10), and the state becomes “pseudo 2” here. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 294 (A11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number that was “continue” until it disappeared is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”.

  In FIG. 294 (A12), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 294 (A13), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 294 (A14)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A15), the number display is changed to the “continuation” display this time, and the pseudo-continuous production is performed. It is foretold that it will be confirmed. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as FIG. 289 (A22) to FIG. 290 (A33) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed, and in FIG. 294 (A17), the middle symbol display area 208b is simulated. A decorative symbol “continuation”, which is a continuous symbol, appears. While the illustration is omitted, the characters “continue” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters “continuation” are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A17). In FIG. 294 (A18), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous effect is started in FIG. 294 (A21) through the pseudo continuous introduction effect of FIGS. 294 (A19) to (A20). That is, as announced in the notification area HZ, the pseudo-continuous production is started, and here, the state is “pseudo 3”. The display of the notification area HZ that has not been displayed during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 294 (A21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number that was “continue” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “20” associated with “pseudo 3”.

  In FIG. 294 (A22), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 294 (A23), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “19” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 294 (A24)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A25), the number display is changed to “SP” display, and a super reach effect can be performed. It is foretold again that the sex is very high. After that, although not shown in the drawing, it is the super reach 2 through the same situation as FIG. 290 (A40) to FIG. 290 (A56) except for the mode of the notification area HZ, as in FIG. The swordsman reach production is started, and it is as announced in the notification area HZ. Although not shown in the figure after that, after the same situation as in FIGS. 291 (A58) to 291 (A63) except for the mode of the notification area HZ, the characters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ. In the same manner as (A64), the introduction animation of the final judge effect is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 291 (A65).

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 294, as shown in FIG. 294 (A5) or the like, a notification area development effect corresponding to an effect different from the effect that occurs most recently is performed. More specifically, the notification content (here, “continuation” display) corresponding to the effect that has occurred most recently can be displayed, but a different notification content (here “SP” display) is displayed. Yes.

  Here, in the case where the super reach production is started from the “pseudo 3” state than in the case where the super reach production is started from the “pseudo 2” state, the symbol variation display in which the super reach production is started. It ’s easy to win big hits. That is, the greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the more re-variation is performed), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. However, the super reach effect is not always performed after the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and the super reach effect may not be started from the “pseudo 3” state. For this reason, if the advance notice of Super Reach is given first, assuming that the advance notice is a true advance notice, the player will be relieved and the number of pseudo-reams will be You can pay attention. In other words, the player may feel safer if “SP” is displayed first than “continuation” is displayed first in the notification area HZ.

  Although not described in FIG. 272, in the notification area development effect, the expectation of jackpot may be higher when “SP” is displayed than “continuation”. However, the reverse may be possible, and the indication of “continue” may have a higher expectation of jackpot than “SP”. Moreover, both expectations may be the same.

  FIG. 295 is a diagram illustrating an example in which “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ when the chance button operation is performed in the re-variation in the “pseudo 3” state.

  FIG. 295 (A 2) continuing from FIG. 290 (A 38) shows a “pseudo 3” state. In FIG. 295 (A2), the number “20” associated with “pseudo 3” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. The number in the area HZ decreases to “19”, and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated at least once (FIG. 295 (A4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. It is foretold. The background of the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed changes to the seventh aspect (rainbow color), and the logo accessory 224F also changes to the seventh aspect (rainbow color) for a predetermined period. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as in FIG. 290 (A40) and after is passed except for the mode of the notification area HZ, but the characters “large board behavior” do not disappear from the notification area HZ, The final judgment effect is performed while the characters are displayed, and the “large board behavior” characters continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ until the shaking display of the combination of jackpot decorative symbols is started. After that, the characters “large board behavior” disappear from the notification area HZ, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  In the example described above, “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ in the “pseudo 3” state. “Big board behavior” is easy to display. In addition, in the “pseudo 2” state, “large board behavior” is more likely to be displayed in the notification area HZ than in the state before the start of the pseudo continuous effect.

  Next, another example will be described. The state shown in FIG. 295 (B1) is a state before the pseudo-continuous production starts from FIG. 276 (A2), and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 295 (B2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 295 (B3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “9” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 295 (B4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B5), the display changes from the number display to the “large board behavior” display. The background of the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed changes to the seventh aspect (rainbow color), and the logo accessory 224F also changes to the seventh aspect (rainbow color) for a predetermined period. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A4) to 289 (A15) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is followed. In FIG. A decorative symbol “continuation” that is a continuous symbol appears. While the illustration is omitted, the characters “large board behavior” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters “large board behavior” are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B7). In FIG. 295 (B8), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. It should be noted that only the state in which “large board behavior” is displayed may be continuously displayed without being hidden. After that, through the pseudo-continuous introduction effects of FIGS. 295 (B9) to (B10), the pseudo-continuous effects are started (re-variation of the decorative symbols is started) in FIG. 295 (B11). It becomes the state of. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 295 (B11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the character “large board behavior” is displayed again instead of the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”. As described above, when the characters “large board behavior” are displayed in the notification area HZ before the pseudo continuous effect (before the “pseudo 2” state), the display displayed in the notification area HZ when the pseudo continuous effect is disclosed. Is not a number associated with each state in advance, but is uniformly “large board behavior”. Even if the character “Ohban behavior” is redisplayed, the logo character 224F remains in the first mode. However, the logo character 224F remains for the predetermined period after the character “Ohban behavior” is redisplayed. 224F may change to the seventh aspect. In a state where “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 is not operated (FIGS. 295 (B11) to (B15)), and thereafter, although not shown, the notification area HZ In the same manner as FIG. 289 (A22) to FIG. 290 (A33) except for the above-mentioned aspect, in FIG. 295 (B17), a “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. ing. While the illustration is omitted, the characters “large board behavior” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters “large board behavior” are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B17). In FIG. 295 (B18), the decorative symbol “continue” is temporarily stopped (swayed), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous effect is started in FIG. 295 (B21) through the pseudo continuous introduction effect of FIGS. 295 (B19) to (B20), and here, the state becomes “pseudo 3”. The display of the notification area HZ that was not displayed even during the pseudo-continuous introduction effect is resumed in FIG. 295 (B21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the character “large board behavior” is displayed again instead of the number “20” associated with “pseudo 3”.

  FIG. 296 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG.

  Even in this state where “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 is not operated ((FIG. 296 (B22) to FIG. (B25))). Except for the area HZ, the same situation as in FIG. 290 (A40) and after is passed. However, from the notification area HZ, the characters “Ohban behavior” do not disappear, and the final judgment effect is displayed while the letters “Ohban behavior” remain displayed. Until the start of the swing display of the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols, the characters “large board behavior” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and then the letters “large board behavior” disappear from the notification area HZ. The combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 297 is a diagram illustrating an example of a wiping effect that may be started after a combination of losing decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner through a final judge effect accompanied by an operation. Note that the wipe effect is also described in FIG. 288, but the wipe effect in FIG. 288 is performed before the final judge effect with the operation, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss through the judge effect without the operation. Is an effect that starts after the sway is displayed.

  In FIG. 297 (A2) following FIG. 286 (A12) in which the chance button operation is performed in the final judge production with operation, the jackpot finalizing effect described using FIG. 286 (A13) is not started, and the first decorative design is performed. On the display device 208L, a scene where the lord is falling is displayed. In addition, the display of the notification area HZ disappears before the final judge effect accompanying the operation is started (FIG. 286 (A8)).

  In FIG. 297 (A3), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, is displayed in a shaking manner, suggesting a losing. In the following FIG. 297 (A4), the wipe effect described with reference to FIG. 272 (E2) is started. In FIG. 297 (A6), the display is wiped out, and the shaking display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 6” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 6”) is displayed again on the normal background. Subsequently, the revival effect is started, and the animation of the revival effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (A7). The animation of the revival effect overlaps a part of the notification area HZ where a princess appears and nothing is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol shaking display disappears, and the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed so as to overlap the animation of the revival effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the revival effect has ended and the background image of the jackpot determination effect has been switched. In the notification area HZ, the overlap of the animation of the revival effect is released, but nothing is displayed. In the following FIG. 297 (A8), both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that were in the initial positions so far appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emit light in the seventh mode. Yes. In FIG. 297 (A10), each of the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F returns to the initial position. -“Decoration 6” is displayed shaking. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode. In FIG. 297 (A11), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is fixedly displayed.

  The revival effect may be an effect accompanied by a chance button operation. You may comprise so that the animation of a success pattern or a failure pattern may be performed after button operation. The success pattern in this case corresponds to FIG. 297 (A7). Further, in the case of an effect accompanied by a chance button operation, this effect is a judge effect.

  Next, another example will be described. In FIG. 297 (B2) following FIG. 288 (A32) in which the chance button operation is performed in the final judge production accompanied by the operation in the state where the display of “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, in the notification area HZ Although the display of “large board behavior” is continuously displayed, the big hit finalizing effect is not started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays a scene where the lord is falling down.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 297 (B3), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 297 (B4), the wipe effect is started. In FIG. 6B6, wipe out is performed. Even during the wipe effect, the display of “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ. However, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The shaking display of “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”) is displayed again. Here too, the display of “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and then the restoration effect is started. The display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ in FIG. 297 (B6) also corresponds to a notice display of the revival effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (B7), a revival animation is displayed. In the animation of the rebirth, a princess appears and overlaps the display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ, and the display of “large board behavior” is more difficult to see than before the animation starts. It should be noted that the display of “large board behavior” may be made visible so that the display of “large board behavior” overlaps with the animation of the revival effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the revival effect has ended and the background image of the jackpot determination effect has been switched. Note that the display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ can be seen. In the following FIG. 297 (B8), both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have been in the initial positions so far appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. Yes. In FIG. 297 (B10), each of the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F returns to the initial position. -“Decoration 6” is displayed shaking. Note that both the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode. The display of “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed without disappearing until the shaking display is started. Then, before the confirmation display is performed, the display of “large board behavior” disappears from the notification area HZ, and in FIG. 297 (B11), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. On the other hand, the crest character 224E and the logo character 224F that have returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode even if the confirmation display is started.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 297 (B2) to (B11), “large board behavior” is displayed during a wipe effect or a scene suggesting a subsequent loss (when a combination of decorative pattern buzz is displayed). Therefore, the player should be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind, but even though “Ohban behavior” is displayed, a wipe effect is executed or a scene suggesting a subsequent loss is displayed. As a result, there is a case where the player is somewhat nervous and the interest of the game is improved. In particular, in a scene where the display of “large board behavior” becomes difficult to see due to the animation of the revival effect, the tension of the player may increase.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram illustrating an example in which both a notification area development effect and a normal button effect are executed in response to one chance button operation.

  In FIG. 298 (A2) following FIG. 276 (A8), the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 298 (A3), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “9” and the notification area HZ is swayed. In FIG. 298 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 298 (A4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. Further, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is also promoted by two stages. Further, in FIG. 298 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 298 (A5), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “7”, and the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is further promoted by one stage. It changes to the 4th mode (green). The chance button 136 is continuously hit after that (see FIG. 298 (A6)). In FIG. 298 (A7), the number of the notification area HZ is reduced to “1”, and the logo accessory 224F is changed to the fifth mode (red). It has changed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (A9), a state in which the development effect for super reach has been completed and the swordsman who is the enemy of Tono-sama has been discovered is displayed. When the development effect for super reach is finished, the mode of the logo accessory 224F is returned to the default mode (first mode). The number “1” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ.

  Subsequent FIG. 298 (A10) to FIG. 298 (A14) are the same as FIG. 282 (A11) to FIG. 282 (A15) except for the difference in display mode of the notification area HZ. After a strong-pattern actor action production was performed, it developed into a swordsman reach production that was Super Reach 2, and first, a normal button production was started. Note that the display of the numeral “1” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ during the period from FIG. 298 (A12) to FIG. 298 (A14). In FIG. 298 (A15) in which the number “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the operation valid period in the normal button effect has started, and the chance button 136 has been operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 298 (A16), a strong pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the sixth mode is displayed. The cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern overlaps with the display portion of the notification area HZ, and the display portion of the notification area HZ is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. However, the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner, indicating that the display has changed due to the operation of the chance button 136. Actually, in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 298 (A15), the display of the number “1” is changed to the display of “Chance” in the notification area HZ. Further, in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIs having the strong pattern, the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F emit light in the same mode (sixth mode) as the background mode of the cut-in image CIw.

  Thereafter, the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern disappears, and the characters “Chance” displayed in the notification area HZ can be easily seen. However, since the final judgment effect is started, the characters “Chance” disappear immediately. End up. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 286 (A8).

  According to the example of FIG. 298 (A2) to FIG. (A16) described above, in FIG. 298 (A4) to FIG. (A8), the change in the light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F in response to the chance button operation, There are two types of effects accompanying the operation of the chance button 136, such as the button effects in FIGS. 298 (A15) to (A16), and the effect (button effect) accompanied by the operation of one of these chance buttons 136 is performed. ) And the notification area development effect overlap. Further, the button operation for connecting to the notification area development effect is also used for these two types of effects accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136, and the efficiency of the chance button operation is high.

  Next, another example will be described. FIG. 298 (B2) has the same timing as FIG. 298 (A15). That is, it is the timing when the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started. In FIG. 298 (A15), the display of the notification area HZ is the number “1”, but in FIG. 298 (B2), the display of the notification area HZ is the number “2”. Also in FIG. 298 (B2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, a strong pattern cut-in image CIw is also displayed in FIG. 298 (B3), as in FIG. Emits gold. In addition, the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 298 (B3) is displayed in a shaking manner, and it can be seen that the display has changed due to the operation of the chance button 136. Actually, it changes to the number “1”. In FIG. 298 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (B4), there is no change in the strong pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the sixth aspect and the family crest character 224E that emits light in the sixth aspect, but only the logo accessory 224F. Changes from the sixth mode to the seventh mode (rainbow). The notification area HZ shown in FIG. 298 (B4) is also displayed in a shaking manner, and it can be seen that the display has changed due to the operation of the chance button 136. Actually, the number changes from “1” to “large board behavior”.

  In FIG. 298 (B5), the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern disappears, and the characters “large board behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ are easily visible. Moreover, the family crest character 224E has returned to the default mode (first mode). On the other hand, since the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh mode for a predetermined period as the notification area development effect, it still emits light in the seventh mode, but when the predetermined period has passed, the default mode Return to (first aspect). The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 288 (A29), and the “large board behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed until immediately before the final display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols.

  According to the example of FIGS. 298 (B2) to (B5) described above, a notification area development effect is newly generated after a new effect is started (immediately after) in another button effect. As a result, in this example, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F is changed (overwritten) in accordance with the newly generated notification area development effect. In this way, when a common production means is used for the notification area development effect and other productions, the notification area development production may be given priority, or the production that occurred later may be given priority. It is good, or conversely, the production that has occurred previously may be given priority. Further, even when separate production means are used, if the production periods overlap, the notification area development production may be given priority, or the production that occurred later may be given priority. Or, conversely, the production that has occurred previously may be given priority.

  FIG. 299 is a diagram illustrating an example in the case where the notification area development effect overlaps with another effect.

  Two examples are shown in FIG. 299. That is, two examples are shown, an example shown in FIG. 299 (A2) to FIG. 10 (A10) and an example shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, matters common to the two examples will be described together. 299 (A2) to FIG. (A6) and FIG. (B2) to FIG. (B6) are the same as FIG. 298 (A2) to FIG. 298 (A9), and normal reach (search reach) In Fig. 299 (A6), there are nine chance button operations, the super-reach development effect has ended, and the enemy swordsman has been discovered. The number "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ. Yes.

  In FIGS. 299 (A7) and (B7), the introduction effect of the super reach effect is started, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. Hereinafter, two examples will be described separately.

  In FIG. 299 (A7), the chance button 136 is operated once, and the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (A8) remains the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. However, the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. That is, the notification area development effect corresponding to the “large board behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ is started. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 299 (A9), a strong-pattern accessory action effect is performed as a continuation of the introduction effect. That is, both the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eight generations 224Fa and the general character 224Fb perform a separating operation, and the crest character is between them. The object 224E is located, and each of these three actors 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E emits light in the fifth mode (red). The logo actor 224F composed of the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the shogun officer 224Fb was also used in the notification area development effect. It is overwritten by the product action effect effect data, and the logo accessory 224F is changed from the seventh mode to the fifth mode.

  In FIG. 299 (A10), the introductory effect is finished, and the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F return to the initial positions to be in the first state, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is super reach 2. The swordsman reach production is started, and the notification area HZ is displayed again. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 299 (A10), “large board behavior” is displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 287 (A23).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 299 (B7), the chance button 136 is not operated at this stage, and as shown in FIG. 299 (B8), a strong-function accessory action effect is performed as a continuation of the introduction effect. In the strong-pattern actor action production, each of the three actors, Yatsushiro actor 224Fa, general officer 224Fb, and family crest actor 224E, emits light in the fifth mode (red) in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated, but no change occurs as shown in FIG. 299 (B9). That is, each of the above three items continues to emit light in the fifth mode (red) in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Eventually, the introduction effect ends, and in FIG. 299 (B10), both the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F return to the initial positions to be in the first mode. A certain swordsman reach production has begun. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (B10), the notification area HZ is displayed again, and “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ. Therefore, in FIG. 299 (B9) after the chance button operation is performed, the seventh mode of light emission effect by the logo accessory 224F in the notification area development effect corresponding to the chance button operation is not performed. In the example, the action pattern action of the strong pattern in the introduction effect is prioritized. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 287 (A23).

  According to the two examples described with reference to FIG. 299, the chance button operation is accepted even during the period in which the notification area HZ is not displayed (the period in which the notification area HZ disappears). However, if another effect is started first, the notification area development effect corresponding to the chance button operation may not be executed (FIG. 299 (B9)). In addition, even if the notification area development effect corresponding to the chance button operation is started first, it may be replaced with another effect started later (FIG. 299 (A9)).

  FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating an example when a chance button operation is performed during a wipe effect.

  As described with reference to FIG. 291 (A63), the number display disappears from the notification area HZ before the final judge effect is started. This is an effect that is started after the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern is displayed in a shaking manner through a judge effect without operation. Note that the example shown in FIG. 300 can be applied to the case where the display of numbers from the notification area HZ does not disappear before the final judge effect is started.

  Two examples are also shown in FIG. That is, two examples are shown, an example shown in FIG. 300 (A2) to FIG. (A9) and an example shown in FIG. 300 (B2) to FIG.

  Hereinafter, matters common to the two examples will be described together. FIGS. 300A2 and B2 are continued from the case where “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ in the stage of FIG. 282 (A18), and also in the notification area HZ in FIG. 300 (A2). “1” is displayed, and “1” is also displayed in the notification area HZ in FIG. As a result of the judgment effect without operation, the judgment result is the loss of Tono-sama, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (A2) and FIG. In FIG. 300 (A3) and FIG. 300 (B3), “decoration 6” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 4B4, the wipe effect is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 300 (A4) and FIG. 300 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated during the wipe effect. The notification area HZ is displayed even during the wipe effect. Hereinafter, two examples will be described separately.

  In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 300 (A5), the display changes from the number “1” to the “question mark” in response to the chance button operation, and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 300 (A6), the display is wiped out, and the shaking display of the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost pattern (“decoration 6” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 6”) is redisplayed on the normal background. Even when wiped out, the notification area HZ does not disappear and the “question mark” display continues to be displayed, but the “question mark” display disappears during the shaking display (FIG. 300 (A7)) . In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 300 (A9), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the loss is performed. In addition, the notice display displayed in the notification area HZ at the timing of FIG. 300 (A5) may be “Chance” instead of “Question mark”.

  On the other hand, in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 300 (B5), the number “1” is changed from “1” to “large board behavior” in response to the chance button operation, and the logo object is limited to a predetermined period. 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. Subsequently, in this example, the revival effect is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 297 (B7). Here, the display of “large board behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ is not a display for notifying that the revival effect is started.

  In the case of big hits in the examples shown in FIGS. 300A2 to A9, the rebirth effect shown in FIG. 300B is started between FIGS. 300A6 and A7. There may be cases. Here, the display of the “question mark” displayed in the notification area HZ or the display of “Chance” that can be displayed instead of the “question mark” is not a display for notifying that the restoration effect will be started.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 300, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted even in the wipe effect that may start after the combination of the decorative pattern of losing is displayed in a shaking manner, and the notification area is developed. An effect may be executed. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted in the wipe effect, or the notification area development effect may not be executed even if accepted.

  FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating an example when the chance button 136 is long pressed.

  The state shown in FIG. 301 (A2) is a state continued from FIG. 276 (A2), and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 301 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated. The operation here is a so-called long press operation in which the chance button 136 can be continuously pressed. In FIG. 301 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9”. In FIG. 301 (A3), the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic continuous hitting function is activated. In the automatic continuous hitting function, if the chance button 136 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer, the automatic hitting function is regarded as hitting continuously, and the same effect as the effect in the case of repeated hitting is executed. In FIG. 301 (A4), the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “8”. After this, the chance button 136 is kept pressed (FIG. 301 (A5)), and there are a case where the number in the notification area HZ decreases and a case where the display is switched to the notice display at an early stage. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 301 (A6), the display changes from a number display to a “continuation” display. The player stops the long press when the notification area HZ is switched from the number display to the notice display. Even if the long press is continued as it is, the display of the notification area HZ does not change from “continue”. Further, it may be determined that a single long press operation functions only as a single operation for a predetermined number of times. For example, when one long press functions as a single operation for 10 times, it can always be switched to the notice display by one long press, but when it functions only as a single operation for 5 times, the notification area Since the number of HZ is decreased by one by one operation of the chance button 136, the number of the notification area HZ is decreased by only 5. Moreover, the number of the notification area HZ may be set so as to decrease only to a predetermined number by one long press. For example, if the setting is such that “1” is always displayed and only decreases to “1”, the number in the notification area HZ can be decreased only to “1” no matter how long it is pressed.

  After FIG. 301 (A7), the illustration is temporarily omitted, but after the same situation as FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A16) except for the mode of the notification area HZ, The decorative symbol “continue” which is a continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (displayed in a shaking manner). While the illustration is omitted, the characters “continue” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but in FIG. 301 (A9), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 289 (A18).

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the example described below, an operation amount meter MT11 whose meter rises in response to an operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 301 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. (A6), and “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 301 (B3), a button continuous striking effect is started, an operation amount meter MT11 of an empty state is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and a display of “Pseudo-continuous with meter MAX” is displayed together with the button image 136a at the center of the screen. It has been broken. Here, “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and since it is predicted that the pseudo-continuous production is to be started, it is a double notice. It should be noted that the start of an effect (a certain effect) other than the pseudo-continuous effect, such as “Meter MAX is SP”, instead of “Meter MAX is a pseudo-ream” may be announced. In FIG. 301 (B4), the button image 136a is additionally displayed with an arrow display 136b, a character display of “continuous hit”, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. The operation validity period starts. In other words, when the button is operated, the first effect (here, button repeated effect) is started (a button operation acceptance state). In this state, the operation of the chance button 136 is started, and FIG. 301 (B5 ) However, the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic continuous hitting function is activated. While the remaining period of the remaining period meter display 136c decreases, the manipulated variable meter MT11 continues to rise, and in FIG. 301 (B9), the manipulated variable meter MT11 is full. The player continues to press and hold the chance button 136 until the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full, and stops the long press when the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full. In FIG. 301 (B10), the characters “pseudo-link GET” are displayed. Note that this “pseudo-link GET” disappears immediately, but “continuation” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ. Thereafter, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A4) to 289 (A16) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed. In FIG. 301 (B12), “continuation” ”Is temporarily stopped (swayed). While the illustration is omitted, the “continuation” character continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but in FIG. 301 (B12), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 289 (A18).

  In addition, in the state where the production pattern in which the operation amount meter MT11 is in the full state is selected, the number of operations of the chance button 136 until the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full may be different depending on the selected production pattern. . For example, you may provide the production pattern which will be in a full state by 10 operations, and the production pattern which will be in a full state by 20 operations. Moreover, you may provide the production pattern which will be in a full state by one operation. Or you may comprise so that it may not be provided with the production pattern which will be in a full state by one operation, In this case, operation amount rather than the display of the "number" in the alerting | reporting area | region HZ changing to a notice display. It may be configured that the chance button 136 has to be operated more when the meter MT11 is in a full state.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an effect accompanied by repeated button presses or long presses is started in a state where a number is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  The state shown in FIG. 302 (A2) is a state continued from FIG. 276 (A2), and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. The number of cases where “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ and starts is the largest. That is, when “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started, “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started compared to when “20” is displayed and started in the notification area HZ. It is configured so that the frequency is higher in the case of being performed. In the following FIG. 302 (A3), the button continuous striking effect is started, an operation amount meter MT11 of an empty state is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and a display of “It is pseudo-continuous with meter MAX” is displayed together with the button image 136a in the center of the screen. Has been done. It should be noted that the start of an effect other than the pseudo-continuous effect such as “Meter MAX is SP” instead of “Meter MAX is a pseudo-continuous” may be notified. In FIG. 301 (A4), the button image 136a is additionally displayed with an arrow display 136b, a character display of “continuous hit”, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. The operation validity period starts. In other words, when the button is operated, the first effect (again, button repeated effect) is started (a button operation acceptance state). In this state, the operation of the chance button 136 is started, and FIG. 301 (A5) ) However, the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic continuous hitting function is activated. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 301 (A5), the number decreases from “10” to “9”. On the other hand, the operation amount meter MT11 is increased by one scale. In this example, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is effectively handled both for the button striking effect and for reducing the number displayed in the notification area HZ. Thereafter, the chance button 136 continues to be pressed for a long time, and first, as shown in FIG. 302 (A7), the display of the notification area HZ changes from the display of numbers to the display of “continue”. The manipulated variable meter MT11 shown in FIG. 302 (A7) is not yet full. In addition, even when “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the display of the notification area HZ is easily changed to the notice display or is surely changed before the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full. . Further, even when “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started, the display of the notification area HZ is likely to change to a notice display before the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full, or On the contrary, when “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started, the operation amount meter MT11 may become full first. The character of “pseudo continuous GET” displayed when the operation amount meter MT11 is full may have a reliability of 100% (pseudo continuous confirmation) or less than 100%. If the reliability of the “pseudo-continuous GET” character is less than 100%, the chance button operation is continued even when the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full first, and “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ. It is possible to obtain accurate information by aiming for this. In addition, the switch from the number in the notification area HZ to the notice display and the meter full of the operation amount meter MT11 may be operated if the chance button 136 is operated regardless of which of the display starts first or the display starts simultaneously. The switching to the notification display in the notification area HZ may always be performed first, and conversely, the meter full of the operation amount meter MT11 may be determined first.

  When the “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is confirmed, so the long press may be stopped, but in this example, the chance is to fill the manipulated variable meter MT11. The long press of the button 137 is continued. In FIG. 302 (A9), the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full after the start of the display of “continuation” in the notification area HZ, and in the subsequent FIG. Yes. The player stops long pressing when the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full. In this example, the automatic continuous hitting function is activated. However, when the automatic continuous hitting function is not activated, the initial value with the highest display frequency in the notification area HZ is used to fill the operation amount meter MT11. More operations than “10” (for example, 30 times) are required.

  After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A16) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is followed. In FIG. 302 (A12), “continuation” ”Is temporarily stopped (swayed). While the illustration is omitted, the characters “continue” continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but in FIG. 302 (A12), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 289 (A18).

  Note that the above-described long press operation is applicable to this example as well as to the example described with reference to FIGS. 301 (B2) to (B12). That is, it may be determined that a single long-press operation only functions as a single-shot operation for a predetermined number of times. For example, when one long press functions as a single operation for 10 times, it can always be switched to the notice display by one long press, but when it functions only as a single operation for 5 times, the notification area Since the number of HZ is decreased by one by one operation of the chance button 136, the number of the notification area HZ is decreased by only 5. Moreover, the number of the notification area HZ may be set so as to decrease only to a predetermined number by one long press. For example, if the setting is such that “1” is always displayed and only decreases to “1”, the number in the notification area HZ can be decreased only to “1” no matter how long it is pressed.

  Next, examples of FIGS. 302B2 to B12 will be described. This example is an example of a normal long press effect in which a long press of the chance button 136 is required. FIG. 302 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. (A6), and “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 302 (B3), the button long press effect is started, a count display is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and a display of “Aim at count 10 by long press” is displayed along with the button image 136a at the center of the screen. In FIG. 302 (B5), an arrow display 136b and a character display “long press” and a remaining period meter display 136c are additionally displayed on the button image 136a as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. The operation valid period is started. In other words, when the button is operated, the first effect (here, the long press effect) is started (a button operation acceptance state), and in this state, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is started and the remaining period While the remaining period of the meter display 136c decreases, the count display at the lower left of the screen continues to count up, and the long press operation is continued until the operation valid period is full. In FIG. 301 (B9), the remaining period meter display 136c is just before 0, and the count display is 9. At the same time as the remaining period meter display 136c becomes 0, the count display becomes 10, and in FIG. 301 (B9), a character display “SP GET” is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has been acquired. This character display may also have a reliability of 100% or less than 100%. Further, the present invention is not limited to the super reach effect, and may be a normal reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, or the like. Further, in the case of “pseudo-continuous GET”, in this example, it is displayed after the display of “continuation” in the notification area HZ, but is displayed before the display of “continuation” in the notification area HZ. There may be cases.

  The characters “SP GET” shown in FIG. 302 (B10) disappear immediately, but “continuation” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the same situation as in FIGS. 289 (A4) to 289 (A16) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is passed. In FIG. ”Is temporarily stopped (swayed). While the illustration is omitted, the “continuation” character is continuously displayed in the notification area HZ, but in FIG. 302 (B12), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as those after FIG. 289 (A18).

  In this example, even when the count reaches 10, the button image 136a does not disappear, the button long press effect is continued without ending, and characters such as “SP GET” indicate that the operation valid period has elapsed. It will not be displayed until later. For this reason, the long press effect is an effect that takes time until a result is obtained.

  Further, supplementing the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, the long press operation described here is that the state where the chance button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. It is an operation mode, and the continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by the chance button 136 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, an interval of 200 ms) is performed in a pseudo manner while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed by the effect button 136 in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started. In addition, a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of a first operation mode. Further, the long press operation for a predetermined time or more by the chance button 136 is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode.

  In the example involving the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the operation result is displayed by one press operation (single operation) by the chance button 136. For example, a long press operation by the chance button 136 is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the chance button 136. Moreover, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the production of the chance button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the combination of 2 or more of the production by. Further, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the chance button 136 is continuously pressed, the pressing operation by the chance button 136 is performed. You may make it produce the production | presentation accompanying to a pseudo | simulation continuous hit operation sequentially. That is, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136, the result of the operation is displayed even when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In the example involving the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the operation result is displayed by one press operation (single operation) by the chance button 136. For example, a long press operation by the chance button 136 is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the chance button 136. Moreover, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the production of the chance button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the combination of 2 or more of the production by. Further, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the chance button 136 is continuously pressed, the pressing operation by the chance button 136 is performed. You may make it produce the production | presentation accompanying to a pseudo | simulation continuous hit operation sequentially. At this time, as soon as the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted, a pseudo-pressing operation by the chance button 136 is immediately performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state where the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted. In such a case, the presentation may be performed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in the example accompanied with the operation of the chance button 136, the result of the operation is displayed even when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the chance button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the chance button 136 is illustrated as follows.

  (1) After a button effect (single operation effect) for executing a single pressing operation (single operation) by the chance button 136 is started, when a single operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The

  (2) In the case where a single operation effect is executed a plurality of times in succession, when a long press operation with the chance button 136 is performed, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

  (3) After a button effect (continuous hit operation effect) for executing a plurality of press operations (continuous hit operation) by the chance button 136 is started, if a continuous hit operation is performed, an effect related to the operation result is executed. The In addition, when a long press operation by the chance button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed when the long press automatic continuous hit function is valid.

  (4) When a continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated time of pressing the chance button 136 may be executed, and the effect may proceed accordingly. . When a long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be performed, so that the presentation may be advanced as it is, or the chance button 136 is operated as long-pressed. May be accepted.

  (5) In the state where the chance button 136 is continuously pressed (continuous pressed state), when the single operation effect is started, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed, and the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed. The In this case, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed from the time when the continuous hit operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single shot operation is performed. May be. Further, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the chance button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the chance button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (8) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these single operation effects is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect with a high priority determined beforehand is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (9) In the continuous pressing state, when a single operation effect is started and then a continuous operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (10) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (11) When a continuous operation effect is started in a continuously pressed state, and then a single operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (12) When the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the results of the operations for these consecutive hit operation effects are executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result for the continuous hit operation effect and the effect related to the operation result for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (14) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (15) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result about the long press operation effect and the effect related to the operation result about the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in this state, the long press operation effect is, for example, in accordance with the accumulated press time of the chance button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production relating to the result of the operation for the single operation production is executed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of the operation about the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, after the long press operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the accumulated press time of the chance button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production related to the result of the operation for the continuous hitting operation production is executed.

  (19) When the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in this state, the result of the operation on the long press operation effect started first is related to As long as the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation for any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in this state, for example, the chance button 136 may be used for the long press operation effect that has been started first. For example, an effect corresponding to the cumulative press time of the chance button 136 is executed for a long press operation effect that is started later. There are cases where the production proceeds as it is.

  (20) After a continuous hit operation effect is started, when a long press operation is performed and a single operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic repeat function is enabled, and the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the operation result related to the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed, and the single operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result for the continuous operation effect and the result of the operation for the single operation effect Both productions are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the continuous hitting started first. Only the effect related to the operation result for the operation effect is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect related to the result of the operation for any continuous operation effect is executed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the continuous hit operation effects is also executed.

  (22) When the long press operation effect is started after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled, Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the long press operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once canceled. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the repeated hit operation effect is started, when the repeated hit operation is performed and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for the repeated hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. For example, for example, an effect corresponding to the cumulative press time of the chance button 136 may be executed.

  What has been described above is applicable not only to the chance button 136 but also to various operation means such as the second chance button 137 and the transparent portion 191.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram illustrating an example in which after it appears as if the effect using the chance button 136 has ended, the effect using the chance button 136 is started again.

  FIG. 303 (A2) is a continuation from FIG. 283 (A12), and the search reach effect is started. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated before the search reach effect is started, and the display of “SP” changed from the number display is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 303 (A2). In FIG. 303 (A2) following FIG. 303 (A2), a notice display (operation related display) of “Preparing for color button” is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Karak button here refers to the chance button 136 that advances from the initial position upward as described with reference to FIGS. 266 (c) to (d). If the super reach effect announced in the notification area HZ is started, there is a higher possibility that a button effect such as a judge effect or a final judge effect will be executed. %is not. In this state, there is a player who feels that the possibility of starting the super reach effect is further increased if the notice display (operation-related display) of “Preparing for the color button” is displayed.

  After the display of the notice “Preparing for Karakuri button” is started, as shown in FIG. 303 (A4), a state in which an enemy swordsman has been discovered is displayed. From FIG. 303 (A5) to FIG. 303 (A14) following FIG. 303 (A4), a notice display “Preparing the color button” is displayed, except that FIG. 283 (A15) to FIG. It is the same as until A10), and after the strong action of the action movement was performed in the introduction of the super reach production, it developed into the super reach 2 swordsman reach production. First, the normal button production was started. (FIG. 303 (A9)). Even when the normal button effect is started, the notice display “Preparing for Karakuri button” does not disappear, and the player senses from the start that the button effect started here is the normal button effect. In FIG. 303 (A10), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 303 (A11), the strong button is displayed as in FIG. 286 (A6). A cut-in image CIs of the pattern is displayed, and the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each emit light in the sixth mode. With the strong pattern cut-in image CIs, the display of “SP” in the notification area HZ and the notice display of “Preparing the color button” are overlapped, but as shown in FIG. 303 (A12), the cut-in image If the CIs disappear, the overlapped two will be easily visible again. Subsequently, before the final judge effect is started, the letters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ, but the notice display “Preparing for the color button” is still displayed. 303 (A14) to FIG. 303 (A15), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays an introduction animation of the final judge effect accompanied by the operation. In FIG. The notice display will fade and gradually disappear. At the same time as the notice button “Preparing for color button” disappears, in FIG. 303 (A16), the chance button 136 advances upward from the initial position while emitting light in the fifth mode. Moreover, the advanced button image 136a '' etc. are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 303 (A17), the operation valid period is started, and the advanced chance button 136 is operated once. When the advanced chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 286 (A13) and thereafter.

  In the example described above, the operation-related display that is a notice display of “Preparing for color button” relates to the final judge effect, and before the final judge effect is started, “SP” is displayed from the notification area HZ. The characters have disappeared (FIG. 303 (A13)). In other words, before the chance button 136 starts to advance from the initial position, the characters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 304 is a diagram illustrating an example of adjusting the light amount and volume.

  In FIG. 304 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped in a state where there is no special symbol hold, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 3”-“decoration 4”). "-" Decoration 1 ") remains stopped. In the state where there is no special symbol hold, if the hold does not increase even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 304 (A2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The setting adjustment window SUW is displayed on the display screen. The setting adjustment window SUW may be displayed only on a screen (symbol demo screen) on which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed with the combination of decorative symbols stopped. In addition, the screen may be a screen that can be called up by performing a predetermined operation even during the decorative symbol variation display. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since this symbol demo screen was displayed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is an animation screen (an animation demo) on which the model title and the like are displayed from the symbol demo screen. Screen). The setting adjustment window SUW may be displayed on the animation demo screen.

  In the setting adjustment window SUW, the light quantity of the game board lamp 532 and the game table frame lamp 542 shown in FIG. It is shown. It is also shown that the volume of the speaker 120 can be adjusted by operating the up and down keys of the cross key 181a. Further, it is also shown that the menu screen shown in FIG. 304 (B1) is displayed by operating the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (B1), on the menu screen, the cursor CS is operated with the up and down keys of the cross key 181a, and the OK button 181b is operated to determine the selection of the item on which the cursor CS is positioned. To do. In addition to the volume light amount adjustment, the items include production customization, character selection, hold frame selection, hold display selection, background display selection, and the like shown in FIG. This menu screen can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the symbol demo screen is being displayed or the animation demo screen is being displayed. Further, even during the special symbol design change display, it may be called by performing a predetermined operation. Therefore, if the volume or light quantity is adjusted, it can be entered from this menu screen.

  In FIG. 304 (A3), the left key of the cross key 181a is operated, and the light quantity adjustment window SUW1 is shown in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The amount of light decreases when the left key is operated, and increases when the right key is operated. In FIG. 304 (A5), the amount of light which was four levels in FIG. 304 (A4) is reduced to three levels.

  FIG. 304 (C1) shows a symbol variation display, and a “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 304 (C1), the left key of the cross key 181a is operated. However, in the following FIG. 304 (C2), neither the light amount adjustment window SUW1 nor the setting adjustment window SUW is displayed, and the symbol variation display is performed. The light intensity cannot be adjusted inside. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (C1), there is no reaction even if the left and right keys of the cross key 181a are operated.

  FIG. 304 (D1) is also during symbol variation display, and a “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 304 (D1), the upper key of the cross key 181a is operated. In the following FIG. 304 (D3), a volume adjustment meter is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. In this example, when the up key or the down key of the cross key 181a is operated once, a meter indicating the current volume is displayed. Next, when the up key is operated once, the volume can be increased by one step, and when the down key is operated once, the volume can be decreased by one step. In FIG. 304 (D3), the volume that was two levels in FIG. (D2) has increased to three levels. As described above, the volume can be adjusted even during the symbol variation display. It should be noted that a meter indicating the changed sound volume changed by one step may be displayed only by operating the up key or the down key once.

  In FIG. 304 (E1), the symbol variation display is also being performed. In FIG. 304 (E1), the number “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and in the subsequent diagram (E2), the cross key 181a is displayed. Our upper key is being operated. In this example, the display of the notification area HZ can be changed by operating any one of the cross keys 181a in addition to the chance button 136. Here, since the upper key of the cross key 181a is operated, the volume is adjusted and the display of the notification area HZ is also changed from “1” to “question mark”. Note that the display of the notification area HZ may not be changed with the left and right keys of the cross key 181a.

  In FIG. 304 (F2), in the state where the number “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the operation valid period in the normal button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 304 (F3), a cut-in image CIw having a weak pattern with the background in the fourth mode is displayed, and the family crest combination 224E and the logo combination 224F are in the fourth mode. Emitting light. In response to the button operation, in the notification area HZ, the display of the number “1” is changed to the display of “Chance”, and the notification area development effect is performed. In this manner, both the notification area development effect and the effect corresponding to the button effect may be executed in response to one chance button operation.

  In FIG. 304 (G2), the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started in the state where the numeral “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ during the symbol variation display, and here, the cross key 181a is displayed. The left key is operated. As described above, the light amount adjustment using the left and right keys cannot be performed during the symbol variation display. In addition, even if any key of the cross key 181a is operated, the display of the notification area HZ cannot be changed, but it is effective for a button effect. For this reason, in FIG. 304 (G3), although the number “1” is still displayed in the notification area HZ, the cut-in image CIw of the weak pattern is displayed, and the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F are displayed. Each emits light in the fourth mode. If the chance button 136 is operated here, as shown in FIG. 304 (F3), the notification area development effect may be started, but if any one of the cross keys 181a is operated. , You can enjoy only the effect of button production. That is, when an operation of any one of the cross keys 181a is performed in a state where the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a is displayed, the display of the weak cut-in CIw is started in response to the operation. However, even if an operation of any one of the cross keys 181a is performed in a state where the number display in the notification area HZ is displayed, the operation is performed according to the operation. The number display in the notification area HZ is configured so as not to be a small number. In the state where the number display in the notification area HZ is displayed, any key of the cross key 181a is displayed. Even if an operation is performed, the display of the number in the notification area HZ is not switched to any notice display according to the operation. Instead of the cross key 181a, the second chance button 137, the operation lever, or the transmission part 191 may be used. That is, the same operation means (cross key 181a) as the operation means used for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment may be used, but even another operation means (second chance button 137, operation lever, transmission part 191). Good.

  In FIG. 304 (H2), the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started with the number “1” being displayed in the notification area HZ during the symbol variation display. The left key is operated. In the subsequent FIG. 304 (H3), the effect of the button effect can be started in response to the left key operation, but here, the effect that does not appear or hardly appears in the chance button operation is executed. In FIG. 304 (H3), a cut-in display CIr displayed as an iron plate is displayed, and this cut-in display CIr is a cut-in display in which the big hit expectation is high or the big hit is confirmed. As described above, there are cases where it is more advantageous to operate the cross key 181a than to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 305 is a diagram illustrating an example in which notification content other than the notification content illustrated in FIG. 271 (a) is displayed in the notification region HZ.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305 (A1) to FIG. (A9), the number “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ in response to the start of the special symbol variation display, and the result of repeated chance button operations ( In FIG. 305 (A3) to FIG. 305 (A5)) and FIG. 305 (A6), the display is switched from the number display to the “up” display. The notification content shown in FIG. 271 (a) is a notice display in the symbol variation display of the special figure on which the notice content is displayed, that is, a display related to the normal notice, but this “up” display is related to the pre-read notice. It is a display. Specifically, the display is a notice that the display mode of the hold icon may change. In FIG. 305 (A8), the display mode of the second hold icon is changed from the first mode to the fifth mode, and the display of “up” disappears from the notification area HZ. According to this example, since there is a possibility that a big hit will be made in the hold already stored at the time when the display of “up” is started, the launch for storing the third hold and the fourth hold is stopped and the hold icon It is possible to watch changes and eliminate the useless balls.

  Here, the display of “up” is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon may change, but the display for notifying that the display mode of the variation icon may change. There may be. In this case, the display of “up” is also a display related to the normal notice. Furthermore, a display for notifying that the display mode of either the hold icon or the change icon may change may be used. That is, the display of “up” may be a display for notifying that the display mode of the icon related to the symbol variation display may change. Furthermore, a display different from the “up” display may be provided, and the other display may be a display for notifying that the display mode of the variation icon may change.

  Next, another example will be described. 305 (B1) to (B9) are the same as FIGS. 274 (A1) to (9), and (B10) to (B12) are the same as those in FIG. 275 (C2). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as that in FIG. 5C (C5), but the chance button operation is performed during the search reach, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. It has been switched. During the search reach, the UI unit UI3, the hold icon, and the change icon are not displayed. In FIG. 305 (B14), the enemy cannot be found, the development to the super reach production has failed, and the display of “up” in the notification area HZ disappears. However, since the hold icon still disappears, the display mode of the hold icon cannot be confirmed. In addition, you may alert | report that the hold | maintenance change sound is output and the display mode change of any hold icons of the hold icon which has disappeared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 10B15, “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are displayed in a shaking manner during the search reach. The UI part UI3, the hold icon, and the change icon that have disappeared are displayed again. Among the hold icons redisplayed here, the second hold icon is changed to the fifth mode. FIGS. 305 (B16) to (B17) are the same as FIGS. 273 (A7) to (A8).

  In the configuration in which the hold change pre-reading notice is given when the start opening prize is received, the hold change sound may be output even when the hold icon is not displayed. Further, in a configuration capable of executing a pre-reading notice that changes on hold at a certain timing during the display of the symbol change of the special figure (for example, a pre-reading notice for a certain hold among the holds existing at the start of the change) The advance notice may not be performed in a display state in which the hold icon is not displayed.

  FIG. 306 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the operation period of the chance button 136 is limited even when a number is displayed in the notification area HZ. In this example, when the background of the notification area HZ is displayed in gray, the operation is not accepted even if the chance button 136 is operated (operation invalid). In other words, in the examples so far, the chance button operation is always accepted (operation valid) as long as a number is displayed in the notification area HZ. Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 299 (A7), the chance button operation is accepted even if the notification area HZ where the numbers are displayed is hidden. However, in this example, the chance button operation is accepted only during a certain period.

  From FIG. 306 (A1) to FIG. (A12), the notification area HZ is displayed, but the chance button operation is not accepted (operation invalid). Except for this point, FIG. 276 (A1) to FIG. Since it is the same as (A12), the description is omitted. In this example, the chance button operation is accepted only during the introduction period of the super reach effect (operation valid). FIG. 306 (A13) is an introduction part of the trick reach which is Super Reach 1. In this example, a logo display luminescence tutorial display TTX is displayed in this introduction portion. That is, in the lower left of the display screens of FIGS. 306 (A13) to (A15), “When the chance button 136 is operated and the logo accessory 224F emits light” is displayed. In other words, in this example, the chance button operation is accepted only during the period in which the tutorial display TTX is displayed (operation valid). In FIG. 306 (A13), the chance button 136 is operated only once. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 306 (A14), the number “10” so far is reduced to “9”. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated only once, and the logo accessory 224F does not emit light. In FIG. 306 (A16), the tutorial display TTX is disappeared and the chance button operation is not accepted (operation invalid state). FIG. 306 (A17) and subsequent figures are the same as FIG. That is, in this example, the chance button operation is not accepted all the time thereafter (operation invalid), but the notification area HZ continues to be displayed with a gray background until the combination of decorative symbols is displayed. In FIG. 306 (A24) in which the confirmation display is performed, the numeral “9” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In this example, the next symbol variation display may carry the number “9” as it is, or may newly display the number “10” or the number “5”.

  The example described above corresponds to an example of a subordinate concept of the representative diagram described with reference to FIG. Therefore, the representative diagram described with reference to FIG. 272 can be combined as long as there is no contradiction with other examples of lower concepts.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 having the maximum number of holdings of 8 shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 together, the number of times displayed in the notification area HZ starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and the symbol variation display May be displayed continuously, and incremented by one when a certain number (for example, five) of suspensions are accumulated, and thereafter incremented by one every time one suspension is accumulated.

  FIG. 307 is a diagram illustrating another aspect of how to display the notification area HZ.

  In this example, the notification area is at the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “not ready for color button” is displayed in the notification area HZ ′. FIG. 307 (a) shows that the search reach is in progress, and the development effect to the super reach has been executed up to (A6) in FIG. In FIG. 307 (A3), “Preparing the color button” is displayed in the notification area HZ ′ at the lower left of the screen, and then continuously displayed. In Fig. 307 (A7), the appearance of the swordsman who is the enemy of Tono-sama is displayed. From Fig. 307 (A8) to (A9), the role of the strong pattern in the introduction effect of the super reach production is displayed. An object action effect is performed, and the display of the notification area HZ ′ at the lower left of the screen is turned off.

  In FIG. 307 (A10), the swordsman reach that is the super reach 2 is started, and the display of the notification area HZ ′ is redisplayed in the lower left of the screen. In the swordsman reach, the button effect is started as shown in FIG. 307 (A11), the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 307 (A13), and in response to this button operation, in FIG. A cut-in image CIs of the pattern is displayed, and the family crest character 224E and the logo character 224F each emit light in the sixth mode. The display of the notification area HZ ′ at the lower left of the screen is overlapped by the strong pattern cut-in image CIs. However, as shown in FIG. 307 (A15), if the cut-in image CIs disappears, it becomes easy to see again. In FIG. 307 (A17) to FIG. 18 (A18), an introduction animation of a final judge effect accompanied by an operation is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The '' fades and fades away. At the same time as the display of the notification area HZ 'disappears, in FIG. 373 (A19), the chance button 136 advances upward from the initial position while emitting light in the fifth mode. Moreover, the advanced button image 136a '' etc. are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 303 (A17), the operation valid period is started, and the advanced chance button 136 is operated once. When the advanced chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 286 (A13) and thereafter. That is, after this, the big hit finalizing effect is executed, and this big hit finalizing effect corresponds to the notification area development effect. In addition, the display of “Preparing the clear button” displayed in the notification area HZ ′ at the lower left of the screen is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 as the clear button is invalid. The notification area HZ ′ disappears when it becomes valid (FIG. 307 (A18)), but the display of the numeral “1” may be displayed.

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing examples of various cut-in notices.

  In FIG. 308 (A2), the special symbol variation display is in progress and the non-reach state is displayed, but the button effect is started and the button image 136a and the like are displayed. In the notification area HZ, the numeral “10” is displayed. In FIG. 308 (A2), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (A3), the number of the notification area HZ decreases to “9” and the notification area HZ is displayed in a shaking manner. In addition, as an effect corresponding to the button operation in the button effect, a habit conversation image CI2 that is a conversation notice is displayed. In this conversation notice, the dialogue “The sign of Tono is ...” is displayed on the ground of the third aspect (blue), and it is foretold that it may be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display Is a weak notice. This conversation image CI2 is also a cut-in notice. In this example, the cut-in notice is performed before something is displayed in the notification area development effect.

  308 (B2) is different from the previous figure (A2) in that “SP”, which is a notice display, is displayed in the notification area HZ instead of a number. That is, “SP” is displayed as the notification area development effect, and in that state, the same conversation notice (cut-in notice) as that in FIG. 308 (B3) is performed. In this example, the cut-in notice is performed after “SP” is displayed in the notification area development effect.

  In FIG. 308 (C1), the special symbol variation display is in progress and the non-reach state. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (C1), a habit conversation image CI2 that is a cut-in notice is displayed. Here, the line “chansu” is displayed on the background of the third mode (blue), and it is foretold that it may be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display, but it is a weak notice. Here, the cut-in advance notice “Chansu” is the cut-in advance notice displayed on the ground of the same third mode (blue) with the dialogue “The sign of the lord ...” shown in FIG. 308 (A3). The expectation level for jackpots is similar. In this conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C2), the line “I can expect” is displayed on the ground of the fourth mode (green), and the expectation of jackpot is one step higher than the previous cut-in notice. It is rising. In the conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C3), the line “It's hot” is displayed on the ground of the fifth aspect (red), and the expectation of jackpot is increased by one step.

  In the conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C4), the line “continuation” is displayed on the background of the first aspect (white), indicating that the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is indicated, or the pseudo-continuous effect. It may be a notice of confirmation.

  In the conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C5), the line “I saw a swordsman” is displayed on the ground of the first aspect (white), and the start of the swordsman reach that is Super Reach 2 It may be suggested, or it may be a notice of the finalization of the swordsman reach.

  The various conversation images CI2 (cut-in notice images) have been described above with reference to FIGS. 308 (C1) to (C5). Each of these conversation images CI2 (cut-in notice images) is shown in FIG. B3) may be displayed after the timing is displayed, that is, after the notice display is displayed in the notification area HZ (after “SP” is displayed in the notification area development effect). By doing so, the player operates the chance button 136 in a state where numbers are displayed in the notification area HZ (FIG. 308 (B2)), thereby starting display of the pseudo-continuous effect and the super reach effect. Before the start, display of cut-in images such as “Continue” and cut-in images such as “I saw a swordsman” can be started.

  In FIG. 308 (D2), the number “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 308 (D2), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (D3), the notification area HZ is switched to the display of “large board behavior”, and the logo accessory 224F starts to emit light in the seventh mode, and the notification area development effect is performed. The notification area development effect here is a jackpot finalizing notice effect. In addition, in response to a chance button operation, a cut-in notice is also made that “the sign of the shrine is ...”, but it is a weak notice that the expectation of the big hit is low. In this example, the big hit confirmation notice (strong notification area development effect) and the weak cut-in notice overlap.

  In response to the chance button operation, a cut-in notice “I saw a swordsman” may be given. The cut-in notice that "I saw a swordsman" will be a notice that identifies the super-reach to be executed later, and further notices the type (super-reach 2). Instead of a cut-in notice that says “The sign of the shrine ...”, a cut-in notice that says “I saw a swordsman” is displayed, so that the number of notifications in the notification area HZ and operation promotion including the button image 136a are promoted. When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state in which both displays of the notification image are displayed, the light emission according to the seventh aspect of the logo accessory 224F is generated in response to the operation, and “I saw a swordsman. Both of the cut-in notice display "" have been started.

  In addition, in response to the chance button operation, a cut-in notice of “continuation” shown in FIG. 308 (C4) may be performed, and “continuation” may be displayed in the notification area HZ. That is, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where both the display of the number in the notification area HZ and the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a are displayed, the notification area There may be a case where both “continuation” display and “continuation” cut-in notice display in the HZ are started. In this example, the notice display in the notification area HZ and the cut-in notice are informed about the same thing (the same effect). Note that a cut-in notice of “SP” may be performed instead of a cut-in notice of “continuation”, or a cut-in notice of “Chance” may be performed.

  In FIG. 308 (E2), the number “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the button effect is started. The button effect here is a strong pattern effect in which the chance button 136 vibrates. In FIG. 308 (E2), the operation effective period is started, and the vibrating chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (E3), the notification area HZ is switched to the display of “Chance”, and the notification area development effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is performed. In addition, there is a cut-in notice with a high expectation of a big hit, “It's hot” in response to a chance button operation. In this example, the weak notification area development effect and the strong cut-in notice overlap.

  In FIG. 308 (F2), the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and it is a reach state. In addition, button production has started. In FIG. 308 (F2), the operation valid period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (F3), the notification area HZ disappears, and the “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b as an effect corresponding to the button operation in the button effect. doing.

  In FIG. 308 (G1), decorative symbols other than pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b. The temporarily stopped decorative design is a design that suggests the development of super reach. As described above, in FIG. 308 (F3), there are cases where decorative symbols other than pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In FIG. 308 (H1), a mini game (mini effect) is performed in the tutorial display section TT1. In this mini game, you may suggest the effect to be performed. In this example, because Tono-sama's arrow hits “continuation”, a pseudo-ream effect is suggested. Note that the mini game will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 326 and later, but the mini game described with reference to FIG. 326 and subsequent can be combined with the examples shown in FIGS. In addition, the number of effects (for example, 2), which are notified in advance in the notification area development effect, and the number of effects notified in the mini game may be the same. There may be a greater number of effects to be notified in the area development effect, or a greater number of effects to be notified in the mini game. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect may be notified in advance in the notification area development effect, or in the mini game. In addition, the super reach effect may be notified in advance in the notification area development effect or in the mini game.

  FIG. 309 is a diagram illustrating other various effects.

  In FIG. 309 (A1), decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 309 (A1), the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In addition, the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1. In this example, the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed so that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice or a mini game) may be performed in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (A2), the “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are each swaying fluctuation, and the middle symbol is variably displayed at high speed. Further, in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 309 (A1), the number “10” is switched to the character “SP” in the notification area HZ.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 309 (A3), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In FIG. 309 (A3), a timer notice effect is started. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. A certain notice display here is a super reach production. A pseudo-continuous effect may be used. In FIG. 309 (A3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. In this example, when the chance button 136 is operated by the player in FIG. 309 (A1), the notification area is displayed as shown in FIG. 3009 (A2) before the display of the timer notice display is started. Display of “SP” in HZ is started.

  The timer notice effect may be started at a timing between FIG. 309 (A2) and FIG.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B1), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In FIG. 309 (B1), “large board behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B1), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas is a hit area, and the reliability of the big hit is determined by hitting an arrow on the hit area. High notice is being made. Here, a state in which the arrow released by Tono-sama's mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B2), the letters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, a notice display corresponding to “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ is performed,
A notice display corresponding to the result of the mini-game is also performed. That is, it can be said that another notice display is performed according to the result of the notice display. Note that the notification area HZ in which “large board behavior” is displayed overlaps the iron plate image TP.

  Another example will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 309 (A 1) to FIG. 3 (A 3), in the search reach, the ninja mini character NJ that appeared in the change icon change animation appears again. Here, using the ninja mini character NJ, a change animation of the notice display in the notification area HZ is executed. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (A1), a “question mark” is displayed, but a ninja mini character NJ throws a shuriken toward the notification area HZ. The display of the “question mark” is hit, and the display of the “question mark” is wrapped in the effect image EFB and disappears for a moment. In the subsequent figure (A3), the effect image EFB disappears and the display of the notification area HZ changes to “SP”.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. The example shown in FIG. 309 (C1) to (C3) is also an example in which a ninja mini character NJ appears in the search reach. However, in this example, a timer advance notice is performed, and a timer display change animation of the timer advance notice is executed using the ninja mini character NJ. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display at the lower right of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (C1). The ninja mini character NJ throws a shuriken toward the timer display, hits the display of “10:00” in the figure (C2), and the display of “10:00” is wrapped in the effect image EFB. Although it disappears for a moment, the effect image EFB disappears and changes to “60:00” in the following (C3).

  In addition, although time changed here, the aspect showing the big hit expectation degree may change not time. For example, it may change from a blue timer to a gold timer. So far, the change animation of the variable icon, the change animation of the hold icon, the change animation of the notice display of the notification area HZ, and the change animation of the timer display of the timer notice have been described. It may be. For example, an animation with a common introduction part may be used. Furthermore, the change icon, the hold icon, the notice display of the notification area HZ, and the timer display of the timer notice may all be changed, or only some of them may be changed. It may be configured.

  Another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (D1), the princess zone, which is one of the prefetch modes (zones), is set. In this princess zone, there is no restriction on displaying numbers in the notification area HZ. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (D1), a number “10” is displayed, and the background is a white default mode, and the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted. On the other hand, in FIG. 309 (D2), the vehicle has entered the hall, and the background of the notification area HZ is displayed in gray. In a certain look-ahead mode (zone), when entering the look-ahead mode (zone), the expectation of jackpot is higher than that of the princess zone or the normal mode, and the expectation of development to super reach is higher, or super reach The development to become final. In such a pre-reading mode (zone), the button operation for changing the number in the notification area HZ is restricted and the operation becomes invalid. In this example, in the zone, the button operation is restricted and the operation becomes invalid. The gray background of the notification area HZ indicates that the operation is not accepted even when the chance button 136 is operated (operation invalid). In contrast to this example, the button operation that changes the numbers in the notification area HZ is restricted and the operation becomes invalid. Contrary to this example, the big hit expectation is lower than that of the Tono zone, and the development of super reach It may be a princess zone or a normal mode with low expectation.

  Further, the certain effect mode is an effect mode selected by the player on the menu screen shown in FIG. 304 (B1) or the like (for example, an effect mode selected by effect customization), or a normal game state (an uncertain change state, In the non-electric support state), the production mode is automatically set, the production mode is automatically set in the probability change state, the production mode is automatically set in the electric support state, It is an effect mode related to the player's setting operation in the gaming state (non-probability change state, non-electric support state), an effect mode related to the player's setting operation in the probability change state, or a player in the electric support state An effect mode related to the setting operation may be used. Moreover, the production mode may be started based on the result of the production lottery.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (E1), it is the Tono zone, the button operation is restricted, and the background of the notification area HZ on which the numeral “10” is displayed is gray. In addition, the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and it is informed that it is an extra chance. In the extra chance, the number in the notification area HZ may increase. For example, if the number in the notification area HZ is a first number (for example, 30) or more, reach determination may be performed, and if the number is a second number (for example, 80) that is larger than the first number, super reach determination may be performed. If the number is a specific number such as “77”, the jackpot may be confirmed.

  Another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (F1), a button image 136a (button mark) is displayed in the notification area HZ. When the button image 136a is displayed, the chance button 136 may advance upward from the initial position when performing an effect accompanied by a button operation.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (G1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In the subsequent drawing (G2), a second notification area HZ2 appears, and the number “30” is displayed in the second notification area HZ2. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot becomes higher when a plurality of notification areas are displayed. In FIG. 309 (G3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in response to the single operation, the number in the notification area HZ on the right side decreases to “9” in FIG. The number in the second notification area HZ2 is reduced to “29”.

  Note that the added notification area (here, the second notification area HZ2) may be more easily changed to “SP”, for example. Alternatively, in the added notification area, a notice display with the same contents may be displayed behind the notice area HZ that has been displayed earlier, or a notice display with different contents may be displayed.

  Another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (H1), three change icons h0 and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. The variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon 12 are all in the first mode, but the third hold icon h3 is not in any of the first mode to the seventh mode, and a certain character. (Here, a long-length character). This aspect of a certain character is also one aspect of the pre-reading notice, but is not an aspect of the pre-reading notice with a big hit. That is, the expectation degree of jackpot is an expectation degree higher than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, the 3rd holding | maintenance icon h3 may be a 4th aspect, for example, and a character is not limited to a length-length character. In addition, the display of numbers in the notification area HZ may be changed to a notice display in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or the chance button 136 may be operated in the currently performed symbol variation display. The corresponding number starts decreasing, but the change to the notice display may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h3.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (I1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the number “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and three variation icons h0 and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. Yes. As in the example shown in FIG. 309 (H1), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon 12 are all in the first mode, but the third hold icon h3 is in the first mode to the seventh mode. It is not an aspect of an aspect but an aspect of a certain character (here, a long-length character). Moreover, the mode of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 309 (I1) is a mode in which the chief character has the “preparing” placard. This “in preparation” indicates that a certain performance is in preparation, and may be “in preparation” that a notice display in the notification area HZ is started. “Preparing” to be started. Therefore, the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 309 (I1) also has a function indicating that the timer notice is being prepared and a function as a prefetch notice. It should be noted that from the start of display of the third hold icon h13 (at the start of the hold increase animation), it may be displayed in the form of a long-length character with a “preparing” placard, or at the start of display, the first form ~ Any aspect of the seventh aspect, or the aspect of the character of the number leader who does not have the "preparing" placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1), and then the "preparing" pla You may make it change into the mode of the number-length character with a card | curd. Alternatively, there may be a case where the character does not change to the mode of the number-long character having the “preparing” placard.

  Compared to the example shown in FIG. 309 (H1), the example includes an image of the same character, and only the image (I1) in FIG. It is only necessary that an image indicating that the timer notice is being prepared is included in only one of the same images. In addition, the variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 may be in the form of a chief character who does not have a “preparing” placard.

  Thereafter, the hold is digested, and in FIG. 309 (I3), the icon that was the third hold icon h13 in FIG. (I1) is displayed as the change icon h0. This variation icon h0 is also a mode of a character with a “long” character with a “preparing” placard. Nothing is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (I3).

  In FIG. 309 (I4), the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the mode of the number-length character that does not have the “preparing” placard. On the other hand, the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (I4). Note that an animation may be displayed in which the “preparing” placard that the character of the variation icon h0 has has moved to the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, when the icon that is the third hold icon h13 in FIG. 309 (I1) is displayed as the change icon h0, an animation in which the “preparing” placard moves to the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. Good.

  After the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, a timer notice effect is started. In FIG. 309 (I5), the display of the image being prepared RDY in the tutorial display section TT1 is finished, and the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Here, a timer display of 10:00 representing 10 seconds is displayed, and then the 10-second countdown starts. The notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (I5) is still displayed as a number, but changes to a notice display such as “SP” or “Continue” during the execution of the current symbol variation display. On the other hand, a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect may be started in response to the timer display in the timer notice effect becoming 00:00 representing 0 seconds. However, there may be cases where neither the super reach production nor the pseudo-continuous production starts. Here, the display of the notice display in the notification area HZ may be started before the timer display becomes 0 seconds, or the display of the notice display in the notification area HZ is started at the same time as the timer display becomes 0 seconds. Alternatively, the display of the notice display in the notification area HZ may be started after the timer display becomes 0 second. Further, the effect that is started when the timer display becomes 0 second and the effect that is notified in advance by the notification display in the notification area HZ may match or may not match. For example, after “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the super reach effect may be started or the pseudo-continuous effect may be started in response to the timer display becoming 0 second. In addition, even when the notification area HZ is a numerical display (for example, “10” with no chance button operation or “3” with a chance button operation), the timer display is 0 second. Depending on the situation, there may be a case where a super reach effect or a pseudo-ream effect is started.

  When the timer notice effect is started, an image indicating that the timer notice is being prepared (an image of “preparing”) moves from the change icon h0 to the tutorial display section TT1, and at the same time as or after the movement is completed. The timer notice effect may be started.

  Further, a plurality of types of images indicating that the timer notification is being prepared are prepared, and the timer notification mode or the timer notification time, or both the timer notification mode and time may be different depending on the type of image. Alternatively, or in addition, the timer notice mode or the timer notice time, or both the timer notice mode and time may differ depending on the type of character image displayed together with the image indicating that the timer notice is being prepared. It may be configured. Further, different roles may be given to the character type and the image type indicating that the timer notice is being prepared. For example, the type of character has a role representing the degree of expectation of jackpot (for example, the character of Tono is higher in expectation of jackpot than the captain), and the type of image indicating that the timer notice is being prepared includes a timer You may give the role showing the expectation degree by which a notice effect is actually started. The types of images indicating that the timer notice preparation is in progress include the images of the first aspect to the seventh aspect. In the image of the first aspect, the possibility that the timer notice effect is actually started is the lowest. In the above image, the timer notice effect may be started without fail.

  In addition, the image indicating that the timer notice preparation is in progress indicates that the timer notice effect is started 100% at some timing during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold indicated by the hold icon in the mode of the watch character. It may be a thing which shows, and it may show that there is a possibility that a timer notice effect may be started. Alternatively, even if the timer notice effect is not started, since the change icon is displayed in the form of a long-length character at the minimum, the currently displayed symbol change display can have a big hit expectation It is understood that it is a display.

  Further, in the above description, there is a case where a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect is started in response to the timer display in the timer notice effect being 0 seconds. When the display does not appear (the whole is not displayed), or there is a frame that defines the notification area HZ, but the display inside is not displayed, and the timer display is 0 seconds, the notification is made. It may be configured such that display of numbers in the area HZ is started.

The examples shown in FIGS. 309 (H1) and 309 (I1) to (I5) are summarized as follows. In the following, supplementary items are included.
“Production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L];
Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is produced when the timer display [for example, 10:00 timer display shown in FIG. 309] is started and the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, “or” (For example, a super-reach effect or a pseudo-ream effect) ”)
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a third hold icon in the form of a long-length character that does not have a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1). h13],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [e.g., a third hold icon h13 in the form of a long-length character having a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. 309 (I1). ],
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon does not include a display [for example, display of “preparing” placard] indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. And
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
The second hold icon may be a hold icon for displaying the certain character, and the third hold icon may be a hold icon for displaying the certain character.

  Further, the second hold icon and the third hold icon may be displayed at the same time or may be displayed separately.

Furthermore, the hold icon of the first mode (default mode) shown in FIGS. 272 to 309 may be replaced with the hold icon of the pre-read notice mode (for example, the second mode to the seventh mode). In addition, the variation icon of the normal notice mode (for example, the second mode to the seventh mode) shown in FIGS. 272 to 309 may be replaced with the variation icon of the first mode (default mode) in some cases.
“One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, the hold icon in the default display mode shown in FIG. 309 (I1), each hold icon h11, h12 shown in FIG. 272, etc.] And
The first hold icon is a default hold icon;
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also,
“The third hold icon indicates that at least one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is terminated [for example, display a placard indicating“ in preparation ”. Include] hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also,
“The second hold icon [e.g., the third hold icon h13 in the form of a number-length character that does not have the“ preparing ”placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1)] is displayed. When the third hold icon [for example, the third hold icon h13 in the form of a long-length character with a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. 309 (I1)] is displayed, the certain effect is displayed. Easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also,
“The second hold icon [e.g., the third hold icon h13 in the form of a number-length character that does not have the“ preparing ”placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1)] is displayed. When the third hold icon [for example, the third hold icon h13 in the form of a long-length character having a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. 309 (I1)] is displayed, the timer effect is displayed. Easy to implement,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
The third hold icon may be a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain effect. For example, a hold icon in the form of a swordsman character having a “preparing” placard is a hold icon that suggests a swordsman reach.

  Moreover, you may be comprised so that the alerting | reporting regarding the said certain effect performed by the said timer effect is executable. For example, when a pseudo continuous effect is performed as the certain effect, a display of “pseudo continuous effect completion” may be displayed after the pseudo continuous effect is finished.

  The third hold icon may be a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest a time displayed when the display of the timer display is started. For example, if the hold icon is in the form of a long-length character having a placard of “preparing 10 seconds”, the hold icon suggests that a timer display indicating 10 seconds is displayed.

  Also, a plurality of timer effects (hereinafter referred to as “multiple timer effects”) may be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and one of the plurality of timer effects is One timer effect, one of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect, and the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”). And the time displayed when the display of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display”) in the second timer effect is started. When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect may be performed as the certain effect, and the second timer display is at the certain time. When it becomes Effect is sometimes performed, wherein the first directing second effect is different effect, amusement machine, characterized in that. It may be.

  The examples described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 309 described above are examples of effects performed by one pachinko machine 100. Moreover, the example demonstrated using FIGS. 272-309 is an effect example which can be performed also with the pachinko machine 100 demonstrated before FIG. Further, the example described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 309 is an example of an effect that can also be executed by the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIG. 310 and the subsequent drawings, and is also executed with the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. This is an example of possible production. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described in this specification is provided with at least an effect button (effect operation means) such as a chance button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol. Display area HZ is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device such as a display device 208N, and the display means such as the display means, further effect movable means, and light emitting means such as a speaker 120 and various lamps. The notification area development effect may be executed including other other effect means.

  FIG. 310 is a diagram illustrating an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  As shown in FIG. 310 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 310 (a), “Panda is a Tono-sama teacher” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the Tono-sama character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may not be displayed. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the character that appears, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree may be notified according to a display mode of the tutorial display (for example, displayed in blue or displayed in red). In this case, this tutorial display may be a notice display of a position in the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display is described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display part TT1 in this effect example is an area for displaying something. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display region, the variable icon display region, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 310 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 310 (a), the “remaining 0 times” character string image reception count display 850 is displayed, and the performance button 136 operation reception count is zero. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 310A, all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. This Tono-sama character may be called a navigation character. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of Tono-sama may be configured to be displayed in the UI part UI3, or at least partially overlapped with the front part of the UI part UI3.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 310 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. In other words, a display (shutter image display) before another display (display of “in preparation”) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (c), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a pre-preparation image preview display that is displayed before the display of the pre-preparation image RDY, which will be described later, is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes so that the big hit expectation varies depending on the display mode of the shutter image. The display mode of the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured not to show the big hit expectation degree only.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (d) shows a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preparing image RDY on which characters “preparing” are displayed. In other words, the image RDY in preparation is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1, and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (d), the background color of the image being prepared RDY is green, that is, the display form of the image being prepared RDY shown in FIG. 310 (d) is the default display form. . Note that the image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) at the start of the display of the image RDY being prepared It may be possible to change to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. In the case where the shutter image described above can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image being prepared RDY. For example, when the shutter image is red, a red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). This effect example is configured such that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice, a mini game, or the like) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (e), the UI unit UI3 is shown changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon is easily changed by setting the display mode of the UI unit UI3 to the golden display mode. That is, the UI part UI3 in the golden display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. Note that the UI part UI3 in the gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, or function as a direct pre-read notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. There may be cases. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be in a default mode before the hold icon (pre-read target hold icon) whose display mode has changed is digested, or whether or not the pre-read target change has been determined. It may be configured so as to be in a default mode after a display (for example, display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right part of the tutorial display section TT1. This ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (g), the hold change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11. A state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, and is in a state of difficulty in visual recognition as compared with a state where the effect EF4 is not covered. The effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 310 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change prior effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from when the display of the hold icon is changed after the display of the ninja character NJ4 is started. May be used as a pending change prior effect display. Moreover, it is good also as a pending | holding change prior effect display only with the display of ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change prior effect display. Note that there may be a case where the display mode of the hold icon does not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Moreover, the structure by which the display of the image RDY in preparation is started after the effect display regarding Ninja character NJ4 may be sufficient. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Moreover, it may be configured such that the image RDY being prepared is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the pre-read mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon has changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the image RDY being prepared. It may function as a prior notification of a different object, such as an icon change and a ready image RDY, or a subject change different from the pre-reading notice and the notice.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (h) shows a state where the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 310 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the crest character 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the crest character 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 310 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the on-hold change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. Opportunities are easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read display mode, but the chances are displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, it may be configured such that when the chance eyes are displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be performed sequentially, or after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be erased. Further, the decorative symbols may be sequentially stopped and displayed at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Note that the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (i), but the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 310 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (j), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (k) shows a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are respectively swaying fluctuations, and the middle symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, until the super reach is started, the UI unit UI3 is basically It is not hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 310 (l) shows a transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that the operation of the crest character 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the crest character 224E is started. The operation of the family crest character 224E may be started at the timing when the reach shift display is started. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this effect example, when shifting to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. Moreover, the structure which displays the reach name (title) of SP reach may be sufficient, and you may comprise so that UI part UI3 may be non-displayed in the state in which the reach name of SP reach is displayed at least. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image being prepared RDY, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI part UI3 after the super reach transition is different depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain aspect of the effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even when the swordsman reach is reached.

  FIG. 310 (m) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the image RDY in preparation, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same position. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the crestman 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the swordsman reach, the swordsman reach may start after the crestman 224E returns to the initial position, or the crestman 224E. The swordsman reach may be started at the timing when returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this effect example, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed (hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (o) shows a state in which a mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display of the image being prepared RDY is ended and the mini game is started. However, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed without the mini game or the timer notice effect. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is configured by an area divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the production example shown in FIG. 310 (o)) is the winning area. The hit area is hit with an arrow, and a reliable announcement of the jackpot is made. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area. In a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini games and timer notices, a certain type of mini game and timer notice may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (p), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown. In addition, you may comprise so that the display which shows the result of a mini game may be displayed by the cut different from the cut shown in FIG.310 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display part of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes zero. In addition, when a timer notice effect is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the start of another notice immediately before it reaches 0).

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of a plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may be omitted. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 311 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 310 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the exemplification is illustrated as a continuation of the example of FIG. 310, but may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the example of FIG. 310. Also good. The same applies to the following drawings. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 311 (a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (o), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a4), it is shown that the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini-game as the notice display has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the iron plate image TP, and shows that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between failure or success of the mini game is made, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, a false timer notice effect that displays nothing even when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be displayed. When the countdown is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, a character “chance” is displayed somewhere small) may be performed.

  FIG. 311 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 310 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (o), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b4), the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 hits the target TGT, but shows a state where it is stuck in the non-contact area. In other words, this production example shows that the mini-game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, if you compare the success of the mini game or the great success, it will be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when it is a great success than when it is a success. .

  FIG. 311 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 310 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 311 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (n), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c3), a mini-game different from the mini-game shown in FIG. 310 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is also an example of a notice display that starts after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is more likely to be successful than the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o). The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. In addition, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol on which the characters “iron plate” are displayed is derived, and a state in which the mini-game is very successful is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and a state in which a notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed is shown.

  310, the mini-game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 310, but the timer notice effect may be performed in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 or vice versa. . In addition, both timer notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

  FIG. 312 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the preliminary notice effect that is applicable to this embodiment.

  FIG. 312 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 310 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 312 (a1), the change icon h0 is displayed in red, and accordingly, the family crest character 224E is also set in red.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. This effect example shows a state in which the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a3), a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  As described above, in this production example, the example in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY in preparation is shown, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be configured to be executed even during the super reach. In addition, after the third display is finished in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. Also good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display is finished in the first state may extend over the next change. And after a 3rd display is complete | finished in a 2nd state, a certain notice display (especially a certain production | presentation) may start at least in this 2nd state, and may be complete | finished.

  FIG. 312 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 310 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (n), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b3), a state in which a timer notice effect is started instead of a mini game is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 312 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. Note that the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after “0:00” indicating 0 second is obtained as a result of the countdown. , The iron plate image TP) is performed, but after “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, another effect display (for example, “iron plate” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed). Display in a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as “chance”. You may comprise so that effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Further, the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but displays up to “1” indicating 1 second, or , “00:01” may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as “iron plate” can be specified in the display area where the timer display has been performed, or “chance” is displayed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until “1” is displayed, until just before another effect display is displayed, or until another effect display is displayed. ). The time from when “1” is displayed until the display of another effect display is started is the same (substantially the same) as the time from when “2” is displayed until the display of “1” is started. (That is, it is displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”) or may be different. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating “NEXT” or “continuation” may be displayed as another effect display. In addition, a timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, but after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, another display is displayed. (For example, a display indicating that the timer display is counted up from 0 or a display related to the timer display such as “until the next chance increases, after”) is displayed. You may comprise so that another display may not be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect is a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In each effect example shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 312 (c1) to FIG. 3 (c3) are effects following FIG. 312 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (c1), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 312 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in a region different from the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed is shown by the display by numbers in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numbers. Note that only a decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is first performed, and for example, when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds, a countdown by a timer display may be started. In this case, the decrease rate of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. In addition, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided, each of which may be displayed in a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decrease rate of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decrease rate of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the decreasing speeds thereof are different.

  Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed. For example, when the effect is extended, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer notice time. Moreover, the decreasing speed of the meter may not be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long. For example, the rate of decrease may be increased from the middle, so that it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Moreover, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant. For example, the rate of decrease may be faster or slower in a state where numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 313 is a diagram illustrating an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 313 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 310 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 313 (a2) to (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a4) performs the combined animation and displays A pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as button production introduction animation or fade-in animation (IN animation). This semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started by being combined. Here, the introduction animation may be included in the button notice effect. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button images 136q are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which the four translucent button images 136q are combined may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are displayed. The button image 136a is instantiated and the button notice effect is more easily started when the effect that the four translucent button images 136q are combined is performed than when the effect that the image 136q is combined is performed. It may be. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation. In addition, when a deca button image 136aL, which will be described later, is displayed and a button notice effect is started, a united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by a translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalesced animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are shown closer together.

  When the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 313 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a character “press” is displayed together with an animation indicating that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is further left below. A time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button notice effect may be started after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation reception period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button notice effect is started.

  FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6) show a modification of the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b5). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b3), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 313 (b4) shows a state in which the above-described coalescence animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced. In addition, even if the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the timer display may be counted down in accordance with the start of the combined animation. According to this, there is a case where the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed can be easily specified. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the display of the image being prepared RDY may be terminated and the timer notice effect may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (b5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be “0:00” after the merge animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the merge animation is completed.

  FIG. 313 (b6) shows a state in which the united animation has succeeded, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed when both the timer notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer notice effect and the united animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 313 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (b3) to (b6). The effects shown in FIGS. 313 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 313 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  When the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 313 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 313 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 313 (b6), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 313 is also shown for an example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and the timer notice starts while the introductory animation is displayed.

  FIG. 314 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 314 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a). In this preparing image RDY, the background color is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 314 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 314 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a red light emission mode is set in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY in preparation is started. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation other than the super reach is finished.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (c), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the region in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 314 (c), “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. The background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, a state in which the timer notice production is started before the super reach is developed is shown. The timer display that is displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of “90:00”, and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, so that the expectation for the big hit may be improved. Thus, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as “90:00”, the time is relatively short such as “10:00”. It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed with (short time). In this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to be started in a long time in the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 314 (d) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. For this reason, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest member 224E is overlapped. Also, the family crest character 224E overlaps with a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (d), the timer display is “30:00”.

  FIG. 314 (e) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be the same when the timer notice display is the default background color and when it is the red background color.

  FIG. 314 (g) shows a state in which the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed and the operation acceptance state is started. Yes. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it is to win.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 315 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1). This preparing image RDY has a green background and is in a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is made up of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the winning region. High notice is being made. In this production example, a state in which a mini game is being performed before the transition to super reach is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a4), a state where an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a5), since the mini-game is very successful, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the change icon h0. The notice by is ranked up. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Note that the crest character 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the family crest character 224E emits red light. The change icon h0 may change from a red display mode to a gold display mode after changing to a mode or a gold light emission mode, or the timing at which the change icon h0 changes from a red display mode to a gold display mode Thus, the family crest member 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation using the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to a state where it cannot be visually recognized using the shutter image. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game. However, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a6), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a7), the shutter display is shown open in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini-game may be started. Alternatively, a grayed-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 315 (b1) to (b8), an example will be described in which a mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b1), since one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is in a red display mode and is displayed as a notice. The hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord of the character is described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 315 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b2), a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of a mini-game to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game starts is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game starts without displaying the image RDY in preparation. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 315 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 315 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 315 (a3) to (a7), and a description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game is over, explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or grayed out display may be performed.

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing stepwise display examples in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 316 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 316 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. That is, it can be said that display (shutter image display) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain region (tutorial display section TT1). . Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display that is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display made up of the characters “Intense heat” is displayed instead of the image RDY being prepared, the mini game, and the timer notice effect. The notice display of “Intense heat” may be displayed as a result of a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, if the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed as a result, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed. Good. In addition, the notice display of “extreme heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform an effect of closing the tutorial display portion TT1 with a shutter image before performing a notice display such as “Intense heat”.

  FIG. 316 (b1) to FIG. 316 (b8) show an effect example showing the appearance of the notice icon in the tutorial display section TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 316 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 316 (a1) to (a3), description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 shows a state in which a timer notice notice icon I81 appears to notify that the timer notice effect is performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is foretold that the timer notice effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b5), the timer notice notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 jumps out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b6), the closing operation based on the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b7), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the state in which the timer notice notice icon I81 is displayed is informed that the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. The image may be deleted when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b8), the state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a ready image RDY when the shutter image is released. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (b8), the image RDY in preparation is in a default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed when the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer notice effect is notified by displaying the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display mode of the image being prepared RDY for notifying the start of the timer preview effect is the same as the display mode of the image RDY being prepared for notifying the start of the mini game. It may be. In addition, a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started without displaying the in-preparation image RDY.

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timing of a certain notice display, and the start and end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

  FIG. 317 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 310 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 310 (m), description thereof is omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 317 (a1), display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has been developed to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 317 (a3), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman. A combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is still displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is being made. In order to congratulate that it is a big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display manner that emits light in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a4), the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 317 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the timer notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 317 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed, and a notice effect is started. Yes. The display of the character “Go” may or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a8), a state where the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 317 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot symbol promotion effect may not be started, and when the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer notice effect. Further, even when the timer notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (a9), the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” from the combination of the big wins of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” It is notified that the probabilistic big hit has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIG. 317 (b1) to FIG. 317 (b4) show a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started while the duel scene animation is continued in the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b1), a state in which the duel scene animation continues is shown. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b1), “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Note that the time when the countdown is started may be before the development of super reach, after the development of super reach, or at the timing of development of super reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b2), a button notice effect is started, and a state in which a button image 136a in a default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. . That is, a state in which the final judge effect is started is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b2), the timer display indicates “9:00”. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is performed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is shown. Here, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b3), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b4). The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continued, that is, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may be performed after that. In this effect example, the timer display is not set to “0:00” even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Conversely, the count may be zero when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect.

  FIG. 318 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 318 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 316 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (b), the state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY in preparation is shown. In the preparation example image RDY in this effect example, only one type of display mode is prepared, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . In this effect example, one of the background colors in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 318 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In addition, before or after the timer display countdown starts, an effect may be performed in which the background color of the timer notice display changes and the reliability is improved in the middle.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (d), the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. It should be noted that the reach state may be reached after the timer display becomes “0:00”, the timer display may become “0:00” after the reach state is reached, or the timer display is “ The reach state may be reached at the time of “0:00”. In this production example, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a corresponding relationship with the display indicating that the timer display is developed to super reach, and the display always develops to super reach.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (e) displays the character “Go” instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and displays a certain notice display. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display section TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display portion TT1 is in a non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there is a case where the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation valid period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 318 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 318 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (k) shows a state in which the princess cut-in image HCI is displayed. This princess's cut-in image HCI is displayed suddenly without going through the button notice effect, timer notice effect, or mini-game, and has low reliability, but the button notice effect or timer notice effect or You may make it display as a result of having played the mini game. Further, instead of the princess cut-in image HCI, for example, an iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 319 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 319 (a) to (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 318 (a) to (c), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 319 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which a Tono-sama character as a navigation character throws a bomb is performed. Specifically, the character of Tono-sama displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming “not yet”, and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol display. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb heads to the tutorial display portion TT1 where the timer display is being counted down, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (e), the state in which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY in preparation is displayed again is shown. At the time when the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is “10:00”, and the timing at which the button notice effect is started is notified, but when the timer notice effect is interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is performed than when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is not performed. When an effect that interrupts the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time until the timer counts up by extending the timer display time instead of displaying the image RDY in preparation may be extended. Good or the countdown speed may be slow. In addition, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future is determined by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (f), the state where the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation valid period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 319 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden.

  FIG. 319 (j) shows that the swordsman reach has been started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (k), a state in which the timer notice display is switched from the image RDY in preparation to the timer notice display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the restart is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 319 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start timing of the timer notice effect is set to an appropriate timing. For example, before the start of super reach, after the start of super reach, before reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the super reach starts. May also be started at the previous timing. In addition, the timer display when the timer notice effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and may be started from “9:00” indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 318, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not developed to super reach, but the cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good location in super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher as the end timing of the image RDY in preparation (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain fluctuation.

  FIG. 320 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 320 (a) is the same as that shown in FIG. 318 (a), description thereof is omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (b) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the ready image RDY. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image being prepared RDY, or may be displayed after the image being prepared RDY is displayed. You may make it produce that it is performed twice, thinking that it will be performed once. Instead of displaying “TIMER × 2”, for example, two images RDY in preparation may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the default display mode in which the background color of the timer notice display is green may be used. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (d) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been consumed and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER × 2” may be left without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed may be provided.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative design. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock for the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing. At this time, the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started. However, when the ready image RDY is displayed again, the first ready image RDY is displayed. It is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the decorative design may be overlapped by the preparing image RDY. In this way, there is a case where the image RDY being prepared is temporarily hidden and further overlapped, thereby causing more attention.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. Display is made and it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the family crest member 224E overlaps with a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to see than a state where it is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E. Note that the image RDY in preparation may be overlapped with the family crest actor 224E only when it is enlarged and not overlapped when it is not enlarged. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 320 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the preparation-in-progress image RDY that is enlarged may be displayed even during execution of super reach. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (k) shows a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display and the second timer preview effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 320 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “3:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed three seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer preview display is set to be the same as the size of the preparatory image RDY that is displayed in an enlarged manner. The symbols are easy to confirm. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Moreover, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed enlarged. Also, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer for the second timer notice effect than for the first timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, there may be a case where it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by informing in advance that the timer notice effect will be performed twice.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY is digested, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variation display. Shown to be digested.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 321 (a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 317 (a1) to (a2), description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a3), a state in which a long press effect display by a long press effect display is started is shown. In the long press effect display, an area where the Tono-sama character is drawn is arranged above, and an area where the swordsman character is drawn below is arranged. According to the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136 , The size of both areas is displayed so as to change relatively. The ready image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 321 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display coincide. Note that they do not have to match completely. The timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 321 (a5) shows a state in which a long press operation of the effect button 136 by the player is performed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is “4:00”.

  FIG. 321 (a6) shows a state in which the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is reduced accordingly, This character is shown to be dominant. This has been suggested to tend to produce advantageous results. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a7), the timer display is “0:00”, the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Also, in the effect display for long press, the area where the Tono-sama character arranged above is further expanded, and the area where the swordsman character arranged below is further reduced, It has been shown that Tonosama's character is by far the dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or “Go” may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character “is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a8), the character “Blow” is displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is started, and the operation is effective. It shows how the period has been set again. That is, this button notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the set operation valid period may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously after the operation valid period in the long press effect. May be.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a9), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a10). The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light-emitting manner so as to congratulate them on the big hit.

  Thus, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the preparation display and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Thus, “0:00” is shown, and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

  FIGS. 321 (b1) to (b5) show a state in which a long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but a timer notice effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed. A state in which a long press operation is performed is shown. In this example, the timer notice effect is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 321 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, the Tono-like character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged, indicating that Tono-sama's character is inferior (adversary character swordsman character dominance) . This suggests that it is difficult to achieve advantageous results.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b3), the characters “Blow” are displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, thereby providing a button notice effect. It is shown that the operation valid period has been set again. As described above, when the timer notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL is not easily displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b5), the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, “decoration 4- The combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration “decoration 5—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. Note that the flow may be a case where it does not go through the mini game or the timer notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 322 is a diagram showing an example of button striking effects that can be applied to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 322 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of “Turn the meter in time by button striking” is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the letters “preparation”, and an operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (a), before the start of receiving the continuous operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is a display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button striking effect). When the button repeated striking effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been subjected to the variable display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 322 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 322 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (b), a state in which the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started is shown. Specifically, the character “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is changed to the character “start”, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, so that the operation effective period is started. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can also be said that the button repeated effect (the main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed as the time elapses from the operation effective period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (c), “5” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. When the countdown in the countdown display is completed, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 322 (d) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (d), “4” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there are four more seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 322 (e), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is one in red according to the number of repeated striking operations. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (e), “3” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there are three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 322 (f) shows that the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 322 (g) shows a state in which the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, the operation valid period ends, and the player has repeatedly performed the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red three, that is, it is indicated that the button striking effect has failed. The effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, but the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation effective period ends, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button repeated striking effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (h) displays “Sorry ...” to notify that the button striking effect has failed. In this example, in a pachinko machine that can execute a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 323 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 323 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the first image RDY1 being displayed is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 323 (a). The function of the first image RDY being prepared is the same as that of the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 323 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In this example, the second image RDY is displayed above the first image RDY1, and a plurality of images are displayed at the same time. The first preparation image RDY1 and the second preparation image RDY2 are each provided with a corresponding effect (such as a timer notice effect or a mini game). These images in preparation (the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2) function as pre-reading notices. In addition, any of the images being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed after the other image is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 323 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 323 (b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 323 (a) is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. Note that the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these images being prepared are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the state where the timer notice effect is started is shown. ing. Note that the background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display is “5:00”, and it is reported that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this effect example, when one of a plurality of images in preparation is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all other images in preparation are digested. Note that the images in preparation are all digested in one symbol variation display, but the notice icon may be carried over until the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 323 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 323 (e), the characters “Go” are displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, and the second image RDY2 being slid down and moved to the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. Image moving animation is being made in preparation. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 310 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In addition, in this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may start after the preceding start notice effect starts, or the advance start notice effect may start after the image moving animation in preparation starts, The image moving animation in preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice effect starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 323 (f) overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared, but may be overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. Has been. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the state is difficult to visually recognize compared to the state where the effect EF4 is not covered.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display form to a red display form, and the change notice is started.

  FIG. 323 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and then the state shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the second image RDY2 in preparation. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  FIG. 323 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is continuously maintained. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (k), the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer warning display, and the timer warning effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 323 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. Note that the timer notice display is a default display mode at the start of display, and there is a case where a promotion display such as a change to a golden background color is performed after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). Also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer preview display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a certain notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 324 is a diagram showing an example of effects by explanation display applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 324 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 310 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Tono-sama's master” to “Tosama is Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the above-described opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variation display, when the explanation display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed.

  FIGS. 324 (b1) to (b3) show a state in which opening / closing display by a shutter image is performed when the explanation display is switched. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 324 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (a) to (b), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display portion TT1 based on the shutter image is completely closed, and an explanation display of “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. The state of being done is shown. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preview display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Although it was expected that the notice display would be started by such an effect, the display of the shutter image could be opened and closed by disappointing the player because the explanation display was made without the notice display being started. You may be able to have expectations.

  FIG. 325 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 325 (a1) to (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 310 (e). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 325 (a1) to (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (g), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 325 (a3), the effect EF4 is deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the default display mode. . Thus, even if the pending change animation described above with reference to FIG. 310 is performed, a failure effect that does not change the display mode may be performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the pending change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the pending icon changes varies depending on the characters appearing in the pending change animation.

  In the above-described pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the UI part UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI part UI3. The portion UI3 may not overlap. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

  FIG. 326 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 326 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 326 (a1), “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed, and the character of the panda And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 326 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 326 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a2), a state in which a roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal sections. A cocoon region is arranged above the three sections, a princess region is arranged at the lower left, and a little princess region is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, each region is displayed in a flashing manner by blinking in red, and a notice display corresponding to the region that is finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation-in-progress display or the like ends may be the same or different. In a configuration in which a display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed may be the same as the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, a state in which all areas are lit in red is shown. That is, it is informed that a notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, a notice display corresponding to the princess character, and a notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparatory image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a5), the princess Chibi character CHM moves upward and overlaps with the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. Thereby, it is informed that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Chibi princess starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a6), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH is a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a7), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a8), display is started in a manner in which the frog character GII vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a9), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the spear character GII is displayed. Has been. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol with the letters “Intense heat” is derived, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit. Yes. In other words, the change notice is made by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that makes a big hit announcement.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a11), display is started in such a manner that the princess character HME vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3, the display of the UI part UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a12), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed in the area where the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. When the result of the countdown is “0:00”, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 326 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a13), as a result of the countdown being performed, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that an effect similar to the display of “Go” shown in FIG. 323 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a14), a super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach. However, at least one image may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, an iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 326 (b1) shows a state in which only the eyelid region of the three regions is lit in red in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 326 (a2). In other words, only the notice display corresponding to the frog character is prepared among the notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character. Informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the heel is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only a mini game by the drum DRM is performed.

  FIG. 327 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 327 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 326 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and below the third preparing image RDY3, two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed. Note that when a plurality of effects by the samurai character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed on one image being prepared. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess characters HME. Conversely, a single character may be used to display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 moves upward and appears in the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. The overlapping state is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the princess Chibi character CHM1 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a4), a state is shown in which an animation in which the little girl character CHM1 casts an object toward the variation icon h0 is performed. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display is started due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of the little princess.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a5), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display apparatus 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It shows how it overlaps with the part. Thereby, it is informed that the second notice display corresponding to Princess Chibi character CHM2 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a7), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the Princess Chibi character CHM2 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variation icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a8), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display form of the gold notice, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIGS. 327 (b1) to (b4) show another example of effects following FIG. 327 (a3). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 327 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 327 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (b2), after the object cast by the Princess Chibi character CHM1 reaches the variation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the dark display BL in which the entire display screen is darkened is displayed. The portion where the effect EF7 was displayed shines in white, and the display in such a manner that the light extends horizontally from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some images in preparation are temporarily hidden. You may make it do. As described above, the state where the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. In this production example, the first state where the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state where the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are referred to as the first state. From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after becoming the first state again, may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (b3), the state in which the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is completed, as shown in FIG. 327 (b4), the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 327 (b4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 327 (a5), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 327 (c1) to (c3) show another effect example following FIG. 326 (a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 327 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 326 (a7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (c2), display in a manner in which the character GII of the heel vibrates is started, and “Go” is displayed in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. A character is displayed to notify that a mini game is started. It should be noted that the display of “Go” may start after the heel character GII starts vibrating, or the heel character GII may start vibrating after the display of “Go” starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the samurai character GII starts to vibrate. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (c3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the region where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect due to the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after “Go” is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without displaying “Go”. . Further, it may be more likely that the mini game will be a big hit than the case where the mini game is enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same region, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There may be an effect.

  FIG. 328 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on the right effect display may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (a), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), an image RDY in preparation is displayed. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 328 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into left and right parts, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, “Chibi princess is in SP reach with annihilation” is displayed, and Chibi princess Musou directing is performed with the mission of annihilating a large number of children. In the display area CUR, “Tono is going to SP reach with victory” is displayed, and the drinking comparison is performed between the niece and Tono-sama and the mission is that Ton-sama wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, it is configured to shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. Has been. In addition, after the Chibi Hime Musou production is started, the drinking comparison production may be started, after the Drinking Comparison production is started, the Chibi Hime Musou production may be started, or both productions start simultaneously May be. Further, in this production example, when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, it may be a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (c), a state in which a mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibi princess Musou effect and the drink comparison effect is shown. Yes. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (d), a state in which an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI on which the characters “chance” are displayed in the left-hand notice display area CUL in which the Chibi princess Musou effect is performed is displayed. Thus, it is notified that the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed has been easily achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area in which the notice display is performed do not coincide with each other. . The chance up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance is increased in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. A cut-in image WUI may be displayed. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed when the mini game is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (f), the state is shown in which the child is completely annihilated and the mission is achieved in the Chibi Hime Musou effect displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (g), the character “completely annihilated” is displayed together with the display of Chibi Hime in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou effect has been achieved. Is informed. In the right notice display area CUR, the drinking comparison effect continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (h), a state is shown in which the mission has been achieved because Tono-sama won the bowl in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (i), the word “Victory” is displayed together with the display of Tono-sama in the right-hand notice display area CUR to notify that the mission of the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (j), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, so Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of Tonama. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it shifts to Swordsman Reach, but Princess Chibi does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If you fail to complete the mission, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be developed afterwards differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed is displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. As a result, although the reliability of the jackpot is improved, it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not a notice display started via a mini-game or timer notice effect that was started from the image RDY being prepared. ing.

  FIG. 329 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 329 (a) to (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 328 (a) to (b), description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (c), a state is shown in which both effects of the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect are performed. In this effect example, the display of the image RDY in preparation is continued, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 329 (c) to FIG. In FIG. 329 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 329 (f) to (j) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 329 (f) to (j) show that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effects shown in FIGS. 328 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except for it, explanation is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (k), the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is terminated, and a notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that it will start.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (l), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (m), a state in which an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (n), the iron plate image TP is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

  FIG. 330 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 330 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 326 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a2), a “reach when caught” display is performed, and a state in which a chase effect is started in which Tono-sama catches Echigoya is started. Yes. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a3), the state that Tono-sama is narrowing the distance from Echigoya is shown. On the other hand, in the sub-window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a4), Tono-sama captured Echigoya and the mission was achieved. Thereby, it will be notified that it will reach. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that the reach is being prepared. Thereby, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a5), the chasing effect is finished, the main display displayed in the sub-window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the “decoration 4” is reached. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is indicated that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase production. In addition, when displaying the main display in full screen, it may be performed by enlarging the subwindow WP3 (wipe display), or may be switched and displayed. Further, when the main display becomes a full screen display, the image RDY in preparation may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  330 (b1) to FIG. 330 (b2) show another example of effects related to the display of the subwindow during the execution of the chasing effects shown in FIGS. 330 (a1) to (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the first image RDY1 being displayed is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 330 (b1). Further, the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 330 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, there are cases where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

  FIGS. 330 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 330 (b1) to (b2). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 330 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 330 (b1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (c2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, among the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first image RDY1 displayed at the position where it has been displayed is deleted.

  FIG. 330 (d1) to FIG. 330 (d2) show the display mode of the image under preparation when the background display is displayed with an inclination. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 328 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise. The situation is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display.

  FIG. 331 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 331 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 326 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is lifted to display the UI unit UI3. Yes. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and a character “A” indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a3), the mini game is displayed in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, “Striking” is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display indicating that the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is performed. In other words, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a4), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and goes toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIGS. 331 (b1) to (b8) describe another example of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 331 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 331 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and raises the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. In this way, the display is shown. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter “B” indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this production example, it is easier for the mission to succeed when the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, when the mini game succeeds in the second step-up display unit SUB, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed, rather than in the case where the mini game succeeds in the first step-up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b4), the mini game is displayed in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, the message “Cup in” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of Tono is putting is performed. In other words, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a pad.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b5), a state where the Tono-sama character puts and the golf ball moves toward the cup is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b6), the golf ball is cupped in and the state where the mission is achieved is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b7), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . It is reported that the image RDY in preparation has a red background color and high reliability of the big hit.

  When the bowling chance game is finished, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, the example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins have not collapsed is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a mission failure may be notified by displaying a state in which the player has not cuped in. Also, in this production example, the Tono-sama character appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when a princess character appears, the Tono-sama character appeared. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

  FIG. 332 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 332 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 331 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain item in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is erased, The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA starts to be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (a3) to (a5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (a3) to (a5) are not shown on the tutorial display section TT1 and the effects shown in FIGS. 331 (a3) to (a5). The description is omitted because it is the same except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a6), it is continuously shown that the mission has been achieved.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. Note that the explanation display and the change icon h0 remain hidden.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a8), a state is shown in which the variation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. Note that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be routed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

  FIGS. 332 (b1) to (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 332 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 332 (a1), but differs in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (b2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is lifted to display the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed in spite of the hold icon h11 moving upward in the UI part UI3. Therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display part SUA. The situation is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

  FIG. 332 (b3) The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “Make Strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 333 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. A tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 333 (a). Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 333 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Moreover, in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown to Fig.333 (a), a mode that it transfers to a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 333 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 333 (b) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 frames out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 333 (d) to (f), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 is not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 333 (f).

  FIG. 333 (g) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (i) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (j), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (l), it is notified that the image RDY being prepared appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is done. Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode. FIG. 333 (l) shows a state in which the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and goes out of the frame. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 333 (m), at least one image is displayed until the frame out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

  FIG. 334 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 334 (a1), the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 334 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Moreover, in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown to FIG. 334 (a1), a mode that it transfers to a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 334 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 334 (a2) shows a state in which the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a3), a state in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is out of the display screen is started is shown. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 334 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variation icon h0 and the first preparing image RDY1 do not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state of the variation icon h0 is lowered with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 334 (a6). The first display image RDY1 is maintained, and the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  In FIG. 334 (a7), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. Note that the first image RDY1 in preparation may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be lifted, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a9), a state is shown in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first image RDY1 being prepared, and is more difficult to see than when not overlapped. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a10), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all of the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of images in preparation are displayed in a certain area and a new image in preparation is displayed, the new image in preparation is displayed in another area. Can do. Note that the third preparatory image RDY3 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Also, as shown in FIGS. 334 (a12) to (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIGS. 334 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 334 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 334 (a3). Also, the effect shown in FIG. 330 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 334 (a4), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (b2), a state in which the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed is shown. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the change icon h0 is placed is maintained in a manner in which the display position is lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 335 (a1), an image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 335 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, with “decoration 6” on the left symbol and “decoration 7” on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. Note that the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a3), the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of Tono-sama's symbols is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a4), a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a5), the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation that produces whether or not the pseudo-ream starts is started. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI part UI3 leaves the frame by the UI part FO animation, leaving the change icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol design is started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Moreover, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo-continuous production or when a pseudo-series is established. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbols expand in the horizontal direction as shown in FIGS. 335 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to visually recognize. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbols are further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. The pseudo-continuous symbols are also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the Tono-sama character displayed at 208N and the second reserved number display. At this time, the family crest character 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (a8), the family crest member 224E rotates, and a sound “don” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 335 (a9) shows that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been. It should be noted that the UI part FI animation may be started after the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation has ended, the UI part FI animation may be started before the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. Note that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-pseudo-continuous symbols-decoration 7”, and then the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. The

  FIGS. 335 (b1) to (b3) show an example of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 335 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 335 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 335 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are dark-displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It shows a state in which the approximate center shines and light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during the dark display by the stechen effect. In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the image RDY being prepared is not displayed in the dark display by the stechen effect is also shown. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may end and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

  In FIG. 335 (b3), the state where the Stechen effect is finished is shown. In this effect example, after the stechen effect is ended, the same display as before the start of the stechen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

  FIG. 336 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of button notice effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 336 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 336 (a). In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 336 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (a) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI part UI3 is displayed even during execution of the swordsman reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they approach each other while approaching each other. Is moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 336 (c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. FIG. 336 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. It should be noted that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, or the effect at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (d), the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed and the operation acceptance state is displayed. It shows how it started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during a period in which the button notice effect is performed by at least the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

  FIG. 337 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 337 (a1), “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Stopped display with a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern 284a1 is also lit in a display mode of loss. In addition, UI part UI3 shown to FIG. 335 (a1) is set as the notification display aspect displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 337 (a2), the state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is shown. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI decorative wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a3). , The Tono-like character riding on the motorcycle enters the frame from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 337 (a3) to (a5), the state of running toward the right end is shown. . That is, in this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the preview display mode to the default display mode, and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 displays the production. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be naturally changed. For example, when the display is lost due to the super reach effect and the display is returned to the original display, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a6), the appearance by the Tono-sama character in the UI part wipe display part WP4 is ended, and the UI part wipe display part WP4 is deleted. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is deleted and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the base on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes h1 and becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In this example, the UI part wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the image RDY being prepared is displayed, the image RDY being prepared is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the image RDY being prepared is displayed soon. The mini-game or timer notice effect may be started after finishing.

  FIGS. 337 (b1) to (b4) show examples of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 337 (b1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 337 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 337 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 337 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves his / her line of sight from the top of the head to the feet. It shows how the swordsman character is scrolled. Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the top of the head. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling.

  In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or when only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display using the UI unit UI3 is used. It can be said that an example of performing is shown.

  FIG. 338 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the example of production shown in FIG. 338 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start opening and a second special figure start opening per start opening, and in a normal gaming state. There are so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) that can hold 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given using a MAX8 machine as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 338 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. Four hold icons are arranged in front and back in a staggered arrangement so that eight hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 338 (a1), a total of seven variable displays in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are held, and therefore seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 338 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is provided. It has been broken. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 338 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 338 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

  In addition, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 338 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight special figures 1 and 2 have been put on hold. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon h0 that are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the heel imitating the face of the heel. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, an example of an effect that changes the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 all at once when the reserve is full is shown. In this example effect, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the bag may be notified.

  FIG. 338 (b1) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 338 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (b1). It is informed that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 338 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight suspensions of special figure 1 and special figure 2 have been made. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held, four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a voice “Pong” to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 338 (b3) shows a situation where the super reach is lost and the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the swordsman reach became full during the performance of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bag. In this production example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden by the super reach, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed. The example of the effect which changes a display mode is shown.

  FIGS. 338 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effects shown in FIGS. 338 (b1) to (b3). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 338 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 338 (b1) to (b2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 338 (c3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the production of the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Moreover, in this production example, while the execution of the production of the swordsman reach has become full, the display of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full fill is achieved. A character “MAX” indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the change icon h0. Thereafter, the symbols are fixedly displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are not changed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 338 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the bag display mode. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 338 (c4), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation is displayed.

  FIG. 339 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 339 (a1) to (a3) and 339 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display region, a hold icon display region, a tutorial display unit TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is disposed at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 339 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI4. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 339 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display part ST2, “Castle town stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224F and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (a2), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1 is shown. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (a3), the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth image RDY4 in preparation. The fourth preparatory image RDY4 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which an image in preparation is displayed in each of a plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

  FIGS. 339 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams illustrating another effect example following FIG. 339 (a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 339 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (b2), the fourth preparatory image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. A state of being displayed at a position shifted upward is shown. That is, a state where the image being prepared overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed is shown. Such a display mode can also be applied to the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 339 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 339 (c1), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the speech balloon TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (c2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper portion of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 339 (c5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 339 (c6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, and the effect EF2 is displayed in which a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 explodes. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. Thereby, a notice may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and the player may have a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (c7), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . This in-preparation image RDY has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY in preparation, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. .

  FIG. 340 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are set as default display modes. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the tutorial display portion TT7 displays the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display section ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the family crest actor 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (a2) shows a state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the image RDY being prepared displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display part TT7 is separated and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY in preparation may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the ready image RDY is displayed in a manner in which it is accommodated in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

  FIGS. 340 (b1) to (b2) show other forms of the production examples shown in FIGS. 340 (a1) to (a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 340 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 340 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (b2) shows a state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 340 (a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 340 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343. Here, FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 342 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 343 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. FIG. The display position of the warning message for the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is a fixed location, but it is possible to appropriately set which position is the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. Note that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower pan full state is eliminated and the ball removal error is eliminated. Moreover, although the example of an effect shown below shows about the example of a ball removal error display, it is applicable also to the door open error etc. which generate | occur | produce when the front frame door 106 is opened, for example. Further, when a ball removal error display is being performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 341 (a1) to (a2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 310 (c) to (d). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (a1), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 closed by the shutter image is shown. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed, and it is urged to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate and cancel the full state of the lower plate.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY in preparation is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image RDY in preparation are simultaneously viewed and the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 341 (b1) to (b2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 312 (c1) to (c2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 shows a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is easily visible. Thereby, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 are viewed at the same time, the display of the remaining time meter MT4 may be finished to give a chance to remove the ball.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 313 (b4) to (b5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but does not overlap the translucent button image 136q related to the combined animation. No appearance is shown. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the combined animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q comes close, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the united animation by looking at the display without the ball. In some cases, it is possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation are viewed at the same time, and when the combined animation is displayed, a chance to remove the ball is given.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 341 (d1) to (d2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 320 (f) to (g). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT, but the tutorial display unit The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (d2), the preparation display image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started, but the preparation image RDY is displayed again. Sometimes, the enlarged image RDY is displayed compared to when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparatory image RDY is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped the tutorial display portion TT1 until now. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the enlarged image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, a chance to remove the ball may be given.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 341 (e1) to (e2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 321 (a5) to (a6). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the character of Tono is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (e2), as a result of the player's long press operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character who see the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by observing the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority and inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character are simultaneously observed. May be possible.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (f1) to (f2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 323 (e) to (f). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (f1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the display area in which the characters “Go” are displayed (the display area in which the first image RDY being prepared is displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (f2), the characters “Go” are erased together with the display area, the second image RDY2 being prepared for sliding downwards, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. An image moving animation is being prepared. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second image being prepared RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. Accordingly, it may be possible to notice the display of the second ready image RDY2 and the display of the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1, the second image RDY2 being prepared, and the ninja character NJ4 can be simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the second image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball can be given. There is a case.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 342 (a1) to (a2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 326 (a3) to (a4). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps a part of the plurality of images in preparation. Thereby, it may be possible to notice at least one of a plurality of images in preparation (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images in preparation are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image in preparation is finished, a ball removal is given.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 342 (b1) to (b2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 326 (b1) to (b2), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. In this case, unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 342 (a2), since the image (preparation Chibi Princess CHM) corresponding to an effect is not displayed, the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed as any display. There is no overlap.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 342 (c1) to (c2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 328 (b) to (e), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 328 (b), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the approximate center of the left notice display area CUL is shown. Yes. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 328 (e), the mini game executed based on the image RDY in preparation displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished, the ball removal is given.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 342 (d1) to (d2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 330 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (b1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (d2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 342 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 342 (e1) to (e2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 330 (d1) to (d2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (e1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (d1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise, and a shake vision effect is performed. The state of being broken is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display position or tilting even when the shake vision effect is performed. At this time, since the background image is inclined, the blank portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the sphere removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with this blank portion. For example, when the sphere removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the blank portion, and a part thereof It may be difficult to see.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 342 (f1) to (f2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 331 (a1) to (a2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (f1), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 331 (a1) is shown. . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI part UI3 is enlarged, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part UI3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the UI unit UI3 rise. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (a1) to (a2) are display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 333 (d) to (e), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 333 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI part UI3 is out of frame by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the UI part UI3.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (a2), the UI unit UI3 is shown out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. In this effect example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 to the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is out of the frame by the UI part FO animation.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (b1) to (b2) are display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 337 (a3) to (a5), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 337 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4. It is shown. At this time, the character does not overlap the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI part wipe display part WP4.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (b2), a state in which the Tono-like character on the motorcycle is moving to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is shown. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI part wipe display part WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 can be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI portion wipe display portion WP3. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball display error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI part wipe display unit WP3 are simultaneously viewed and the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is finished.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 343 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 340 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part thereof is over the decorative symbol. The wrapping is shown. Note that there is no overlap with other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (c2), the state where the hold icon display area is displayed in an enlarged manner is shown. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 343 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 343 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the sub-window WP3, and the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. Note that the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the display position is maintained. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Also, simultaneously see the ball drop error display ERR1 and the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display region, and give a chance to remove the ball when the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display region ends. May be possible.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 343 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  The sphere removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d1) is a display mode in which the display “please remove sphere” is surrounded by a square frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d2) has the same form as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d2), and the display of “Please remove the ball” is outlined on the black background. It is set as the aspect represented by these.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described. Needless to say, even the pachinko machine 100 having only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, in the description using FIGS. 257 to 343, the example applied to the pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal It can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) using game balls (pachinko balls). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 344 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 344, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 345 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 345), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 345) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the rear surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of medals can be made electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the display panel 1070 displaying the titles of the devices can project toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 345 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“First operation means [for example, chance button 136, second chance button 137, transparent portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.]
Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N Or two, fourth display means 208M ′, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is one effect of the notice effects (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) [for example, a jackpot confirmed notice effect]
The first display may be displayed in a certain display area [for example, the notification area HZ, the notification area HZ ′] of the display areas in the display means,
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area,
The first display is a display [e.g., 99-1 or 99-0, etc.] representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means [for example, one single operation, long press operation, etc.] is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is changed according to the operation. It is configured so that there are cases where the number to be represented is small [for example, the number of “1” or “2 or more” decreases according to one operation]
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in accordance with the operation. [For example, FIG. Α272 (A3), FIG. Α272 (B2), FIG. Α277 (A6), FIG. Α280 (A7), FIG. Α287 (A7), FIG. Α298 (A5), etc.],
Even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display is not changed according to the operation [for example, FIG. Α278 (A3) to FIG.
The second display has a plurality of types of display modes [eg, no display, “question mark”, “Chance”, “continue”, “SP”, “large board behavior”, “up”, and the background color is the first mode. To seventh aspect or gray etc.],
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed in response to the operation [for example, .Alpha.272 (A3) and the like, the effect changing to the seventh aspect of the logo accessory 224F, the effect of moving the logo accessory 224F, and the effect movable means other than the logo accessory 224F (for example, the family crest accessory 224E) Effects that change the appearance, effects that effect moving means other than the logo accessory 224F (for example, family crest accessory 224E, etc.) operate, effects that the jackpot confirmation warning sound is output from the speaker 120, and various lamp LEDs Changing production etc.],
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) [for example, the “large board behavior” of the seventh mode] may be displayed in the certain display area. Is composed of
The first notice display is a display related to the first effect [for example, a display displayed at the same time as the start of the first effect, or just before or just after the start]
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner [for example, the big hit expectation degree of “big board behavior” shown in FIG. Α271 (b) is "S", examples shown in Fig. Α272 (A3) to Fig. (A5) and Fig. Α287 to Fig. Α288, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, when a button is operated in a state where a number is displayed in the certain display area, a big hit confirmation effect may be started.

  The first notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the notification area HZ ′ shown in FIG. The first notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed by a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, or the like.

Also,
"First operating means,
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the plurality of types of effects is one of the notice effects (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”), and the jackpot confirmed notice effect (the seventh mode light emission of the logo accessory 224). )
The first display may be displayed in a certain display area of the display area in the display means,
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area,
The first display is a display representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number displayed by the first display may be reduced depending on the operation. And
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in accordance with the operation. And
Even if an operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display is not changed according to the operation,
The second display is a display in which a plurality of types of display modes are prepared,
When the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed in response to the operation,
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area,
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the jackpot symbol pattern is configured to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  Further, “in the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner” means that “the first notice display is displayed. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. ”

  Further, even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed, the first effect is not executed in response to the operation. May be. Alternatively, even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed, the first effect may not be executed according to the operation. That is, it may be configured not to be executed absolutely.

  In addition, “the display mode of the second display is not changed according to the operation” and “the second display is switched to another display according to the operation, It may be configured so that the second display is not hidden according to the operation.

  Here, the first display may always be displayed in the certain display area, and when the first display is displayed, it may be displayed only in the certain display area. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the certain display area, and when the second display is displayed, it may be displayed only in the certain display area.

  The first display may be a display representing a number including 0 or a display representing a number not including 0. For example, the number may be represented by a number, the number may be represented by the number of figures or icons displayed, the number may be represented by a color or a pattern, or the number may be represented by a meter or a gauge.

  The first operation means may be a button type, a lever type, a rotating type, or a rolling type. However, it may be a push-in type. The operation of the first operation means may be a single operation, a single operation multiple times, or a continuous operation (for example, continuous operation, long press operation, predetermined operation, etc. (Continuous operation over time).

  The case where the number represented by the first display is a small number means that the amount corresponding to the number “1” decreases or the amount corresponding to the number “2” or more (for example, “5” or “10”). )) May decrease. Further, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number displayed by the first display according to the operation is surely small. However, there may be cases where the number is not small.

  When the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display is surely switched to the second display in accordance with the operation. However, there may be cases where switching is not possible.

  The plural types of display modes in the second display are concepts including display contents. Therefore, “the second display is a display in which a plurality of types of display contents are prepared, the second display of the first display contents is a first notice display, and the ○ The second display may be the ○ notice display. ”Also, this display mode includes a mode in which nothing is displayed. Furthermore, this display mode is not limited to the display mode using characters, but may be a display mode using icons or graphics, or a display mode using colors or patterns.

  The second display may be a notice display regarding a big hit, more specifically, a pre-read notice display, or may be a big hit with a symbol change display that is performed when displayed. It may be a normal notice display for notifying that it is not possible. Further, the second display may be a notice display regarding a certain effect. That is, a display for notifying that a certain effect may be performed may be used.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be surely executed according to the operation, It may not be executed.

  The first notice display may be configured to be displayed in the certain display area, or may not be displayed.

  The display related to the first effect is that the first notice display is a display representing the first effect, a display reminiscent of the first effect, or the first effect. May be displayed. Further, even if there is no relevance due to such display itself, a case where there is a relevance at the display start timing is also included. For example, the first notice display may be a display that is displayed simultaneously with the start of the first effect, or a display that is displayed immediately before or after the start of the first effect. Moreover, the case where there is relevance in the display mode is included. For example, the first notice display may be displayed in the same mode as the mode of the first effect (for example, the seventh mode). The first notice display may be a notice display with the lowest appearance frequency among the plurality of types of display modes, or a notice display with the highest expectation (reliability) of jackpot. Also good. Alternatively, the first notice display may be a notice display for notifying the jackpot confirmation.

  In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. However, for example, it may be lost at a probability of 1/65536.

  Further, when the first operation means is not operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be configured so that the number represented by the first display is not small. The first display may not be switched to the second display if the first operation means is not operated in the state where the first display is displayed. . If the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display may not be changed. If the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed, the first effect may not be executed.

  Further, when the first display represents a small number, the first operation means is always operated in the state where the first display is displayed. When the first display is switched to the second display, the first operation means is always operated in the state where the first display is displayed. When the first effect is executed, the first operation means is always operated in the state where the first display is displayed.

Also,
“A third display may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area in the display area in the display means [for example, a central area of the display screen]
The third display is a display prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, a combination of button images 136a, 136a ′, 136a ″, an arrow display 136b, a remaining period meter display 136c, or any one of them. Or two indications],
When the operation of the first operating means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may be started in response to the operation,
The fourth display is one of the notice displays [for example, strong cut-in CIs, weak cut-in CIw, cut-in display CIr displayed as an iron plate, “a sign of the shrine shown in FIG. Α308 (C5)”, etc.・ ・ ・ ... conversation image CI2 of the niece, “α is hot”, “I can expect”, “chansu” shown in FIG. Α308 (C5), “ The princess's conversation image CI4 with the sign “...”, the princess's princess conversation image CI4 shown in FIG. Α289, etc.]
The fourth display is a display that is not a jackpot confirmation notice display [for example, a display that is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area that includes a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)]
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the execution of the first effect and the Both the display of the fourth display is configured to start (for example, FIG. Α272 (C4), FIG. Α308 (D3)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  An example of this gaming machine is a gaming machine in which both a jackpot finalizing effect and a weak effect in other button effects are started by one button operation.

  Here, the another display area may or may not partially overlap the certain display area. Further, the other display area may be the entire display area of the display means or a part of the display area. Furthermore, the other display area may be an area wider than the certain display area, a narrow area, or an area of the same size. The certain display area may be a part of the other display area, and conversely, the another display area may be a part of the certain display area. In addition, if the operation of the first operation means is performed while the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started in response to the operation, but is always started. It may be configured as follows.

  If the operation of the first operation means is performed while the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started in response to the operation, but it is always started. It may be configured. Further, the fourth display may be displayed even if the operation of the first operation means is not performed in the state where the third display is displayed, and is always displayed. May be. Alternatively, on the contrary, the fourth display may be displayed only when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the third display is displayed. May be displayed.

  The fourth display may be a notice display regarding a big hit, more specifically, a display of a pre-read notice, or may be a big hit by a symbol variation display performed when displayed. It may be a normal notice display for notifying that it is not possible. Further, the fourth display may be a notice display relating to a certain effect. That is, a display for notifying that a certain effect may be performed may be used. The fourth display may be a response display for the operation of the first operation means, or may include the response display. In addition, the fourth display may be a preview display with a higher or higher hit expectation (reliability) than the second display.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the execution of the first effect and the Both the display of the fourth display may not start, and it may be configured to always start. Further, the start timing of execution of the first effect and the start timing of the fourth display may be the same, or the start timing of execution of the first effect may be earlier, The start timing of the fourth display may be earlier. That is, it is sufficient that there is a period in which both the execution of the first effect and the display of the fourth display are performed.

  Further, the fourth display may not be started unless the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the third display is displayed. If the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the execution of the first effect and the fourth display are performed. You may be comprised so that both of display may not be started.

  Furthermore, when the display of the fourth display is started, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the third display is displayed. When both the execution of the first effect and the display of the fourth display are started, the first display and the third display are displayed in the state where both the first display and the third display are displayed. The operation means are always operated.

Also,
“One effect of the plural types of effects is one effect different from the first effect of the notice effects (hereinafter referred to as“ second effect ”) [for example, pseudo-continuous effects, Super reach production etc.]
When the operation of the first operating means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may be started in response to the operation,
The fifth display is a display of one of the notice displays different from the fourth display [for example, the conversation image CI2 of “I saw a swordsman” shown in FIG. Α308 (C5), etc.] , The display of the “continuation” conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. Α308 (C4), the continuation pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. Α308 (F3), and the like.
The fifth display is a notice display relating to the execution of the second effect [for example, a display (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen) displayed in a display area different from the certain display area]. ,
The second display of the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area,
The second notice display is a notice display related to the execution of the second effect [for example, "continuation" display, "SP" display] different from the fifth display,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second notice display,
When the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. The display is configured to start display,
When the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the display of the fifth display is started. The display can be started [for example, combination of FIG. Α272 (B2) and FIG. Α308 (B3) with FIG. (C4) and FIG. (C5)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, the occurrence of a certain effect is predicted by another button effect, but it can be known in advance that the certain effect is generated by a display other than the jackpot confirmation notice display. .

  For example, the fifth display may be a display displayed in a fifth display area, and the fourth display may be a display displayed in the fourth display area. The fifth display area and the fourth display area may be the same display area or different display areas. Further, the fifth display area and the fourth display area are different display areas from the certain display area. Further, the fifth display area and the fourth display area are different display areas from the other display areas. The “different display areas” here may partially overlap or may not overlap. One display area (any one of the fifth display area, the fourth display area, the certain display area, and the other display area (hereinafter the same)) is Display area (any one of the fifth display area, the fourth display area, the certain display area, and the other display area (hereinafter the same)). Alternatively, it may be a partial area. Further, one display area may be an area wider than the other display area, a narrow area, or an area of the same size. Further, the display area of the other display area is different from the display area of one display area (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.). It may be.

  In addition, when the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is performed before the execution of the second effect is started. You may be comprised so that the display of a display can be started.

  Further, when the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second advance notice is displayed before the display of the fifth display is started. You may be comprised so that the display of a display can be started.

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may not be started in response to the operation, It may be configured to always start. Further, the fifth display may be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated in the state where the third display is displayed, and is always displayed. May be. Alternatively, on the contrary, the fifth display may be displayed only when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the third display is displayed. May be displayed.

  The fifth display indicates what kind of effect the second effect is (for example, a pseudo-ream effect or a super reach effect), or the type of the second effect (super reach 1). It may be a notice display that is displayed in such a manner that it can be specified whether it is Super Reach 2 or Super Reach 2. Further, the fifth display may be a preview display with higher or lower reliability than the second display. Furthermore, the fifth display may be a preview display with higher or lower reliability than the fourth display.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the second notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed by a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, or the like.

  If the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the first display may or may not be switched to the second notice display. It may be configured as follows.

  When the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. There may be a case where the display of the display is not started, or the display may be always started.

  When the first operation means is operated by the player in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the display of the fifth display is started. There may be a case where the display of the display is not started, or the display may be always started.

  Further, if the operation of the first operation means is not performed while the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may not be started in response to the operation. . Even if the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed, the first display may not be switched to the second notice display. Good. If the player does not operate the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. You may be comprised so that the display of a display may not be started. If the player does not operate the first operation means in a state where the first display is displayed, the second advance notice is displayed before the display of the fifth display is started. You may be comprised so that the display of a display may not be started.

  Further, when the display of the fifth display is started, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the third display is displayed. When the first display is switched to the second notice display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in a state where the first display is displayed. If the display of the second notice display is started before the execution of the second effect is started, the player performs the first display in the state where the first display is displayed. The operation means are always operated. In the case where the display of the second notice display is started before the display of the fifth display is started, the player makes the first display in the state where the first display is displayed. The operation means are always operated.

Also,
“One effect of the plurality of types of effects is one effect different from the second effect [for example, pseudo-continuous effect] of the notice effects (hereinafter referred to as“ third effect ”). [For example, super reach production]
The second display of the third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third notice display”) [for example, “SP”] may be displayed in the certain display area. ,
The third notice display is a notice display relating to the execution of the third effect,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the third notice display.
By the operation of the first operating means by the player, before the execution of the third effect is started, it is configured to be able to start displaying the third notice display,
In a certain state [for example, the state of FIG. Α294 (A5)] before execution of the second effect is started when the third effect is performed after the second effect, In some cases, the display of the third notice display is started instead of the notice display [for example, FIG. Α294 (A5),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, for example, a certain display different from a certain display corresponding to the next effect to be generated is performed.

  Here, the third notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the third notice display may be displayed outside the certain display area, or may be displayed in the center of the screen, or may be displayed by a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, or the like.

  The third notice display may be a notice display with higher or lower reliability than the second notice display. Further, the third notice display may be a notice display having a lower reliability than the first notice display, or may be a notice display having the same reliability as the first notice display.

  If the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the first display may or may not be switched to the third notice display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the operation of the first operation unit is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the first notice display. While the display may be switched to the notice display, the third notice display may be switched.

  It may be configured that the display of the third notice display can be started before the execution of the third effect is started by the player operating the first operation means.

  In a certain state before execution of the second effect in the case where the third effect is performed after the second effect, the third notice display is displayed instead of the second notice display. The display may not be started, or may be configured to always start.

  The certain state may be a state after the symbol variation display in which execution of the second effect is started is started. Further, the certain state may be a state before the first stop is performed in the decorative symbol variation display, may be a state where the first stop is performed, or the first stop is It may be the state before the second stop is performed, may be the state where the second stop is performed, or may be the state before the second stop is performed and the third stop is performed. May be.

  The first display is not switched to the third notice display if the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed. May be. If the first operation means is not operated by the player, the display of the third notice display is not started before the execution of the third effect is started. Also good.

  Further, when the first display is switched to the third notice display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in a state where the first display is displayed. If the display of the third notice display is started before the execution of the third effect is started, the player always operates the first operation means.

Also,
In the state where both the first display [for example, display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the third display [for example, display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed. When the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] is operated, the execution of the first effect [for example, light emission of the seventh aspect by the logo accessory 224F] and the fifth are performed in accordance with the operation. [For example, display of conversation image CI2 of “I saw a swordsman”] may be started [for example, “sign of the lord of FIG. Α308 (D3)” Instead of a cut-in notice that says "...", an example of a cut-in notice that says "I saw a swordsman"],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the first effect is displayed according to the operation. Both execution and display of the fifth display may not be started, and may be configured to always start. Moreover, if operation of said 1st operation means is not performed, you may be comprised so that both may not be started.

  Further, if the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the first effect is displayed according to the operation. Both execution and display of the fifth display may be configured not to start.

  Further, when both the execution of the first effect and the display of the fifth display are started, the display of both the first display and the third display is displayed. The operation of the first operating means is always performed.

Also,
In the state where both the first display [for example, display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the third display [for example, display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed. When the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] is operated, the display of the second notice display [for example, “continuation” display in the notification area HZ or “SP” is performed in accordance with the operation. Display] and the fifth display [for example, display of conversation image CI2 of “Continue” shown in FIG. Α308 (C4) or display of conversation image CI2 of “I saw a swordsman”] [For example, a cut-in notice “Continue” is displayed in place of the cut-in notice “The sign of the lord ...” in FIG. Α308 (D3). Examples in the broadcast area HZ "continue" is displayed or FIG α272, (B5)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the second notice display is performed according to the operation. Both the display of 5 and the display of the fifth display may not be started, and may be configured to always start. Moreover, if operation of said 1st operation means is not performed, you may be comprised so that both may not be started.

  Further, if the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the second notice display is performed according to the operation. And the display of the fifth display may not be started.

  Further, when both the display of the second notice display and the display of the fifth display are started, the display of both the first display and the third display is displayed. The operation of the first operation means is always performed.

Also,
“The first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] is operated by the player, so that the execution of the second effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect] is started before the first operation is started. It is configured to be able to start display of four displays [for example, the conversation image CI2 of “the sign of the lord ...”] [for example, FIG. Α289 (A10)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there is a case where the display of the fourth display is not started before the execution of the second effect is started by the player operating the first operation means. Alternatively, it may be configured to always be started. Even if the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the fourth display can be started or always started before the execution of the second effect is started. You may be comprised so that. Alternatively, the display of the fourth display can be started before the execution of the second effect is started only when the player operates the first operation means, or It may be configured to always start.

  Further, if the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the fourth display is not started before the execution of the second effect is started. May be.

  Further, when the display of the fourth display is started before the execution of the second effect is started, the player always operates the first operation means. .

Also,
“A certain period in the variation display of a certain decorative design [For example, a part of the period before the start of the last re-variation (maximum number of re-variations) in the pseudo-continuous production (including the figure α293 (A5) before the pseudo-continuous production starts) Or the number of types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed during the period or the period including the diagram α298 (15) in which the “pseudo-2” state is being changed again) The display may be displayed in another period after the certain period in the decorative pattern variation display [for example, a part of the period after the start of the final re-variation (maximum number of re-variations) in the pseudo-continuous effect]. The number of display types of the second display is different [for example, “Continue” is displayed in the table shown in FIG. Α271 (c), FIG. Α293 (A5), or FIG. In the same figure (A25), “Continue” is not displayed and “ Configuration P "is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are many types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, but it may become smaller later, or on the contrary, the decorative symbol Immediately after the start of fluctuation, there are few types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed, but it will increase later.

  Here, rather than the number of types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed in a certain period in the variable display of a certain decorative design, You may be comprised so that the number of the kind of display mode of said 2nd display which may be displayed in another period after that may become smaller. That is, the display mode of the second display to be displayed is narrowed as the one-time symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) progresses, in other words, as the production progresses. It may be. For example, before the start of the super reach effect, there may be a case where “SP” is newly displayed in the notification area HZ and the display of “SP” is newly displayed. Even if the display of “SP” continues to be displayed, the display of “SP” is not newly displayed by switching from the display of numbers, but the notification content (SP) is displayed for the display amount (“SP”). The number of display modes is decreasing.

  Alternatively, before the start of the normal reach production, the indication area HZ is switched from the number display so that “SP” is not displayed, and after the start of the normal reach production, the indication area HZ is switched from the number display. If the display of “SP” may be newly displayed, the number of notification contents (display modes) to be displayed is increased by the amount of display of “SP”. Further, before the start of the pseudo-continuous production, the display is switched from the numerical display so that the display of “pseudo 3” is not displayed in the notification area HZ, and during the period of “pseudo 2” when the pseudo-continuous production is started, the notification is performed. If the display of “pseudo 3” may be newly displayed in the area HZ by switching from the display of numbers, the number of notification contents (display modes) to be displayed for the display of “pseudo 3”. Has increased.

Also,
“The other period is a period after the execution of a certain effect [eg, pseudo-continuous effect (the second effect)] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain effect may be the second effect or the third effect.

Also,
“The display of the third display is not started before the display of the first display [for example, display of the number in the notification area HZ] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display of the third display may be started after the display of the first display is started.

Also,
[Second operation means [for example, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.]
When the operation of the second operation means is performed in a state where the third display [for example, display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] is displayed, the fourth display is performed according to the operation. [For example, weak cut-in CIw] may be displayed [for example, FIG. Α304 (G3)],
Even if the operation of the second operation means is performed in a state where the first display [for example, display of the number in the notification area HZ] is displayed, the number represented by the first display according to the operation Is configured so as not to be a small number [for example, FIG. Α304 (G3)],
Even if the operation of the second operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is not switched to the first notice display according to the operation. Configured [eg, FIG. Α304 (G3)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even when the second operation means is operated in a state where the button effect is being executed, the cut-in notice appears according to the operation, but the notification area HZ is displayed. Will not change.

  Here, when the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started in response to the operation. It may be configured to always start. Further, the fourth display can be started or surely started even when the second operation means is not operated while the third display is displayed. It may be. Alternatively, the display of the fourth display can be started or surely started only when the operation of the second operation means is performed while the third display is displayed. May be.

  Further, even when the second operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may not be switched to the second notice display according to the operation. The first display may not be switched to the third notice display according to the operation.

  The display of the fourth display may not be started unless the operation of the second operation means is performed in a state where the third display is displayed. If the second operation means is not operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may not be reduced in number. The first display may not be switched to the first notice display if the second operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed.

  Further, when the display of the fourth display is started, the operation of the second operation means is always performed while the third display is being displayed.

Also,
“The first display can be displayed up to the display of the decorative symbol that is shaken immediately before the final display of the decorative symbol [for example, FIG. Α288 (A36), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed until the decorative symbol swinging display that is performed immediately before the decorative symbol confirmation display, or may be configured to be displayed without fail.

Also,
“A certain hit / judge effect that gives a notification indicating the result of the pass / fail judge according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] [for example, the final judge effect accompanied by the operation (from FIG. Α291 (A66) (Until immediately before (A68))],
The certain hit / no-judge effect is an effect performed before the shaking display,
When the certain pass / fail judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display is terminated at least after the start of the execution of the certain pass / fail judge effect [for example, FIG. Α291 (A63) ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first display may end before the success / fail judge effect.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the success / failure judgment effect may be performed a plurality of times with a single decorative symbol variation display, the first / failure judgment effect may correspond to a certain success / failure judgment effect here, The later success / fail judgment effect may correspond to a certain success / fail judgment effect described here. In addition, the certain judgment result here may be, for example, from FIG. Α291 (A66) to immediately before FIG. (A68) or from FIG. Α291 (A66) to (A70). Alternatively, it may be from FIG. Α291 (A64) to immediately before FIG. (A68), or from FIG. Α291 (A64) to (A70). Further, the success / failure judgment effect may include a wipe effect and a revival effect. For example, FIG. Α288 (A31) → FIG. (A32) → FIG. (B2) → until just before FIG.

  Here, even if the operation of the first operation means is not performed, the notification indicating the result of the success / failure judgment may be performed, or conversely, the operation of the first operation means is performed. However, the notification indicating the result of the success / failure judgment may be performed or may be configured to be performed.

  When the certain success / failure judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display ends after the start of the introduction effect of the certain success / failure judgment effect [for example, FIG. Α291 (A64) to (A65)]. It may be configured to. Further, when the certain success / failure judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display may be finished before the certain success / failure judgment effect is started.

Also,
“The second display of the fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth notice display ”) [for example,“ question mark ”,“ Chance ”,“ SP ”, etc.] is displayed in the certain display area. Is configured to be
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display [for example, display of the number in the notification area HZ] is switched to the fourth notice display. Is configured to be
The first reach production [for example, the top reach that is Super Reach 1] is configured to be executable,
The second reach production [for example, swordsman reach that is Super Reach 2] is configured to be executable,
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured to make it easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed. [For example, the table shown in FIG. Α271 (d)],
Notification that suggests a loss in the second reach production [e.g., animation of Fig. Α283 (A23), Fig. Α297 (B2), Fig. Α300 (A2), Fig. Α300 (B2), Fig. Α283 (A24) or Fig. Α297 After (B3), αα300 (A3), and α300 (B3) shaking display], a wipe effect display is displayed [for example, Fig.α283 (A24) to Fig. A26 (A26). ), FIG. Α297 (B4) to FIG. (B5), FIG. Α300 (A3) to FIG. (A5), FIG. Α300 (B3) to FIG. (B5)],
In the state where the wipe effect display is displayed, the fourth notice display can be displayed [for example, FIG. Α283 (A26), FIG. Α297 (B5), FIG. Α300 (A5), FIG. Α300 ( B5)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the fourth display can be displayed even during a lose wipe.

  In addition, the notification that suggests the loss may be a display of shaking in the pattern of the lost pattern (a display of shaking of the combination of the lost patterns in the decorative pattern). In this case, the wipe effect display is an effect display that is started after the swaying display of the lost symbol pattern is started.

  Further, the notification indicating the loss may be an animation display (FIG. Α283 (A23), FIG. Α300 (A2)) in which the main character loses. In this case, the wipe effect display may be a display that is displayed after the animation display is displayed, and may be an effect display that is started after the display of the swaying symbol pattern is started. It may be an effect display that starts at the same time as the display of the shake symbol pattern starts, or may be an effect display that starts before the display of the shake symbol pattern starts.

  Further, the fourth notice display may be a notice display (for example, “Chance” or “question mark”) different from any of the first notice display, the second notice display, and the third notice display. It may be the same notice display as any one of the first notice display, the second notice display, and the third notice display.

  Here, the fourth notice display may not be displayed in the certain display area, or may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  If the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the first display may or may not be switched to the fourth notice display. It may be configured as follows.

  It may be configured so that a wipe effect display may be displayed after a notification indicating a loss in the second reach effect is made, or the wipe effect display may not be displayed, or The wipe effect display may be always displayed.

  In a state where the wipe effect display is displayed, the fourth notice display may not be displayed, or may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  The first display is not switched to the fourth notice display if the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed. May be. If notification that suggests a loss is not performed in the second reach effect, the wipe effect display may not be displayed.

  Further, when the first display is switched to the fourth notice display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in a state where the first display is displayed. When the wipe effect display is displayed, the notification that suggests the loss in the second reach effect may be performed without fail.

Also,
“After the wipe effect display is displayed, the revival jackpot display can be displayed [for example, FIG. Α297 (B7), FIG. Α300 (B7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The revival jackpot display may not be displayed before the wipe effect display is displayed.

Also,
“The fourth notice display is not a display for notifying that the revival jackpot display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'It is configured to display the timer notice display.
After the timer notice display becomes a display indicating a certain time [for example, “0:00”], a certain notice display [for example, super reach production] is configured to be displayed.
By the operation of the first operation means by the player, the display of the second display [for example, “SP” in the notification area HZ is displayed before the display of the timer notice display is started. [Display] (for example, FIG. Α309 (A2)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In some cases, the display of the timer notice display may be started immediately after the start of the decorative symbol change display. In this case, even if the player quickly operates the chance button 136, the timer notice display is started. In addition, the display of the second display may not be started.

  The certain notice display may be an effect other than the first effect, for example, the third effect. Alternatively, the second effect may be used.

  Here, after the timer notice display becomes a display indicating a certain time, a notice display may not be displayed, or it may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  Even if the player operates the first operation means, the display of the second display may not be started before the display of the timer notice display is started, If the operation of the first operation means is performed, the display of the second display may be surely started before the display of the timer notice display is started.

  Further, it may be configured such that a certain notice display is not displayed before the timer notice display becomes a display indicating a certain time. If the first operation means is not operated by the player, the display of the second display may not be started before the display of the timer notice display is started. .

  Furthermore, when a certain notice display is displayed, the timer notice display may be configured to be a display indicating a certain time.

Also,
“Display indicating that the timer notice display is on standby (hereinafter referred to as“ standby display ”) [for example,“ in preparation ”shown in FIG. Α309 (A2)] is displayed. ,
When the first operation means is operated by the player, the display of the second display is started before the display of the timer notice display is started while the standby display is being displayed. [For example, figure α309 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the standby display may not be displayed, or it may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  Further, even if the player operates the first operation means, the display of the second display is performed before the display of the timer notice display is started while the standby display is being displayed. May not be started, and if the operation of the first operation means is performed, the display of the standby display is being performed and the display of the timer notice display is started before the first display is started. The display of the second display may be configured to always start.

  Further, if the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the second display is performed before the display of the timer notice display is started while the standby display is being displayed. May be configured not to start.

Also,
“A plurality of types of hold icons [for example, hold icons shown in FIG.
One hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [e.g., a third character in a length-length character mode that does not have a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. Α309 (H1). Hold icon h13],
One hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon [eg, third hold in the form of a chief character with a “preparing” placard shown in FIG. Α309 (I1). Icon h13],
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice different from the second hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that includes a certain image [e.g., an image of a bancho character]
The third hold icon is a hold icon including the certain image;
The second hold icon is a display [for example, “in preparation” indicating that the timer notice display [for example, “10:00” shown in FIG. Α309 (I5)] may start. Is a hold icon that does not include the "Display placard"
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display that suggests that the display of the timer notice display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a default display mode shown in FIG. Α309 (I1), each hold icon h11, h12 shown in FIG. Α272, etc. The first hold icon is a default hold icon, the first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons, and the first hold icon and the first hold icon The third hold icon may be another hold icon. That is, the first hold icon includes a hold icon in the form of a Bancho character that does not have a “preparing” placard, or a hold in the form of a Bancho character that has a “preparing” placard. A default hold icon other than the icon corresponds. The second hold icon corresponds to a hold icon in the form of a long-length character that does not have a “preparing” placard, which is a pre-read notice form. The third hold icon corresponds to a hold icon in the form of a number-length character having a “preparing” placard, which is a pre-read notice form. That is, the third hold icon has a function as a pre-reading notice, and also has a function like a mini item indicating that a timer notice is performed.

  Here, the first hold icon, the second hold icon, and the third hold icon may be displayed separately or may be displayed simultaneously.

Also,
"The" display indicating the number "described above is" display the number related to the remaining number of operations "
After the display of the first display is started, the first display is changed from the first display to the second display after the first operation means is operated as many times as the number represented by the first display. [Fig. Α272 (A1) to (A3)], for example,
After the display of the first display is started, before the operation of the first operation means is performed as many times as the number represented by the first display, The display may be switched [for example, FIG. Α272 (B1) to (B2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  After the display of the first display is started, after the first operation means is operated the same number of times as the number represented by the first display, the first display is changed to another display. After the start of display of the first display, before the operation of the first operation means is performed as many times as the number represented by the first display. The first display may be switched to another display.

  Further, when switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display is started, the number of the first operation means is the same as the number represented by the first display. You may be comprised so that operation may be performed. In the case of switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display is started, the operation of the first operation means is performed as many times as the number represented by the first display. It is always done.

Also,
“The display of the first display is started during the display of the variation display of the decorative design.
The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display representing a first number [for example, 10 or 5],
The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display representing a second number [e.g., 99].
The second number is greater than the first number;
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the second number, rather than the symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number. It is configured to make it easier for the big hit symbol pattern to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display representing a third number [eg, 1].
The third number is smaller than the first number;
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as a display representing the third number, rather than the symbol variation display when the first display is started as a display representing the first number. It is configured to make it easier for the big hit symbol pattern to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The first number is a number of 2 or more,
After the display of the first display representing the first number is started, after the long pressing operation of the first operation means is performed once, the second display [for example, , “Continue” display] [for example, FIG. Α301 (A6)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, after the display of the first display representing the first number is started, after the long pressing operation of the first operation means is performed once, the first display is switched to another display. You may be comprised so that there may be a case.

  Here, after the display of the first display representing the first number is started, after the long press operation of the first operation means is performed once, the second display is changed from the first display to the second display. There may be a case where the display is not switched, and the display may be always switched.

  In addition, after the display of the first display representing the first number is started, if the long pressing operation of the first operation means is not performed once, the second display is changed from the first display. You may be comprised so that it may not switch to.

  In addition, when switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display representing the first number starts, the long pressing operation of the first operation means is always performed. It may be configured to be performed once.

Also,
“It is configured to display the symbol variation display over one variation time selected from multiple types of variation times,
One variation time among the plurality of types of variation times is a first variation time [for example, the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation times of “D” illustrated in FIG. Α271 (d)]. Yes,
One variation time among the plurality of types of variation times is a second variation time [for example, a variation time of “A” shown in FIG. Α271 (d) (for example, 120 seconds)],
The second variation time is a variation time longer than the first variation time,
In the symbol variation display that is displayed over the first variation time, the first display [for example, the number display in the notification area HZ] is displayed as a display that represents the second number [for example, 99]. Configured so that there is no
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first variation time may be the shortest variation time among the plurality of types of variation times.

  Further, in the symbol variation display displayed over the second variation time, the first display may be configured to start displaying as a display representing the second number. In this case, the second variation time may be the longest variation time among the plurality of types of variation times. Further, in the symbol variation display displayed over the first variation time, the first display may be displayed as a display representing the first number [for example, 5]. May be. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display displayed over the first variation time, the display of the first display may not be started.

Also,
“The first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] that is started as a display representing the first number [for example, 10] is configured to be most easily started.
In the case where the sixth display [for example, “pseudo-continuous GET” shown in FIG. Α302 (A10)] is displayed when the first operation means is operated a certain number of times in a certain button stroke effect. Is configured to be
The sixth display and the second display [for example, the “continuation” display in the notification area HZ] are the same notification target [for example, pseudo-continuous effect] notification display,
The first number is smaller than the certain number of times [for example, 30 times],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, when a certain number of operations of the first operation means are performed in a certain button stroke effect, a result corresponding to the operation is notified, and the certain number of times The first number may be smaller than the first number.

  Here, the sixth display and the second display may be a notice display related to a big deal in the same symbol variation display [for example, “Chance” or “large board behavior”], or a notice display related to the same effect. [For example, “SP”] may be used.

  Further, the sixth display may be configured not to be displayed when the first operation means is not operated a certain number of times in a certain button stroke effect.

  When the sixth display is displayed, a certain number of operations of the first operation means are always performed in a certain button striking effect.

Also,
『Light emitting means,
A third operating means;
With
The display means may display a light amount adjustment display,
The light amount adjustment display is a display indicating that the light amount of the light emitting means can be adjusted,
When the operation of the third operation unit is performed in a state where the display for adjusting the light amount is displayed, the light amount of the light emitting unit may be adjusted according to the operation.
Even if the operation of the third operation unit is performed in a state where the light amount adjustment display is not displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting unit is not performed according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that display such as the fifth display may be started in accordance with the operation of the second operation means. Further, the third operation means may be an operation means different from the second operation means, or may be the same operation means as the second operation means.

  Here, when the operation of the third operation unit is performed in the state where the display for adjusting the light amount is displayed, the light amount of the light emitting unit may not be adjusted according to the operation. It may be configured to be performed without fail.

  Further, even when the operation of the third operation unit is performed in a state where the light amount adjustment display is not displayed, the light amount of the light emitting unit is never adjusted according to the operation. May be.

  Further, when the operation of the third operation unit is not performed in the state in which the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting unit may not be performed. .

  Further, when the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is performed according to the operation of the third operation means, the light amount adjustment display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
『Speaker and
Comprising a third operating means;
A volume adjustment display may be displayed on the display means.
The volume adjustment display is a display indicating that the volume of the speaker can be adjusted,
When the operation of the third operation means is performed while the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume of the speaker may be adjusted according to the operation.
Even if the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the display for volume adjustment is not displayed, the volume of the speaker may be adjusted according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that display such as the fifth display may be started in accordance with the operation of the second operation means. Further, the third operation means may be an operation means different from the second operation means, or may be the same operation means as the second operation means.

  Here, when the operation of the third operation unit is performed in a state where the volume adjustment promotion display is displayed, the volume of the speaker may not be adjusted according to the operation. It may be configured to always be performed.

  Further, even if the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the volume adjustment promotion display is not displayed, the volume of the speaker may not be adjusted according to the operation. It may be configured to always be performed.

  Further, when the operation of the third operation means is not performed in the state where the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may not be performed. When the operation of the third operation unit is not performed in a state where the volume adjustment display is not displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may not be performed.

  Furthermore, when the volume of the speaker is adjusted according to the operation of the third operation means, the volume adjustment display may be displayed. When the volume of the speaker is adjusted according to the operation of the third operation means, the volume adjustment display may not be displayed.

Also,
“When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states where the first display is displayed, the first effect is configured to be executed according to the operation. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states where the first display is displayed, the first effect is always executed in accordance with the operation. It may be configured.

  Further, the first effect may be configured not to be executed unless the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states in which the first display is displayed. .

  Further, when the first effect is executed in response to the operation of the first operation means, the first operation means in a state among the states where the first display is displayed. The operation is always performed.

Also,
“The first display can be displayed in a certain production mode [for example, the pre-reading mode of the princess zone shown in FIG. Α309 (D1)]
The second display can be displayed in the certain production mode,
The first effect is configured to be executable in the certain effect mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second display can be displayed only in a specific state, and the first effect can be executed.

  Note that the certain effect mode is not related to the player's setting operation that is set in the normal game state (non-probability change state, non-electric support state) or the effect mode selected by the player on the menu screen or the like. It is a production mode, a production mode that is set in the probability change state, which is not related to the player's setting operation, a production mode which is set in the electric support state, which is not related to the player's setting operation, It is an effect mode related to the player's setting operation in the gaming state (non-probability change state, non-electric support state), an effect mode related to the player's setting operation in the probability change state, or a player in the electric support state An effect mode related to the setting operation may be used. Moreover, the effect mode started based on a lottery result may be sufficient.

Also,
“The above-mentioned“ display related to the first effect ”means“ the first effect [for example, the jackpot confirmation notice effect according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] ”]. ] Is displayed when the display starts in the certain display area [for example, the notification area HZ].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect produced by sound output from effect sound output means [eg, speaker 120].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect may be an effect by sound output of the sound output means.

Also,
The first effect is an effect caused by light emission from effect light emitting means [for example, a game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp 542].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect may be an effect caused by light emission from the light emitting means.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100],
Whether or not the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner or finally the lost symbol mode is determined and displayed is determined based on the jackpot determination performed at the start of the symbol variation display [for example, the special chart shown in FIG. Α262 (b) It is configured to be determined by the related lottery process]
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, the jackpot confirmation notice effect] is performed,
The big hit determination is acquired when a game ball enters a start opening provided in the game board [for example, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232] [for example, in FIG. Α262 (b) The winning determination process (step S209) shown] is configured to be determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery using the random numbers [for example, the jackpot determining random value, the special figure determining random value]
The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as “hit probability”) is determined in advance [for example, determined in the success / failure determination table]
The jackpot probability does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, the jackpot confirmation notice effect] is performed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a change effect display (holding change) of the display mode of the holding icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (g). Etc.)
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a holding icon having a red display mode shown in FIG. 310 (h)],
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, an image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. 310 (h), a ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is being prepared. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.]
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d) to FIG. The preparation-in-progress image RDY that has been displayed in the state in which the part UI3 is displayed has been displayed in the state in which the UI part UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 310 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed],
The certain effect is a notice relating to the symbol change display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q) is a notice display informing that the jackpot is confirmed, etc.]
There is a case where the second state is entered after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (l) to FIG. UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.]
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display [for example, FIG. 310 ( As shown in d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3, etc.]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d) And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 310 (m) are the same],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and accordingly , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is likely to be started [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, “at least a part of the first display overlaps with the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is placed in the UI unit UI3. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

“The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI part UI3. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (q)” can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (q)). The state before) is started]
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (q) is being executed). ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), etc.]
The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 310 (o) to (p), the arrow released by Tono-sama mini character MC1. Etc. foreseeing the display of the iron plate image TP by piercing the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain notice display may be for notifying only that a certain effect is started, or may be for notifying that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

  Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

  In addition, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 310 ( i) to the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted only before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display may be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The first display that is started may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display that is started. In addition, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, “the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 316 (a4), the letters“ hot ”in the tutorial display portion TT1. Etc.) may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, a decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is prepared. The middle image RDY is displayed after the display is started, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. Image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY in preparation Is displayed before the display of the big button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. The third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 313 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b4) to (b6), a button notification effect is displayed by a combined animation. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 320 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 being prepared may be displayed, etc.]
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the image RDY in preparation is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [For example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the enlarged image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 320 (b) to FIG. As shown, the two images in preparation RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [for example,“ Panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 310 (a)”. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [characters related to the display effect change display display of the hold icon (hold change prior effect display), for example, FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, for example, a hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 310 (h),
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparing display, for example, an image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 310 (d),
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the mini game display shown in FIGS. 310 (o) to (p), or FIGS. 312 (b3) to (b4). Is a display indicating that it is waiting for the start of display of the timer notice effect, etc.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [the hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.]
The third display may be started in the first state. [Preparation display starts in the state where the hold icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 310 (d) As shown, the display of the image RDY in preparation is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed]
The third display that has started displaying in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state in which the hold icon is displayed. The display in preparation is completed when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (d) to 310 (n), the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The ready image RDY has been displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display in preparation in the display state is finished, the mini game and the timer notice are started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (n) to (o), the display of the image RDY in preparation is displayed. After finishing, the mini-game display is started with the UI unit UI3 being hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice starts. For example, FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. As shown, when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 313 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button announcement effect by deca button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be entered after the first state [the transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the state where the hold icon is not displayed may be made, for example, FIG. 310. As shown in (l) to (m) in the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon can be displayed to the hidden state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed (for example, the state where the UI unit UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed),
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states where the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, “the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the third state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, “a certain presentation may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  A certain notice display is not limited to a true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  The character is not limited to a person but may be a mini-item display such as a notice item.

  In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is described as “the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started”. In some cases, the display for starting the display of “is sometimes made”. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Further, “it is configured to be in the second state after the first state” means “may be in the second state following the first state” It may be configured as described above.

  Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through another state (for example, a 3rd state or a 3rd state) after a 1st state, you may transfer to a 2nd state. Moreover, in the state where one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  In addition, a certain effect may fade in while a certain notice display fades out.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, such as the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is enabled to be displayed in a state where an image including a hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [the hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 310 (m ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern being changed.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, a part of the display different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative design. May be.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a holding icon.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [the hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. Etc. displayed on the display unit TT1]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [the display of the ready display in the state where the hold icon is displayed The position and the display position of the ready display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same. For example, the display position of the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 310 (d) and the ready image shown in FIG. 310 (m) The display position of RDY is the same, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or prefetch notice display form, for example, a gold display form shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easier to start [the display of the hold icon than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. If it is displayed in a golden display mode, a red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that display of the second display is easier to start ”means that in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or prefetch notice display form, for example, a gold display form shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily [the hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. There, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display ”means“ in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode. The case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth mode is not changed. It may be.

Further, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display [at least part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. Overlapping with the character related to the change effect display display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (f), a part of the UI part UI3 overlies the ninja character NJ4 Wrapped etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be overlapped and displayed also on displays other than a 1st display. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that it may be overlapped with one display and not displayed.

  In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display.

  Further, a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be changed to the first display. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed by overlapping.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In the state where both the configured image [character including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the UI part UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja as shown in FIG. 325 (b1). Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. Or, in the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the display other than the first display. May be configured. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In addition, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. May be. Further, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. In addition, even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [specific super reach production, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect [the state before the start of the specific super reach effect, for example, FIG. 310 (m) to FIG. The state before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman shown in FIGS. 310 (m) to (q)). Reach) is being executed etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

  Note that the first state may be a reach state before developing to SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state during execution of SP reach in the certain change.

  In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain fluctuation and further reaches a reach state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 313 (b3) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, a certain kind of timer notice display may be used.

Further, the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini-games, it may be a certain type of mini-game.

In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a button notice effect display by the big button 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6), etc.]
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. In addition, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), etc.],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed more easily than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed.

  In addition, when the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, it is displayed only when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is a certain mode There may be.

Further, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [Preparation display in which display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display to be started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon that has been displayed in the variable display is erased before the next symbol variable display is started. For example, FIG. 310 (f ) To Ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be deleted only before the next symbol variation display to be started, The first display that has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display that is started in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, In the display, the first display that has started to be displayed may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [the notice is executed in the area where the display in preparation is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 316 (a4), there may be a case where a warning display made up of characters of “hot” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, it comprises “operating means [buttons and levers, for example, production buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One of the plural types of displays is a seventh display [display of images of buttons and levers, for example, a decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of images of buttons and levers is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [When the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. For example, when the production button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed.
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [Preparation display is completed before the button or lever image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. The third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

  The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the case where the big button image is displayed may make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, the special color button image is displayed more easily when the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed is the jackpot symbol. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 313 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b4) to (b6), a button notification effect is displayed by a combined animation. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 320 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 323 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes, and after the display of one of the two preparation displays is finished, the other display is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the image RDY under preparation is enlarged and displayed]
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [the display in preparation whose display mode has changed overlaps with the fluctuation icon. For example, as shown in FIG. The displayed image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, “when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [two displays in preparation are displayed. In the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 320 (b) to (k), the two images RDY in preparation are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display [explanation display, for example,“ Panda is a master of the lord ”displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 310 (a)”. Displayed explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 310 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [the preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed. For example, FIG. The ready image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 where the explanation display is displayed as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting” is “a character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d). Character display etc.] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eleventh display [ball-free display, such as a ball-free error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 341 (a1)],
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display “Please remove the ball” prompts removal of the ball, etc.]
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. [In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps the ball removal display. For example, as shown in FIG. 341 (a2) In addition, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or may be a display prompting anything other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to discharge the game ball, or a display that may not prompt the user to discharge the game ball.

  In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that prompts the player to discharge only the game ball, or a display that prompts the player to discharge other than the game ball.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and timer notice is overlapped with the ball removal display. As shown in 341 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. And may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is surely overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, “the game stand is a pachinko machine [a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a slot machine [rotating-type game machine].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is being held, but this can be realized according to this game machine.
In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first effect display [for example, gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is a super display. Display started during reach production, etc.]
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the SBBO character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)]
From the second position [for example, the start point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)] to the first position [eg, the second in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. By moving to the third position [for example, the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)] via the check point CP2 etc., the start to the end of the certain period is shown. ,
The period display is a display for notifying the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first position display [for example, display indicating the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)]”. .)
The cursor display moves from the second position to the first position, thereby representing from the start of the certain period to the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
When the cursor display reaches the third position, a display is suggested that suggests whether the symbol variation display is finally displayed in the big hit symbol mode or not. For example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26), at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, Suggesting which results are derived, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display [for example, CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (3)],
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (A3) to (A9), the CUM preparation display MTY is a chance up. Etc. displayed before the meter CMT is displayed]
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (A3) to (A4). In addition, the CUM ready display MTY is displayed before reaching reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), etc.],
The first notice display includes a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon constituting the CUM ready display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3) is red, or a CUM shown in FIG. 238 (A1). In the display mode in which the meter portion constituting the in-preparation display MTY is red, the display mode in which the Sabohan character SBH constituting the CUM in-progress display MTY shown in FIG. 238 (B1) is red, and FIG. 238 (C1) The display of the CUM preparation display MTY to be displayed may be displayed in a display mode or the like in which the cursor is the princess character HME].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display form, the jackpot symbol form is finally more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second position is a start position of the certain period [for example, a start point SP or the like in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)],
The period display is a display including a display [for example, a display showing the start point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)] for notifying the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the certain period is a certain effect display of the reach effect display [for example, display of duel scene animation in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26), etc.]”. Is the period of time
The second position is a position indicating the display start timing of the certain effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The cursor position is changed from the second position to the third position via the first position and the fourth position [for example, the position indicated by the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. Represents the period from the start to the end of the period,
The first position and the fourth position are different positions;
The period display is a display for notifying the fourth position (hereinafter referred to as “fourth position display [for example, a display indicating the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)]”. .)
When the cursor display moves from the second position to the fourth position, the second timing from the start of the certain period [for example, the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. Until the timing indicated by the third checkpoint CP3 at which is started]
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may start during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
“The period display is a second chance up display [for example,“ UP ”display above the third check point CP3, red marking at the third check point CP3, etc., as shown in FIG. 29 (19)]. Is a display that may be displayed,
The second chance up display is a display notifying that the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing,
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, the second chance up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth position [for example, FIG. ) To (19), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 and the lever image 136Va is displayed, “UP” is displayed above the third check point CP3. And the third checkpoint CP3 is marked in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the second chance up display is displayed, the second chance up display is continuously displayed until the display of the period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (25)). Thus, until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the second chance-up display is a display in which the display mode of the fourth position display is changed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (17) to (19), the SBHani character SBH When the third check point CP3 is reached and the lever image 136Va is displayed, the third check point CP3 is marked in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second chance up display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (19b). Thus, when the SBHani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 and the lever image 136Va is not displayed, the marking at the third check point CP3 and the display of the characters “UP” are not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, if the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the fourth position display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 242 (A15) to (A17). Thus, when the marker MTKa reaches the third check point CP3a and the lever image 136Va is not displayed, the mark of the third check point CP3a is deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, even if the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the fourth position display is not erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (19b). Thus, even if the savory character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 and the lever image 136Va is not displayed, the display of the third check point CP3 is not erased, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, a display indicating that the second effect display has not been displayed is displayed [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani , When the lever image 136Va is not displayed after reaching the third check point CP3, a display of “x” is displayed above the third check point CP3],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
“The period display is a first chance up display [for example,“ UP ”display above the second check point CP2, red marking at the second check point CP2, etc., as shown in FIG. 29 (15)]” Is a display that may be displayed,
The first chance up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the first chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position [for example, FIG. 29 (8 ) To (15), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in the button effect, “UP” is displayed above the second check point CP2. Is displayed and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the first chance up display is displayed, the first chance up display is continuously displayed until the display of the period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (25)). Thus, until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the display of “UP” above the second check point CP2 is continuously displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the first chance up display is a display in which the display mode of the first position display is changed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (15), a savohani character SBH When the second check point CP2 is reached and the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in the button effect, the second check point CP2 is marked in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first chance up display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 230A11 to A17). As described above, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed in the button effect, the marking at the second check point CP2 and the display of the characters “UP” are also performed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first position display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 242A9 to A14). Thus, when the marker MTKa reaches the second check point CP2a and the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed in the button effect, the mark of the second check point CP2a is deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, even when the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first position display is not erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (A11) to (A17). Thus, even if the savory character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed in the button effect, the display of the second check point CP2 is not erased, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “when the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, a display indicating that the first effect display is not displayed is displayed [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani Reaches the second check point CP2, and when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed in the button effect, a display of “X” is displayed above the second check point CP2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Production button (chance button)
137u Up key 137d Down key 137l Left key 137r Right key 208 Decorative design display device 208L First decorative design display device 208M Second decorative design display device 208N Third decorative design display device 208M ′ Fourth display means 208
212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Gaming board lamp 542 Gaming table frame lamp 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd pattern pd4 4th pattern pd5 5th pattern UI Reservation frame HIS Hold icon display area bIl Left base icon hs1 to hs4 First stage to fourth stage h1 h4, h11 to h14, h21 to h24 Hold icon CIS Fluctuation icon display area hs0 Pedestal h0, c Fluctuation icon YM Navi character I1 Treasure box icon DIS Production icon display area bIr Right base icon MW White meter display MR Red meter display UpI White Meter rise item UpIb Blue meter rise item UpIm Green meter rise item UpIr Red meter rise item UpIg Gold meter rise item MI Menu icon VI Volume adjustment icon B Brightness adjustment icon VW Volume adjustment window BW Brightness adjustment window VB Volume display bar display TI Competitor icon AI Mini game A icon YI Notice icon YH Notice display IHI "Bomber" icon, "Red Bomber" icon, etc. Icon change notice display RBI red bomber icon BTI bullet icon EF1-EF17 effect image AS appearance area SS stock area

Claims (24)

A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of time to reach effect display is being performed,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display represents from the start to the end of the certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position,
The period display is a display including a display for notifying the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first position display”),
The cursor display moves from the second position to the first position, thereby representing from the start of the certain period to the first timing,
Wherein the first timing, in a display of the reach demonstration display, Ru der that timing the display of the first effect display is likely to be initiated,
Gaming table, wherein a call. The game stand according to claim 1,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
  When the cursor display reaches the third position, a display suggesting whether the symbol variation display is finally displayed in the big hit symbol mode or the final symbol mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
  One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display,
  The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
  The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
  The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
  The first notice display is a display that may be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
  The first notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
  The first notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second display mode,
  The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
  In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display form, the jackpot symbol form is finally more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
  The second position is a start position of the certain period,
  The period display is a display including a display for notifying the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
  The certain period is a period during which a certain effect display of the reach effect display is displayed,
  The second position is a position indicating the display start timing of the certain effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
  One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
  The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
  The cursor display represents from the start to the end of the certain period by moving from the second position to the third position through the first position and the fourth position,
  The first position and the fourth position are different positions;
  The period display is a display including a display for informing the fourth position (hereinafter referred to as “fourth position display”),
  The cursor display represents from the start of the certain period to the second timing by moving from the second position to the fourth position,
  The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may start during the display of the reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 9,
  The period display is a display in which a second chance up display may be displayed.
  The second chance up display is a display notifying that the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing,
  When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, the second chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the fourth position.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10,
  When the second chance up display is displayed, the second chance up display is continuously displayed until the display of the period ends.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10 or 11,
  The second chance up display is a display in which the display mode of the fourth position display is changed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 10 to 12,
  If the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second chance up display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 9 to 13,
  If the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the fourth position display is erased,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 9 to 13,
  Even when the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the fourth position display is not erased.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 9 to 15,
  When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, a display indicating that the second effect display is not displayed is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
  The period display is a display in which a first chance up display may be displayed,
  The first chance up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing,
  When display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the first chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to claim 17,
  In the case where the first chance up display is displayed, the first chance up display is continuously displayed until the display of the period ends.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 17 or 18,
The first chance up display is a display in which the display mode of the first position display is changed.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 17 to 19,
  If the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first chance up display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. 21. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
  If the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first position display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that. 21. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
  Even when the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first position display is not erased.
A game stand characterized by that. 23. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 22,
  When the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, a display indicating that the first effect display is not displayed is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. 24. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 23,
  The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.